Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

TrimbleRealWorks 11.0 User Guide PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 1747

User's Guide

Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0

Printed on 25 June, 2018


Contents

Welcome 13

What's New in Trimble RealWorks 17

Installing Trimble RealWorks 35


System Requirements..................................................................................................................... 37
Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................................................. 37
Trimble Scan Explorer ........................................................................................................ 38
Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer ................................................................................. 38
Check the Graphics Card in Use .................................................................................................... 39
Enforce the Use of the High Performance Graphics Card.................................................. 40
Check the Version Number of the OpenGL Library ............................................................ 44
Check the Open Source Libraries and Licenses in Use ................................................................. 45
Download Trimble RealWorks ........................................................................................................ 46
Download Trimble Update Network License Utility ......................................................................... 47
Licensed Features .......................................................................................................................... 48
Install Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................................................... 49
Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables ........................................................................................ 50
Storage Tank Application ................................................................................................... 51
Update Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................................................. 52
Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................ 53
License Files ................................................................................................................................... 55
Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files ..................................................................................... 55
HASP License Files ............................................................................................................ 58
Export an Event Log File................................................................................................................. 67
Contact Trimble............................................................................................................................... 68

Getting Started with RealWorks 69


Start Trimble RealWorks ................................................................................................................. 71
Open your First Project ................................................................................................................... 72
Get Familiar with the Working Environment.................................................................................... 73
User Interface ..................................................................................................................... 74
ii Contents

Start Page........................................................................................................................... 76
Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................ 77
Toolbars.............................................................................................................................. 77
Ribbon ................................................................................................................................ 77
Windows ............................................................................................................................. 78
Tools and Commands ........................................................................................................ 93
Customize the User Interface ........................................................................................... 110
Customize the Quick Access Toolbar............................................................................... 115
Set the Unit of Measurement for Length ....................................................................................... 120
Set the Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 121
Viewer Preferences .......................................................................................................... 122
HD Display Preferences ................................................................................................... 123
Tools Preferences ............................................................................................................ 123
Navigation Preferences .................................................................................................... 125
General Preferences ........................................................................................................ 126
Units Preferences ............................................................................................................. 127
Print Preference................................................................................................................ 128
Improvement Program Preferences ................................................................................. 128
Close Trimble RealWorks ............................................................................................................. 130

Performing Basic Operations 131


Supported Data Formats............................................................................................................... 133
Trimble 3D Scanning Files ............................................................................................... 133
RealWorks Files ............................................................................................................... 134
TZF Files .......................................................................................................................... 137
TZS Files .......................................................................................................................... 142
Trimble Survey Project Files............................................................................................. 144
JobXML, JOB and RAW Files .......................................................................................... 151
ASCII Files........................................................................................................................ 159
Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files ..................................................................................... 162
Surveying Network ASCII Files ........................................................................................ 167
SIMA ASCII Files .............................................................................................................. 170
AutoCAD Files .................................................................................................................. 171
IXF Files ........................................................................................................................... 173
RIEGL Scan Project Files ................................................................................................. 174
Z+F Scan Files ................................................................................................................. 176
LAS and LAZ Files............................................................................................................ 179
E57 Files........................................................................................................................... 180
PTX Files .......................................................................................................................... 184
PTS Files .......................................................................................................................... 185
DotProduct Files ............................................................................................................... 185
Autodesk FilmBox Files .................................................................................................... 186
Contents iii

TDX Files .......................................................................................................................... 186


Open a Project File ....................................................................................................................... 187
Import a Project File ...................................................................................................................... 189
Connect to a Mobile Device .......................................................................................................... 190
Import FLS Files............................................................................................................................ 192
Import an Image into a Project ...................................................................................................... 195
Open Trimble Scan Explorer......................................................................................................... 196
Open Trimble SketchUp................................................................................................................ 197
Open AutoCAD ............................................................................................................................. 199
Send to AutoCAD.......................................................................................................................... 200
Save Projects ................................................................................................................................ 201
Save a Project .................................................................................................................. 201
Save a Project As ............................................................................................................. 201
Undo an Operation........................................................................................................................ 202
Redo an Operation........................................................................................................................ 203
Close Projects ............................................................................................................................... 204
Close the Selected Project ............................................................................................... 204
Close all Projects .............................................................................................................. 204

Organization of Data 205


Project Tree .................................................................................................................................. 207
Scans Tree.................................................................................................................................... 208
Models Tree .................................................................................................................................. 209
Targets Tree ................................................................................................................................. 211
Images Tree .................................................................................................................................. 212
Project Cloud ................................................................................................................................ 213
Project Cloud Layer .......................................................................................................... 214
Get all Points .................................................................................................................... 215
Get the Remaining Points................................................................................................. 215
Active Group ................................................................................................................................. 216
Groups and Objects ...................................................................................................................... 217
In the WorkSpace Window ............................................................................................... 217
In the List Window ............................................................................................................ 217
Model Groups ............................................................................................................................... 221
Set a Group as a Model Group......................................................................................... 221
Set a Model Group as a Non Model Group ...................................................................... 221
Duplicate a Model Group .................................................................................................. 222
Displace a Model Group ................................................................................................... 223
iv Contents

Editing Data 225


Drag and Drop an Item ................................................................................................................. 227
Cut and Paste an Item .................................................................................................................. 228
Copy and Paste an Item ............................................................................................................... 230
Delete an Item............................................................................................................................... 232
Create a New Group Node ........................................................................................................... 233
Change a Name ............................................................................................................................ 234
Project ........................................................................................................................................... 235
Shift a Project ................................................................................................................... 236
Flip the Vertical Axis of a Project ...................................................................................... 236
Merge Several Projects in One......................................................................................... 237
Create an UCS ................................................................................................................. 248
Set as Home UCS ............................................................................................................ 266
TZF Scan ...................................................................................................................................... 267
Color TZF Scans .............................................................................................................. 268
Post-Process TZF Scans.................................................................................................. 268
Create Thumbnails ........................................................................................................... 269
Create Station Images from TZF Scan Color ................................................................... 271
Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project ....................................................................... 272
Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan Files ......................................................................... 273
Color Points by Height ...................................................................................................... 275
Re-Project TZF Scans ...................................................................................................... 276
Remove Points from TZF Scans ...................................................................................... 277
Convert to TZF Files ......................................................................................................... 281
Scan .............................................................................................................................................. 291
Limit Box Extraction .......................................................................................................... 291
Create Sampled Scans..................................................................................................... 310
Equalize Point Cloud Luminance...................................................................................... 314
Equalize Point Cloud Color............................................................................................... 315
Color Points Using Station Images ................................................................................... 316
Point Cloud ................................................................................................................................... 319
Segment Point Clouds ...................................................................................................... 319
Sample Point Clouds ........................................................................................................ 331
Auto-Classify Outdoor Point Clouds ................................................................................. 355
Auto-Classify Indoor Point Clouds .................................................................................... 358
Merge Several Point Clouds into One .............................................................................. 361
Change the Color of a Point Cloud ................................................................................... 362
Geometry ...................................................................................................................................... 363
Delete a Geometry ........................................................................................................... 363
Convert a Geometry to a Mesh ........................................................................................ 364
Change the Color of a Geometry...................................................................................... 365
Contents v

Change a Color of an Object ........................................................................................................ 367


From the Property Window ............................................................................................... 368
From the Tab .................................................................................................................... 370
Customize a Series of Colors ........................................................................................... 372
Merge Coplanar Polylines ............................................................................................................. 372
Equalize Image Color.................................................................................................................... 375

Exploring Data 377


Expand and Shrink the Project Tree ............................................................................................. 379
Locate an Item in the Project ........................................................................................................ 380
Find Items in the Project ............................................................................................................... 381
Explore in the 3D View.................................................................................................................. 383
Explore in the Images Tree ........................................................................................................... 384
Visualize Data ............................................................................................................................... 385
Point Cloud ....................................................................................................................... 385
Geometry .......................................................................................................................... 388
Hide all Items .................................................................................................................... 389
View Only This.................................................................................................................. 390
Image................................................................................................................................ 390
Station .............................................................................................................................. 394
TZF Scan .......................................................................................................................... 404
Inspection Map ................................................................................................................. 408
ColorBar ........................................................................................................................... 410
Display and Hide the Alignment Stationing from a Curve................................................. 422
Render Data.................................................................................................................................. 423
Render Point Clouds ........................................................................................................ 424
Define a Setting for Cloud Renderings ............................................................................. 429
Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color ............................................. 434
Choose the Point Cloud Shading ..................................................................................... 436
Choose the Point Cloud Visibility...................................................................................... 437
Display the Discontinuity of Points ................................................................................... 442
Change the Size of Displayed Points ............................................................................... 442
Render Geometries .......................................................................................................... 443
Apply a Smooth Rendering to Meshes ............................................................................. 446
Add a Lighting Direction ................................................................................................... 447
Adaptive Point Size .......................................................................................................... 448
Filter Data ..................................................................................................................................... 450
Launch the Limit Box Mode .............................................................................................. 451
Define the Center Point of a Limit Box ............................................................................. 452
Edit the Properties of the Limit Box .................................................................................. 452
Record Limit Boxes .......................................................................................................... 462
Managing Limit Boxes ...................................................................................................... 463
vi Contents

Navigate Data ............................................................................................................................... 466


Customize the Settings for a Mouse................................................................................. 466
Set the Head Always Up Option ....................................................................................... 468
Set a Navigation Mode ..................................................................................................... 469
Set a Projection Mode ...................................................................................................... 498
Magnifier Mode - Clip and Zoom to Explore an Area of Interest ...................................... 500
Align Data to a View...................................................................................................................... 502
Align to a Global View ...................................................................................................... 502
Align to a Local View ........................................................................................................ 505
Zoom on Data ............................................................................................................................... 506
Zoom In / Zoom Out ......................................................................................................... 506
Zoom Extents ................................................................................................................... 507
Zoom on Selection............................................................................................................ 508
Center on Point................................................................................................................. 508

Selecting and Picking Data 509


Select Data ................................................................................................................................... 511
WorkSpace Window ......................................................................................................... 511
3D View Window .............................................................................................................. 513
Clear a Selection .............................................................................................................. 515
Pick Data....................................................................................................................................... 516
Pick in the Standard Mode ............................................................................................... 516
Pick the Highest Cloud Point ............................................................................................ 521
Pick the Lowest Cloud Point ............................................................................................. 523
Face of Curb Point and Gutter Point Pickings .................................................................. 525

Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points 533


Load Data ..................................................................................................................................... 535
Process Data ................................................................................................................................ 536
Display Points in HD ..................................................................................................................... 538
HD Display Mode Inside a Tool ........................................................................................ 539
HD Display Mode Outside a Tool ..................................................................................... 540

Working with Classification Layers 541


Manage Layers ............................................................................................................................. 543
Create a New Layer.......................................................................................................... 544
Delete an Existing Layer................................................................................................... 545
Edit a Layer ...................................................................................................................... 545
Enable the Advanced View Mode..................................................................................... 547
Contents vii

Select the Contents of a Specific Layer............................................................................ 548


Display or Hide all Objects by Layer ............................................................................................. 549
Display all Clouds of a Layer ............................................................................................ 549
Hide all Clouds of a Layer ................................................................................................ 550
Display all Geometries of a Layer..................................................................................... 550
Hide all Geometries of a Layer ......................................................................................... 550
Hide Others ...................................................................................................................... 551
Modify the Layer of an Object ....................................................................................................... 552
Modify from the Models Tree ............................................................................................ 552
Modify from the Property Window .................................................................................... 553
Modify from the Selection List Window............................................................................. 554

Basic Tools 555


Measure Distances ....................................................................................................................... 557
Open the Tool ................................................................................................................... 558
Measure a Distance.......................................................................................................... 559
Angular Measurements .................................................................................................... 574
Point Measurement .......................................................................................................... 581
Orientation Measurements ............................................................................................... 581
Refine a Measurement ..................................................................................................... 586
Save a Measurement ....................................................................................................... 587
Generate Key Plans ...................................................................................................................... 588
Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans .............................................................................. 591
Generate a Key Plan from the Current View .................................................................... 592

Tools in the Registration Module 593


Scan-Based Registration Group ................................................................................................ 595
Auto-Register Using Planes ............................................................................................. 595
Cloud-Based Registration................................................................................................. 604
Refine Registration Using Scans ...................................................................................... 624
Orientation ........................................................................................................................ 633
Create a Registration Report (Scan-Based) ..................................................................... 643
Target-Based Registration Group ................................................................................................. 645
Auto-Extract Targets......................................................................................................... 645
Target-Based Registration................................................................................................ 652
Target Analyzer ................................................................................................................ 675
Georeferencing ................................................................................................................. 707
Modify Target.................................................................................................................... 717
Create a Registration Report (Target-Based)................................................................... 723
Survey Workflow Group ................................................................................................................ 725
Station Setup .................................................................................................................... 725
viii Contents

Network Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 753


Name-Based Network Adjustment ................................................................................ 754
Instrument Leveling ....................................................................................................... 756
Create Points ................................................................................................................. 766
Transformations Group .............................................................................................................. 773
Import Station Registration Parameters from TZF Files ................................................ 774
Export Station Registration Parameters to TZF Files .................................................... 775
Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files................................................... 776
Register Stations With Imported RMX Files .................................................................. 777
Quality Assurance Group ........................................................................................................... 778
Registration Visual Check ............................................................................................. 779

Tools in the Production Module 797


Work with Line Tools.................................................................................................................. 799
2D-EasyLine .................................................................................................................. 800
Draw a Polyline.............................................................................................................. 815
Create a Catenary Curve............................................................................................... 840
EasyProfile .................................................................................................................... 843
Profile Matcher .............................................................................................................. 850
Create Feature Sets ...................................................................................................... 860
Edit a Feature Code Library .......................................................................................... 869
Cutting Plane ................................................................................................................. 872
Create a Terrain Contour Map....................................................................................... 886
Create a Profile and Cross-Sections ............................................................................. 898
Manipulate the Label of a Section ................................................................................. 918
Tools in the Surfaces Module .................................................................................................... 919
Fitting ............................................................................................................................. 919
Create Meshes .............................................................................................................. 925
Edit Meshes ................................................................................................................... 932
Create a Merged Mesh .................................................................................................. 947
Manipulate a Mesh ........................................................................................................ 947
Calculate a Volume ....................................................................................................... 951
Inspect Data ............................................................................................................................... 969
Alignment Stationing...................................................................................................... 970
Inspect Twin Surfaces ................................................................................................... 976
Inspect a Surface and a Model ...................................................................................... 995
Analyze an Inspection Map ......................................................................................... 1015
Print Inspection Maps .................................................................................................. 1065
Inspect the Flatness of a Floor .................................................................................... 1065
Floor Flatness/Floor Levelness ................................................................................... 1078
Create a 3D Inspection Cloud ..................................................................................... 1085
Analyze a 3D Inspection Cloud ................................................................................... 1088
Contents ix

2D-Polyline Inspection ................................................................................................. 1093


Work with Images .................................................................................................................... 1099
Create Ortho-Images ................................................................................................... 1100
Create Connected Ortho-Images ................................................................................ 1119
Create Rectified Images .............................................................................................. 1132
Convert to an Ortho-Image .......................................................................................... 1153
Move an Ortho-Image.................................................................................................. 1155
Image Matching ........................................................................................................... 1163
Go to a Shooting Position ............................................................................................ 1180
Model Shapes .......................................................................................................................... 1181
Cloud-Based Modeler .................................................................................................. 1181
Geometry Creator ........................................................................................................ 1225
Sub-Tools .................................................................................................................... 1276
Modify a Geometry ...................................................................................................... 1311
Plane Bounding ........................................................................................................... 1380
Intersect ....................................................................................................................... 1397
Duplicate...................................................................................................................... 1414
Tools in the Plant Module ........................................................................................................ 1431
EasyPipe ..................................................................................................................... 1432
Export Pipe Center Lines............................................................................................. 1445
Change a Pipe Diameter ............................................................................................. 1449
Manage SteelWorks Catalogs ..................................................................................... 1450
SteelWorks Creator ..................................................................................................... 1452
Create a Ladder........................................................................................................... 1460
Create a Ladder Cage ................................................................................................. 1474
Create Railings ............................................................................................................ 1483
Create Stairs................................................................................................................ 1499
Tools in the Storage Tank Module ........................................................................................... 1506
Calibrate a Vertical Tank ............................................................................................. 1506
Calibrate a Horizontal Tank ......................................................................................... 1517
Check the Calibration of a Tank .................................................................................. 1524
Tank Setup .................................................................................................................. 1529
Perform a Tank-Specific Measurement ....................................................................... 1535
Inspect a Vertical Tank ................................................................................................ 1541
Tank Secondary Containment ..................................................................................... 1581
Locate Tables .............................................................................................................. 1585
Send an Entity to SketchUp ..................................................................................................... 1586

Producing Media Files 1589


Create a Video ......................................................................................................................... 1591
Open the Tool .............................................................................................................. 1591
Select a Navigation Path Mode ................................................................................... 1592
Browse Keyframes ...................................................................................................... 1613
x Contents

Define Video Parameters ............................................................................................ 1614


Create a Video............................................................................................................. 1618
Capture the Screen in High Quality Mode ............................................................................... 1620
Capture the Screen in Quick Processing Mode ....................................................................... 1621

Exporting Data 1623


Export a Selection as a File ..................................................................................................... 1625
Google Earth (KMZ) Format ........................................................................................ 1626
BSF Format ................................................................................................................. 1630
PDMS Macro Format ................................................................................................... 1630
E57 Format .................................................................................................................. 1631
LAS Format ................................................................................................................. 1631
LAZ format ................................................................................................................... 1634
AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk Revit MEP)............................................................. 1635
Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format ................................................................................... 1636
MicroStation (DGN) Format ......................................................................................... 1637
Pointools Format ......................................................................................................... 1638
PTS Format ................................................................................................................. 1638
AutoCAD (DXF) Format............................................................................................... 1639
ASCII Format ............................................................................................................... 1640
LandXML Format ......................................................................................................... 1641
Autodesk FilmBoX (BX) Format .................................................................................. 1642
TDX Format ................................................................................................................. 1644
AutoDesk RCP format ................................................................................................. 1644
Solids for AutoCAD...................................................................................................... 1646
Export with Advanced Features ............................................................................................... 1652
Export Object Properties ............................................................................................. 1652
Export Images ............................................................................................................. 1653
Export Ortho-Images ................................................................................................... 1654
Export Measurements ................................................................................................. 1655
Export Feature Sets..................................................................................................... 1657
Export TZF Images ...................................................................................................... 1658
Convert to BSF Format File ......................................................................................... 1660
Convert to Gridded E57/PTX/PTS Format File............................................................ 1668
Export Inspection Maps and Slices ............................................................................. 1672
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1688
Launch the Import Scans and Register Feature .......................................................... 1688
Select Scan Data Files ................................................................................................ 1688
Set Point Cloud Extraction Options ............................................................................. 1692
Set Scan Data Registration Options ............................................................................ 1693
Execute the Batch Process ......................................................................................... 1695
Contents xi

Collaborating and Sharing Data 1697


Publish a Project ...................................................................................................................... 1698
Define the Layout of a Publication ........................................................................................... 1699
Title .............................................................................................................................. 1699
Logo............................................................................................................................. 1700
Output Folder............................................................................................................... 1700
Background Color ........................................................................................................ 1701
Font Color .................................................................................................................... 1701
Include Media in a Publication ................................................................................................. 1702
Add a Media File.......................................................................................................... 1702
Add Another Media File ............................................................................................... 1703
Remove a Media File................................................................................................... 1703
Add Links in a Publication ........................................................................................................ 1704
Add a Link.................................................................................................................... 1704
Add Another Link ......................................................................................................... 1705
Remove a Link............................................................................................................. 1705
Reduce the Size of the Data .................................................................................................... 1706
Enable Data Extraction ............................................................................................................ 1707
View the Published Data .......................................................................................................... 1707
Bin Folder .................................................................................................................... 1707
Data Folder .................................................................................................................. 1708
View a Published Project ................................................................................... 1709

License Agreements 1711

Legal Notices 1717

Index 1719
13

Welcome

The RealWorks family of products is composed of RealWorks Viewer,


RealWorks Base, RealWorks Forensics, RealWorks Advanced, RealWorks
Advanced-Modeler, RealWorks Advanced-Plant and RealWorks Advanced-
Tank.

RealWorks Viewer

This is a software tool for visualizing and exploring as-built data acquired by
laser scanning technologies. In general, such a data set contains a 3D point
cloud and optionally a collection of 2D images. This software tool allows you to
load as many point clouds as needed. Each point of a point cloud can contain
not only its 3D coordinates, but also other attributes such as intensity and
surface normal. You can visualize a point cloud in 3D, rotate, pan or zoom
in/out in order to explore it in detail. Visualization can be enhanced in different
ways: points shaded by intensity, by color or by its normal, according to a view,
etc. You can also compare a 3D point cloud with 2D images (if available).
When images are registered with the 3D point cloud, you can visualize both
data sets from the point of view from which the images were captured.

Features also available in RealWorks Viewer are:

 Registration report and station visualization,


 Sampling tool,
 Segmentation tool,
 UCS Creation tool and set as Home Frame,
 Measure tool,
 Cutting Plane tool,

Tip: RealWorks Viewer is free. You can download it from the Trimble website.
You only need to fill the form that will come after clicking the link to download.

Note: You cannot save with RealWorks Viewer.

Note: RealWorks Viewer requires an RWP project file and its associated RWP
folder. For more options relating to collaborating and sharing, see the Publisher
function in certain modules.
14 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

RealWorks

This software tool provides you with a set of tools for processing 3D point
clouds and 2D images in order to obtain the necessary information for your
applications (or projects). Generally, this processing can be divided into three
modes: Registration, OfficeSurvey™ and Modeling.

 In Registration, you can register scans with respect to other scans and/or
with respect to a set of survey points. The registration method is either
target-based or cloud-based. When some targets have been used, you
can first check and modify them. Then the Target-Based Registration Tool
automatically registers them simultaneously. The results are validated
through registration errors, which can be saved in a report. You can also
use the Geo-Referencing Tool to put the scanned data into a known
coordinate system.

 In OfficeSurvey™, you can extract different types of 2D drawings


(polylines, contours, cross-sections, profiles, etc.) from the point clouds.
These extracted results can then be exported into CAD systems including,
but not limited to, AutoCAD® and MicroStation®. You can select and
match 2D images to the point clouds; generate one (or multi) ortho-
image(s) or collect survey points as Total Stations can do. You can
generate triangular meshes from the point clouds and if required, carry out
further editing of the result(s). You can determine the volume of a point
cloud (or a mesh), the volume between two point clouds (or two meshes)
or the volume between a point cloud and a mesh. If the volume
information is not enough, you can compare two surfaces between each
other (two point clouds or meshes together, a point cloud with a mesh or a
point cloud/mesh with a model) and generate an inspection map. Since
the metric information is still in the inspection map, you can extract
measurements like surfaces, volumes, points, drawings like polylines,
sections, shifts, colored meshes, iso-curves, etc. You can match a profile
(2D curve, cross-section, polyline, etc.) at a specific point and in a given
direction in a 3D scene; easily extract profiles along curbs, pavements, rail
lines, cuttings, natural features, etc. or fit a set of points with a geometry
which can be of planar, spherical or cylinder shape.

 In Modeling, you can create a geometry of following types: Sphere, Plane,


Cylinder, etc. The creation can be based on a point cloud selection (or
not). The created geometry can be then duplicated, modified, moved, etc.
A sub-module including tools for modeling pipes and structural steelworks
(with the notion of catalogs) has been added.
Welcome 15

All RealWorks products can support a huge amount of points. The user is able
to precisely control which points are loaded into memory and thus which are
available for editing with all the regular tools. All RealWorks products include
tools for managing Trimble FX data; importing TZS scans, automatically
creating station(s) on import with link to TZS; creating scans, extracting targets,
registering the created stations, creating sampled scans with spatial resolution,
converting to Trimble LASERGen format.

The user interface has been completely redesigned to incorporate a ribbon


with larger icons and a Quick Access Toolbar. In this layout configuration, The
Office Survey and Modeling modes have been combined into a new Production
mode.
17

What's New in Trimble RealWorks

This chapter lists all the new features, and the improvements that are in each
version of RealWorks.
18 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In RealWorks 11.0

 Automation:
o Import & Register tool: Import, extract and register in one step
o Improved performance of extraction from TZF scans
o Optimization for high-end multi-core processors, e.g., AMD
Ryzen
o Auto-classify Indoor: Improved wall detection
 User Interface:
o New layout: Simpler WorkSpace
o New layout: Tools
o Window auto-hide and lock
o Toolbars now more visible
 Visualization and Navigation:
o New Enhanced Ambient Shading mode for point clouds
o Adaptive point size
o Limit Box: Standard Views
o View Only This
o Support of GeForce 1080 graphics card
 Registration:
o Target-Based Registration: Improved target auto-matching
o Target-Based Registration: Auto-match leveled stations with
only two targets
o Target-Based Registration: Auto-match traverse network
o Target-Based Registration: Improved auto-matching in case of
equidistant targets
o Topo points from station positions
 Drawing:
o Smart picking for roadmarks
o Surface area property for closed planar polylines and planes
o Merge coplanar polylines
o Polyline Drawing: Custom drawing color
 Modeling:
o Plant features now available with Advanced Modeler license
o Move mesh using manipulators
o Connect cylinders with cylinders and reducers
o Geometry snap in the Geometry Modifier
o View geometries with contours
 User Interaction:
o Segmentation: Save the project while the tool is active
o Segmentation: Changes while the tool is active
o View-Based 2D Measurement in the Production mode
o Group naming
o Shortcut to delete geometries
 General Enhancements:
o Unit for residual errors
o Scan Explorer point extraction: Auto-save option
o TZF Scan conversion to gridded E57/PTX/PTS: Low disk
warning
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 19

 Storage Tank:
o Tank Inspection: Reference diameter and circumference in
roundness plots
o Tank Calibration: More visible reference line

In RealWorks 10.4.1

 The computation of ortho-images is now computed with all available points


on disk instead of on points in RAM.
 Change of methods when inspecting the roundness and the vertically of a
vertical tank.
 Touchscreen navigation: Common gestures have been implemented like
pan using two fingers, rotate using two fingers, etc.
 Floor flatness FF/FL analysis tool
 Tank Inspection vertically improvement
 Tank Inspection roundness improvement
 JOB/JXL import scale factor improvement
 Etc.

In RealWorks 10.3.2

 The import of the CMF format file is not supported anymore.


 Ability to load and edit a limit box previously stored in a project, or create
new ones when using Trimble RealWorks Viewer.
 Trimble RealWorks can directly send point clouds to Autodesk AutoCAD®
2018.
 The Start Page contains a link to some recent videos.

In RealWorks 10.3.1

 The current Auto-Classify Clouds feature has been renamed to Auto-


Classify Outdoor, with a new class dedicated to the Electric Lines.
 New auto-classify tool dedicated to indoor datasets.
 There is no need to save the project anymore to be able to launch Trimble
Scan Explorer from RealWorks.
 The user can publish a project without any compression.
 The user can open AutoCAD through RealWorks and export a point cloud
to AutoCAD.
 New algorithm when computing a mesh with the No Projection method.
 New rendering for meshes
 Magnifier mode: An efficient way to visually inspect details in point clouds.
 Smart pickings for curb and gutter
 Improve screen capture in high resolution
 Improve the video creator tool by adding the high quality mode
 Etc.
20 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In RealWorks 10.2.2

 Export point clouds to the Recap format.

In RealWorks 10.2

 Ability to open a JXL format file coming from a Trimble SX10 instrument
which includes the following features:
 View the images taken from the different types of camera (Overview,
Primary and Telescope) in the Station-Based mode,
 Organize the taken images by stations, camera types, in specific
folders,
 Colorize scans of a station with all images of a specific camera type,
 Equalize all images of a station of a specific camera type,
 Texture meshes,
 Rectify images.
 Export/Import of TDX format files:
 The user can perform multi-point distance measurements.
 The user can perform a distance measurement on screen.
 Enhancement of the Cloud-Based Registration tool. The Registration
Visual Check feature is embedded with the tool.
 Ability is offer to customize the Quick Access Toolbar, export the resulting
settings from a version of RealWorks and import them into another
version.
 New tool: The Alignment Stationing feature lets the user define the
stations positions along a given polyline.
 A stations alignment once done can be used in the Surface-to-Model
Inspection and Twin Surface Inspection tools.
 Export an event log file.
 Rotate the inspection map in case of vertical cylinder.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 21

In RealWorks 10.1

 The Find feature has been extended. In addition of being able to find an
item by Name, with a complete or partial name, you can now find by Type.
 Ability to create Ortho-Images from imported ones.
 Ability to modify the orientation and position of an Ortho-Image.
 Add the elevation-based rendering to the "Cloud Rendering Settings"
window.
 Ability to pick the origin of an elevation-based rendering
 Inspection Map: ability to shift the naming of created/exported sections.
 In case of a tunnel, the user has the ability to use the interval either in the
3D along the path or in the horizontal plane along the project path.
 Feature Set: Ability to manage a feature code library out of the Feature
Set tool.
 Registration Check: This feature offers a way to exchange information
between teams to quickly and visually check the result of a registration.
 Enhancement of the Limit Box feature by letting the user to record and
exchange a limit box.
 Close Project: You can select a project and choose Close from the pop-up
menu.
 Merge Clouds: You can select some clouds and choose Merge Clouds
from the pop-up menu.
 The Create In feature has been removed from the Segmentation tool.
 Model Group as a new group
 Ability to perform an arc measurement and its complementary on the shell
of a tank.
 Ability to export an arc measurement.
22 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In RealWorks 10.0

 Render clouds per layer.


 Render geometries per layer.
 Layer management: Enables to create, delete, and edit a layer.
 Edit Layer: Enables to change the layer of an object or set of objects.
 Enhancement of the Segmentation Tool: ability to assign layers to
segmented point clouds.
 Auto-Classify Clouds: use of algorithms to automatically classify points
into three classes: Ground, Building and Pole-Like-Objects.
 Export point clouds containing classification information in LAS 1.2, or LAS
1.4, or LAZ 1.2 format.
 Import and process point clouds containing classification information from
LAS 1.2 and LAS 1.4 format files.
 The projection position of an instrument station can now be selected for
matching purpose with other targets.
 Export registration results from the Registration Details dialog via a button.
 Clipping Box becomes Limit Box.
 "Tool" term removes in the user interface and in the Help.

In RealWorks 9.1.2

 Vertical Tank Inspection Tool:


 The numbering and orientation conventions for Stations are now
defined within the tool instead of in the report.
 A new bottom reference line has been added in the report.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 23

In RealWorks 9.1.1

 A new palette with a larger choice of colors is implemented. This new


palette is available from the Change Cloud Color and Change Geometry
Color features in the 3D View toolbar, from the Edit option in the ColorBar
dialog and from an entity color in the Properties window.
 Ability to perform a multi-selection directly in the 3D view, with a lasso, a
rectangle or a polygon.
 Ability to keep or to not keep the display state (clouds and geometries)
once entering in a partition tool, like e.g. the Segmentation Tool.
 Ability to use a 3D mouse for navigating in the 3D View.
 Ability to export a geometry and/or a mesh to a FBX format file.
 Ability to import a FBX format file into RealWorks.
 A main axis direction property is added to a Box.
 In the Geometry Modifier Tool, it is possible to change the direction of the
main axis of a Box.
 In the Intersect Tool:
 Box intersection is now always done along the box main axis.
 Box/Plane intersection can bevel the box edges.
 Box/Box intersection is implemented.
 In the Geometry Creator Tool, you are able to create an Extrusion with
holes
 The Eradicate Points from TZF feature.
 Frame Create Tool: Ability to build a frame from a geometry by using its
intrinsic shape and the point the user picked on it.
 In the Cloud-Based Registration Tool, you are able to register two stations
or two groups of stations together by only picking 2 pairs of points.
 Box Clipping Mode has been added. This enables to separate the
visualization mode from the extraction mode in the Clipping Box Extraction
Tool.
 Box Selection feature added in the Segmentation Tool to define the
working cloud.
 Orientation Tool: Ability to define the vertical orientation of a scene, in an
automatic or manual manner.
 In the Geometry Modifier Tool, the user can render the position of a
manipulator visible in the 3D View in case it is not by picking a position.
 The user has the ability to focus on a target he selected from the 3D View
and from the Target List of the Georeferencing Tool.
 When you create an inspection map using clouds, and when there are
some holes located inside the dataset, i.e., an area without data that is
completely surrounded by data, you have the choice of filling the holes or
not.
 A Key Plan has its own attributes which are the Elevation Max and
Elevation Min. By this way the user is able to filter each Key Plan
individually.
 The user can switch from one manipulator mode to another by clicking on
a manipulator, when moving a geometry or when he is in the clipping
mode box.
24 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 He is also able to resize the size of the clipping box.


 Ability to flip the vertical of a project.
 Vertical Tank Calibration Tool: The user is able to define the dipping plate
by fitting a set of points with a plane.
 The user has the ability to create a tank object in the database.
 Vertical Tank Inspection Tool: The user can define a grid to inspect the
floor settlement.
 The user can export toward SketchUp:
 An ortho-image resulting from the use of the Ortho-Projection Tool,
 An ortho-image that belongs to a Key Plan,
 A Key Plan itself.
 The user is able to extract the ground information from indoor or outdoor
scans.
 The user is able to inspect the flatness of the ground, after extracting it.
 In Cloud-Based Registration Tool:
 The 3D View is split into three sub-views. The proportion of the sub-
views, in terms of size, adapts to the actions that the user is about
to perform.
 You are able to register two stations or two groups of stations
together by only picking 1 pair of points.
 PTS format file:
 Import supported for ether single scan file or multi-scan file.
 Export clouds into the PTS format.
 The user has the ability to inspect the flatness of a floor and export the
result.
 Etc.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 25

In RealWorks 9.0

 The Close button is removed from the WorkSpace window and in the List
Window.
 Measurement Tool: Add a new way to measure an orientation by picking
three points.
 Add to ability to change the diameter of pipe(s).
 Station Markers
 TSIP program added in Preferences.
 Information about the graphic card in use in the About dialog.
 Information about the OpenGL version number in the About dialog.
 The extraction feature is removed from the Clipping Box Extraction Tool
when the tool is as a sub-tool.
 Export TZF Scans as JPG Images with color and/or intensity layer(s).
 The Start Page appears in place of the 3D View. It comes up after you
launch the software. From this page, you can have access to different
useful links.
 The extraction of corners ability is added to the Target Analyze Tool.
 Warns about warranty expiration or close to expiration.
 Automatic rotation center mode
 Ability to pick the highest (or lowest) point on a region around the position
of the mouse.
 Ability to manually enter a value when rotating a geometry in the
Geometry Modifier Tool.
 Ability to change the center of the manipulator in the Cloud-Based
Registration Tool.
 Ability to change the width of all polylines.
 Ability to compute power line from scan data.
 Ability to draw a freehand selection.
 Add a POSITIVE/NEGATIVE colorization mode in the inspection map.
 Add reverse button to change the increment direction in inspection map
analyzer.
 Change slices name definition to take into account the distance to the first
slice.
 Export sections in Autocad (DWG/DXF)
 Automatic or manual inversion of axes in a difference plot when inspecting
a map resulting from a cylindrical projection.
 Color Coded by Elevation
 Adaptive sampling (spatial sampling (keep details))
 Brighter luminance
 Add the ability to assign the buttons of a mouse for navigating or
manipulating objects in the 3D View.
 In the Mesh Editing Tool, the user can create matched images from
colored TZF Scans and use them for texturing purposes.
 Import of RSP project files from Riegl's RiSCAM PROTM
 Import of Z+F scan files (with.zfs extension).
 Ability to refine the registration of stations based on its point clouds
instead of TZF Scans.
26 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Adapt the refine method based on TZF Scans or on point clouds)


according to the selection of stations.
 In case of a refinement based on point clouds, a report will be generated
like for the TZF method.
 In the Examiner mode, the user is able to do a full turn (180°) with a
mouse move that is still on the 3D View.
 In the Examiner mode, zoom in and zoom out are on what the user is
focused one.
 Ability to calibrate and check a horizontal storage tank.
 Ability to export entities, of geometry type, created within RealWorks
toward SketchUp Pro.
 Catenary Drawing Tool
 Ability to apply filters to ZFS format files.
 Ability to inspection a vertical tank to check for deformations.
 The HD Display is a new rendering motor in which is implemented a
camera-based dynamic display loading. It enables to display more points
than what the user loads.
 Preferences to allocate the VRAM and RAM sizes for displaying point
clouds in HD
 PD format file from DotProduct
 EasyPipe Tool: the way the first cylinder will be extracted changed. Two
point pickings are required instead of one.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 27

In RealWorks 8.1.1

New Tools:

 RealWorks does support RWP format files bigger than 4 GB.


 Version of Faro Scene Import (SDK) included in the installer of RealWorks
8.1.0 is updated to 5.2.5.36203.
 RealWorks does import the LAS and LAZ format files, from version 1.0 to
1.4.
 RealWorks does export to a LAS/LAZ format file, in version 1.2.
 RealWorks does export to a POD format file, a Bentley format file for point
cloud.
 Import of E57 format file with gridded and non-gridded data.
 Luminance blending added to all uniform color modes.
 The Clipping Box Extraction Tool allows you to visually control on a
specific area the result of a registration.
 New option to recompute the registration report once TZF Scans are
registered together.
 RealColor, a new solution for easily and efficiently colorizing TZF Scans.

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 In the Scan-Based Sampling, the Ctrl + A key combination has been


added to select all items at once. In addition to this shortcut, a set of sub-
tools has been added to manager selection '(or multi-selection).
 In the Scan-Based Sampling, only stations and scans of the selected
cloud are displayed (in the dialog), instead of all from the project.
 In the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less), you are able to select
interconnected stations from different groups for registration purpose.
 New shortcut keys added for navigation and cloud rendering/hiding
purposes.
 In the Video Creator tool, all Microsoft codecs (Microsoft RLE, Microsoft
YUV and Microsoft Video 1) are removed from the RealWorks 8.1 release.
28 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In RealWorks 8.0.3

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 The Import FLS Files feature is not available in RealWorks Viewer.


 The colors information is preserved when converting a colored TZF Scan
to a PTX format file.
 A Fls scan, acquired with the dual-axis compensator On (compensated), is
converted as a leveled TZF Scan.
 The Extended range density is a new level of scan which comes with an
upgrade of the Trimble TX8 instrument. This level enables to acquire 3D
data from 120 meters to 340 meters.
 When you open several TZF Scans directly in RealWorks, in a multi-scan
situation, the priority to set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan depends first on its
Type (a Full Scan has a higher priority than an Area Scan) and then on its
Density (Level 3 has the higher priority and Extended the lower).

In RealWorks 8.0.2

New Tools:

 Post-Processing TZF Scan(s): Data in the TZF Scan(s) must be post-


processed to enhance the contrast, improve the luminance and correct the
noise effect issue. If needed, the TZF format file(s) can be compressed in
order to reduce its size.
 Re-Project TZF Scans.
 Stations can contain more than on TZF Scans,
 When merging projects with TZF Scan files within, you can choose
between copying TZF Scan files into the RWI folder of the merged project
and keeping the link to the original TZF Scan files.
 Ability to copy original TZF scan files into the project folder (RWI).
 230 millimeter diameter for fitting sphere by constraints has been added.
 Direct import of FLS scan files from SD cards, including color.
 Version of Faro Scene Import (SDK) included in the installer of RealWorks
8.0.2 is updated to 5.1.6.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 29

In RealWorks 8.0.1

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 A station can now contain several TZF scans within, with one set as Main
Scan.
 The ten last opened files are listed at the bottom of the File menu. As a
shortcut, each of them can open by selecting it from this menu.
 Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans: The feature is now called Generate
Default Key Plan (Top View). The option used to compute the Key Plan is
not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud Rendering option
chosen within RealWorks.
 Target-Based Registration Tool:
 Targets matched together and target groups are renamed. Instead
of keeping their default name or TargetX (when they are extracted)
and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX. XXX
starts at 001 and is incremented by one.
 Stations that are not selected as the input of the Target Based
Registration Tool are now removed from the Registration Details
dialog.
 Target Analyzer Tool:
 The Re-fit and Fit buttons are replaced by an icon.
 The Flat Target icon has been changed in the Fitting Tool.
 RealWorks no longer needs to disable the Aero function in Windows.
 Graphics Card: 1GB, or higher 3D Open GL 3.2
 Sub-Project Manager and Partial Loading Manager are both removed from
RealWorks 8.0 as the notion of Sub-Project and Partial Loading Manager
do not exist anymore. A Point Loading Manager system has been added.
 TZF Scans can be exported to E57 format as regular grid data sets.
 PTX format file with several scans in the same station: A TZF Scan is
created for each scan in the same station in the RealWorks project.
 Features removed from RealWorks 8.0:
 Erase Points from the Edit menu,
 Reduce Number of Points When Moving from the Preferences/Viewer
dialog.
 Project files saved in a version older than 5.0 are not supported
anymore.
 The file formats listed below are removed from the Open dialog:
 PPF Trimble proprietary PointScape project file format,
 DCP Trimble proprietary PocketScape project file format,
 SOI Trimble proprietary format for scanned files.
 RealWorks Plant as licensing module removed

New Tools:

 Auto Register using Planes (Target Less)


 Refine Registration Using TZF Scans
 Publish projects.
30 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Rename targets that are matched manually together.


 Import (or export) Station Registration Parameters from (or to) TZF files.

In RealWorks 7.2.2

 Compatible with Windows 8


 In RealWorks Viewer, the items below have been removed:
 Export Selection and Advanced Export features,
 Save and Save As features,
 TZF Scans features,
 Import features.

In RealWorks 7.2.1

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 In the Auto-Extract and Register feature, the user can choose and set a
station as Reference Station.
 In the Target-Based Registration Tool, targets are matched automatically.
The By-hand method has been removed.
 Scan/Target Creator Tool: Polygonal Selection by adding (or subtracting,
or intersecting) has been removed, TZF scans can be open directly from
the Scan Target Creator Tool, and the load percentage for scans is now
20 million points.
 The Scan/Target Creator Tool has been removed from 7.2
 The Complete Station By Adding New Scans feature has been removed.
 When opening a TZS format file, the conversion to the TZF format is now
obligatory. Declining the conversion will close the current open project.
 Import of Riegl file format (3dd) has been removed.
 TZF scans cannot be open in a 2D Viewer.
 Discontinuity Display rendering removed from the 3D View toolbar.
 The Export as Point Cloud for AutoCAD (PTC) feature has been removed
from 7.2.

New Tools:

 Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans,


 Generate Key Plan from Displayed Cloud.
 Extract Active Sub-Project.
 Able to open Trimble TX5 files (with fls or IQscan extensions).
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 31

In RealWorks 7.1

New Features in Existing Tools:

 RealWorks supports now a new type of file called Trimble Scan File which
gathers two kinds of formats: TZS and TZF.
 Filtering by zone is enabled when creating sampled scans from TZF/TZS
scans or when converting from TZF/TZS scan files to BSF.

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 Conversion of proprietary scanner data files: TZS, FLS, iQscan and PTX
to TZF.
 New naming convention for ortho-images when splitting them into several
pieces.
 In the Fitting Tool, the user can now fit a set of points with a Vertical
Cylinder or a Horizontal Plane.

New Tools:

 Storage Tank Tool,


 Storage Tank Check Tool.
32 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In RealWorks 7.0

New Features in Existing Tools:

 In the Segmentation Tool, the user can now draw a Circular Selection.
 In the Frame Creation Tool, the user can set an axial entity's axis as X (or
Y or Y) Axis of the frame to create.
 In the Measurement Tool, some additional measurement methods have
been added.
 In the Scan/Target Creator Tool, the user can create a Point Target by
picking a point from a loaded TZS format file.
 The user can use the Find Best Extrusion facility in the 3D Plane Tool to fit
a plane in order to calculate an Extrusion in the Cloud Based Modeler Tool
or 2D Section in SteelWorks Tool
 Etc.

Enhancement of Existing Tools:

 In the 3D Inspection Analyzer Tool, a histogram has been added to the


From and To sliders.
 The Open Wizard for ASCII Files options change when importing an ASCII
format file into a current open project.
 In the Geometry Creator Tool, the user can apply two new constraints to a
Segment: Pick Two Planes and Pick Axial Geometry.
 In the Geometry Creator Tool, the user can apply a new constraint to a 3D
Point: Pick Two Axial Entities.
 Etc.

New Tools:

 The user can display the 3D position and the name of each station in the
3D View.
 And if required, display the Network Visual(s) of a single (or all stations).
 The user can color the point cloud using station-based images.
 A new licensing system has been implemented: HASP
 The user can open a Trimble TSPX format file, a common project format
file between RealWorks and Trimble Business Center.
 Etc.

In RealWorks 6.5.3

New Tools:

 The user can now convert TZS formats files to PTX (or PTS) format files.
What's New in Trimble RealWorks 33

In RealWorks 6.5.1

New Features in Existing Tools:

 In the SteelWorks Creator Tool, the user can now edit point cloud(s)
thanks to a Point Cloud Manager.
 In the Scan/Target Creator Tool, the Spherical Target extraction is not
limited to spheres for which the radius is equal to 38.10 mm.
 In the Measurement Tool, three new types of measurements have been
added. The user can now measure a distance in a horizontal plane, along
a vertical axis or a clearance distance.
 The user is able to configure the mouse buttons for Zoom In or Zoom Out.
 The user is able to open or drag and drop TZS format files within
RealWorks.
 In the Export Inspection Vertical Slices (or Horizontal Slices) feature, the
user can choose the unit of measurement to represent values.

New Tools:

 The Center Line Tool.


 Import of Trimble CMF format files.
 Rendering cloud issued from TZS format files according to the height of
points along the Z (or Elevation) axis.
 Automatic extraction of Spherical and Black and White Flat Targets and
register the stations they issued from.
 The user can create a plane containing the vertical axis by picking two 3D
points.
 He (or she) can also make vertical an axial geometry or horizontal a plane
with two new tools in the Geometry Modifier Tool.
 Etc.
CHAPTER 1

Installing Trimble RealWorks

In this chapter, the user will find the information about the system
requirements, program installation, activation and how to contact Trimble.
37

System Requirements
Hereafter are detailed the requirements that are required for running Trimble
RealWorks, Trimble Scan Explorer and Trimble Web Viewer.

Trimble RealWorks
To run Trimble RealWorks, the system requirements are as shown.

 Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® Seven® (64-bit OS) Service


Pack 1, 8 (64-bit OS), 8.1 and 10.
 Processor: 2GHz or higher
 RAM: minimum 16 - 32 GB recommended
 Graphics card: 1GB, or higher 3D OpenGL 3.2
 Mouse: Three buttons with wheel
 SSD drive recommended
 Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5.2
 SketchUp 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017 from Trimble

Note: Always update graphics card drivers before using Trimble 3D Spatial
Imaging office software.

Note: Trimble 3D Spatial Imaging office software is designed to provide


superior data processing and editing performance. To ensure the best possible
software use experience, and an optimum productivity/cost-of-equipment ratio,
Trimble highly recommends that users acquire the most powerful hardware
configuration available at the time of purchase of the computer equipment on
which the software is intended to be used.
38 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Trimble Scan Explorer


Here are the minimum and recommended hardware requirements for Trimble
Scan Explorer.

 Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® Seven® 64-bit Service Pack 1,


8 (64-bit OS), 8.1 and 10.
 Processor: 2GHz or higher
 RAM: minimum 8 GB - Recommended 16 GB
 Graphics card: 1GB, or higher 3D Open GL
 Mouse: Three buttons with wheel
 Web Browser: Internet Explorer 8.0 or later
 Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5.2
 SketchUp 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017 from Trimble

Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer


Here are the minimum and recommended hardware requirements for Trimble
Scan Explorer - Web Viewer.

 Operating System: Microsoft® Windows® Seven® 64-bit Service Pack 1,


8 (64-bit OS), 8.1 and 10.
 Processor: 2GHz or higher
 RAM: minimum 8 GB - Recommended 16 GB
 Graphics card: 1GB, or higher 3D Open GL
 Mouse: Three buttons with wheel
 Web Browser: Internet Explorer 8.0 or later (64 bits)
 Microsoft .Net Framework 4.5.2
 Microsoft Visual C++, Redistributable - X86: 2010, 2012 and 2013
Installing Trimble RealWorks 39

Check the Graphics Card in Use


You are able to know how many graphics cards there are in your computer and
which one is in use with the software by selecting About from the Help
menu, or by clicking About from the File tab or Support tab.
40 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Enforce the Use of the High Performance Graphics Card


If your computer has two graphics cards: an integrated graphics card with low
performance and a dedicated graphics card with a high performance
processor. Please enforce the use of the high performance processor graphics
card with your software.

Note: The given procedure is based a NVIDIA graphics card, please refer to
the documentation that comes with your graphics card because the procedure
may vary from one manufacturer to another.

To Enforce the Use of the High Performance Graphics Card:

1. Right-click on your Desktop.


2. Choose NVIDIA Control Panel from the pop-up menu.
3. With the NVIDIA Control Panel open, choose Manage 3D Settings from
the Select a Task panel.

4. From the Manage 3D Settings panel, first click on the Global Settings tab.
5. From the Preferred Graphics Processor drop-down list, choose High
Performance NVIDIA processor.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 41

6. Click on the Program Settings tab.


7. Click on the Select a program to customize pull-down arrow.
8. Choose Trimblerealworks.exe from the list.
42 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

9. If required, click on the "Select the preferred graphics processor for this
program" pull-down arrow.
10. Again, choose "High Preform NVIDIA Processor" from the list.
11. In the "Specify the settings for this program" panel, select "Prefer
Maximum Performance" from the "Power Management Mode" line.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 43

12. Click Apply.

Note: If "Trimblerealworks.exe" is not in the list, you can add it manually by


clicking on the "Add" button.
44 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Version Number of the OpenGL Library


You are able to check if your graphics card is compliant (or not) with OpenGL
3.2 by selecting About from the Help menu. If your graphics card is not
compliant, please, update your graphics card's driver to get the latest version
of OpenGL. Otherwise an error message appears.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 45

Check the Open Source Libraries and


Licenses in Use
Your software program uses open source libraries and therefore must comply
with their respective licenses. In order to comply with the licenses, your
software program must display various copyrights and licenses. All can be
found while installing the program software in the License Agreement window
or in the About dialog once the software is installed.
46 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Download Trimble RealWorks


You need to download from the Trimble 3D Laser Scanning
http://www.trimble.com/3d-laser-
scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.

To Download Trimble RealWorks:

1. In the Product Resources panel, click on Support/Downloads.


2. With the Technical Support window open, click on Downloads.

1. With the Downloads panel expanded, click on the Download Trimble


RealWorks 11.0 link.
2. Once the download completed, click .
Installing Trimble RealWorks 47

Download Trimble Update Network License


Utility
You need to install the Trimble Update Network License Utility to be able to
configure a HARP® network key with a multi-user license. The utility can be
downloaded from the Trimble 3D Laser Scanning
http://www.trimble.com/3d-laser-
scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.

To Download Trimble Update Network License Utility:

1. In the Product Resources panel, click on Support/Downloads.


2. With the Technical Support window open, click on Downloads.

1. With the Downloads panel expanded, click on the Update Network License
Utility link.
2. Once the download completed, click .
48 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Licensed Features
The main tools and functionalities included in the Trimble RealWorks software
and their inclusion in the available Editions are detailed in the Trimble
RealWorks support notes, which can be downloaded from the Trimble 3D
Laser Scanning http://www.trimble.com/3d-laser-
scanning/realworks.aspx?dtID=overview& website.

To Download Trimble RealWorks Support Notes:

1. In the Product Resources panel, click on Support/Downloads.


2. With the Technical Support window open, click on Downloads.

3. Click on the Trimble RealWorks Software Support Notes link.


4. Download the support notes related to the version of your software.
5. Once the download completed, click .
Installing Trimble RealWorks 49

Install Trimble RealWorks


This section explains how to install RealWorks on a standalone computer.
Before you install RealWorks; close all Windows programs, and ensure that
your computer has sufficient operating system requirements and memory
capabilities (for more information, see the System Requirements section).
Make sure that you have local or domain administration rights.

To Install Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows.


2. Download the Trimble RealWorks 11.0 package from the Trimble website.
3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard.
4. At the Welcome to Trimble RealWorks 11.0 Setup dialog, press Next. The
System Information and Current Program Version dialog appears. System
information and the current program version are listed.
5. Click Next. The License Agreement dialog appears.
6. Read carefully the terms of the license agreement.
7. If you do not accept the terms, check the "I do not accept the terms of the
license agreement" option and the install procedure will close.
8. If you accept all the terms, check the "I accept the terms of the license
agreement" option and click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog
opens.
9. In the Choose Destination Location dialog, choose Next to accept the
default install directory C:\Program Files\Trimble\Trimble RealWorks 11.0.
10. If you wish to install in a different directory, choose the Change button.
After you have chosen the install directory, press Next. The Setup Type
dialog appears.
11. In the Setup Type dialog, choose the type of Setup you prefer. Complete
will install the program with all features. Custom will require you to choose
the options to install. By default, Complete is selected. You have choice
between two license types per software product: Trimble OG&C's license
file or HASP license file.

 If you have a HASP license file, keep the Complete option and click Next.
The Select Program Folder dialog appears.
 If you have a Trimble OG&C's license file, choose the Custom option and
click Next. The Select Features dialog opens.

a) Keep the Application Files, Program DLLs and Help Files


options checked.
b) Check the Trimble OC&C License option.
c) Click Next. The Select Program Folder dialog appears.
50 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

12. You should select a program folder inside which Setup will add program
icons. You can keep the given program folder, type a new one in the
Program Folder field or select an existing one from the Existing Folders
field.
13. Press Next. The Ready to Install the Program dialog appears.
14. Press Install. The Setup Status dialog opens and files are installed. The
Setup Type dialog appears.
15. Select the type(s) of file you wish Trimble RealWorks to take in charge.
Four types are available: NEU and ASC are an ASCII format file
extension, JXL is an extension of text files exported from Trimble Survey
Controller™, Survey Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software. TZS is an
extension of files from Trimble's LASERGen. TSPX is a Trimble Survey
Project file.
16. Click Next. The InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog appears. You have
successfully installed RealWorks on your computer.
17. Click Finish to complete the installation*.

Note: (*) Sometimes, you may need to restart your computer.

Caution: Please exit Trimble RealWorks if there is already a version of


RealWorks installed on your computer and if a session is open. This avoids the
Setup of a new version of RealWorks to interfere with the current version.

Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables


Trimble RealWorks includes some catalog files. These files are automatically
installed during the installation of the software when you choose Complete as
Setup Type. If you do not want them, you need to first choose Custom as
Setup Type, and then un-check the RealWorks Plant Tables option in the
Select Features page.

Note: These catalog files are necessary in the case you want to model point
clouds with constraints in tools like the SteelWorks Creator.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 51

Storage Tank Application


The Storage Tank Application is an option which is automatically installed
when choosing Complete as Setup Type. If you do not want this option, you
need to first choose Custom as Setup Type, and then un-check the Storage
Tank Application option in the Select Features page.

Note: The table files, installed during the installation of RealWorks, can be
reached from a direct link in the user interface. Refer to the Locate Tables (on
page 1585) section.
52 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Update Trimble RealWorks


This section explains how to update RealWorks on a standalone computer.
The update only applies when you move from one version (of RealWorks) to
the higher.

To Update Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows.


2. Download the Trimble RealWorks 11.0 from the Trimble website.
3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard.
4. If the Setup program does not start automatically, run it from the Start
menu as described in the previous section.
5. At the Welcome to RealWorks 11.0 Setup dialog, press Next.
6. The System Information dialog appears and system information and the
current program version are listed. Press Next. The Ready to Install the
Program dialog opens.
7. Click Install. The Setup Status dialog appears.
8. Once the update done, you are prompted to either view the Help file or to
launch RealWorks by checking the option.
9. Click Finish.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 53

Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble


RealWorks
This section explains how to modify, repair and remove Trimble RealWorks
from a standalone computer. Modification, repair and removal (of Trimble
RealWorks) apply only when you want to make a change of an option in an
existing installation, or simply to uninstall Trimble RealWorks.

To Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble RealWorks:

1. Turn on your computer and start Microsoft Windows.


2. Download the Trimble RealWorks 11.0 from the Trimble website.
3. Double-click on the package icon to launch the install Wizard.
4. If the Setup program does not start automatically, run it from the Start
menu as described in the previous section.
5. At the Welcome to RealWorks 11.0 Setup dialog, press Next.
6. The System Information dialog appears and system information and the
current program version are listed. Press Next. The Modify, Repair or
Remove the Program dialog opens.
7. Choose any of the following options:

 Select Modify and click Next. You can add new components in your
program or select currently installed components to remove.
 Select Repair and click Next. All program components installed in the
previous setup will be re-installed.
 Select Remove and click Next. All installed program components will be
removed.

8. If Modify has been selected, the Select Features dialog appears.

a) Un-check the components to clear and click Next.


b) Or check the components to install and click Next.
c) Click Finish to end the maintenance.

9. If Remove has been selected, the Confirm Uninstall dialog appears; click
Finish to end the uninstall procedure.

Tip: You can also use the Add/Remove tool via your Windows® control panel.

Note: Updating, when carried out frequently, may generate residual files on
your hard disk. To minimize such eventualities, we recommend that you
completely remove Trimble RealWorks from your hard disk and perform a new
installation procedure.
54 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Installing Trimble RealWorks 55

License Files
There are at least two license types the user can use with RealWorks: OG&C
and HASP.

Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files


A Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas and Chemical license file can be of two types: a
local license or a server license. Before being able to use Trimble RealWorks
11.0 with such a license file, first choose Custom in the Setup Type dialog and
then check the Trimble OGC&C License option when installing the software.
Once done, register the software.

Caution: You are not able to use the Advanced Tank version of RealWorks
with an OGC license. To use this version (of RealWorks), you must change
your OGC license to a HASP license.
56 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Register Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas & Chemical License File


To Register Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas & Chemical License File:

1. Open Trimble RealWorks 11.0. The following error message RealWorks


license check: no license found" or "License not Valid. Check the license
key or server" appears.
2. Close the message by clicking OK. The Trimble Power, Process and Plant
- Client License Configuration Tool dialog appears with the Configuration
tab open by-default.
3. Click on the Create Registration tab to open it.

4. Complete the form by entering the necessary information.


5. Click Email to send the completed form.
6. If required, click Save to save the completed form as a backup.
7. Click on the Close button. The Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client
License Configuration Tool dialog closes.

Tip: The IP Address of your computer is displayed in the System Information


tab.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 57

Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and Chemical License File


To Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and Chemical License File:

1. Click Start and then select Trimble PPP License from your desktop. The
Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client License Configuration Tool
dialog appears with the Configuration tab opens by-default.

 If you have a network license, do as described below:

a) Un-check the Use Local License option. The Local License File
field and the Browse button both become dimmed. The Server
Hostname field is enabled.
b) Enter a server name in the Server Hostname field.
c) If required, click Ping in the Server Diagnostics dialog to
diagnose the server.

 If you have a local license, do as described below:

a) Keep the Use Local License option checked.


b) Click Browse. The Open dialog opens with the "license files
(*.lic)" set as default in the Files of Type field.
c) Navigate to the drive/folder to locate the license file.
d) Click on the license file to select it. Its name appears in the File
Name field.
e) Click Open. The license file name appears as well as its path in
the Local License File field.

2. In the Trimble Power, Process and Plant - Client License Configuration


Tool dialog, click Save.
3. Click Close.
58 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Swap a Local License for a Network License and Vice Versa


To Swap a Local License for a Network License and Vice Versa:

1. Open Trimble RealWorks 11.0.


2. From the Help menu, select License. The Trimble Power, Process and
Plant - Client License Configuration Tool dialog opens.

Or

3. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The Trimble Power,
Process and Plant - Client License Configuration Tool dialog opens.
4. Do as described in the "Enter a Trimble Power, Process and Plant License
File" topic.
5. Click Save and Close.

HASP License Files


A HASP license file can be either a single-user license file or a network license
file installed on your organization's network. To be able to use a HASP license
file, you need to check the Complete option in the Setup Type dialog when
installing the software.

Note: The License Manager allows you to view and manage the licensing
information.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 59

Locate a HASP License File


To Locate a HASP License File:

1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.

Or

2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager
dialog opens.

3. Click on the Search Type pull down arrow.


4. Choose one of the following items.

 Automatic: This is the default search option. This allows searching for a
license by first checking whether a HASP hardware key is connected to a
USB port on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a "Detachable
License" is installed on your computer. If not found, it checks whether a
multi-user license is available on a HASP network key. Optionally, you can
specify a network server in the License Server drop-down list; otherwise,
all network servers are searched.
 Local Hardware: This option allows searching for a license installed on a
HASP hardware key connected to a USB port on your computer.
 Local Software: This option allows searching for a "Detachable License"
when using a multi-user license installed on your computer.
60 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Local Automatic: This option enables to search for a license by first


checking whether a HASP hardware key is connected to a USB port on
your computer. If not found, it checks whether a checked-out instance of a
multi-user license is installed on your computer.
 Network: This option enables to search for a multi-user license on a HASP
network key installed on the server specified in the License Server drop-
down list. If the correct server is not already included in the list, select the
Search Network option from the License Server drop down list to locate it.

5. Click the OK button. The License Manager dialog closes.

Use a Single-User License


A Single-User License is a HASP hardware key the user has to plug into a
USB port of his computer.

Upgrade a Single-User License


You can update your current license if you need to add more features or
extend your warranty period.

To Upgrade a Single-User License:

1. Connect your HASP hardware USB key into a USB port of your computer.
2. Ensure that no other HASP hardware USB keys are connected and
RealWorks is running.
3. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.

Or

4. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
5. Check that the key ID displayed in the Features list matches the key ID for
this upgrade.
6. Click the Upgrade button. The Upgrade License dialog opens.
7. Enter the 19-digit code.
8. Click the Upgrade button. The Upgrade License dialog closes.

Note: You need to have an Internet connection on your computer. It is required


to check your key ID.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 61

Use a Multi-User License


A Multi-User License is a HASP network license key. Generally speaking, it is
a 19-digit code the user gets when buying such license.

Detach a Multi-User License


To be able to use a HASP network license key, the user needs to be
connected to his organization network. But if required, he can detach it from
the network and attach it to his machine for a limited period of time allowing by
this way the software running without a network connection.

Check for a License Checkout Support


You need to check if your HASP network key (multi-user license) is installed on
your network and is configured to support a license checkout.

To Check for a License Checkout Support:

1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.

Or

2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. In the Features panel, you may check:

 The feature(s) licensed by your key ID,


 For each feature, the ability to be checked-out (or not).

Undetachable license Detachable license

4. Click the Ok button. The License Manager dialog closes.


62 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Configure a Computer to Allow License Checkout


To Configure a Computer to Allow License Checkout:

1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.

Or

2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. In the License Manager dialog, click the HASP Admin Control Center link
located in the lower-left corner of the dialog. The Sentinel Admin Control
Center page is displayed in a browser window.
4. In the Options panel, select Configuration. The Configuration for Sentinel
License Manager on "Computer_Name" appears.
5. Select the Detachable Licenses tab.
6. Check the Enable Detaching of Licenses option.

7. Click the Submit button.


Installing Trimble RealWorks 63

Check-out a Multi-User License


To Check-out a Multi-User License:

1. In RealWorks, select License from the Help menu. The License Manager
dialog opens.

Or

2. From the Support tab, click the License icon. The License Manager dialog
opens.
3. Click the Check Out button. The Check Out License dialog opens.
4. Enter the number of days.
5. Or first, click on the Expiration pull down arrow.
6. And then, select an expiration date from the calendar.
7. Click the OK button. The Check Out License dialog closes.

8. Click the Ok button. The License Manager dialog closes.

Note: The Check Out option must be selected on the host machine from which
the license will be detached.
64 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Update a Multi-User License


To Update a Multi-User License:

1. Click the Start button on the taskbar and then All Programs / Trimble /
Trimble RealWorks 11.0 / Network License Update. The Update Network
License dialog opens.

Or

2. Click on the Network License Update icon on your desktop. The Update
Network License dialog opens.

3. Enter the 19-digit code.


4. Click the Update button.

Note:
 You should download the Trimble Update Network License Utility from the
Trimble 3D Laser Scanning website and install it on your computer.
 You need to have an Internet connection to proceed to the update.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 65

Check for the Warranty Expiration Date


The software you bought comes with a warranty. The terms of the warranty are
in the License Agreement which can be found when you install the software.
The date of expiration of the warranty is displayed in the License Manager
dialog as shown below.

RealWorks notifies the user when the license file is close to expiration date or
when the license file is expired.

The License File is Close to the Expiration Date


When the Warranty Expiration date is close to the specified date, a warning
message, with the number of days before the Warranty Expiration day, is
displayed on the bottom left corner of your computer as shown below.

Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By
this way, you can update your license.
66 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The License File is Expired


When you start the software with a license file for which the date of warranty
exceeds the specified date, an expiration message is then displayed on the
bottom left corner of your computer as shown below. And

Tip: Click on the Trimble icon. This opens the License Manager dialog. By
this way, you can update your license.
Installing Trimble RealWorks 67

Export an Event Log File


You can export an event log file from RealWorks for two reasons. First, in case
RealWorks crashed, the log file can help for the support team to troubleshoot
your problems. Second, when there is no crash, the log file can be helpful to
understand some behaviors of the software.

To Export an Event Log File:

1. From the Help menu, select Export Logs .


2. Or from the Support tab, click the Export Logs icon. The Export dialog
opens, with a default name:
LogExport_"Version_Of_RealWorks"_"Date"_"Time".
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the file.
4. Click Save. The Export dialog closes.
68 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Contact Trimble
For information regarding this (or other) Trimble software product(s), please
visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com.

For contacting Trimble support: please refer to list below.

 For Survey Division: trimble_support@trimble.com


 For Power, Process and Plant Division: ppp_support@trimble.com
CHAPTER 2

Getting Started with RealWorks

This chapter guides you through the steps you will take after installing the
software on your computer, from the startup of the software, through the tour of
the user interface in order to be familiar with it, to the opening of your first
project.
71

Start Trimble RealWorks

From your desktop, double-click the Trimble RealWorks icon to start


the software. At each time you start the software; a message opens and
prompts you to participate to the Trimble Solution Improvement Program
(TSIP). When you click on the Trimble icon to learn more, the Preferences /
Improvement Program dialog opens. The message will disappear from the next
startup (of the software) once you have chosen an option from the
Improvement dialog.

A Start Page also opens. From the Start Page, you can get started working
with the software, access to different links like checking for updates, etc.
72 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open your First Project


With the user interface opened, you can start loading your first project in
RealWorks. There are several manners. You can select Open from the File
menu, click on the Open an Existing Project link in the Start Page, drag and
drop a project file into RealWorks, choose the Open command from the File
tab or from the Quick Access Toolbar on the top of the user interface.

Caution: A warning appears in the case you try to open a project from the link
in the Start Page, with a tool (or feature) that is in use.

Note: Refer to the Performing Basic Operations chapter for more information
about the different file formats that RealWorks can handle.
Getting Started with RealWorks 73

Get Familiar with the Working Environment


Trimble RealWorks includes either three modes (OfficeSurvey, Modeling and
Registration) or two (Production and Registration), depending on the type of
interface chosen by the user. Each mode corresponds to a processing mode.
We are not going to develop here each of them, but note that the working
environment changes according to the one you chose.

In the Menus and Toolbars layout, to switch from e.g. OfficeSurvey to


Registration and vice versa, click on the Configuration pull-down arrow on the
Tools toolbar.

In the Ribbon layout, to switch from Production to Registration and vice versa,
click on the Configuration pull-down arrow on the Quick Access Toolbar.

In some rare situations, you may not be able to change of configuration. This is
because the Configuration option has been unchecked in the Quick Access
Toolbar.
74 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

User Interface
When you start a session of RealWorks session, you can see the main window
with its working sub-window components and the Start Page (not illustrated).
After you open a project, these components will activate so you can start
working with them. You can customize the settings of the different components
inside the main window.

When you start RealWorks for the first time, the Ribbon layout (on page 75) is
set default as well as the Head Always Up option. This last one has the

following representation displayed at bottom right corner of the 3D View.

Menus and Toolbars Layout


A RealWorks session looks like the following example, when the Menus and
Toolbars layout has been chosen:

1 - Menu bar 7 - Property


2 - Toolbars 8 - Selection List (not illustrated)
3 - WorkSpace 9 - Start Page (not illustrated)
4 - 3D View 10 - Station Marker List (not illustrated)
5 - List 11 - Classification Layers (not illustrated)
6 - Status bar (not illustrated) 12 - Limit Box (not illustrated)
Getting Started with RealWorks 75

Ribbon Layout
A session of RealWorks looks like the following example, when the Ribbon
layout has been chosen:

Switch from Menus and Toolbars to Ribbon, and Vice Versa


RealWorks 10.0 introduces the ribbon layout in its interface. When you start
RealWorks 10.0 for the first time, the software opens with the ribbon layout, but
you can still switch back to the classic menus and toolbars interface and vice
versa.

 To switch from Ribbon to Menus and Toolbar, click the Ribbon/Toolbar


icon, in the Settings group, on the File tab
 To switch from Menus and Toolbar to Ribbon, select Ribbon/Toolbar
from the Window menu or click the Ribbon/Toolbar icon on the
Windows toolbar.

Tip: For both situations, use the following combination of keys Ctrl + Alt + F9.
76 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Start Page
The Start Page , included in the software, displays when you start the
software for the first time. This page will appear each time you start the
software again until the option in the Preferences / General dialog remains
checked. This page includes many useful links.

Links in the Start Page


Open an existing project This links opens the Open dialog.
Check for updates This links brings you the Trimble Technical Support page,
from which you can check for new updates.
License Manager (*) This link brings you to the HASP license management
system.
Register Trimble RealWorks (*) This link opens the Trimble RealWorks Product Registration
web page.

Trimble RealWorks Support This link brings you to the Trimble Global Support & Service
web page.
Video demos on YouTube This link brings you to the official channel of RealWorks on
YouTube.

Online Help (F1) This links opens the online help file.
Release Notes This links brings you the Trimble Technical Support page,
from which you can release notes, documentation, etc.
Trimble RealWorks News A panel inside which you can find all new news about
Trimble RealWorks, as well as a link to download the last
version of Trimble RealWorks

Video demos on YouTube This panel gathers recent videos

Note: Links with an asterisk in parenthesis are not available in the Viewer
version of RealWorks.
Getting Started with RealWorks 77

Menu Bar
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, RealWorks provides you with a set of tools
and commands. The menu bar, always open and displayed on the top of the
user interface, contains all available tools and commands that you can use.
This bar is composed of main menus that you have to drop-down in order to
reach the tool (or command) you wish to use. For some tools (or commands),
you may need to go to the sub-menu to reach them.

Some main menus will be automatically added (or deleted) according to the
processing modes you are actively using. Many tools and commands can also
be reached from the toolbars, or the pop-up menus, by tapping on the screen
(when using a touchscreen), and waiting until a square appears then releasing.

Toolbars
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, the RealWorks user interface is composed
of different toolbars. Each of them has specific uses. By default, all toolbars are
not open when you start RealWorks. Those that are opened are displayed
either horizontally under the menu bar or vertically beside the WorkSpace
window. You can move each toolbar to any location within the user interface,
open or close them.

Ribbon
A ribbon is a command bar that organizes RealWorks's features into a series
of tabs, at the top of the user interface. By adopting the ribbon layout, the user
finds a modern way to find, understand and use commands and tools efficiently
in order to perform a task or a series of tasks.
78 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Minimize and Restore the Ribbon


To Minimize the Ribbon:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Check the Minimize the Ribbon option from the drop-down list.

To Restore the Ribbon:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Uncheck the Minimize the Ribbon option from the drop-down list.

Tip: To minimize or restore the Ribbon, press CTRL + F1.

Vertical Toolbar
A toolbar located vertically on the right side of the 3D View, gathers the most
used icons offering by this way a quick access to each of them, and avoiding
the user swapping from tab to tab. This toolbar cannot be either customized
nor undocked from its position.

Windows
RealWorks main window has several components, which are described
hereafter.
Getting Started with RealWorks 79

Start Page
The Start Page disappears after you load a project in RealWorks, but you still
have access to it by selecting Start Page from the Window menu (or from
the Support tab).

Tip: You can use the Ctrl + F4 key combination to close the Start Page.
80 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

WorkSpace
The WorkSpace window (always opened when the user interface appears) is
the one located under the tabs and comprises a set of tabs. This window is
used for organizing data hierarchically in a tree called Project Tree. This main
tree is subdivided into sub-trees called Scans, Targets, Models and Images.
Each of them is used for organizing certain types of data from a loaded project.
To display a sub-tree, click the corresponding tab.

Only one tab can be displayed at any given moment. The Images tab can be
found in OfficeSurvey, Modeling and Registration (or in Production and
Registration). You can move this window to any location within the user
interface, or resize it.

The WorkSpace window in Production The WorkSpace window in Registration

Note: The Cross button has been removed from the top right corner of the
WorkSpace window. You are not able to close the window with this button but
you can still close it through the View tab, in the Windows group.

Caution: When the WorkSpace window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and
F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the WorkSpace window is
selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.

Note: You can change the orientation of the WorkSpace window to display the
inner panels side-by-side horizontally (or vertically), by clicking the Toggle
Side-by-Side / Top-Bottom View icon
Getting Started with RealWorks 81

List
The List window, which was formerly a separate window, is now merged down
with the WorkSpace window as a panel. It is used to display the content of a
selected group of the Project Tree. Each object node shown in this window is
identified by its icon, its name and its other properties. You can display it side-
by-side with the WorkSpace panel horizontally (or vertically), by clicking the
Toggle Side-by-Side / Top-Bottom View icon.

Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the
symbol (Digit Grouping Symbol) used for grouping the digits makes that
number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the
Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows®) and then
selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol. This change will be
memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the
display of the numbers of points in that window.

Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the List window has been
removed in RealWorks 8.0.

Caution: When the WorkSpace window is un-docked, you can use the Alt and
F4 combination to close it. First ensure that the WorkSpace window is
selected, otherwise, you close RealWorks and you lose all of your changes.

The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A column, named Layer, is added in the List window.
You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production).
82 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: You cannot modify the layer of an object from the List window.
Getting Started with RealWorks 83

Property
This window is used to list the properties of a selected object and is divided
into two columns. The left one lists the titles of each property and the right one
shows property values (either fixed or modifiable). The properties in gray are
fixed and those in black are modifiable. Properties are classified by category
such as General, Content, Geometry, etc.

You can shrink each category of properties by hiding its content. To do this,
click on the Shrink button. By default, the Property window is not displayed in
the user interface. You have to open it by using the command from the main
Window menu or from the pop-up menu after selecting an object. You can
move this window to any location in the user interface, or close, reduce and
restore it.

1 - Title column 2 - Attribute column 3 - Modifiable attributes

Note: Because the number of points for a point cloud is often large and the
symbol (Digit Grouping Symbol) used for grouping the digits makes in that
number unreadable; you now can customize this symbol by first opening the
Regional and Language Options in the Control Panel (of Windows®) and then
selecting Customize and Digit Grouping Symbol. This change will be
memorized and used for the next session of RealWorks and will affect the
display of the numbers of points in the Property window.

Tip: You can select and copy any value from the Property window by using the
Ctrl + C keys.

Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Property window has
been removed in RealWorks 8.0.
84 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A line, named Layer, is added in the Property window.
You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production). You are
able to change the layer of an object from this window.
Getting Started with RealWorks 85

Selection List
The Selection List window is used to list the selections done from the Project
Tree* or from the 3D View. By default, the Selection List window is not
displayed within the user interface. You have to open it by selecting Selection
List Window from the Window menu (or from Windows group on the View tab).
You can move this window to any location in the user interface, or close it.

1 - Number of items selected 2 - Clear button

Caution: The notion of Number of Loaded Points in the Selection List window
has been removed since RealWorks 8.0.

Warning: Be aware that when you enter some tools like e.g. the Orientation in
the Registration module, the objects you selected as the input of the tool and
listed in the Selection List window are removed from the window. When you
leave the tool, the selection is lost.

Note: (*) All the selected items do not appear in the List window. There are
some exceptions. Please, refer to the Selection Mechanism (see "Select
Data" on page 511) in the WorkSpace (see "WorkSpace Window" on page
511) window.

The version 9.2 of RealWorks introduces the concept of layers, one per object
node, whatever its type. A column, named Layer, is added in the Selection List
window. You may see it only in OfficeSurvey and Modeling (or in Production).

Note: You cannot modify the layer of an object from the Selection List window.
86 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Station Maker List


The Station Maker List window is used to show the display status of a station
marker in the 3D View. By default, the Station Marker List window is not
displayed within the user interface. You have to open it by selecting Station
Marker List from the 3D View / Rendering menu (or from the Windows group
on the View tab). You can move this window to any location in the user
interface, or close it.

Note: Please, refer to the section related to the Specific Station Marker(s) of a
station (or set of stations).
Getting Started with RealWorks 87

Classification Layers
The Classification Layers window can be used to manage the layers within
your project. You are able to create a new layer, or delete, rename or change
the color of an existing layer as well as the edition its properties. By default, the
Classification Layers window is not displayed within the user interface. You
have to open it by selecting Classification Layers from the Window menu (or
from the Windows group on the View tab). You can move this window to any
location in the user interface, or close it.

Note: The Classification Layers Window is only available in OfficeSurvey and


Modeling (or in Production).
88 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Limit Box List


The Limit Box window can be used to manage the limit box objects that are
created within an open session of RealWorks, or those coming from other
sessions of RealWorks.

By default, the Limit Box window is not displayed within the user interface. You
have to open it by selecting Limit Box from the Window menu (or from the
Windows group on the View tab), or from any tool that handles the limit box
visualization. You can move this window to any location in the user interface,
or close it.

Tip: The Limit Box window can also be open with the Limit Box Extraction
(or Limit Box Mode) toolbar.
Getting Started with RealWorks 89

3D View
The 3D View is always open at the right side of the user interface under the
tabs. You can move, reduce and restore it in the same way as for the other
windows but you cannot close it. This window is mainly used for displaying (or
hiding) the 3D representation of a selection from the Project Tree. An
orthonormal Reference Frame and a Scale are displayed respectively at the
bottom right and bottom left corners of this window. By default, the window
background is gray dark with a gradient effect. You can customize it to suit
your preference.

With a certain type of tools, the 3D View can be split in two or three sub-views.
The top sub-view remains the 3D View, and the other(s) can be a 3D View, or
a 3D View locked in 2D, or a graph. The View Manager at the bottom right
corner of the user interface lets you to organize them as you wish.

1 - 3D View 5 - Size of the 2D grid


2 - Scale 6 - 2D grid
3 - Reference frame 7 - View Manager
4 - 2D View
90 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

View Manager
The View Manager enables to navigate through the different aspects that may
have the 3D View when you use a certain type of tools. It appears as a toolbar
at the bottom right corner of the 3D View and is composed of two sets of icons.

In the sub-view mode (two horizontal sub-views, two vertical sub-views or three
sub-views), the sub-view with a yellow edge is the active sub-view. In the one
view mode, the view in full is always the active view.

Change the Display Configuration of Sub-Views


The first set of icons is detailed in the table below. It enables to change the
configuration to full view, or to two sub-views, or to three sub-views.

This icon Enables


Make Full To expand the selected sub-view to full view.

Split Horizontally To tile two sub-views horizontally

Split Vertically To tile two sub-views vertically

Split 3 Views To tile into three sub-views

Two Sub-View Configuration


In that configuration, only Make Full, Split Horizontally and Split Vertically are
available. When a sub-view has been selected and expanded in full, the
Display Main View and Display Sub-View 1 icons become enabled.

Three Sub-View Configuration


In that configuration, all are available: Make Full, Split Horizontally, Split
Vertically and Split 3 Views are available. When a sub-view has been selected
and expanded in full, the Display Main View, Display Sub-View 1 and Display
Sub-View 2 icons become enabled.
Getting Started with RealWorks 91

Display (or Hide) a Sub-View in Full


The second set is composed of the icons described in the table below. It
enables to hide or to expand in full a sub-view. It also enables to restore the
default layer.

This icon Enables


To display the main 3D View in full
Display Main View
To display the first planar sub-view in full
Display Sub-View 1
To display the second planar sub-view in full.
Display Sub-View 2
To restore the default layout.
Restore Default Layout
To hide the current view.
Hide View

Note:
 The Hide View icon can only be selected from the pop-up menu (or from
the 3D View / Layout menu).
 A sub-view, once expanded in full, cannot be hidden. That's why the Hide
View icon is dimmed.

2D Grid
In the 2D View mode, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the current
sub-view. This grid helps the user to have a metric scale of objects displayed
within the sub-view.

Note: The 2D View mode only appears when using some tools, like e.g. the
Cutting Plane tool, where data (resulting from the use of this category of tools)
needs to be represented in 2D.

Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid


To Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid:

1. You can right-click in the sub-view.


2. Select Hide 2D Grid (if the 2D Grid is displayed) or Show 3D Grid (if the
2D Grid is hidden) from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 Hiding the 2D Grid from the current sub-view will display the scale.
 Whatever the view (3D View or current sub-view) you select, you should
be in Parallel to be able to display the scale.
92 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change a Size
There are seven pre-defined and square sizes: 0.1x0.1, 1x1, 5x5, 10x10,
50x50, 100x100 and 1000x1000. All are expressed in the current unit of
measurement. The current size is displayed at the bottom left corner of the
sub-view.

To Change a Size:

1. You can right-click anywhere in a sub-view.


2. Select 2D Grid from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.
3. Select a pre-fined size.

Customize a Size
You can define a size which be either square (the same resolution in horizontal
and in vertical) or not.

To Customize a Size:

1. Right-click anywhere in a sub-view.


2. Select Customize from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.
3. Select Customize from the sub-menu. The 2D Grid Size dialog opens.
4. Input a distance value in the Horizontal Size field.
5. Input a distance value in the Vertical Size field.
6. Click OK. The 2D Grid Size dialog closes.
Getting Started with RealWorks 93

Navigation Constraint Tools


When you manipulate a scene in the 3D View, you can apply a set of
constraints like e.g. rotating it horizontally. All available constraints are split into
two categories: temporary constraints or permanent constraints. All the
permanent constraints can be reached from the pop-up menu at the bottom
right-corner of the user interface.

We will not discuss in detail these two constraint modes here. For more
information, refer to the Displacement Modes section.

Tools and Commands


Commands are actions which can apply to the selected object(s) or to a whole
set of displayed objects, while tools are a set of actions logically organized
together to fulfill a function of the software.

In the classic Menus and Toolbars layout, all tools and commands can be
found in the menu bar, and most of them can also be found in various toolbars.
In the Ribbon layout, all of them can be on the tabs. In the next topics, we will
discuss in more detail the organization of the tools and commands.
94 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Menu Bar
The menu bar is a series of aligned menu titles. This series changes
depending on the processing mode you are in. You drop down a menu by
clicking on its title, and then you can select a command.

 File: This menu is a standard menu that contains Open, Close, and other
file related commands. This menu also contains tools for loading Trimble
FX controller files, converting TZS to BSF, etc. It is available in the
Registration mode.
 Edit: This menu gives access to object editing operations such as cut,
copy and paste, undo, redo, find, etc. and access to advanced functions
and preferences.
 Tools: This menu contains common tools that you can use no matter
which processing mode you are in.
 Plant*: This menu contains tools for modeling pipes and structural
steelworks.
 OfficeSurvey: This menu contains all available tools related to the
OfficeSurvey™ mode.
 Registration: This menu contains all available tools related to the
Registration mode.
 Modeling*: This menu contains all available tools related to the Modeling
module.
 Media Tools: This menu contains tools for computing video and capturing
snapshots.
 Display: This menu gives access to object display and hide functions in
the 3D View window.
 3D View: This menu gives access to different visualization parameters
(rendering, view, etc.) in the 3D View window.
 Window: This menu allows user to organize the user interface.
 Help: This menu gives access to online help.

Note: (*) The Plant and Modeling menus are not present in RealWorks Base.

Toolbars
Icons are the graphic representation of tools and commands in the toolbars.
They are organized into different toolbars according to their similarity in terms
of function.
Getting Started with RealWorks 95

Main
Under the Main toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Open
Connect to Mobile Device
Open Scan Explorer
Open SketchUp
Save
Print
Undo
Redo

Display
Under the Display toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Display Cloud
Display Geometry
Hide Cloud
Hide Geometry
Hide All
Limit Box Mode
Lighting Direction
96 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3D View
Under the 3D View toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Cloud Rendering / White Color


Cloud Rendering / Cloud Color
Cloud Rendering / Station Color
Cloud Rendering / Scan Color
Cloud Rendering / Grey Scaled Intensity
Cloud Rendering / True Color
Cloud Rendering / Color Coded Intensity
Cloud Rendering / Color Coded Elevation
Cloud Rendering / Color Coded Classification
Cloud Rendering Settings
Geometry Rendering / Wireframe
Geometry Rendering / Hidden Lines
Geometry Rendering / Solid
Geometry Rendering / Solid - Classification
Geometry Rendering / Textured
No Filters
Hide Background
See Inside
Outline
No Shading
Normal Shading
Ambient Shading
Enhanced Ambient Shading
Point Size / 1 Pixel
Point Size / 2 Pixels
Point Size / 3 Pixels
Point Size / 4 Pixels
Point Size / 5 Pixels
Adaptive Point Size
Projection Mode / Perspective
Projection Mode / Parallel
Navigation Mode / Examiner
Navigation Mode / WalkThrough
Navigation Mode / Station-Based
Selection Mode / Rectangular Selection
Getting Started with RealWorks 97

Selection Mode / Polygonal Selection


Show Stations
Show Station Maker Labels
Station Maker List
Change Cloud Color
Change Geometry Color

View Alignment
Under the View Alignment toolbar, you can find the following list of icons:

Zoom On Selection
Center On Point
Zoom Extents
Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor Position
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Front
Back
Left
Right
Top
Bottom
Object Front
Object Back
Object Left
Object Right
Object Top
Object Bottom
Go to Shooting Position
98 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tools in the Registration Module


Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Tools toolbar when you are in the
Registration module:

Auto-Extract Targets
Auto-register using Planes
Target-Based Registration
Refine Registration Using Scans
Cloud-Based Registration
Georeferencing
Target Analyzer
Orientation
Generate Key Plan from Current View
Registration Report (Target-Based)
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Getting Started with RealWorks 99

Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module


Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Tools toolbar when you are in the
OfficeSurvey™ module:

Move Label
Segmentation
Sampling
Auto-Classify Clouds
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Cutting Plane
Contouring
Profile/Cross-Section
EasyProfile
2D-EasyLine
Polyline Drawing
Catenary Drawing
Alignment Stationing
2D-Polyline Inspection
Volume Calculation
Twin Surface Inspection
Surface to Model Inspection
Inspection Map Analyzer
Floor Inspection
3D Inspection
3D Inspection Analyzer
Fitting
Mesh Creation
Mesh Editing
Ortho-Projection
Multi-Ortho-Projection
Image Rectification
Feature Set
Edit Library
100 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tools in the Modeling Module


Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Tools toolbar when you are in the
Modeling module:

Segmentation
Sampling
Auto-Classify Clouds
Limit Box Extraction
Measure
Cloud-Based Modeler
Geometry Creator
Geometry Modifier
Intersect
Duplicate
Plane Bounding
Windows
Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Windows toolbar:

WorkSpace window
List window
Property window
Selection List Window
Classification Layers
Limit Box
Station Maker List
Ribbon/Toolbar
Export Logs
Cascade
Tile Vertically
Tile Horizontally
Close All Windows
Getting Started with RealWorks 101

Working Frame
Here is a list of icons that you can find in the Working Frame toolbar which only
appears when you select the related command:

UCS Creation

Shortcut Keys in RealWorks


You can use shortcuts to carry out the following common tasks in RealWorks.

Press: To:
CTRL + 0 Open a file
CTRL + S Save a project
CTRL + Z Undo the last action
CTRL + Y Redo the last action
CTRL + X Cut the selected object
CTRL + C Copy the selected object
CTRL + V Paste the selected object
Del. Delete the selected object
CTRL + F Access to the Find function
CTRL + M Merge two selected clouds
Home Zoom Extents
X Center on Point

Geometry Renderings
You can use the following shortcut key for displaying the edges of displayed
models.

Press: To:
O Display the edges of displayed models
102 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cloud Renderings
You can use the following shortcut keys when applying Cloud Rendering
options to clouds.

Press: To:
1 Render cloud(s) in white color
2 Render cloud(s) in Cloud color
3 Render cloud(s) in Station color
4 Render cloud(s) in Scan color
5 Render cloud(s) in Grey Scaled Intensity
6 Render cloud(s) in Color Coded Intensity
7 Render cloud(s) in True color
8 Render cloud(s) in Color Coded Elevation

Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.

Standard Views
You can use the following shortcut keys when changing the Standard View.

Press: To:
Ctrl + 5 Bring the standard view to Front
Ctrl + 0 Bring the standard view to Back
Ctrl + 8 Bring the standard view to Top
Ctrl + 2 Bring the standard view to Bottom
Ctrl + 6 Bring the standard view to Right
Ctrl + 4 Bring the standard view to Left

Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.

Station Markers and Station Marker Labels


You can use the following shortcut keys for displaying (or hiding) all station
markers and station marker Labels.

Press: To:
J Show (or hide) station markers
K Show (or hide) station marker labels

Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.
Getting Started with RealWorks 103

Gray-Scale Intensity With Color Rendering


You can use the following shortcut key for applying a Gray-Scale Intensity with
Color overlay to clouds in the 3D View.

Press: To:
B Apply a gray-scale intensity with color overlay

Note: You need to first pick anywhere in the 3D View or perform a selection in
the 3D View.

View Manager
You can use the following shortcut keys when the View Manager toolbar opens
at the bottom of the 3D View.

Press: To:
F11 Set the active sub-view in full mode
CTRL + F11 Replace the current view by the next one (only available in full mode)
SHIFT + F11 Hide all open windows except the 3D View window or display them if
hidden

Picking Parameters
You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in the 3D View (in XYZ Coordinate System).

Press: To:
Shift + X Lock the X coordinate
Shift + Y Lock the Y coordinate
shift + Z Lock the Z coordinate

You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Cartesian System).

Press: To:
Shift + H Lock the H coordinate
Shift + V Lock the V coordinate

You can use the following shortcut keys when the Picking Parameters toolbar
appeared to pick with constraints in a 2D View (in Polar System).

Press: To:
Shift + A Lock the Angle coordinate
Shift + D Lock the Distance coordinate
104 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Head Always Up
You can use the following shortcut key for selecting (or deselecting) the Head
Always Up option.

Press: To:
U Select the Head Always Up option

Limit Box Extraction


You can use the following shortcut keys with the Limit Box Extraction.

Press: To:
R Rotate
T Pan
E Modify Shape
 Move the Limit Box Up (1) (2)
 Move the Limit Box Down (1) (2)
 Move the Limit Box Right (1)
 Move the Limit Box Left (1)
Page Up Move the Limit Box Back (1)
Page Down Move the Limit Box Forward (1)
Esc. Leave the Box Extraction Tool

Note:
 (1) These keys are only available in the Pan mode. Be sure that NUM
LOCK is unpressed (or is Off).
 (2) Along the axis which is the closest to the vertical.
Getting Started with RealWorks 105

Limit Box Mode


You can use the following shortcut keys with the Limit Box Mode (see "Filter
Data" on page 450).

Press: To:
F4 Launch the Limit Box Mode
R Rotate
T Pan
E Modify Shape
 Move the Limit Box Up (1) (2)
 Move the Limit Box Down (1) (2)
 Move the Limit Box Right (1)
 Move the Limit Box Left (1)
Page Up Move the Limit Box Back (1)
Page Down Move the Limit Box Forward (1)
Esc. Leave the Box Extraction Tool

Note:
 (1) These keys are only available in the Pan mode. Be sure that NUM
LOCK is unpressed (or is Off).
 (2) Along the axis which is the closest to the vertical.

Segmentation
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Segmentation.

Press: To:
Shift and drag the Draw a freehand selection
mouse
I Keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Create the fenced points as a cloud
Esc. Cancel the defined fence
Or
Leave the Segmentation Tool
Space Bar End fence
Double Click End fence
106 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fitting
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Fitting (on page 919).

Press: To:
I Keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Create a fitted entity
Esc. Cancel the defined fence
Or
Leave the Fitting tool
Space Bar End fence
Double Click End fence
F Fit geometry to cloud

Cloud-Based Registration
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Cloud-Based Registration.

Press: To:
Esc. Leave the Cloud-Based Registration Tool
F Refine the registration
F5 Apply the registration
C Change the manipulator center location

Geometry Modifier
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Geometry Modifier.

Press: To:
Shift + E Change the shape of the selected entity
Shift + T Pan along the Home Frame axes
Ctrl + T Pan along its own axes
Shift + R Rotate around the center of the selected entity
C Change the location of the manipulator
Getting Started with RealWorks 107

SteelWorks Creator
You can use the following shortcut keys with the SteelWorks Creator.

Press: To:
Ctrl + H Select the H Section type
Ctrl + I Select the I Section type
Ctrl + U Select the U Section type
Ctrl + L Select the L Section type
Ctrl + T Select the T Section type

Tank Creation
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Tank Creation (see "Tank
Setup" on page 1529) / Tank Classification.

Press: To:
I keep points inside the defined fence
O Keep points outside the defined fence
P Assign the desired tank part

Toolbar/Ribbon
You can use the following shortcut keys to switch from Toolbar to Ribbon, and
vice versa.

Press: To:
Ctrl + F1 Minimize or restore the Ribbon
Ctrl + Alt + F9 Switch from Toolbar to Ribbon

Image Rectification
You can use the following shortcut key with the Image Rectification.

Press: To:
Shift + R Set image resolution

Magnifier
You can use the following shortcut key with the Magnifier (see "Magnifier Mode
- Clip and Zoom to Explore an Area of Interest" on page 500).

Press: To:
N Set the Magnifier mode
108 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Ortho-Projection
You can use the following shortcut keys with the Ortho-Projection (see
"Create Ortho-Images" on page 1100) tool.

Press: To:
Shift + C Define a projection plane by existing ortho-image
Shift + R Define resolution of ortho-image
Getting Started with RealWorks 109

FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155)


You can use the following shortcut key with the FF/FL Analysis (ASTM
E1155) (see "Floor Flatness/Floor Levelness" on page 1078) tool.

Press: To:
A Add sample

Polyline Drawing
You can use the following shortcut key when a polyline is selected in the
Polyline Drawing tool.

Press: To:
Ctrl + Shift + D Duplicate manually a polyline

Merge Coplanar Polylines


You can use the following shortcut key with the Merge Coplanar Polylines
feature.

Press: To:
Ctrl + J Merge Coplanar polylines

Move Mesh
You can use the following shortcut key with the Move Mesh tool.

Press: To:
Shift + T Pan a mesh along the Home Frame axes
Shift + R Rotate a mesh around its center
C Change the manipulator location
110 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Customize the User Interface


By default, all windows except the Property and Selection List windows are
open within the user interface. Toolbars* are also open and are displayed
either horizontally under the menu bar or vertically along the left side of the 3D
View.

Note: (*) In only the menus and toolbars layout.

Windows
You can display (or hide) any window as required. Note that you cannot close
the 3D View. You can only reduce (or resize) it.
Getting Started with RealWorks 111

Display a Window
To Display a Window:

1. Select Window from the menu bar.


2. Select a window (to display) from the drop-down menu.

Or

3. Right-click anywhere on any open toolbar.


4. Select a window (to display) from the pop-up menu by checking it.

Tip: You can also select a window to open from the Windows toolbar.

To Display a Window:

 On the View tab, in the Windows group, click on e.g. the WorkSpace
Window icon to display the window.
112 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Hide a Window
To Hide a Window:

1. Select Window from the menu bar.


2. Select a window (to hide) from the drop-down menu.

Tip:
 You can also click on the Close button or right-click on the Title Bar (of
a Floating window) and select Hide from the pop-up menu.
 You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a window (to
hide) from the pop-up menu by un-checking it.

Note: An open window has its icon highlighted in the drop-down menu.

Tip: You can also select a window to hide from the Windows toolbar.

To Hide a Window:

 On the View tab, in the Windows group, click on e.g. the WorkSpace
Window icon to hide the window.

Undock a Window
To Undock a Window:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to un-dock). A
good place to point is the title bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window to a suitable
location in your working environment.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again (or close it).

Tip: A window, once moved from its Docking position, becomes Floating. You
can check its status by right-clicking on the Title Bar.
Getting Started with RealWorks 113

Dock a Window
To Dock a Window:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the window (to dock). A
good place to point is the Title Bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the window. A diamond
guide appears.

1 - Guide Diamond 3 - Four additional arrows pointing toward the


2 - Four arrows pointing toward the four sides of four edges of the user interface
the editing panel

3. When the window reaches the location to dock, move the pointer over the
corresponding portion of the guide diamond. The desired area is then
shaded.
4. Release the mouse button to drop the window to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again (or close) it.

Tip: You can also right-click on the Title Bar of an undocked window and select
Docking from the pop-up menu. The window is then re-docked to its initial
position.

Lock Windows from Undocking


114 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

You can lock all window panels (once docked within the RealWorks user
interface) to avoid unintentional un-docked when double-clicking on a title bar
or when dragging and dropping a window.

To Lock all Windows from Undocking:

• On the View tab, from the Windows group, click the Lock Windows
icon.

Toolbars
In the Menus and Toolbars layout, you can display (or hide) any toolbar as
required.

Display a Toolbar
To Display a Toolbar:

1. In the Window menu, select Toolbars.


2. Select a toolbar (to display) from the drop-down submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to
display) from the pop-up menu.

Hide a Toolbar
To Hide a Toolbar:

1. In the Window menu, select Toolbars.


2. Select a toolbar (to hide) from the drop-down submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere on any open toolbar and select a toolbar (to
hide) from the pop-up menu.
Getting Started with RealWorks 115

Move a Toolbar
To Move a Toolbar:

1. Move the pointer somewhere over an area of the toolbar that does not
display a button (or drop-down list). A good place to point is the title bar.
2. Press and hold the mouse button while you drag the toolbar to a suitable
location in your window.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the toolbar to its new location. It will
remain in this new place until you move it again or close it.

Customize the Quick Access Toolbar


The Quick Access Toolbar can be customized either in its contents to contain
the set of commands you need or in its position. The settings resulting from
this customization, can be exchanged between different versions of
RealWorks, by exporting and importing a file with the QAT extension. This
exchange ability is applicable only from the version 10.2 of RealWorks.
116 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move the Quick Access Toolbar


The Quick Access Toolbar can be moved to the two possible locations:

To Move the Quick Access Toolbar:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Choose More Commands from the drop-down list. The Trimble RealWorks
dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Keep the Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon option unchecked
to display the toolbar at its default location, at the upper-left corner of the
user interface, next to the Trimble RealWorks button image.

 Check the Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon option to display
the toolbar below the ribbon.

4. Click OK. The Trimble RealWorks dialog closes.

Tip: You can also choose Show Above the Ribbon or Show Below the Ribbon
from the Customize Quick Access Toolbar list.

Tip: You can also choose More Commands from the Support tab.
Getting Started with RealWorks 117

Add a Command to the Quick Access Toolbar


You can add buttons that represent commands to the Quick Access Toolbar.

To Add a Command to the Quick Access Toolbar:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Check one of the default commands from the drop-down list:

Or

3. Choose More Commands from the drop-down list. The Trimble RealWorks
dialog closes.
4. Click on the pull-down arrow and choose a tab from the drop-down list.

Note: Some tabs appear two times, like for example Home. This is because it
is in the Registration module and in the Production module.
118 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5. Choose a command from the list.


6. Click the Add button.
7. Click OK. The Trimble RealWorks dialog closes.

Note: In the Quick Access Toolbar, the commands are arranged in the order
where they were added.

Export the Quick Access Toolbar


To Export the Quick Access Toolbar:

1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Export Quick Access Toolbar from the dropped-down list. The
Export Quick Access Toolbar dialog opens.
3. Keep the default name which is "Commands".
4. Or enter a new name in the File Name field.
5. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
6. Click OK. The Export Quick Access Toolbar dialog closes.

Import the Quick Access Toolbar


To Import the Quick Access Toolbar:

1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Import Quick Access Toolbar from the dropped-down list. The
Import Quick Access Toolbar dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the *.qat file is located.
4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
5. Click Open. The Import Quick Access Toolbar dialog closes.

Show the Quick Access Toolbar Below/Above the Ribbon


To Show the Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Choose the Show Below the Ribbon option from the drop-down list.

To Show the Quick Access Toolbar Above the Ribbon:

1. Click the Customize Quick Access Toolbar .


2. Choose the Show Above the Ribbon option from the drop-down list.
Getting Started with RealWorks 119

Restore the Commands to the Default Values


To Restore the Commands to the Default Values:

1. From the Support tab, click on the Quick Access Toolbar pull-down arrow.
2. Choose Restore Defaults Commands from the dropped-down list. A dialog
opens.
3. Click Yes to restore the Quick Access Toolbar commands to the default
values.
4. Click No to keep the Quick Access Toolbar commands with the
customized values
120 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set the Unit of Measurement for Length


Before you start working on your project, you can set the unit of measurement
to be used for all distance and/or length values; in order to properly represent
your data set. You can do this either from the Preferences / Units (see "Units
Preferences" on page 127) dialog or from the short-cut field at the bottom right
corner of the user interface.

To Define the Unit of Measurement:

1. Click inside the unit of measurement field at the bottom right of the user
interface. The Preferences / Units dialog opens.
2. Click on the Length pull-down arrow.
3. Choose a unit of measurement from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK. The Preferences / Units dialog closes.
Getting Started with RealWorks 121

Set the Preferences


Preferences allow you to customize the behavior and aspects of RealWorks.
These preferences are grouped under seven tabs. Preferences are persistent
in RealWorks, i.e. the setting changes will be memorized and used for the
following RealWorks sessions.

To Set the Preferences:

1. From the Quick Access Toolbar, select Preferences . The Preferences


dialog opens.

Or

2. First right-click in the 3D View (except on a displayed object and not within
an open tool).
3. And then, select Preferences from the pop-up menu.
122 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Viewer Preferences
The preferences in the Viewer tab are described in the table below and allow
you to control the behavior and the aspect of the 3D View.

This Option Enables


Display Coordinate To specify the choice between displaying and hiding the coordinate
Frame frame in the 3D View.
Display Scale In To specify the choice between displaying and hiding the scale in the 3D
Orthographic Mode View.
Polyline Width (Pixel) To specify the width of all polylines in the software.

Background Color To change the background color of the 3D View window. The default
color is dark gray when you first start RealWorks. You can change it to
the color you prefer. In addition to this, you can apply a gradient effect to
this background color.
Highlight Color To change the color of the bounding box of selected objects. The default
color is yellow.
Info Box Opacity To define the transparency of the information box using a slider.

To Set a Preference for the Viewer:

1. Click on the Viewer tab (if required). The Viewer dialog appears.
2. Set a preference.
3. Click Apply. The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting(s) will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.
Getting Started with RealWorks 123

HD Display Preferences
The preferences in the HD Display tab are described in the table below. They
enable to allocate a size to the VRAM and RAM. HD stands for High Definition,
RAM for Random Access Memory (volatile memory for the CPU) and VRAM
for Video Random Access Memory (volatile memory of the graphical card).
VRAM will be used for displaying points in HD mode. RAM is a cache memory
for displaying points in HD mode

This Option Enables


Auto To automatically set the VRAM and RAM sizes to respectively 1 GB and
2 GB.
Advanced The user to define a size to allocate to the VRAM or RAM.

To Set a Preference for the HD Mode:

1. Click on the HD Display tab. The HD Display dialog appears.


2. Set a parameter for a preference item.
3. Click Apply. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

The Advanced option has been chosen if you are an advanced user of
RealWorks because you need to adapt the VRAM and RAM values to the
specifications of your computer. Both allocated VRAM and RAM sizes should
be smaller than the physical RAM size. The allocated RAM size should be
larger than or equal to the allocated VRAM size. Higher values will optimize the
display performance of RealWorks but will also slow it down.

Tools Preferences
The preferences in the Tools tab are described in the table below and are
dedicated to the tools options.

This Option Enables


Keep displayed To keep or to not keep the display state (clouds and geometries) once
objects visible when entering in a partition tool, like e.g. the Segmentation tool.
starting segmentation
Fence color To change the color of a fence when using a tool like the Segmentation
tool.
Drawing color To change the color of a drawing when using a tool like the Polyline
Drawing tool.
Auto Save After To automatically save the project in Trimble RealWorks for each
Extraction from TSE extraction from Trimble Scan Explorer.
124 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

To Set a Preference for Tools:

1. Click on the Tools tab. The Tools dialog appears.


2. Set a parameter for a preference item.
3. Click Apply. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Note: If you try to change the color of a drawing in progress while you are
using a tool like the Polyline Drawing tool, a warning message pops up and
prompts you to first close the tool.

Note: You can change the color of a fence in progress when using a tool like
the Segmentation tool.

Define the Width of All Polylines


This option lets the user define the width of all polylines in the software. The
default value is 2 pixels. The minimum value and the maximum value are
respectively 1 pixel and 10 pixels. The option, once chosen, is not applied to
the polylines that are being constructed but to those that are already created in
the database.

Keep / Not Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting


Segmentation
This preference enables to keep (or to not keep) the display state (of points
(and/or of geometries)) when entering in a tool. Instead of having only the
selected cloud (or geometry) displayed after entering a tool, you have now the
choice between displaying and not displaying the unselected clouds and/or
geometries. The tools, that are concerned, are those using the cloud
segmentation tool directly or not, such as:

 Segmentation as a main tool or a sub-tool,


 Fitting (on page 919) as a main tool or a sub-tool,
 SteelWorks Creator.

Note: This preference is not activated by default. Once activated, it becomes


persistent.
Getting Started with RealWorks 125

Navigation Preferences
The preferences in the Navigation tab are described in the table below and are
dedicated to the navigation options in the 3D View.

This Option Enables


Head Always Up (Z When you move a 3D scene (rotate, zoom or pan) in the 3D View, you
Axis) may lose its orientation in relation to the coordinate frame. This option
allows you to keep the 3D scene with its Z direction always up (relative
to the active coordinate frame).
Reverse Mouse- To invert the motion for zoom in (or out) in all viewers (3D or 2D).
Zoom
AutoSpin A scene to turn around itself with a speed defined by the last mouse
movement.
Rotate To assign a mouse button for the rotation.

Pan To assign a mouse button for translation.

Default Box Size To change the size of the clipping box in the Magnifier tool in a range
between 1 km and 1 mm. The default size is 1 cubic meter.
Auto-Centered To center the cropped area at the center of the screen in the Magnifier
tool when the option is activated.

To Set a Preference for the Navigation:

1. Click on the General tab. The General dialog appears.


2. Set a parameter for a preference item.
3. Click Apply. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the U shortcut key instead of checking the Head Always Up
(Z Axis) option.
126 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

General Preferences
The preferences in the General tab are described in the table below.

This Option Enables


Stack Size For To specify the number of levels for undo/redo operations. You can
Undo/Redo choose between 1 and 50.
Location RealWorks creates a temporary backup file for each opened project.
This option allows you to specify a location to which this backup file will
be stored. By default, the backup folder is Windows/Temp.
Capacity This field indicates the capacity of the selected folder.
Coordinate System To choice between Cartesian Coordinate System and Geographic
Coordinate System.
Orientation Measure To choose between two systems for the orientation measurements.
System
Language Settings* To select a language. The setting will only take effect next time the
application is launched.
Start Page To display the Start Page when you start the software, only if the option
has been checked. The setting will only take effect next time the
software is launched.

To Set a General Preference:

1. Click on the General tab. The General dialog appears.


2. Set a parameter for a preference item.
3. Click Apply. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
4. Click OK. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Note: (*) A warning dialog opens and warns that you need to restart
RealWorks when changing the language setting. Otherwise the new language
setting will not be taken effect.
Getting Started with RealWorks 127

Units Preferences
The preferences in the Units tab are described in the table below. They allow
you to set the unit system to use in your project.

This Option Enables


Decimal Places To specify the number of digits after the decimal point.
Display Value With To display digital values with unit tag(s).
Unit Tag(s)
Unit System To select the unit system between the Metric System and the US/British
System for Length, Diameter, Angle, Area and Volume. Use the drop-
down to choose one form the list.
Alignment Stationing To specify the format used to display a position with the stationing

To Set a Units Preference:

1. Click on the Units tab. The Units dialog appears.


2. Set a preference.
3. Click Apply. The setting will be taken into account and the Preferences
dialog still opens.
4. Click OK. The setting will be taken into account and the Preferences
dialog closes.

Tip: You are able to the change the unit of measurement for Length directly
within the user interface of RealWorks without having to open the Preferences
dialog. Please, refer to the Set the Unit of Measurement for Length (on page
120) topic.

Note: The US Gallons and Imperial Gallons have been added as units to
quantify a Volume.
128 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Print Preference
To Set a Print Preference:

1. Click on the Print tab. The Print dialog appears.


2. Click Open below the User Defined Logo option. The Import User
Defined Logo dialog opens.
3. In the Look In field, navigate to the folder where the BMP format file is.
4. Click on the file to select it.
5. Click Apply. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog
remains open.
6. Click OK. The setting will be applied and the Preferences dialog closes.

Improvement Program Preferences


The Trimble Solution Improvement Program (TSIP) is implemented by Trimble
to help us improve the quality, reliability, and performance of our software
products. If you select to participate in the program, the software will collect
anonymous information about your hardware configuration and how you use
the software. Periodically, a file containing the collected information will be sent
to Trimble to help us identity trends and usage patterns.

No information will be collected that can be used to identity or contact you. You
can select not to participate in TSIP at any time.

Warning: You will be prompted to restart the software if you change the
improvement state.

Participate in TSIP
To Participate in TSIP:

1. Click on the Improvement Program tab. The Trimble Solution Improvement


Program dialog appears.
2. Click on "The Read More About Trimble Solution Improvement Program
Online' link.
3. Carefully read the information that is displayed.
4. Check the "Yes, I Want to Participate in the Program" option.
5. Click OK.
Getting Started with RealWorks 129

Not Participate in TSIP


To Not Participate in TSIP:

1. Click on the Improvement Program tab. The Trimble Solution Improvement


Program dialog appears.
2. Click on "The Read More About Trimble Solution Improvement Program
Online' link.
3. Carefully read the information that is displayed.
4. Check the "No, I Do Not Want to Participate in the Program" option.
5. Click OK.
130 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Close Trimble RealWorks


The way to close Trimble RealWorks is similar to other softwares, by selecting

Exit from the File menu or by clicking on the top right corner of
the user interface.
CHAPTER 3

Performing Basic Operations

This chapter is dedicated to all basic operations, like e.g. the opening and the
importation of project files into RealWorks.
133

Supported Data Formats


RealWorks supports a numerous of file formats. There are those that are
Trimble's (software) proprietary formats, those coming from Trimble's
instruments (or from competitors), those generating from a third-party software,
etc.

Trimble 3D Scanning Files


A Trimble 3D Scanning File is a file with one of the following extensions: *.rwp,
*.raw, *.jxl, *.asc, *.neu *.tzs and *.tzf. Among all these file formats, some can
be imported into an existing project and others cannot. A file of the following
extension rwp cannot be imported. Only those of asc, neu, tzs and tzf
extensions or those coming from the Trimble Survey Controller™, Survey
Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software (JobXML and related) can be imported.

Below are listed all the extensions and the application from which each
extension is from.

 RWP Trimble proprietary RealWorks project file format.


 ASC a well-known ASCII coordinates files.
 NEU a Neutral file format identical to ASC.
 TZS Historical Trimble Scan File format file (will be converted into TZF)
 TZF Trimble Scan File format file,
 Etc.
134 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

RealWorks Files
RWP is a proprietary format of Trimble. It is a project file format. The RWI
folder is a folder linked to the RWP format file. It contains all data files of a
project (RWC and RWV for versions of RealWorks before 8.0 and RWCX and
RWV for RealWorks 8.0). RWC and RWCX are cloud format files. RWV is an
image format file.

A project file saved in a version of RealWorks older than 5.0 is not supported
anymore in 8.0. When you try to open such a file, an error message appears.

When you open a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, all
the project files are converted to the 8.0 format. The conversion takes a certain
amount of time and is temporary.

If you decide to save the project under the same name (after converting), the
conversion becomes definitive and cannot be cancelled. The project will be not
accessible with older versions of RealWorks. The conversion (of all project files
to 8.0 format) is only required one time. The next time you want to open the
project, no conversion is required and the loading of the project is accelerated.

If you decide to not save the project, the conversion is not applied and is lost (if
you close RealWorks). The next time you open the project in 8.0, the
conversion is required again.

Note: A project will be open even if the cloud format files (RWCX) are missing.
Only an error message will appear in that case.

Caution: There is a limit to the size of a TRW format file when you try to open
it with RealWorks 8.0. This limit, related to its size, is of 4 GB. If your file size is
bigger, you are able to open, not with RealWorks version 8.0, but only from
8.1. If you try to do so, the error message below appears.
Performing Basic Operations 135

RealWorks can import the Trimble TX8 3D scanner data using the High
Precision mode. To get the High Precision data, the Trimble TX8 3D Scanner
scans four times the same scene from the same station. The data should have
a smaller RMS error (measured on planes for example) and objects from the
first pass are kept. Moving objects from pass 2, 3 and 4 are totally removed if
not seen in the first pass. Four files are created, one standard TZF files and 3
other files containing information from pass 2, 3 and 4. Those file cannot be
opened directly in RealWorks.

1 - High Precision scans 2 - Standard Precision scan

RealWorks only sees the first TZF format file, not the TZFx ones. The
thumbnail and the preview are available for display only for the first TZF format
file. There is no change in RealWorks, neither in the workflow nor in the project
properties.

When you extract some data from the TZF files or open Trimble Scan Explorer,
the post-processing is triggered. The TZF files from the High Precision mode
are first detected and then merged into one. At the end, all the original files are
removed and only the processed TZF remains.
136 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: If your project file comes from the import of JXL format files from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, you are able to open it with RealWorks, only from the
10.1 version. If you try to do it with an earlier version, the error message below
appears. This restriction is due to the numerous images that the SX10
instrument can capture.
Performing Basic Operations 137

TZF Files
TZF is a proprietary format of Trimble. A file with such a format is essentially a
Trimble Scan File.

 A project and a station* will be created and rooted under the Project Tree.
The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The station takes the
name of the TZF format file.
 A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
 The project is not saved. The user has to save it manually.
 Once saved, a project file and a folder are created. Both are named
according to the name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the
first and a RWI extension for the second. The RWI folder is empty of
content.

Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The


Scans Tree is selected by default.

Tip: A TZF format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.

Note: (*) A Leveled Station is created and rooted in the Scans Tree for each
TZF format file tagged as Leveled, once open (or imported) into RealWorks.

You can preview a TZF format file as a Thumbnail in Windows Explorer. You
need to first enable the Thumbnail Preview in Windows Explorer and then to
set the icon view size to Medium Icons, Large Icons or Extra Large Icons.

Some new information has been added to TZF format files, in RealWorks 8.0.
This information, related to the instrument itself and to the scanning settings,
like Starting/Final Temperature (Internal) (in Celsius and Fahrenheit),
Atmospheric Correction PPM (Parts Per Million), Grid Steps, Instrument
Leveling and etc. appear when you display the properties of a TZF Scan (only
if the Property window is open).
138 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: The Extended range density is a level which only appears with an
optional upgrade (of the TX8 instrument). For more information about the
Extended feature, please refer to the Trimble TX6 / TX8 user manual.
Performing Basic Operations 139

Multiple Scans
When a set of TZF files belonging to the same station is open through the File /
Open command, a project and a station are created. A TZF Scan is created
per TZF file. All TZF Scans are put under the (same) station and only one is by
default a Main Scan.

Note: If you drag and drop a set of TZF files into RealWorks, you will get the
same result: a project with a station and a set of TZF Scans (one per TZF file).
All TZF Scans are placed under the station.

There is a tip to differentiate a native TZF Scan (coming from a Trimble TX


instrument) and those converted from other (or competitor) format files. In the
first case, the name of the instrument is displayed in the Instrument Name line.
[See A].
140 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[A]

In the last case, the text "Converted from *.* file" appears in the Instrument
Name line. See [B].

[B]
Performing Basic Operations 141

Colored Scans
The new TX series has the capability to capture images thanks to its embarked
camera. These images can be taken in the Standard (or HDR) mode, with (or
without) the exposure correction. After loading the RWP project file into
RealWorks, you can check with which color acquisition mode and with which
type of exposure a scan has been acquired by displaying the properties of its
related TZF Scan in the Property window.

A TZF Scan before the post-processing is triggered:

A TZF Scan, post-processed and colored:

Some color discontinuities between individual images may be visible after


coloring the TZF Scans (from the Trimble TX6 and TX8 instruments). Now in
RealWorks 10.3, these images are blended so that the quality of the
colorization is greatly enhanced:
142 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: All the TCF format files will be merged with the TZF files after the data
processing. So if the user hasn't made a copy of its original data sets, it is not
possible to go back.

TZS Files
A TZS format file is a Trimble Scan File. For each TZS format file, a warning
dialog appears and prompts you to proceed to the conversion to the TZF
format (or not).

Note:
 The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The Scans
Tree is selected by default.
 A TZS format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.

Caution: You cannot open TZF format files in RealWorks 7.0 or lower.

Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format


To Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format:

 In the warning dialog, click No. If there is an open project, the project will
close. If there is no open project, nothing happens (no project is created).
Performing Basic Operations 143

Convert to the TZF Format


To Convert to TZF Format:

1. In the warning dialog, click Yes. An Information dialog appears.


2. Click OK. The Save dialog opens. The default folder is the folder where
the TZS format file is.
3. Keep the default folder.
4. Or navigate to a drive/folder where you want to store the project.
5. Keep the default name which is ProjectX.
6. Or input a name in the File Name field. The RWP extension is
automatically added.
7. Click Save. The conversion is then performed.

Once completed, a project and a station are created and rooted under the
Project Tree. The project has the name given by the user. The station has the
name of the TZS format file.

A TZF Scan is created is under the station.

A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also
created.
144 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Trimble Survey Project Files


A Trimble Survey Project, once created and saved in Trimble Business Center
(2.5 and above), is composed of a TSPX format file, a SDF format file, two
VSE format files and a folder which contains the JXL format file, images and
TSF format files. Such project is shared by Trimble Business Center and
RealWorks. This lets the user combine the survey capabilities of Trimble
Business Center with the manipulation capabilities of RealWorks for
processing scanned data and then manipulating them.

Once a TSPX format file has been open in RealWorks, a RealWorks project file
(with RWP as extension) and RWI folder are created and are added to the
previous list of files.

Note:
 Any modification done within RealWorks is not taken back into Trimble
Business Center.
 Only one Trimble Survey Project can be open in RealWorks at once.

Warning: Do not modify the items which compose a Trimble Survey Project. If
you decide to move the project to another location on your hard disk, move the
directory that includes all the files, not only the TSPX format file.
Performing Basic Operations 145

Stations
In Trimble Business Center, each station has a station node representation in
the Project Explorer panel. The representation matches the survey instrument
type and is followed by the point ID and an "S" number in parenthesis that
uniquely identifies the station.

In RealWorks, the Observation information is not read. As a result, each station


has a "Blue Folder" representation in the Project Tree. The blue color means
that the station is "Leveled" but not setup over a Known Point.
146 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Scans
In Trimble Business Center, all scans (Trimble Scanner Files (TSF)) are put as
a list after the imported data file node under the Imported Files node in Project
Explorer panel.

In RealWorks, each scan resulting from the measurement from a single station
point of view is stored under that station in the Scans Tree.
Performing Basic Operations 147

Points
In Trimble Business Center, each point in the project as a node representation
and all are put under the Points node in the Project Explorer panel.
Observations to and from the point are listed as observation nodes beneath it.

In RealWorks, each station contains all the measurements made from that
station in the field. All points are set as unmatched and put under the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. A point resulting from the measurement
from a single station is read as a Survey Point and is stored under that station.
A point resulting from the measurement of a set of stations is read as a
TopoPoint and stored under the TopoStation System folder.
148 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: Key-in points, GNSS points, etc. are also read as TopoPoints and stored
under the TopoStation System folder.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
Performing Basic Operations 149

Images
In Trimble Business Center, images taken from a station point of view are
stored under that station in the Project Explorer panel.

In RealWorks, images taken from a station point of view are stored as


"Matched Images" under that station in the Scans Tree and in a list in the
Images Tree.
150 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Performing Basic Operations 151

JobXML, JOB and RAW Files


A JobXML file (with *.jxl extension) is a text file exported from Trimble Survey
Controller™, Survey Manager™ or Survey Pro™ software in an XML based
format. Some dependency files may be related to the JobXML file (such as
scan files with TSF extension (*.tsf stands for Trimble Scanning File) and
JPEG images (*.jpg extension)).

A JOB file (with *.job extension) is a binary file format. It can be a Trimble
Survey Controller job file or a Trimble Access job file. In the first case, if
Trimble Data Transfer© is installed on your computer, you can open a Survey
Controller™ JOB. If Trimble Data Transfer© is not detected on your computer,
you cannot open it as the "Job Files (*.job)" file of type line in the Open dialog
is not available. In the second case, you need to have Trimble General Survey
(Office Survey) installed on your computer. Trimble Data Transfer and Trimble
General Survey, both contain a converter. RAW file (with *.raw extension) is a
SurveyPro™ native ASCII (or TXT) file format.

Objects in the JobXML (or Job or RAW) format file are opened (or imported)
within the Scans Tree as follows:

 Points surveyed from one station setup are imported as standard survey
points within each station,
 GPS points and keyed-in points are imported as topo-points within the
TopoStation System folder,
 Each station of the Instrument is opened (or imported) as leveled station,
 Registered scans using the scanning capabilities of the Instrument are put
under their respective station,
 Images taken from the Instrument are registered under the respective
station if the stationing is carried out when shooting the images. Images
are put with no link to the station under the Images Tree if stationing has
not been carried out when shooting the images.
152 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - Leveled stations 3 - Surveyed points opened or imported as Topo


2 - Images and scans Points

A warning message appears when:

 Points are surveyed with no altitude. These points are then opened (or
imported) with altitude 0 in RealWorks,

Z is equal to zero for points with no altitude

 Linked images/scans are missing from the reading folder. When opening
(or importing) a JobXML (or Job or RAW) format file, it refers to external
files that contain scanning data and images respectively with the TSF
(Trimble Scanning File) extension and the JPG extension. These files are
supposed to be in the same folder than the JobXML (or Job or RW) file.
Missing TSF files are shown as null size scans and Missing images as
broken link images.
Performing Basic Operations 153

1 - Missing TSF file opened (or imported) as null 2 - Missing image file opened (or imported) as
size scan broken link image

 Some object fields are missing,


 Images have been taken around zenith. These images are opened (or
imported) in the Images Tree as “Unmatched” images (through they are
still linked to their shooting station).

Images taken around zenith are registered as "Matched"

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or Survey Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
154 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: When you open a JOB file format, internally, the file is converted (to the
JXL format). An error message opens in case you do not have the last
converter installed on your computer. To have the latest version of the
converter, please download and install Trimble Installation Manager from the
Trimble web page (http://www.trimble.com/installationmanager/), and then
install Trimble Field Link Job File Converter.
Performing Basic Operations 155

Note: The Trimble SX10 instrument is able to capture hundreds of images


from three different cameras, called Overview, Primary and Telescope. When
you open a JXL format file coming from the instrument, those images are
organized in folders, one per camera type, in each a station in the Scans Tree,

And in folders, by station and then by camera type in the Images Tree.

When you open a JXL format file in RealWorks, two cases may occur: If there
are images in the file, the point cloud is automatically colorized using the color
information therein in these images, in this order: Overview first, followed by
Primary, and ended by Telescope. The colorization process cannot be
interrupted. If there is no picture, nothing happens. Only the point cloud is
imported.

Note: The user can stop the loading of points as well as its colorization by
pressing Esc. In the first case, no point will be loaded in RealWorks while in the
second case, the colorization in progress will be stopped. Points that are
already colorized remain colorized. Those that are not yet colorized remain un-
colorized.
156 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note - Scale Factor


When importing a JOB (or JXL) project file for which the contents is in a Grid
coordinate system, Trimble RealWorks uses the centroid of the project to
compute a Combined Scale Factor. If the Combined Scale Factor is different
from 1, and as Trimble RealWorks does only support coordinate systems with
a scale factor equal to 1 (Ground coordinate system), Trimble RealWorks will
convert all the coordinates of the project with the scale factor equal to 1.

Note - Scale Factor - Ellipsoid Model


For JOB (or JXL) format files that use an ellipsoid in the coordinates system,
Trimble RealWorks will apply the conversion as described previously.
Performing Basic Operations 157

Note - Scale Factor - Geoid/Datum Model


For JOB (or JXL) format files that use either a geoid, or a datum, etc. in the
coordinates system, Trimble RealWorks will require an external data (Geoid
files or others). These files do not come with the Trimble installer. If these files
need to be installed on your computer, Trimble RealWorks will pop up the error
message below:

To avoid that such situation occurred, do one of the following:

 Install the GeoDatabase on your computer. It is already installed if Trimble


Business Center has been installed for example.
 Download Trimble Installation Manager from the Trimble web page
(www.trimble.com/installationmanager) and install it, and run the Office
update.

 Copy the Geoid Grid File(s) (or Datum Grid File(s)) based on the geoid (or
datum) used in the project's coordinate system, and put them under the
Program Data\Trimble\Geo Data folder. Such files have the GGF (or DGF)
extension:
158 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note - Switch from Ground to Grid


You are able to switch the project coordinate system back to Grid. You need to
be in Registration, select a project and choose Apply Scale Factor from the
pop-up menu.

Note: All measurements from a station, e.g. Survey Points or Scans will not
have the Combined Scale Factor applied. Only the coordinates of the Stations
and TopoPoints do have the Combined Scale Factor applied.

Note: The default scale factor value, which is displayed in the open dialog, is
the value of the last scaled project when importing a JOB (or JXL) format in the
current session. If no scaled import had been done, the default value is 1.0.

After applying the scale factor, the project is scaled and the values of the
entities should be the same as in Trimble Business Center.
Performing Basic Operations 159

ASCII Files
An ASCII format file may have ASC, NEU or XYZ as extension. There are in
general two sections in such a file. The first section is called Header in which
specific information about the nature of the file is stored. The second section is
a list of 3D Points. Each line contains a point represented by its X, Y, and Z
coordinates plus, optionally, other attributes such as intensity or color.

Tip: An ASCII format file can be either opened as single project or imported
into an existing one.

Note:
 A file to open (or to import) containing some corrupted lines will be
ignored.
 The processing mode will automatically switch to Production. The Models
Tree is selected by default.
160 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

With Wizard
This opens a Wizard which allows the user to choose the parameters to fit the
ASCII format file to open.

To Open With the Wizard:

1. In the Open dialog, keep the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option checked.
2. Click Open. The Neutral Point Import dialog opens.

This dialog is composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import
the data and one for visualization.

Header You can ignore the first lines of an ASCII file by selecting the number of lines to
skip. These lines can be headers, comments or X,Y,Z coordinates that you do not
want to keep.

Separator Separator between attributes of a point can be a Comma, Tabulation or other.

Units You have the choice between the Metric system and US/British system for the
values of X, Y, Z coordinates.

Select This part enables to display (or to not display) the information about the Intensity,
Content the Color and the Normal of loaded points.

If the Intensity option has been chosen, the user can customize the intensity
range. This means that intensity values larger than the value in the Max Intensity
field were replaced by 255 and those that are between 0 and the Max Intensity
value are mapped to the values from 0 to 255.

Data Type According to the option (or combination of options) chosen in the Select Content
panel, this part identifies fourteen different combinations of the attributes of a
point. When the user chooses:

§ No option, only the "Single Coordinates X,Y,Z" option is available.


§ Intensity, the Max Intensity field and the "Coordinates and Intensity" option
become enabled.
§ Color, the "Coordinates and Color" option is enabled.
§ Normal, the "Coordinates and Normal" option is enabled.
§ Intensity and Color, the "Coordinates, Intensity and Color" and "Coordinates,
Color and Intensity" options are available.
§ Intensity and Normal, the "Coordinates, Normal and Intensity" and "Coordinates,
Intensity and Normal" options are available.
§ Color and Normal, the "Coordinates, Color and Normal" and "Coordinates,
Normal" and "Color3 options are available.
§ Intensity, Color and Normal, the "Coordinates, Intensity, Color and Normal",
"Coordinates, Intensity, Normal and Color", "Coordinates, Color, Normal and
Intensity", "Coordinates, Color, Intensity and Normal", "Coordinates, Normal,
Intensity, and Color" and "Coordinates, Normal, Color and Intensity" are all
available.

If you select one of the options when you load an ASCII file without Intensity,
Color or Normal RealWorks indicates that the Intensity, Color or Normal cannot be
found and displays this error with three question marks between two brackets.
Performing Basic Operations 161
Preview Only the first thirty points are listed in the Preview panel.

3. Choose the parameters to fit the file to open.


4. Click OK. The Neutral Point Import dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O or click Open in the Main toolbar to
pop-up the Open dialog.

Note: (*) We assume that there is no project opened. If there is one opened,
the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. You can then import
such a file into the already opened project.

Without Wizard
When you load an ASCII format without the Wizard, RealWorks attempts to
determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a point.

To Open Without the Wizard:

1. In the Open dialog, uncheck the Open Wizard for ASCII Files option.
2. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Note: An ASCII format file, when dragged and dropped into an open session of
RealWorks, is loaded without the Wizard.
162 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files


RealWorks supports the Trimble TX5 file format originating from the Trimble
TX5 3D scanning system. Such a format, with the *.fls extension, is stored on a
SD card (used with the Trimble TX5 3D scanner for storing data).

Files and folders on a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card are structured as shown
below. The FARO-LS format file is a signature file used to identity a SD card as
a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card. The Scans folder is a folder where all
acquired scans are stored in.

An acquired scan is composed of a set of files and folders. All are put in a FLS
folder under the Scans folder as illustrated below. The file to open is mainly the
FLS file in the FLS folder.

From a Trimble TX5 Scanner's SD card, the opening through the File / Open
menu is restricted to one FLS format file at a time. The Import FLS Files
feature avoids such restriction. Multiple selection of FLS files (or of FLS folder)
is now permitted.

In addition to the FLS format, RealWorks also supports the iQscan format.
Performing Basic Operations 163

Open a FLS Format File


To Open a FLS Format File:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens.
3. Select Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files (*.iQscan; *.fls) from the File of
Type field.
4. Do one of the following:

a) Navigate to the Trimble TX5' SD card.


b) Select the FLS file from the SD card / Scans / FLS folder. Its name
appears in the File Name field.

Or

a) Navigate to a drive/folder where all the FLS files are located.


b) Select a FLS file (or a set of FLS files). Its name (or all names)
appears (or appear) in the File Name field.

5. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Tip: You can also drag and drop a FLS file into RealWorks. This method is
limited to one FLS file at a time.

Caution: Do not rename the extension (FLS) of the folder which contains the
FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that
the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.

Note: A scan, acquired with colors, generates a colored file in the FLS format.
The TZF Scan, that results, is colored. You may see a colored preview in the
Property window (only if it is open) when displaying the TZF Scan's properties.

Note: A scan, acquired with the dual-axis compensator On (compensated), is


flagged as a leveled Fls format file. The TZF Scan, that results, appears blue
(leveled) in RealWorks. Those for which the dual-axis compensator is Off
(none compensated) remain yellow.
164 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open an IQscan Format File


To Open an IQscan Format File:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens.
3. Select Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files (*.iQscan; *.fls) from the File of
Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the IQscan file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Tip: You can also drag and drop several IQScan files into RealWorks.
Performing Basic Operations 165

FLS and IQscan Import Results


 If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks, the Add to Project
option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import (the FLS or
IQscan files) in from the drop-down list.
 If there is no project, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to
first create and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.

Instead of importing systematically the information related to the Color, GNSS,


and Tilt and Compass when they are found in the FLS file, the FLS Import
Options dialog which shows up lets the user choose the option to be imported.
This dialog opens once, even if several FLS files have been chosen as input.

For each file, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to first create
and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.

A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree. You
have to a give a name to the project while the station takes the file name.
A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
166 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also
created.

Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The


Scans Tree is selected by default.
Performing Basic Operations 167

Surveying Network ASCII Files


One of the key features of RealWorks is its ability to import surveyed data
produced by other data collectors such as Total Stations, Field Stations, etc.
Each such file will be imported alone as a Topographic Station with points
converted to Topopoints or in a station with points converted to 3D points.

A file with the CRD extension is a coordinate file with five data fields (Point
number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description) in binary form. A file with
the CR5 extension is also a coordinate file but owned by TDS. A file with the
TXT extension is an ASCII text file. Each line of the text file can contain any
combination of Point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description. All
point information should be on one line with the values separated by a comma,
space or other delineateers. All these parameters can be customized during
the loading phase in RealWorks.

The Surveying Network Import dialog which appears after opening a file is
composed of six parts: five for adjusting the parameters to import the data and
one for visualization. When you load a surveying network file, RealWorks
attempts to determine which separator is used and the different attributes of a
point. But you can customize these parameters:

Import: You can import as topopoints or as 3D points.


Header: You can ignore the first lines of a Surveying Network ASCII format file by
selecting the number of lines to skip. These lines can be headers, comments,
or X, Y, Z coordinates that you don't want to keep. The number of lines that
you can skip is limited to 12. You can do the same for Column char and
Comment line char.
Separator: Separator between attributes of a point can be a semicolon, comma,
tabulation or other.
Units: You have the choice between several units: Millimeter, Meter, U.S. Survey
Foot and International Foot. The U.S. Survey Foot, defined by the National
Bureau of Standards NBS, corresponds to a value of 1200/3937m (or
0.3048006096m). The International Foot corresponds to a value of 0.3048m.
File Format: You can choose between two types of contents:

§ Point Number, X, Y, Z, Description,


§ Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation, Description.

Note: The Open Wizard for ASCII Files option in the Open dialog becomes
active and is default-checked if the file to import has a TXT extension; and
remains inactive (grayed out) for files with CRD and CR5 extensions.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point (or 3D Point)'s 3D Labels by
clicking the Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View
tab.
168 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Import as a Topographic Station


To import a Surveying Network ASCII format file as a Topographic Station, you
need to have an open project or nothing opens.

To Import as Topographic Station:

1. In the Surveying Network Import dialog, customize the opening


parameters to fit the survey network file to open.
2. Click OK. The Surveying Network Import dialog closes.

1 - A topographic station 2 - A set of TopoPoints

Note: The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration. The Scans
Tree is by default selected.

Note: When you open a file to import topopoints, RealWorks does not create a
new Topographic Station if there is already one in the project. Topopoints from
different files will be under the same Topographic Station. Also, if there are
some points in your project, you cannot import new ones with the same names
and the same positions than those already exist.
Performing Basic Operations 169

Import in an Existing Station


To import a Surveying Network ASCII format file in a station as unmatched 3D
Points, you need to have an open project.

To Import in an Existing Station:

1. In the Surveying Network Import dialog, do one of the following:

 Import the surveying network file as a Topographic Station filled with


Topopoints (see Import as a Topographic Station (on page 168)).
 Import the surveying network file as 3D points in a station.

a) Check the In a Station (Fill with GeomPoints) option.


b) Click on the In a Station (Fill with GeomPoints) pull down arrow.
c) Choose a station from the drop down list.
d) Customize the parameters for the Surveying Network ASCII
format file to open.
e) Click OK. The Surveying Network Import dialog closes.

Note:
 The processing mode will automatically swap to Registration. The Scans
Tree is by default selected.
170 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 When importing a Surveying Network ASCII format file, you need to have
at least a station within your project. Otherwise the In a Station (Fill with
GeomPoints) option is dimmed.

Caution: You are able import points having the same names and the same
positions as much as you like.

SIMA ASCII Files


RealWorks supports SIMA ASCII format files (Japanese survey file format). A
file in such format (with sim extension) can be opened (or imported) in
RealWorks. If no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog
is grayed out and you are restricted to opening. If there is an opened project,
the Add to Project option is enabled and default checked. Each file will be
opened (or imported) as a topographic station and each point converted to an
unmatched Topopoint.

Note: RealWorks will swap for the Registration processing mode after opening
such a file.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by clicking the
Display 3D Labels icon in the Station Makers group on the View tab.
Performing Basic Operations 171

AutoCAD Files
RealWorks can open drawings in DXF (Drawing eXchange Format) or DWG
(DraWinG) file format. The DXF file format is an ASCII file format which
describes CAD data defined by AutoDesk. This file format facilitates the
exchange of CAD data between two different programs. The DWG file format is
the binary file format from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.

To Open a DXF (or DWG) Format File:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog appears.
3. Select AutoCAD Files (*.dxf; *.dwg) from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the DXF (or DWG) format file is located.
5. Click on the DXF (or DWG) format file's name to select it.
6. Click OK. The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import) dialog opens.

7. Click on the DXF Unit of Length (or DXF Unit of Length) pull down arrow.
8. Specify a unit of measurement to apply from the drop down list.
9. Choose between Merge Each 3D Face of the Same Layer into a Mesh
and Merge Each 3D Point of the Same Layer into a Cloud.
10. Or check both options.
11. Click OK. The DXF File Import (or DXF File Import) dialog closes.

Caution: A warning message appears if the DWG (or DXF) format file to open
(or import) contains entities with no equivalent in RealWorks. These entities will
not be opened (or imported) in RealWorks.

Note: If there is no project open, you can only open a DWG (DXF) format file.
The Add to Project option in the Open dialog is dimmed.
172 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

A set of model groups is created and put under a project rooted under the
Models Tree. Each model group contains all 3D faces (or 3D points) of the
same layer - each opened as a mesh of two triangles (see A1) (or as a 3D
point object (see B1 and B2)).

A1 - A mesh has been created for each 3D face A2 - A mesh has been created for all 3D faces
of the same layer

B1 - The Project Cloud is empty of points B2 - Each 3D point is opened as an object of


3D point

There are two options in the DXF File Import (or DWG File Import) dialog. The
first when checked allows merging of all 3D Faces of the same layer into a
mesh (see A2) and the second all 3D Points into a Cloud (see B3 and B4)).
Performing Basic Operations 173

B3 - The Project Cloud contains points B4 - All 3D points of the same layer are opened
and merged as a unique point cloud

Note: For all 3D Points of the same layer, a station is created and rooted under
the Scans Tree.

IXF Files
A file of IXF format (Optech’s laser scanning systems - ILRIS - data format)
with ixf extension can be opened (or imported) in RealWorks. If no project is
open, the Add to Project option in the Open dialog is grayed out and you are
restricted to opening. If there is an opened project, the Add to Project option is
enabled and default checked. Each file will be opened (or imported) as
station(s) put in the Scans Tree and as points put in the current Project Cloud
in the Models Tree.
174 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

RIEGL Scan Project Files


A file with the .rsp extension is a project file coming from the RiIEGL's RiSCAN
PROTM software. This file is a text file using an XML structure. It does not
contain scan data, but just links to the scan files. All of the scan files are stored
in a folder with the .rdb extension. It is named after the name of the project file.
RiSCAN PROTM is the companion software for all Terrestrial 3D Laser Scanner
Systems from RIEGL. RealWorks does support the coloring, georefencing,
registration, etc. information that are in the .rsp format file. A RiIEGL's RiSCAN
PROTM project file has the structure illustrated below.

1 - A Riegl's RiSCAN PRO format file 3 - Scan file


2 - Scan file folder 4 - Points file

In RealWorks, if no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open


dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening a project file. If there is
an open project, the Add to Project option is enabled and checked by default.
Each scan file will be converted to a TZF Scan and put under a station. All are
rooted in the Scans Tree as illustrated below.
Performing Basic Operations 175

Note: RealWorks is being able to support the new RIEGL's point pout
database format (RDB 2.0).
176 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Z+F Scan Files


Data acquired by a Z+F 3D laser scanner can contain colors (or not)
depending on how it has been acquired. For a given data set, there are three
types of files that come out of the scanner: ZFPRJ for project file, ZFS for scan
files and ZFI image container.

If the data has been acquired with no information of colors, only the ZFS format
files are required. They can be opened (or imported) directly into RealWorks. If
the data has been acquired with colors taken by a Z+F camera (integrated or
external), the three types of files have to be processed in the Z+F LaserControl
software which provides in return panoramic images, in PGN or JPEG format.
The colors information are then stored in the panoramic images. If the data has
been acquired with colors taken by an external digital camera on a nodal point
adapter, the images that come out the camera have to be processed in a 3rd
party software (PtGui, Autopano Giga).

In the last case, the panoramic images need to be:

 Be located in the same directory of each scan file (ZFS).


 Have the same name as the scan file (ZFS) followed by "Underscore and
color".
 Have the same dimensions (in pixels) as the scan file (ZFS).

In RealWorks, if no project is open, the Add to Project option in the Open


dialog is grayed out and you are restricted to opening a scan file. If there is an
opened project, the Add to Project option is enabled and checked by default.
Each scan file (ZFS) will be opened (or imported) as a TZF Scan put in a
station in the Scans Tree.
Performing Basic Operations 177

Z+F Import Filters


The Z+F Import Filters dialog opens when you load a ZFS format file into
RealWorks. From this dialog, you can choose a set of filters to apply to points
in order to keep those required, and filter out those that are noisy or badly
acquired, etc.
178 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter by Intensity

This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels that are below the Min. value and
above the Max. value in terms of Intensity. These two values are defined in
percentage by the user. The default values depend on the type of the scanner.

Filter by Range

This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels which are not in the defined range.
The filter is not active when the Min. and the Max. values are equal to zero.

Filter Edge Points

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels, which are on edges of objects
and therefore not valid. On edges you have mixed range values, these range
values are often between the foreground and the background (but also
possible in front or behind objects).

Filter Bottom

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels from the bottom of the instrument
(Nadir) up to a user given angle.

Remove Isolated Points

This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels which have no valid neighbor.

Remove Bad Lines

This filter, when it is chosen, deletes the first scan lines of recording, marked
by the scanner as “bad” due to laser warm-up procedure at the early beginning
of the scan (first few scan-lines).

Remove Scan Outer Boundary

This filter masks pixels at the outer borders of the scan. The first and last line
and the first and the last pixel of each line are filtered.

Remove Points at Range Discontinuities

This filter detects jumps in range and filter out pixels.

Remove Lines at Tilt Discontinuities

This filter, when it is chosen, removes lines which show too big tilt changes.
Performing Basic Operations 179

LAS and LAZ Files


The LAS file format is a public file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional
point cloud data between data users. It is binary-based. The LAS format has
several versions: 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4. RealWorks is able to import files
from all of those versions.

The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Everything that is
in a LAS file is also a LAZ file. The difference is that the LAZ format offers a
compression rate which is 5 to 20 times greater than the LAS format, thus
providing smaller files.

Note: LAZ files share the same version numbers as LAS files. RealWorks is
also able to import LAZ files from all of those versions.

Points in LAS/LAZ files can have intensity and/or color information. They can
also have none of them. RealWorks behaves as described below:

 If color is present without intensity, color is used to create intensity value.


 If intensity is present without color, a gray scale is applied to color.
 If color and intensity are present, both attributes are applied to color and
intensity.
 If no color and no intensity are present, all points are rendered in white, in
color and in intensity mode.

Note: LAS/LAZ format from 1.0 to 1.3 support at most 4 billion of points.
LAS/LAZ 1.4 does support virtually infinite point cloud size (over 4 billion of
points), however the current version of RealWorks does not support importing
LAS/LAZ files with more than 4 billion points.

The 1.2 and 1.4 LAS format versions support natively the classification of point
clouds. Both standards contain a slight difference in terms of number of layers.

The import of a LAS format file, in version 1.4, should not create any issues as
RealWorks sticks to the LAS 1.4 specification for point cloud classification. All
valid classes (or layers), once imported, will match the same valid classes in
RealWorks, with the same meaning.

The import of a LAS format file, in version 1.2, is a slightly different. All valid
layers from 1.2 which will match the same valid layers in RealWorks, except for
the layers ID 8 and ID 12 (from 1.2), which are "Reserved" layers in 1.4. They
will be then imported as an "Unclassified", layer (ID 1).

The LAZ file format is a compressed LAS 1.2 file. The same class limitation is
also applied to it. Importing from LAZ is the same as importing from LAS 1.2.
180 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: For LAS 1.4, in addition to meter distance units, you can now work with
international foot and US survey foot distance units.

E57 Files
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.

The E57 format supports two types of data: Gridded Data and Non-Gridded
Data. Gridded data is a data which is aligned in regular arrays. An E57 format
file can have an individual scan or several scans within.
Performing Basic Operations 181

Gridded Data
An E57 format file with gridded data can be open as a project or be imported
into an existing one. In the first case, an information dialog is displayed. This
dialog prompts you to create and save the project into the Trimble RWP
format.

 A project and a station are created and rooted under the Project Tree. The
project is named according to the given name. The station takes the name
of the E57 format file.
 In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many stations as there are scans
within the E57 file.

 A TZF Scan is created and put under the station.

 A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the
given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension.
 Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF extension is also created.
182 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 In case of a multi-scans file, there are as many TZF Scan files as there are
scans within the E57 file.

Caution: The default mode is Production. You have to switch to Registration to


see the result(s).

Note: The conversion (of an E57 format file with gridded data) to a TZF Scan
file can fail. If this case occurs, the file is then considered as a non-gridded file.

Note: The project will be automatically saved at the end of the conversion(s).

The color information in an E57 format file are preserved when converting (the
E57 format file) to a TZF Scan.
Performing Basic Operations 183

Non-Gridded Data
An E57 format file with non-gridded data can either be opened as a new
project or imported into an existing project.

 A project is created and rooted under the Project Tree. The project follows
the naming convention of ProjectX where X is its order.
 Non-gridded data are imported as a Cloud. All of its points are put in the
Project Cloud.
 A station and a scan are created in the Scans Tree.
 A project file and a project folder are created, both named according to the
given name, with the respective RWP extension and the RWI extension.
 Under the RWI folder, a RealWorks scan file with the RWCX extension is
also created.

Note: The project will not be saved. You have to save it manually.
184 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

PTX Files
PTX is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is ASCII based. If there is no
project, an information dialog appears for each PTX format file. This dialog
informs the user that he needs to first create and save a project into the
Trimble RWP format.

 A project and a station will be created and rooted under the Project Tree.
The user has to a give a name to the project while the station takes the
PTX format file name.
 A TZF Scan is also created and put under the station.
 A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the
name given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI
extension for the second. Under the RWI folder, a scan file with the TZF
extension is also created.

Note:
 The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The Scans
Tree is selected by default.
 A PTX format file can be either opened as a single project or imported into
an existing project.
 The project created within RealWorks is saved in the database.

PTX format files may contain several scans in the same station. RealWorks
converts all the scans and creates TZF Scans, one per scan, in the same
station in the RealWorks project. The colors information in a PTX format file
are preserved when converting (the PTX format file) to a TZF Scan.
Performing Basic Operations 185

PTS Files
PTS is a file extension for laser scanning files. It is a non-gridded ASCII based
format. A project and a station per PTS format file will be created and rooted
under the Project Tree. The project is named ProjectX where X is its order. The
station has the PTS format file name. Under the station, a scan named ScanX
where X is its order is created. In case of a PTS file with multi-scans, each
scan is imported as a station.

Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Production and the
Models Tree selected by default.

Caution: The created project is not saved in the database; the user has to
save it manually, otherwise it will be lost.

Once the project is saved, a RealWorks project file and a folder are created.
Both are named according to the name given by the user, with a RWP
extension for the first and a RWI extension for the second. Under the RWI
folder, a scan file with the RWCX extension is also created.

DotProduct Files
DP is an extension for highly compressed files provided by a DPI-7 System
from the DOT Product company. One file contains several registered frames
and RealWorks import them all at once in one single scan.
186 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Autodesk FilmBox Files


The FBX file format is a proprietary format, owned by Autodesk. It is used to
provide an interoperability between applications when creating digital contents.
The FBX entities you can import into a Trimble RealWorks project are given
hereafter: Mesh, NURB, Surface NURB and Patch.

A Patch is a surface made from spline curves. NURB, stood for Non-Uniform
Rational Basis Spline, is a mathematical model commonly used in computer
graphics for generating and representing curves and surfaces.

Each FBX entity is not imported as it is but is first converted into a FBX mesh
and then into a RealWorks mesh entity, with the information of name, color,
position and orientation.

In the FBX format, the position and the orientation of an object are expressed
in a right-hand coordinate system with the Y-Axis directed to the Up.
RealWorks has also a right-hand coordinate system, but with the Z-Axis
directed to the Up instead. When exporting, a conversion will be performed so
that the views (Front, Up, Left) are identical in RealWorks and in the FBX
format.

The FBX File Import dialog opens when you import a FBX format file into
RealWorks. You have to determine in which unit of measurement the
coordinates in the FBX format file are expressed. Once imported, a mesh entity
is created and put under a folder in the Models tree.

Note: Once the RealWorks project is saved, a SQL database (a file with the
DMT extension) is created under the RWI folder. This database records all the
operations you perform on geometries.

Note: All FBX meshes are imported in RealWorks, but the hierarchy in the FBX
scene graph is ignored.

TDX Files
The TDX format is a format which enables the exchange of data between
Trimble Business Center and Trimble RealWorks. Scan data (scans, stations,
and leveling information, and images) is imported into RealWorks.
Performing Basic Operations 187

Open a Project File


A project file can be opened by using the Open dialog, or by selecting the
Recent Files from the File tab. The ten last opened files are listed at the right
panel of the File tab. As a shortcut, you can open any of them just by selecting
it in this menu.

To Open a Project File:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project
option dimmed.
3. Select a file type from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Quick Access
Toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.

You can also drag and drop to open a project file into RealWorks. If RealWorks
is not already open, this operation will open it. Only one project file can be
dragged and dropped at a time. If it is already open, you can drag and drop a
set (of project files).

If no project is open in RealWorks, there is no difference in the result between


opening of a set of project files (through the File / Open menu) and dragging
and dropping a set of files into RealWorks. In both cases, a project and a set of
stations* are created. For each project file, a scan is created and put under its
related station*.

If there is a project already open in RealWorks, the result is the same. But in
the first case, you can decide to open the project files into the open project (or
not). In the second case, you can only open the project files into a new project.

Note:
 For files of certain types, you cannot drag and drop a set of projects into
RealWorks when there is no opened session.
 Projects are ranked by alphabetic order in the Project Tree in the
WorkSpace. They are ranked from their opening order in the List window.
 You can abort the opening of a project by pressing Esc.
 When you open a project previously saved in RealWorks format or in
PointScape format or in JobXML format for which images are missing, a
warning message appears and all missing images are listed.
188 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: (*) Except for TZF format files.

Note: You can also open a project by selecting from Open an Existing Project
from the Start Page. When you try to do so within a tool that is already open, a
warning appears and prompts you to close the tool prior to loading a new
project.
Performing Basic Operations 189

Import a Project File


A project file can be imported into an existing project by using the Open dialog.

To Import a Project File:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select the Open icon. The Open dialog opens with the Add to Project
option dimmed*.
3. Select a type of file from the File of Type field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
5. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Keep the Add to Project option checked.
7. If there are several projects, click on the pull-down arrow.
8. Choose a project from the drop-down list.
9. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key Ctrl + O (or click Open in the Quick Access
Toolbar) to pop-up the Open dialog.
190 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Connect to a Mobile Device


A fast way to open (or import) a file from a Trimble data collector such as a
Recon™, TCU™ or TSC2™ in RealWorks is to connect and synchronize the
Trimble data collector with a desktop computer (or laptop). Only a file of RAW
(from the Trimble Survey Pro™), JOB (from the Survey Controller™ software)
and JobXML (from the Trimble Survey Controller™, Survey Manager™ or
Survey Pro™ software) extensions can be opened (or imported) in that way.

Microsoft® ActiveSync® is a software program that comes with your data


collector when you purchase it. This program allows you to synchronize the
information on your data collector with the information on your desktop
computer (or laptop). Synchronization is done by comparing data between
these two computers and updates both of them with the most recent
information. ActiveSync® is already integrated into the operating system on
your data collector. However, you must install ActiveSync® on your desktop
computer (or laptop). You can install the software from the CD that was
shipped with your data collector or you can download the current version of
ActiveSync® from the Microsoft® website.

To Connect to a Mobile Device:

1. Connect a Trimble data collector to your desktop computer (or laptop). For
more details, please refer to the documentation that comes with your data
collector.
2. Power the Trimble data collector On.

 If there is no project open, the Connection to Mobile Device dialog opens


and the Add to Project option is grayed out. You are restricted to opening
a file.

a) Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.


b) Click on the file to select it. The Open button becomes active.
c) Click on the Open button.

 If there are one or more projects open in RealWorks:

a) On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
b) Select the Connect to Mobile Device icon. The Connection to
Mobile Device dialog opens and the Add to Project option is
available and default checked.
c) Navigate the Drive / folder where the file is located.
d) Click on the file to select it. The Open button becomes active.
e) Keep the Add to Project option checked.
Performing Basic Operations 191

f) Click on the pull down arrow and choose a project from the drop
down list.
g) Click on the Open button.

Note: The path to the file to open (or import) as well as the dialog box size are
persistent. This means that they remain unchanged till the user changes them.
192 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Import FLS Files


To Import FLS Files:

1. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
2. Select Import FLS Files. The Import FLS Files dialog opens. All drives (of
your computer) are by default listed (when the dialog opens for the first
time).

3. Navigate to the Scans folder where all the FLS files are located.
4. Select the Scans folder. The Import button becomes enabled.
5. Do one of the following:

 Click Import. The Import FLS Files dialog closes. All FLS files from the
Scans folder will be imported.

Or

 Select the FLS folders to import one by one.


 And click Import. The Import FLS Files dialog closes.

Note: The Open button becomes enabled if the selection (from the Import FLS
Files dialog) is a drive (or a folder). It swaps from Open to Import when you
select a FLS folder (or a FLS file).

Note: The path to the FLS folders (or FLS files) to import in the dialog is
persistent. This means that it remains unchanged till you change it.
Performing Basic Operations 193

 If there is one (or more) project(s) open in RealWorks, the Add to Project
option is enabled. You can then choose a project to import (the FLS files)
in from the drop-down list.
 If there is no project, a dialog appears and informs you that you need to
first create and save a project into the Trimble RWP format.

Instead of importing systematically the information related to the Color, GNSS,


and Tilt and Compass when they are found in the FLS file, the FLS Import
Options dialog which shows up lets the user choose the option to be imported.
This dialog opens once, even if several FLS files have been chosen as input.

A project and a set of stations (one per file) are created and rooted under the
Project Tree. You have to give a name for the project while each station is
named according to the file name.
A TZF Scan (one per file) is also created and put under its related station.
194 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

A project file and a folder are created. Both are named according to the name
given by the user, with a RWP extension for the first and a RWI extension for
the second. Under the RWI folder, a set of scan files with the TZF extension is
also created.

Note: The processing mode will automatically switch to Registration. The


Scans Tree is selected by default.

Caution: Do not rename the extension (FLS) of the folder which contains the
FLS format file to open. Otherwise, an error dialog opens and warns you that
the FLS format file has been removed (or deleted) from its previous location.

Note: When a scan has been acquired with color, the FLS file that results is
colored. The TZF Scan, created by opening (or importing) such FLS file, is
colored too. You may see the color information by displaying the TZF Scan's
properties (only if the Property window is open).

Tip: When importing FLS format files into an existing project, the project is
automatically saved once the import completed.

Caution: The Import FLS Files feature is not available in RealWorks Viewer.
Performing Basic Operations 195

Import an Image into a Project


Image files in JPEG, BMP (only of 24-bit depth) and TIF formats can be
imported into an existing project. An imported image is rooted under the
Images Tree. If you attempt to import an image of a format other than those
mentioned above, an error message appears

To Import an Image Into a Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. On the Home tab, click the Import icon. A list drops down.
3. Select Import Image. The Import Image dialog opens.
4. Select the right image type from the File of Type field.
5. Navigate to the drive/folder where the image file is located.
6. Click on the file to select it.
7. Click Import.

Note: Only RGB TIF files can be imported into RealWorks. If you attempt to
import a TIF format image of a color space other than RGB, an error message
appears

Note: You need to have a project loaded in RealWorks. Otherwise, the Import
Image feature remains dimmed.
196 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open Trimble Scan Explorer


Trimble Scan Explorer is a plug-in hosted in RealWorks. It is a navigator
dedicated to handling and navigating large databases from which the user can
extract and send data to RealWorks or to a specific file format. The Scan
Explorer feature is available with the following types of license: Viewer, Base,
Advanced, Forensics, Advanced Modeler, Advanced Plant and Advanced
Tank.

To Open Trimble Scan Explorer:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations).


2. In the Scan Explorer group, click the Open Scan Explorer icon.

Warning: A message appears if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are)
missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not
compatible with Scan Explorer.

Note:
 If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Tip: You can also open Scan Explorer first, and load a project into RealWorks.

Note: You will be prompted to close Scan Explorer first in case you intend to
merge two projects into RealWorks.

Note: Within Scan Explorer, the Create Entities in RealWorks and Create
Entities in SketchUp features are available with the Advanced Modeler,
Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank licenses. For more information, refer
please to the Trimble Scan Explorer documentation.

Note: It is now possible to open Trimble Scan Explorer from the main Trimble
RealWorks window without the need to first save the project.
Performing Basic Operations 197

Open Trimble SketchUp

The Open SketchUp feature is available with the Advanced, Advanced


Modeler, Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank versions of RealWorks. This
feature is enabled only if SketchUp Pro 2014 or above (until SketchUp Pro
2018) is installed on your computer. Otherwise, it remains dimmed. The
feature, when selected, starts SketchUp and allows you exporting an existing
geometry, either from RealWorks to SketchUp (by selecting the Export to
SketchUp feature) or with Trimble Scan Explorer opened nearby (by selecting
Create Entities in SketchUp).

To Open Trimble SketchUp:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations).


2. In the SketchUp group, click the Open SketchUp icon.

 If the selected project is unsaved, a dialog opens and prompts you to save
it.
 If there are some TZF Scans in the selected project, you can Open
Trimble Scan Explorer and use the Create Entities in SketchUp feature for
extracting and sending entities to SketchUp.

Note: For more information related to the Create Entities in SketchUp feature,
please refer to the Trimble Scan Explorer for RealWorks documentation.

To Close Trimble SketchUp:

SketchUp closes by itself when you close RealWorks. If a change has been
done in the project, you will be asked to save the project, in RealWorks. If
some entities have been exported towards SketchUp, you will be asked to
save the project, in SketchUp.

If the connection between RealWorks and SketchUp is lost for any reason, a
warning dialog opens. First close the dialog and then select Reconnect to
RealWorks from Plugins menu, in SketchUp as illustrated below.
198 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

If the connection with RealWorks is broken, a dialog opens and prompts you to
first leave SketchUp and then restart it from RealWorks.

Caution: If there is no open project in RealWorks, the Open SketchUp feature


remains grayed-out.
Performing Basic Operations 199

Open AutoCAD

The Open AutoCAD feature is enabled only if the AutoCAD 2015 (or
2016, or 2017, or 2018) program from AutoDesk is already installed on your
computer. Otherwise, it remains dimmed. The feature, when selected, starts
AutoCAD and opens a dialog with prompts. After choosing to load the Trimble
ARX (AutoCAD Runtime Extension) plugin into AutoCAD, a new Drawing file,
based on the current drawing template file, opens.

Note: If several versions of AutoCAD (2015, 2016, 2017 and 2018) are
installed on your computer, as only one instance of AutoCAD can
communicate with RealWorks at a time, AutoCAD 2018 is then considered.

Note: The Send to AutoCAD feature is dimmed if f you choose to not load the
Trimble ARX (AutoCAD Runtime Extension) plugin into AutoCAD.
200 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Send to AutoCAD

The Send to AutoCAD feature is enabled when a point cloud has been
selected, and if:

 AutoCAD has been started from RealWorks (see Open AutoCAD (on
page 199)), and,
 The connection between the Trimble ARX plugin and RealWorks is
established, and
 A Drawing file, based on the current drawing template file, opens in
AutoCAD.

And also if the prerequisites listed below are guaranteed:

 Recap Pro version 2018 from AutoDesk installed, with a valid license (trial
or permanent). Recap Pro does not need to be opened but you need to be
singed in first.
 AutoCAD 2015 (or 2016 or 2017 or 2018) from AutoDesk already installed.

Note: When an object having both point cloud and geometry properties has
been selected, only the point cloud properties will be exported to AutoCAD.

The result of the export is a point cloud that displays in AutoCAD. After saving
the Drawing file, a DWG format file with a name given by the user and a folder
with RCP format file(s) are created.
Performing Basic Operations 201

Save Projects
A project, which has not been saved, has an asterisk beside its name in the
Project Tree. You can save the project into the existing project file by using the
Save command or into a new project file by using the Save As command.

Caution: When a project has already been updated from an older version of
RealWorks to the current version, saving it under the same name will make it
inaccessible under older versions of RealWorks.

Caution: You cannot save (or save as) a project in RealWorks Viewer.

Save a Project
To Save a Project:

1. Select an unsaved project from the Project Tree.


2. From the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Save icon.

Tip: You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl + S.

Save a Project As
To Save a Project As.

1. Select either a saved project or an unsaved project from the Project Tree.
2. From the File tab, select Save As . The Save dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the project.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension is added automatically.
5. Click Save. The Save dialog closes.

Note: The TZF Scan Files Management dialog opens if the selected project
contains some TZF Scan files (within its RWI folder). You can then choose
between "Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project" and "Do Not Copy TZF
Scan Files, Keep the Link to the Originals".
202 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Undo an Operation
You can undo the last operation when the Undo Operation command is
available. You can execute multiple-level undo, but its behavior varies
depending on whether you use a command or a tool. When you use a
command, the undo will delete its effects. When you are inside a tool, multiple
undo will be applied to all intermediate steps of the tool, including their
parameter settings and database operations. Once you exit the tool, multiple
undo will take effect only on the database operations carried out by all
operations of the tool.

To Undo an Operation:

1. From the Quick Access Toolbar, select Undo Operation .


2. Continue clicking Undo Operation to remove as many previous operations
as necessary.

Note:
 You can also use the Ctrl + Z shortcut keys or click the corresponding icon
in the Main toolbar.
 The Undo stack is limited to the value defined in Preferences.
Performing Basic Operations 203

Redo an Operation
If you decide to restore the last operation (or action) you carried out in
RealWorks, you can easily do so by using the Redo Operation command.
When the Redo Operation command is unavailable (dimmed), it means that
you cannot redo the last operation (or action).

To Redo an Operation:

1. From the Quick Access Toolbar, select Redo Operation .


2. Continue clicking Redo Operation to redo as many previous actions as
necessary.

Note: You can also use the Ctrl + Y shortcut keys or click the corresponding
icon in the Main toolbar.
204 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Close Projects
You can either close a selected project (or all projects). When the project(s) is
(or are) not saved, a warning will be issued. You will be prompted to save (or
not to save it (or them)). Note that there is one warning per open project and
Close All does not require selection.

Close the Selected Project


To Close the Selected Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the File tab, select Close .

Or

3. Select Close from the pop-up menu.

Close all Projects


To Close All Projects:

 From the File tab, select Close All .


CHAPTER 4

Organization of Data

A project contains original scanned data and images, and all objects created
from the scanned data. In order to make such data visible to users, we
organize them into a Project Tree under the WorkSpace window.
207

Project Tree
Each Project Tree is composed of four sub-trees called Scans, Models,
Targets and Images. At any given time, only one of them is displayed.

When a project is loaded into RealWorks, it is immediately inserted under the


WorkSpace as a named project. Under the project, you can find two types of
node called Group node and Object node. An object node is always a leaf
node, while a group node could be either an internal or a leaf node. The
organization and manipulation of the group and the object nodes in the
WorkSpace window and the List window are similar to those of the respective
File and List windows of Microsoft Windows Explorer.

Note: A project has a layer table. When loading a project in RealWorks, a


default layer table with predefined layers is automatically generated. The layer
table is based on the LAS 1.4 specification. This means that there is a
maximum of 256 layers per project, and the first layers will be the LAS 1.4
predefined or reserved ones.

Tip: You are able to manage the layers that are in your project. Please, refer to
the Managing Layers (see "Working with Classification Layers" on page 541)
chapter for more information.
208 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Scans Tree
The Scans Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree. It is only available in
the Registration mode. To display it, you have to click on its tab in the
WorkSpace window. This tree is used for organizing the scanning results
called Stations, Scans, and/or Images.

It may have as many levels as a project requires. A Scan and an Image are
always the leaves of the tree, while a Station is an internal node. It is important
to note that the content of a Station (Scans or Images) cannot be moved to
other Stations, nor can their position be changed inside a Station. This is to
preserve the scanning order.

Caution: Images from the Scans Tree cannot be deleted and Scans from
which all points have been deleted are erased.

Note: The objects from the Scans Tree have no layer.

RealWorks does support the new functionality of the Trimble TX instrument,


i.e., the opportunity that is offered to the user to work with the same method a
surveyor does with a Total Station. If the instrument station has been Leveled
and the Instrument Height entered in the field, RealWorks will read and display
them properly in the Property window.

The Projected Instrument Position of a leveled station, initially displayed as 3D


coordinates in the Property window, is now symbolized by the icon shown in
the hereafter snapshot.
Organization of Data 209

Models Tree
The Models Tree is the first sub-tree of the Project Tree; it is available in the
OfficeSurvey and Modeling modes (or in the Production mode). You can
display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window. This sub-
tree is used for organizing models of a scene. The organization can be logical,
spatial or discipline-based (or simply a combination thereof), depending on the
purposes of a project.

The Models Tree may have as many levels as a project requires. You can
create, re-organize, delete, browse, search, locate or visualize objects in this
sub-tree. Each object node of this sub-tree may contain a point cloud, a
geometry or both. We call them the two representations of this object. By
default, only one representation is displayed:

 A cloud object is displayed by its cloud representation,


 A shape object is displayed by its geometric representation,
 By default, an object with both representations is displayed by its
geometric shape representation. The user must explicitly ask to display its
cloud representation.

For a project saved in a version of RealWorks older than 8.0, there is at least
one Sub-project attached at the root of the Models Tree and only one is active
at a time (the one in bold). After saving an old project in 8.0, all Sub-projects
are replaced by groups named "From "Sub-Project" name".

1 - The Models Tree in projects older than 8.0. 2 - The Models Tree in projects saved in 8.0.
210 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: A project created and saved directly in 8.0 has no notion of groups
(coming from Sub-Projects conversion).

Note: An object of any kind in the Models Tree has a layer, except for a folder.
Organization of Data 211

Targets Tree
The Targets Tree is the second sub-tree of the Project Tree in the Registration
processing mode. You can display it by selecting its related tab from the
WorkSpace window. It is used for organizing the registration entities (Targets,
Survey Points, Topo Points, etc.) matched or not.

Note: Refer to the Registration chapter for more details on the exact definition
of the registration entities and how they are organized and used.

Note: There is no layer associated to a target.

Note: The Targets tab does not display if the open project does not contain
any target. If there are several projects open, and one of the projects contains
some targets, the related tab displays then.
212 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Images Tree
The Images Tree is the fourth and last sub-tree of the Project Tree. You can
display it by selecting its related tab from the WorkSpace window whatever the
mode you are in. This tree is used to organize (or browse) images taken by a
laser scanner’s on-board video camera (or other digital cameras). For
example, you can group together a set of images and use them for texturing a
part of the scene.

Note: You can view an image (or group of images) as thumbnail(s) in the List
window either by selecting first Database Browsing, then Thumbnails from the
Database toolbar.

Note: There is no layer associated to an image.

Note: The Images tab does not display if the open project does not contain any
image. If there are several projects open, and one of the projects contains
some images, the related tab displays then.
Organization of Data 213

Project Cloud
A Project Cloud is a cloud node attached to the Models Tree in the
OfficeSurvey and Modeling modes (or in the Production mode). The aim of the
Project Cloud is to allow you to quickly find all points (or all unused points) of
the project.

Note: The contents of the Project Cloud are automatically displayed in the 3D
View after getting all points or getting remaining points.

Before 8.0, each Sub-project of a project has its own Project Cloud. Only
points belonging to the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project are loaded.

After saving (a project) in 8.0, the Project Cloud of each Sub-project is


converted to a Cloud with the same number of points. This Cloud has as name
"From "Sub-Project" name Cloud".
214 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The newly saved project has a unique Project Cloud with the same number of
points as the Project Cloud of the active Sub-Project of the old project.

Project Cloud Layer


The Project Cloud in RealWorks is a special cloud where usually points are not
yet processed. That's why it has a specific layer, named "Created, Never
Classified" with the ID 0. You are not allowed to change the Layer 0 of the
Project Cloud by another layer, or assign the Layer 0 to a cloud other than the
Project Cloud.
Organization of Data 215

Get all Points


When you load a project for the first time, the Project Cloud of the project is
empty. You have to load it with points. You have the choice of getting all points
or only unused ones. Once the Project Cloud is loaded with all points, you can
see the number of points in the corresponding attribute column.

To Get all Points:

1. Load first a project in RealWorks.


2. Select a project under the WorkSpace.
3. Select Project Cloud in the List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
5. Select Get All Points from the drop-down list.

Note: When you create a new project by importing TZF format file(s) (acquired
by a Trimble TX 3D scanner or from e.g. a TZS format file(s) conversion), you
may notice the number of points in the Project Cloud is equal to zero. This
number remains in this state until you perform your first extraction (of points)
from the TZF Scan(s).

Get the Remaining Points


After you have segmented points of a project and organized them into different
groups, there may remain some non-segmented and/or un-organized points. At
various moments, you may need to find/display these points. Once the Project
Cloud is loaded with all unused points, you can see the number of points in the
corresponding attribute column.

To Get Remaining Points:

1. Load first a project in RealWorks.


2. Select a project under the WorkSpace.
3. Select Project Cloud in the List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and then select Get Remaining
Points.
216 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Active Group
An Active Group is a group that you have selected. Note that an active group
can only be a project, a station, a group of models or a group of images.
Selecting an active group can be done in the Project Tree or in the List
window. By default, all new created objects will be put under this active group.
Organization of Data 217

Groups and Objects


The user will find information related to the identification of Group and Object
nodes in the WorkSpace and List windows.

In the WorkSpace Window


Each item of data displayed in the WorkSpace window is identified by its icon,
name and order in the Project Tree. Below is a list of icons appearing in the
four sub-trees.

WorkSpace
Project
Project, Opened
Unmatched target folder
Matched target folder
Station
Group of objects

In the List Window


Each item of data displayed in the List window is identified by its icon, name,
attributes and order in the Project Tree. Lists given hereafter are not
exhaustive and are given only as a guide.
218 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Scans Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Scans tab.

Station, Unleveled
Station, Leveled
Station, Leveled and Setup
Scan
Image
Etc.
Organization of Data 219

Models Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Models tab:

Project cloud
Group
. Models Group
Model as cloud
Model of box shape
Model of cylinder shape
Model of fitted cylinder shape
Model of plane shape
Model of fitted plane shape
Model of circular torus shape
Model of fitted circular torus shape
Model of sphere shape
Model of regular cone shape
Model of fitted Polyline
Model of fitted composite curve
Model of fitted mesh
Model of point-to-point distance measure
Model of angular measure
Model of 3D point measure
Etc.

Images Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Images tab:

Image, Imported
Image, Matched
Image, OrthoPhoto
220 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Targets Tab
Here is a list of icons that you can find in this window when you select the
Targets tab:

Target, Unmatched Group


Target, Matched Group
Target, Spherical
Target, Trimble Flat
Target, Fitted Sphere
TopoPoint
Etc.
Organization of Data 221

Model Groups
A Model Group is a group inside which each entity is related to its neighbor. It
can contain everything except a group. If there is a group within, the Set as
Model Group feature is dimmed. If there are some fitted entities within (entities
with cloud and geometry properties), only those with geometry property will be
considered. A Model Group, by its nature, offers the advantage of moving or
duplicating the whole set as a unique block by just selecting one of its child
entity.

Set a Group as a Model Group


To Set a Group as a Model Group:

1. Right-click on a group in the Project Tree.


2. Select Set as Model Group from the pop-up menu.

The selected group becomes a Model Group .

Set a Model Group as a Non Model Group


To Set a Model Group as a Non Model Group:

1. Right-click on a Model Group in the Project Tree.


2. Select Set as Non Model Group from the pop-up menu.

The selected Model Group .becomes a normal group .


222 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Duplicate a Model Group


You can duplicate a Model Group by using the Copy & Paste feature or the
Duplicator tool (in Modeling or Production module). The copied group inherits
of the property of its parent group and is named Copy of Models Group Name.

Duplication Rules:

 When selecting a Model Group, the Model Group is duplicated.


 When selecting an object from a Model Group, the entire Model Group is
duplicated.
 If the Model Group contains a frame, the frame is duplicated.
 With the Copy & Paste feature, the Model Group is duplicated at the same
position in the 3D View, and at the same level in the Project Tree.

 With the Duplicator (see "Duplicate" on page 1414) tool, if the Model
Group contains some objects that cannot be duplicated, the warning below
is displayed:

And the Models Group is duplicated several times, not the same position in the
3D View but along the defined path. All are put under the Duplication folder:
Organization of Data 223

Note: In case there are some fitted entities within the Model Group, only the
geometry property of the entities is duplicated.

Displace a Model Group


A Model Group, when moved, is moved as a single object in rotation (or
translation) in the Geometry Modifier (on page 1311) tool.
CHAPTER 5

Editing Data

We have introduced a point cloud loading tool for supporting huge amount of
points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into
memory and thus available for all the regular tools.
227

Drag and Drop an Item


The Drag & Drop functionality provides shortcut methods for performing
common tasks. You can use the drag and drop functionality to modify the
organization of the Project Tree according to conditions).

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Station No Yes (1)
Scan No No
Targets No No

In the Models Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)

In the Images Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Images No Yes (1)

(1) In a group with the same level or in a sub-level group

To Drag and Drop an Item:

1. Select a group (or object node(s)) that you want to drag and drop.
2. Press and hold the left mouse button while you drag the object to its
destination.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the object.

Note: The cursor changes to when you try to drag and drop an item for
which the operation cannot be performed.
228 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cut and Paste an Item


You can use the Cut/Paste functionality to delete or re-organize the Project
Tree according to conditions. It is important to note that you cannot apply these
operations to a scan or to an image; and these operations should be used
inside a project. Copying a group node will duplicate its contents.

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Station No Yes (1)
Scan No No
Targets No No

In the Models Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)

In the Images Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No Yes (1)
Images No Yes (1)

(1) In a group with the same level or in a sub-level group

To Cut an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree.


2. In the General group, select Cut.
3. Navigate through the Models Tree to select a new location.
4. In the General group, select Paste.

The selected object (or group of objects) is moved.

Note:
 You undo or redo the Cut operations you have previously performed.
Editing Data 229

 You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys: Ctrl + X for Cut and Ctrl + V for
Paste.

Note: The Cut command in the General group remains grayed out when you
select an item for which the cut cannot be performed.
230 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Copy and Paste an Item


You can use the Copy/Paste functionality to delete or re-organize the Project
Tree according to conditions. It is important to note that you cannot apply this
operation to a scan or to an image; and this operation should be used inside a
project. Copying a group node will duplicate its contents.

In the Scans Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No No
Station No No
Scan No No
Targets No No

In the Models Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Project Cloud No No
Group No Yes (1)
Object No Yes (1)

In the Images Tree:

From: To:
Project Group
Project No No
Group No No
Images No No

(1) In a group with the same level or in a sub-level group

To Copy an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree.


2. In the General group, select Copy.
3. Navigate through the Models Tree to select a new location.
4. In the General group, select Paste.

The selected object (or group of objects) is duplicated. A copied object has as
name Copy of "Name_Of_The_Object_To_Copy".

Note:
Editing Data 231

 You undo or redo the Copy operations you have previously performed.
 You can also pick an object directly in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can use the following shortcut-keys: Ctrl + C for Copy and Ctrl + V for
Paste.

Note: The Copy command from the General group remains grayed out when
you select an item for which the copy cannot be performed.
232 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete an Item
This command can be used to delete objects from the RealWorks database. It
is important to note that you cannot delete a station, a scan or an image in the
Scans Tree, the unmatched target group in the Targets Tree and the Project
Cloud in the Models Tree.

To Delete an Item:

1. Select an object (or a group of objects) from the Models Tree.


2. In the General group, select Delete.
3. Click Yes to delete.
4. Or click No to abort.

Note: You can also use the Del key instead of selecting the Delete command
from the menu bar.
Editing Data 233

Create a New Group Node


This command allows you to create a new group. You can do this in the four
sub-trees.

To Create a New Group Node:

1. Select a project/group object from the Project Tree.


2. In the General group, select New Group.

• An empty folder whose name is immediately editable in the List window,


is created in the hierarchy tree.

Tip: You can also choose the New Group command from the pop-up menu in
the WorkSpace window.
234 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change a Name
You can change the name of an object in two places: either in the
WorkSpace/List window, or in the Property window. You can rename all
objects except the project node itself, the Project Cloud and unmatched
targets.

To Rename in the Property Window:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree and right-click to display the pop-up
menu.
2. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. The Property window opens.
3. Click in the Name field. The selected object name becomes editable.
4. Enter a new name.
5. Press Enter.

To Rename in the WorkSpace Window:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree.


2. Left-click twice on the name of the found object.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Press Enter.

Note: You can also select an object and use the F2 key to rename it.
235

Project
The Project group, on the Edit tab, in the Production and Registration modules,
gathers the features that apply a transformation to a project by changing its
UCS frame, by merging some of them, etc.

Note: The UCS Creation tool and the Set as Home UCS feature are not
available in the Registration module.
236 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Shift a Project
You can manually apply a shift to a project. It is not necessary to select it for
that. Any item in the Project Tree can be used. This tool can be used in any
processing mode (OfficeSurvey/Modeling (or Production), or Registration).

To Shift a Project:

1. Select an item from the Project Tree.


2. In the Project group, select Shift Project. The Shift Project dialog opens.
3. Enter the coordinates of a vector in the Define Vector Shift field.
4. Click Apply. The Shift Project dialog closes. A dialog opens.
5. Click Yes. The dialog closes.

For a station, the scanner origin changes,


For an image, its camera position changes,
For a geometry, its center changes,
Etc.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Flip the Vertical Axis of a Project


The user is able to apply a rotation to the Home Frame to change its verticality,
by reversing its X and Z Axes. This transformation, once selected, will be
applied to the X and Y coordinates of all objects of the current projects, except
to images or anything is related, like TZF Scan thumbnails.

To Flip the Vertical Axis of a Project:

1. If there is a unique open project open, no selection is required.


2. If there are multiple open projects, select one from the Project Tree.
3. Select an item from the Project Tree.
4. In the Project group, select Flip Project Vertical Axis. A dialog opens.
5. Click Yes. The dialog closes.

Note: You can undo the operation.


Editing Data 237

Merge Several Projects in One


You can merge several projects into a single project. After merging, a new
project with the name Merge Project is created.

To Merge Several Projects in One:

1. Select at least two projects from the Project Tree.


2. In the Project group, click the Merge Projects icon.

 For each project that has been modified and not yet saved, a dialog
appears and prompts you to save it.
 If you choose No, projects (to merge) will be then closed and unsaved.
 In the other hand, the merged project will take all changes (from the
projects (to merge) into account.

Caution: There is no undo once projects are merged together other than to not
save the merged project.

Scans Tree
Stations from different projects are merged under the same project and are
renamed according to the project they belong to.

1 - Stations from two different projects under the 2 - Stations under the merged project
WorkSpace window
238 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Models Tree
Objects (Group, Cloud, etc.) from different projects are merged under the same
project and are renamed according to the project they belong to.

1 - Objects from two different projects under the 3 - Objects under the merged project
WorkSpace node
2 - Merged project

Note: The Project Cloud of the merged project is the sum of all Project Clouds.
Editing Data 239

Targets Tree
Unmatched entities are merged under the same group (called Unmatched) and
matched entities (gathered in pairs) are put by order under the merged project.
Pairs sharing the same name and the same order than those in the first loaded
project (first from the Project Tree) have their number changed in order to
continue the numbering*.

1 - Matched and unmatched 2 - Pairs of matched entities 3 - Matched and unmatched


entities from two different numbered from 001 to 010 entities in the merged project
projects under the WorkSpace becomes pairs of matched
node entities numbered from 007 to
016 in the merged project

Caution: (*) Only pairs are renumbered, not the entities inside.
240 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Images Tree
In the Images Tree, images of each tree are placed under a folder named after
the old project. If all images are named IMAGEX where X is an order, all are
renamed. The first image, from the first selected project and at the root of the
Image Tree, is renamed to IMAGE1, the second IMAGE2, and so on.

Images Tree BEFORE merging

In the example below, IMAGE3 from AtelierBatB is renamed IMAGE1. The


project to which each image belongs is indicated between brackets. If all
images are different; like e.g. A, B, C, etc. All keep their name.
Editing Data 241

Images Tree AFTER merging

Note: Feature code libraries having the same name are also merged (Feature
codes of same name belonging to a library having the same name are
duplicated).
242 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Project Layers
When you select several projects you want to merge into one, the layer tables
will be also merged into one according two options:

 Merge Classification Layers That Have the Same Class IDs:

The layers with the same ID will be merged into a unique layer. The name of
the merged layer will be the name of the layer belonging to the first project (in
selection).

Or

 Keep Classification Layers and Reassign Class IDs:

The layers won't be merged. The layers of the second (in order of selection),
third, etc. project will be added to the layers of the first project, in the layer
table by concatenation.

Project [A]:

Project [B]:
Editing Data 243

Project [B] + Project [A]:


244 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save the Merged Project


A merged project is always unsaved. You have to manually save it by selecting
Save (or Save As). Once done, a RealWorks project file and a folder,
respectively with the RWP and RWI extensions, are created. A set of RWC and
RWV files for versions of RealWorks before 8.0 (or RWCX and RWV files for
RealWorks 8.0) is created. RWC and RWCX are cloud format files. RWV is an
image format file.

In the RWI folder of the merged project, RWV files from the first project (in
order of selection) have their name kept while those coming from the other
projects are renamed in order to continue the numbering. For RWC (or RWCX)
files, their name also changes according the name given by the user and
following the same numbering rule as for the RWV files.
Editing Data 245
246 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Projects With TZF Scan Files Outside the RWI Folder


If the selected projects contain TZF Scan files but these files are out of the
project folder (RWI), RWC and RWV files for versions of RealWorks before 8.0
(or RWCX and RWV files for RealWorks 8.0) are copied into the RWI folder of
the merged project. TZF Scan files are not copied anymore into the RWI folder.
Links to the original TZF Scan files are kept.
Editing Data 247

Projects With TZF Scan Files Inside the RWI Folder


If one of the projects contains TZF Scan files in its project folder (RWI), the
TZF Scan Files Management dialog appears.

With the Copy TZF Scan Files into the New Project option selected, TZF Scan
files which are located inside the RWI folder of the project(s) to merge are
copied into the RWI folder of the merged project.

Caution: Be aware that this operation may take a long time.

With the Do Not Copy TZF Scan Files option, all TZF Scan files are not copied
into the RWI folder of the merged project. Link to the original TZF Scan files is
kept. Note that you can manually copy these TZF Scan files later by choosing
Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project in the TZF Scan group.
248 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create an UCS
RealWorks enables to create any number of frames. Each of them may be
selected and set as Active Frame. When a frame is designated as the Active
Frame, all coordinates will be represented relative to this frame. This allows the
user to perform its modeling or to take measurements in any arbitrary default
frame and to represent them in a frame that better describes the data. The
UCS (User Coordinates System) Creation tool provides you with several
methods to create such frames and almost all of them are mainly based on
pickings; which can be constrained or free.
Editing Data 249

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. If needed, select an object (point cloud or geometry) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Project group, click the UCS pull-down arrow.
3. Choose UCS Creation from the list. The UCS Creation dialog opens as
well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.

Inside the UCS Creation tool, we distinguish two groups of methods to build a
frame: "Without Constraints" and "With Constraints". Below is a detailed
description of the UCS Creation tool.

A temporary frame in yellow appears in the middle of the scene. If the default
origin is too far from the displayed scene; RealWorks will prompt you to set it
so that it matches the scene’s center.

Tip: You can open the UCS Creation tool by clicking its related icon in the
Active Frame toolbar.
250 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Select a Reference Frame


If the project, that you loaded, contains more than one frame; you can choose
one as the Reference Frame. A Reference Frame is a frame in which the
coordinates of a frame to be created will be expressed. Otherwise, the Select
Reference Frame field is dimmed and the reference frame will be the default
frame (Home).

To Select a Reference Frame:

1. Click the pull down arrow in Step 1.


2. Select a frame from the drop-down list.

Build a Frame without Constraints


To build a frame, you can define each of its items by specifying the
coordinates, by picking points (seven are required if you wish to construct the
whole frame using this method, two per axis and one for the origin), by fitting
an axis with a plane, by picking points (origin and two directions) or by picking
an object's local frame. For a given frame, you can mix these sub-methods
(except for picking three points). Note that the coordinates for the three axes
will be automatically normalized.

Specify Coordinates
With this method, neither selection nor display is required.

To Specify Coordinates:

1. Enter the 3D coordinates of point in the Origin field.


2. Enter a direction in the X-Axis field.
3. Enter a direction in the Y-Axis field.
4. Enter a direction in the Z-Axis field.
5. Click Reset (if required).
Editing Data 251

Pick Points
This method is not based on the selection but the display. A display can be
done before (or after) entering the UCS Creation tool and it should be of point
cloud (or of mesh) type.

To Pick Points:

1. Click the Pick Origin icon.


2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed object(s).
3. Click the Pick Axis ( , or ) icon.

The yellow frame is hidden.

4. Pick two points (free or constrained).

The two points give a direction to the chosen axis.


252 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The orientation of the yellow frame changes according to the new direction of
the chosen axis.

5. Repeat the steps from 3 to 4 for the two other axes.


6. Click Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).
Editing Data 253

Fit an Axis
This method is not based on the selection but on the display. A display can be
done before (or after) entering the UCS Creation tool and it should be of point
cloud type; otherwise the three Fit Axis icons are dimmed.

To Fit an Axis:

1. Click the Fit Axis icon. The Fitting toolbar appears.


2. Fence an area on the displayed point cloud.
3. Choose In to keep points inside the fence.
4. Or choose Out to keep points outside the fence.
5. Click Plane. A plane is extracted from kept points and its normal gives the
direction of the axis.

1 - The Fitting toolbar 3 - A plane extracted from points inside the


2 - The drawn fence drawn fence

6. Click Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).

Note: The Create Fitted Geometry icon in the Fitting toolbar which is dimmed
means that you are not able to save the result in the database.

Tip:
 Instead of selecting Close Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also
double-click or press on the Space Bar of your keyboard to close the
fence.
 Instead of clicking on an icon in the Fitting toolbar, you can also select its
related command from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key: I
for In, O for Out.
254 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: You are able to perform a lasso selection by using the Shift.

Pick the Local Frame of an Object


You can construct a new frame such that it becomes the local frame of the
selected object.

To Pick the Local Frame of an Object:

1. Click the Pick Object Local Frame icon. The cursor takes the following

shape:
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selected object.
4. Select Display Geometry from the pop-up menu.
5. Pick a point (free or constrained).

1 - The top picture shows a picked object 2 - Its associated local frame now becomes the
constructed frame and is shown in yellow

6. Click Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).

Note: Picking another object will cancel the frame you have just constructed.
Editing Data 255

Take the Axis of an Axial Geometry as Axis


To Take the Axis of an Axial Geometry as Axis:

1. Click e.g. the Take the Axis of an Axial Geometry as X-Axis icon. The

cursor takes the following shape:


2. In the 3D View, pick an entity with an axial direction.

 The values in the X-Axis field are updated with the values of the picked
entity's axis direction.
256 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Points


To build a frame by picking three points, you have the following options: Pick 3
Points (Origin, X direction, Y direction) , Pick 3 Points (Origin, Y direction, Z
direction) and Pick 3 Points (Origin, Z direction, X direction) . Once three
points are picked, a right-angled frame will be created.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click the Change 3 Points Pick Mode pull down arrow.


2. Choose a picking mode from the drop-down list.
3. Pick three points on the displayed object(s).

1 - The first picked point 2 - The third picked point

The first picked point will be the origin of the frame you wish to create.
The second picked point will form with the first one the first vector.
The third picked point will form with the first one the second vector.

4. Click Reset to cancel the parameters of the new frame (if required).

Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu or press Esc to
cancel the frame in progress.
Editing Data 257

Build a Frame with Constraints


You can build a frame under constraint either by locking one of its components,
e.g. its origin or axis, or by rotating around an axis. No more than two
components can be locked at once; it’s always a pair formed by the origin and
an axis. You cannot lock two axes together.

Lock the Origin


To Lock the Origin:

1. Define an Origin and lock it by clicking the Lock Origin icon.

2. Define the X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Z-Axis. For each, do one of the following:

 Enter its 3D coordinates,


 Take the axis of an axial geometry as axis,
 Pick two points to define an axis,
 Fit an axis.
3. Or use the three-point pick mode .
4. Click Reset to cancel the parameters (if required).
258 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Lock an Axis
To Lock an Axis:

1. Define e.g. the X-Axis and click the Lock X-Axis icon.

2. Define the Origin.


3. Define the Y-Axis and Z-Axis. For each, do one of the following:

 Enter its 3D coordinates,


 Take the axis of an axial geometry as axis,
 Pick two points to define an axis,
 Fit an axis.
4. Click Reset if required.

Note: If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes
dimmed (Y and Z in this example) and the locked axis (X) checked by default.
Editing Data 259

Lock the Origin and an Axis


To Lock the Origin and an Axis:

1. Define an origin and click the Lock Origin icon.


2. Define e.g. the X-Axis and click the Lock X-Axis icon.

3. Define the Y-Axis and Z-Axis. For each, do one of the following:

 Enter its 3D coordinates,


 Take the axis of an axial geometry as axis,
 Pick two points to define an axis,
 Fit an axis.

4. Click Reset (if required).

Note: If you open the Turn Around dialog, you may see the unlocked axes
dimmed (Y and Z in the example) and the locked axis (X) checked by default.
260 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate Around an Axis


To Rotate Around an Axis:

1. Click the Turn Around Axis icon. The Turn Around dialog opens.

2. Check an option among X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis.


3. Enter a value in the Specify Angle field.

 If the default unit of measurement has set in degrees; you do not need to
enter “°”.
 You can change the default unit of measurement in the Preferences
dialog.

4. Click Apply. In the 3D View, you may see the yellow frame turns around
the selected axis and of the specified angle.
5. Click again Apply. The yellow frame turns again around the selected axis
and of the specified angle.
6. Click Close. The Turn Around dialog closes.

Note: If you can combine e.g. the Lock Z Axis feature with the Turn Around
Axis feature. In the Turn Around dialog; only the Z Axis is available as it is used
as a constraint and the others are dimmed.
Editing Data 261

Build a Frame from a Geometry


This feature uses the intrinsic shape of a geometry and the position of the point
that you picked to build a frame. Not all kinds (of geometry) can be used with
the feature but only those enumerate hereafter: Box, Cylinder, Cone and
Extrusion.

To Build a Frame from a Geometry:

1. Click the Build Frame From Geometry icon. The cursor takes the

following shape: .
2. In the 3D View, pick a geometry.
262 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From a Box
A Box has six Faces, eight Vertices and twelve Edges. The position of the
point you picked on the box determines the Origin of the frame to create.
Normally this Origin should be on:

 The Face (F) whose position is the lowest along the Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
 The Vertex (V4) whose position is the closest to the picked point.

The three axes of the frame to be created are oriented so that:

 The Edge (E4) that is the most parallel to the Z-Axis (of the current frame)
gives the direction of the Z-Axis (of the frame to create).
Editing Data 263

From a Cylinder
A Cylinder has two Bases connected by a curved surface, and an Axis joining
the center of each base. No matter the position of the Point (P) that you picked
on the Cylinder, the Origin of the frame to be created should be on:

 The Base (B) whose position is the lowest along Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
 The Center (C2) of the Base (B2).

The Z-Axis of the frame to be created is the Axis of the cylinder while the X-
Axis and Y-Axis are randomly oriented.
264 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From a Cone (or Eccentric Cone)


A Cone has two Bases connected by a curved surface, and an Axis joining the
center of each base. No matter the position of the Point (P) that you picked on
the Cylinder, the Origin of the frame to be created should be on:

 The Base (B) whose position is the lowest along Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
 The Center (C2) on the Base (B2).

The Z-Axis of the frame to be created is the Axis of the cylinder while the X-
Axis and Y-Axis are randomly oriented.
Editing Data 265

From an Extrusion
An Extrusion is an entity coming from the conversion of a 2D Sketch into a 3D
Object. The position of the point you picked on an extrusion determines the
Origin of the frame to be created. Normally this Origin should be on:

 The Face (F) whose position is the lowest along the Z-Axis (of the current
frame).
 The Vertex (V4) whose position is the closest to the Point (P) you picked.

The three axes of the frame to be created are oriented so that:

 The extrusion axis gives the direction of the Z-Axis.


 The X-Axis and Y-Axis are as close as possible to the two Edges (V3-V4
and V4-V5) of the Face (F).
266 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Built Frame


Once you have built a frame, you can create it in the database. You can use
the Set As Active Frame option to set it as an active frame. If you leave the
UCS Creation tool without creating the newly built frame, a dialog opens and
prompts you to create (or not) the frame.

To Create the Built Frame:

1. Check the Set As Active Frame option (if required).


2. Click Create. A new frame, with the "Unclassified" layer and whose name
is OBJECTX where X is its order is created in the Models Tree.
3. Click Close. The UCS Creation dialog closes.

Note: Press Esc (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the
UCS Creation tool.

Tip: Instead of clicking Create, you can also select Create Frame from the
pop-up menu.

Set as Home UCS


Each project has a Home UCS under which all data reside. If needed, you can
select one of the frames of the project and set it as the new Home UCS. It is
important to note that this operation will transform the coordinates of the whole
database to this new frame. You can use this operation to orient, for example,
a building scene so that its Z-axis is perpendicular to its ground plane, and its
origin is on a specific corner of a building. The difference between this
operation and that of setting Active frame is that in the latter case, there is no
coordinate transformation.

To Set as Home UCS:

1. Select a coordinate frame from the List window.


2. In the Project group, click the UCS pull-down arrow.
3. Choose Set as Home UCS from the list.

Note: There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Set As Home UCS feature can be reached from the
UCS list, in the Project group.
267

TZF Scan
For a better usage in RealWorks, TZF Scans depending on their origin (issued
directly from a Trimble TX 3D scanner or converted from another format) may
require to improve their quality with post-processing or re-projection
operations. Other operations described in this chapter allow extracting 3D or
image information.

Data coming from a Trimble FX instrument is stored in a C3D format file. Such
data (in C3D format) once processed (in the Trimble FX Controller software) is
saved as a Trimble Scan File (with TZS file extension). Files with such
extension should now be converted to the TZF format, otherwise you cannot
open them.

In the Registration module, the operations related to the TZF Scans are
gathered on the Edit tab, in the TZF Scan group:

And also in the Production module, in the TZF Scan group:


268 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Color TZF Scans


Trimble RealColor is a solution for easily and efficiently coloring TZF Scans.
The RealColor feature is available with the following types of license: Base,
Advanced, Advanced Modeler, Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank.

To Color TZF Scans:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations).


2. In the TZF Scan group, click the Open RealColor icon.

Warning: A message is displayed if one (or more) TZF format file(s) is (or are)
missing in the project (loaded through RealWorks or if the project is not
compatible with Trimble RealColor.

Note:
 If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: For more information related to Trimble RealColor, refer please to its
FAQ.

Post-Process TZF Scans


A TZF Scan, before being able to be used as the input of a tool, must be post-
processed. A post-processing procedure is an operation applied on the data in
order to improve the contrast and the luminance and to correct the noise effect.
This operation must only be done once (per TZF Scan) and there is no undo.
In addition to the post-processing operation, the user can compress the TZF
Scan file(s) by reducing its size about by half. If you decline to post-process a
TZF Scan, you cannot then work with that TZF Scan.

Caution: An error message appears if the TZF Scan(s) to process is (or are)
read-only.

Note: Your graphic card must be Open CL 1.1 compatible (or higher) and the
driver up to date. Otherwise a warning (in the Processing TZF Scans dialog)
appears and post-processing TZF Scan(s) may take a long time.
Editing Data 269

Create Thumbnails
The Create Thumbnails feature allows you to create Thumbnails in batch
processing mode or not. In the batch processing mode, the user interaction is
not required and a set of Thumbnails is created (one per TZF file). Out of the
batch processing mode, the user interaction is required and one Thumbnail is
created for a given TZF file. A Thumbnail is a preview of a TZF file within
RealWorks.

To Create Thumbnails:

1. Select a project or a station (or set of stations).


2. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Create Thumbnails icon.

 For each TZF format file, a Thumbnail is created.


 The created Thumbnail is put under its related station in the Scans Tree
and as a list in the Images Tree.
 Each thumbnail has the following name: Thumbnail_ its related TZF file
Name.

Note: If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are
then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the same
folder as the TZF format files.

By default, a Thumbnail is not shown in the 3D View. You need to toggle the
On/Off icon to On to display it as a thumbnail in the 3D View. You can then
drag and drop the thumbnail to any location within the 3D View. To hide the
thumbnail; you have choice between toggling Off the On/Off icon and clicking
on the Close button at the top right corner.
270 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note:
 If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.
Editing Data 271

Create Station Images from TZF Scan Color


This feature enables you to view panoramic images issued from colorized TZF
Scans in the Station-Based mode and use them for texturing a mesh. See
Trimble RealColor to know how to colorize TZF Scans.

To Create Station Images from TZF Scan Color:

1. Select a project, a set of stations containing colored TZF Scans, or a set of


colorized TZF Scans.
2. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Create Station Images
from TZF Scan Color icon.

For each TZF Scan, a set of six matched images is created, one for each face
of a cube map centered on the station location.
Each matched image is named after the name of the TZF scan followed by
information related to its orientation (Front, Back, etc.).
All created images are put under a folder named according to the station
name.

Each matched image has a size which is determined by the level of the used
TZF Scan as specified below:

Level 1: 3105 x 3105


Level 2: 6211 x 6211
272 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Level 3: 1243 x 1243


Extended: 9317 x 9317

3. If required, switch to the Station-Based mode.

Note: When you select a station with several TZF Scans, only the Main Scan
will be considered in the creation process.

Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Project


There are two cases in which TZF format files are not present in the project
folder (RWI). The first case is when a project has been created directly from
TZF format files. The second case is when some projects (with TZF format files
in the RWI folder) have been merged together and these TZF format files have
not been copied into the RWI folder of the merged project. In both cases, the
link to the original TZF format files is preserved. This feature enables to copy
the original TZF format files into the RWI folder.

To Copy Original TZF Scan Files Into Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. In the TZF Scan group, click the Get TZF Scan Files icon

Caution: A TZF Scan, for which the link to the TZF format file is broken, has
the following representation . You cannot copy such TZF format files into
the RWI folder.
Editing Data 273

Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan Files


Displacing a lone (or a set of) TZF format file(s) from its folder will break the
correspondence with the station(s) created within RealWorks. You can no
longer add new scans to the project*. The Modify Path For TZF Input File(s)
command allows you to restore that correspondence by changing the path to
the TZF format files.

To Modify the Path for the Input TZF Scan Files:

1. First create new stations (in batch processing mode or in interactive


mode)**.
2. Then select either the Project, or the "New Group" or a station.
3. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Modify TZF Path icon.
The Select New File Folder dialog opens. The default folder is the one
storing the opened project.
4. Navigate to the new location of TZF files stored in the In field.
5. Select the folder and click OK. The Select New File Folder dialog closes
and the Information dialog below appears.

6. Click OK to close the information.

Note:
 You may see the path to a TZF format file by displaying its related
station's properties (see Input Data Path Name line).
 (*) Trying to add new scans without changing the path to the TZF format
files will open a dialog which prompts you to continue with the remaining
stations or not.
274 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: When opening a project with TZF station(s) created out of RealWorks,
the correspondence(s) (from the TZF station(s) to the TZF format file(s)) will be
automatically updated only if the TZF format file(s) is (or are) in the RWI folder
(of the Project).
Editing Data 275

Color Points by Height


This feature will apply a rendering to the point clouds according to the height of
each point along the Z (or EI) axis. This rendering will be applied to both
loaded and unloaded points.

To Generate Point Color-Coding by Height:

1. Select a project (or a set of projects).


2. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Color Points by Height
icon. A dialog opens warning you that the operation is definitive and may
take a long time.
3. Click Yes to continue.
4. Click No to abort.

A warning appears showing the stations for which the required information is
missing.

Note: The Rendering option will automatically swap to True Color.


276 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Re-Project TZF Scans


A TZF Scan issued from a Trimble TX 3D scanner may have an issue due to a
shift between the real angles and the theoretical grid. In other word, there is a
significant shift between a pixel on the 2.5 Preview image and the 3D Point that
is behind. The Re-Project TZF Scans feature enables to correct this mismatch
by re-projecting each 3D Point onto its related pixel.

To Re-Project TZF Scans:

1. Select a TZF Scan (or a station or a project with TZF Scan files within).
2. In the TZF Scan group, on the Edit tab, click the Re-Project TZF Scans
icon.

 A progress bar appears at the bottom left corner of the user interface.
 TZF Scans are processed one after the other (in the case a station (with
several TZF Scans or a project has been selected).

Note: When you perform an operation on a station, its leveling status is first
checked. If the station is Leveled, all its TZF Scans are automatically re-
projected. If the station is Unleved, the user has to re-project all the TZF Scans
manually as described above.

You can manually set a leveled station (with TZF Scans within) to unleveled.
This change (in the station leveling status) has no impact on the TZF Scans
themselves. The leveling information is still present in the TZF Scans. The TZF
Scans are automatically re-projected.
Editing Data 277

Note: The Re-Project TZF Scans feature is only available in the Registration
mode.

Note: If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

Remove Points from TZF Scans


This feature lets you remove points from TZF Scans. There are some
prerequisites to observe. All are listed here after:

 A project with TZF Scans,


 All points have been extracted from TZF Scan(s),
 One TZF Scan per station,
 In the case there are several TZF Scans per station, all the scans will be
considered.
 Points to remove need to be first isolated and then put a part in a specific
folder.
 For best results, make sure the scans have been re-projected. Otherwise
the eradication may not be*.

Note: (*) Only with TZF Scans coming from a Trimble TX instrument.
278 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract all Points from TZF Scan(s)


To Extract All Points from TZF Scan(s):

1. In the Scans Tree, select the station(s) containing the TZF Scan(s) for
which the extraction is required.
2. In Registration, in the Scan group of the Edit tab, click the Create Sampled
Scans icon. The Sampled Scan Creation dialog opens.
3. In the Sampling panel, choose "Sampling by Step" from the drop-down
menu (if not done).
4. In the Step (in Pixels) field, enter One.

5. Click OK. The Sampled Scan Creation dialog closes.

 The sampling scan data process is launched for each TZF Scan selected.
 Once finished, a scan is created per TZF Scan.

Note: You can abort each sampling process by pressing Esc.


Editing Data 279

Select Points to Remove


To Select Points to Remove:

1. Switch to Production (as processing mode).


2. In the General group on the Edit tab, click the New Group icon. A new
group is created under the Models tree.
3. If required, rename the newly created group* to e.g. "Points to Delete".

4. In the Models tree, select Project Cloud.


5. Select Get All Points from the pop-up menu.

6. If required, display points of the Project Cloud by turning the bulb to On.
7. In the Cloud group, click the Segmentation icon. The Segmentation toolbar
appears.
8. Double-click on the "Points to Delete" folder to select it.
9. Select a portion of points to remove by fencing an area.
10. Create the set of points (by clicking Create).
11. Repeat the steps if required.
280 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

All created Clouds are put under the "Points to Delete" folder.

12. Leave the Segmentation tool by clicking Close Tool.

Tip: (*) With the Property window open, select the newly created folder. In the
Name line (of the Property window), enter a new name.

Remove Points
To Remove Points:

1. Under the "Points to Delete" folder, select the Cloud(s) to remove.


2. In the TZF Scan group, click the Remove Points from TZF icon.

 As the eradication of points leads to the modification of the TZF files, a


warning appears and prompts you to make the backup of all the original
TZF files before applying the operation.
 When points are eradicated, only their 3D coordinates are removed from
the TZF Scans. Neither the color nor the luminance are removed.

Caution: Points that are isolated (from the extraction) and eradicated (from the
TZF Scan(s)) are not deleted from the RealWorks project.

Tip: As the eradication of points is time consuming, we advise you to not apply
the operation for each point cloud (to remove) but once all point clouds (to
remove) have been created.

Tip: In the RWI folder, an image (PNG format) is created showing in red the
points that have been removed as a result of the eradication process. The
image file name is based the TZF file name.
Editing Data 281

Convert to TZF Files


You can use the Create TZF Scan feature in the Registration module, or in the
Production module, for creating TZF Scans. In Registration module, the
creation is based on stations while in Production it is based on clouds.

In Registration, the input selection can be either: one station, a set of stations,
a group containing stations (a folder or the project). When a selection contains
at least one station that contains scans, the tool will be available. It will be
grayed out otherwise. Survey Points are not considered as scans (they don’t
count in the selection and they are not exported to TZF).

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. In Registration, select either a project, or one or more stations from the


Scans Tree.
2. In the TZF Scan group, click the Create TZF Scan icon.

 The Create TZF Scan dialog comes up with two modes: Automatic and
Advanced. The last mode in use is by default selected.
 If the project is not saved yet, you will be prompted to save it (in the
RealWorks format).

Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the Create TZF Scan dialog
different from the number of images in the project.
282 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose the Automatic Mode


The Automatic mode requires no input. All the parameters are grayed out.

To Choose the Automatic Mode:

1. In the Create TZF Scan dialog, check the Automatic option.

If there is no image in your selection, the dialog looks as illustrated below and
the Number of Images is equal to 0/0.

If there are images in your selection, but their type cannot be determined, the
dialog looks as illustrated below:
Editing Data 283

If there are images in your selection, and all have been acquired using a
Trimble SX10 instrument, all the types will be automatically selected. All points
will be colored with the images issued from the camera having the highest
priority. The Telescope camera is the higher in priority while the Overview
camera is the lowest.
284 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If no TZF Scan is available in the project, the default Resolution, which is


of 128 MPixels, will be used. This resolution corresponds more or less to
the Level 2 of the Trimble TX instrument or to the Overview camera of the
Trimble SX10 instrument.
 If one or more TZF Scan exist, the resolution of the Main Scan will be
used.

Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.

2. Click the OK button. The Create TZF Scan dialog closes.


Editing Data 285

Choose the Advance Mode


In the Advanced mode, the user has to input all the parameters needed to
perform a custom conversion (to TZF). The Advanced mode needs to be used
to overcome the limitations of the Automatic mode.

To Choose the Advanced Mode:

1. In the Create TZF Scan dialog, check the Advanced option.

If there is no image in your selection, the dialog looks as illustrated below and
the Number of Images is equal to 0/0.

If there are images in your selection, but their type cannot be determined, the
dialog looks as illustrated below:
286 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

If there are images in your selection, and all have been acquired using a
Trimble SX10 instrument, then you can choose the image type(s) to colorize
the points by using the corresponding option(s).
Editing Data 287

Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.

2. Select the Image Type(s) by checking the corresponding option(s).


3. Enter a value in the Grid Resolution field, and type Enter.
4. If required, click the Default button.
5. Click OK. The Create TZF Scan dialog closes.

No Images, and no Scans


When the selection contains neither images nor scans, nothing will occur and
no TZF Scan(s) will be created as the Create TZF Scan feature is dimmed.

One or more Images, and no Scans


When the selection contains one or more image(s) but no scan data, nothing
will occur and no TZF Scan(s) will be created as the Create TZF Scan feature
is dimmed.

No Images, and Some Scans


When the selection contains no image(s) but only scan data:

 In the Automatic mode, TZF will be created with 5 layers (3 for the
positions, 1 for the intensity, one for color). The Default resolution* will be
used. TZF coverage will be based on the area that has been scanned: full
dome will be projected in the { [0, 2π[; [0, π[ } domain while smaller
scanned area will be projected accordingly to a smaller domain (TZF are
cropped). The Intensity layer will be cosmetically filled up with interpolated
values where there are small holes. Bigger holes will remain untouched.
 In the Advanced mode; the resolution that will be used is the resolution
defined by the user. No negative value nor a value equal to zero can be
input.
288 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Some Images, and Some Scans


If both the images and the scan data are found under the selection to be
converted:

 In the Automatic mode, the Default resolution will be used. All points will
be projected at the measured distance to pick up color. A small cosmetical
filtering will be applied to fill up small isolated holes. Bigger unmeasured
area will remain uncolored (black). This is to avoid any confusion when
proper coloring is not possible and when the TZF might be used for
measure in Trimble Scan Explorer. TZF will be cropped to fit the input
domain.
 In the Advanced mode; the resolution that will be used is the resolution
defined by the user. No negative value nor a value equal to zero can be
input.
Editing Data 289

Created TZF Scans


In Registration:

If a single station has been selected, a unique TZF Scan will be created in the
station and will be named Scan X where X is its order. X is equal to one if no
TZF Scan is available in the project. It will be incremented of one from the last
TZF Scan of the project, if there are some TZF Scans in the project.

If the whole project (or a set of stations) has (have) been selected, a unique
TZF Scan per station will be created. You may see the conversion in progress
by observing the status bar.

For each TZF Scan created, a TZF format file will be created under the RWI
folder. The TZF format file name is based on the name of the station. If a TZF
format file already exists with a certain name, the new one will be created with
an incremental suffix, i.e.: Station.tzf, Station (2).tzf, Station (3).tzf, etc.

In OfficeSurvey/Modeling or Production:

From a selection of clouds, points will be sorted by station. For each station, a
TZF Scan will be created. Created TZF name is based on the name of the
station and adds a "_cloud" suffix to it. If a TZF format file already exists with a
certain name, the new one will be created with an incremental suffix, i.e.:
Station_cloud.tzf, Station_cloud (2).tzf, Station_cloud (3).tzf, etc. You may see
the conversion in progress by observing the status bar.
291

Scan
In the Edit tab, the Scans group looks as illustrated below, in Registration:

And as shown below in Production where the Limit Box Extraction tool and the
Change Cloud Color feature are not present.

Limit Box Extraction


The Limit Box Extraction tool combines two features. With the first feature, you
can create small sections for evaluating the registration results, drawing
polylines or just getting a clearer view of a specific area. With the second
feature, you can extract full density of points from the selection area. You can
be in any processing mode (OfficeSurvey/Modeling (or Production), or
Registration) to use the Limit Box Extraction tool.
292 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

 In the Scan group, click the Limit Box Extraction icon. The cursor

becomes as follows .

The Limit Box Extraction toolbar opens as well as the Picking Parameters
toolbar.
If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the 3D
View; the object remains selected with its limit box.

1 - Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside 3 - Select Limit Box Center Point
the Limit Box 4 - Change Limit Box Center Point
2 - Show Limit Box 5 - Limit Boxes

To be able to leave the Limit Box Extraction tool, you need to first define a
position by picking a point on the displayed objects, or select Close Center On
Point from the pop-up menu, or press Esc. and then choose either Close Tool
or Esc.

Note: No selection is required to activate the tool. It is based on what is


displayed in the 3D View.
Editing Data 293

Define the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Define the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries*.

 The Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate icons become enabled as well as the
Sampling field, the Extract Points from TZF Scans and Close Tool icons.
 The Show Limit Box and Modify Shape icons become enabled and
selected.

1 - Modify Shape 4 – Canoincal Views


2 – Pan 5 – Store the current Limit Box
3 - Rotate 6 - Extract Points from TZF Scans
7 - Close Tool

 A limit box is displayed centered on the picked point which is set to the
center of the screen.
 The manipulator which appears with the limit box depends on the feature
that has been last used, i.e., among Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
 If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the
3D View; the object remains selected with its bounding box.

2. If required, edit the properties of the Limit Box.


3. Do one of the following:

 Clip a specific area and check displayed points on that area.


 Clip a specific area, extract points from TZF Scans and check extracted
points on that area.

Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point
from the pop-up menu.

Edit the Properties of a Limit Box


A limit box is a three-dimensional figure with six square faces. It is used to
isolate a region on clouds and/or geometries.
294 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Select the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Click the Select Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to show

the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.

 The limit box is then centered on the picked point which is set to the center
of the screen.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point from
the pop-up menu.

Change the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Change the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries.

 The limit box is then centered on the picked point.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc.

Manipulate a Limit Box


There are three modes of manipulations, Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
Editing Data 295

Resize a Limit Box


To Resize a Limit Box:

1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.

2. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box in one direction:

 Pick a Face Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Face Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
296 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Pick a Corner Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Corner Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also use the E shortcut key instead.


Editing Data 297

Pan a Limit Box


To Pan a Limit Box:

1. Click the Pan icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Axis


Handles and three Plane Handles, appears. It has as its origin the center
of the limit box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pan in a plane.
 Pan along a direction.

Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.

Note: It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are


outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. By doing
this, you can know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or
within all of the stations.

Tip:
 You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
 You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
298 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan Along a Direction


To Pan the Limit Box along a Direction:

1. Pick an Axis Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. A direction in yellow


aligned with the Axis Handle appears.
2. Drag the Axis Handle along the direction to move the limit box in that
direction.
3. Drop the Axis Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


Editing Data 299

Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:

1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


300 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate a Limit Box


To Rotate a Limit Box:

1. Click the Rotate icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Ring


Handles (red, light blue and green), is displayed. This manipulator has the
center of the limit box as origin.
2. Pick a Ring Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. An axis, passing through
the center of the ring and perpendicular to it, appears. This axis has the
color of the selected ring.
3. Drag the Ring Handle to rotate the limit box around the axis.
4. Drop the Ring Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
Editing Data 301

Switch from one Mode of Manipulation to Another


You can easily switch between the different manipulation modes, i.e. from
Modify Shape to Pan, and from Pan to Rotate, and so on, by just picking one of
the Handles.

Note: The cursor changes to when you hover it over a Handle.

Display and Hide a Limit Box


A limit box can be displayed and hidden at any time.

To Display a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.

To Hide a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
302 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display and Hide Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box


All objects that are outside the limit box, whatever they could be, can be at any
time displayed, or hidden.

To Display the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.
Editing Data 303

To Hide the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.

View a Limit Box from one of its Sides


To View a Limit Box from one of its Sides:

1. Click on the Canonical Views pull down arrow.


2. Choose a view from the drop-down list.

Or

3. Right click in the 3D View.


4. Choose a view of the Limit Box Views menu from the pop-up menu.

Record Limit Boxes


To Record a Limit Box:

 Click the Record the Current Limit Box icon.

In the Limit Box window (if open), a limit box object with a default name (New
Limit Box) is then created.

Managing Limit Boxes


A limit box, once recorded, is stacked in a list in the Limit Box window (if open).
304 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rename a Limit Box


To Rename a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Press the F2 key. The name of the selected limit box becomes editable.
3. Input a new name, and press Enter.

Add a Description to a Limit Box


To Add a Description to a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click inside the Description panel.
3. Input a comment in the Description panel.

Apply a Limit Box


To Apply a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click the Apply Limit Box icon.

Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Apply Limit Box from the
pop-up menu or double-click a limit box.

Remove a Limit Box


To Remove a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click the Remove Limit Box icon. The selected limit box will be removed
from the Limit Box window,

Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Remove Limit Box from
the pop-up menu.
Editing Data 305

Export Limit Boxes


To Export Limit Boxes:

1. In the Limit Box window, click the Export icon. The Export a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where to store the file.
3. Input a name in the File Name field.
4. Click Save. The Export a Limit Box File dialog closes.

A file with the extension (.BOX) will be then created. This file will contain as
many limit boxes as the project contains.

Import Limit Boxes


To Import Limit Boxes:

1. In the Limit Box window, click the Import icon. The Import a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Import a Limit Box File dialog closes.
306 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Current Loaded Points


The primary aim of this tool is to let the user isolate a specific area of the points
that are displayed in the 3D View.

To Check the Current Loaded Points:

1. Set the limit box to a position where you want to check loaded points*:
2. Do of the following:

 If required, resize the limit box.


 If required, pan the limit box.
 If required, rotate the limit box.
 If required, hide the limit box.

3. Check the quality of the registration based displayed points.


4. Close the tool.

Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are
outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. This
allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud
and/or within all of the stations.
Editing Data 307

Extract Points from a Specific Area


The Limit Box Extraction feature also allows the user to extract and analyze
points on a specific area at a user selectable density. The extraction is done by
sampling TZF Scans.

To Extract Points from a Specific Area:

1. If required, set the limit box to a position where you want to extract more
points*:
2. Do one of the following:

 If required, resize the limit box.


 If required, pan the limit box.
 If required, rotate the limit box.

3. Choose among Sampling by Step, Spatial Sampling and Spatial Sampling


(Keep Details).
4. Create scans from TZF Scans.
5. Close the tool.

Note: (*) It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are
outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. This
allows you to easily know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud
and/or within all of the stations.

Note: When you clip a large region on a pure TZF Scan (with points that are
extracted), and apply either the Sampling By Step, or the Spatial Sampling, or
the Spatial Sampling (Keep Details), a dialog opens and prompts to first save
the project.

Apply a Sampling by Step Filter


With the Sampling by Step filter, one point will be taken into account at each
defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D image data. The Sampling by
Step filter is required for getting a fast overview of all of the scans.

To Apply a Sampling by Step Filter:

1. Click on the first pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Sampling by Step from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Step field.

Note: A Step value is a value in pixels and it is always positive.


308 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply a Spatial Sampling Filter


The Spatial Sampling method allows you to obtain a point cloud with a
homogeneous spatial density that you have to define.

To Apply a Spatial Sampling Filter:

1. Click on the first pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spatial Sampling from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Distance field.

Note: A Distance value must always be positive.

Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep Details) Filter


This method enables to adaptively sample a TZF Scan using the local context,
in order to extract a scan with high point density in high contrast areas (e.g.
edges) and low point density in flat, low varying areas (e.g. walls, floors). You
have to define a resolution which allows you to control the density of points in
flat regions, and all the points in high information areas are kept.

To Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep Details) Filter:

1. Click on the first pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spatial Sampling (Keep Details) from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Distance field.

Note: A Distance value must always be positive.

Create Scans from TZF Scans


To Create Scans from TZF Scans

1. Click the Extract Points from TZF Scans icon in the toolbar.
2. Or select Extract Points from TZF Scans from the pop-up menu.

 The extraction is then launched. RealWorks goes through all of the TZF
Scans in the project, from the first to the last. You can see the extraction
status of each in the status bar.
 For TZF Scans inside the Limit Box, points are extracted and the process
for each can take some time.
 At the end of the extraction:

 In the Models Tree, a cloud is created.


 In the Scans Tree, a scan is created for each TZF Scan (that is inside
the Limit Box).
 In the 3D View, points inside the Limit Box are denser.
Editing Data 309

Note: Be aware that the extraction can take time in case there are a lot of TZF
Scans inside the Limit Box and/or if the (sampling) parameter is too small.

Caution: If there is no TZF Scan inside the Limit Box, the extraction (of points)
is also launched. No point will be extracted.

Note: The project is automatically saved at the end of the extraction.

Cancel the Extraction


You can cancel an extraction in progress by pressing Esc. By doing this, no
cloud and no scans will be created.

Close the Tool


To Close the Tool:

 Do one of the following:

 Click Close Tool in the toolbar.


 Or Select Close Tool from the pop-up menu.
 Or press Esc.
310 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Sampled Scans


The Create Sampled Scans feature allows the user to create a series of
Sampled Scans in batch processing mode without having to interact. But if
required, the user can also create a series of Sampled Scans, but one by one.

To Create Sampled Scans:

1. Select either a project or a station (or set of stations) or a TZF Scan (or a
set of TZF Scans).
2. In the Scan group, click the Create Sampled Scans icon. The Sampled
Scan Creation dialog appears.
3. Sample to the scan data.
4. And if required, filter the scan data.
5. Click Ok. The Sampled Scan Creation dialog closes.

 Each new Sampled Scan is named as follows:

 Sample - A where A is the Step value set in Sampling By Step,


 Or Sample - A where A the Distance value set in Spatial Sampling,
 Or Sample (Keep Details) - A where A the Resolution On Flat Areas
value set in Spatial Sampling (Keep Details),
Editing Data 311

 You can add as many Sampled Scans as needed under a given station. If
a project has been selected, Sampled Scans (one per station) are created
in batch processing mode. If a station has been selected, only a Sampled
Scan is created and under the selected station.

Warning: All Sampled Scans cannot overall four billions points.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Sampled
Scans (in that station) do not have the same color. Each has its own color.

Note:
 If the selected project has not been yet saved in the database, you are
then prompted to do so. We advise you to save the project under the
same folder as the TZF format files.
 Inside the RWI folder, a scan file (with RWCX extension) is created per
sampled scan named as follows ProjectName_StationX_ScanY.

Note:
 If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Tip: You can also right-click on a TZF Scan and select Create Sampled Scans
from the pop-up menu.
312 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.

Sample the Scan Data


There are three sampling methods (Sampling by Step, Spatial Sampling and
Spatial Sampling (Keep Details)) that you can use in order to reduce the
number of points in the scan data.

The sampling will be applied to the entirety of the scan data. The number of
estimated points will be updated according to the defined parameter except
when using the Spatial Sampling or the Spatial Sampling (Keep Details). It is in
that case "Undefined". Note that the use of the Filter by Range has no effect on
the number of estimated points.

Apply a Sampling by Step


In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each
defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D image data.

To Apply a Sampling by Step:

1. Click on the Sampling pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Sampling by Step from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Step (In Pixels) field.
4. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
Editing Data 313

Apply a Spatial Sampling


The Spatial Sampling method allows you to obtain a point cloud with a
homogeneous spatial density that you have to define.

To Apply a Spatial Sampling:

1. Click on the Sampling pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spatial Sampling from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Resolution field.
4. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.

Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep Details)


This method enables to adaptively sample a TZF Scan using the local context,
in order to extract a scan with high point density in high contrast areas (e.g.
edges) and low point density in flat, low varying areas (e.g. walls, floors). You
have to define a resolution which allows you to control the density of points in
flat regions, and all the points in high information areas are kept.

To Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep Details):

1. Click on the Sampling pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spatial Sampling (Keep Details) from the drop-down list.
3. Enter a value in the Resolution On Flat Areas field.
4. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.

Filter the Scan Data


There are two filters (Filter by Range and Filter by Zone) that you can use in
order to reduce the number of points in the scan data. Note that the use of the
Filter by Range has no effect on the number of estimated points.
314 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter by Range
The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX
instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only
applied to the scan data.

To Filter by Range:

1. Check the Filter by Range option. The Max Distance field becomes
editable.
2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.

Filter by Zone
The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point
and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.

To Filter by Zone:

1. Check the By Zone option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become
editable.
2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.
3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.

Equalize Point Cloud Luminance


You can equalize the intensity of all points of a project. The equalization
augments the intensity dynamics to the whole range (0,255). You can see the
results immediately if you are in the intensity displaying mode (Gray Scale
Intensity or Color Coded Intensity).

To Equalize Point Cloud Luminance:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. In the Scan group, click the Equalize Luminance icon. A message will
prompt you to confirm (or cancel) the operation.
3. Click Yes to continue.

Note:
 There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.
 This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large
datasets.
Editing Data 315

Equalize Point Cloud Color


Generally speaking, data acquired by a 3D laser scanning system (scanner
and embedded camera) contain a 3D point cloud and a collection of 2D
images. Each point of the point cloud can contain not only its 3D coordinates,
but also other attributes such as intensity or color. The intensity information is
given by the scanner and the color information by the camera. Point color
equalization merges both the intensity information and the color information
inside a single project. You can see the result immediately if you are in the
intensity displaying mode (Gray Scale Intensity or True Color).

To Equalize Point Cloud Color:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. In the Scan group. click the Equalize Color icon. A message prompts you
to confirm or cancel the operation.
3. Click Yes to continue.

Note:
 There is no Undo for this operation. So you should use it with care.
 This operation can take a significant amount of time in the case of large
datasets.
316 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Color Points Using Station Images


This feature lets you color all the points of a station using the associated
images. The only prerequisite is that the images should be matched images. In
any processing mode, you can select a project and the point coloring will be
applied to all stations of the project. In the Registration, the user can select a
station (or a set of stations), the point coloring will be applied to the selected
station(s). Note that there is no undo. Point coloring is permanent.

To Color Points using Station Images:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree (in any processing mode).
2. Or select a station (or a set of stations) from the Project Tree.
3. In the Scan group, click the Colorize Points icon. A dialog appears and
prompts you to continue or to abort the action.
4. Click Yes. The dialog closes.

If the current project comes from the import of a JXL format file, from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, the Image Type Selection dialog appears:

Note: The images that will be taken into account that those that are inside the
stations. If your selection is a project and some of your images do not belong
to a station, you may see the number of images in the dialog different from the
number of images in the project.

5. Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number of


images of the chosen type is displayed.
6. Click OK. The Image Type Selection dialog closes.

Note: You can select the three types at the same time.
Editing Data 317

Note: If no check box has been selected, a warning will open and no points will
be colored.
319

Point Cloud
In the Edit tab, the Cloud group looks as illustrated below, in the Production
mode:

Where it is missing in the Registration module.

Segment Point Clouds


This tool allows you to segment a point cloud object into several point sub-
clouds. By using this tool, you can structure a complex scene into its logical
component parts, and work subsequently on each part. It is important to note
that an object containing both the point cloud and geometry representations
cannot be segmented. In order to do this, you have to use the Sampling tool to
create a new point cloud without geometry and then perform the segmentation
on the newly created point cloud. In order to enable this tool, you should select
one or several point cloud objects.

Note: The Segmentation tool, as a standalone version, is only available in


OfficeSurvey and Modeling. When using it as a sub-tool, it is available
anywhere.
320 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or more*) from the Project Tree.


2. In the Cloud group, click the Segmentation icon. The Segmentation toolbar
appears.

1 - Selection features 4 - Create (P)


2 - Box Selection** 5 - Close Tool
3 - Manual method for assigning classification
layers to point clouds

 An information box appears at the top right corner of the 3D View and
displays the sum total of points included in the selected object. The mouse
cursor shape changes; the arrow becomes a pointer. You can still
navigate (Zoom, Pan and Rotation) through the 3D scene, select or hide
objects (or groups) or change the active group before you start drawing a
fence. Once you start drawing, these commands become unavailable
except Pan.
 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.

Tip: After opening the tool, the default selection method is the last used one.

Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds for entering the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud. In case of a single selection, the Project
Cloud can be selected as input of the tool.

Note: (**) The Box Selection feature becomes enabled only if the
Segmentation tool is used with the Limit Box Mode (see "Filter Data" on page
450).
Editing Data 321

Note: When using the Segmentation tool as a main tool, you can create a new
folder, move or delete an object from the Project Tree while doing a
segmentation. When using the Segmentation tool as a sub-tool, you are only
allowed to create new folder. Moving or deleting an object from the Project
Tree, while doing a segmentation, is not permitted.

Tip: You can change the color of a fence in the Preferences / Tools dialog.
This should be done before entering into the tool, otherwise a message pops
up.

Delimit a Region on a Set of Points


A fence may have several shapes (Polygon, Rectangle, Circle, Lasso or a
combination of a Polygon and Lasso). A fence is used as segmentation
boundaries and drawing one is done by picking (or dragging) in the 3D View.
Once the first vertex of a fence is picked, you can no longer move the scene.

Tip: You can use the Esc key to cancel the fence that you are drawing.

Note: If you select Close Tool (or New Fence from the pop-up menu) while you
have not finished drawing, your fence will be cancelled.

Tip: To start a new fence, you need to cancel the current one by selecting New
Fence from the pop-up menu.

Note: Even if the pop-up menu is displayed, the fence still snaps to the mouse
cursor. You have to terminate the fence to free it. When selecting In (or Out),
RealWorks will close automatically your fence and points inside (or outside)
this fence will be kept.

Caution: Be careful with the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting
Segmentation option in the Preferences dialog. If you decide to keep the option
unchecked, all displayed clouds remain displayed with the selected cloud after
entering the tool. You are able to fence, not only the selected cloud but also
those that are not selected (but only displayed). This may be confusing but
keep in mind that the displayed clouds are not taken into account in the fencing
result.
322 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Fence (Polygon Only)


To Draw a Fence (Polygon Only):

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Click anywhere to draw the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
3. Click anywhere to draw the second vertex. The two vertices are linked by
a segment.
4. Continue to define other vertices. The polygonal fence is always closed in
such a way that the start vertex is always linked to the last one.
5. Right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.
6. Select End Fence to terminate the polygonal fence.

Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).

Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.

Draw a Fence (Lasso Only)


To Draw a Fence (Lasso Only):

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Press the Shift key, and drag the cursor around the objects (or the area)
you want to fence.
3. Release the Shift key, once the lasso drawn.
4. Right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.
5. Select End Fence to terminate the lasso.

Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).

Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.
Editing Data 323

Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso)


To Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso):

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pick anywhere to start the first vertex of a fence.
3. Pick anywhere to set the second vertex. The two vertices are linked by a
straight line.
4. Press the Shift key and then drag the cursor around the objects (or the
area) you want to fence.
5. When you finish, release the Shift key and the mouse button.
6. Continue to define other vertices. The fence is always closed in such a
way that the start vertex is always linked to the last one.
7. Right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.
8. Select End Fence to terminate the fence.

Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).

Tip: You can select Polygonal Selection from the pop-up menu.

Draw a Rectangular Fence


To Draw a Rectangular Fence:

1. Click the Rectangular Selection icon.


2. Click anywhere to draw the first corner of a rectangular fence.
3. Click anywhere to draw the second and opposite corner. The rectangular
fence is drawn.

Tip: You can select Rectangular Selection from the pop-up menu.

Draw a Circular Fence


To Draw a Circular Fence:

1. Click the Circular Selection icon.


2. Pick a point to start the first point of a Circular Fence's diameter.
3. Pick another point to set the second point of the diameter.

Tip: You can select Circular Selection from the pop-up menu.
324 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Keep Points Inside/Outside the Fence


Once you have finished defining a fence, you can now segment the selected
point cloud(s) by keeping either the points inside (or outside) of the fence. Note
that any segmented cloud is not permanently created in the database. You
should use the Create command to perform this operation. This also means
that you can turn around the so-segmented cloud, and continue to perform
fencing and segmentation.

To Keep Points Inside/Outside the Fence:

1. Click the In icon. Points inside the fence are kept. Points outside the
fence are unkept. This doesn't mean that they are not deleted from the
initial cloud but just hidden in the 3D View. The number of points inside the
fence is shown in the information box. You can also use the short-cut key I
to do this. If the fence does not contain any points, selecting In will not
take any points into account.
2. Or click the Out icon. Points outside the fence are kept while those that
are inside are unkept. The number of remaining points is shown in the
information box. You can also use the short-cut key O to do this. If the
fence does not contain any points, selecting Out will not take any points
into account.
3. Click Display Un-partitioned Points if you want to work with the same
cloud.
Editing Data 325

A - Polygonal fence B - Points inside the polygonal C - Points outside the


fence are kept polygonal fence are kept

Tip: You can also select In (or Out) from the pop-up menu.

Note: After keeping points in (or out) the fence, you can rotate the scene to do
the selection from another point of view. Such combination allows you to do a
3D point selection (like to segment the cloud with a 3D polyhedron which is the
intersection of the extrusion of these 2D fenced polygons).
326 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Assign a Classification Layer to the Fenced Cloud


You can assign a classification layer to the fenced cloud only when using the
Segmentation tool as a main tool.

To Assign a Classification Layer to the Fenced Cloud:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between "Maintain Classification" and a specific classification
layer.

 If "Maintain Classification" has been chosen. clouds will be segmented


and their attributes preserved. The number of output clouds will be equal
to the number of input classification layers.

Clouds sharing the same classification layer will be merged into the
segmentation result.
Editing Data 327

 If a specific classification layer has been chosen, clouds will be segmented


and merged into a single cloud. The chosen classification layer will be
assigned to the segmentation result.
328 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as a Working Cloud


The Box Selection feature lets the user set the cloud inside the Limit Box as a
working cloud.

To Set the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as a Working Cloud:

1. In the Limit Box group, click the Limit Box Mode icon. The Limit Box Mode
toolbar and the Picking Parameters toolbar open.
2. Define a Limit Box. For more information, refer to the Limit Box Mode (see
"Filter Data" on page 450) section.
3. If the clouds and/or geometries outside the Limit Box are displayed, hide
them by clicking . Otherwise, the Box Selection feature (in the
Segmentation toolbar) remains grayed-out.

 With a fence drawn, choose e.g. In (I) . The working cloud is the
selected cloud. The number of points inside the fence is displayed in the
information box.
Editing Data 329

 With a fence drawn, first click Box Selection to set the cloud inside the
Limit Box as the working cloud. And then choose e.g. In (I) . The
number of points inside the fence is equal to zero.
330 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Results


To Create the Results:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.


2. Select Create from the pop-up menu.
3. Select Close Tool.

 A cloud named OBJECTX is created in the Models Tree.


 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View remain hidden except the one selected.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed.

Tip: Instead of selecting Create from the pop-up menu, you can also press
the P key on your keyboard.

Note:
 Selecting Create without closing the fence will close it automatically and a
new cloud object will be created from all points inside (or outside) this
fence.
 The Create feature is always enabled after entering the tool even if there
is no drawn fence. This way, you can create a new cloud. It is based on all
points of the selected cloud.

Note: When using the Segmentation tool as a main tool, you can save your
project after creating the segmented clouds in the database.

Caution: You cannot save your result(s) when using the Segmentation tool as
a sub-tool. The Create button is dimmed.

Note: A dialog appears and asks if you really want to close the tool without
saving the result in the database (after a fencing only).
Editing Data 331

Sample Point Clouds


The Sampling tool enables to create a sub-point cloud from a selected point
cloud. There are at all six methods: Spatial Sampling, Random Sampling,
Scan-Based Sampling, Intensity-Based Sampling, Discontinuity-Based
Sampling and Ground Extraction. The initial point cloud remains unchanged
after sampling. You can combine these six different methods to sample the
selected point cloud, that is; you can use the result from one method as the
input to another method and continue until you are satisfied with the result. Or
you can create several sub-point clouds within an opened session.

Note: In case of a single point cloud (as input), the point cloud, that will be
created from each method, will have the same layer than the selected one,
except when using the Ground Extraction method with the Keep Ground
option. In case of several point clouds, the created point cloud will have
"Unclassified" as layer.
332 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the Cloud group, click the Sampling icon. The Sampling dialog opens.

The sampling method which appears first is the last used one.
The Scan-Based Sampling, Random Sampling and Ground Extraction
methods work on disk', i.e., on the full data, independently of what is loaded in
the RAM. See [A].
The Spatial Sampling, Intensity-Based Sampling and Discontinuity-Based
Sampling methods work on what is loaded only in the RAM. See [B].

Tip: To leave the Sampling tool, you can select Close from the pop-up menu or
press Esc.

Caution: You are prevented from changing the number of loaded points inside
the Sampling tool. The Point Loading Manager is grayed out.
Editing Data 333

Choose a Sampling Method


Inside each method, you can use the Segmentation tool to select a data subset
for performing a sampling. When used in such condition, you cannot save the
result. The Create command is deactivated.

Caution: In case you enter the Segmentation tool after sampling a point cloud,
the number of points in the "Remaining" field is considered as the input of the
Segmentation tool. If you close the tool without performing any segmentation
operation on the point cloud, first you get back to the Sampling tool, and the
number of points upstream the Segmentation tool is then considered as the
"Initial" points.
334 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Spatial Sampling
Point clouds obtained by scanning from different positions and at different
distances are often not uniform in terms of point density. This method enables
to obtain a point cloud with a homogeneous density (that the user has to
define).

To Sample Spatially:

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Choose Spatial Sampling from the drop-down list. The Spatial Sampling
dialog appears.

1 - Density of points expressed in terms of a 2 - Non editable fields


distance between points

This dialog displays two numbers: Initial and Remaining. The Initial number is
the total number of points before sampling. The Remaining number
corresponds to the number of points after sampling. The unit of measurement
is set by default in millimeters; but you can change it when necessary in
Preferences.

3. Enter a value in the Distance Between Points field.


4. Click Preview to view the result before saving it.
5. Click Create and Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "Sample - "Distance Between Points" Value"


is created under the current project in the Models Tree.

Note: A negative value input the Distance Between Points field is automatically
converted to positive.
Editing Data 335

Random Sampling
This method consists in sampling a point cloud by using a percentage ratio
defined by the user, which will determine the amount of points that will be kept
in the initial point cloud. These points will be randomly selected from the
original point cloud.

To Sample Randomly:

1. In the Sampling dialog box, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select Random Sampling. The Random Sampling dialog appears.

1 - Slider 3 - Non editable field


2 - Pre-defined (or user-defined) values 4 - Editable field

In this method, there is no Preview. There are four ways to define the
percentage ratio. The first is to use a slider. The second is to select a
predetermined value among those pre-defined (25, 50, 75 and 100%). The
third is to enter a rate value manually and the fourth is to enter the number of
points in the Remaining field. Each time you define a new ratio, the sampling
will be performed dynamically, and the results (the number of points and the
final cloud - respectively in the dialog and in the 3D View) are displayed in real
time.

3. Define a percentage ratio.


4. Click Create to save the result.
5. Click Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "Sample - "Rate in Percent" Value" is created


under the current project in the Models Tree.

Note: When entering a value in the Rate or Remaining field, do not forget to
press Enter.
336 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Intensity-Based Sampling
This method can be used for sampling the selected point cloud according to
the intensity associated with each point. In RealWorks, the intensity value
ranges from 0 to 255. After selecting the Intensity Based Sampling method, the
selected point cloud will be rendered in Gray Scale Intensity.

To Sample Based on Intensity(ies):

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select Intensity-Based Sampling. The Intensity-Based Sampling dialog
appears.

1 - Select Point Intensity 4 - Unkept points (in red)


2 - Filtering range 5 - Kept points (in grey)
3 - Vertical bars 6 - Show/Hide points that are out of the defined
range

A histogram window appears in the dialog. You can then use the two vertical
bars, which are shown as arrows at the bottom of the histogram in the figure
above, to define an intensity range so that all points with intensity within this
range will be kept. All points outside of this intensity range (called Unwanted
Points) will be un-kept and shown in red in the histogram and in the 3D View
(only if the Display Unwanted Points option is checked). To manipulate the two
vertical bars, you can either directly use the cursor to move them, or use the
picking mechanism (button on top of the histogram) to select an intensity level
from the displayed points.
Editing Data 337

3. Do one of the following:

 Sample according to point intensity.

a) Click Select Point Intensity.


b) Pick one point in the 3D View.

 Sample according to a range of intensity.

a) Place the mouse cursor over a vertical bar.


b) Drag and drop the vertical bar when the intensity value you need
is reached.
c) Do the same operations for the other vertical bar.

4. Click Create and Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Intensity (X)" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.

Note:
 If the selected cloud contains points with no intensity information, these
points will not be taken into account.
 If you switch from Gray Scaled Intensity to Color Code Intensity; the
selected Point Cloud is then rendered with a range of colors - from red to
blue with intermediate colors like orange, yellow and green. Points with
intensity of 0 are rendered in red; those with intensity of 128 are in yellow
and those with 255 are in blue.
338 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Scan-Based Sampling
On certain occasions, you need to create a sub-point cloud including all points
belonging to certain stations or scans. You can use this method to achieve this.
After selecting the method, the selected point cloud will be automatically
rendered according to the Scan Color.

To Sample Based on Scan(s):

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select Scan-Based Sampling. The Scan-Based Sampling dialog appears.

A sub-window including the Scans Tree appears in the dialog. By default, all
elements (stations and scans) in this tree are On. You can turn Off a station, a
scan or a set of scans from this tree. The total number of points will be
changed accordingly and the point cloud displayed in the 3D View will be
updated.

If required, use the Expand All (or Collapse All ) icon to expand (or
shrink) the Scans Tree in the dialog.
If required, use to select all items from the dialog, to clear the selection

and to reverse the selection.

"On" items are shown in the 3D View and will be considered in the final result
Editing Data 339

"Off" items (white points) are hidden in the 3D View and won't be taken into
account in the final result

3. Turn Off some of the stations (or scans).


4. Click Create to save the result.
5. Click Close to leave the tool.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Scan (X)" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.

Tip:
 You can select several stations (or scans or a mix of them) (from the
Scan-Based Sampling dialog) by using the Ctrl (or Shift) key combined
with the left clicking.
 To select all items (scans and/or stations) at once (from the Scan-Based
Sampling dialog), select first an item and use then the Ctrl + A key
combination.

In this sub-tool, only stations and scans from the selected cloud are displayed
in the dialog, instead of all of the stations and scans of the project.

Tip: You can resize all the sampling dialogs horizontally, in particular the Scan-
Based Sampling dialog in order to be able to see all item names fully in case
they are too long.
340 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Discontinuity-Based Sampling
You may encounter discontinuities in a point cloud in three cases. First is when
some points of the cloud have opposite or different normal direction than the
rest. We call this discontinuity Edge. Second is when all the cloud points have
the same normal direction but some of them are separated by irregular
distance. We call this discontinuity Gap. The third case can be everything
except Edges and Gaps.

When loading a file of ASCII format, Edges and Gaps are un-generated. You
can use the Edge Detection tool to generate them. After selecting the
Discontinuity-Based Sampling method, the selected point cloud will be
automatically rendered in Discontinuity Display.

To Sample Based on Discontinuities:

1. In the Sampling dialog box, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select Discontinuity-Based Sampling. The Discontinuity-Based Sampling
dialog appears.

1 - Display/Hide discontinuity options 2 - Launch the Edge Detection tool

When selecting this method, the three discontinuity options are all checked.
The Keep Edge option (when unchecked) enables the removal of Edge
discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep Gap option (when unchecked)
enables the removal of Gap discontinuities from the point cloud. The Keep
Others option (when unchecked) enables removal of all discontinuities except
Edges and Gaps.

3. If required, detect edges.


4. Click Create and Close. A sub-point cloud will be created in the database.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Discontinuity (X)" is created under the
current project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Editing Data 341

Detect Edges
The Edge Detection is based on a grid method. You should first define a
projection surface (mainly a plane) and then set its grid resolution. The grid
resolution is square - the same in both of the projection plane directions (length
and width).

To Detect Edges:

1. Click Edge Detection. The Edge Detection dialog opens.

1 - Set From Frame 6 - Edit Parameters


2 - Fit 7 - Plane Parallel to Screen View
3 - Pick Axis From Object 8 - Projection Plane Resolution
4 - Plane Perpendicular to Screen 9 - Discontinuity display options
5 - Pick 3 Points on Plane

2. Do one of the following to define a projection plane:

 Select a frame’s axis (1).


 Fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).
 Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).
 Pick an object’s axis (1)(2).
 Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1)(2).
 Pick three points (1)(2).
 Edit the project plane’s parameters.

a) Click Edit Parameters. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.


b) Click on the pull down arrow.
c) Choose between Normal + Point and Point + Point.
342 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

d) If Normal + Point has been chosen, enter a direction in the


Normal field and give a position in the Point field.
e) If Point + Point has been chosen, enter a position in each of the
Point fields.
f) Click OK. The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

 Set the plane parallel to the screen view.

3. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


4. Click Preview.
5. Click Apply.

Applying the results after previewing them creates them in the database and
closes the Edge Detection dialog. Note that clicking Apply without previewing
the results cancels the generated discontinuities and clicking Cancel opens an
information box which prompts you to cancel or confirm the action you attempt
to do.

Note:
 For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
 When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it's up to you
to do a free picking or a constrained picking.
Editing Data 343

Topography-Based Sampling
The idea behind this method is to separate valid points from invalid points
inside a given point cloud. Because invalid points are more or less important
according to where they are on the point cloud, you need to be able to work
separately on them. This kind of situation occurs when the point cloud is a
scene presentation with threes, bushes and the like. In such a case, invalid
points are trees, bushes, etc. and valid points are the ground.

To Sample Based on Topography(ies):

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select Topography-Based Sampling. The Topography-Based Sampling
dialog appears.

1 - Show/hide invalid points 4 - Point distance selection


2 - Set valid points as reference cloud 5 - Delete invalid points from the reference
3 - Resolution of the square-grid method cloud

First, you should define a point cloud as reference. This means that this point
cloud remains unchanged whatever the operations you apply to it except when
deleting points or when replacing it by a new one. You can reload it as often as
required. If the point cloud you select comes from another sampling method or
results from a segmentation, the Only Wanted button is active. This means that
you can set this point cloud as a reference.

The Topography-Based Sampling method is based on a grid method and the


resolution is square by default - the same in both of the projection surface (XY
plane of the active coordinate frame) directions. Points of the selected cloud
outside the square-grid tolerance will be not taken into account. And those
nearby of faraway from the square-grid boundary can be gradually ignored
using a slider.

3. Fence an area on the reference cloud using the Segmentation tool.


4. Enter a value in the Horizontal Radius field and press Enter.
344 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5. Slide the cursor to a position between + and -.

The result from the square-grid projection and the distance selection is a set of
invalid points (called Unwanted Points). These points will be un-kept and
shown in red in the 3D View - only if the Display Unwanted Points (Red) option
is checked.

6. Click Erase Unwanted. Invalid points will be deleted from the reference
cloud.
7. Click Reload Reference Points . The reference cloud is reloaded with
invalid points less.
8. Repeat the steps from 3 to 7 on another area of the reference cloud.
9. Click Create to save the result and click Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "By Topography" is created under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order.
Editing Data 345

Ground Extraction
The Ground Extraction feature lets the user extract the ground information from
an indoor (or outdoor) scan, whatever the shape of the ground (flat or no flat
surfaces).

It extracts a new point cloud region that includes only ground-level scan points,
as determined based on the geometry of the scene (not laser intensity). The
extraction algorithm assumes that the ground is locally horizontal (normals are
used if available) and locally flat (local planarity is computed). Since the
algorithm adapts its parameters automatically according to the density of the
point cloud, no input parameters are required.

Note the following when using the feature:

 The ground-extraction algorithm is intended to extract the lowest ground


surface in the scene. For example, in a multi-story building, only the lowest
floor would be extracted.
 The ground-extraction algorithm may produce unexpected results when
applied to noisy data that includes parasite points below the ground.
Therefore, it is recommended that you manually eliminate these parasite
points (by using the Segmentation tool) before using the Ground
Extraction feature.

To Extract the Ground Information:

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select the Ground Extraction method from the drop-down list. The Ground
Extraction dialog appears.
3. Click the Extract button.
346 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

After the extraction, all points, that are on the ground, have their color
unchanged and are called Ground points.
Those, that are not on the ground, are colored in red and are called Outlier
points.

Note: The Show Outliers (Red) option is automatically chosen (checked) when
applying the extraction.

Note: You are able to stop the extraction in progress by pressing Esc.

The number of points in the Remaining filed is diminished from the amount of
Outlier points.

4. Do one of the following:

 Add some regions to the ground (on page 347).


 Keep the ground (on page 349).
 Remove the ground (on page 348).

5. Click Create and Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "Ground Extraction" is created under the


current project in the Models Tree. If the Keep Ground option has been
chosen, the sub-point cloud has "Ground" as layer (ID 2). If the Remove
Ground option has been chosen, the sub-point cloud has "Unclassified" as
layer (ID 1) in case of several inputs (or the layer of the input if there is one).
Editing Data 347

Add Some Regions to the Ground


This option enables to add potentially missing parts to the extracted ground by
simply picking points. This is useful when the automatic extraction fails due to
non-connected ground at different levels.

To Add Some Regions to the Ground:

1. Click the Pick Points button. The cursor has its shape changed to become
. The Pick Points button changes Compute.
2. Pick several points on the Outlier points.

3. Click the Compute button.

In the 3D View, each picked point is used as seed to define a ground region,
which is added to the previously extracted ground.
348 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In the Ground Extraction dialog, the Remaining number is diminished from the
amount of points that correspond to the added regions. The Initial number
remains unchanged.

4. If required, repeat the steps for other regions.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc., select Cancel Picking
from the pop-up menu, or press on the Compute button.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.

Remove the Ground


To Remove the Ground:

 Click the Remove Ground button. In the 3D View, the Ground points are
hidden. In the Ground Extraction dialog, the number of Outlier points
becomes the Initial points. The Keep Ground and Remove Ground buttons
are dimmed.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.
Editing Data 349

Keep the Ground


To Keep the Ground:

 Click the Keep Ground button. In the 3D View, the Outlier points are
hidden. In the Ground Extraction dialog, the Remaining points, which is
also the Outlier points, becomes the Initial points. The Keep Ground and
Remove Ground buttons are dimmed.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the ground
extraction previously performed.
350 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Floor Extraction (Indoor)


This feature lets the user extract the floor information from an indoor scan. The
floors need to be flat or quasi-flat, which correspond to man-made structures
such as indoor floors, parking, street segments, etc. The feature can be used
for extracting multi-level floors. When used, it extracts first the lowest floor
information, automatically and parameterless. If the user desires to extract the
other level information, he has to do manually picking points.

Note: Concerning the Floor Extraction, from a technical point of view, the
algorithm is based on the geometry of the scene. In that sense, the result does
not depend on the laser intensity. The algorithm uses the hypothesis that the
floor is locally horizontal (normals are used if available) and locally flat (local
planarity is computed).

To Extract the Floor Information:

1. In the Sampling dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select the Floor Extraction (Indoor) method from the drop-down list. The
Floor Extraction (Indoor) dialog appears.
3. Click the Extract button.

After the extraction, points on the floor have their color unchanged and are
called Floor points.
Those, that are not on the floor, are colored in red and are called Outlier points.

Note: The Show Outliers (Red) option is automatically chosen (checked) when
applying the extraction.

Note: You are able to stop the extraction in progress by pressing Esc.
Editing Data 351

The number of points in the Remaining field is diminished from the amount of
Outlier points.

4. Do one of the following:

 Add some regions to the floor (on page 352).


 Keep the floor (on page 355).
 Remove the floor (on page 354).

5. Click Create and Close.

A sub-point cloud whose name is "Floor Extraction" is created under the


current project in the Models Tree. If the Keep Floor option has been chosen,
the sub-point cloud has "Ground" as layer (ID 2). If the Remove Floor option
has been chosen, the sub-point cloud has "Unclassified" as layer (ID 1) in case
of several inputs (or the layer of the input if there is one).
352 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Add Some Regions to the Floor


In case the floor has only one level, this option enables to add potentially
missing parts to the extracted floor. The missing parts can be due to the non-
continuity of the floor or due to the fact that the floor is not really flat. In both
cases, the automatic method fails to extract the floor information. In case of
multi-level floors, like in a building, the option enables to the extract the other
levels.

To Add Some Regions to the Floor:

1. Click the Pick Points button. The cursor has its shape changed to become
. The Pick Points button changes Compute.
2. Pick several points on the Outlier points.

3. Click the Compute button.


Editing Data 353

In the 3D View, each picked point is used as seed to define a floor region,
which is added to the previously extracted floor.
In the Floor Extraction dialog, the Remaining number is diminished from the
amount of points that correspond to the added regions. The Initial number
remains unchanged.

4. If required, repeat the steps for other regions.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc., select Cancel Picking
from the pop-up menu, or press on the Compute button.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.
354 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Remove the Floor


To Remove the Floor:

 Click the Remove Floor button. In the 3D View, the Floor points are
hidden. In the Floor Extraction dialog, the number of Outlier points
becomes the Initial points. The Keep Floor and Remove Floor buttons are
dimmed.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.
Editing Data 355

Keep the Floor


To Keep the Floor:

 Click the Keep Floor button. In the 3D View, the Outlier points are hidden.
In the Floor Extraction dialog, the Remaining points, which is also the
Outlier points, becomes the Initial points. The Keep Floor and Remove
Floor buttons are dimmed.

Caution: You can decide to cancel the operation by selecting Undo or clicking
the Reload Reference Points . Be aware that this also cancels the floor
extraction previously performed.

Auto-Classify Outdoor Point Clouds


The Auto-Classify Outdoor tool allows you to significantly increase productivity
when classifying point clouds. It uses algorithms that automatically classify
point clouds in five classes: Ground, Building, Poles and Signs, Electric Lines
and High Vegetation.

Caution: The classification process is carried out on disk over all 3D points. It
may take times with huge datasets.
356 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


The input of the Auto-Classify Outdoor tool is mainly a cloud (or a set of
clouds).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the Cloud group, click the Auto-Classify Outdoor icon. The Auto-Classify
Outdoor dialog opens.

 By default, the six classes (Ground, Building, Poles and Signs, Electric
Lines, High Vegetation and Remaining) are all checked.

Choose a Class
To Choose a Class:

 Choose a class:

 Ground is a surface, flat or not, accessible by walking. It includes terrain,


road, sidewalk, curbs and stairs. In the case of multiple-floors, only the
lowest one will be retrieved
 Buildings are generally facades and roofs. All the indoor points are
considered as building as well.
 Poles and Signs are poles, lampposts, traffic lights, etc. higher than 2
meters and touching the ground.
 Electric Lines are line conductors (commonly multiples of three),
suspended by towers or poles.

Note: The algorithm works mainly on power lines from distribution corridors or
urban environments. It may not work properly on other use cases such as
Railway Electrification Systems.

 High Vegetation includes trees, bushes and other vegetation higher than 1
meter.
 Remaining is everything matching none of the aforementioned classes.

Note: You need to have at least a class checked in the dialog, except the
Remaining one. Otherwise, the Extraction button remains grayed-out.
Editing Data 357

Extract and Classify Point Cloud Regions


To Extract and Classify Point Cloud Regions:

 Click the Extract button.

The status of the extraction process is displayed at the bottom of the user
interface. When the process is complete, the Rendering option automatically
switches to Color Coded Classification. The points cloud regions, for which the
extraction succeeded, are created and classified as follows:

 A unique cloud is created. It belongs to the Ground layer (ID 2).


 A cloud for each individual building is created. All resides on the Building
layer (ID 6). A folder containing all the Building clouds will be created.
 A cloud for each individual pole is created. All resides on the Transmission
Power layer (ID 15). A folder containing all the Poles and Signs clouds will
be created.
 A unique cloud is created. It belongs to the High vegetation layer (ID 5).
 A single cloud is created. It belongs to the Wire - Conductor layer (ID 14).
 A cloud containing everything that does not match aforementioned
classes. This cloud is assigned to layer 1 (Unclassified).

 All the regions except the Remaining region display in the 3D View in the
color defined for the region according to the Classification Layers window,
i.e. the Ground region is brown by default.

Note: You can undo the extraction process by pressing the Esc key. In the
Classification Layers window, the assigned layers remain active after an undo.

Tip: After the extraction, and if required, you can use the Segmentation tool to
refine the result manually. Please, refer to the Assign a Classification Layer
to the Fenced Cloud (on page 326) topic for more information.
358 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Auto-Classify Indoor Point Clouds


The Auto-Classify Indoor tool allows you to significantly increase productivity
when classifying indoor point clouds from buildings or complex industrial
environments. It uses algorithms that automatically classify point clouds in five
classes: Floor, Grating Floor, Ceiling, and Walls.

This tool is intended to work on point clouds containing a single floor. In case
of multiple floors, you must first manually separate each floor, e.g., using the
Scan-Based Sampling.

Caution: The classification process is carried out on disk over all 3D points. It
may take time with huge datasets.

Open the Tool


The input of the Auto-Classify Indoor tool is mainly a cloud (or a set of clouds).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the Cloud group, click the Auto-Classify Indoor icon. The Auto-Classify
Indoor dialog opens

 By default, the five classes (Floor, Grating Floor, Ceiling, Walls and
Remaining) are all checked.
Editing Data 359

Choose a Class
To Choose a Class:

 Choose a class:

 Floor is a manmade flat surface accessible by a walking person. In


industrial environments, it is usually built in concrete. In the case of
multiple-floors, only the lowest one will be retrieved.
 Grated Floor is a manmade floor composed of a regularly spaced
collection of essentially identical, parallel, elongated elements. In an
industrial environment, grated floors are typically metallic and prevent
access through an opening while permitting communication or ventilation.
 Ceiling is the upper interior surface of a room or other similar
compartment. The algorithm only manages flat ceiling. Both grating and
concrete ceilings will be extracted by the algorithm.
 Walls are vertical structures that enclose a space as part of the building
envelope. The algorithm is intended to work only in vertical walls (flat or
curved). Inclined walls are not managed by the algorithm.
 Remaining is everything matching none of the aforementioned classes.

Note: You need to have at least a class checked in the dialog, except the
Remaining one. Otherwise, the Extraction button remains grayed-out.
360 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract and Classify Point Cloud Regions


To Extract and Classify Point Cloud Regions:

 Click the Extract button.

The status of the extraction process is displayed at the bottom of the user
interface. When the process is complete, the Rendering option automatically
switches to Color Coded Classification (see "Color Point Clouds Based on the
Classification Information" on page 426). The points cloud regions, for which
the extraction succeeded, are created and classified as follows:

 A unique cloud is created for Floor. It belongs to the Ground layer (ID 2).
 A unique cloud is created for Grated Floor. It belongs to the Ground layer
(ID 2).
 A unique cloud is created for Walls. It belongs to the Building layer (ID 6).
 A single cloud is created for Ceiling. It belongs to the Ceiling layer (ID 66).
 A cloud containing everything that does not match aforementioned
classes. This cloud is assigned to layer 1 (Unclassified).

 All the regions except the Remaining region display in the 3D View in the
color defined for the region according to the LAS standard, i.e. the Ground
region is brown by default.

Note: You can undo the extraction process by pressing Esc. In the
Classification Layers window, the assigned layers remain active after an undo.

Tip: After the extraction, and if required, you can use the Segmentation tool to
refine the result manually. Please, refer to the Assign a Classification Layer
to the Fenced Cloud (on page 326) topic for more information.
Editing Data 361

Merge Several Point Clouds into One


Merging a set of clouds consists of creating a new cloud from the selected
clouds and deleting them at the same time. It is important to note that you can
only merge objects containing only the cloud representation. If one of the
selected objects contains a geometry representation, a warning will be issued
to user. If user decides to continue, the geometric shape of the selected object
will be lost. You cannot merge the scans. The selected clouds for merging
must belong to the same project. When you select clouds from two different
groups, the merged cloud will be put under the group which contains the last
selected cloud.

To Merge Several Point Clouds into One:

1. Select several clouds from the Project Tree.


2. In the Cloud group, click the Merge Clouds icon.

 If the selected clouds share the same layer, a new cloud is then created
with the name of Merge. It is put in the same layer than the selected
clouds.

 If the selected clouds do not share the same layer, a new cloud is also
created but it is put in the "Unclassified" layer.

Tip: You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + M.

Tip: You can also select Merge Clouds from the pop-up menu.
362 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change the Color of a Point Cloud


To Change the Color of a Point Cloud:

1. Select and display a point cloud from the Project Tree.


2. Set the Cloud Color rendering option.
3. Do one of the following:

1. On the Cloud group click the Change Cloud Color pull-down


arrow.
2. Choose a color from the color palette.
3. Or define your own color by clicking Other.

Or

4. With the Property window open, click in the Color of Cloud line.
5. Choose a color from the color palette.
6. Or define your own color by clicking Other.
363

Geometry
In the Edit tab, the Geometry group looks as illustrated below, in the
Production mode:

In the Registration module, the Geometry group is also present but the Delete
Geometry and Convert to Mesh features are not present.

Delete a Geometry
To Delete a Geometry:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree.


2. In the Geometry group, click the Delete Geometry icon.

• If the selected object has only geometric properties, a dialog opens


and prompts you to continue or not.
• If the selected object has both properties (point cloud and geometry),
its geometric properties are deleted with no warning.

Note:
 You can also right-click on an object with both properties (cloud and
geometry) in the Models Tree (or in the 3D View) to display the pop-up
menu and select Delete Geometry.
 You can also use the combination of keys CTRL + D.
364 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Convert a Geometry to a Mesh


The Convert to Mesh feature allows conversion a geometric entity like a cube,
sphere, cylinder, cone, extruded model or plane (with holes or not) to a
triangulated mesh. The created mesh is refined using parameters. This allows
the application of texture to models.

To Convert a Geometry to a Mesh:

1. Select a geometric object* from the Models Tree.


2. In the Geometry group, select the Convert to Mesh icon. The Convert to
Mesh dialog opens.
3. Enter a value in the Average Triangle Edge Length field.

The refinement consists of splitting the vertices for which the length is greater
than the value set in the above field.

4. Click Create. The Convert to Mesh dialog closes.

A group whose name is "Mesh - "Average Triangle Edge Length" value" is


created under the current project in the Models Tree. A converted mesh whose
name is OBJECTX is created and put under that group. X is its order. The
converted mesh inherits the layer of the input (from which it is originated).

Tip: (*) You can also select a mesh as an input. In this case, a new refined
mesh is created and the selected mesh remains unchanged. You can compare
the properties of both. The number of vertices and the number of triangles are
changed consequently.
Editing Data 365

Change the Color of a Geometry


To Change the Color of a Geometry:

1. Select and display a geometry from the Project Tree.


2. Set e.g. the Surface rendering option.
3. Do one of the following:

1. On the Geometry group, click the Change Geometry Color pull-down


arrow.
2. Choose a color from the color palette.
3. Or define your own color by clicking Other.

Or

4. With the Property window open, click in the Color of Geometry line.
5. Choose a color from the color palette.
6. Or define your own color by clicking Other.

Caution: You cannot change the color of all types of geometry. There are
some restrictions. An inspection map is also a geometry. You cannot change
its color.
367

Change a Color of an Object


You can change the color of a selected item in two different ways.
368 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From the Property Window


To Change an Item's Color in the Property Window:

1. Select an item from the Project Tree.


2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
3. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. The Property window opens.
4. If the item has only a point cloud representation, click in the Color of Cloud
field. Its color becomes editable and a pull-down arrow button appears.
5. If the item has only a geometry representation, click in the Color of
Geometry field. Its color becomes editable and a pull-down arrow button
appears.
6. If the item has both representations*, click in either the Color of Cloud or
Color of Geometry field.
7. Click on the pull-down arrow button. A color palette appears.
8. Do one of the following:

 Choose a color from the color palette.

The chosen color is then used for coloring the selected object.

 Or define a color:

a) Click Other. The Color dialog opens.


Editing Data 369

b) Define your own color.


c) Click OK. The Color dialog closes.

The defined color is used for coloring the selected object. It appears as a
reminder next to the Other button.

Note: (*) Fitted item


370 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From the Tab


To Change an Item's Color from the Menu Bar/Tab:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree.


2. If the item has only a point cloud representation, click on the Cloud Color
pull-down arrow in the Scan group. A color palette appears.
3. If the item has only a geometry representation, click on the Geometry
Color pull-down arrow in the Geometry group. A color palette appears.
4. If the item has both representations*, click on either the Cloud Color or
Geometry Color pull-down arrow. A color palette appears.
5. Do one of the following:

 Choose a color from the color palette.

The chosen color is then used for coloring the selected object.

 Or define a color:

a) Click Other. The Color dialog opens.


b) Define your own color.
c) Click OK. The Color dialog closes.
Editing Data 371

The defined color is used for coloring the selected object. It appears as a
reminder next to the Other button.

Note: (*) Fitted item


372 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Customize a Series of Colors


To Customize a Series of Colors:

1. Click e.g. on the Change Cloud Color pull-down arrow in the 3D View
toolbar. A color palette appears.
2. Click on the Other button. The Color dialog opens.
3. If required, click on the Define Custom Colors button.
4. Choose a box from the Custom Colors panel

5. Define a color.
6. Click the Add to Custom Colors button.
7. If required, repeat the steps from 4 to 6.
8. Click OK. The Color dialog closes.

Note: The defined colors, stored in the Custom Colors, are not kept between
different sessions of RealWorks.

Note: In Ribbon, the Change Cloud Color icon can be reached from the
Cloud group on the Edit tab.

Merge Coplanar Polylines


Editing Data 373

To Merge Coplanar Polylines:

1. Select several polylines from the Project Tree.


2. Select Merge Coplanar Polylines from the pop-up menu.

• If the selected polylines are not coplanar, an error message appears


and the operation is aborted.
• If the selected polylines are coplanar, the resulting, created with a
default name, is:

o A polyline with a unique point chain where redundant points


are removed, if the selected polylines have common ends.
o A polyline with as many point chains as there are polylines in
the selection, if the selected polylines do not have a common
end.

Tip: You can use the CTRL + J shortcut or choose Merge Coplanar Polylines
from the Line Work group on the Drawing tab.

Note: Fitted polylines cannot be merged.


375

Equalize Image Color


In the Station-Based mode, a scene is viewed from a station's point of view
with overlapped images in the background (if not hidden). Each image has
brightness characteristics different from its neighbor. This tool allows the
adjustment of the brightness of the images and the blending overlapping
regions, if required.

To Equalize Image Color:

1. Select a set of images (or a project with images inside).


2. Set the Station-Based mode (if required).
3. In the Image group, click the Equalize Image Color icon.

 If the current project has some images which come from an instrument
other than the Trimble SX10, a dialog appears and asks to blend the
overlap regions of the images after adjusting the brightness. Jump to Step
C.
 If the current project comes from the import of a JXL format file, from the
Trimble SX10 instrument, the Image Type Selection dialog appears:

Note: All of the images of the project will be taken, i.e., those that are inside
the stations as well as those that are outside.

a) Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The


number of images of the chosen type is displayed.
b) Click OK. The Image Type Selection dialog closes, and a dialog
appears and asks to blend the overlap regions of the images
after adjusting the brightness.
376 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

c) Click Yes. This will adjust the brightness of the images and will
blend the overlapped regions.
d) Or click No. This will only adjust the brightness of the images.

Note: You can select the three types at the same time.

Note: You are able to undo the operation, if required.

Note: You do not need to display (or open) the selected images to perform this
operation. The selected images need to belong to a station.
CHAPTER 6

Exploring Data

Exploration in RealWorks involves the comprehension of a complex scene from a loaded


project by using all available information, whether it is a point cloud, a model, a set of images or
a combination thereof. Exploration can be done via the Project Tree in order to understand how
a scene is structured. It can also be done by examining (Examiner mode) or by walking through
(Walkthrough mode) a scene displayed in the 3D View or by viewing a scene from the
instrument positions (Station-Based mode).
379

Expand and Shrink the Project Tree


You can explore the Project Tree in the WorkSpace window in order to
determine how the data is structured. You can click on the Expand (or
Shrink ) icon located at the left side of each group of nodes to expand (or
reduce) the Project Tree until you reach the level that contains the information
you want. You can also use the scroll bar to go up (or down) the Project Tree.
Exploration in this tree is similar to Microsoft Windows Explorer.
380 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Locate an Item in the Project


You can locate an item in the Project Tree. Like the Find command, the name
of the found item will be highlighted in the List window and its properties will
appear in the Property window if it is opened. The father of the found item
becomes the Active Group in the Project Tree.

To Locate an Item in the Project:

1. Select an item from the 3D View.


2. In the Search group, click the Locate icon.

Or

3. Double-click on an item in the 3D View.


Exploring Data 381

Find Items in the Project


You can find an item (or a set of items) in the current project with the Find
command. You can find by Name, with a complete or partial name, or you can
find by Type.

To Find Items in the Project:

1. In the Search group, click the Find icon. The Find dialog box opens.
2. In the Find What field, enter a name/or a partial name.

Or / and

3. From the Type list, choose a type. The number and the type of objects in
the Type list differ depending on the module you are using.
4. In the Registration module, the Type list looks as illustrated below:

5. In the OfficeSurvey - Modeling (or Production) module, the Type list looks
as illustrated below:
382 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. Select one of the options below:

 Match Case: This option allows you to find an object with its name case-
matched to what was entered in the Find What field.
 Current Directory: This option gives the choice to the user to search in the
current directory or in all directories.

7. Click Find. The found objects are displayed in the Find dialog.

 In the Find dialog, you can perform a multi-selection, by using the Ctrl (or
Shift or Ctrl + A) key(s).
 All the objects, selected from the Find dialog, are listed in the Selection
List window (if opened).

8. Click Close. The Find dialog closes.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select Find from the
pop-up menu or use the short-cut key Ctrl + F.
Exploring Data 383

Explore in the 3D View


Data exploration in the 3D View consists mainly of using the navigation
commands such as Rotate, Pan, Zoom, etc. to examine the contents of
displayed scene/objects.
384 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Explore in the Images Tree


As explained in the data organization chapter, the Images Tree contains only
images which can be taken by an on-board camera in a 3D scanner or come
from any 2D cameras. You can browse a set of images; compare each of them
with a 3D scene in order to have a better perception and understanding, etc.
Exploring Data 385

Visualize Data
The visualization of objects in the 3D View is like taking a photograph of a
virtual scene with a camera. The steps may typically be the ones given below
and each will be discussed separately.

 You specify the rendering parameters for displaying objects.


 You choose camera characteristics; for example, the projection modes.
 You then select objects to display.
 Finally, you choose the point of view from which you want to shoot your
photo. This is equivalent to choosing the viewing camera's position and its
aiming orientation.

All the options related to the data visualization are gathered in the Display
group, on the View tab.

Point Cloud
A point cloud is a set of 3D points. Each 3D point can contain not only its 3D
coordinates, but also other attributes such as Intensity and Surface Normal.
386 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display a Point Cloud


To display objects, you should first select them either from the WorkSpace
window or the List window. Once objects are selected, you have the following
options to display them. If the selected objects are group nodes, you can either
use the command Show Cloud from the Display group. You can also use the
drag-and-drop function to drop the selected objects in the 3D View. If the
selected objects are object nodes (or scan nodes), you can either use the
same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name
of these selected objects in the List window. It is important to note that if the
selected objects have both the cloud and the geometry representations, only
the later one will be displayed when you use this box.

To Display a Point Cloud:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree.


2. In the Display group, click the Show Cloud icon.

You have two ways to check if a cloud is displayed (or not) in the 3D View. The
first way is to use the Show Cloud icon in the Display group. It becomes active
when you select a cloud which is not displayed in the 3D View. It becomes
inactive when the selected cloud is already displayed. The second way is to
use the List window. A displayed cloud is turned-on .

Note:
 You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List) window to get the pop-
up menu from which you can choose the Show Cloud command.
 If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group
node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.

Tip: You can use the D shortcut key for displaying a cloud, previously hidden.
The cloud should be initially selected in the 3D View.
Exploring Data 387

Hide a Point Cloud


Hiding an object with cloud property consists of removing its representation
from the 3D View. For hiding an object, you have to select it either from the
WorkSpace window or the List window or directly from the 3D View. If the
selected object is a group node, you can either use the command Hide Cloud
from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display toolbar. If the
selected object is a scan node, you can either use the same methods as above
or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of these selected objects
in the List window.

To Hide a Point Cloud:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree.


2. In the Display group, click the Hide Cloud icon.

Note: You can also right-click on a cloud in the Project Tree (or in the 3D View)
so as to display the pop-up menu and select Hide Cloud.

Tip: You can use the H shortcut key for hiding a cloud, initially selected in the
3D View.
388 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Geometry
Display a Geometry
To display objects, you should first select them either from the WorkSpace
window or the List window. Once objects are selected, you have the following
options to display them. If the selected objects are group nodes, you can either
use the command Display Geometry from the Display group. You can also use
the drag-and-drop function to drop the selected objects in the 3D View. If the
selected objects are object nodes (or scan nodes), you can either use the
same methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name
of these selected objects in the List window. It is important to note that if the
selected objects have both the cloud and the geometry representations, only
the later one will be displayed when you use this box.

To Display a Geometry:

1. Select an object with geometric property from the Project Tree.


2. In the Display group, click the Show Geometry icon.

You have two ways to check if a geometry is displayed or not in the 3D View.
The first way is to use the Display Geometry icon in the Display group. It
becomes active when you select a geometry which is not displayed in the 3D
View and inactive when the geometry is displayed in the 3D view. The second
way is to use the List window. A displayed geometry is turned-on .

Note:
 You can also right-click in the WorkSpace (or List) window to get the pop-
up menu from which you can choose the Display Geometry command.
 If you select a group node and display it, all leaf nodes under this group
node will be displayed. This avoids having to display them one by one.
Exploring Data 389

Hide a Geometry
Hiding an object with geometric property consists of removing its
representation from the 3D View. For hiding an object, you have to select it
either from the WorkSpace window or the List window or directly from the 3D
View. If the selected object is a group node, you can either use the command
Hide Geometry from the Display menu or its corresponding icon in the Display
toolbar. If the selected object is an object node, you can either use the same
methods as above or directly toggle the On or Off icon beside the name of
these selected objects in the List window.

To Hide a Geometry:

1. Select an object with geometric property from the Project Tree.


2. In the Display group, click the Hide Geometry icon.

Note: You can also right-click on an object with geometric property in the
Project Tree (or in the 3D View) to display the pop-up menu and select Hide
Geometry.

Hide all Items


This command enables to hide all displayed objects at once in the 3D View, no
matter the objects could be.

To Hide All Items:

 In the Display group, click the Hide All icon.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View in order to display the
pop-up menu and select Hide All.
390 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

View Only This


The View Only This feature enables to display and hide objects as follows: The
selection is displayed, the other objects are hidden, If the selection contains
objects that are not displayed, the feature shows the hidden objects and hide
the objects that are not selected. If the selection contains objects that are
partially displayed (geometry without cloud or vice versa), the feature displays
all objects in the selection, and hides the rest. To do this, you can use the
command View Only This from the Display menu or the corresponding icon in
the Display toolbar. You can also evoke this command from the right-click pop-
up menu.

To View Only This:

 In the Display group, click the View Only This icon.

Note: This command is not available when selecting a project.

Image
You can display an image in two ways either as a thumbnail in the 3D View or
in a separated 2D window beside the 3D View. In the first case, you can only
display an image once at a time. You can use a tip to check if an image is
displayed or not; it consists of using the List window. An image when displayed
has an On-bulb icon at its left side. In the second case, you can open as many
images as required and no tip is available.

Note: An image (selected from the Images Tree) has its thumbnail displayed in
the Property window (if open).

Note: In the Ribbon layout, these features can be selected only from the pop-
up menu.
Exploring Data 391

Display an Image
Displaying an image consists of opening it as a thumbnail within the 3D View.
You can only display one image at once

To Display an Image:

1. Select an image from the Images Tree.


2. Do one of the following:

 In the List window, toggle the On/Off icon beside the image name to On.
 Right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Display Image from
the pop-up menu.

 Resize: Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail image frame.
Stretch or shrink the frame by dragging.
 Change location: Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon
on the thumbnail image. Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable
location in the 3D view.
 Zoom: Click in the thumbnail image and zoom it In or Out using the mouse
wheel (if existed).
392 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Hide an Image
The command enables to close an image that is open as a thumbnail in the 3D
View. You can only hide one image at once.

To Hide an Image:

1. Select an image opened as a thumbnail.


2. Right-click on an image in the List window and select Hide Image from the
pop-up menu.

Tip:
 Select an image from the List window and toggle the On/Off icon to Off.
 Move your cursor over the thumbnail image and click the Close icon.
Exploring Data 393

Open an Image
Once an image is open in a separated window, you can zoom an area of this
image In or Out using the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole
image In or Out using the mouse wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the
image is zoomed In more than the 2D window can display, you can pan it in
any direction in order to view the hidden areas.

To Open an Image:

1. Select an image from the Images Tree.


2. Do one of the following:

In the List window, double-click on its name.


In the List window, right-click on its name and select Open Image from the pop-
up menu.

3. To close the image window, click on the Close icon on the border of
its frame.

Note: You cannot perform a distance measurement on an image that is open


in a separate window; the Measure icon is dimmed.
394 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Station
You can display the position, name and properties of a station (or of all
stations) within a project. All the options related the station visualization are
gathered in the Stations Makers group, on the View tab.

And in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.

Tip: You can use a shortcut key to hide (or display) all station Positions and all
station Labels. Both are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.

Display (or Hide) all Stations


You can display (or hide) all station markers, in one time, in the 3D View
regardless of the navigation mode (Examiner, Walkthrough or Station-Based)
you are using.
Exploring Data 395

Display all Station Markers


To Display all Station Markers:

 In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels and Station Maker List icons become enabled. All
station markers (shown as follows ) are displayed in the 3D View.

Tip: You can also select Show Stations from the 3D View toolbar.

Tip: You can jump from one station to another by double-clicking on the station
marker icon in the 3D View. The navigation mode will be automatically
switched to the Station Based navigation mode.

Note: If the Station Maker List window was open before choosing Show
Station Markers, it will be open after.

Hide all Station Markers


To Hide all Station Markers:

 In the Station Markers group, select Show Stations . The Show Station
Marker Labels and Station Maker List icons become dimmed. All station
markers (shown as follows ) are removed from the 3D View.

Note: If the Station Maker List window was closed before choosing Show
Station Markers, it will stay closed after.
396 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display (or Hide) all Station Marker Labels


For a given station, a label is its name in text displayed in the 3D View, next to
its station marker.

Display all Station Marker Labels


To Display all Station Marker Labels:

 In the Station Markers group, click the Show Station Marker Labels icon.

Note: You need to display first all the station markers.

Hide all Station Marker Labels


To Hide all Station Marker Labels:

 In the Station Markers group, click the Show Station Marker Labels icon.

Display (or Hide) Specific Station Makers


You can display (or hide) the position and the label of a specific station (or a
set of stations) in the 3D View, regardless of the navigation mode (Examiner,
Walkthrough or Station-Based) you are using.
Exploring Data 397

Display Specific Station Maker(s)


To Display Specific Station Marker(s):

1. In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become
enabled.
2. Click the Station Maker List Window icon. The Station Maker List window
opens.

 If required, use Select All to display all station positions.


 If required, use Expand All (or Expand ) to expand all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
 If required, use Collapse All (or Collapse ) to collapse all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
 Select a unique station from the tree.
 Or select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift) key
combined with the left clicking.
 Check the station(s) for which you want to display the station marker(s).

Note: Displaying the station marker of a specific station also displays its label
(if the label has been previously displayed).
398 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Hide Specific Station Marker(s)


To Hide Specific Station Marker(s):

1. In the Station Markers group, click the Show Stations icon. The Show
Station Marker Labels icon and the Station Maker List icon become
enabled.
2. Click the Station Maker List icon. The Station Maker List window opens.

 By default, all stations (or groups) from the project are checked.
 If required, use Clear Selection to hide all station markers at once.
 If required, use Expand All (or Expand ) to expand all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
 If required, use Collapse All (or Collapse ) to collapse all groups (or a
unique group) from the tree.
 Select a unique station from the tree.
 Or select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift) key
combined with the left clicking.
 Uncheck the station(s) for which you want to hide the station marker(s).

Note: Hiding the station maker of a specific station also hides its label (if the
label has been previously displayed).

Note: The J and K shortcut keys, respectively for Show Station Makers and
Show Station Maker Labels, cannot be used with the Station Maker List
window open.
Exploring Data 399

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of a Station


The Network Visuals in the 3D View is similar to a set of vectors, each vector
connecting the station marker of a station (or a point on the ground (if that
station has a height)) to a registration target (or to its point on the ground (if the
target has a height)).

Note: The user should be in the Registration processing mode.


400 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display the Network Visuals of a Station


To Display the Network Visuals of a Station:

1. First display the station markers of the stations.


2. In the 3D View, right-click on a 3D position.
3. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station) from the pop-
menu.

Or

4. In the Registration mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the
List window.
5. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
6. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station).

Or

7. In the Registration mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s) from the
List window.
8. In the Target-Based Registration group, click the Display/Hide Network
Visuals (Selected Station) icon.

Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7 to 8, you cannot view the network visuals
if the station marker(s) of the station(s) is (or are) not displayed.
Exploring Data 401

Hide the Network Visuals of a station


To Hide the Network Visuals of a Station:

1. In the 3D View, right-click on the same station marker.


2. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station) from the pop-
menu.

Or

3. In the Registration mode, select the same lonely (or set of) station(s) from
the List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
5. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station).

Or

6. In the Registration mode, select the same lonely (or a set of) station(s)
from the List window.
7. In the Target-Based Registration group, click the Display/Hide Network
Visuals (Selected Station) icon.

Note: (*) You cannot get the pop-up menu when selecting a set of stations.
402 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals of all Stations


This feature is similar to the Display/Hide Network Visuals (Selected Station)
feature but it is applied to all stations of the project. The user can be in any
processing mode: Registration, or Production.

In the Production mode, both the station markers and the Network Visuals are
shown.

In the Registration mode, each station is shown by its station marker, its height
(if existed), the registration targets that are inside as well as their height (if
existed).

Note: No station selection is required.


Exploring Data 403

Display the Network Visuals of all Stations


To Display the Network Visuals of all Stations:

1. In the Registration processing mode, first display all the station markers.
2. In the 3D View, right-click on a station marker.
3. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) from the pop-menu.

Or

4. In the Registration processing mode, select a single (or a set of) station(s)
from the List window.
5. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
6. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations).

Or

7. In the Registration mode, in the Target-Based Registration group, click the


Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) icon.

Note: For the steps from 4 to 6 and 7, you cannot view the network visuals if
the station markers of the stations are not displayed.

Hide the Network Visuals of all Stations


To Hide the Network Visuals of all Stations:

1. In the 3D View, right-click on any 3D position.


2. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) from the pop-menu.

Or

3. In the Registration mode, select any single (or set of) station(s) from the
List window.
4. Right-click to display the pop-menu.
5. Select Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations).

Or

6. In the Registration mode, in the Target-Based Registration group, click the


Display/Hide Network Visuals (All Stations) icon.
404 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

TZF Scan
A TZF Scan is 2D Map Data, linked to a TZF format file which can come from a
TZS, Faro, and etc. format file conversion or from a Trimble TX 3D Scanner. In
the first case, there is only one TZF Scan per station. It is by default a Main
Scan. In the second case, a station can contain more than one TZF Scan and
each can be either a Full Scan* or an Area Scan, with a Mode (or Density)
(Preview, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 or Extended).

In a set of scans, if there is a unique Full Scan, this Full Scan is by default the
Main Scan. If there are two Full Scans, the highest in Density is by default the
Main Scan. If these Full Scans are equal in Density, the last (acquired) is by
default the Main Scan.

Note:
 (*) A Full Scan is a 360°x158° scan.
 (**) The Spacing parameter is the distance between two consecutive laser
spots.
 The Extended range density is a feature that comes with an option
upgrade of the Trimble TX8 3D Scanner.

When you open several TZF Scans directly in RealWorks, in a multi-scan


situation, the priority to set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan depends first on its
Type (a Full Scan has a higher priority than an Area Scan) and then on its
Density (Level 3 has the higher priority and Extended the lower).

With a Trimble TX8 instrument, when scanning with the Extended ability, two
scans, identical but with different in terms of range, will be acquired. The first
scan will be a short range scan (from 0 to 120m) while the second scan is a
long range one (from 120 to 340m). The time to acquire a short range scan is
shorter than the time to acquire the long range one. The two TZF format files
will be created under the RWI folder. Now, with RealWorks 10, the two TZF
format files will be now merged into a single TZF format.

Note: Colored data acquired by a TX instrument, when are loaded in


RealWorks, are not displayed with the color information. You need to first post-
process the TZF files to be able to view the color information. The TCF format
files, which store the color and exposure information, are merged with the TZF
files once the post-processing is complete. We advise the user to make a copy
of his original data sets before performing the post-processing, because it is
not possible to go back.
Exploring Data 405

Display a TZF Scan


You can display a TZF Scan as a thumbnail within the 3D View. You can only
display one TZF Scan at a time.

To Display a TZF Scan:

1. Right-click on a TZF Scan in the Scans Tree.


2. Select Display Image from the pop-up menu. Below are the operations you
can perform on a displayed TZF Scan.

 Resize: Place the mouse cursor anywhere on the thumbnail frame. Stretch
(or shrink) the frame by dragging.
 Change location: Place the mouse cursor over the Drag & Drop icon.
Drag and drop the thumbnail image to a suitable location in the 3D view.
 Zoom: Click in the thumbnail image and zoom in or out using the mouse
wheel (if existed). The thumbnail, once zoomed in, can be moved in any
direction.

Tip: You can toggle the bulb from to .

Hide a TZF Scan


Hiding a TZF Scan consists of closing its thumbnail displayed within the 3D
View.

To Display a TZF Scan:

1. Right-click on a TZF Scan in the Scans Tree.


2. Select Hide Image from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can toggle the bulb from to or click on the Close button.
406 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan


You can set manually a TZF Scan as a Main Scan.

To Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan:

1. Right-click on a TZF Scan from the Scans Tree.


2. Select Set as Main Scan from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 The Set as Main Scan feature remains dimmed when selecting a Main
Scan.
 The icon of the selected TZF Scan changes from to .

Visualize a TZF Scan Preview


A TZF Scan, once selected as an input of a tool like e.g. the Target Analyzer,
is displayed as 2D Preview Image in a specific window. You can zoom In or
Out an area of the 2D Preview Image using the Zoom In and Zoom Out
commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse wheel or select a
zoom factor from the drop-down list. If the image is zoomed In more than the
2D Viewer can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the
hidden areas.
Exploring Data 407

Visualize the Extracted Targets Within a TZF Scan Preview


All Spherical Targets, Black and White Flat Targets or Point Targets extracted
from a TZF Scan by using e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets feature, once created,
are displayed within the TZF Scan as illustrated below.

A Target selected from the List window is highlighted in the TZF Scan (once
open) as shown below.
408 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Inspection Map
An inspection map results from the comparison between two surfaces
(cloud/cloud, cloud/mesh, mesh/mesh and cloud (or mesh)/primitive, etc.). An
inspection map may have three shapes: Plane, Cylinder and Tunnel; this
depends on the surfaces selected for comparing and the projection type
applied to that comparison. Each inspection map has two directions (Vertical
and Horizontal) shown by its own red-and-green-axis frame and a color bar
associated to it.

To view which shape has an inspection map, display its properties in the
Property window and check for the Projection Type (Planar for a plane, Tunnel
for a tunnel and Cylinder for a cylinder).

If the loaded project contained an inspection map, you can display it in the 3D
View or open it in an independent window.

Caution: An inspection map is of geometry type. You can delete it by selecting


from the pop-up menu either Delete or Delete Geometry.
Exploring Data 409

Open an Inspection Map


To Open an Inspection Map:

1. Right-click on an inspection map in the Models Tree.


2. Select Open Inspection Map from the drop-down menu.

 The selected inspection map is open in a specific window, beside the 3D


View. This window is called by the name of the inspection map. The same
window is called Map Preview when you are inside a comparison (or
inspection) tool.

 You can zoom the map In or Out. If it is bigger than the window can show,
you can pan it in any direction.
 You can manage the ColorBar that is associated to the map, created a
new one, etc. Refer to the ColorBars section for more information.

Close an Inspection Map


To Close an Inspection Map:

 Click on the Cross button at the top right corner of the window.
410 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display an Inspection Map


To Display an Inspection Map in the 3D View:

 In the List window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to On
to display it in the 3D View.

Hide an Inspection Map


To Hide an Inspection Map in the 3D View:

 In the List window, toggle the bulb icon beside an inspection map to Off
to hide it in the 3D View.

ColorBar
A ColorBar is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to a
range of elevation values. It is always linked to an inspection map (or 3D
inspection cloud). You can create, edit, delete, rearrange, import or export a
ColorBar inside a comparison (or inspection) tool like e.g. the Twin Surface
Inspection* or outside a tool after you have opened an inspection map**.

Note:
 (*) This tool is not present in RealWorks (Base) and Advanced.
 (**) Outside a comparison (or an inspection), only an inspection map can
be opened in an independent window. A 3D inspection cloud cannot.
Exploring Data 411

Hide/Show a ColorBar
You can hide the current ColorBar and display it again. Doing this will remove
the red-and-green-axis frame and the scale from the "Inspection Map's Name"
window.

To Hide/Show a ColorBar:

1. First open an inspection map if you are outside a comparison (or


inspection) tool.
2. Click the Hide/Show ColorBar icon to hide the current color bar.
3. Click again Hide/Show ColorBar to display the current color bar.

Note: First open an inspection map in an independent window, if not already


done.

Edit a ColorBar

The Edit ColorBar feature lets you edit the default (or current) ColorBar,
delete (or export) a ColorBar other than the default one, to import an existing
ColorBar into the project or to have access to the Advanced Options for
creating a new ColorBar or editing an existing one.

To Edit a ColorBar:

1. Click the Edit ColorBar icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Do one of the following:

 Define regular intervals.


 Keep positive values only.
 Import a ColorBar.
 Switch to an Existing ColorBar.
 Delete an Existing ColorBar.
 Export an Existing ColorBar.

3. Use Advanced Options for creating a new ColorBar or editing an existing


ColorBar.
4. Click OK. The ColorBar closes.

Note: First open an inspection map in an independent window, if not already


done.
412 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define Regular Intervals


To Define Regular Intervals:

1. Click the Edit ColorBar icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. If required, check the Regular Intervals option.
3. Enter a value in the field below the option.
4. Validate by pressing Enter.

 The levels are then computed based on the input value, as illustrated
below.
 The number of levels can be checked by clicking Edit in the Advanced
Options panel.

5. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.

Caution: You are not allowed to enter Zero or a negative value.

Tip: You can also display the properties of an inspection map in the Property
window and check the Regular Intervals value in the ColorBar line as illustrated
below.
Exploring Data 413
414 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Keep Positive Values Only


To Keep Positive Values Only:

1. Click the Edit ColorBar icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. If required, check the Regular Intervals option.
3. Enter a value in the field below the option.
4. Check the Positive Values Only option.
5. Validate by pressing Enter.

 The levels are then computed based on the input value.


 The number of levels can be checked by clicking Edit in the Advanced
Options panel.
 Only levels above Zero are kept, as illustrated below.

6. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.


Exploring Data 415

Import a ColorBar
You can use any TXT editor (WordPad for example) to create a ColorBar file
and import it into your current project. This file should contain a series of RGB
(Red Green Blue) and interval value pairs. The ColorBar once imported will be
automatically applied to the opened (selected) inspection map (or 3D
inspection cloud).

To Import a ColorBar:

1. Click Edit ColorBar . The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Click Import. The Import ColorBar "Name of the Project" dialog opens.
3. Find a location in your disk where the color bar file is stored in the Look In
field.
4. Click on the ColorBar file name to select it.
5. Click Open. The Import ColorBar "Name of the Project" dialog closes.
6. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.

Switch to an Existing ColorBar


To Switch to an Existing ColorBar:

1. Click the Edit ColorBar icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Check the Existing ColorBar option.
3. Click on the pull-down arrow.
4. Choose a ColorBar from the drop-down list.

5. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.

 The inspection map is now displayed according to the chosen ColorBar.


 You can come back to the default ColorBar rendering by clicking Switch to
Default ColorBar.
416 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete an Existing ColorBar


The Delete feature is available only if there is another ColorBar other than the
default one.

To Delete an Existing ColorBar:

1. Click Edit ColorBar . The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Check the Existing ColorBar option.
3. Drop-down the Existing ColorBar list.
4. Select a ColorBar from the list.
5. Click Delete. If there are several ColorBars in your project, the one that
comes after will be applied to the inspection map (or to the 3D inspection
cloud).
6. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.

Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can directly
click Delete. This will by-default select the option and delete the current
ColorBar.

Tip: It is not necessary to check the Existing ColorBar option. You can drop-
down the Existing ColorBar list. This will select the option by default.

Export an Existing ColorBar


The Export feature is available only if there is another ColorBar other than the
default one. A ColorBar, when exported, is a TXT format file. This file, when
opened, contains a series of RGB (Red Green Blue) and interval value pairs.

To Export an Existing ColorBar:

1. Click Edit ColorBar . The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Check the Existing ColorBar option.
3. Select a ColorBar from the drop-down list.
4. Click Export. The Export ColorBar dialog box opens.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. Find a location in your disk in the Look In field.
7. Click Save. The Export ColorBar dialog box closes.
8. Click OK. The ColorBar dialog closes.
Exploring Data 417

Advanced Options
The Advanced Options feature lets the user create a new ColorBar or edit a
ColorBar other than the default one by defining its intervals which can be
regular or by choosing a color for each level.

To Edit With Advanced Options:

1. Click the Edit ColorBar icon. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Click Edit. The ColorBar Editing dialog opens.

 A new ColorBar is created with a default name (COLOR_BAR) (or with the
name of one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
 The Interval values in the Step - 1 field belong to the default ColorBar (or
to one that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
 The color of each Level is the level color of the default ColorBar (or of one
that has been chose from the Existing ColorBar list).
418 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Option for only keeping positive values 4 - The name of the current ColorBar or of a
2 - Field for defining the intervals which can be ColorBar to come
regular or not 5 - Field for defining the color of a level
3 - The number of levels in the current ColorBar 6 - The pull down arrow
or in a ColorBar to come 7 - The color palette

3. Do one of the following:

 Define the intervals.


 Define the color of a level.
 Create a new ColorBar.
 Edit an existing ColorBar.

Define the Intervals


In this step, the user can define ether Regular Intervals or Irregular Steps.

To Define the Intervals:

1. In Step 1, delete all the values that are in the field, below the Positive
Values Only option.
2. Enter several values in the field.
3. Validate by pressing Enter.

 The input values must be ranked from negative to positive, from lower to
higher.
 Each value must be separated by a semicolon, a comma, etc.
 The number of levels is then updated according to the input values.
 All of the levels are also updated in Step 2.

Define the Color of a Level


To Define the Color of a Level:

1. In Step 2, click on a pull-down arrow next to a level. A Color palette


appears.
2. Choose an existing color from the palette.
3. Or click Other to define your own color.
4. Click Ok. The ColorBar palette closes.
Exploring Data 419

Create a New ColorBar


You can create as many ColorBars as required. Only one can be linked to an
inspection map (or to a 3D inspection cloud) at once. By default, a ColorBar is
automatically created after you perform an inspection and save the result as a
map. When you save your project, all of the created Color Bar(s) will be
automatically saved. You cannot see it (or them) in the Project Tree. You need
to open the related inspection map for this.

To Create a New ColorBar:

1. Keep the default name which is "COLOR_BAR".

2. Or enter a new name in the Name field.


3. If required, check the Positive Values Only option.
4. Define the intervals.
5. Define the color of a level.
6. Click Create. The ColorBar Editing dialog closes.

Note: If two ColorBars share the same name; the second (according to the
order of creation) is renamed with an increment number between brackets.

Tip: To create a ColorBar based on an existing one; click the Existing ColorBar
pull-down arrow in the ColorBar Editing dialog and select one from the drop-
down list.
420 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit an Existing ColorBar


To Edit an Existing ColorBar:

1. First, choose a ColorBar from the Existing ColorBar list.

2. In the ColorBar Editing dialog, do one of the following:

 If required, check the Keep Positive Values Only option.


 Define the intervals.
 Define the color of a level.

3. Click Save. The ColorBar Editing dialog closes.


Exploring Data 421

Switch to the Cut/Fill ColorBar

The Switch to Cut/Fill ColorBar feature lets the user display an inspection
map with only two levels of information. All negative parts (of an inspection
map) are rendered in blue and those that are positive are rendered in red.

An inspection map displayed with the default ColorBar

An inspection map displayed with the Sign-Based ColorBar

You can come back to the default ColorBar rendering by clicking Switch to
Default ColorBar.

Note: First open an inspection map in an independent window, if not already


done.
422 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Switch to the Default ColorBar

The Switch to Default ColorBar feature lets you display an inspection map,
with the default ColorBar which is the one that comes with the inspection map
after it has been created.

Display and Hide the Alignment Stationing from a Curve


A polyline, for which an alignment stationing has been applied, has two
distinguished properties: Geometry and Alignment Stationing.

To Display the Alignment Stationing:

1. From the Project Tree, select a polyline with an alignment stationing.


2. If its geometry is not yet displayed, display it by selecting Display
Geometry from the pop-up menu.
3. And then select again Display Alignment Stationing from the pop-up menu.

To Hide the Alignment Stationing:

1. From the Project Tree, select a polyline for which the stations are
displayed.
2. Right-click on the polyline and select Display Alignment Stationing from
the pop-up menu.
Exploring Data 423

Render Data
A Rendering defines how an object is going to be displayed. For example, a
geometry can be displayed in Wireframe or shaded surface. We introduce the
different options available for different object representations. A rendering will
be applied to all objects of the same type displayed in the 3D View. This
means that you cannot specify different renderings for different displayed
objects of the same type. For example, you cannot display a Geometry Object
A in Wire-Frame, and the Geometry Object B in Surface.

All the options related to the rendering are gathered in two places, in the
Rendering group on the View tab and on the vertical toolbar.
424 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Render Point Clouds


There are several rendering options that you can apply to a displayed point
cloud. The White Color option enables to render all the displayed points with
white color. The Cloud Color option enables to render all he displayed points
with the color of the clouds they belong to. The Station Color option enables to
render all the displayed points with the color of the stations they belong to. The
Grey Scaled Intensity option enables to render all the displayed points using
the gray scale defined by their intensity. The True Color option enables to
render the displayed points using their color. The Color Coded Elevation (see
"Color Point Clouds Based on by the Elevation Information" on page 427)
option enables to render a point cloud with the height information encoded in
the point color. The Color-Coded Classification (see "Color Point Clouds Based
on the Classification Information" on page 426) option applies a rendering to
the displayed point clouds based on the colors of the classification layers the
displayed point clouds belong to.

To Render Point Clouds:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.
2. In the Rendering group, click the Cloud Rendering pull-down arrow.
3. Select a rendering from the drop-down sub-menu.

For point clouds, you can combine the Normal Shading rendering with any of
the renderings named above (except for Point Size and Discontinuity Display)
in order to have a relief (or depth) display. In (A), the White Color rendering is
applied to the point cloud in selection. The Normal Shading information is
added to the White Color rendering in (B) and to the True Color rendering in
(C). When such a combination is applied, you can use the Lighting Direction
tool to modify the light source position. Note that such a combination reduces
by half the time required to display points.
Exploring Data 425

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Rendering from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.
Select then a rendering option.

Tip: You can use a set of shortcut keys to swap from a Rendering option to
another. All are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.

Note: You are able to customize the brightness and the contrast of points by
using the Cloud Rendering Settings feature.
426 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Color Point Clouds Based on the Classification Information


The Color Coded Classification rendering can be used to apply a rendering to
the objects of point cloud type, which are displayed in the 3D View. This
rendering is based on the colors of the layers to which the displayed objects
belong to.

Note: The Color Coded Classification rendering is only available in the


Production) mode. When you switch from e.g. Production to Registration, the
Color Coded Classification feature becomes dimmed.

Caution: The Color Coded Classification rendering is not available when


exporting point clouds to the DXF format.
Exploring Data 427

Color Point Clouds Based on by the Elevation Information


This feature enables to render a point cloud with the height information
encoded in the point color. This helps to visualize instantaneously the height of
points in the scene. This feature is useful to highlight e.g. in a building each
floor separately, repeating the color bar at each level.

To Color Point Clouds Based on the Elevation Information:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View.


2. If required, bring the view to Front (Z-Axis up).
3. If required, open the Measurement tool and choose Point Measurement.
4. If required, measure the position of a point by picking it. This point will be
the Rendering by Elevation Origin.
5. If required, measure the position of another point by picking it.
6. Measure the difference along the Z-Axis between the two picked points.
This gap will be the Rendering by Elevation Interval.

Tip: For the steps from 3 to 6, you can also use the Distance Measurement
Along Vertical Axis feature.

7. In the Rendering group, click the Cloud Rendering pull-down arrow.


8. Choose the Color Coded Elevation option from the drop-down list.
9. Click the Cloud Rendering Settings icon. The Cloud Rendering Settings
dialog opens.
10. Input the Z coordinate of the first picked point in the Origin field.
11. Input the gap value along the Z-Axis between the two picked points in the
Interval field.
428 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: You can input a negative value as a Rendering Elevation Origin.

Note: The default value for the Interval is 10m.

Tip: You can get the Origin value by picking it with .

12. Click the OK button. The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog closes.

A color bar for a level

Caution: This feature does not require any selection. It is applied to all objects,
mainly point clouds, displayed in the 3D View.

Note: The current active frame determines the elevation direction. If required,
use the USC tool to change the elevation direction.

Tip: You can apply the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering to a point
cloud that is displayed with the Color Coded by Elevation rendering.

Tip: You can use the shortcut key 8.


Exploring Data 429

Define a Setting for Cloud Renderings


This feature enables to adjust the brightness and the contrast of points in a
point cloud. It is useful in the case of a point cloud acquired with e.g. an
insufficient dynamic (low contrast or not enough bright). The adjustment is only
applied to the display of the data in the 3D View. It does not affect the raw
information in the data file. In addition to the feature above, you can blend the
Luminance information with the RGB information.

To Define a Setting for Cloud Renderings:

1. First, display a point cloud in the 3D View.


2. In the Rendering group, click the Cloud Rendering Settings icon. The
Cloud Rendering Settings dialog opens.

 By default, the Contrast slider and the Brightness slider are both at
halfway.
 The Blending (True Color) slider is at the right end (True Color).
 All of the parameters, once adjusted, become persistent. They remain
unchanged until you reset them by clicking the Default button.
 The Blending (True Color) pane is enabled only if the True Color rendering
has been chosen.
430 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 The Rendering by Elevation pane is enabled only if the Color Coded


Elevation rendering has been chosen. Refer to the Color a Point Cloud
Based on by Elevation the Information (see "Color Point Clouds
Based on by the Elevation Information" on page 427) topic for more
information.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Cloud Rendering Settings option can be reached from
the Rendering group.

Adjust the Intensity Contrast and Brightness


You can manually adjust the contrast and brightness on the intensity of points.
This adjustment is done by modifying the intensity values during the display of
the data. The raw information in the data file is not modified.

To Adjust the Intensity Contrast and Brightness:

1. In the Rendering group, click the Cloud Rendering pull-down arrow. A


submenu drops down.
2. Select a rendering mode from the drop-down list.

 If Cloud Color, Station Color, Scan Color and Color Coded Elevation has
been chosen, you need to apply the Gray-Scale Intensity With Color
rendering too.
 If Gray-Scaled Intensity or Color Coded Intensity has been chosen, the
Gray-Scale Intensity With Color rendering is not required.
 If True Color has been chosen, the adjustment will have any effect. You
have to fist blend the intensity and color information.

3. In the Cloud Rendering Settings dialog, move the Contrast (or Brightness)
slider.
4. Click OK. The Cloud Rendering Settings dialog closes.
Exploring Data 431

Blend the Intensity and Color Information


With a point cloud rendered with the True Color mode, you can blend the
Intensity information with the Color information, thanks to a slider. By default,
the cursor is at the right end (True Color). You need to first choose the True
Color rendering. Otherwise, the Blending (True Color) option remains grayed-
out.

The cursor at the True Color end:

The point cloud is displayed with only the Color information.

The cursor at halfway between Intensity and True Color:

The point cloud is displayed with both the Intensity and Color information. You
can adjust the Contrast and Brightness parameters as described in the
previous topic.
432 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The cursor at the Intensity end:

The point cloud is displayed with only the Intensity information.

Define the Rendering by Elevation Interval


The Interval parameter enables to define the height of a color chart when
applying the Color Coded by Elevation rendering to a displayed point cloud.
The default value is 10 meters.
Exploring Data 433

Define the Rendering by Elevation Origin


The Origin parameter enables to define the starting point of a color chart
relative to the world coordinate system when applying the Color Coded
Elevation rendering to a displayed point cloud.
434 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color


This feature lets the user add the intensity information on point clouds* which
are displayed in the 3D View, only when one of the following renderings, Cloud
Color, Station Color or Scan Color, has been applied.

To Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree and display it.
2. In the Rendering group, click the Intensity-Based Blending icon.

Or

3. Right anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.


4. Select Rendering / Intensity-Based Blending from the pop-up menu.

Point clouds with the Intensity-Based Blending feature applied.

Point clouds with the Intensity-Based Blending feature not applied.


Exploring Data 435

Tip: You can use the B shortcut key.

Note: The Intensity-Based Blending feature, once applied, becomes persistent.


It remains in this state until you ask it to change.

Note:
 (*) Except for 2D slices created within the Cutting Plane, Contouring,
Profile/Cross-Section.
 (*) Except also for inspection clouds displayed with its inspected color
(Cloud Color rendering) and working cloud created with the Tank
Calibration.
436 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose the Point Cloud Shading


The Point Shading group contains modes intended to highlight details,
depending on the data content. Applied to all point clouds displayed in the 3D
View, these modes enable you to understand the scanned environment
whatever the data type, i.e., whether the scan has laser intensity or not, color
or not, surface normals or not, viewing an indoor dataset from the outside or
from the inside, viewing an outdoor dataset, etc.

No Shading
The No Shading option is the default setting. In this mode the points are
displayed without lighting effect.

Normal Shading
The Normal Shading rendering mode shades each displayed point by using its
normal information.
Exploring Data 437

Ambient Shading
The Ambient Shading rendering mode shows how exposed each point in a
scene is to the ambient lighting. This mode’s best use case is when neither
color nor normal information is available.

This mode shades each point relative to the amount of ambient lighting it
receives. This shading reveals the details. Since it applies on all datasets - it
doesn't require normal information or intensity or color - this is the
recommended mode for most situations, combined with your favorite color and
visibility options. Please note that some point clouds may look too dark when
the Intensity-Based Blending is on (press B to remove it or put it back, see the
Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Intensity With Color (on page 434)
section).

Enhanced Ambient Shading


This mode is an improved mode of the existing Ambient Shading mode. It
shades each point relative to the amount of ambient lighting it receives and
applies a pixel anti-aliasing. When used combined with your favorite color and
visibility options, this mode will give you the best visual results. Depending on
the graphics card, it may slightly impact the frame rate, and so the existing
Ambient Shading mode may still be preferred in some situations.

Note: Do not apply the Enhanced Ambien Shading rendering to a 3D


inspection cloud (when the Colorbar is in use).

Choose the Point Cloud Visibility


The Point Visibility group contains modes for displaying only what you would
like to see.
438 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

No Filtering
The No Filters option is the default setting. In this mode, all points are shown
without visibility filtering.
Exploring Data 439

Hide the Background


The navigation inside an indoor scene, composed of 3D points, may make the
interpretation of the scene more or less difficult depending on the density of the
point cloud. You may see the objects behind some others. This rendering
option hides the 3D points that are occluded by the foreground objects. It is
especially useful in indoor scenarios when navigating in the Station-Based (or
WalkThrough) mode.

To Hide the Background:

1. If required, display objects in the 3D View.


2. In the Rendering group, click the Hide Background icon.
440 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: The Hide Background rendering cannot be used within the Tank Grid
Definition sub-tool, of the Vertical Tank Inspection tool.

Caution: The Hide Background rendering cannot be used with the Hidden
lines rendering for geometry. Selecting the Hide Background rendering
disables automatically the Hidden Lines option.

See the Inside


The See Inside rendering mode is ideal for looking at the interior of a building
that has been scanned from the inside, from a viewpoint located outside. In this
situation, if you use the Normal Shading (on page 436), the scan points on the
walls look black. The See Inside mode simply hides these points, so that you
can see what is behind, inside the building.
Exploring Data 441

Outline
The Outline rendering mode is ideal for Keyplan-like visualization, e.g., for
checking the registration on walls by hiding the points whose normal faces the
screen (towards or backwards).

This is a scanned scene, viewed from Top, with no filtering.


442 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The same scene, viewed from Top, with the Outline and Normal Shading
renderings applied.

Display the Discontinuity of Points


The Discontinuity Display option displays points with edge highlighted (where
available).

Change the Size of Displayed Points


The Point Size option changes the size of points when displaying a point cloud
in the 3D View from 1 Pixel to 5 Pixels.
Exploring Data 443

Render Geometries
There are five renderings applicable to a geometry displayed in the 3D View.
The Wireframe option renders a selected geometry in wire-frame. The Hidden
Lines option renders a selected geometry in wire-frame with hidden lines
removed. The Solid option renders a selected geometry as a smooth shaded
surface. The Solid - Classification (see "Color Geometries Based on the
Classification Information" on page 444) option displays the objects, of
geometry type, displayed in the 3D View with the colors of the layers they
belong to. The Textured option renders a selected geometry as a texture
mapped surface if such a mapping exists.

To Render Geometries:

1. Select a geometry from the Project Tree and display it.


2. In the Rendering group, click the Geometry Rendering pull-down arrow.
3. Select a rendering from the drop-down sub-menu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Rendering from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.
Select then a rendering option.

Note: In RealWorks 10.2, the Normal Shading rendering, when applied to a


mesh displayed in the Surface mode, adds a smooth rendering (one color per
triangle with gradient effect). In RealWorks 10.3, the Normal Shading rendering
produces no effect. To have the same smooth rendering, please use the Mesh
Smooth (see "Apply a Smooth Rendering to Meshes" on page 446) option.
444 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Color Geometries Based on the Classification Information


The Solid - Classification rendering can be used to apply a rendering to the
objects, of geometry type, which are displayed in the 3D View. This rendering
is based on the colors of the layers to which the displayed objects belong to.
Exploring Data 445

Note: The Solid - Classification rendering is only available in the Production


mode. When you switch e.g. from Production to Registration, the Solid -
Classification feature becomes dimmed.

Caution: There are some objects for which the Solid - Classification rendering
has no effect when it is chosen like e.g. an Inspection Map, a Measurement, a
Frame, a Volume, a Polyline, etc.

Display Edges of Models


The Geometry Outline rendering option enables to display the edges of all
displayed models in the 3D View (except meshes). It has to be used with the
Solid rendering, and can be activated the O key or by choosing the Geometry
Outline icon in the Rendering group on the View tab.
446 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply a Smooth Rendering to Meshes


A mesh displayed in the Solid rendering mode, has a flat rendering (one color
per triangle with no gradient effect).

The Smooth Meshes option displays the surface meshes with a smooth
rendering (one color per triangle with gradient effect).
Exploring Data 447

Add a Lighting Direction


The Lighting Direction feature lets you produce infinity of lighting effects on
complex objects. You can change the spotlight’s direction or use pre-defined
light effects - five are available. Note that lighting effect modifications will be
applied to the current (active) 3D View.

To Add a Lighting Direction:

1. If required, display objects in the 3D View.


2. In the Rendering group, click the Lighting Direction icon. The Lighting
Direction dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Change the spotlight’s direction at will.

a) Place the mouse cursor over the handle.


b) Drag the handle. The spotlight direction changes and the handle
color switches from grey to yellow.
c) Drop the handle when you have the desired light effect. The
handle returns again to its previous color.

 Change the spotlight’s direction using pre-defined light effects.

 Click to light from the top left position.


 Click to light from the down right position.
 Click to light from the top right position.
 Click to light from the down left position.
 Click to return to the default position.
448 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: This feature does only apply a lighting effect to a geometry.

Adaptive Point Size


The Adaptive Point Size feature applies a rendering that increases points size
according two factors: the distance to the camera and the camera zoom. The
result is that holes on nearest clouds appeared filled, making the display
quality of a 3D scene greatly enhanced and the 3D scene more
understandable.

This feature can be used only when the 3D scene displayed is in the
Perspective projection mode. It can be combine with any point cloud rendering
options and point size display. In this case, point size sets the minimal point
size and increases the size factor to apply on nearest points.

Point cloud displayed with "No Shading"


Exploring Data 449

Point cloud displayed with the "Enhanced Ambient Shading" and "Adaptive
Point Size"
450 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter Data
The Limit Box Mode lets you create small sections for evaluating the
registration results, drawing polylines or just getting a clearer view of a specific
area. This mode can be used outside or inside a tool. In both cases, it is purely
a visualization mode. In the last case (inside a tool), you have to keep in mind
that the working cloud is not the cloud inside the limit box but the cloud from
the selection (that is required to enter the mode). If you want the working cloud
to be the cloud inside the limit box, you can select the Box Selection (see "Set
the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as a Working Cloud" on page 328) from the
Segmentation tool.

Tip: In RealWorks Viewer, there is no menu entry nor shortcut (F4) for the
Limit Box Mode feature. If there is a limit box previously stored in the project,
you can load it. If there is no limit box, you can import one even from a non-
related project. A limit box, once loaded, can be edited, deleted and exported.
Once the project is closed, all limit boxes which have been modified within that
Viewer session will be lost (apart from the exported ones).
Exploring Data 451

Launch the Limit Box Mode


To Launch the Limit Box Mode:

1. In the Limit Box group, click the Limit Box Mode icon. The cursor becomes

as follows .
2. Or use the F4 shortcut key instead.

The Limit Box Mode toolbar opens as well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.
If an object has been selected (as input in this mode) and displayed in the 3D
View; the object remains selected with its bounding box.

1 - Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside 3 - Select Limit Box Center Position
the Limit Box 4 - Change Limit Box Center Position
2 - Show Limit Box 5 - Limit Boxes

To be able to leave the Limit Box Mode, you need to first define a position by
picking a point on the displayed objects (or select Close Center On Point from
the pop-up menu, or press Esc.) and then choose F4 or Limit Box Mode from
the Display menu.

Note: No selection is required to activate the Limit Box Mode. It is based on


what is displayed in the 3D View.
452 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Define the Center Point of a Limit Box:

 Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries*.

 The Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate icons become enabled as well as the
Sampling field, the Extract Points from TZF Scans and Close Tool icons.
 The Show Limit Box and Modify Shape icons become enabled and
selected.

1 - Modify Shape 4 – Canonical Views


2 – Pan 5 – Store the current Limit Box
3 - Rotate

 A limit box is displayed centered on the picked point which is set to the
center of the screen.
 The manipulator which appears with the limit box depends on the feature
that has been last used, i.e., among Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
 If an object has been selected (as input of the tool) and displayed in the
3D View; the object remains selected with its Bounding Box.

Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point
from the pop-up menu.

Edit the Properties of the Limit Box


A limit box is a three-dimensional figure with six square faces. It is used to
isolate a region on clouds and/or geometries.
Exploring Data 453

Select the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Select the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Click the Select Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to show

the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.

 The limit box is then centered on the picked point which is set to the center
of the screen.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can select Close Center on Point from
the pop-up menu.

Change the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Change the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on displayed clouds and/or geometries.

 The limit box is then centered on the picked point.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc.

Manipulate a Limit Box


There are three modes of manipulations, Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
454 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Resize a Limit Box


To Resize a Limit Box:

1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.

2. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box in one direction:

 Pick a Face Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Face Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
Exploring Data 455

 Pick a Corner Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Corner Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also use the E shortcut key instead.


456 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan a Limit Box


To Pan a Limit Box:

1. Click the Pan icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Axis


Handles and three Plane Handles, appears. It has as its origin the center
of the limit box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pan in a plane.
 Pan along a direction.

Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.

Note: It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are


outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. By doing
this, you can know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or
within all of the stations.

Tip:
 You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
 You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
Exploring Data 457

Pan Along a Direction


To Pan the Limit Box along a Direction:

1. Pick an Axis Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. A direction in yellow


aligned with the Axis Handle appears.
2. Drag the Axis Handle along the direction to move the limit box in that
direction.
3. Drop the Axis Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


458 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:

1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


Exploring Data 459

Rotate a Limit Box


To Rotate a Limit Box:

1. Click the Rotate icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Ring


Handles (red, light blue and green), is displayed. This manipulator has the
center of the limit box as origin.
2. Pick a Ring Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. An axis, passing through
the center of the ring and perpendicular to it, appears. This axis has the
color of the selected ring.
3. Drag the Ring Handle to rotate the limit box around the axis.
4. Drop the Ring Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
460 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Switch from one Mode of Manipulation to Another


You can easily switch between the different manipulation modes, i.e. from
Modify Shape to Pan, and from Pan to Rotate, and so on, by just picking one of
the Handles.

Note: The cursor changes to when you hover it over a Handle.

Display and Hide a Limit Box


A limit box can be displayed and hidden at any time.

To Display a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.

To Hide a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
Exploring Data 461

Display and Hide Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box


All objects that are outside the limit box, whatever they could be, can be at any
time displayed, or hidden.

To Display the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.
462 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

To Hide the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.

View a Limit Box from one of its Sides


To View a Limit Box from one of its Sides:

1. Click on the Canonical Views pull down arrow.


2. Choose a view from the drop-down list.

Or

3. Right click in the 3D View.


4. Choose a view of the Limit Box Views from the pop-up menu.

Record Limit Boxes


To Record a Limit Box:

 Click the Record the Current Limit Box icon.

In the Limit Box window (if open), a limit box object with a default name (New
Limit Box) is then created.
Exploring Data 463

Managing Limit Boxes


A limit box, once recorded, is stacked in a list in the Limit Box window (if open).

Rename a Limit Box


To Rename a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Press the F2 key. The name of the selected limit box becomes editable.
3. Input a new name, and press Enter.

Add a Description to a Limit Box


To Add a Description to a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click inside the Description panel.
3. Input a comment in the Description panel.
464 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply a Limit Box


To Apply a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click the Apply Limit Box icon.

Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Apply Limit Box from the
pop-up menu or double-click a limit box.

Remove a Limit Box


To Remove a Limit Box:

1. In the Limit Box window, select a limit box.


2. Click the Remove Limit Box icon. The selected limit box will be removed
from the Limit Box window,

Tip: You can also right-click on a limit box and select Remove Limit Box from
the pop-up menu.

Export Limit Boxes


To Export Limit Boxes:

1. In the Limit Box window, click the Export icon. The Export a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where to store the file.
3. Input a name in the File Name field.
4. Click Save. The Export a Limit Box File dialog closes.

A file with the extension (.BOX) will be then created. This file will contain as
many limit boxes as the project contains.
Exploring Data 465

Import Limit Boxes


To Import Limit Boxes:

1. In the Limit Box window, click the Import icon. The Import a Limit Box File
dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Import a Limit Box File dialog closes.
466 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Navigate Data
In the last session, we mentioned that the visualization of objects in the 3D
View is like taking a photograph with a camera. A photograph is a static view of
the scene being visualized. If we can modify the camera position continuously,
we can obtain the so-called object animation effects. We call this the
navigation of the scene. Here, the modification of the camera position will be
executed interactively by the user. In RealWorks, there are mainly three
different ways for navigating through a 3D scene: Examiner, Walkthrough and
Station-Based.

All the features related to the navigation are gathered in a group named
'Navigation', in the Ribbon.

Customize the Settings for a Mouse


The navigation inside a scene or the manipulation of objects in the 3D View is
done by using a 2D mouse (on page 466), a 3D mouse (on page 467), or with
gestures on a Touchscreen (on page 467).

2D Mouse
When you launch RealWorks for the first time, the default assignment for the
left button is Rotate, while the middle button is dedicated for Pan. You are able
to change these assignments in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.
Exploring Data 467

3D Mouse
Before using a 3D mouse, you need to connect it to a USB port of your
computer and place it properly, ideally on the opposite side of the 2D mouse,
and with the printed logo of 3DConnexion facing you and the cable toward the
screen. You also need to download the latest software package from the
3DConnexion website (at www.3dconnexion.com/drivers) and install it. All of
these operations need to be done with the Trimble RealWorks program closed.

You can customize the settings of your 3D mouse in the Advanced Settings
panel, which can be accessed via the 3DConnexion Properties, or by clicking
on the left button of the 3D mouse and selecting Properties from the Radial
Menu. Please, refer to the 3DConnexion documentation for more information.

Caution: The 3D mouse can be used anywhere, except in the Image Matching
when the adjustment constraints are activated, in the Segmentation when a
fence is started and the projection mode is Perspective and in the Annotate in
Trimble Scan Explorer, once an annotation has been drawn.

Touchscreen
You can use some gestures instead of a mouse to navigate through a scene
when your screen has the touch-sensitive capabilities.
468 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set the Head Always Up Option


The Head Always Up option enables, in the case you manipulate a 3D
complex scene in the 3D View, to not lose its orientation in relation to the
coordinate frame. The Z direction of the 3D scene is then in a plane
perpendicular to the screen, as illustrated below.

When you start the software for the first time after you install it, the Head
Always Up option is by default selected. You can deselect the option in the
Preferences / Navigation dialog, or uncheck the option from the 'Navigation'
group on e.g. the View tab, or press the U shortcut key.

In a pure navigation mode in the 3D View, the Head Always Up option can be
chosen in order to preserve the vertical orientation of the scene. In some
situations, mainly inside a tool, this option, even if it has been chosen, cannot

be used. In this case, the Head Always Up icon changes from to .


Exploring Data 469

Set a Navigation Mode


To Set a Navigation Mode:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Navigation Mode pull-down arrow.


2. Choose among Examiner, Walkthrough and Station-Based from the list.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Mode from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down. Then
select Examiner, or Walkthrough or Station-Based.
470 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Examiner
The Examiner mode is the base mode of the software, that is, it is the default
navigation mode when you start the software. In this mode, you turn the
camera around an object. These operations are actually obtained by moving
the scene with a mouse. In the 3D View, the navigation can be:

 Free. We call this mode the Standard Navigation .


 Under a temporary constraint.
 Under a permanent constraint.

Note: If the Head Always Up option has been checked in the Preferences
dialog, its representation is displayed at the bottom right corner of the 3D
View.

Note: In the Examiner mode, you can be in any projection mode (Perspective
or Parallel).

Navigate Without Constraints


You can perform the operations listed hereafter when you navigate in the
Examiner mode, with no constraint.

Rotate Around the Center of the Screen


Rotate is the action of turning a displayed object around the center of the
screen.
Exploring Data 471

Rotate With a 2D Mouse


To Rotate Around the Center of the Screen:

1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape

.
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the left button pressed to
rotate in that direction and around the center of the screen*.

To Rotate an Object of 360° With a Single Displacement of the Mouse:

1. Position the cursor on the left side of the 3D View.


2. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape

.
3. Drag the mouse to the opposite side of the 3D View.

 If the Head Always Up option and the Center of Rotation Defined by


Cursor Position feature are not selected, the 3D scene rotates of 180°.

 If the Head Always Up option is unchecked and the Center of Rotation


Defined by Cursor Position feature is selected, the 3D scene rotates of
more than one full turn. The number of turns is defined by the height of the
3D View, as illustrated below.
472 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If the Head Always Up option and the Center of Rotation Defined by


Cursor Position feature are both selected, the 3D scene rotates of more
than one full turn. The number of turns is defined by the height of the 3D
View, as illustrated below.

Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Center on Point
feature.

Note: (*) You can change the center of rotation using the Center of Rotation
Defined by Cursor Position feature.

Rotate With a 3D Mouse


To Tilt Around the Horizontal Axis of the Screen:

 Tilt the controller cap forwards / backwards to tumble the displayed


objects around the horizontal axis.

Tip: Try to not pull or push down the controller cap as you tilt.
Exploring Data 473

To Spin Around the Vertical axis of the Screen:

1. Rotate the controller cap clockwise to spin the object around the
vertical axis of the screen (clockwise)

2. Rotate the controller cap counterclockwise to spin the object


around the vertical axis of the screen (counterclockwise)

To Rotate Around the View Axis of the Screen:

 Tilt the controller cap Left / Right to roll the displayed objects
around the axis perpendicular to the screen.

Tip: Try tilting the controller cap on its X axis (forwards / backwards) without
moving it on its Z axis (Left / Right).

Rotate With a Gesture


To Rotate With a Gesture:

 Spin one finger on a position to rotate around that position.

Rotate Around the Position of a Picked Point


In the Examiner mode, the rotation is by default done around the center of the
screen. With the Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor Position feature, the
rotation is done at the position you picked in the 3D View.
474 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate With a 2D Mouse


To Rotate Around the Position of a Picked Point:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor


Position icon.
2. Pick a point anywhere in the 3D View. The position of the picked point will
be then the center of the rotation.
3. Keep the mouse button pressed and drag the mouse. The displayed
scene rotates around the picked point.

Tip: You can also use the Q shortcut key instead to activate / deactivate this
feature.
Exploring Data 475

Rotate With a 3D Mouse


To Rotate Around the Position of a Picked Point:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor


Position icon.
2. Click the left button of the 3D mouse.
3. Choose Properties from the Radial Menu. The Trimble RealWorks dialog
opens.
4. Click the Buttons button. The Buttons - Trimble RealWorks dialog opens.
5. Click e.g. on the LEFT pull down.
6. Choose Trimble RealWorks / Application Use from the drop-down menu,
as illustrated below.

7. Click Close. The Buttons - Trimble RealWorks dialog closes.


8. Click OK. The Trimble RealWorks dialog closes.
476 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

9. Pick a point anywhere in the 3D View, with the 2D mouse. The position of
the picked point will be then the center of the rotation.
10. Keep the Left button of the 3D mouse pressed and rotate the controller
cap. The displayed scene rotates around the picked point.

Tip: You can also use the Q shortcut key instead to activate / deactivate this
feature.

Rotate With Gesture


To Rotate With a Gesture:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Center of Rotation Defined by Cursor


Position icon.
2. Tap a point anywhere in the 3D View. The position of the tapped point will
be then the center of the rotation.

3. Spin one finger around the position to rotate around that position.

Pan in a Direction
Pan is the action of moving a displayed object in a plan parallel to the 3D View.
You are able to pan in any direction or from one side to another, or up and
down.

Pan With a 2D Mouse


With a standard mouse, you can pan an object displayed in the 3D View in any
direction.

To Pan in a Direction:

1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The mouse takes the following

shape .
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to pan in
that direction.
Exploring Data 477

Pan With a 3D Mouse


With a 3D mouse, you can only pan an object displayed in the 3D View in four
directions, Up, Down, Right and Left.

To Pan from Up to Down:

1. Pull the controller cap to the Up to move the object upwards.

2. Push the controller cap to the Down to move the object


downwards.

Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving side-to-side or from tilting.

To Pan from Right to Left:

1. Push the controller cap to the Right to move the object to the
right.

2. Push the controller cap to the Left to move the object to the left

Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving up / down and front / back.

Pan With a Gesture on a Touchscreen


To Pan With a Gesture on a Touchscreen:

 Drag two fingers in a direction to pan in that direction.

Zoom In / Zoom Out


The Zoom In and Zoom Out features behave differently depending on the
combination of keys you use. The first behavior, called Zoom (Distance), is like
moving a camera forward (or backward) through a scene to simulate the Zoom
In or Zoom Out effect. The second behavior, called Zoom (Angle), is like taking
a picture from a fixed position (of the camera), the Zoom In and Zoom Out
effects are then obtained by magnifying or reducing the camera angle.

Note: When you zoom in (or out), the focus is done from the position of the
cursor, instead of from the center of the screen.
478 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Zoom With a 2D Mouse


Zoom (Distance)

To Zoom In (or Out):

1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom In. The
"camera" moves backward, and the scene is reduced.
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out. The
"camera" moves forward, and the scene is enlarged.
4. Or use the mouse wheel.

Zoom (Angle)

To Zoom In (or Out):

1. First press the Ctrl key and the left and middle buttons together. The
mouse takes the following shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Zoom In. The
"camera" does not move. Its angle is enlarged, the scene is zoomed out.
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Zoom Out. The
"camera" does not move. Its angle is reduced, the scene is zoomed in.
4. Or press the Ctrl key and use the mouse wheel.

Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zooming in the Preferences dialog.

Zoom With a 3D Mouse


Zoom (Distance)

To Zoom In (or Out):

1. Push the controller cap to Zoom Out.

2. Pull the controller cap to Zoom In.


Exploring Data 479

Zoom (Angle)

To Zoom In / Zoom Out:

1. First press the Ctrl key and then push the controller cap to Zoom
Out. The mouse takes the following shape .

2. Keep the Ctrl key pressed and pull the controller cap to Zoom In.
The mouse takes the following shape .

Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for Zoom In and Zoom Out in
the Advanced Settings.

Zoom With Gestures


To Zoom With Gestures:

1. Move two fingers apart or to zoom in.

Or

2. Move two fingers toward each other or to zoom out.


480 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Navigate Under Temporary Constraints


You can navigate under a temporary constraint according to three directions:
Horizontal, Vertical and Perpendicular-to-the-Screen. By this way, you can
switch easily from a free navigation (in the Standard Navigation) to a
constrained navigation.

The illustration below shows where you need to place the cursor in the 3D
View to activate a temporary constraint. There are eight areas in the 3D View,
illustrated by the letters A, B and C.
Exploring Data 481

Rotate Around the Horizontal Direction Constraint


To Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View, (A
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the LEFT button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from up to down and in reverse to rotate a scene
constrained under the horizontal direction.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag one finger up and down to rotate a
scene constrained under the horizontal direction.
Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint
To Rotate Around the Vertical Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the top of the 3D View, (B areas in the
3D View).
2. Click on the LEFT button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from right to left and in reverse to rotate a scene
constrained under the vertical direction.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag one finger left and right to rotate a
scene constrained under the vertical direction.
482 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan Along the Horizontal Direction Constraint


To Pan Along the Horizontal Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the top of the 3D View.


2. Click on the middle button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from right to left and in reverse to pan a scene
constrained under the horizontal direction.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers left and right to pan a
scene constrained under the horizontal direction.
Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint
To Pan Along the Vertical Direction Constraint:

1. Place the cursor anywhere along the right (or left) side of the 3D View, (A
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the middle button of your mouse.
3. Move your mouse from top to bottom and in reverse to pan a scene
constrained under the vertical direction.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers up and down to pan a
scene constrained under the vertical direction.
Exploring Data 483

Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen


To Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen:

1. Place the cursor anywhere at one of the four corners of the 3D View, (C
areas in the 3D View).
2. Click on the left button of your mouse and move it clockwise and
anticlockwise and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under an axis
perpendicular to the screen.

Note: You cannot rotate a scene constrained under an axis perpendicular to


the screen if the Head Always Up option is checked in the Preferences dialog.

Note: When using a touchscreen, spin one finger clockwise and


anticlockwise and in reverse to rotate a scene constrained under an axis
perpendicular to the screen.
484 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Navigate Under Permanent Constraints


A constraint can also be permanent (for all navigation purposes). There are
five types at all: Horizontal Pan, Vertical Pan, Horizontal Rotation, Vertical
Rotation and Screen Rotation. All of these constraints can be accessed from
the Navigation group, on the View tab.

But you can right-click on a constraint mode icon at the right side of the status
bar. This displays a pop-up menu from which you can select a type of
constraint.

You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Mode from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down.
Select then a constraint mode.

Tip: You can use the Alt key to slow down all navigations in the 3D View, free
or permanent constraint.

Note: To get the Standard Navigation mode back, you can double-click on
the constraint mode icon at the right side of the status bar.
Exploring Data 485

Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Constraint


To Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Constraint:

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Constraints pull-down


arrow. A sub-menu drops down.
2. Select Horizontal Pan from the sub-menu.
3. Press on the middle button of your mouse and move it from left to right
and in reverse to pan the displayed scene constrained under the
horizontal axis.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers right and left to pan
along a horizontal axis constraint.
486 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint


To Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint:

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Constraints pull-down


arrow. A submenu drops down.
2. Select Vertical Pan from the submenu.
3. Press on the middle button of your mouse and move it from top to bottom
and in reverse to translate the displayed scene constrained under the
vertical axis.

Note: When using a touchscreen, drag two fingers up and down to pan
along a horizontal axis constraint.
Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint
To Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis Constraint:

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Constraints pull-down


arrow. A submenu drops down.
2. Select Horizontal Rotation from the submenu.
3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it from top to bottom and
in reverse to rotate the displayed scene constrained under the horizontal
axis.

Note: When using a touchscreen, spin one finger to rotate constrained


around the horizontal axis.
Exploring Data 487

Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint


To Rotate Around a Vertical Axis Constraint:

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Constraints pull-down


arrow. A submenu drops down.
2. Select Vertical Rotation from the submenu.
3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it from left to right and in
reverse to rotate the displayed scene constrained under the vertical axis.

Note: When using a touchscreen, spin one finger to rotate constrained


around the vertical axis.
488 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen


To Rotate With Constraint Around an Axis Perpendicular to the Screen.

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Constraints pull-down


arrow. A submenu drops down.
2. Select Screen Rotation from the submenu.
3. Press on the left button of your mouse and move it clockwise and
anticlockwise to rotate the displayed scene constrained under an axis
perpendicular to the screen.

Caution: The Screen Rotation feature is grayed-out if the Head Up option has
been checked in the Preferences / Navigation dialog.

Note: When using a touchscreen, spin one finger to rotate constrained


around an axis perpendicular to the screen.

Walkthrough
In the Walkthrough mode, you use the mouse movement to simulate a walking
through of the displayed scene. You cannot apply a constraint of any kind
(either temporary or permanent) in this navigation mode.

Note: If the Head Always Up option has been checked in the Preferences
dialog, is displayed in the bottom right corner of the 3D View.

Tip: If the Parallel mode is the current projection mode, choosing Walkthrough
will automatically swap the projection mode to Perspective.

Tilt (or Rotate) "Look at" a Direction


The steps below describe the controls to use to simulate a "Look at a
Direction" mode, by turning your head inside a displayed scene.
Exploring Data 489

To Use a 2D Mouse:

1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape

.
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to spin the
camera in that direction.

To Use a 3D Mouse:

1. Rotate the controller cap towards you to pitch up the camera.


2. Rotate the controller cap toward your screen to pitch down the camera.

3. Rotate the controller cap clockwise to spin the camera (clockwise)

4. Rotate the controller cap counterclockwise to spin the camera


(counterclockwise)

To Use Gestures:

 Drag one finger in a direction to spin the camera in that


direction.

Move the Camera in a Direction


The steps below describe the controls to use to simulate a "Displacement"
mode, left and right, and up and down.
490 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

To Use a 2D Mouse:

1. Press the middle button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following

shape .
2. Drag the mouse in a direction while holding the button pressed to move
the camera along that direction.

Or

3. Use the  (or ) arrow key to move the camera along that direction.
4. Use the Page Up (or Page Down) key to move the camera up (or down)
along the Z axis.

To Move Up to Down:

1. Pull the controller cap to the Up to move the camera from you.

2. Push the controller cap to the Down to move the camera toward
you.

Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving side-to-side or from tilting.

To Move Left and Right:

1. Push the controller cap to the Right to move the camera to the
right.

2. Push the controller cap to the Left to move the camera to the
left

Tip: Keep the controller cap from moving up / down and front / back.

To Use Gestures:

 Drag two fingers in a direction to move the camera along that


direction.
Exploring Data 491

Walk Through a Scene (or Objects)


The steps below describe the controls to use to simulate a "Walking Through"
mode, forwards and backwards through a scene.

To Use a 2D Mouse:

1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The cursor takes the following

shape .
2. Drag the mouse forward while holding both pressed to Walk Inside a
scene (objects).
3. Drag the mouse backward while holding both pressed to Walk Out of a
scene (or objects).

Or

4. Scroll the mouse wheel forward to Walk Inside a scene (objects).


5. Scroll the mouse wheel backward to Walk Out of a scene (or objects).

Or

6. Use the  arrow key to Walk Inside a scene (objects)


7. Use the  arrow key to Walk Out of a scene (or objects).

Tip: You can reverse the mouse for zoom in the Preferences dialog.

To Use a 3D Mouse:

1. Pull the controller cap to Walk Out of a scene.

2. Push the controller cap to Walk Inside a scene.


492 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Station-Based
In the Station-Based mode, a scene is viewed from the viewpoint of one of the
stations, i.e., the instrument location for this station, and you can jump from
one station to another (if there is more than one). The Head Always Up
preference and the Perspective projection mode are both set.

The navigating through a scene is restricted to Rotate, Zoom In and Zoom Out.
You cannot apply a constraint of any kind (either temporary or permanent).
Exploring Data 493

Browse Through the Stations


To Browse Through the Stations:

1. In the Navigation group, click on the Navigation Mode pull-down arrow.


2. Select Station-Based from the submenu.

The scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint (the first in the Project
Tree) with overlapped images in the background (see the upper illustration).
You can use the AutoSpin feature in the Preferences to endlessly turn a scene
around the station position. You can display (or hide) the position of the other
stations as well as their label in the 3D View. For more information, refer to the
Display (or Hide) all Stations (on page 394) and Display (or Hide) all
Station Marker Labels (on page 396) sections.

3. Do one of the following:

 To display the first (or last) station, click the Go to First Station (or Last
Station) button.
 To display the next (previous) station, click the Go to Next (or Previous
Station) button.
 Click the current station button and choose another station from the drop-
down list (1). The current station is grayed out and has a check mark at its
side.
 Double-click on a station marker .

Note: To leave the Station-Based mode, choose between Examiner and


Walkthrough.

Tip: In the Scans Tree, if you select a station from the Project Tree, right-click
and select Station-Based Mode from the pop-up menu; the selected scene will
be viewed from the selected station viewpoint. If no station has been selected,
the scene will be viewed from the first station viewpoint.
494 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: (1) Empty stations are not displayed in the 3D View, and do not
appear in the drop-down list.

Rotate Within a Station


Rotate is the action of turning around the point of view of the current station.

Rotate With a 2D Mouse


To Rotate Around the Viewpoint of the Current Station:

1. Press the left button of the mouse. The cursor takes the following shape

.
2. Drag the mouse in a Direction while holding the button pressed to rotate in
that Direction and around the viewpoint of the current station.

Rotate With a 3D Mouse


To Rotate Around the Viewpoint of the Current Station:

1. Rotate the controller cap clockwise to spin the camera clockwise.

2. Rotate the controller cap counterclockwise to spin the camera


counterclockwise.

Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for rotating in the Advanced
Settings.

Rotate With Gestures


Drag the mouse in a Direction while holding the button pressed to rotate in that

Direction and around the viewpoint of the current station.


Zoom Within a Station
Zoom In (or Zoom Out) is the action of moving the camera backwards (or
forwards) from the point of view of the current station.
Exploring Data 495

Zoom With a 2D Mouse


To Zoom In (or Out):

1. Press the left and middle buttons together. The mouse takes the following
shape .
2. Drag the mouse Forward* while holding both pressed to Zoom In.
3. Drag the mouse Backward* while holding both pressed to Zoom Out.
4. Or use the mouse wheel.

Note: (*) You can reverse the mouse for Zoom In and Zoom Out in the
Preferences.

Zoom With a 3D Mouse


To Zoom In (or Out):

1. Push the controller cap to Zoom In. The mouse takes the following
shape .

2. Pull the controller cap to Zoom Out. The mouse takes the following
shape .

Note: You can reverse the controller cap motion for Zoom In and Zoom Out in
the Advanced Settings.

Display/Hide Images
To Display Images:

1. First, filter the images to display.


2. And then, click the Display Images button.

Or

3. Click the Hide Images button.


496 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter the Images


To Filter the Images:

1. Click the Filter Images by Camera Type button.

If the current project has no images; the Select Image Type dialog is empty
and looks as illustrated below:

If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:

If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble S1X0
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:

2. Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number of


images of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are
displayed in overlap in the background, only if the Display Images
option has been chosen.

Note: Only one time of images can be selected at once.


Exploring Data 497

Edit Manually the Image Distances


Images taken by a Trimble SX10 instrument may be of three types (Overview,
Primary and Telescope) and not be concentric, i.e., the camera is not in the
same position as the center of the station. The current shift value used to
check if the images are not concentric is of 5 mm. You are able to apply a
correction to this non-concentricity by editing manually the distances of the
images in order to have a perfect overlay of the images on a specific area.
Below are the different cases that you may encounter depending the number of
image types in the project, and if the images are concentric or not.

The station contains several image types and the images have a shift:

The station contains several image types but no image has a shift:

The station has one image type and the images have a shift:

The station contains one image type and no image has a shift:
498 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The default value is 15 m. The value you can input ranges between 0.5 m and
1000 m. This value will be applied not only to the current station but to all
stations of the project. The value will be kept inside the current session (of
RealWorks), but not from one session to another.

To Edit a Distance:

 Do one of the following:

 Press to decrement the distance value of 5%.


 Press to increment the distance value of 5%.
 Input a value followed by the unit of measurement in the Distance field.
 Press Shift and scroll up the mouse wheel to increment the distance value.
 Press Shift and scroll down the mouse wheel to decrement the distance
value.

Set a Projection Mode


There are two projection modes. In the Parallel mode, the distance from the
viewing camera origin to displayed objects has no impact on how large an
object appears. In the Perspective mode, the most unmistakable characteristic
is foreshortening - the further an object from the viewing camera, the smaller it
appears in the final screen image.

Set the Perspective Mode


To Set the Perspective Mode:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Projection Mode pull-down arrow.


2. Select Perspective from the drop-down menu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Mode / Perspective from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Perspective mode, you can use any of the displacement modes
(Walkthrough, or Examiner or Station-Based).
Exploring Data 499

Set the Parallel Mode


To Set the Parallel Mode:

1. In the Navigation group, click the Projection Mode pull-down arrow.


2. Select Parallel from the drop-down menu.

Note: The scale at the left down corner of the 3D View is only available in
Parallel.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed


object) and select Mode / Parallel from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Parallel mode, you can only use the Examiner mode. If you
choose Parallel, the displacement mode will automatically swap to Examiner.
500 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Magnifier Mode - Clip and Zoom to Explore an Area of


Interest
To Clip and Zoom to Explore an Area of Interest:

1. Hover the mouse cursor over an area of interest on the displayed cloud.
2. Press and hold the N key. With the N key held pressed:

 The 3D View shows you the area around the mouse cursor location. The
default size of the clipping box is 1 cubic meter. It can be changed in the
Preferences / Navigation.
 If the Auto-Center option is activated, the cropped area is set at the center
of the screen, else it is not moved (i.e. it stays under the mouse cursor).
The Auto-Center option can be activated / deactivated in the Preferences /
Navigation.
 If the current navigation mode is Station-Based (or WalkThrought), it
swaps automatically to Examiner.
 If the current projection mode is Perspective, it swaps automatically to
Parallel.
 If the current point size is less than 3, it is automatically set to 3, and is not
modified else.

3. Press the + key to widen the size of the clipping box by 10%.
4. Press the - key to reduce the size of the clipping box by 10%.

Note: The + and - keys are not changing the value of the box size in the
Preferences, these changes are applied only while the N key is pressed down

5. Press the * key to restore the size of the box as defined in the
Preferences.
6. Release the N key:

 The zoom and the camera orientation are restored.


 The initial navigation mode is restored to the current mode.
 The initial projection mode is restored.
 The initial point size is restored.

Note: This mode deactivates itself, if you can change the navigation mode. It
does not deactivate If you change the projection mode, and the canonical
views, and when you rotate, pan and zoom.

Note: This mode deactivates itself when you access the majority of tools,
except with the Measure and Segmentation tools.
Exploring Data 501

Tip: The magnifier mode enables you to quickly visualize a cross section view.
In particular, it is a powerful way to visually check the registration quality on
specific details.
502 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align Data to a View


There are twelve pre-programmed standard viewing positions. All the features
related to the view alignment in RealWorks are gathered in a group named
'View', on the View tab.

Align to a Global View


You can align to a global view with either a 2D mouse or a 3D mouse. The
Top, Back, Right, Left, Front and Back are defined as shown below where X,
Y, Z represent the three axes of the Active Frame.

View View Direction


Top Looking parallel to - Z-axis, + Y-axis bottom to top, + X-axis left to right
Bottom Looking parallel to + Z-axis, + Y-axis top to bottom, + X-axis left to right

Front Looking parallel to + Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis left to right

Back Looking parallel to - Y-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + X-axis right to left

Left Looking parallel to + X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis right to left

Right Looking parallel to - X-axis, + Z-axis bottom to top, + Y-axis left to right
Exploring Data 503

Align With a 2D Mouse


With a 2D mouse, you can align according to six views.

To Align to a Global View:

1. In the View group, click the Standard Views pull-down arrow.


2. Select one of the six options from the sub-menu.

Note: No selection is required to apply a standard view.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects)
and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down
from which you can select a view.

Tip: You can use shortcut keys to swap from a Standard View to another. All
are detailed in the Shortcut Keys section.
504 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align With a 3D Mouse


With a 3D mouse, you can align with only three views: Front, Top and Right.

To Align to a Global View:

1. Click the right button of your 3D mouse. The Radial Menu appears.
2. Choose among Front View, Top View and Right View from the Radial
Menu, with the 2D mouse.

 If Front View has been chosen, the view is brought to Front .


 If Top View has been chosen, the view is brought to Top .
 If Right View has been chosen, the view is brought to Right .
Exploring Data 505

Align to a Local View


The Object Top, Object Bottom, Object Right, Object Left, Object Front and
Object Back correspond to the top, bottom, right, left, front and back face of an
entity which should be selected and of geometry property.

To Align to a Local View:

1. Select and display an object with geometry property in the 3D View.


2. In the View group, click on the Object Views pull-down arrow.
3. Select an option from the submenu.

Tip: You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on displayed objects)
and select Standard Views from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu drops down
from which you can select a view.
506 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Zoom on Data
At any time while you navigate in the 3D View and in any navigation mode
(Examiner, Walkthrough or Station-Based), you can re-align your view frustum
by using the following functions: Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom on Selection,
Zoom Extents, Center on Point and Go to Shooting Position.

All the options related to the zooming features are gathered in a group named
'Zoom', in the View tab.

Zoom In / Zoom Out


The Zoom In feature enables to fit a fenced zone into the whole 3D View while
the Zoom Out feature enables to fit the whole the 3D View into a fenced zone.

To Zoom In / Zoom Out:

1. In the Zoom group, choose:

 Zoom In.
 Or Zoom Out.

2. Draw a fence in the 3D View window.

Note: Before drawing a fence, pressing Esc will leave the Zoom In or Zoom
Out tool.

Tip: You can use the mouse buttons Left + Right to zoom in and out.
Exploring Data 507

Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents feature enables to fit the whole displayed scene into the 3D
View (except in the Station-Based mode, where the field of view is limited).

Zoom With a 2D Mouse


To Zoom Extents:

 In the Zoom group, click the Zoom Extents icon.

Tip:
 You can right-click anywhere in the 3D View (except on a displayed
object) and select View Alignment from the pop-up menu. A sub-menu
drops down. Select then Zoom Extents.
 You can use the short-cut key Home instead of selecting the Zoom
Extents command.

Zoom With a 3D Mouse


To Zoom Extents:

1. Click the right button of your 3D mouse. The Radial Menu appears.
2. Choose Fit from the Radial Menu, with the 2D mouse.
508 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Zoom With Gestures

When using a touchscreen, you double tap anywhere in the 3D View


except on displayed objects to use the Zoom Extents feature.

Zoom on Selection
The Zoom on Selection feature enables to fit an object (or a set of objects) in
selection into the 3D View.

To Zoom on Selection:

1. Select an object from the Project Tree.


2. Display the selected object in the 3D View.
3. In the Zoom group, click the Zoom on selection icon.

Tip: You can right-click on an object (cloud or geometry) in the 3D View and
select Zoom On Selection from the pop-up menu and

Tip: When using a touchscreen, you double tap on displayed objects to


zoom on the selection.

Center on Point
The Center on Point feature enables to locate a center of rotation onto a
selected point (in the Examiner mode) or to merely view towards this point (in
the Station-Based or Walkthrough mode).

To Center on Point:

1. In the Zoom group, click the Center on Point icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears and the cursor becomes as follows .
2. Pick a point on the displayed objects.

Note: Before picking a point, press Esc will leave the Center on Point tool.

Tip: You can use the X key on your keyboard as a shortcut.


CHAPTER 7

Selecting and Picking Data

The selection and the picking are two mechanisms you guys need to
understand before you can effectively use RealWorks because both are linked
and the description of each is detailed hereafter.
511

Select Data
Selection is a very important concept. All commands and tools in RealWorks
will be applied only to the selected project/objects. It is thus clear that before
evoking a command and tool, you should first of all select the objects that you
want to operate on. It is also important to note that according to the nature of
the selected objects; only the applicable commands and tools will be available
(whether from the menus, the toolbars or the pop-up menu). In other words,
the applicability of tools and commands is context-sensitive.

WorkSpace Window
A selection in the WorkSpace window is done by picking an object by left
clicking it. It is important to note that you can only make a single selection here.
If you wish to perform a multi-selection, you need to do it in the List panel.

Models Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (Project Cloud, objects, and/or
group of objects) in the List panel. Selecting a group node will display its
contents (objects and/or groups of objects) in the List panel.

Scans Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (stations, group of stations,
scans, or images) in the List panel. Selecting a station node will display its
contents (scans, targets or images) in the List panel.

Images Tree
Selecting a project node will display its contents (images or group of images) in
the List panel. Selecting an image group node will display its contents (images
or group(s) of images) in the List panel.
512 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Targets Tree
Selecting an unmatched group node will display all unmatched targets in the
List panel. Selecting a matched group node will display all matched targets in
the List panel.

List Panel
A selection in the List panel consists of picking an object by left-clicking it. The
selected object will be highlighted in this window and also in the 3D View and
will be put in the Selection List window (if opened). To make a multiple-
selection, you can either combine the Shift key with left-clicking or Ctrl with left-
clicking. To select all objects in this window, you should use the following
combination Ctrl + A.
Selecting and Picking Data 513

3D View Window
In the 3D View, a selection consists of picking an object by left-clicking it (see
the Picking Mechanism (see "Pick Data" on page 516) section). The selected
object will be highlighted by its bounding box in this window and also in the List
window and will be put in the Selection List window (if opened).

If you wish to perform a multiple-selection, you can first press the Ctrl key and
then pick one-by-one each object or use one of the following methods:
Rectangular Selection (on page 514), Polygonal Selection (on page 514) or
Lasso Selection (on page 515). The method you chose is persistent; it remains
unchanged until you expressly ask to change. By using one of the three
methods, the selection in progress is always added to the previous one.

Tip: To select all displayed objects in this window, you should use the following
combination Ctrl + A.

Note: There is no Undo / Redo on the selection operations.

Note: You can change the bounding box’s color in the Preferences dialog.
514 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rectangular Selection
To Select With a Rectangular Fence:

1. Press on the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.


2. In the 3D Selection group, click the Selection Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Rectangular Selection icon from the drop-down list.
4. Pick anywhere to draw the first corner of a rectangular fence and drag the
cursor a new location in the 3D View.
5. Once you reach the position, release the Ctrl key and the mouse button.
The rectangular fence is drawn.

 If the rectangular fence, in dash, has been drawn from Left to Right, only
the objects whose bounding box is completely included in the rectangular
fence is selected.
 If the rectangular fence, in dash, has been drawn from Right to Left, all the
objects which intersect the rectangular fence are selected.

Note: You can cancel a selection in progress by pressing Esc.

Polygonal Selection
To Select With a Polygonal Fence:

1. Press on the Ctrl key and hold it pressed.


2. In the 3D Selection group, click the Selection Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Click the Polygonal Selection icon from the drop-down list.
4. Pick anywhere to draw the first vertex of a polygonal fence and drag the
cursor a new location in the 3D View.
5. Once you reach the position, release the Ctrl key and the mouse button.
The two vertices are linked by a segment.
6. Add other vertices by a simple click.
7. Double-click to terminate the polygonal fence.

 All the objects which intersect the polygonal fence, in dash, are selected.

Note: You can cancel a selection in progress by pressing Esc.


Selecting and Picking Data 515

Lasso Selection
To Select With a Lasso Fence:

1. Press on the Ctrl key and hold it pressed.


2. In the 3D Selection group, click the Selection Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.
4. In the 3D View, pick a point to start your selection.
5. Drag the cursor to a new location and release the Ctrl key.
6. Press the Shift key, and drag the cursor around the objects or the area
you want to select.
7. Double-click to terminate the lasso selection.

 All the objects which intersect the lasso, in dash, are selected.

Note: You can cancel a selection in progress by pressing Esc.

Clear a Selection
All selections done in the List window and in the 3D View will reside in the
Selection List window until you decide to clear them. To do so, use the Clear
Selection button in the Selection List window.
516 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Data
As mentioned in the previous section, a picking is the action of selecting an
object displayed in the 3D View. This action can be more or less accurate. A
picking enables also the get the 3D position of a point in the 3D View. In that
case, the action should be accurate. The Picking Parameters is here to help
you to get this accuracy.

There is no command for opening the Picking Parameters toolbar. It comes up


with some tools where pickings are required like the Polyline Drawing,
Measure, or Geometry Creator*, etc. There are three picking modes: Standard,
Lowest Cloud Picking and Highest Cloud Picking. The Standard mode is the
mode which comes up by default when the toolbar opens.

Note: (*) This tool is not present in Trimble RealWorks (Base) and Advanced.

Pick in the Standard Mode


In the Standard mode, the Picking Parameters toolbar is composed of three
fields (X, Y and Z coordinates)* and a button (Lock on Primitive Center) in the
3D constraint mode and of two fields (Angle and Distance called Polar
coordinates or Distance and Distance called Cartesian coordinates) in the 2D
constraint mode.

Note: (*) In the X, Y Z Coordinate System or North, East and Elevation in the
North, East, Elevation Coordinate System.
Selecting and Picking Data 517

Pick in the 3D Constraint Mode


In the 3D Constraint Mode, you can lock in the active coordinate frame a
coordinate, a couple of coordinates, all coordinates at once or the center of a
primitive. When only one coordinate is locked, the picking is constrained on a
plane. When two coordinates are locked, the picking is constrained on a line.
And three locked coordinates define the position of a point. All fields are blank
before you pick a point.

1 - Buttons 2 - Fields in which the user can 3 - Lock on Primitive Center


enter values

Note: The unit of measurement is set by default to Meters; you do not have to
enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (see Preferences).

Tip: In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System, instead of clicking the X (or Y or Z)


button, you can also use its related shortcut SHIFT + X (or Y or Z).

Caution: No shortcut is available when you are in the North, East, Elevation
Coordinate System.
518 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Constrain the Picking on a Plane


To Constrain the Picking on a Plane:

1. Enter a coordinate in any of the three fields. Its related button is


automatically pressed-on.

X* is locked in this example

2. Pick one point on the displayed object. Picking is locked in the X*


coordinate.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Constrain the Picking on a Line


To Constrain the Picking on a Line:

1. Enter a coordinate in any of the three fields. Its related button is


automatically pressed-on.
2. Enter another coordinate in any of the two remaining fields. Its related
button is automatically pressed-on.

X* and Y* are locked in this example

3. Pick one point on the displayed object. Picking is locked in the X and Y
coordinates.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.


Selecting and Picking Data 519

Constrain the Picking on a Point


To Constrain the Picking on a Point:

1. Enter a coordinate in each of the three fields. Its related button is


automatically pressed-on.

2. Go to the 3D View and pick one point. Picking is locked in that position.

Lock on Primitive
To Lock on a Primitive Center:

1. Click the Lock on Primitive Center icon.


2. Go to the 3D View and pick on a primitive. Wherever you pick on the
primitive, you are locked on its center and its 3D coordinates are displayed
in the X*, Y* and Z* fields.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Pick in the 2D Constraint Mode


In the 2D constraint mode, you can use Cartesian (H and V distances both in
mm*) or Polar (Angle and Distance respectively in degrees** and in mm**).
The Cartesian and Polar constraint picking modes come automatically when
you have to 2D-pick. In each mode, you can constrain one or both items. To tilt
from one constraint mode to the other, click on the Switch to Polar or Cartesian
button or on the pull-down arrow and chose the constraint mode you need.
Note that you can do this at any time before and while picking points.

Note:
 (*) The unit of measurement for H (or V) in Cartesian is set by-default in
Millimeter. You can change it in Preferences \ Units.
 (**) The unit of measurement for the Angle (or Distance) in Polar is set by-
default in Degree (or Meter). You can change it in Preferences \ Units.
520 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Use the Cartesian Coordinates System


Before you pick a first point, both fields (H and V) are grayed out. After you
pick your first point; this point is assumed as the origin - with 0 and 0 as H and
V coordinates - for the next point to come. This next point is itself assumed as
the origin for the third point to come and so on.

1 - Clickable buttons 2 - Editable fields

Tip: Instead of clicking on the H and V buttons; you can also use its related
shortcuts key H and V.

Use the Polar Coordinates System


Before you pick a first point, both fields (Angle and Distance) are grayed out.
After you pick your first point; the Angle and Distance fields are empty of value.
When you pick the next point; the Angle field remains empty of value and the
Distance field is filled with a value that corresponds to the distance from the
first point to this second point. When you try to pick a third point, the Angle field
is filled with the second point/first point and second point/third point angle
value.

1 - Clickable buttons 2 - Editable fields

Tip: Instead of clicking on the Angle (or Distance) button; you can also use its
related shortcut keys Shift + A (or D).
Selecting and Picking Data 521

Pick the Highest Cloud Point


You can pick the highest point on a region of the screen around the position of
your cursor with regard to the Z axis of the current frame. You are able to
choose a size (in pixels) around the position of your cursor. The illustration
below shows the principle in the XYZ coordinate system.

To Pick the Highest Cloud Point:

1. Bring the view to Top by selecting Top in the View group.


2. Open a tool where pickings are required, like e.g. the Measure. The
Picking Parameters toolbar opens.
3. Drop-down the first pull-down arrow and choose Highest Cloud Point from
the list.
4. Drop-down the second pull-down arrow and choose the numbers of pixels
from the list. The number of pixels ranges from 5 Pixels to 20 Pixels.
5. Hover the cursor over a point.
522 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 A square marker appears at the end of the cursor.


 Its 3D coordinates are displayed the X, Y and Z fields.

Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock
the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you
manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.

Tip: You can define another Z axis direction by using the USC tool.
Selecting and Picking Data 523

Pick the Lowest Cloud Point


You can know the lowest point on a region on the screen around the position
of your cursor with regard to the Z axis (or Elevation axis). You are able to
choose a size (in pixels) around the position of your cursor. The illustration
below shows the principle in the XYZ coordinate system.

To Pick the Lowest Cloud Point:

1. Bring the view to Top by selecting Top in the View group.


2. Open a tool where pickings are required, like e.g. the Measure. The
Picking Parameters toolbar opens.
3. Drop-down the first pull-down arrow and choose Lowest Cloud Point from
the list.
524 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Drop-down the second pull-down arrow and choose the numbers of pixels
from the list. The number of pixels ranges from 5 Pixels to 20 Pixels.
5. Hover the cursor over a point.

 A square marker appears at the end of the cursor.


 Its 3D coordinates are displayed the X, Y and Z fields.

Tip: To avoid you from losing the Top view of the scene, we advise you to lock
the scene in the Screen Rotation position. By this way, when you
manipulate the scene and the Top view is always kept.
Selecting and Picking Data 525

Face of Curb Point and Gutter Point Pickings


The Face of Curb Point and Gutter Point pickings help you to be more
productive when you want to draw a Curb (and/or Gutter) contour in a 3D point
cloud, by snapping the mouse position to the closest Face of Curb (and/or
Gutter) Points in the neighborhood. These smart picking capabilities are
present in the Picking Parameters toolbar, next to the existing Highest Cloud
Point and Lowest Cloud Point pickings. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
when you use a tool like e.g. the Polyline Drawing.

A Face of Curb Point is the most external (i.e. closest to the road) and highest
point on the sidewalk. It always corresponds to a real (acquired) 3D point in the
point cloud.

A Gutter Point, located on the road, is the closest point to the Face of Curb
point. In the case of occlusions, the Gutter point corresponds to a synthetic
(computed) point just below the Face of Curb point.

There are three types of curb:

Vertical Curb:
526 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Inclined Curb:

Occluded Curb:

Limitations:

 You are intended to work in a view in which both the sidewalk and the
road are visible. Ideally a view near to the Top View is the most natural for
this use case.
 The algorithm is designed to extract real-world curbs and gutters with
heights between 1~2 cm and 20 cm.
 If the curbs and gutters are occluded or contain too few points, the
snapping may fail.
 Since the algorithm works locally, objects looking like curbs, e.g. stairs,
beams and low walls, might be detected by the algorithm.
 Vegetation and noise near to curbs may produce false detection.

Caution: Please beware, every pick will launch a background computation;


Trimble recommends that you sample your point datasets first with any
sampling method (Ground Extraction, Spatial Sampling, etc.) to avoid this
drawback.

Note: RealWorks beeps when the algorithm fails.


Selecting and Picking Data 527

Pick Face of Curb Points


To Pick Face of Curb Points:

1. If required, bring the view to Top. In the view, both the sidewalk and the
road are visible.
2. In the Picking Parameters toolbar, drop-down the pull-down arrow and
choose Face of Curb Point from the list.
3. Pick a series of points by following the contour of the sidewalk. Each point
can be picked roughly around the Face of Curb Point, and internal
algorithm will compute a point on the closest curb.
528 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Selecting and Picking Data 529

Pick Gutter Points


To Pick Gutter Points:

1. If required, bring the view to Top. In the view, both the sidewalk and the
road are visible.
2. In the Picking Parameters toolbar, drop-down the pull-down arrow and
choose Gutter Point from the list.
3. Pick a series of points by following the contour of the sidewalk. Each point
can be picked roughly around the Gutter Point, and internal algorithm will
compute a point on the closest gutter.
530 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Roadmark Edge Pickings


The Roadmark Edge picking helps the user to find the nearest points on a road
mark, i.e., a corner or a point on an edge, by picking a point on a point cloud.

To Pick Roadmark Edges:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View.


2. Apply the Color Coded Intensity (or Gray-Scaled Intensity) rendering to the
point cloud.
3. Pick a point on the floor (floor horizontal with the current frame) near an
intensity discontinuity:

 If the picking is close enough to a corner, then the picking will fit on the
corner,
Selecting and Picking Data 531

 Otherwise the picking result will be a point on the edge (most often
orthogonal projection on the edge).

Note: The resulting point is not necessary a point of the selected point cloud
but a computed point
CHAPTER 8

Managing the Loading and HD


Rendering of Points

We have introduced a Point Loading Manager for supporting huge amount of


points. The user is able to precisely control which points are loaded into
memory and thus available for all the regular tools.
535

Load Data
We distinguish two types of data: data loaded on disk and data loaded in RAM.
The way the user is able to load (or unload) points in RAM can be done
through a field in the status bar. At any time, the user can enter a value
between 1 and 2000 (in Millions of Points) in the field and press Enter.
536 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Process Data
Some tools can work on disk, i.e., on the full data, independently of what is
loaded in the RAM (see [A]). Others work directly on the data loaded in the
RAM (see [B]).

In [A], the number of points used by the Scan- In [B], the number of points used by the
Based Sampling is equal to the whole data set. Intensity-Based Sampling is equal to what is
loaded in the RAM.

Here is a list of tools for which the need is to work on the full data, i.e., on disk.

 Segmentation tool: As a stand-alone tool, as a sub-tool in other tools and


all tools working in a similar way (Cloud-based Modeler, SteelWorks and
EasyPipe).
 Scan-Based Sampling and Random Sampling methods from the Sampling
tool (as a stand-alone tool and as a sub-tool in other tools).
 Exports of point cloud data,
 Generate Point Color-Coding by Height,
 Color Points Using Station Images,
 Coloring in Image Matching tool.
Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points 537

In all the other tools, the deliverable will be produced with what is loaded in
RAM.

You can define the amount of points to use with a tool. A dialog appears in the
case the loading of requested points is not yet complete. You are then
prompted between waiting until the loading is complete and computing now the
amount of already loaded points.

Note: If you decide to compute now, your setting will be changed to the current
load.
538 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display Points in HD
The HD Display is a new rendering motor in which is implemented a camera-based dynamic
display loading. It enables to dissociate the loading of points from its display. By this way, you
are able to display more points than what you load.
Managing the Loading and HD Rendering of Points 539

HD Display Mode Inside a Tool


The Loading Value field and the HD Display mode will appear when you enter
a tool. With the Loading Value field, you can have a feedback on the current
loading value and you can change it if required. Note that the loading value
defines the number of points the algorithms are working on. The Loading Value
field and the HD Display mode will disappear when you close the tool. The
default value is 25 million points and any new value, once set, is persistent
(same persistency for all tools).

In the picture below, the HD Display has not been chosen. The display will be
limited to the loading value as long as you are in the tool.

If you activate the HD Display mode by clicking the HD button, you may have
some HD feedback to see more details. This is useful for picking a precise
point, visually checking, identifying an area of interest, etc.
540 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: The new display technology used a VRAM memory. You can define the
maximum VRAM and the cache RAM you want to allocate to this session in
Preferences / HD Display.

The behavior of the HD Display mode depends on the type of tool you are
using.

HD Display Mode Outside a Tool


Outside a tool, the HD Display mode is not available. The Loading Value field
is useless, as the display (of points) does not depend on it anymore.
CHAPTER 9

Working with Classification


Layers

Every point coming from a LIDAR instrument has a classification assigned to it


which reflects the type (or category) the point belongs to. The different classes,
defined using numeric codes, are defined according the LAS 1.4 standard.
543

Manage Layers
You can manage the classification layers that are within your project, by
creating some new ones, deleting those you do not want anymore, changing its
properties, etc. A classification layer is defined by an ID, a name, a color, and
an activation state.

To Manage Layers:

1. In the Windows group, click the Classification Layers icon. The


Classification Layers window opens.
2. Do one of the following:

 Create a new layer (on page 544).


 Delete a layer (see "Delete an Existing Layer" on page 545).
 Edit a layer (on page 545).

3. Click the Cross button. The Classification Layers window closes.

Note: The Classification Layers window is only available in the Production


mode. When you switch from e.g. Production to Registration and the
Classification Layers window closes of itself (if it is opened).
544 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a New Layer


A classification layer, newly created, is by default set to Active.

To Create a New Layer:

1. Click the Add New Classification Layer icon. The Create New
Classification Layer dialog opens.
2. Enter a name in the Name field.
3. Drop-down the Color pull-down arrow.
4. Choose a color from the color palette.

Or

5. Define a new color by clicking Other.


6. Drop-down the Active pull-down arrow.
7. Choose between Yes and No.
8. Input a number ranging from 64 to 255 in the ID field.
9. Click OK. The Create New Classification Layer dialog closes.

An error message appears in the case the input ID corresponds to an existing


one (from 2 to 63).

What happens if you input 0, or 1, or anything else than a number? A new


layer will be created anymore with the last ID + 1.

Caution: There is no restriction about the number you can input in the ID field.
You can of course exceed 255. But be aware in case this situation occurs,
some information may be lost when exporting to the LAS format because you
are out of the LAS classification range. It is under the user's responsibility to
maintain the layer IDs inside the LAS domain if he intends to export later on.
Working with Classification Layers 545

Delete an Existing Layer


You can only remove a classification layer whose LAS ID ranges from 64 to
255, i.e., the one you created.

To Delete an Existing Layer:

1. From the Classification Layers window, select a classification layer.


2. Click the Remove Classification Layer icon. A dialog appears and prompts
to continue or not.
3. Click Yes.

 If there are some clouds associated to the selected layer, all the clouds
will be moved to the "Unclassified" layer and the selected layer removed
from the project.
 If there is no cloud associated to the selected layer, only the selected layer
will be removed from the project.

4. Or click No to abort.

Tip: You can also use the DEL. key on your keyboard instead.

Edit a Layer
You can edit a classification layer by changing its properties, except for the
Layer 0.

To Edit a Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Click the Edit Classification Layer icon. The Edit Classification Layer
dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Rename a layer (on page 546).


 Change the color of a layer (on page 546).
 Activate or deactivate a layer (on page 546).
 Change the LAS ID number (on page 546).

4. Click OK. The Layer Properties Edition dialog closes.

Tip: You can also double-click on a classification layer.


546 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rename a Layer
You can rename any layer except those with the LAS IDs 0 and 1, and those
ranging from 19 and 63.

Change the Color of a Layer


You can change the color of any classification layer.

To Change the Color of a Layer:

1. Click on the Color pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a predefined color from the palette.

Or

3. Click the Other button. The Color dialog opens.


4. Define a color.
5. Click OK. The Color dialog closes.

Activate or Deactivate a Layer


You can toggle the classification layers from an Active state to an Inactivate
state, and vice versa, only for those whose LAS ID varies from 64 to 255.

To Activate or Deactivate a Layer:

1. Click on the Active pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Yes and No from the drop-down list.

Or

3. Check the box beside a layer to set it Active.


4. Uncheck to set to Inactive.

Change the LAS ID Number


You can change the LAS ID number of any classification layer, except those
ranging from 0 and 63.
Working with Classification Layers 547

Enable the Advanced View Mode


The Classification Layers window in the Basic View mode will only display all
the activated layers, while in the Advanced View mode, all layers related to the
project will be displayed. The mode which comes first is the last chosen one.

To Enable the Advanced View icon:

 Click the Basic View/Advanced View icon.

Basic View mode:

Advanced View mode: All classification layers are listed by alphabetical order,
except the two first ones, "Created, Never Classified" and "Unclassified" with
respectively the LAS ID "0" and "1". You can sort the classification layers by
clicking on the title of each column:

Name: Order the classification layers, except the LAS IDs 0 and 1 ones, from A
to Z or from Z to A.
Color: Gather all the colored (or uncolored) classification layers together.
LAS ID: Order the classification layers by increasing (or decreasing) order.
Active: Gather all the active (or inactive) classification layers together.
548 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: In the Classification Layers window, you are able to browse from the first
layer to the last layer by using the  and  keys on your keyboard or select
them all by using the Ctrl + A shortcut keys.

Select the Contents of a Specific Layer


You can have a quick access to the list of objects of a specific classification
layer.

To Select the Contents of a Specific Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
3. Select Select All Objects in Classification Layer from the drop-down
menu.

 All the objects associated to the classification layer are selected.


 All are listed in the Selection List window (if open).
 All are highlighted in GRAY in the Models Tree.

Tip: You are able to select and display the contents of several classification
layers.
Working with Classification Layers 549

Display or Hide all Objects by Layer


You can display (or hide) the contents of a specific classification layer by type:
Cloud or Geometry.

Caution: These operations cannot be performed within a tool.

Tip: You can select several layers by using the Shift (or Ctrl) key and display
(or hide) all the contents at once.

Note: The objects, once displayed, are not necessarily centered in the center
of the 3D View. We advise you to use the Zoom Extents feature to center
them.

Display all Clouds of a Layer


To Display all Clouds of a Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Click the Display All Clouds in Classification Layer icon.

Or

3. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.


4. Select Display All Clouds in Classification Layer from the drop-down
menu. All the clouds associated to the selected layer are displayed.
550 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Hide all Clouds of a Layer


To Hide all Clouds of a Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Click the Hide All Clouds in Classification Layer icon.

Or

3. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.


4. Select Hide All Clouds in Classification Layer from the drop-down menu.
All the clouds associated to the selected layer are hidden.

Display all Geometries of a Layer


To Display all Geometries of a Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Layers window.


2. Click the Display All Geometries in Classification Layer icon.

Or

3. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.


4. Select Display All Geometries in Classification Layer from the drop-
down menu. All the geometries of the selected layer are displayed.

Hide all Geometries of a Layer


To Hide all Geometries of a Layer:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Click the Hide All Geometries in Classification Layer icon.

Or

3. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.


4. Select Hide All Geometries in Classification Layer from the drop-down
menu. All the geometries of the selected layer are hidden.
Working with Classification Layers 551

Hide Others
If there are several objects, belonging to different layers, that are displayed in
the 3D View, you can select a layer and only keep the objects of the layer
displayed and hide the rest by selecting Hide Other Classification Layers .
552 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify the Layer of an Object


There are two methods to modify the classification layer of an object. With the
first method (Change Classification Layer), you can assign the same layer to a
set of objects. You have to perform a multi-selection before, either from the
Models Tree or from the Selection List window. With the second method (from
the Property window), you can do it for a unique object. You also need to have
more than the "Created, Never Classified" and "Unclassified' classification
layers in your project. Otherwise, you are not able to modify the classification
layer.

Note: There is no undo for such operation.

Modify from the Models Tree


To Modify From the Models Tree:

1. Select an object (or several objects) having a layer from the Models Tree.
This object can be of any type, except a project.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
3. Select Change Classification Layer from the drop-down menu. The
Change Classification Layer dialog opens.
4. Click on the Select New Classification pull-down arrow.
5. Choose a layer from the drop-down list.
Working with Classification Layers 553

Modify from the Property Window


To Modify from the Property Window:

1. Select an object having a layer from the Models Tree. This object can be
of any type, except a project and a group.
2. Display the properties of the selected object.
3. Click on the Classification Layer line in the Property window.
4. Click on the pull-down arrow.
5. Choose a layer from the drop-down list.
554 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify from the Selection List Window


To Modify from the Selection List Window:

1. Select a layer from the Classification Layers window.


2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu.
3. Choose Select al Objects in Classification Layer from the drop-down list.
All objects of the selected layer become selected and are listed in the
Selection List Window.
4. Right-click any object in the Selection List Window.
5. Choose Change Classification Layer from the drop-down list. The Change
Classification Layer dialog opens.
6. Click on the Select New Classification pull-down arrow.
7. Choose a layer from the drop-down list. All the objects of the selected
layer have their layer changed.
CHAPTER 10

Basic Tools

Tools in RealWorks can be classified into two categories: basic tools and high-
level tools. The basic tools can be used alone or be open inside a high-level
tool to perform basic operations in the two following processing modes,
Registration* and OfficeSurvey/Modeling** (or Production), i.e., preparing data
for high-level tools. In such cases, you cannot save the result. In general, the
basic tools are represented by toolbars containing the operations arranged as
icons or dialogs.

Note: (*) In the Registration, only the Measurement tool, Limit Box Extraction
tool, Shift Project, Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans and Generate Key Plan
from Current View are available.

Note: (**) The Modeling processing mode is not present in RealWorks (Base)
and Advanced.
557

Measure Distances
This tool allows you to make point-to-point distance measurements, angular
measurements, point-to-scanning position measurements, orientation
measurements, etc. You can try as many measurements as you wish and for
those you need later on, you can create them as persistent objects in the
database. The created measurement objects will be put under the current
active group. Measurements are based on pickings which can be free (or
constrained).
558 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


A measurement determines the distance two between picked points, calculates
the angle from three picked points, shows the XYZ coordinates of a picked
point and gives the orientation of a picked point on a sloping surface, etc. It is
important to note that picking for the measurement will always function on
objects, that is, either on points or on geometric shapes. You can still navigate
in the 3D View while performing a measurement but you cannot select an
object.

To Open the Tool:

1. Display an object (point cloud, mesh or geometry) in the 3D View.


2. From the Tools menu, select Measure . The Measurement and Picking
Parameters toolbars open.

If you use the tool in the 3D View, the toolbar looks as shown below:

If you use it in a 2D View, the toolbar looks as shown below:

The toolbar is composed of a set of icons. They are grouped by category: 1 -


Distance Measurements, 2 - Angular Measurements, 3 - Point Measurement, 4
- Orientation Measurements, 5 - Create and 6 - Close. The measurement type
which comes first is the one selected during the last use of that tool. While you
are in this tool, an information box will appear on the top right corner of the 3D
View, and the mouse's cursor will change its shape to that of a ruler. When you
are on a 3D point, a circle surrounding this point appears at the end of the
ruler.

Note: Each type of measurement can be activated via its corresponding icon in
the Measurement toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up
menu.
Basic Tools 559

Note: In the Ribbon, the Measure icon can be reached from the Cloud group,
on the Edit tab.

Measure a Distance
To perform a distance measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon. In each case, you should pick
two points except for the Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) (or
Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward)) where just one point is required.
560 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Distance
To Measure a Distance:

1. Click the Distance Measurement icon.


2. Pick one point on the displayed object. This point is the first measurement
point (A).
3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the displayed object to
assign the second measurement point (B).

Once the second point is picked, the distance measurement and its projections
along the X, Y and Z axes are displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates automatically the
information inside.

Length: Distance from the two picked points


Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
Basic Tools 561

Measure a Distance on Screen


The tool lets the user measure a distance by choosing two points, not by
picking on what is displayed in the 3D View as for the Distance Measurement
tool, but by picking anywhere, no matter what is behind a picked point.
prerequisite to enable the tool is to be in the Parallel projection mode, and the
result cannot be refined or saved in the database. This tool can be used in the
Production mode and the Registration mode.

To Measure a Distance on Screen:

1. Click the View-Based 2D Distance Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point anywhere, not necessary on the displayed objects. This point
is the first measurement point.

The 3D scene is locked in 2D in the current viewing direction, with the 2D Grid
in superimposition (if not previously hidden).

3. Navigate in the 2D View and pick another point to assign the second
measurement point.

Once the second point is picked, the distance measurement is displayed in the
3D View. The 2D Grid (if displayed when picking the first point), disappears,
and the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock. At the same time, the information
box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new
measurement; this information box updates automatically the information
inside.

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
562 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Distance in a Horizontal Plane


To Measure a Distance in a Horizontal Plane:

1. Click the Distance Measurement in Horizontal Plane icon.


2. Pick a point on the selected object. This point is the first measurement
point (A).

3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to
assign the second measurement point (B).

The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point
(B) in the XY plane. The result and its projections along the X, Y and Z axes
are displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display
the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement; this
information box updates the information inside automatically.

Length: Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) in the XY plane
Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Basic Tools 563

Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
564 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Distance Along a Vertical Axis


To Measure a Distance Along a Vertical Axis:

1. Click the Distance Measurement Along Vertical Axis icon.


2. Pick a point on the selected object. This point is the first measurement
point (A).

3. Navigate in the 3D View and pick another point on the selected object to
assign the second measurement point (B).

The measurement is performed between point (A) and the projection of point
(B) along the Z axis. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time,
the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you
start a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.

Length: Distance from point (A) to the projection of point (B) along the Z axis
Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Basic Tools 565

Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.
566 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Upward)


A Vertical Clearance is the minimum unobstructed vertical space between two
points along the Z-Axis. The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) is
dedicated to indoor (or outdoor) measurements where the user needs to know
the unobstructed distance between two points (from e.g. the ground to the
ceiling).

To Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Upward):

1. Click the Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) icon.


2. Pick a point on the selected object.

The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.

Length: Vertical clearance distance


Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.

Caution: The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Upward) method is not


available a 2D View.
Basic Tools 567

Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Downward)


A Vertical Clearance is the minimum unobstructed vertical space between two
points along the Z-Axis. The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) is
dedicated to indoor (or outdoor) measurements where the user needs to know
the unobstructed distance between two points (from e.g. the ceiling to the
ground).

To Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance (Downward):

1. Click the Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) icon.


2. Pick a point on the selected object.

The distance measurement is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the
information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you start
a new measurement; this information box updates the information inside
automatically.

Length: Vertical clearance distance


Delta X: Delta distance between the two points along the X axis
Delta Y: Delta distance between the two points along the Y axis
Delta Z: Delta distance between the two points along the Z axis

Note: Press Esc (or select another measurement type) to undo the distance
measurement.

Caution: The Vertical Clearance Measurement (Downward) method is not


available a 2D View.
568 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane


This method enables to measure a distance from three picked points. The two
first points are used to fit a set of points with a (circular) plane. The first point
which should be picked on a set of points defines its center. The second point
(with the first one) defines its diameter. The distance from the third picked point
to its projection on the fitted plane is then measured.

To Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane:

1. Click the 'Point to Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed object.
3. Move your mouse. A sphere whose diameter is formed by the first picked
point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used as bounds for
fitting a circular plane.

4. Pick a new point not necessary on the displayed object. A fitted circular
plane appears.
Basic Tools 569

5. Pick another new point, now on the displayed object.

Note:
 The fitted (circular) plane will not to be created in the RealWorks database
once the measurement has been validated.
 The 'Point-to-Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement feature is not present in
the toolbar when using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based
Registration tool.

Caution: The 'Point to Fitted Plane' Distance Measurement method is not


available a 2D View.
570 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter


This method enables from a point picked on a set of points to first fit this set of
points with a cylinder and then to measure its diameter. This method of
measurement cannot be applied to sagging pipes.

To Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter:

1. Click on the Fitted Cylinder Diameter Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed object.
3. Move your mouse. A sphere whose diameter is formed by the first picked
point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used as bounds for
the cylinder fitting.

4. Pick a new point not necessary on the displayed object.

The set of points in the neighborhood of the first picked point is fitted with a
cylinder and its diameter is measured and displayed.
Basic Tools 571

Note: The fitted cylinder will not be created in the RealWorks database once
the measurement has been validated.

Caution: The Fitted Cylinder Diameter Measurement method is not available a


2D View.
572 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Point-to-Geometry Distance


This method measures the shortest distance between a 3D point and a
geometry.

To Measure a Point-to-Geometry Distance:

1. Click the 'Point to Geometry' Distance Measurement icon.


2. Pick a geometry. The cursor takes the shape shown below.
3. Move your cursor. The shortest distance from the picked geometry to your
cursor position is displayed in the information box at the top right corner of
the 3D View.

4. Pick a 3D point on the displayed object.

Note: The 'Point to Geometry' Distance Measurement feature is not present in


the toolbar when using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based
Registration tool.
Basic Tools 573

Measure a Multi-Point Distance


This method enables to measure along a path by picking points.

To Measure a Multi-Point Distance:

1. Click the Multi-Point Distance Measurement icon.


2. Pick at least two points on the displayed object.

You can pick as many points as required. Each time a new point is added, the
measurement is updated in the 3D View and in the information box.

3. To end the measurement, double-click with the left mouse button.

Tip: You can also select End Measurement Definition from the pop-up menu
instead of double-clicking.

4. If required, move a node. Perform as described below:

a) Hover the cursor over a node. A red square appears.


b) Drag the selected node and drop it to a required location.

5. If required, delete a node. Perform as described below:

a) Hover the cursor over a node. A red square appears.


b) Select Delete Active Node from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can delete any node, regardless of its position along the
measurement, but two nodes must remain at the end.

Note: To cancel the current measurement, press Esc. or start picking new
points.
574 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Angular Measurements
To perform an angular measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon.
Basic Tools 575

Measure an Angle
To Measure an Angle:

1. Click on the Angular Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point. This point will be the vertex of the angle to measure (A).
3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point. This point will form with
the first point the first segment of the angle to measure (B).
4. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point. This point will form with
the first point the second segment of the angle to measure (C).

Once the third point is picked, the angular measurement will be displayed in
the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement result in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.

Note: The three picked points should be on the displayed object.


576 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Horizontal Angle


To Measure a Horizontal Angle:

1. Click the Horizontal Angular Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point [A]. This point will be set as the vertex of an angle to measure.

3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form
with the first point the first segment of the angle.

4. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [C]. This point will form
with the first point the second segment of the angle.
Basic Tools 577

The angular measurement will not be performed between the vertex [A] and
points [B] and [C] but between the vertex [A] and the projections of point [B]
and point [C] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the
same time, the information box will display the measurement result in text.
Each time you start a new measurement; this information box updates the
information inside automatically.

Note: The three picked points should be on the displayed object.

Caution: The Horizontal Angular Measurement method is not available a 2D


View.
578 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Slope Angle


To Measure a Slope Angle:

1. Click the Slope Angular Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point [A]. This point will be set as the vertex of the angle to
measure.

3. Navigate through the scene and pick a new point [B]. This point will form
with the first point the first segment of the angle to measure.

The angular measurement will be performed between the vertex [A], the point
[B] and the projection of point [B] in the XY plane. The result is displayed in the
3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the measurement
result in text. Each time you start a new measurement; this information box
updates the information inside automatically.

Caution: The Slope Angular Measurement method is not available a 2D View.


Basic Tools 579

Measure a Geometry Slope Angle


To Measure a Geometry Slope Angle:

1. Click the Geometry Slope Angle Measurement icon.


2. Pick an axial geometry. Its center will be set as the vertex of the angle to
measure. Its axis will be the first segment of the angle to measure.

The angular measurement will be performed between the vertex, the


geometry's axis and the projection of the geometry's axis in the XY plane. The
result is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will
display the measurement result in text. Each time you start a new
measurement; this information box updates automatically the information
inside.

Caution: The Geometry Slope Angle Measurement method is not available a


2D View.
580 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure a Between-Geometry Angle


To Measure a Between-Geometry Angle:

1. Click the 'Angle Between Geometries' Measurement icon.


2. Pick an axial geometry.

3. Pick another axial geometry.

The angular measurement will be performed between the two axes of the
picked geometries. The result is displayed in the 3D View. At the same time,
the information box will display the measurement result in text. Each time you
start a new measurement; this information box updates automatically the
information inside.

Note: A warning message appears if the axes (of the geometries) are not
secant.
Basic Tools 581

Caution: The 'Angle Between Geometries' Measurement method is not


available a 2D View.

Point Measurement
To perform a point measurement, there is only one method.

Measure a 3D Point
For a point-to-scanning position measurement, you need just one point.

To Measure a 3D Point:

1. Click on the Point Measurement icon.


2. Pick one point on the displayed object to measure its 3D position.

A measured point is displayed with a label showing its coordinates. At the


same time, the information box will display the measurement in text. Each time
you start a new measurement, this information box will update automatically
the information inside.

Note: Press Esc (or select another type) to undo the measurement.

Tip: You can remove a measured point’s label by first selecting Rendering,
then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.

Orientation Measurements
To perform an orientation measurement, choose the appropriate type of
measurement by clicking on the associated icon.
582 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure an Orientation
This method lets you know the orientation of a given point on a sloping surface.
An orientation is expressed in the form of two angles. The measurement is as
follows. A plane (of circular shape) is extracted from the point. Two angles are
then calculated. The first angle called Elevation is formed by the extracted
plane and the YX plane of the active coordinate frame. The second angle
called North is formed by the extracted plane and the ZX plane of the active
coordinate frame.

To Measure an Orientation:

1. Click on the Orientation Measurement icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed object (A).
3. Navigate through the 3D scene. A sphere whose diameter is formed by
the first picked point and the cursor position appears. This sphere is used
as bounds for the plane extraction.
4. Pick a new point on the displayed object (B).
Basic Tools 583
1 - The first picked point 3 - A plane of circular shape
2 - The second picked point

Once the second point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be
shown in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.

Tip: Press Esc. (or select another type) to undo the measurement.

Note:
 Because a measurement is based on point pickings, you cannot perform
an orientation measurement on an object of geometry type.
 You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse
Orientation Measurement.

Tip: You can switch the orientation measurement’s notation from


North/Elevation to Elevation/North and vice versa in the Preferences dialog.

Note: The Orientation Measurement feature is not present in the toolbar when
using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based Registration tool.

Caution: The Orientation Measurement method is not available in a 2D View


or in 3D locked in 2D.
584 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Measure an Orientation Using Three Points


This method also lets you to know the orientation of a sloping surface. As with
the previous method, the same angles will be calculated: Elevation and North.
In this method, there is no extraction of plane but you have to define one by
picking three points which should not be collinear. The measurement is set at
the center of the so-defined plane.

To Measure an Orientation Using Three Points:

1. Click on the Orientation Measurement Using Three Points icon.


2. Pick three none-collinear points.

If the three picked points are collinear, an error dialog opens.

After picking the two first points, a temporary plane (of triangular shape) is
displayed. As long as you move the cursor over a point of the displayed object,
the temporary plane shape changes.
Once the third point is picked, the orientation measurement result will be
shown in the 3D View. At the same time, the information box will display the
measurement results in text. Each time you start a new measurement this
information box will update automatically the information inside.
Basic Tools 585

Tip: Press Esc. (or select another method) to undo the measurement.

Note:
 You can perform an orientation measurement on an object of geometry
type.
 You can reverse the orientation of a measurement. To do this, right-click
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Reverse
Orientation Measurement.

Tip: You can switch the orientation measurement’s notation from


North/Elevation to Elevation/North and vice versa in the Preferences dialog.

Note: The Orientation Measurement Using Three Points feature is present in


the toolbar when using the Measure tool as a sub-tool in the Cloud-Based
Registration tool.

Caution: The Orientation Measurement Using Three Points method is not


available in a 2D View or in 3D locked in 2D.
586 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Refine a Measurement
You can refine the measurement you have just performed by modifying the
picked points except for the point-to-scanning position measurement. For the
orientation measurement, you can enlarge/reduce the sphere diameter (or
move its center). For the point-to-point distance measurement, you can move
each end in order to extend (or shorten) its length. For the angular
measurement, you can move each of the ends to change its angle, etc.

To Refine a Measurement:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon an already picked point.


2. Drag and drop it to a new location on the displayed object.

Tip: Before starting a measurement, press Esc (or click Close Tool in the
toolbar) to close the Measure tool. When a measurement is in progress, press
Esc to cancel it and start a new one.
Basic Tools 587

Save a Measurement
You can save the measurement you have just performed as a persistent object
in the RealWorks database. For each saved measurement, a geometric object,
with the "Unclassified" layer, is created and put under the active group in the
Models Tree. You can save as many measurements as you need without
leaving this tool. You can also export a measurement result as a report in
Excel format (*.CSV files).

To Save a Measurement:

1. Click Create . The measurement is saved in the database.

 For all kinds of distance measurements, an object of "Point To Point


Distance Measurement" type is created.
 For a multi-point-distance measurement, an object of "Polyline
Measurement" type is created*.
 For an orientation measurement, an object of "Orientation Measurement"
type is created.
 For an angular measurement, an object of "Angle Measurement" type
is created.
 For a point measurement, an object of "3D Point Measurement" type is
created.

2. Start a new measurement (if required).


3. Click Close Tool.

Tip:
 Press Esc (or select Close Tool from the pop-up menu) to leave the tool.
 Press Enter (or select Create from the pop-up menu) to save the result.

Note: You should first close the Measure tool to be able to export a result in
the Excel file format. Otherwise, the Exportation Measurements command is
dimmed.

Caution: In the Registration mode, you are not able to save a measurement.
The Create icon is always grayed-out.

Note: A multi-point-distance measurement, when resulting from a


measurement done in the 3D, has no normal in its properties. The same
measurement, when done in 2D (like the tank measurement or a polyline
measurement drawn on a 3D locked view) has a normal in its properties.
588 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Generate Key Plans


What is a Key Plan? From Trimble Scan Explorer's point of view, it is purely a
2D view (of the whole project or of a station (or set of stations)) with a set of
triangles superimposed. Each triangle symbolizes a station's position. From
RealWorks's point of view, a Key Plan is a Preview and a set of split Ortho-
images. All are put under a folder named Key Plan under the Images Tree. A
Key Plan is mainly computed within RealWorks* and loaded in Trimble Scan
Explorer. The computation can be done either from a unique (or a set of) TZF
scan(s) or from a point cloud displayed in the 3D View. For both methods, the
user interaction is restricted to selecting the input. No parameters are required
as they are automatically set.

One of the parameters is the Projection Plane, which is a plane on which


points are projected. It is characterized by a projection direction (Normal) and a
Position. The way this Projection Plane is set by default depends on the
chosen method and on what is displayed in the 3D View or not. The Projection
Plane is a Top View when generating a Key Plan from TZF scans, and the
focal plane when generating from the displayed point cloud.

Another parameter is an Area Of Interest which is used for computing a Key


Plan. By default, the size of the 3D View is considered as the Area of Interest.
It is up to you to size the 3D view to a dimension to compute a Key Plan to that
size (only for the Generate Key Plan From Current View feature).

For the Generate Key Plan from TZF Scans feature, the option to render the
computed Key Plan is based on the Elevation information. The Elevation value
is calculated for each point based on its distance to the Projection Plane.
Points that are far away from the Projection Plane are rendered Red. Those
that are closer are rendered Blue.
Basic Tools 589

For the Generate Key Plan From Current View feature, the option to render the
computed Key Plan is not based on the Elevation information but on the Cloud
Rendering options (White Color, Cloud Color, Station Color, Scan Color, Gray
Scaled Intensity, Color Coded Intensity, Color Coded Elevation and True
Color). Points are rendered according to the chosen option.

The Preview is an Ortho-Image of low resolution which is about 0.1


megapixels. The Ortho-Image, which is split into a set of small pieces of Ortho-
Image, is of high resolution which cannot exceed 10 megapixels. Each split
Ortho-Image is named as follows ImageX_Line Index_Colum Index. It has a
size (W x H) in pixels which is about 500 x 500 pixels.
590 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From the 9.1 version of the software, a Key Plan has two new attributes which
can be viewed when displaying its properties. These attributes are the
Elevation Max and the Elevation Min of the data (point cloud) along the Z-Axis
of the current frame. When a Key Plan has been created with an earlier version
of RealWorks, i.e. before 9.1, these attributes are not available. But when you
load the Key Plan in RealWorks 9.1, they are automatically computed.

The attributes mentioned above are editable manually in the Property window.
This can be useful in case of a Key Plan with several floors because you are
able to filter the positions of the stations to keep only those belonging to one
level. The attributes of a Key Plan belong to the Key Plan, so that each is
editable individually, and the result is visible directly in Trimble Scan Explorer
(if the Filter Station Markers by Elevation Range option has been checked).
These attributes, once changed and saved, become persistent. This means
that you are not able to restore them to the default values.

Note:
 (*) You should save your RealWorks project to be able to load the newly
computed Key Plan in Trimble Scan Explorer.
 A file with the RWV extension is created per Ortho-Image. All RWV format
files are put under the RWI folder.

Tip: All Key Plans are created in the root of the Images Tree and have the
same name: Key Plan. Only its order indicated between brackets allows
differentiating one Key Plan from another Key Plan. To make this distinction
clearer and more obvious, we advise you to manually rename all Key Plans (in
the Name line of the Property window).
Basic Tools 591

Tip: You can export an Ortho-image from a Key Plan or the Key Plan itself
toward Trimble SketchUp. For more information, refer to the Export an Entity to
SketchUp (see "Send an Entity to SketchUp" on page 1586) topic.

Note: A Key Plan has no layer.

Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans


This method uses the Top view (of the project) as Projection Plane regardless
of what is displayed in the 3D View. Its Normal is parallel to the Z-Axis of the
current frame of the project. Its Position is the Origin or barycenter of the
Projection Plan.

To Generate a Key Plan From TZF Scans:

1. Select either a project(1) or a station(2) or a TZF Scan(3).


2. From the Tools menu, select Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans .

Note:
 When selecting a project with some TZF format files inside, it is not
necessary to be within a specific processing mode.
 The Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans feature is dimmed when there is
no TZF scan in the project.
 You can be in Parallel or Perspective as projection mode.

Note: (1) All TZF Scans (of the project) are used for computing Key Plan. (2) All
TZF Scans (of the station) are used for computing Key Plan. (3) Only that TZF
Scan is used for computing Key Plan.

Note: A filter is applied on the X, Y and Z directions when generating a Key


Plan from TZF Scans in order to remove parasite points.

Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Generate Key Plan From TZF Scans
feature from the Key Plan list, in the Scan Explorer group, on the Home tab.
592 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Generate a Key Plan from the Current View


This method uses the current camera view as the Projection Plane. Its Normal
direction is perpendicular to the plane of the screen. Its Position is the Origin or
barycenter of the Projection Plan.

To Generate a Key plan from the Current View:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View.


2. Rotate the scene to specify the point of view from which you want to
create a Key Plan.
3. From the Tools menu, select Generate Key Plan From Current View .

Note: This feature is dimmed if there is no point cloud displayed in the 3D


View.

Caution: You need to display only clouds from a single project. Otherwise an
error message appears.

If you are in the Perspective projection mode, a warning dialog opens and
warns you that the project mode has to be changed to Parallel to be able to
process to the Key Plan generation.

If you choose No, the process is then aborted. If you choose Yes, the
projection mode changes then during the operation and takes back its state
once finished.

Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Generate Key Plan From Current View
feature from the Key Plan list, in the Scan Explorer group, on the Home tab.
CHAPTER 11

Tools in the Registration Module

When you load a file (of the following formats (SIMA and TXT with
Topopoints)) that was never saved in the RealWorks format; the Registration
processing mode is set by default. When you load a file, saved in the
RealWorks format and in the Registration processing mode, that file will be
opened with that processing mode.

When you are out of this processing mode and you need to use it, you have to
choose Registration from the Quick Access Toolbar, in the Ribbon:

You may meet the following message “The Survey Configuration load state will
be kept in the Registration configuration. Do you want to save the previous
Registration configuration load state?”.

The Registration module includes a broad range of tools. Some are basic tools,
like e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Target Analyzer features. By using them,
you can quickly register a project and analyze the results. Some are advanced
tools, like e.g. the Auto-Register Using Planes, Refine Registration using
Scans, etc. feature. By using them, you can register the scan data quickly and
automatically without having to place targets, and refine the registration.

Note: Tools are grouped according to their functionality, no matter the layout
chosen by the user.
595

Scan-Based Registration Group


The "Scan-Based Registration" group, as its name indicates, gathers a set of
tools offering the ability to register a dataset based on its point clouds. This
group can be found in the group named above on the Registration tab.

Auto-Register Using Planes


The Auto-Register Using Planes feature automatically registers leveled scans
of structured environments, i.e. that contain a significant amount of
predominantly flat walls. It automatically extracts all the main planes (walls,
ground, ceiling, etc.), matches them automatically between scans and uses
them to register the scans.

Warning: Make sure the amount of memory (RAM) is enough when you
launch the Auto-Register Using Planes feature on a huge dataset. You need
about 90 Mb per TZF Scan.
596 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select at least two stations, a group (or set of groups)(1), or a project(2)


created from TZF format file(s) from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Auto-Register Using Planes . The
Auto-Register Using Planes dialog is displayed.

 The Reference Station (or Reference Group) is in bold.


 None of the stations (or groups) is selected. By default, all of the stations
(or groups) are checked.
 If required, use to select (CHECKED) all of the stations (or groups)
from the tree.
 If required, use to unselect (UNCHECKED) all of the stations (or
groups) from the tree.
 In the case of groups only, all of them are collapsed by default.
 If required, use (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique group) from
the tree.
 If required, use (or ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from
the tree.
 Select a station from the tree. It is highlighted. If there is a unique TZF
Scan within (the selected station), its preview is displayed in the dialog as
shown below. If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the
Main TZF Scan is displayed.
Tools in the Registration Module 597

 You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift)
key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.
 Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those
are not necessary.

Note:
 (1)
With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, if there is only a
unique station in a group, the tool is grayed-out.
 (2)
With several stations, a unique group or a set of groups. Otherwise, if
the project has only a unique station within, the tool is grayed-out.

If the input does not contain at least two valid stations (with TZF Scan within), a
warning dialog is displayed and the Auto-Extract Targets tool is not launched
anymore.

Tip: If stations are gathered into a group, start by auto-registering first the
stations within the group together. Then once the stations within the group(s)
have been registered, auto-register all groups together.
598 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, the station is
automatically removed from the auto-registration process.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Register Using Planes feature can be reached
from the Scan-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.

Reference Station
The Reference Station is the one whose position and orientation remain
unchanged through the Auto-Register Using Planes process. If a project (or a
set of stations) has been selected as input, the first station from the set of
stations (or from the project) is the default Reference Station. If a leveled
station has been chosen as input, this station is by default Reference Station.

To Choose a Reference Station:

1. Click on the Selection List pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a station from the drop-down list.

 If a project has been selected as input, all stations (of the project) are in
the Selection List.
 If a set of stations has been selected as input, only the selected stations
(of the set) are in the Selection List.

Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is
by default the Reference Station. The order (or selection) is preserved.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract and Register dialog, if the


station selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station, an error
message appears and prompts you to change the selection. Close the Error
message. The Leveled Station is automatically set as Reference Station in the
dialog.

Tip: RealWorks can differentiate a station from a group (of stations). A group is
flagged as "(Group)" in the Auto-Register Using Planes dialog.
Tools in the Registration Module 599

Register Stations
To Register Stations:

1. In the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) dialog, click Start.


Stations are then registered together*.
2. If stations can be registered together, the Registration Report dialog
opens.
3. In the Registration Report dialog, do one of the following:

 Click Save In RTF. The Registration Report dialog opens.

Or

 Click Close. The Registration Report dialog closes. An Auto-Registered


Group is created and rooted under the Scans Tree.

An Auto-Registered Group is a group gathering the stations selected for the


Auto-Register Using Planes purpose. We distinguish two different groups, one
called Reference and the other Secondary. Basically an Auto-Registered
Group (Reference) is a group that contains stations registered together and for
which one of them is registered with a station chosen as the Reference Station.
An Auto-Registered Group (Secondary) is a group with stations registered
together and any of them cannot be registered with the Reference Station. An
Auto-Registered Group (Reference) can contain a sub-group which is also an
Auto-Registered Group (Reference). This occurs when both share the same
Reference Station.

Stations that cannot be registered with the others are put under a folder named
"Non-Registered Stations".
600 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Group with registered stations among which 2 - Group with stations for the registration with
one of them is a Reference Station the Reference Station failed
3 - Group containing all stations that cannot be
registered with others

And/or

 If the Generate a Preview Scan option has been checked, the Registration
Report dialog remains open. Sampled scans are then created. Again in
the Registration Report dialog, click OK. The Registration Report dialog
closes.

A - Common parts of the clouds are not yet B - Common parts of the clouds are
superimposed superimposed

4. If stations cannot be registered together, an error dialog opens and


suggests you to try the Cloud-Based Registration tool.

Note: (*) The user can abort the registration (of stations) in progress by
clicking Esc. A dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.

Note: Stations with several TZF Scans within, for which the registration with
the Reference Station fails, are put all together under the "Non-Registered
Stations" folder.
Tools in the Registration Module 601

Registration Report
The Registration Report dialog lists for each station (of the selection) the
following information:

 How many station(s) each of them is registered with and the name of
each.
 The deviation in a pair registered stations in the current unit of
measurement.

The purpose of the Auto-Register Using Planes (Target-Less) feature is to


register stations based on planes (paired together). The accuracy of two
stations registered together is given by the Cloud-to-Cloud Error. This error is
an average distance between paired planes (of one station) and the point
cloud (of the other station). The Cloud-to-Cloud Error in a pair (of registered
stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to
Station_B or from Station_B to Station_A).

1 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_A to 2 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_B to


Station_B Station_A

 The amount of Coincident Points per pair (of registered stations) is in


percentage. The percentage in a pair (of registered stations) is the same
from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to Station_B or from
Station_B to Station_A).
602 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A

Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed
at the bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloud-
to-Cloud Error allows weighting of each station error with respect to their
overlap percentage.

A new column, named Confidence, has been added in the Registration Report
dialog. This Confidence, applied to a pair of stations, is expressed in
percentage. It is the ratio between Coincident Points and Occlusion, in terms of
distance.

All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside them. This
does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the results
should be analyzed more closely.
Tools in the Registration Module 603

Save in RTF Format


You can save the Auto-Register Using Planes result in a report in RTF format.

To Save in RTF Format:

1. In the Registration Report dialog, enter a name for the report file in the File
Name field.
2. Find a location where you want the report file to be stored.
3. Click Save. The Registration Report dialog closes.

Note: An Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed
at the beginning of the file, just before the list of stations. This Overall Cloud-to-
Cloud Error enables to weight each station error with respect to their overlap
percentage.

Note: The Confidence column has been also added to the RTF report. No red
warning appears next to the Confidence value.

Options
There is one option that comes after the registration (of stations). If it has been
chosen, the related process is then performed, otherwise nothing occurs.
604 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Generate Preview Scans


The Preview Scan option enables to create a Scan by first getting points, not
based on a TZF Scan but from its Preview, and by computing Normals on
them. A Scan is always named Preview. The number of points for each is
about two million points.

To Generate Preview Scans:

 Check the Generate a Preview Scan option.

Note:
 If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per
station) are created in batch mode, one after the other.
 When you interrupt the Generate a Preview Scan step by pressing Esc, a
dialog opens and prompts you to abort or not.

Note:
 You may not see anything happen in the 3D View if the option is not
checked.
 The Generate a Preview Scan step is an optional step. If the Generate a
Preview Scan option has been checked, you will prompt to save the
current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not yet saved. If the
option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in
that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.

Cloud-Based Registration
The purpose of this tool is to register two selected scanning stations (or two
station groups). The user has the choice between using an automatic method
or picking a pair of points from both the point clouds to initialize the registration.
Then the software can refine this registration by using the common parts of the
two point clouds. The registration error will be shown as an average distance
between the two point clouds. The user can also check the registration results
visually by using the Registration Visual Check (on page 779) tool. The Cloud-
Based Registration tool is available only in the Registration module. In order to
use this tool, you should select at least a set of two stations from the Scans
Tree.
Tools in the Registration Module 605

Open the Tool


You have select two different items from a single project from the Scans Tree.
The following combinations are allowed: two groups of stations, two stations or
one group of stations and one station. The input (of the tool) can be also a
single group (with stations inside).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select two different items from the Scans Tree.


2. In the Scan-Based Registration group, click the Cloud-Based Registration
icon. The Cloud-Based Registration dialog opens.
606 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select Two Clouds


The first selected station becomes a Reference Cloud. Its name is highlighted
in the Reference Cloud field. The second selected station is a Moving Cloud.
Its name is displayed in the Moving Cloud field. The number of points of each
are displayed in the dialog. The Reference Cloud (or Moving Cloud) has a
specific representation which can be seen when you drop down the Reference
Cloud list (or the Moving Cloud list).

1 - Reference Cloud 2 - Moving Cloud

Caution: The leveling status of the input stations in the reference group may
affect the registration result when using either the automatic method, or the
manual method, or when performing a refinement after an initial registration.
Ideally and for a good result, the reference group should contain at least a
leveled station. If the aforementioned condition is not met, i.e., the reference
group has no leveled station and the moving group has some unleveled
stations, RealWorks cannot apply any rotation to the Z axis of the unleveled
stations and displays an error message to warn the user that he performs the
registration if he desires but the result cannot be as good as it should be.

The 3D View is split into three sub-views, two sub-views side-by-side and one
sub-view below. The left sub-view is surrounded by a frame in red. It displays
the Reference Cloud. The right sub-view is surrounded by a frame in green. It
displays the Moving Cloud. The two clouds keep the rendering that they had
before entering the tool. If you change the current rendering option for a new
one, it will be changed for the two clouds. The bottom sub-view displays the
registration result between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud,
respectively in red and in green. Only one sub-view can be active at once. As
the default layout is three sub-viewers; you can use the View Manager to
display in one full view window or to switch from one sub-view to another.
Tools in the Registration Module 607

You are directly in the picking mode after entering tool. When you hover the
cursor over a sub-view, e.g. the bottom one, its size switches, from small to
large. When you hover the cursor over one of the side-by-side sub-views, the
size of both switches, from small to large, and so on.

You can manually resize each of the sub-views. Be aware that the new sizes,
become at first persistent, and then can disable the automatic tilting
mechanism of the sub-views. The condition for the mechanism to be enabled is
to have the height of the side-by-side sub-views two times smaller (or higher)
than the height of the bottom sub-view. If not, the mechanism is disabled.
608 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Because the refinement of the registration is based on the common parts of the
two selected stations (or groups), you can use the Segmentation to pre-select
these common parts or the Sampling (see "Sample Point Clouds" on page
331) to simplify the clouds for registration refinement. The Create command for
these two tools is disabled. This means that you cannot save the result.

 For either the Reference Cloud or the Moving Cloud, click the
Segmentation (or Sampling) icon.
 Inside a top sub-view, select Sampling Reference Points for the Reference
Cloud (or Sampling Moving Points for the Moving Cloud) from the pop-up
menu.
 Inside the bottom sub-view, select Sampling Reference Points and/or
Sampling Moving Points) from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 The fact of sampling (or segmenting) the Reference Cloud (or Moving
Cloud) updates the number of points (of the Reference Cloud (or Moving
Cloud)).
 When a group of stations has been selected as input, all scans of the
group are displayed. The number of Points is the sum of all points of all
scans.

Caution: The number of points for the Reference Cloud (or for the Moving
Cloud), in the case of a group (or a station) with a large amount of points,
depends on the loading state defined in the status bar. Refer to the Point
Loading Manager chapter for more information.
Tools in the Registration Module 609

Note: When the Moving Cloud is too far from the Reference Cloud, i.e. more
than 10 km, a warning, as illustrated below, appears.

At the same time, the bottom sub-view which displays normally the registration
result between the Reference Cloud and the Moving Cloud, respectively in red
and in green is empty of contents.

If you choose Yes, the Moving Cloud is moved close to the Reference Cloud.
Both the clouds appear in the bottom sub-view. If you choose No, nothing will
be done.
610 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Register Clouds Automatically (Guess)


You are able to register two stations or groups of stations automatically without
picking points thanks to the Guess feature. An automatic algorithm
determines a coarse transformation for aligning both stations/groups. It
assumes that the Z axis is not so far from the vertical in both stations/groups,
thus only a 2D transformation is required.

The requirements for the feature to register with success are:

 The stations need to be levelled (or near to).


 There is enough information on the "Reference".
 There is enough overlap between the sets of data.

The registration may fail:

 When the sets of data have not enough overlap and/or not enough density
at the good place one dataset compared to the other similar place on the
other dataset.
 If the datasets have a lot of similar potential areas to match without
discriminant places, e.g. in an indoor situation with a lot of rooms but
without furnitures insides. More the "Reference" grows, more mistakes
there are.
 If the Z axis is far from the vertical.

After the automatic registration, you can decide:

 If the result is good, to keep and save the result in the database (see Save
the Registration Result) (see "Save the Registration Result" on page
622).
 If the result is good enough, to make a refinement (see Refine
Automatically the Registration (on page 615)).
 If the result is not good, to make manual corrections by picking points (see
Register by Picking Points (see "Register Clouds by Picking Points"
on page 611)) or using the manipulators (see Refine Interactively the
Registration (on page 616)).

Tip: You can use the G shortcut key instead.

Note: An error message appears in case there are not enough points to
compute a reliable registration.
Tools in the Registration Module 611

Register Clouds by Picking Points


The registration by picking points feature uses a smart algorithm which lets you
obtain the best registration result with the minimum of points. You have to start
picking a complete pair of points, one point per top sub-view. The registration
is then run. If the result is not good enough, you can proceed to complete the
first pair of points with a new pair. If the result is not good enough again, you
can then complete the previous pairs with a new pair, but you cannot overrun
three pairs.

The picking is done under constraint. If you have picked a point in one of the
top sub-view, it is not possible to pick another point inside the same sub-view.
You have to pick the point in the other sub-view.
612 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick the First Pair of Points


To Pick the First Pair of Points:

1. In a sub-view, pick a point on the displayed cloud.


2. Go to the other sub-view.
3. Pick another point on the displayed cloud.

Once the first pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is then
run. The result is displayed on the bottom sub-view. At the same time, a tool-tip
is displayed to show that a registration has been computed. You can check the
quality of the registration based either on the clouds that are superimposed or
the computed error (see Check the Quality of the Registration (on page
620)). If the result is not good enough, you can return to the top sub-views in
order to continue picking a new pair of points and improve the current
registration.

Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the state you are in before picking points.

Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
Tools in the Registration Module 613

Pick the Second Pair of Points


To Pick the Second Pair of Points:

1. In a sub-view, pick a point on the displayed cloud.


2. Go to the other sub-view.
3. Pick another point on the displayed cloud.

Once the second pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is
again run and the result is again shown on the bottom sub-view. If the result is
not again good enough, you can switch again to the top sub-views in order to
pick the third pair of points and improve the current registration.

Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the one point picking state.

Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
614 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick the Third Pair of Points


To Pick the Third Pair of Points:

1. In a sub-view, pick a point on the displayed cloud.


2. Go to the other sub-view.
3. Pick another point on the displayed cloud.

Once the third pair of points has been picked, the registration algorithm is run
and the result is shown on the bottom sub-view. A tool-tip is displayed to show
you that a new registration has been computed. If the result is not again good
enough, you can proceed from the beginning until you get a result.

Note: You can cancel the registration by selecting Undo. This brings you back
to the two point picking state.

Caution: To help you to easily pick points, you can lock each sub-view from
rotating by selecting Screen Rotation from the 3D View / Mode menu. Be
aware that the view merged from the two sub-views is not locked any more.
Tools in the Registration Module 615

Delete the Last Picked Point/Pair of Points


If a pair is complete, i.e., one point per top sub-view. You can remove them
from the sub-views by using . If a pair is incomplete, two points in e.g. the
left sub-view and one in the right-view. The last picked point (in the left-view) is
the removed.

Delete all Picked Points


You can easily remove all the picked points from the two top sub-views by
using . There is no requirement that the points have been paired.

Refine Automatically the Registration


You can now refine the initial registration, if necessary. The refinement uses an
iterative method. So you can perform several iterations to improve the results.

To Refine Automatically the Registration:

1. Click the Refine button to refine the result.


2. If required, click again Refine until you obtain the best registration result.

Note: You can use the F shortcut key instead.


616 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Refine Interactively the Registration


You can use the Interactive Pan, Interactive Rotation and Change Manipulator
Center features to refine the registration of the Moving Cloud with the
Reference Cloud, by adjusting manually its position and/or its orientation. By
default, none of the features is selected after entering the tool. Once you have
chosen one, it becomes persistent and remained selected until you disable it or
you select another one.

When the first pair of points has been picked and one of the features, like e.g.
Interactive Pan, has been chosen before picking, the manipulator will then be
positioned on the first picked point of the pair.

Tip: You can choose Interactive Pan or Interactive Rotation or Change


Manipulator Center from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 617

Pan the Moving Cloud


To Pan the Moving Cloud:

1. Click the Interactive Pan icon.

 A Manipulator appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local
coordinate system of the Moving Cloud. It has as center the center of the
Moving Cloud.
 This manipulator has three secant Axis Handles, each with its own color
(red, green and blue). In addition to the handles, you can find three Plane
Handles.
 At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.

2. Pick an Axis Handle. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow. Those for which you
cannot are in mauve.
3. Move the Moving Cloud along that direction.
4. Pick a Plane Handle. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can
displace the Moving Cloud is highlighted in yellow.
5. Move the Moving Cloud in that plane.

Tip: You can deselect the Interactive Pan by pressing Esc.

Tip: You can easily switch from Interactive Rotation to Interactive Pan, and
vice versa, by just picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to

when you hover it over a Handle.


618 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate the Moving Cloud


To Rotate the Moving Cloud:

1. Click the Interactive Rotation icon.

 A Manipulator appears, not in the global coordinate system but in the local
coordinate system of the Moving Cloud. It has as center the center of the
Moving Cloud.
 This manipulator has three Ring Handles, each with its own color (red,
green and blue). You can rotate the Moving Cloud around an axis passing
through the center of a ring and perpendicular to it.
 At the same time, the Change Manipulator Center icon becomes enabled.

2. Pick a Sphere Handle. It turns to yellow. The axis around which the
Moving Cloud can be rotated is dotted and is in green.
3. Move the Moving Cloud around that axis.

Tip: You can easily switch from Interactive Pan to Interactive Rotation, and
vice versa, by just picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to

when you hover it over a Handle.


Tools in the Registration Module 619

Note: For a station from a leveled instrument or from an instrument that is


leveled and setup over a known point, respectively of blue color and green
color in the Scans Tree, you can only rotate it around the Z-Axis of the active
coordinate frame. This is to preserve the leveling information on the station.

Tip: You can deselect the Interactive Rotation by pressing Esc.

Note: You are not able to switch to Interactive Pan by just picking the Handle
in this specific case.
620 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change the Manipulator Center Location


The default position of a Manipulator, when it appears, is the center of the
Moving Cloud.

To Change the Manipulator Center Location:

1. Click the Change Manipulator Center Location icon. The cursor becomes
as cross. This means that you are in the picking mode*.
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds.

Tip: You can use the C shortcut key instead.

Note: (*) To leave the picking mode, you can either press Esc. or click again
the Change Manipulator Center Location icon.

Tip: You can set the center of a manipulator to a station position by picking on
its related triangle.

Check the Quality of the Registration


You can either visually check the quality of the registration in the 3D View
because each station (or group of stations) still remains with each own color*
or control the errors displayed in the dialog.

Note: (*) Clouds are always rendered in Red and Green, regardless of the
Rendering option(s).

Check Visually the Registration Result


You can use this tool to quickly and visually check the quality of the
registration, by creating cross sections and specific areas for analysis. To do
so, click the Registration Visual Check button, in Step 3.
Tools in the Registration Module 621

Check the Registration Error


The registration error, in case of a registration, is simply called Error. It
expresses the average distance error of the pair(s) of points, as well as the
overlap percentage.

The registration error, in the case of a refinement, is called Refine Error. It


expresses the average distance error of the points present in the common
parts of the two clouds, as well as the overlap percentage.

The Error and Refine Error are expressed in the unit of measurement defined
in the Preferences dialog.
622 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save the Registration Result


To Save the Registration Result:

1. Drop-down the list above the Apply button.


2. From the list, choose an option among "Do Not Create Group", "Add to the
Reference", and "Merge With the Reference".
3. Click Apply to validate the registration in the database.

 If "Do Not Create Group" option has been chosen, the selected items are
registered together. The "Moving" item becomes the "Reference" item for
the next registration, and the item which comes after the "Moving" item
becomes the new "Moving" item.

 If the "Add to the Reference" option has been chosen, the selected items
are registered together. If the "Reference" item is not a group but a station,
a folder named "Registered" is created. The registered items are then put
under the folder. See [A].

If the "Reference" item is a group, the registered items are gathered under that
folder. See [B].
Tools in the Registration Module 623

In both cases, the folder remains the "Reference" item and the item which
comes after the "Moving" item becomes the new "Moving" item.

 If the "Merge With the Reference" option has been chosen, the selected
items are also registered together (as for the "Add to the Reference"
option), but the "Moving" item is merged with the "Reference" item.

4. Click Close. The Cloud-Based Registration dialog closes.

Note: You can continue to register other stations without quitting the tool. If
you use the options above to put the stations just registered together, you can
use it to register with another station. In this way, you can structure the Scans
Tree in such a way that it reflects the history of your registration procedure.

Tip: You can use the F5 shortcut key instead.

Note: The "Add to the Reference" option is by default set after entering the
tool. If you choose an option from list, this option becomes persistent until you
change it for another one.

Note: If there is already a "Registered" folder, and you register two new items
with the option "Add to the Reference" or "Merge with the Reference", a new
"Registered" folder is then created two the number 2 in parenthesis.
624 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Refine Registration Using Scans


This feature enables to refine the position and orientation of the stations using
the scan data. The stations need to be already registered, at least coarsely, for
this function to work successfully. The feature can be run after any registration
method (Auto-Extract Targets, Target-Based Registration, Auto-Register Using
Planes, Register Stations With Import RMX Files, Cloud-Based Registration). It
enables to enhance the accuracy of the registration. A report is generated,
showing residual errors and percentage of common points between matched
stations. The report can be saved as an RTF file.

When the stations are leveled, the feature keeps this constraint: the stations
will remain leveled in the process.

Tip: In some cases, where the scans have a high density and the overlap
areas are scanned from a long distance, it may be possible to obtain an even
better accuracy by setting the stations to 'unleveled'.

The stations can contain either a TZF Scan (TZF files) or only regular scans
(RWCX files), e.g., as obtained by extracting points from a TZF Scan or by
importing ungridded scan files. The feature uses two different algorithms to
refine the registration parameters, and automatically chooses which algorithm
to use depending on the stations:

 If your project contains only TZF Scan(s) for each station, the feature
launches an algorithm that uses the TZF files.
 If your project contains only RWCX files, the feature launches another
algorithm that uses RWCX files.
 If your project contains both TZF Scan(s) for each station and RWCX files,
the TZF algorithm is launched (TZF has the priority).
 If your project contains RWCX and only some TZF, the RWCX algorithm is
used.
Tools in the Registration Module 625

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select at least two stations or a group (or a set of groups)(1), or a project(2))


from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Refine Registration Using Scans .

 If a set of stations has been selected, the Refine Registration Using Scans
dialog opens.
 If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process
with all stations (or not). Click Yes. The dialog closes and the Refine
Registration Using Scans dialog appears.

Note:
 (1)
With at least two stations inside a group. Otherwise, the feature is
grayed-out.
 (2)
With several stations, a unique group with at least three stations or a set
of groups. If the project has a unique station within, the feature is grayed-
out.

Warning: By principle, the Refine Registration Using Scans feature does not
refine within groups. If there are some groups in your input, a warning appears
and prompts you to continue or to abort the process. If you choose Yes, the
refinement will be performed between the groups, by using the proper stations
in them. This is visible in the report, where only the stations from different
groups will be matched.

Warning: If the input does not contain at least two valid stations, i.e. with valid
TZF Scans or regular scans, a dialog opens and the feature cannot be run.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Refine Registration Using Scans feature can be
reached from Scan-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
626 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose a Reference Station


The Reference Station or Reference Group is the only station or group whose
position and orientation remain unchanged along the Refine Registration Using
Scans process. If a project (or a group of stations) has been selected as input,
all stations (of the project) (or of the group) are in the selection list and the first
station (from the list) is chosen to the reference. If there are some leveled
stations, the first of them will be chosen to be the reference by default.

To Choose the Reference Station:

1. Click on the Selection List pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a station (or a group) from the drop-down list.

 The selected station (or group) has its name displayed in the Reference
Station field.
 It is in bold in the selection list.

Caution: If the selection contains some leveled stations and the station
selected as Reference Station is not leveled, an error message appears and
prompts you to change the selection. If you wish to use an unleved station as
reference, you can set all the selected stations to unleved (by using
Registration / Modify Station / Force Unleved).
Tools in the Registration Module 627

Select a Subset of Stations for the Refinement


When working with groups containing many stations, the refinement on all
stations can be computationally expensive, and hence time consuming. In the
dialog, you can choose a subset of stations to run the computation on.
Typically, you may want to choose the stations that have some overlap with the
others groups. The refinement is then applied to the whole groups, but the
computation can be much faster.

To Select a Subset of Stations for the Refinement:

1. Click the Clear Selection icon to un-select (UNCHECKED) all the


stations (or groups) in the selection list.
2. In the case of groups only, all are by default not collapsed.
3. Click the Expand All icon (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique
group) in the selection list.
4. Select a station (or a group of stations) from the selection list. It is
highlighted.

 If the selected station has a TZF Scan within, its preview and its name are
displayed in the dialog as shown below.
 If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the Main TZF Scan is
displayed.
 No preview is displayed in case the selected station has a TZF Scan for
which the link to the TZF file is broken.
 In case of a group, the first station (from the group) or the first leveled
station (if existed) has its preview and name displayed.
628 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If the selected station has no TZF Scan within but only regular scans, no
preview and no name are displayed in the dialog.

5. Check only the stations you wish to include in the computation and leave
the others unchecked.

Tip: You can select several stations (from the selection list) by using the Ctrl
(or Shift) key with the left clicking. There is no preview in that case.
Tools in the Registration Module 629

Refine the Registration


To Refine the Registration:

1. Click on the Start button.

 If the selected stations contain only TZF Scans, the links to the TZF files
are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the Refine Registration Using
TZF Scans method will be applied to the selection.
 If the selected stations contain only regular scans, the Refine Registration
Using Extracted Scans method will be applied to the selection.
 If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
the links to the TZF files are valid and the TZF files are not missing, the
Refine Registration Using TZF Scans method will be applied.
 If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
some of the TZF links are broken or some of the TZF files are missing, the
dialog below opens:

a) Click Yes. The Refine Registration Using Extracted Scans


method will be applied.
b) Or click No. No refinement will be applied.

 If the selected stations contain both (TZF Scans and regular scans), and
some TZF links are broken or/and TZF files are missing or/and some
regular scans are missing, an error message appears:

 Click OK. No refinement will be applied.


630 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2. If required, press Esc. to abort the refinement in progress. A dialog opens


and prompts you to abort or not.
Tools in the Registration Module 631

View the Registration Report


Once the refinement has been applied, a report opens. It is named Report
Registration (Using TZF Scans) if the method on TZF Scans has been applied
and Report Registration (Using Extracted Scans) if the method on the regular
scans has been applied.

To View the Registration Report:

1. In the Registration Report dialog, verify the refinement results:

For each station (of the selection), the table shows:

 The name of the station(s) it has been matched with. In the case of the
algorithm on the regular scans, this consists of a single station (pairwise
refinement).
 For each pair of stations, the Cloud-to-Cloud Error and Coincident Points
percentage - in the current unit -, and the Confidence level.

The Cloud-to-Cloud Error is the root mean square of the point-to-point


distances on the overlapping areas. It is computed from the distances between
individual points in the first scan to their corresponding scan point in the
second scan. The error is symmetrical: it has the same value from Station_A to
Station_B as from Station_B to Station_A).
632 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_A to 2 - Cloud-to-Cloud Error from Station_B to
Station_B Station_A

The Coincident Points value is the amount of common points per pair (of
registered stations) is in percentage. The percentage in a pair (of registered
stations) is the same from one direction to the other (e.g. from Station_A to
Station_B or from Station_B to Station_A).

1 - Common points from Station_A to Station_B 2 - Common points from Station_B to Station_A

The Overall Cloud-to-Cloud Error (from all the station errors) is displayed at the
bottom left corner of the Registration Report dialog. This Overall Cloud-to-
Cloud Error is the average of the errors on all the station pairs.

This Confidence value gives an idea of how reliable a pair is. It is expressed in
percentage. All Confidence rates, below 90%, have a red warning beside
them. This does not mean that the results are wrong. It is an indication that the
results may require a closer analysis.

Note: The Confidence level resulting from a refinement, for which the input
stations have unknown position, cannot be trust.

2. Click Save In RTF. The Registration Report dialog opens.


3. Click Close. The Registration Report dialog closes.
Tools in the Registration Module 633

Orientation
The Orientation provides the user with tools to easily orientate a 3D scene after
it has been locally registered. It is assumed that, in most cases, the instrument
(used to acquire the 3D scene data) is leveled, and the Z axis is correct. The
Orientation then allows orienting the scene in 2D in order to re-define the X
and Y axis.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Perform a display in the 3D View.


2. From the Registration menu, select Orientation . The Orientation toolbar
appears.

1 - Define Vertical Axis 4 - Rotate 90° counterclockwise


2 - Define Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points 5 - Pick Origin
3 - Automatic Rotation Definition 6 - Apply Transformation
7 - Close Orientation Tool

 The 3D scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view (in the XY plane)
with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).
 A temporary yellow frame appears:

 If only one station is displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the yellow
frame is the origin of the station.
 If several stations are displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the
yellow frame is the origin of the last station (from the project).
 If several stations (with a TZF scan in each) are registered and
displayed in the 3D View, the origin of the yellow frame matches the
origin of the Reference Station.
634 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: All the features present in the Orientation Tool toolbar can also be
reached from the pop-up menu.

Caution: You can enter in the tool without displaying anything in the 3D View.
But this has no sense because most of the tools (in the Orientation Tool) are
based on the picking on object(s).

Note: There is no way to unlock the 3D scene from the 2D lock after entering
the tool. Once you are in the 2D lock position, you can only Pan in the YZ
plane, Zoom In (or Out) along the Z axis or Rotate around the Z axis.

Caution: The frame transformations cannot be applied to a project linked to


remote datasets (those extracted from Trimble Scan Explorer) (or to remote
projects). When you attempt to perform such operations, an error dialog
appears.

Note: A warning appears in the case the current frame is not the Home frame.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Orientation feature can be reached from Scan-Based
Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 635

Set the Vertical Orientation of a Scene

The Define Vertical Axis feature, from the Orientation toolbar, lets the user
define the vertical orientation (Z-Axis) of a non-leveled scan dataset, especially
for structured environments like buildings, e.g., indoor environments. Two
tools, independent but complementary, are available.

To Set the Vertical Orientation of a Scene:

 Click the Define Vertical Axis icon. The Define Vertical Axis toolbar
opens and the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock. The 2D Grid is hidden (if
not hidden previously).

1 - Automatic Vertical Axis Definition 3 - Apply Transformation


2 - Define Vertical Axis by Picking Two Points 4 - Close Vertical Axis Definition Sub-Tool

Note: A warning appears in case a leveled station has been selected as input.
If you wish to modify the vertical orientation of a station, you need to set the
station to unleved (from the Registration / Modify station / Force Unleved
menu) before entering in the tool.
636 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define Automatically the Vertical Axis

The Automatic Vertical Axis Definition is an automatic method for defining


the vertical orientation of a scene. It is intended to be applied to a set of data of
structured environments like buildings or indoor environments, etc. The
algorithm behind this method uses the hypothesis that the initial orientation of
the dataset is not so far from the real vertical. This means that the instrument,
required to acquire the dataset, is not leveled anymore and its inclination
compared to the vertical should be not more than S0 degrees. The automatic
method, when chosen, will be applied not only to the stations displayed in the
3D View, but to the entire project. This is useful in case of a project with booth
indoor and outdoor scans, as the computation will be carried out only on the
indoor scans.

Note: The automatic method is based on normal vectors, i.e., it will not work if
normals are not available and a warning message will appear.
Tools in the Registration Module 637

Define the Vertical Axis by Picking Two Points


To Define the Vertical Axis by Picking Two Points:

1. Click Define Vertical Axis by Picking Two Points . The cursor changes

as follows *. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D


constraint mode. The yellow frame disappears from the 3D View.
2. In the 3D View, pick two 3D points on a vertical structure like e.g. a wall.

 The first point should be on the bottom of the vertical structure


 The second point should be on the top of the vertical structure.
 Both points define the Z-Axis of the temporary frame.

 The temporary frame reappears in the 3D View. It remains unchanged in


position but not in orientation. Its Z axis is then parallel to the picked axis.
 The 3D scene is then locked again the XY plane of the temporary frame.
638 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note:
 To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
 Picking should not be necessary on the displayed object.

Tip: To render the selection of points easier, we recommend that you switch to
the Based-Station mode.

Apply the Transformation


To Apply the Transformation:

1. Click the Apply Transformation icon.


2. Or press Enter. A dialog opens and prompts you to apply the
transformation to the Home Frame.
3. Click Yes. All coordinates of the current project are then modified. The
Define Vertical Axis toolbar closes.
4. Or click No to not apply. The Define Vertical Axis toolbar remains open.

Set the Horizontal Orientation of a Scene


Once the vertical orientation has been defined, the X and Y axes are
automatically computed to obtain an orthonormal frame. If you are not satisfied
with the result, you can easily refine or redefine the X and Y axes using the
features described in the below topics.
Tools in the Registration Module 639

Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points


To Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points:

1. Click Define Horizontal Axis by Picking Two Points . The cursor

changes as follows *. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the


2D constraint mode. The yellow frame disappears from the 3D View.
2. Pick a 3D point in the 3D View.
3. Pick another 3D point in the 3D View.

 The two picked points define an axis.

 The 3D scene is then rotated (in the XY plane and around the Z axis of the
current frame) so that this axis becomes horizontal.

 The yellow frame reappears in the 3D View. It remains unchanged in


position but not in orientation. Its X axis is then parallel to the picked axis.
640 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note:
 (*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
 Picking should not be necessary on the displayed object.

Automatic Axis Definition


The Automatic Axis Definition feature allows the user to find the correct
orientation based on the Normal X, Normal Y and Normal Z information that
are in the displayed point cloud.

To Automatically Define Axis:

 Click the Automatic Axis Definition icon.

Rotate Counterclockwise 90°


To Rotate Counterclockwise 90°:

 Click Rotate Counterclockwise 90° . The whole 3D scene is then


rotated of 90° counterclockwise. The yellow frame remains unchanged in
position and in orientation.
Tools in the Registration Module 641

Pick the Origin


The Pick Origin feature allows the user to associate a picked point with a
Known Point.

To Pick the Origin:

1. Click Pick Origin . The cursor changes as follows *. The Picking


Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode
2. Pick a 3D point in the 3D View. The Define Origin dialog opens. The 3D
coordinates of the picked point are displayed in the Picked 3D Point field.
The values in this field are not editable.
3. Input Known Point coordinates in the New Coordinates field.
4. Click OK. The Define Origin dialog closes. The origin of the yellow frame is
then moved to the picked point.

Note:
 (*) To leave the picking mode, press Esc.
 Picking should be the on displayed cloud. You may hear a warning sound
when picking an empty point.

Tip: You can select the 3D coordinates that appear in the Picked 3D Point field
(after picking a point).

Apply the Transformation


To Apply the Transformation:

1. Click Apply Transformation .


2. Or press Enter. A dialog opens and prompts you to apply the
transformation to the Home Frame.
3. Click Yes. All coordinates of the current project are then modified. The
Orientation toolbar closes.
4. Or click No to not apply. The Orientation toolbar remains open.
642 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Close the Tool


To Close the Tool:

1. Click Close Orientation Tool .


2. Or press Esc. A dialog opens and prompts you to save the new orientation
or not.
3. Click Yes to apply.
4. Or click No to not apply.
Tools in the Registration Module 643

Create a Registration Report (Scan-Based)


This feature lets you recompute the Registration Report once TZF Scans are
registered together. Within the feature, no extraction (of points) is permitted,
only a recomputation of the Registration Report is done if a new selection of
the Reference Station (or Group) is requested. This feature has the same input
requirements as Auto-Register Using Planes.

To Create a Registration Report (TZF-Based):

1. Select at least two stations, a group (or set of groups), or a project with
TZF Scan within from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Registration Report (Scan-Based) .
The Registration Report Using TZF Scans dialog opens.

 The Reference Station (or Reference Group) is in bold.


 None of the stations (or groups) is selected. By default, all of the stations
(or groups) are checked.
 If required, use to select (CHECKED) all of the stations (or groups)
from the tree.
 If required, use to unselect (UNCHECKED) all of the stations (or
groups) from the tree.
 In the case of groups only, all of them are collapsed by default.
 If required, use (or ) to expand all groups (or a unique group) from
the tree.
 If required, use (or ) to collapse all groups (or a unique group) from
the tree.
 Select a station from the tree. It is highlighted. If there is a unique TZF
Scan within (the selected station), its preview is displayed in the dialog as
shown below. If there are several TZF Scans within, the preview of the
Main TZF Scan is displayed.
644 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 You can select several stations (from the tree) by using the Ctrl (or Shift)
key combined with the left clicking. No preview is displayed.
 Check all of the stations you need for your registration and uncheck those
are not necessary.

3. If required, drop-down the Reference Station list.


4. Choose a station (or group) as Reference Station.
5. Click Start.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Registration Report (Scan-Based) feature can be


reached from the Scan-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
645

Target-Based Registration Group


The "Target-Based Registration" group, as its name indicates, gathers a set of
tools offering the ability to register a dataset based on targets. This group can
be found from the Registration menu, in the Menu and Toolbars layout and
from the group named above in the Ribbon layout.

Auto-Extract Targets
The Auto-Extract Targets feature allows the extraction of targets from TZF
Scans, to match those in common and to register the stations the extracted
targets belong to.
646 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project(1) created from TZF format
file(s)(2)) from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Auto-Extract Targets .

 If a station (or set of stations) has (or have) been selected, the Auto-
Extract Targets dialog opens.
 If a project has been selected, a dialog opens and prompts you to process
with all stations (or not). Click Yes. The dialog closes and the Auto-Extract
Targets dialog appears.

3. Choose a Target Type (on page 648).


4. Create sampled scans (on page 649).
5. Select a Reference Station (on page 650).
6. Click OK. The Auto-Extract Targets dialog closes.

Note:
 (1)
With a unique station (or a set of stations (or a set of groups)).
Otherwise, if the input is a project with only a unique group, the tool is
grayed-out.
 If the input is a group (with a station (or a set of stations)), the tool is
grayed-out.

If there is no TZF format file in one of the selected stations, a dialog opens and
asks you if you wish to continue with the remaining station(s). Choosing "No"
will leave the tool.

If there is no TZF format file inside the whole selection, a warning message
appears with the text "No TZF Scan found in selected stations".
Tools in the Registration Module 647

Note: (2) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

A warning message appears in the Auto-Extract Targets dialog when one of


the selected stations has a Level 3 Scan within.

Note: You need to have at least one Target Type checked to enable the OK
button. Otherwise, it remains dimmed.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Extract Targets feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
648 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose a Target Type


You can extract two types of target: Spherical Target or Black and White Flat
Target.

To Choose a Target Type

1. Check both options: Spherical Target and Black and White Flat Target.
2. Or only check one type.
3. If Spherical Target has been checked, the Diameter field becomes
enabled.
4. Input a value in the Diameter field according to the type of sphere you
used during data acquisition.
5. Or click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.
6. And choose a value from the drop-down list.

 There are five predefined diameters: 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200
mm and 230 mm.

Tip: The current unit of measurement is in Millimeters. You do not need to


enter "mm".

Note: Extracted targets are created in the database as Spherical Targets (or
Black and White Flat Targets) with Unmatched status. All of them are gathered
in the Unmatched folder under the Project node in the Project Tree and each
one is put under its related station. An extracted target is named TargetX
where X is an order, whatever its type.

Caution: The minimum distance between two targets should be 200 mm


between two centers. The threshold is the same for Spherical Targets as for
Black and White Targets.

Note: For targets of spherical type, you need to know their exact diameter. If
you enter a diameter (in the dialog) that is different from the diameter of the
scanned targets, nothing (or a very small number of targets) will be extracted
from the TZF Scans.
Tools in the Registration Module 649

Create Sampled Scans


You can create a Scan based on the Preview of a TZF Scan (by getting points
from the Preview and computing Normals on them). A Scan is always named
Preview. The number of points for each is about two million points.

To Create a Sampled Scan:

 Keep the Generate a Preview Scan option checked.

Note:
 If several stations have been selected as input, a set of Scans (one per
station) is created in batch mode, one after the other. You can interrupt
each of them by pressing Esc.
 If the Generate a Preview Scan option has been checked, you will be
prompted to save the current project in the RealWorks database, if it is not
yet saved. If the option has been kept unchecked, no prompt appears.

Tip: When you create from several TZF Scans within a station, all Scans (in
that station) have not the same color. Each has its own color.
650 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Reference Station


You have to choose a station from the project (or from the set of stations) and
set it as a Reference Station. This means that the chosen station will be used
as a reference (station remaining unchanged) and the other stations as
stations to register with.

To Select a Reference Station:

1. Click on the Reference Station pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a station from the drop-down list.

Note:
 If a single station has been selected as input, no registration will occur.
 If a project has been selected as input, the first station (of the project) is by
default the Reference Station.

Note: If a set of stations has been selected as input, the first selected station is
by default the Reference Station. The order (of selection) is preserved.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract Targets dialog, if the station


selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station, an error message
appears and prompts you to change the selection. Close the Error message.
The Leveled Station is automatically set as Reference Station in the dialog.

Caution: After clicking OK in the Auto-Extract Targets dialog, an error


message appears if the input (of the tool) contains a Topographic Station and
the station has not been chosen as Reference Station. Close the Error
message. The Topographic Station is automatically set as Reference Station in
the dialog.
Tools in the Registration Module 651

Register the Stations


To Register the Stations:

 In the Auto-Extract Targets dialog, click OK.

If there are enough targets inside each station (and at least three in common
between two stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed and the
Target-Based Registration dialog opens.

If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired
targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given
station, the Number of Targets is shown as X/Y. Y is the sum of targets and X
is the sum of matched targets. The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based
Registration dialog is dimmed (because stations are registered). The
Registration Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by
default.

1 - Reference Station (in bold) 3 - Total of targets (matched and unmatched) in


2 - Matched targets in a station a station

If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no
common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will fail and the
Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog is enabled. The
Registration Details dialog is not open.

Note: The Target-Based Registration dialog will not open if the input is a single
station.
652 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Target-Based Registration
The Target-Based Registration tool allows you to register a set of stations by
using targets. The targets could be those obtained while scanning, those
created manually during a registration, or those obtained by using traditional
surveying instruments such as Total Stations. The registration is based on a
least-squares adjustment method using the corresponding target observations
of each station. A registration report will be created after the registration. You
can check the registration quality based on this report. If any of the targets are
out of error tolerance, you can un-validate them and re-perform the
registration.

Match Leveled Stations with Only Two Targets: The matching algorithm used,
when starting the tool or when doing an Auto-Match All in the Registration
Details window, can match leveled stations using a minimum of two targets in
common. Please note that the two targets have to be at different heights. If not,
the algorithm will ignore the matching to avoid creating a wrong match.

Match Traverse Network: A survey traverse network is a sequence of leveled


stations where all the targets should be matched to station points. The station
points may correspond to known Topo Points or not. The Target-Based
Registration tool can auto-match a traverse network acquired from a Trimble
TX series scanner or other vendor's scanners. If using a target adapter in the
field, this can be an automated alternative to using the manual Station Setup
tool; there is no need to measure target and station heights except for the first
station.

Target Matching Behavior in Degenerate Cases of Targets at Same Distance:


Target-based registration requires placing targets correctly in the field. In
particular, one should avoid degenerate cases like having several targets at
equal distances from each other, since they yield ambiguous configurations
with several possible valid solutions. The target matching algorithm identifies
the case of three targets with two equal distances - isosceles triangles -, and
chooses the solution that keeps the stations upward.

Some Degenerate Cases to Avoid in the Field:

 Targets aligned on the same line.


 Repeated patterns, e.g. put targets at regularly placed assets like
columns.
 Targets at equal heights
 Avoid isosceles triangles, i.e., targets that have equal distances

For these reasons, it is always better to place the targets a bit randomly, at
varying heights.
Tools in the Registration Module 653

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a station(1), a set of stations, a set of groups or a project(2) from the


Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Target-Based Registration .
3. Or perform an Auto-Extract Target and Register.

The Target-Based Registration dialog opens as the fourth tab of the


WorkSpace window. It is sub-divided into three parts. Each corresponds to one
step in the Target-Based Registration process.

Note:
 (1)
Among other stations. Otherwise, if the station is alone in the project,
the tool is grayed.
 (2)
With a set of stations (or a set of groups). Otherwise, if the project has
only a unique station (or group (of stations) within) the tool is grayed-out.

Note:
 If the input is a group with a unique station (or a group with a set of
stations) within, the tool is grayed.
 If the loaded project contains some scans of spherical target type which
are not already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each
of them with a geometry.

Caution: You cannot open the Target-Based Registration tool if the input is
only of Topographic Station type.

Note:
 (1)
When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken
as the entry of the tool and the selected station becomes the Reference
Station.
 (1)
You can also select two stations without TZF Scan inside.

Tip: You can also select Target-Based Registration from the pop-up menu.

If you enter into the Target-Based Registration tool with some stations that are
already been registered and some not, a dialog appears and asks to register
those that are not yet registered with those that are already.

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
654 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: In the Ribbon, the Auto-Extract Targets feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 655

Select a Reference Station


This step consists of fixing a station as a Reference Station. The other
station(s) is/are used to be registered with it. If a project (or a set of stations)
has been selected as input, the first station (of the project) is the default
Reference Station. If a leveled station has been chosen as input, this station is
by default Reference Station. If one of the stations is a Topographic station, i.e.
it contains points surveyed by using a traditional surveying instrument; this
station is set by default as the Reference Station.

To Select a Reference Station:

1. Click on the pull down arrow of the Reference Station list.

1 - Reference Station (in bold) 3 - Stations not displayed in the 3D View


2 - Stations displayed in the 3D View

By default, all selected stations are put in the Station List window. They are
listed not by the order of selection but by their order (of creation). All of them
are not displayed in the 3D View. The Reference Station is in bold.

2. Select a station from the drop-down list.


3. Select and toggle the Reference Station to On. Its representation is shown
in the 3D View.
4. Select and toggle another station to On. Its representation is shown in the
3D View.

Note: If there are several Topographic Stations within the project, only one is
assigned as the Reference Station.

Caution: If the station selected as Reference Station is not a Leveled Station,


an error message appears and prompts you to change the selection.
656 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: An error message appears if the selection (as input of the tool)
contains a Topographic Station and this station has not been chosen as a
Reference Station.
Tools in the Registration Module 657

Auto-Pair the Targets


A target has two states: Matched or Unmatched. If there are already extracted
targets within the input (of the tool) and if these targets have not yet been
paired (Unmatched), all of them are gathered in the Unmatched folder in the
Targets Tree and per station in the Scans Tree.

If there are enough targets inside each station and at least TWO in common
between two LEVELED stations (or THREE in common between two
UNLEVED stations), the auto-pairing of targets will be performed automatically.

If there are enough targets inside each station and at least TWO in common
between two REGISTERED groups and one of the groups is leveled, the
matching will be performed automatically.

The feature lets the user to register all the stations of a project together even if
there are no enough targets in common between some stations. In the below
picture, Station B and Station C share three targets in common, Station C and
Station A two targets only and Station B and Station A only one target in
common. Station B and Station C, having three common targets, will be
registered and automatically be put in group that will be used to register with
Station A.

If the auto-pairing of targets succeeds, you may see the number of paired
targets in the Station List of the Target-Based Registration dialog. For a given
station, the Number of Targets is shown as X/Y. Y is the sum of the targets and
X is the sum of the matched targets. The adjustment (of stations) is then
performed automatically without user interaction. The Adjust button (in Step 3
of the Target-Based Registration dialog) becomes dimmed. The Registration
Details dialog opens automatically with the Station View set by default.
658 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - Reference Station (in bold) 3 - Total of targets (matched and unmatched) in


2 - Matched targets in a station a station

If there are not enough targets inside each station and/or if there are no
common targets between stations, the auto-pairing of targets will then fail and
the Adjust button (in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration dialog) is
enabled. The Registration Details dialog is not open. The auto-pairing of
targets can also fail even if there are not enough targets inside only in a station
in common with other stations.

If the extracted targets have already paired (Matched), they are gathered per
pairing group named XXX where XXX is its order. All pairing groups are rooted
in the Targets Tree. The target pairing information is still displayed in the
Station List as illustrated above. After entering into the tool, the stations are
automatically adjusted. The Adjust button in Step 3 is still enabled as the
stations are automatically registered.

If there is no target within each station, the tool opens too. For each selected
station, you may see the sum of targets Y and the sum of matched targets X,
both equal to zero. An information box with the "Reference station is not
registrable" text may appear.

Tip: In general, a station should have at least three targets inside. If one of the
stations is a Topographic Station and the other a Leveled Station, two targets
(per station) are enough.

Note: A pairing group (XXX where X is its order) is shown in the 3D View
with a label. The label's name is the group name and its color corresponds to
the one that you can find in each of the targets matched together. Unmatched
targets still remain in the Unmatched folder.
Tools in the Registration Module 659

Tip: Targets, extracted by using the Auto-Extract and Register method and
paired together immediately in the Target-Based Registration tool, are
renamed as well as their pairing groups. They are renamed as XXX. XXX
starts at 001 and is incremented by one. See [A]. If the Auto-Extract and
Register method is not combined with the Target-Based Registration tool,
paired targets are not renamed but only their pairing groups are. See [B].

Edit the Targets


For each station, you can modify targets (either of spherical type or of planar
type), delete those that are incorrectly fitted, and/or create additional targets in
the point cloud where such a target is identified visually as having been
scanned.

To Edit the Targets.

 In Step 2, click Analyze. The Target Analyzer dialog opens.


660 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Adjust the Stations


Once the pairing (of targets) is performed, the adjustment (of stations) is then
performed automatically without user interaction. From this point on, stations
are split into two categories: "Registered" and "Unregistered". "Unregistered"
stations are those for which the targets inside are e.g. not in sufficient in
quantity or not in common with other stations. They are then grayed out in the
Station List and the Residual Error is equal to Zero. "Registered" stations are
those for which the targets inside are in common and paired with other
station(s). The Residual Error is not equal to Zero

1 - Reference Station (in bold) 3 - Unregistered station(s)


2 - Registered station(s)

Caution: Changing the current Reference Station to a new one will NOT reset
the adjustment information. The Adjust button, in Step 3, will stay grayed-out.

Note: After registering a Leveled Station with a Topographic Station, the Up (Z


direction) of the Leveled Station is retained.

The Overall Residual Error is the average of all station residual errors. It is
displayed in Step 1 of the Target-Based Registration dialog below the Station
List. The smaller the Overall Residual Error, the more accurate the registration
of the stations.
Tools in the Registration Module 661

When all Selected Stations are Registered


When all of the selected stations have been successfully registered (together),
the Overall Residual Error in Step 1 of the Target-Based Registration dialog,
below the Station List, displays a value as illustrated below.

The Registration Details dialog automatically opens with the same Overall
Residual Error value.
662 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

When Some of the Selected Stations are Registered


When some of the selected stations have been successfully registered
together, there is no value in the Overall Residual Error line in Step 1 of the
Target-Based Registration dialog.

The Registration Details dialog still opens automatically. The Residual Error is
not "Overall" but only for "Registered Stations". There is a value.
Tools in the Registration Module 663

When all Stations are not Registered


If all of the selected stations have not been successfully registered (together),
there is no value for the Overall Residual Error in Step 1 of the Target-Based
Registration dialog.

The Registration Details dialog is not open. You have to open it manually by
click the Check button. The Residual Error is also not "Overall" but only for
"Registered Stations", and there is no value.
664 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Adjustment


You can then check the quality of the adjustment. You can check the mean
error for each target group (inside which you can find all matched observations
of this target from different stations). You can also check the error for each
target observation. To do this, you should select the corresponding line in the
table, and all pertinent information will be shown in the dialog area below the
table. If the error of a target is e.g. out of tolerance, you can select it and use
the Unmatch button to remove it from the next registration. You can then re-
perform the registration.

To Check the Adjustment:

 In Step 3, click on the Check button. The Registration Details dialog


opens.
Tools in the Registration Module 665

Registration Details
What is a Fitting Error? An extracted target is in fact a set of points fitted with a
geometry. The accuracy of the fitting is given by this error (a distance value in
the current unit of measurement). This distance is the deviation from the fitted
geometry to the set of points. The shorter the distance, the more accurate the
fitting.

As a target does not belong to only one station but to several stations and the
fitting error (of this target) in a station differs from the fitting error in another
station. The Residual Error of a target is the average of all Fitting Errors (of this
target), each from a station observation.

1 - Station's Residual Error 3 - Target's Fitting Error


2 - Target's Residual Error

A Residual Error of a station is the average of Fitting Errors of all targets


(belonging to the station). The shorter the distance, the more accurate the
matching of targets.

1 - Target group's Residual Error 3 - Target's Fitting Error


2 - Target's Residual Error
666 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

A Target Group is a group inside which you can find all matched observations
of this target from different stations. The Residual Error in this case is the
average of all Fitting Errors of this target.

Caution: The Projected Instrument Positions of leveled stations, which are


also displayed in the Registration Details dialog, are not used for the
registration.

From Station View


To Check the Errors from the Station View:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Select Station View from the drop-down list.
Tools in the Registration Module 667

Matched Station Tab


The Matched Station tab lists in a table all registered stations with targets
whether matched or unmatched. By default, all are Off (undisplayed in the 3D
View).

1 - Registered station(s) 2 - Unmatched target(s) 3 - Matched target(s)

1. Do one of the following:

 Toggle a registered station On. All targets of this station are On and have
their representation displayed in the 3D View.
 Toggle a matched target On. Its representation is displayed in the 3D
View.

2. Do one of the following:

 Unmatch a pair of matched targets.

c) Select a matched target. The Unmatch button becomes active.


d) Click Unmatch. This target and the one(s) in the same pair are
unmatched.

 Unmatch all matched targets in a registered station.

e) Select a registered station. The Unmatch button becomes active.


f) Click Unmatch. All targets from this station and the ones from
the other registered stations are unmatched.

 Match a matched target with.


668 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Registered Stations
The panel below the table displays for a registered station its name, the
number of station(s) it is linked to, the name of each linked station, the number
of common targets and the Mean Distance (in the current unit of
measurement).

Unmatched Targets
For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station and
group the matched target belonging to.

Matched Targets
For a matched target, the panel displays its name, the station and group it
belonged to, the target(s) paired to it.
Tools in the Registration Module 669

Unmatched Station Tab


The Unmatched Station tab lists all unregistered stations. They are only those
that have been selected (as input) but for which the registration failed. There
are some extracted targets inside (if there is a TZF scan) the stations.

1 - Station selected as input of the registration 2 - Targets belonging to the unmatched station

 Do one of the following:

 Toggle an unmatched target On. Its representation is shown in the 3D


View.
 Toggle an unmatched station On. All targets inside this station have their
representation displayed in the 3D View.
 Match a target with.

Note:
 The Unmatch button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the
Unmatched Station tab.
 The Unmatched Station tab is not present in the Registration Details
dialog if all the selected stations have been successfully registered
together.

Unregistered Stations
For an unregistered station, the panel below the table displays its name and
the "0 linked station(s) text".

Unmatched Targets
For an unmatched target, the panel displays its name and the station it belongs
to.

Match an unmatched target with.


670 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From Target View


To Check the Errors from the Target View:

3. Click on the pull-down arrow.


4. Select Target View from the drop-down list.
Tools in the Registration Module 671

Matched Target Tab


The Matched Target tab lists in a table all pairs of matched targets. By default,
all are Off (undisplayed in the 3D View).

1 - Pairs of matched targets 2 - Matched targets inside a pair

1. Do one of the following:

 Toggle a pair of matched targets On. Both targets (one from each station)
are displayed in the 3D View.
 Toggle a matched target On. Its representation is displayed in the 3D
View.

2. Do one of the following:

 Unmatch a pair of matched targets.

a) Select a pair of matched targets. The Unmatch button becomes


active.
b) Click Unmatch. This pair of targets is unmatched.

 Unmatch a matched target.

a) Select a matched target. The Unmatch button becomes active.


b) Click Unmatch. This target and the one in the same pair are
unmatched.

 Match a target with.


672 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Unmatched Target Tab


The Unmatched Target tab lists all unmatched targets. All are put in the
Unmatched folder.

 Do one of the following.

 Toggle an unmatched target On. Its representation is displayed in the 3D


View.
 Toggle the Unmatched folder On. All unmatched targets inside this folder
have their representation displayed in the 3D View.
 Match a target with.

Note: The Unmatch button is not available (dimmed) when selecting the
Unmatched Target tab.

Auto-Match All
The Auto-Match All feature allows you to first un-adjust stations that had
previously been adjusted and then adjust them again. No selection is required.
Stations are those selected as the input of the Target-Based Registration (or
Auto-Extract Targets).

Note: The user can be in either the Station View or the Target View.

Auto-Match Station
The Auto-Match Station feature allows you to auto-adjust a selected station
from the Registration Details dialog. If the selected station is already adjusted,
it is then un-adjusted and adjusted again. If it is not already adjusted, it is then
automatically adjusted. A selection is required. It must be done in the Station
View from either the Matched Station tab or the Unmatched Station tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 673

Export the Registration Report to a RTF File


You are able to export the registration result in a report in a RTF format file
without having to leave the Target-Based Registration tool, by clicking the
Export Report button in the Registration Details dialog. For more information,
refer to the Create a Registration Report (Target-Based) (on page 723)
topic.

Save the Adjustment Result


If you are satisfied with the adjustment result, you can use the Apply (or Group)
button to save this result. You can continue to perform other registrations or to
quit the tool by using the Close button.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Apply the Adjustment


To Apply the Adjustment:

1. Click Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog remains open. Paired


targets remain paired. Stations are adjusted.
2. Click Close. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes.

Tip: You can perform two undo operations, one for the adjustment (of stations)
and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).
674 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply the Adjustment and Group the Stations


To Apply the Adjustment and Group the stations:

1. Click Group. A dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes before
grouping stations.
2. Do one of the following:

 Click Yes. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. A new folder


named New Group is created in the Scans Tree. All adjusted stations are
put under that folder while all unadjusted stations are outside*. Targets
and target groups, instead of being named TargetX and mTargetX where
X is an order, they are renamed as XXX. XXX starts at 001.

1 - Group gathering registered stations 3 - Unmatched target(s)


2 - Matched target(s)

Or

 Click No. A new dialog opens and asks you to apply all changes to the
database.

a) Click Yes. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. Targets


remain paired. Stations are adjusted and no new folder is
created.
b) Or click No. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes.
Targets are unpaired. Each target keeps its default name:
TargetX (where X is an order). Stations are not adjusted.
Tools in the Registration Module 675

3. Click Close. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes.

Note: You can perform two undo operations, one for both the grouping and the
adjustment (of stations) and one for the auto-pairing (of targets).

Note: (*) Only stations registered to the Reference Station and the Reference
Station itself are grouped.

Target Analyzer
This tool helps you to analyze a project before you register the stations that are
inside. For each station, you can check if there are enough targets (either of
spherical type or of planar type), modify or delete those that are incorrectly
fitted, and/or create additional targets in the point cloud where such a target is
identified visually as having been scanned.
676 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a project (or a group of stations(1) or a single station(1)) from the


Project Tree.
2. From the Tools menu, select Target Analyzer .

Or

3. In Step 2 of the Target-Based Registration dialog, click Analyze.

The Target Analyzer dialog opens as the fourth (or fifth) tab of the WorkSpace
window. It is composed of five parts. The first part allows you to select a station
for analyzing. The second part is to check targets/surveying points and scans
that are in the selected station. The third part is to repair (or correct) a given
target or to create a new one. The fourth part is to update the network(2). The
fifth part is to save the result, close the tool and give access to the online help.
The number of scans and targets in the selection appear in text below the
selection box.

Note:
 If the input contains some scans of spherical target type which are not
already fitted, RealWorks will prompt you to automatically fit each of them
with a primitive.
 (1)
If the TZF format files have not yet been processed, the Processing TZF
Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 (2)
This part is only available when launching the Target Analyzer tool
through the Target-Based Registration tool.

Tip:
 When a single station has been selected, the whole project is then taken
as the entry of the tool.
 You can also right-select on a project (or a group of stations(1) or a single
station(1) or a TZF Scan) from the Project Tree and Target Analyzer tool
from the pop-up menu.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Tools in the Registration Module 677

Note: In the Ribbon, the Target Analyzer feature can be reached from the
Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
678 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Station
If a set of stations has been selected as the input (of the tool), no matter in
which order has been selected each station, and the first from the list is the
one that is displayed in Step 1. The same rule is applied when selecting a
project.

To Select a Station for Analyzing:

1. Click on the pull down arrow.


2. Select a station from the drop-down list.
3. Or click Go to Next Station (or Go to Previous Station).

For each station, the number of scans and the number of targets are displayed
as well as the Residual Error (in the current unit of measurement). If the station
has not yet been registered, its Residual Error is equal to Zero. By default, the
Main Scan within the selected station is displayed in a 2D Viewer as a 2D
Preview Image.

You can zoom an area of this 2D Preview Image In or Out using the Zoom In
and Zoom Out commands, zoom the whole image In or Out using the mouse
wheel or by defining a zoom factor. If the image is zoomed In more than the 2D
Viewer can display, you can pan it in any direction in order to view the hidden
areas.
Tools in the Registration Module 679

Spherical Targets, Black and White Flat Targets or Point Targets extracted
from a TZF Scan by using e.g. the Auto-Extract Targets and Register feature,
once created, are displayed within the TZF Scan. You can display (or hide) all
labels by clicking on the Show/Hide Labels icon.

Note: The 2D Viewer will not appear anymore when there is no TZF Scan
within the input (of the tool).

Caution: If there is no TZF format file inside the selected station, a dialog
opens and warns you that the TZF format file cannot be opened. It may be
absent, corrupted or blocked. The 2D Viewer disappears after closing the
warning dialog.

Select a TZF Scan


As a station can contain more than one TZF Scan, you can manually choose to
display the one you want other than the Main Scan.

To Select a TZF Scan:

1. In the 2D Viewer, click on the TZF Scan pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a TZF Scan to display.

Tip: If a TZF Scan has been chosen (as input of the Target Analyzer tool), it is
then displayed in the 2D Viewer instead of the Main Scan.
680 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Focus on Targets
Targets and scans of the station selected in Step 1 are listed according to the
category they belong to. A target can be either of spherical shape or of flat
shape. It can also be a surveying point. Only fitted targets can be used for
registration (see the Target-Based Registration tool for full details). Fitted
targets are put together in the Fitted list and this list is accessed by selecting its
corresponding tab.

Similarly, unfitted targets and scans are respectively in the Not fitted and Scan
lists. The first item of the Fitted list is shown in the 3D View but none is
selected. The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View, which is
here to display the selected item, is blank. Both the Go to Next Target and the
Go to Previous Target in the dialog are dimmed.

Properties depend on where the selected item is. If the selected item belongs
to the Scan and Not Fitted lists, its name and number of points are listed in the
information box. If the selected item comes from the Fitted list, you will find two
other items of information (Standard Deviation (also called RMS error) and
Scanner Distance) in addition to its name and number of points. If the selected
item is from a leveled station, you will also see the Target Height and Scanner
Up Direction information.

To Focus on a Target:

1. If the station (selected in Step 1) has no TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as
shown in [A].
2. If the station (selected in Step 1) has a TZF scan inside, Step 2 looks as
shown in [B].
3. Select an item from the current list. Both the Go to Next Target and the Go
to Previous Target buttons become enabled.
4. Click Go to Next Target (or Go to Previous Target) to navigate through the
list (of target).
5. Or press Down or Up on your keyboard.

[A] [B]
Tools in the Registration Module 681

A Target selected from Step 2 is highlighted in the TZF Scan and centered on
the 3D View and on the 2D Viewer as shown below.

Note:
 You can only view the target height in the 3D View if its absolute value is
greater than zero.
 You can first select any item from the current list and use Page Up and
Page Down. The first and last item of this list becomes consecutively
selected and its representation is shown in the 3D View.
682 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create/Edit Targets
If the station selected in Step 1 contains already fitted items, you can focus on
each item of the Fitted list from the first to the last. Visually compare each of
the selected item’s representations (points and geometry) in the 3D View and if
required check the RMS Error value in the information box. The smaller this
value, the more precise the fitting. Those that are not correctly fitted can be
modified or deleted. Step 3 (of the Target Analyzer dialog) appears as shown
in [A], [B] and [C] when selecting respectively a spherical item, a flat target and
a survey point.

[A] [B]

[C]

If already fitted items are not sufficient, you can create additional items with the
Fitting tool. You should first select an item from one of the two lists (Not Fitted
and Scans). If the selected item is from the Not Fitted list and is of spherical
shape (or flat shape (or survey point)), the dialog appears as shown in [D], (or
[E] (or [F])).

[D] [E]

[F]

If the selected item is from the Scans list, the dialog looks as shown in [G].
From each item of the Scans list, you can extract a 3D point as in the 3D Point
Creation tool.

[G]

Those, that are not correctly fitted and that belong to a leveled station (or from
a survey instrument), can also be modified and deleted. If the selected item is
from the Fitted list, you can edit its height (see [H] when selecting a flat item). If
it is either from the Not Fitted list or from the Scan list, you cannot edit any
height as the Target Height is grayed out (see [I] when selecting a flat item).

[H] [I]
Tools in the Registration Module 683

If the station selected in Step 1 contains fitted items extracted from a TZF
scan, the dialog looks as shown in [J] (for an un-leveled station) and [K] (for a
leveled station).

[J] [K]
684 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Scan Items]


To Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Scan Items):

1. Select a scan from the Scan list.


2. Click Fit. The Fitting tool toolbar appears.

3. Fence a set of points by drawing a polygon.


4. Click on the Fit Geometry to Cloud pull-down arrow.
5. Do one of the following:

 Fit with a Spherical Target.

a) If required, select Spherical Target from the drop-down list.


b) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.
c) Select AUTO to do a free fitting.
d) Or key a diameter value in the Diameter field.
e) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200
mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting.
f) In the Fitting tool toolbar, click again Spherical Target. A
Spherical Target is fitted to the fenced points.

 Fit with a Flat Target.

a) Select Flat Target from the drop-down list.


b) In the Fitting tool toolbar, click Flat Target again. A Flat Target is
fitted to the fenced points.

6. Click Create Fitted Geometry.


7. Click Close Tool.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.

Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept. If you
close the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.

A set of points, once fitted, is put with its geometry in the Fitted list and under
the Unmatched folder of the Targets Tree and under the active group of the
Scans Tree. Undoing the fitting removes the set of points with its primitive from
the Fitted list, the Unmatched folder and the active group.
Tools in the Registration Module 685

Note: Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .

Create a 3D Points
To Create a 3D Point:

1. Select a scan from the Scan list.


2. Click Pick Point to Create 3D Point icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes a cross.
3. Pick a point on the point cloud displayed in the 3D View. A 3D Point
whose name is Scan_ObjectX where X is its order is created. This 3D
Point which is an unmatched target is put the current station in the Scans
Tree and in the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree.

Delete a Target
To Delete a Target:

1. Select a target from the Fitted list.


2. Click Delete the Selected Target . A warning dialog appears.
3. Do one of the following:

 To delete both the geometry and the points, click Delete Scan and Target.
 To delete only the geometry, click Delete Target Only.
 To cancel, click Cancel.

Caution: The deletion is definitive. You cannot undo.

Edit the Target Height


To Edit the Target Height:

1. Select a target from the Fitted list.


2. Enter a value in the Target Height field.
3. Or keep the default value.
4. Type Enter.

Note: The selected target needs to belong to a leveled station.

Tip: Instead of editing the Target Height value from the Target Analyzer dialog,
you can also do so in the Property window.
686 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Unfitted Items]


To Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Unfitted Items):

1. Select an unfitted item from the Not fitted list.


2. Click Fit. The Fitting tool toolbar appears.
3. If the selected item is of spherical type, the Fitting tool toolbar appears as
shown below.

4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting tool toolbar appears as shown
below.

5. If required, fence the target by drawing a polygon.


6. Do one of the following:

 If the target is of Spherical Target type.

a) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.


b) Select AUTO to perform a free fitting.
c) Or key a diameter value in the Diameter field.
d) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200
mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting.
e) In the Fitting toolbar, click again Spherical Target.

 If the target is of Flat Target type.

a) In the Fitting toolbar, click again Flat Target

7. Click Create Fitted Geometry.


8. Click Close Tool.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 687

Note: The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close
the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.

A target scan, once fitted, is removed from the Not Fitted list and put in the
Fitted list and under the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. Undoing the
fitting replaces the target scan again in the Not Fitted list and removes it from
the Unmatched folder.
688 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Fitted Items]


To Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud (From Fitted Items):

1. Select a fitted item from the Fitted list.


2. Click Re-Fit. The Fitting toolbar appears. The geometry representation of
the selected item is then hidden.
3. If the selected item is of spherical type, the Fitting toolbar appears as
shown below.

4. If the selected item is of flat type, the Fitting toolbar appears as shown
below.

5. If required, fence the target by drawing a polygon*.


6. Do one of the following:

 If the target is of Spherical Target type.

a) Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.


b) Select AUTO to perform a free fitting.
c) Or enter a diameter value in the Diameter field.
d) Or select a diameter between 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200
mm and 230 mm to perform a constrained fitting.
e) In the Fitting toolbar, click Spherical Target again.

 If the target is of Flat Target type.

a) In the Fitting toolbar, click Flat Target again.

7. Click Create Fitted Geometry.


8. Click Close Tool.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View and select a command
from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 689

Note:
 The value entered in the Diameter field will no longer be kept if you close
the Fitting tool without creating the fitted geometry.
 (*) If some points have been removed from the point cloud when fencing,
the Residual Error of the fitted item changes as well as the RMS, Standard
Deviation and Number of Points.
 Please, be aware that the Flat Target icon looks like this .
690 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify the Target Position


You can adjust the extracted target (of flat type) so that it fits exactly the points
of the scanned target. A Manipulator (with two axis handles and a plane)
appears. You can adjust the fitted geometry by moving it with to the
manipulator. You can pan the fitted geometry along a direction or in the plane.

To Modify the Target Position:

1. Select a fitted item (of flat type) from the Fitted list.
2. Click Show Manipulators to Modify Target Position . A Manipulator (with
two axis handles and a plane) appears.
3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the geometry is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you
cannot displace it is in magenta.
4. Move the fitted geometry along that direction.

5. Click on the translucent plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you
can displace the fitted geometry turns to yellow.
6. Move the created target in that plane.
Tools in the Registration Module 691

Extract Targets
The Extract feature allows the user extract Spherical Targets, Black and White
Flat Targets, Point Targets and Point Targets (Corner) from TZF scans and
use the extracted targets to register the stations they belong to.

To Extract Targets:

1. In Step 1, select a station from the station list.


2. In Step 3, click the Extract button. The Target Creator toolbar opens.

 The extract method, which appears in the Target Creator toolbar, is the
last used one.

Note: The targets shown in red are the newly created targets, i.e. the ones that
have been created in the current session of the Target Creator tool. Once you
close the Target Creator toolbar, they are shown in green.
692 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract Spherical Targets


To Extract a Spherical Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spherical Target as object type. The Target Creator toolbar
appears as shown below.

3. Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.


4. Choose one of the five predefined diameters (76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139
mm, 200 mm and 230 mm).
Tools in the Registration Module 693

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Click) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

A Sphere fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one. Both of them
are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. At
the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named TargetX) is created
and put under the current station.

The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, the Standard Deviation value (except
when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Spherical Target
close to the picked point.
694 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-clicking to end.

A Sphere, whose diameter has been previously defined, fits the points inside
the fence. Both of them are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar opens
as shown below. At the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named
TargetX) is created and put under the current station.

The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, as well as the Standard Deviation
information (except when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter. If the
area contains no points; nothing occurs.

Tip: Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.

Note: Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 695

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again a new set of points.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Spherical Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Spherical
Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the Unmatched folder in the
Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target Properties (see "Modify the
Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

The properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
696 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract Black and White Flat Targets


To Extract a Black and White Flat Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Black and White Flat Target as object type. The Target Creator
toolbar looks as shown below.
Tools in the Registration Module 697

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

A Black and White Target fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one.
Both of them are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as
shown below. At the same time, a scan of Flat Target type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Black and White
Flat Target close to the picked point.
698 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.

A Black and White Target fits the points inside the fence. Both of them are
displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. A
scan, of Flat Target type (named TargetX), is created and put under the current
station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).

Tip:
 Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
 Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 699

Modify the Position of a Target


A manipulator composed of two axis handles and one plane handle is set at
the position of the target. To move the target along a direction, click on an axis
handle. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.

To pan the target in a plane. Click on the plane handle. It turns to yellow. A
plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again to refine the fitting.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Black and White Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. The Flat Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
700 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract Point Targets


To Extract a Point Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Point Target as object type. The Target Creator toolbar looks as
shown below.

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown
below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is created and put under
the current station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Point Target close
to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 701

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again to refine the fitting.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Point Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.

Extract Point Targets (Corners)


To Extract a Point Target (Corner):

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Point Target (Corner) as object type. The Target Creator toolbar
looks as shown below.
702 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.

An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

An error dialog opens when a Point Target cannot be found closed to the
picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 703

We advise you to pick a point on a corner. The extraction (of a target) can fail if
you pick a point on a flat surface. If that case occurs, only a point cloud is
extracted and the Fitting toolbar which opens looks as shown below.
704 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fence an Area
You need to define an area from which a target will be created. This area is to
be defined on the 2D image data in the 2D viewer.

To Fence a Zone:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.

An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

Tip:
 Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
 Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
Tools in the Registration Module 705

Modify the Position of a Target


A manipulator is composed of three secant axis handles. This manipulator is
set at the position of the target. In addition to the three axis handles, the user
can find three plane handles.

Use the manipulator to move the target along a direction. Click on an axis
handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.

Use the manipulator to pan the target in a plane. Click on a plane handle. It
turns to yellow. A plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.

Note: In the Input Data 2D Viewer, you may not see the position of the target
changed. This only occurs after you create the target in the database.
706 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

 Click the Create icon in the Fitting toolbar.

The created scan is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.

Modify the Properties of a Target


The properties of a target are mainly its Name and its Height which is the
distance the user has to measure from a point on the ground and the center of
the target.

To Modify the Properties of Target:

1. In the Name field, input a new name


2. In the Height field, input a distance value.
3. Click OK. The Modify Target Properties dialog closes.

Update the Network


This step, which only appears when using the Target Analyzer tool within the
Target-Based Registration tool, allows the user to redo the adjustment of the
stations after modifying the extracted targets e.g. refitting, deleting, etc.
Tools in the Registration Module 707

Apply the Result


Once you are satisfied with the result, you can select another station and
perform the same operations. When all selected stations are analyzed, you can
save all results by using the Apply button. You can then evoke the Target-
Based Registration tool for registering stations together.

Note: The Projection Mode in use by default (in the Target Analyzer) is
Perspective. If you are in Parallel (before entering the tool), the projection
mode automatically switches to Perspective. Once the tool is closed, the
projection mode is restored.

Georeferencing
Georeferencing describes the process of locating an object in the "real world"
coordinates. For example, you can georeference your house by determining its
latitude and longitude coordinates. In RealWorks, the objective of this tool is to
allow you to georeference a station (or a group of stations or a project) to a
known coordinate system. To do this, you have to assign for some targets (or
points) of the station (or group of stations) the corresponding known
coordinates. Once you assign at least three pairs, a least squares fitting
method will be used to calculate the best transformation. You can also import a
control network surveyed by traditional surveying instruments, and use these
control points to assign coordinates. If you apply this procedure station by
station, this amounts to performing registration sequentially (in contrast to
Target-Based Registration where the least squares adjustment is applied
simultaneously to all selected stations).

Caution: The Georeferencing tool does only move point clouds. Geometries,
created in OfficeSurvey (or Modeling), are not moved anymore.
708 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To open the Georeferencing tool, you need to select a station (or a group of
stations or a project); no matter if the selection contains or not targets.

To Open the Tool:

1. Import a survey network file including measured points into your project, if
required.
2. Select a station (or a project) from the Scans Tree and display it if
required.
3. From the Registration menu, select Georeferencing . The
Georeferencing dialog opens.

This dialog box opens as the fourth tab of the WorkSpace window and is
composed of four parts. Each of them corresponds to one step in the
georeferencing procedure.

 If the input is a lonely station, this station is by-default selected. All targets
(if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.
 If the input is a group of stations, the first station is selected by-default. All
targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List window.
 If the input is a project, this project is by-default selected. All targets (if
existed) of this project are listed in the Target List window.

1 - The selected project 2 - The Target List window 3 - Targets in the selection

 For a leveled station, its Projected Instrument Position is also displayed in


the Target List window.
Tools in the Registration Module 709

Note: A measured point may have two states: Matched or Unmatched. All
measured points when unmatched are gathered into a folder named
Unmatched and rooted under the Project node in the Targets Tree. This folder
can be reached by selecting the Targets tab.

Tip: The Georeferencing tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Georeferencing feature can be reached from Scan-
Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.

Select a Station for Georeferencing


You should first select a station for which you want to georeference. Once it is
selected, all targets (if existed) of this station are listed in the Target List
window.

To Select a Station for Georeferencing:

1. Click on the Select Station pull-down arrow.


2. Select a station from the Select Station list. This station is displayed in the
3D View and all targets that are inside are listed in the Target List window.

Note: Multi-selection is forbidden.

You cannot drop-down the list and select a station from if a project has been
selected (as input of the tool). All targets from the project are listed in the
Target List window as illustrated below.
710 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Assign Known Coordinates to a Target


If there are targets, you can select and assign one of them with known
coordinates. You have two methods. If there is a control network imported, you
can choose the corresponding one and use it to assign the coordinates.
Otherwise, you can key-in the coordinates in the text field. A target, once
assigned with known coordinates, will be removed from the Target List window
and put in a list under the By Target and By Picking buttons. Similarly, it will be
displayed and numbered in the 3D View.

To Assign Known Coordinates to a Target:

1. If required, check the Zoom On Selected Target option.


2. Select a target from the Target List window. The By Target button
becomes active.

The Zoom On Selected Target option lets you easily find the target, that you
selected in the Target List, in the 3D scene. A selected target is highlighted in
the Target List window, and highlighted and centered in the 3D View.

If the geometry of the selected target is not displayed, the selection in the
Target List window displays it. When you selected a target in the 3D View, it
gets highlighted in the Target List window and in the 3D View.

You are able to select the Projected Instrument Position of a leveled station
and assign known coordinates to it. Note that a Projected Instrument Position
has no represent in the 3D View. What is displayed is the last selected target.

3. Click the By Target button. The Assign Known Coordinates to Target


dialog opens.

For a target selected (from the Georeferencing dialog or from the 3D View), its
name and its coordinates appear in the Selected Target panel, and you cannot
modify them. The second part lets you assign known coordinates to the
selected target, by editing manually the known coordinates or by selecting a
measured point and assigning its coordinates. The third part lets you validate
the operation.

4. Do one of the following:

 Edit known coordinates by hand.

a) The Manual Edit in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not,
select it.
b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field.
c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field.
d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field.
Tools in the Registration Module 711

e) Keep the default name TopoPoint 1.


f) Or enter a new name in the Name field

1 - Name of the selected target 2 - Coordinates of the selected 3 - Values the user has to
(not editable) target (not editable) enter manually

 Select known coordinates from the survey network file.

a) Click on the Topo Point pull-down arrow.


b) Select a Topo point from the list.
712 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - A Topo point selected from the survey 2 - Coordinates and name of the selected Topo
network file point assigned to the selected target

5. Click OK. The Assign Know Coordinates to Target dialog closes.

Note: You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates (By Picking and By
Target) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.

Tip: For assigning known coordinates to a target, you can select it from the
Target List window or pick on it in the 3D View. A selected target is highlighted
in the 3D View.
Tools in the Registration Module 713

Assign Known Coordinates to a Picked Point


If there are no targets, the By Target button in the Georeferencing dialog is
dimmed. You can then assign known coordinates to a point picked in the 3D
View. You have two methods for assigning known coordinates. If there is a
control network imported, you can choose the corresponding one and use it to
assign the coordinates. Otherwise, you can key-in the coordinates in the text
field.

To Assign Known Coordinates to a Picked Point:

1. In the Georeferencing dialog, click on the By Picking button.


2. Pick a point on the displayed object(s). The Assign Known Coordinates to
Target dialog opens.

For a point picked in the 3D scene, a name by default PickPoint1 and the 3D
position of the picked point appear in the Selected Target panel. You can
rename this picked point but you cannot modify its coordinates. The second
part enables to assign know coordinates to the picked point. You can either
edit the coordinates by hand or select a measured point and assign its
coordinates. You can then validate the operation in the third part.

3. Keep the default name PickPoint 1.


4. Or enter a new name in the Name field.
5. Do one of the following:

 Edit known coordinates by hand.


714 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - Default name of the picked 2 - 3D coordinates of the 3 - Values the user has to
point picked point enter manually

a) Manual Edit in the Topo Point field is set by default. If not, select
it.
b) Enter a known coordinate in the X field.
c) Enter a known coordinate in the Y field.
d) Enter a known coordinate in the Z field.

 Select known coordinates from the survey network file.

a) Click on the Topo Point pull-down arrow.


b) Select a Topo point from the list.
Tools in the Registration Module 715

1 - A Topo point selected from the survey 2 - Coordinates and name of the selected Topo
network file point assigned to the selected target

6. Click OK. The Assign Known Coordinates to Target dialog closes.

Note:
 If you have selected a station, you can only pick points of that station.
 You can leave the picking mode by selecting Exit Picking Mode from the
pop-up menu.
 You can mix the two ways of assigning coordinates (By Picking and By
Target) in a single georeferencing operation without leaving the tool.

Tip: You can remove the Topo point labels from the 3D View by first selecting
Rendering, then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.
716 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Average Error


In the 3D View, a target (or a picked point) once assigned is displayed with the
letter P and a number, in yellow. This number is an order.

Once at least three known coordinates have been assigned to the targets
and/or to the picked points, a least-squares fitting method is then automatically
applied to calculate the best transformation.

You can select and delete an already assigned target (or picked point) by
pressing the Del. key. An assigned target once deleted is removed from the list
below and put again in the Target List window for a new assignment.

The error for each target (or for each picked point) is expressed a distance.
You able to un-check the targets (and/or the picked points) having the greatest
error; the fitting method is then applied each time you check or un-check the
targets (or picked points).

You can visualize the errors in the 3D View by clicking the Display Errors
button. The known coordinates you assigned to a target and/or to picked point
is displayed with the letter P and a number, in red.
Tools in the Registration Module 717

Apply the Georeferencing


To Apply the Georeferencing:

1. Click the Apply button.


2. Click Close. The Georeferencing dialog closes.

Note: A measured point (from the survey network file) once assigned is set as
matched.

Note: Leaving the Georeferencing tool without applying the georeferencing will
display an error message which prompts to abort or continue the operation.

Tip: You can leave the Georeferencing tool by pressing Esc or by selecting
Close from the pop-up menu.

Modify Target
The "Modify Target Matching" group, from the Registration menu, in the Menu
and Toolbars and the "Modify Target" menu, from the Target-Based
Registration group, in the Ribbon, gathers the operations the user can apply to
a target.
718 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Match a Target With


Matching a pair of targets consists of pairing one with the other. The Match
With command can be reached from the Registration menu or within e.g. the
Target-Based Registration (on page 652) tool in the Registration Details dialog
after auto-pairing targets. You can select an unmatched target (or matched
target) as input of that tool.

To Match a Target With:

1. Select a target (matched or not) from the Project Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match With
. The Match With dialog opens.
3. In the Match With dialog, expand the Project Tree if required.

In the Match With dialog, the Project Tree gathers all unmatched items except
those belonging to the selected station.
You are able to select an item of any kind (project position of an instrument,
target and topopoint) to match with the selected target.

4. Select an item from the Match With dialog. The OK button becomes
active.

 If the selected item is not yet matched, both are matched together and put
under a matched folder in the Targets Tree.
Tools in the Registration Module 719

 If the selected item is already matched, both are also matched together
but no matched folder is created in the Targets Tree. The item selected for
matching (in the Match With dialog) is put under the existing matched
folder (the one inside which resides the selected item and its pair).
 If the selected item is the projection position of an instrument station, the
status of that station switches from to ., like it is setup over a known
point.

Tip: You can also right-click on an unmatched item from the Project Tree and
select Match With from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Match With feature can be reached from the Modify
Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.

Match Targets
You can manually pair an unmatched target with another unmatched target.
Both must not reside under the same station. You can also pair two different
stations. Both need to be leveled and setup over a Known Point.

Note:
 You can undo the operation.
 Use the Ctrl (or Shift) key combined with the left-click for multi-select
items.

Select Targets for Matching from Different Stations


To Select Targets for Matching from Different Stations:

1. Select an unmatched target from a station from the Project Tree.


2. Select another unmatched target from a different station from the Project
Tree.
3. From the Registration menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match
Targets .

Targets (once paired) are put under a matched folder in the Scans Tree.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Match Targets feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.
720 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select Stations for Matching Targets


To Select Stations for Matching Targets:

1. Select at least two stations from the Scans Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Target Matching / Match
Targets .

 If the stations have been leveled and setup over a known point, a dialog
opens and prompts you to accept the removal of a target (or not). Click
Yes to accept.
Tools in the Registration Module 721

 If the stations have been only leveled, the projection positions of both are
matched together.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Match Targets feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.

Un-match a Target
Un-matching a pair of matched targets consists of dissociating one from the
other. Selecting a matched target will unmatch the pair that it belongs to.
Selecting a station will unmatch all pairs of matched targets that are inside.

To Un-match a Target:

1. In the Registration Details dialog, select a matched entity from a station in


the Station View (or from a pair in the Target View). The Match With and
Unmatch buttons become enabled.
2. Click on the Unmatch button.

Or

3. Select a matched entity from a pair.


4. From the Registration menu, select Modify Target Matching / Unmatch
Target .

Tip: You can also right-click on a matched item from the Project Tree and
select Un-match Target from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Unmatch Target feature can be reached from the
Modify Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration
tab.
722 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rename a Target
Auto-Pairing Targets: Targets and target groups are renamed. Instead of being
named TargetX and mTargetX where X is an order, they are renamed as XXX.
XXX starts at 001 and is incremented by one. Manual-Pairing Targets: Targets
keep their default name and target groups are renamed as described above.
The Rename Targets feature allows renaming of targets in case the manual
method has been used.

To Rename Targets:

1. Select a target group from the Targets Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Target Matching / Rename
Targets. Targets are renamed according to the target group name they
belong to.

Tip: You can also right-click on a target group and select Rename Targets
from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Rename feature can be reached from the Modify
Target list, in the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 723

Create a Registration Report (Target-Based)


The Registration Report (Target-Based) feature lets the user create a report
after on a registration (based on paring of targets) in an RTF (Rich Text
Format) file. The RTF specification is a method of encoding formatted text and
graphics for easy transfer between applications. Currently, users depend on
special translation software to move word-processing documents between
different MS-DOS®, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, and Power Macintosh
applications. The RTF specification provides a format for text and graphics
interchange that can be used with different output devices, operating
environments, and operating systems. This feature is only available in
Registration. You can only create one report per project. If several projects
exist under the Project Tree, the report concerns the project which contains the
active group. For a given project, if any registration has been performed, the
report is empty of information.

To Create a Registration Report (Target-Based):

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Registration Report (Target-Based)
. The Registration Report (Target-Based) dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in
the Look In field.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added
automatically.
5. Click Save.

Note: The results in the report are spilt into two categories: By Stations and By
Targets.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Registration Report (Target-Based) feature can be


reached from the Target-Based Registration group, on the Registration tab.
725

Survey Workflow Group


The Survey Workflow group lets the user use a 3D scanner that does not have
a built-in traverse routine for performing a traverse type workflow in the field,
and then complete the survey workflow in the office to register the data.

Station Setup
The Station Setup tool lets the user to register a set of 3D scans, acquired with
any instrument, following a smooth survey workflow. It also lets the user to
move a registered set of data over a survey control network.
726 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


The input of the Station Setup tool can be a station, a set of stations or a
project.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select either a leveled station or a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, Select Station Setup . The Station Setup
dialog opens.

 RealWorks displays the list of all the stations inside the project, even if a
unique station has been selected.
 In case there are some unlevelled stations inside your project, a message
appears and the whole is automatically leveled.
 If there are some Topo Points inside your project, the TopoStation System
the Topo Points belong to is the Reference Station.
 If no Topo Point exists in your project, the first leveled station from the
selection is the Reference Station.

Tip: The Station Setup tool can also be reached from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Station Setup feature can be reached from Survey
Workflow group, on the Registration tab.

Note: If you are importing Topo Points and choose these ones for a backsight
calculation, you must not put a target height. It is already calculated during the
import. If you need to adjust the target heights for Topo Points, please
calculate only with the delta.
Tools in the Registration Module 727

Select a Station
To Select a Station:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a station from the drop-down list.

Or

3. Click Previous Station or Next Station .

Note: The Previous Station and Next Station buttons are enabled only if there
are more than one station in your selection.

Note: In case an already defined station, i.e., registered station, has been
selected, the dialog shows then the current state of the network for that station.
This means that if the station had been set over a known point, the tool shows
then Station setup as method, and the value of the Instrument Height as well
as the coordinates and the name of the Known Point.

Select a Type of Setup


In this step, you need to choose a method that will be used to determine the
Position and Orientation of an instrument station.

To Select a Type of Setup:

1. Click on the Setup Type pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Station Setup (on page 728) or Resection (on page 731).
728 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Station Setup
A Station Setup is a method which enables to determine the Position and the
Orientation of an instrument station by setting the instrument over a Known
Point on the ground, and by measuring a Backsight, as illustrated below.

IH - Instrument Height KN - Known Point


TH - Target Height

To Perform a Station Setup:

1. Define the properties of an instrument station (on page 728).


2. If required, measure targets (on page 732).
3. Define backsight points (on page 748).
4. Check the result. (see "Check the Results" on page 751)

Define the Properties of an Instrument Station


In the Station Setup method, the user has to define the properties of an
instrument station by inputting the Instrument Height and setting the instrument
station over a Known Point.
Tools in the Registration Module 729

Define the Instrument Height


The Instrument Height (IH) is the distance which separates a point on the
ground to the centre of the instrument. This distance, the user needs to
measure in the field with a tape. A station coming from a project acquired with
a Trimble TX instrument has the Leveling and Instrument Height (IH)
information within. In that case, both information will appear in the Station
Setup dialog when selecting such kind of station.

To Define the Instrument Height:

 Input a distance value in the Instrument Height field. The input value is
added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry, scanner origin,
etc.) of the selected station, and RealWorks adjusts the whole network
automatically.

Tip: For more information, refer to the Modify the Instrument Height (on
page 759) topic.

Set Over a Known Point


To Set Over a Known Point:

1. Select a Topo point from a list.


2. Or key-in a point.

The Select Point to Define Station Position and Key-in Point to Define
Station Position become dimmed. The Unmatch icon becomes enabled
and the selected (or key-in) point name as well as it coordinates are displayed
in the dialog. To able to change the selected point for another point, you must
first un-match if.

At the same time, RealWorks adjusts the whole network automatically.

The selected station switches from to .

Note: For more information, refer to the Set Over a Known Point (on page
761) topic.
730 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Known Point from a List


You can select a target that does not belong to the station selected in Step 1
but to other stations, or a Topo point from a TopoStation System, and assign it
as a Known Point.

To Select a Known Point from a List

1. Click the Select Point to Define Station Position icon. The Set Station
Over a Known Point dialog opens.
2. Choose a Known Point from the dialog.
3. Click OK. The Set Station Over a Known Point dialog closes

Create a Known Point


This is the case where there is no target and no Topo point within your project.
You can then create one by key-in its coordinates.

To Create a Known Point:

1. Click the Key-in Point to Define Station Position icon. The Create New
Topopoint dialog opens.
2. In the Topo Point Name field, input a name or keep the default one.
3. In the Coordinates field, input or paste 3D coordinates.
4. Click Create. The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.
Tools in the Registration Module 731

Resection
A Resection is a method which allows determining the Position and Orientation
of an instrument station by measuring at least two Backsight Points, as
illustrated below.

IH - Instrument Height TH - Target Height


KP - Known Point

To Perform a Resection:

1. Define the Properties of an Instrument Station (on page 731).


2. If required, measure targets (on page 732).
3. Define backsight points (on page 748).
4. Check the result. (see "Check the Results" on page 751)

Define the Properties of an Instrument Station


In the Resection method, the user has to define the properties of an instrument
station by only inputting the Instrument Height.
732 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Instrument Height


The Instrument Height (IH) is the distance which separates a point on the
ground to the centre of the instrument. This distance, the user needs to
measure in the field with a tape. A station coming from a project acquired with
a Trimble TX instrument has the Leveling and Instrument Height (IH)
information within. In that case, both information will appear in the Station
Setup dialog when selecting such kind of station.

To Define the Instrument Height:

 Input a distance value in the Instrument Height field. The input value is
added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry, scanner origin,
etc.) of the selected station, and RealWorks adjusts the whole network
automatically.

Tip: For more information, refer to the Modify the Instrument Height (on
page 759) topic.

Measure Targets
The Extract feature allows you to first extract points from a displayed TZF
Scan, and then fit them with a geometry of target type. There are at all four
types: Spherical Targets, Black and White Flat Targets, Point Targets and
Point Targets (Corner). This feature is grayed-out in case there is no TZF Scan
in the project. The Extract feature is grayed-out in case there is no TZF Scan
within your project.

To Extract Targets:

 In Step 3, click the Extract button. The Target Creator toolbar opens.

Note: The extract method, which appears in the Target Creator toolbar, is the
last used one.

Note: In the 3D View, the extracted points are displayed with a size in pixels.
The size will automatically switch to 3 Pixels if it is lower than this value. The
size will not change if it is equal or greater than 3 Pixels. The change, when
happened, will be kept after you close the Target Creator toolbar and leave the
tool.
Tools in the Registration Module 733

Extract Spherical Targets


To Extract a Spherical Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Spherical Target as object type. The Target Creator toolbar
appears as shown below.

3. Click on the Diameter pull-down arrow.


4. Choose one of the five predefined diameters (76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139
mm, 200 mm and 230 mm).
734 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Click) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

A Sphere fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one. Both of them
are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. At
the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named TargetX) is created
and put under the current station.

The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, the Standard Deviation value (except
when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Spherical Target
close to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 735

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-clicking to end.

A Sphere, whose diameter has been previously defined, fits the points inside
the fence. Both of them are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar opens
as shown below. At the same time, a scan of Spherical Target type (named
TargetX) is created and put under the current station.

The information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, displays the
number of points in the created scan, as well as the Standard Deviation
information (except when the extraction failed), and the fitting Diameter. If the
area contains no points; nothing occurs.

Tip: Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.

Note: Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
736 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again a new set of points.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Spherical Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Spherical
Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the Unmatched folder in the
Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target Properties (see "Modify the
Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

The properties of a scan (of Spherical Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
Tools in the Registration Module 737

Extract Black and White Flat Targets


To Extract a Black and White Flat Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Black and White Flat Target as object type. The Target Creator
toolbar looks as shown below.
738 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

A Black and White Target fits the points in the neighborhood of the picked one.
Both of them are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as
shown below. At the same time, a scan of Flat Target type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Black and White
Flat Target close to the picked point.
Tools in the Registration Module 739

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.

A Black and White Target fits the points inside the fence. Both of them are
displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown below. A
scan, of Flat Target type (named TargetX), is created and put under the current
station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target (see
"Modify the Position of a Target" on page 699).

Tip:
 Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
 Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
740 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify the Position of a Target


A manipulator composed of two axis handles and one plane handle is set at
the position of the target. To move the target along a direction, click on an axis
handle. It turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and the one along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.

To pan the target in a plane. Click on the plane handle. It turns to yellow. A
plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again to refine the fitting.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Black and White Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. The Flat Target is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in the
Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Black and White Flat Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.
Tools in the Registration Module 741

Extract Point Targets


To Extract a Point Target:

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Point Target as object type. The Target Creator toolbar looks as
shown below.

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry are displayed in the 3D View and the Fitting toolbar opens as shown
below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is created and put under
the current station.

The information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information.

Note: An error dialog opens when RealWorks cannot find a Point Target close
to the picked point.
742 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

1. If the extraction has succeeded, click the Create icon in the Fitting
toolbar.

Or

2. If the extraction has failed, fence again to refine the fitting.


3. If required, choose another diameter.
4. Click the Point Target icon.
5. And then, click the Create icon.

The created scan is displayed on the displayed TZF Scan. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.

Extract Point Targets (Corners)


To Extract a Point Target (Corner):

1. If required, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Point Target (Corner) as object type. The Target Creator toolbar
looks as shown below.
Tools in the Registration Module 743

Pick One Point


To Pick One Point:

1. Click the Auto-Extract Target (One Point) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed TZF Scan.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.

An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

An error dialog opens when a Point Target cannot be found closed to the
picked point.
744 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

We advise you to pick a point on a corner. The extraction (of a target) can fail if
you pick a point on a flat surface. If that case occurs, only a point cloud is
extracted and the Fitting toolbar which opens looks as shown below.
Tools in the Registration Module 745

Fence an Area
You need to define an area from which a target will be created. This area is to
be defined on the 2D image data in the 2D viewer.

To Fence a Zone:

1. Click the Polygonal Selection icon.


2. Pan (or zoom In or Out) the displayed TZF Scan (if needed).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.

If the target extraction succeeds; points of the created scan with a fitted
geometry and a manipulator are displayed in the 3D View. The Fitting toolbar
opens as shown below. A scan of Survey Point type (named TargetX) is
created and put under the current station.

If required, use the manipulator to modify the position of the target.

An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the number
of points in the created scan as well as the Standard Deviation information
(except when the extraction fails).

Tip:
 Instead of double-clicking, press on the Space Bar of your keyboard.
 Press Esc (or select New Fence or Close Polygon tool from the pop-up
menu) to undo the polygonal fence in progress.
746 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify the Position of a Target


A manipulator is composed of three secant axis handles. This manipulator is
set at the position of the target. In addition to the three axis handles, the user
can find three plane handles.

Use the manipulator to move the target along a direction. Click on an axis
handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can displace the target
is highlighted in yellow and those along which you cannot displace the target
are in mauve. Move the target along that direction.

Use the manipulator to pan the target in a plane. Click on a plane handle. It
turns to yellow. A plane in yellow appears. Pan the target in that plane.

Note: In the Input Data 2D Viewer, you may not see the position of the target
changed. This only occurs after you create the target in the database.
Tools in the Registration Module 747

Create the Fitted Geometry


To Create the Fitted Geometry:

 Click the Create icon in the Fitting toolbar.

The created scan is displayed in the Input Data 2D Viewer. The Fitting toolbar
closes on its own. This Survey Point is assigned as "Unmatched" and put in
the Unmatched folder in the Targets Tree. At the same time, the Modify Target
Properties (see "Modify the Properties of a Target" on page 706) dialog opens.

Properties of a scan (of Point Target type) fitted with a geometry

Note: A dialog appears if the user decides to close the Fitting tool without
creating the fitted geometry.

Modify the Properties of a Target


The properties of a target are mainly its Name and its Height which is the
distance the user has to measure from a point on the ground and the center of
the target.

To Modify the Properties of Target:

1. In the Name field, input a new name


2. In the Height field, input a distance value.
3. Click OK. The Modify Target Properties dialog closes.
748 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define Backsight Points


All the targets belonging to the station selected in the Step 1 or those extracted
in the Step 3, appear as a list in Step 4. For some, you are able to re-fit, and
for others, to change the position. But for all, you are able to modify the height,
previously defined in the Modify Target Properties dialog.

For each extracted target from the list, the distance-to-instrument information
has been computed, and displayed in the information box.

To Define a Backsight Point:

1. In Step 4, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a target from the drop-down list.
3. If required, do one of the following:

 Re-fit a target (on page 749).


 Modify the position of a target (on page 749).

4. Input the Height of a Target (on page 749).


5. Do one of the following:

 With the Station Setup method, match with a known point (on page
749).
 With the Resection method, perform the steps from 1 to 4 at least two
times and for each target, match with a known point (on page 749).
Tools in the Registration Module 749

Re-Fit a Target
To Re-Fit a Target:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow and choose either a Spherical Target or a


Black and White Target.
2. Click the Re-Fit icon. The Fitting toolbar appears.

Note: Refer to the Extract Spherical Targets (on page 692) and the Extract
Black and White Flat Targets (on page 696) section for more information.

Modify the Position of a Target


To Modify the Position of a Target:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow and choose a Flat Target.


2. Click the Show Manipulators to Modify Target Position icon.

Note: Refer to the Modify the Position of a Target (on page 699) for more
information.

Input the Height of a Target


To Input the Height of a Target:

 In the Backsight Height field, input a distance value.

Match With a Known Point


To Match to a Known Point:

1. Select a point from a list.


2. Or key-in a point.

The Select Point to Define Backsight Position and Key-in Point to Define
Backsight Position become dimmed. The Unmatch icon becomes
enabled and the selected (or key-in) point coordinates are displayed in the
dialog. To able to change the selected point for another point, you must first
un-match if.
750 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Known Point from a List


You can select a target that does not belong to the station selected in Step 1
but to other stations, or a Topo point from a TopoStation System, or the
Projected Instrument Position of a station (except the selected one), and
assign it as a Known Point.

To Select a Known Point from a List

1. Click the Select Point to Define Backsight Position icon. The Match
With dialog opens.
2. Choose a Known Point from the dialog.

3. Click OK. The Match With dialog closes

Create a Known Point


To Create a Known Point:

1. Click the Key-in Point to Define Backsight Position icon. The Create
New Topopoint dialog opens.
2. In the Topo Point Name field, input a name or keep the default one.
3. In the Coordinates field, input or paste 3D coordinates.
4. Click Create. The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.
Tools in the Registration Module 751

Check the Results


The Residual Error of a Backsight Point corresponds to the average distance
between the selected target and the control point with which the selected target
is matched with.

To Check the Results:

 In case of a Station Setup, RealWorks displays the residual error of the


chosen backsight point in Step 5.

 In case of a Resection, RealWorks displays the residual error each chosen


backsight points in Step 5.and the coordinates of the station point
(Projected Instrument Position). It is undefined after adding the first
backsight point.

The coordinates become 0;0;0 after adding the second backsight point.
752 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply the Network Adjustment


To Apply the Network Adjustment:

 In case of a Resection, RealWorks computes the coordinates of the


station point (Projected Instrument Position).

 Either in the Station Setup method or in the Resection method, RealWorks


computes the station setup errors as illustrated below.

Caution: The adjustment may fail in case some links between stations are not
enough defined.
Tools in the Registration Module 753

Network Adjustment
With this feature, all targets of the entire project are matched without user
intervention. The matching is based on target geometries in opposition to the
Named-Based Network Adjustment (see "Name-Based Network
Adjustment" on page 754) which is base target names. This feature shares
the same dialog as the Target-Based Registration (on page 652) tool.

To Adjust the Registration Network:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Adjust Network . The Target-
Based Registration dialog opens as well as the Registration Details dialog.

In the Target-Based Registration dialog, targets are automatically matched.


The Adjust button in Step 3 of the Target-Based Registration is grayed-out. In
the Registration Details dialog, the Station View is set by default. Each target is
automatically paired with other targets.

In the Targets Tree, targets matched together are put in a folder named
mTARGET and rooted under the Project node.

3. Click Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes
are applied to the database.
4. Or click Close. An information box appears and prompts user to apply the
changes in the database or not.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Adjust Network feature can be reached from the
Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
754 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Name-Based Network Adjustment


The Name-Based Network Adjustment feature first un-matches any already
matched target* and then matches all targets of the whole project by
associating them by name. This feature shares the same dialog as the Target-
Based Registration tool.

To Adjust the Registration Network Based on Target Names:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Name-Based Network Adjustment .
The Target-Based Registration dialog opens as well as the Registration
Details dialog.

Targets are automatically matched by their name. The Adjust button in Step 3
of the Target-Based Registration is grayed-out. In the Registration Details
dialog, the Station View is set by default.

3. Switch to the Target View. Targets that are paired by their name are put in
a folder named by the target name.

4. Click Apply. The Target-Based Registration dialog closes. All the changes
are applied to the database.
5. Or click Close. An information box appears and prompts user to apply the
changes in the database or not.
Tools in the Registration Module 755

Note: When you select a project for which any target can be matched by
name, you will be automatically direct to the basic Target-Based Registration
tool.

Tip: (*) You can also select a project for which no target has been initially
matched.

Note: Targets that are matched together are not renamed.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Name-Based Network Adjustment feature can be


reached from the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
756 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Instrument Leveling
The "Modify Stations" group, from the Registration menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars and the "Instrument Leveling" group, in the Ribbon, gathers all the
operations available that the user can apply to a station.
Tools in the Registration Module 757

Force Leved
A station for which the leveling parameter is missing because the instrument
had not been initially leveled can be manually set to leveled. You can change
the leveling property of a set of stations.

To Force Leveled:

1. Select an un-leveled station from the Scans Tree.


2. In the Registration menu, select Modify / Force Leveled.

In the Scans Tree, the selected item switches from to .


In the Property window, the "Instrument Leveling" state switches from "False"
to "True". The "Instrument Height" and "Projected Instrument Position" appear
with respectively 0.00 m as distance value for the first and 0,0,0 as coordinates
for the second.
758 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: You can undo the operation.

Caution: When you change the status of a station, this does not modify the
status of the TZF Scans that are inside, i-e, when you set an un-leveled station
to leveled, the set of TZF Scans that are within remains un-leveled.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Force Leveled feature can be reached from the
Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 759

Modify the Instrument Height


To Modify the Instrument Height:

1. Select a leveled station from the Scans Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Modify Instrument
Height. The Modify Station Height dialog opens.
3. Enter a distance value in the Station Height field.
4. Click Apply. The Modify Station Height dialog closes.

In the Property window, the current value of the "Instrument Height" line
changes. In the example below, the keyed-in value 1.50 m is displayed instead
of 0.
760 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The new set value is added to the Z coordinate of all items (point, geometry,
scanner origin, etc.) of the selected station.
If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with targets
of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that a Network
Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust corresponding stations.

Tip: You can also select and right-click on a leveled station in the Project Tree
and select Modify Instrument Height from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo the operation.

The Instrument Height is always related to a station. In case there are several
TZF Scans within a selected station, you are able to select a unique TZF Scan
and set the Instrument Height parameter to it. This parameter is then applied to
the station the TZF Scan belongs to. When you switch from one station to
another station, the value you set in the dialog for the first station is not kept, it
is reset to zero for the second station.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Modify Instrument Height feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 761

Set Over a Known Point


Setting-up a station over a Known Point consists of associating both together.
A Known Point can be a fitted target (sphere or flat target), a Survey Point or a
Topo Point. It must belong to a different station than the selected one.

To Setup Over a Known Point:

1. Select a leveled station from the Scans Tree.


2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Set Over Known
Point. The Set Over Known Point dialog opens.
3. Expand the Project Tree if required.

1 - A leveled station* 2 - Registration items

4. In the Set Over Known Point dialog, the Project Tree gathers all
registration items except those belonging to the selected station.
5. Select an item. The OK button becomes enabled.
6. Click OK. The Set Over Known Point dialog closes.

In the Scans Tree, the station item switches from * to .


In the Property window, the "Over a Known Point" line appears. The selected
item's name appears in that line. The "Projected Instrument Position" and
"Instrument Origin" lines are updated respectively with the selected item's 3D
coordinates and the selected item's 3D coordinates plus the Instrument Height
value for the Z value.
762 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

7. In the Targets Tree, a matched folder is created with the selected station
and the known point inside.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Note:
 If some targets of the selected station have been previously paired with
targets of other stations, a warning message appears and warns you that
a Network Adjustment of the project is now necessary to adjust
corresponding stations.
 (*) It is not necessary to have a leveled station as input.

Caution: The Set Over Known Point feature is dimmed if there is no target
inside the other station.
Tools in the Registration Module 763

Note: In the Ribbon, the Set Over Known Point feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
764 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Remove a Known Point


Removing a Known Point from a station consists of dissociating one from the
other; this doesn't require any parameter and no dialog appears. To change
the current Known Point of a station; first remove it and then associate a new
Known Point.

To Remove a Known Point:

1. Select a station setup over a known point from the Scans Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Remove Known Point.

In the Scans Tree, the selected station switches from to .


In the Property window, the "Over a Known Point" line disappears. Note that
the coordinates in the "Projected Instrument Position" and "Instrument Origin"
lines remain unchanged.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Remove Known Point feature can be reached from
the Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration
tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 765

Force Unleved
To Force Unleved:

1. Select a leveled (or setup over a known point) station from the Scans
Tree.
2. From the Registration menu, select Modify Station / Force Unleveled.

In the Scans Tree, the selected item switches from (or ) to .


In the Property window, the "Instrument Leveling" state switches from "True" to
"False". For a leveled station, the "Instrument Height" and "Projected
Instrument Position" information are lost. For a setup over a known point
station, the "Instrument Height", "Over a Known Point" and "Projected
Instrument Position" information are lost.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Caution: When you change the status of a station, this does not modify the
status of the TZF Scans that are inside, i.e., when you set a leveled station to
un-leveled, the set of TZF Scans that are within remains leveled.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Force Unleveled feature can be reached from the
Instrument Leveling list, in the Survey Workflow group, on the Registration tab.
766 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Points
The "Create Points" menu gathers the operations related to the creation of
points. It can be reached from the Registration menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars, and from the Survey Workflow group, in the Ribbon.
Tools in the Registration Module 767

Create a Topo Point


To Create a Topo Point:

1. Select anything from the Project Tree.


2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create Topo Point. The
Create New Topo Point dialog opens.
3. Keep the default name TopoPoint.
4. Or enter a new name in the Topo Point Name field.

 If the given name does not exist, jump to the next step.
 If the given name already exists, a dialog appears and prompts to set a
new name instead. Click Yes to use the new name.

5. Enter new coordinates in the Coordinates field.


6. Click Create. The Create New Topo Point dialog closes.

An unmatched Topo Point is created and placed under a station (named


TopoStation System) in the Scans Tree. This Topo Point is shown in the 3D
View.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Topo Point feature can be reached from the
Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.

Create Topo Points from Selected Stations


To Create Topo Points from Selected Stations:

1. Select a station (set of stations or a project) from the Project Tree.


768 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create Topo Points from
Selected Stations.

 For each station, an unmatched Topo Point is created and placed


under a station named TopoStation System in the Scans Tree.
 All created Topo Point are shown in the 3D View and are named
according to the station names.
 If the selected station is leveled and has a height, only its position
projected on the ground is used to create a Topo point.

Note: You can undo the operation.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the Topo Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Topo Points from Selected Stations feature
can be reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.

Tip: You can export the created Topo Point 3D coordinates in a RTF report by
selecting the Export Object Properties feature.
Tools in the Registration Module 769

Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points


To Create a Point Cloud from Topo Points:

1. Select a Topo Point (or a set of TopoPoints) from the Scans Tree.
2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create Point Cloud from
Topo Points.

Each Topo Point is converted to a 3D coordinate point. In the Scans Tree, all
are gathered in a scan named TopoStationCloud which is placed under a
leveled station (blue color) named FromTopoStation. This scan is displayed in
the 3D View. In the Models Tree, a new point cloud (named FromTopoStation)
is created.

Note:
 You cannot undo the operation.
 By default, the Project Cloud does not contain the newly created point
cloud.
770 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: In the Ribbon, the Create Point Cloud from Topo Points feature can be
reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.

Create 3D Points
You can convert any registration entity (matched or unmatched) to a 3D
coordinate point. A registration entity can be a Spherical Target, a Flat Target,
and a Survey Point coming from a survey network file, an imported Topo Point
or a Topo Point created within a RealWorks tool such as the Georeferencing
tool or a target obtained by geometry fitting. The idea of this feature is to
convert the barycentre of a registration entity to a 3D Point. This barycentre is
the averaged center position when selecting a set of matched targets.
Tools in the Registration Module 771

Create a 3D Point From a Target


To Create a 3D Point from a Target:

1. From the Scans Tree, select a set of matched (or unmatched) entities from
a station.
2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create 3D Points From
Targets. An information box opens.
3. Click OK. The information box closes.

A group named Target_Point (x) is created and rooted under the current
project in the Models Tree; where X is its creation order. This group gathers
the entities that are converted to 3D Points. There is a Target_Point group per
conversion. Each 3D Point has the name of the entity it is issued from.

Note: A selection is always from the Scans Tree. When you select an
unmatched entity from the Unmatched folder (or a matched entity from a pair)
in the Targets Tree, only the From Matched Targets command is available. For
both a warning message appears and warns that the selection is not valid.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Create 3D Points From Targets feature can be
reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
772 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Creating 3D Points From Matched Targets


To Convert a Pair of Matched Entities to a 3D Point:

1. From the Targets Tree, select at least a pair of matched entities.


2. In the Registration menu, select Create Points / Create 3D Points From
Matched Targets. An information box opens.
3. Click OK. The information box closes.

A group of AverageCenter_mTarget is created and rooted under the current


project in the Models Tree. This group contains the average barycenter of the
matched entities. Each 3D Point has the name of the pair (of matched entities)
it is issued from.

Note:
 There is no Undo.
 The Create 3D Points From Matched Targets command is available even
if you select a single matched entity from a pair. But a warning message
appears and warns you that the selection is not valid. No 3D Point is then
created in the Models Tree.

Tip: You can display (or hide) the 3D Point's 3D Labels by selecting
Rendering/Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu. The Display 3D Labels
feature once selected has a check mark on its side.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Create 3D Points From Matched Targets feature can
be reached from the Create Points list, in the Survey Workflow group.
Tools in the Registration Module 773

Transformations Group
A TZF format file holds registration parameters which are Vector of Translation,
Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation. On first import of TZF format files, in
the case of a new project e.g., RealWorks creates new stations and
automatically initialize them with the registration parameters of the TZF format
files. These registration parameters will no longer to be read (or written)
anymore after the initialization even if they are changed in the meantime. The
only way these parameters can be read (or written) is by performing an explicit
import (or export).

All the feature related to this import (or export) are gathered in the
Transformations group, on the Registration tab.
774 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Import Station Registration Parameters from TZF Files


The Import Station Registration Parameters from TZF Files feature, selected
from the Registration menu (in the Menu and Toolbars), and from the TZF
drop-down list in the Transformations group (in the Ribbon), allows the reading
of registration information from TZF format files and applying them to the
station they belong to, as illustrated below

Note:
 No selection is required but you need to have at least a project loaded in
RealWorks.
 If the project contains a station that is not valid (with no TZF Scan(s)
within), a dialog opens and asks you to proceed with the remaining
station(s). Choosing No will interrupt the import process.
Tools in the Registration Module 775

Export Station Registration Parameters to TZF Files


The Export Station Registration Parameters to TZF Files feature, when
selected from the Registration menu (in the Menu and Toolbars), and from the
TZF drop-down list in the Transformations group (in the Ribbon), allows the
writing of the registration information of a station into all its related TZF format
files, as illustrated below.

Note: You need to have at least a project loaded in RealWorks and you need
to perform a selection from the project to enable this feature, whatever the
selection.
776 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files


This feature lets you export the Station Registration Parameters that have
been applied to stations (empty or not) in batch (or interactive) processing
mode. The registration parameters (Vector of Translation, Axis of Rotation and
Angle of Rotation) are stored in a file of RMX format which is an ASCII format
file. One RMX format file will be created for each station. The RMX format file
has the same name as the registered station.

To Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files:

1. First apply transformation to stations (if required)*.


2. Then select either a project (or a station (or a set of stations)).
3. From the Registration menu, select Export Station Registration
Parameters to RMX Files. The Select New File Folder dialog opens.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the RMX format files
in the In field.
5. Click Open. The Select New File Folder dialog closes.

Below is an example of what a RMX format file looks like.

Note: (*) If any transformation has been applied to stations; the registration
parameters (Vector of Translation, Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation) are
equal to zero.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Station Registration Parameters to RMX Files
feature can be reached from the RMX list, in the Transformations group, on the
Registration tab.
Tools in the Registration Module 777

Register Stations With Imported RMX Files


This feature allows you to import and apply registration parameters to stations
(empty or not) in batch (or interactive) processing mode. The registration
parameters (Vector of Translation, Axis of Rotation and Angle of Rotation)* are
stored in a file of RMX format which is an ASCII format file. You need to have
one RMX format file per station. The RMX format file has the same name than
the station to register.

To Register Stations With Imported RMX Files:

1. Select a project or a station (or a set of stations).


2. From the Registration menu, select Register Stations With Imported RMX
Files. The Select New File Folder dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the RMX format files are stored in the In
field.
4. Select and open the folder by double-clicking on it**.

 The RMX format files will be processed one after the one.
 For a given RMX format file, if RealWorks finds a related station; the
registration parameters will be applied to the station. If the RMX format file
has no corresponding station; the warning dialog below appears. Click OK.
The registration parameters won't be applied.

Note:
 (*) 3D coordinates in millimeters.
 (**) Otherwise the above warning dialog appears.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Register Stations With Imported RMX Files feature
can be reached from the RMX list, in the Transformations group, on the
Registration tab.
778 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Quality Assurance Group


The Quality Assurance group provides a quick way to visually check the quality
of the registration, by creating cross sections and specific areas for analysis.
Tools in the Registration Module 779

Registration Visual Check


The Registration Visual Check feature offers the ability for different teams
working on the same project to exchange the information in order to quickly
and visually check the result of a registration by isolating roughly an area on
the result, and in details a station where the registration issue is present.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

 From the Registration menu, select Registration Visual Check .

The Registration Visual Check dialog opens and the rendering option swaps
automatically to Station Color.

Note: No selection is required. The use of this tool is based on what is


displayed in the 3D View.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Registration Visual Check feature can be reached
from the Registration Check group, on the Registration tab.

Tip: You can open the Limit Box window by clicking the Limit Box List icon in
order to view, edit and load the saved limit box. Please refer to the Managing
Limit Boxes (on page 303) section for more information.

Note: You are undo and redo certain operations when using the tool, or after
using the tool. These operations are those that affect the canonical views, the
station color and the limit box creation.
780 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Limit Box


In the first step, we have to define an area on the registration result,
symbolized by a limit box that we want to focus on. There are three different
ways to define the orientation of a limit box:

 Define a Limit Box by Defining a Horizontal Slice (on page 781).


 Define a Limit Box by Defining a Slice Perpendicular to the Screen
(on page 782).
 Import an already existing limit box thanks to the Import feature in the
Limit Box List .

Note: When you load a saved limit box, the Thickness field will be updated
with the Thickness value of the loaded limit box.
Tools in the Registration Module 781

Define a Limit Box by Defining a Horizontal Slice

The Horizontal Slice feature lets the user define a limit box whose:

 Orientation is given by a plane  whose center lies at the position of a


picked point , and whose normal is parallel to the Z axis.
 Height  is given by the value in the Thickness field.
 Width  is extended to the whole displayed scene.

Note: You need to pick one point on the displayed objects in the 3D View.

Note: You cannot enter a negative value in the Thickness field.


782 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Limit Box by Defining a Slice Perpendicular to the Screen

The Slice Perpendicular to Screen feature lets the user define a limit box
whose:

 Orientation is given by a plane  passing through two picked points 


and perpendicular to the screen,
 Height is given by the value in the Thickness field.
 Width is extended to the whole displayed scene.

Note: You need to pick two points on the displayed objects in the 3D View.

Note: You cannot enter a negative value in the Thickness field.

Edit the Properties of a Limit Box


A limit box is a three-dimensional figure with six square faces. It is used to
isolate a region on clouds and/or geometries.
Tools in the Registration Module 783

Change the Center Point of a Limit Box


To Change the Center Point of a Limit Box:

1. Click the Change Limit Box Center Point icon. The cursor changes to
show the following .
2. Pick a point on the displayed clouds and/or geometries.

 The limit box is then centered on the picked point.

Note: To leave the picking mode, you can press Esc.

Manipulate a Limit Box


There are three modes of manipulations, Modify Shape, Pan and Rotate.
784 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Resize a Limit Box


To Resize a Limit Box:

1. Click the Modify Shape icon. A manipulator with six Face Handles
appears, one on each face of the limit box, and eight Corner Handles.

2. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box in one direction:

 Pick a Face Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Face Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

3. To increase or decrease the size of the limit box, uniformly in all directions.
Tools in the Registration Module 785

 Pick a Corner Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop he Corner Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
limit box.

Tip: You can also select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also use the E shortcut key instead.

Note: Resizing a limit box will change consequently the value of its Thickness.
786 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan a Limit Box


To Pan a Limit Box:

1. Click the Pan icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Axis


Handles and three Plane Handles, appears. It has as its origin the center
of the limit box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pan in a plane.
 Pan along a direction.

Tip: You can also select Pan from the pop-up menu or use its associated
shortcut key T.

Note: It is advantageous to display the clouds and/or geometries that are


outside the limit box and/or all of the Station Positions of the project. By doing
this, you can know exactly where you are within the rest of the cloud and/or
within all of the stations.

Tip:
 You can use the following keys (, , , , Page Up, Page Down) on
your numeric keypad to move the limit box.
 You can combine the use of the above keys with the Ctrl key to speed up
the movement of the limit box.
Tools in the Registration Module 787

Pan Along a Direction


To Pan the Limit Box along a Direction:

1. Pick an Axis Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. A direction in yellow


aligned with the Axis Handle appears.
2. Drag the Axis Handle along the direction to move the limit box in that
direction.
3. Drop the Axis Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


788 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan in a Plane
To Pan the Limit Box in a Plane:

1. Pick a Plane Handle to select it. A larger yellow Plane Handle is displayed.
2. Drag the Plane Handle in any direction on the plane to move the limit box
in that direction.
3. Drop the Plane Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.


Tools in the Registration Module 789

Rotate a Limit Box


To Rotate a Limit Box:

1. Click the Rotate icon. A manipulator, which is composed of three Ring


Handles (red, light blue and green), is displayed. This manipulator has the
center of the limit box as origin.
2. Pick a Ring Handle to select it. It turns to yellow. An axis, passing through
the center of the ring and perpendicular to it, appears. This axis has the
color of the selected ring.
3. Drag the Ring Handle to rotate the limit box around the axis.
4. Drop the Ring Handle.

The cloud inside the limit box is automatically updated.

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key R.
790 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Switch from one Mode of Manipulation to Another


You can easily switch between the different manipulation modes, i.e. from
Modify Shape to Pan, and from Pan to Rotate, and so on, by just picking one of
the Handles.

Note: The cursor changes to when you hover it over a Handle.

Inspect Visually
In the first step, we have to find out the stations that are involved in the
registration issue, by doing one of the following:

 Inspect the limit box from different sides (see "View a Limit Box From
Different Sides" on page 792).
 Isolate the station(s) by coloring it (or them) (see "Change the Color
of a Station" on page 794).
 Identify the station(s) by name (see "Identify a Station" on page 795).
 Hide (or display) the station(s) that is (or are) needed (see "Display
and Hide a Station" on page 795).

Display and Hide Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box


All objects that are outside the limit box, whatever they could be, can be at any
time displayed, or hidden.
Tools in the Registration Module 791

To Display the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are displayed in the 3D
View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon is
highlighted in yellow.

To Hide the Clouds/Geometries Outside the Limit Box:

 Click the Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon.

 Clouds and/or geometries outside the limit box are hidden in the 3D View.
 The Show/Hide Clouds and Geometries Outside the Limit Box icon
becomes unselected.

Display and Hide a Limit Box


A limit box can be displayed and hidden at any time.

To Display a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with its manipulator (Size, Pan or Rotate), is displayed in the
3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon is highlighted in yellow.

To Hide a Limit Box:

 Click the Show Limit Box icon.

 The limit box, with the current manipulator, is removed from the 3D View.
 The Show Limit Box icon becomes unselected.
792 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

View a Limit Box From Different Sides


To View a Limit Box From Different Sides:

1. Click on the View pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a side among Front View , Back View , Left View , Right
View , Top View and Bottom View .

Define the Moving Step


The user has to specify a Step  to move from a section to another, along the
direction  given by the normal of the sectioning plane .
Tools in the Registration Module 793

Navigate Through the Sections


You can move the limit box previously defined with a constant Step  along
the direction  given by the normal of the sectioning plane.

 Use the Next button to move up the defined limit box from one
Step.
 Use the Previous button to move down the defined limit box from
one Step.

Tip: You can use the arrow keys, Left and Right, used as shortcut keys,
instead of Previous and Next.
794 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change the Color of a Station


When you create a station, a random color is automatically assigned to the
station. Inside an area, several stations may have colors that are very close.
This makes the comparison very difficult as each station cannot be easily
distinguished from the others with their color.

You can manually change the color of each station, in the Property window, but
this can be very tough as all of the stations are not obviously in the same place
in the Project Tree. You may need to expand or shrink the Project Tree to
change the color of a station. The Change Station Color feature lets you
change easily the color of each station directly in the 3D View.

To Change the Color of a Station:

1. Click on the Change Color drop-down arrow. A color palette appears.


2. Choose a color from the color palette.
3. In the 3D View, fill points with the chosen color.

The station whose points have been colored is colored with the same color.

Note: You can leave the coloring mode by selecting Close Pick Point from the
pop-up menu.
Tools in the Registration Module 795

Identify a Station
To identify a station in the 3D View, you can place the cursor over the
displayed point cloud, the name of the station the point cloud belongs to
appears as a tooltip.

Display and Hide a Station


The keys H and D, are commonly used as shortcuts to rapidly hide and show a
scan in the 3D View. In the Registration Check tool, these two buttons in
addition to hide or display the selected scan, also hide and display the station
the selected scan belongs to.

The keys H and D, when used outside the tool, behave differently. They only
hide or show the scan selected from the 3D View.

Isolate an Area of Interest


To Isolate an Area of Interest:

1. Click the Draw Area button.

 If the limit box has been defined with the Horizontal Slice method, the 3D
View is then locked in 2D, in the XY plane of the current frame, with the
2D grid displayed (if not previously hidden).
 If the limit box has been defined with the Slice Perpendicular to Screen
method, the 3D View is then locked in 2D, in the plane defined by the two
picked points and perpendicular to the screen, with the 2D grid (if not
previously hidden).

2. Pick two points to define a rectangular fence.


3. If required, resize the rectangular fence by doing the following:

 Drag and drop a corner.


 Drag and drop a middle node of a segment.

4. If required, cancel the current fence and start a new one by selecting
Redraw Area from the pop-up menu.
5. Click the Done button.

The current limit box is resized to the size of the defined zone of interest.

Tip: You can also select Done from the pop-up menu.
796 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Store the Area as a Limit Box


In this step, the user can record the current limit box. This record will be added
to the Limit Box List window, and can be exported to an XML file.

In addition to the name, the user can add a comment to the Limit Box Object
just like an ‘annotation’. These records can then be exported and sent, and
then reviewed just by using the limit box tool.

To Store the Area as a Limit Box:

1. Input a name in the Name field.


2. Or keep the default one.
3. If required, add a comment in the Description field.
4. Click the Store button.

 If the Limit Box window is open, the limit box is added to the limit box list.

Note: You need to input a name in the Name field to be able to store the area
as a limit box.

Note: As described previously, no selection is required to open the tool. It is


based on what is displayed in the 3D View window. The defined limit boxes will
be saved in the current open project, and anywhere else. To avoid confusion,
in the case there are several projects that are open in RealWorks, the Save
button will be grayed out. You will be not able to save the defined limit boxes.
CHAPTER 12

Tools in the Production Module

When you load a file of any format, except SIMA and TXT with topopoints, that
had never been previously saved in the RealWorks format; the Production
processing mode is set by default.

When you load a file saved in the RealWorks format and in the Production
processing mode; that file will be opened with that processing mode set. When
you are out of this processing mode and you need to be in it; you have to
choose the Production mode on the Quick Access Toolbar on the top of the
user interface:
799

Work with Line Tools


The Line Work group includes a set of tools that lets the user create, use and
manipulate polylines.

The Features group mainly includes two tools. The first one allows the
collection of a set of surveying points/chains from a scanned point cloud in a
way that simulates regular surveying methods. The second one enables to
create and edit a feature set library usable directly with the first tool or with the
new feature set capability in the Trimble Scan Explorer.

The Slice Tools group includes a series of tools with the slicing capability.
From either a point cloud or a mesh, the user can create a terrain contour map,
a set profile and cross-sections alone an alignment, or performs a slice.

Note: The user can also find the Slice Tools group from the Drawing tab on the
Surfaces tab.
800 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2D-EasyLine
This tool allows you to create polylines from point cloud's slice(s) that result(s)
from the use of the Cutting Plane tool or from planar polylines. The resulting
polylines can contain only segments or a combination of segments and circular
arcs. The 2D-EasyLine tool can be used as a standalone tool or as a sub-tool
inside the Cutting Plane tool.

Open the Tool


The behavior of the 2D-EasyLine tool depends upon the input data.

If the input data is a pure point cloud slice, Step 1 of the 2D-EasyLine dialog
looks as shown in [A]. You can use either the automatic procedure or the
manual procedure (Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog) for modeling polylines.

[A] When a Point Cloud Slice is Selected:

1. In the Cutting Plane dialog, select a point cloud slice.


2. Click on the 2D-EasyLine button.

Or

3. Select a point cloud slice from the Models Tree.


4. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select 2D-EasyLine .

 Both the number of segments and the number of arcs are equal to zero.
 The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the Display Cloud
option and the Preview button are enabled.
Tools in the Production Module 801

If the input data is a planar polyline (without points inside), Step 1 of the 2D-
EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [B]. You can only edit the planar polyline
(Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog).

[B] When a Planar Polyline is Selected:

1. Select a planar polyline (with no points inside) from the Models Tree.
2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select 2D-EasyLine . The 2D-EasyLine
dialog opens as shown below.

 The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline
are shown in text in Step 2.
 The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the polyline
computation parameter (Threshold) and the Preview button are all
dimmed.
802 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

If the input data is a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside), Step 1 of the
2D-EasyLine dialog looks as shown in [C]. You can choose between the two
procedures for modeling new polylines or use the editing tools to modify the
planar and fitted polyline.

[C] When a Planar and Fitted Polyline is Selected:

1. Select a planar and fitted polyline (with points inside) from the Models
Tree.
2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select 2D-EasyLine . The 2D-EasyLine
dialog opens as shown below.

 The number of segments and the number of arcs inside the planar polyline
are shown in text in Step 2.
 The sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) as well as the polyline
computation parameter (Threshold), the Preview button and the two
displayed options (Display Cloud and Displayed Polyline) are all enabled.

Note: In the Ribbon, the 2D-EasyLine feature can be selected in the Line Work
group, on the Drawing tab.

The selection required to open the tool - planar polyline (fitted or not) or point
cloud slice - is displayed in a planar view (2D) with the 2D grid in
superimposition. This means that the planar polyline (fitted or not) or the point
cloud slice is locked in 2D; you can navigate through it (like performing a zoom,
panning or rotation). You can use the View Manager toolbar to show the 3D
sub-view and the planar view at the same time, or to switch between them. In
the planar view, you can use the pop-up menu to modify the size of the 2D grid
or to hide it.
Tools in the Production Module 803

Model Automatically Polylines


The automatic modeling procedure uses an algorithm which approximates
points of the selected cloud slice (or fitted polyline) with segments. The
Threshold parameter will be used so that points of the selected cloud (or fitted
polyline) which are inside the Threshold will be taken into account for the
automatic modeling procedure. You can change the modeling parameter and
use Preview where several attempts are required*.

To Model Automatically Polylines:

1. Enter a value in the Threshold field and press Enter.


2. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.
3. Click on the Preview button.

 If the input data is a pure slice cloud, new polylines are modeled according
to the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D View. You have
choice between the two display options (Display Cloud and Display
Polyline) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is grayed out.

The Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is dimmed

Note: The other editing tools in Step 2 in the 2D-EasyLine dialog become
enabled.
804 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If the input data is a fitted polyline, new polylines are modeled according to
the value set in Threshold and are displayed in the 3D View. You have
choice between the two display options (Display Cloud and Display
Polyline) and the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline becomes enabled.

The Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline is enabled

Note: Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline cancels the computed polyline(s) and
reloads the initial polyline.

 For both, the number of segments and the number of arcs will be updated
according to the Threshold value. (*) If the Threshold value is too high,
new polylines cannot be built. The number of segments and the number of
arcs fall to zero. The Step 1 becomes as shown below and only points are
displayed in the 3D View.

Both the Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline and the Display Polyline are dimmed
Tools in the Production Module 805

Model Manually Polylines


You can use the Polyline Drawing tool to model by hand polylines. You can
model polylines with only segments or a combination of segments and circular
arcs. If the input is a planar polyline (fitted or not), the Step 2 looks as shown in
[A]. If the input is a pure slice cloud, it is as shown in [B].

[A] [B]

Polyline Drawing

To Model Manually Polylines:

1. Click Polyline Drawing . The Drawing and Picking Parameters (in 2D


constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Pick a series of points (on displayed points or not) to draw a polyline.

 After modeling by hand a polyline, the number of segments and the


number of arcs that are inside are shown in text.
 If the input is a planar polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.
 If the input is a pure slice cloud, the other editing tools become enabled.

Note: The Create button in the Drawing toolbar is dimmed. To validate the
polyline, choose Close Tool from the toolbar or from the pop-up menu.
806 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Polylines
You can edit the modeled polyline. The edition can be done manually or thanks
to filters. If you want to use the by-hand method; choose the Polyline Drawing
tool to move or add vertices, delete a segment, etc. (see the Polyline Drawing
tool) or use the Edit Polyline tools to define which parts of the modeled (or
selected) polyline you want to keep. If you want to use the by-filter method, any
selection is required and you can apply filters like simplification, smoothing,
filling holes, etc.

1 - Polyline Drawing 5 - Filtering methods 9 - Number of segments/arcs


2 - Change Selection Mode 6 - Filtering parameter in the selected/modeled
3 - Reverse Selection 7 - Filtering option polyline(s) before edition
4 - Smooth 8 - Simply button
Tools in the Production Module 807

Select Items
We describe hereafter the different selection modes that you can use for
editing polyline(s). There are four modes in all. Before selecting items from the
displayed polyline(s), only two modes can be used: Standard Selection and
Multi Selection. Once a first selection is made, the two other modes become
enabled: Partial Deselection and Partial Reselection.

Items in the polyline(s) are mainly arcs and segments. The information box at
the top right-corner of the 3D View displays in text the number of arcs and the
number of segments in the selection. The 2D-EasyLine dialog displays the total
number of arcs and segments in the polyline(s). The numbers in the
information box will be updated automatically each time you add or subtract
items from the polyline(s).

To Select Items:

1. Select item(s).
2. Add new selected item(s) to previous one(s).

Once a first selection is made, the two other selection modes - Partial
Deselection and Partial Reselection - in Change Selection Mode become
active as well as Change Deletion Mode.

3. Subtract new selected item(s) from previous one(s).


4. Intersect new selected item(s) with previous one(s).

Clicking Reverse Selection will set unselected items as selected and those are
selected as unselected. If any polygonal fence has been drawn, clicking
Reverse Selection will then select the whole polyline in the 3D View.

Note:
 The polygonal fence should contain at least one item (segment or arc) in
its entirety so that this item can be selected.
 You can undo a selection by using the Undo command.
 Selecting New Fence from the pop-menu (or pressing Esc) will undo the
polygonal fence in progress.
 Selecting Clear Selection from the pop-menu will clear the polygonal fence
from the polyline(s).

Tip:
 Instead of double-clicking to close the polygonal fence, you can also right
click anywhere in the 3D View window and select End Fence from the
pop-up menu.
 You can select Clear Selection from the pop-up menu to cancel the
selection.
808 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Standard Selection Mode


To Select:

1. Click on the Change Selection Mode pull down arrow.


2. Choose Standard Selection Mode .
3. Draw a polygonal fence.

1 - Polygon in the Standard Selection mode 2 - Selected items (in red)

Multi-Select
To Multi-Select:

1. Click on the Change Selection Mode pull down arrow.


2. Select Multi-Selection Mode .
3. Draw a series of polygonal fence.

1 - Initial selection 2 - Polygon in the Multi 3 - Newly selected items are


Selection mode added to previous selected
items

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Ctrl (or Shift) key pressed and
pick a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
Tools in the Production Module 809

Partial Deselect
To Partial Deselect:

1. Click on the Change Selection Mode pull down arrow.


2. Select Partial Deselection Mode .
3. Draw a polygonal fence.

 If the polygonal fence contains some of the previously selected items.


These items are deselected and the others remain selected.
 If the polygonal fence contains any of the previously selected items. No
subtraction will be performed.

1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial 3 - Newly selected items are
Deselection mode removed from previous
selected items

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Alt key pressed and pick a point
to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.
810 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Partial Reselection Mode


To Partial Reselect:

1. Click on the Change Selection Mode pull down arrow.


2. Select Partial Reselection Mode .
3. Draw a polygonal fence.

 If the polygonal fence contains some of the previously selected items; then
common items remain selected and the others are unselected.
 If the polygonal fence contains any of the previously selected items. No
intersection will be performed.

1 - Initial selections (in red) 2 - Polygon in the Partial 3 - Only common items
Reselection mode between new and old selected
items are kept

Tip: In the Standard Selection Mode, hold the Ctrl + Alt keys pressed and pick
a point to define the first vertex of a polygonal fence.

Delete Items
You can now continue editing the selected/modeled polyline(s) using the
available filters. Filters can be separated into two categories. The first category
contains filters for which you do not need to set parameters. These filters are:
Delete Selection, Delete Selection Filling Holes and Smooth.
Tools in the Production Module 811

Delete Items
To Delete Items:

1. Perform a selection as described previously.


2. Click on the Change Deletion Mode pull down arrow.
3. Select Delete Selection from the drop down list.

 Segments and arcs inside the selection are deleted.


 If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.
 If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View window to display the
pop-up menu and select Delete Selection.
812 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete Items and Prevent from Hole Creation


To Delete Items and Prevent from Hole Creation:

1. Perform a selection as described previously.


2. Click on the Change Deletion Mode pull down arrow.
3. Select Delete Selection Filling Holes from the drop down list.

 Segments and arcs inside the selection are deleted and the extremities
are connected together.
 If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.
 If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.

1 - Selected items (in red) 2 - Selected items are deleted 3 - Selected items are deleted
and extremities are connected

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up
menu and select Delete Selection Filling Holes.
Tools in the Production Module 813

Apply Filters
The second category contains filters for which parameters and options should
be set. These filters are Simplification and Fill Line Breaks. The purpose of the
Simplification filter is to simplify the selected/modeled polyline(s) by segments.
The Tolerance parameter will be used in this filter so that the original points or
the polyline vertices will be inside this tolerance with respect to the final
approximated polyline(s). You can choose the Use Arcs option; the filter will
use both segments and arcs to approximate the original polyline(s). The
purpose of the Fill Lines Breaks filter is to fill gaps on the selected/modeled
polyline(s) with segments. The Gap parameter will be used in this filter so that
gaps whose size is smaller than this parameter will be filled by segments. Note
that the default unit of measurement is set to millimeters; you do not need to
enter “mm” after the value. You can change the default unit of measurement in
Preferences.

Note:
 No selection is required for both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line
Breaks filter.
 If a selection has been done, both the Simplification filter and the Fill Line
Breaks filter are applied to the selection.

Simplify the Modeled Polyline


To Simplify the Modeled Polyline:

1. Drop down the selection list and select Simplification.


2. Enter a value in the Tolerance field and press Enter.
3. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.
4. Select the Use Arcs option if needed.
5. Click on the Simplify button.

 Segments and arcs displayed in the 3D View are simplified.


 If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.
 If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.
814 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fill Line Breaks


To Fill Line Breaks:

1. Drop down the selection list and select Fill Line Breaks.
2. Enter a value in the Gap field and press Enter.
3. Or select a value using the Up (or Down ) button.
4. Click on the Fill button.

 Line breaks are filled with segment lines.


 If the input is a slice cloud, Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline remains dimmed.
 If the input is a polyline (fitted or not), Reload Initial Cloud - Polyline
becomes enabled. Click on it to reload the initial polyline.

1 - Gap size 2 - Filtering parameters 3 - Gaps filled with segment

Saving Results
After checking the modeled results, you can use the Apply button to create
them in the RealWorks. Each modeled polyline will be created as a polyline.
Note that if the original is also a polyline, then it will be replaced by the new
one.

To Save the Results:

1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.

Note: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.


Tools in the Production Module 815

Draw a Polyline
This tool allows you to create quickly a polyline drawing by successively
picking on the displayed object(s) or not. The final result is a polyline which you
can export as a 3D polyline in DXF (or DGN) format, or as a 2D polyline in DXF
format for coplanar polyline. You can use the Polyline Drawing tool in both the
3D View and the planar view (as used in the 2D-EasyLine tool). In the latter
case, the created polyline is a planar one. You can use this to carry out
inspections.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select and display an object (point cloud or geometry) in the 3D View.


2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Polyline Drawing . The Drawing
toolbar opens.

Or

3. If you are in a main tool like e.g. the 2D-EasyLine, click the Polyline
Drawing icon.

Note: No selection is necessary to access the tool. Anything that is displayed


in the 3D View, whether selected or not, can be picked.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Polyline Drawing feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.

Tip: You can change the color of a drawing polyline in the Preferences / Tools
dialog. This change should be done before entering in the tool, otherwise a
message pops up.
816 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Plane
You can use the 3D Plane tool to define a 3D plane or lock the screen view in
2D, and draw a polyline on it. The Drawing toolbar looks as shown below in the
Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode:

To Use the Screen View as a 3D Plane:

1. Click the Lock In 2D icon. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes


enabled. The scene is locked in the defined 3D plane with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. If required, click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined plane.

To Define a 3D Plane:

1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane in yellow both appear.
2. Define a 3D plane, and validate it. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes
enabled. The Lock In 2D icon is by default set. The scene is locked in the
defined 3D plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously).
The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
3. If required, click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined plane.

The Drawing toolbar looks as shown below in the Based Based mode:

To Define a 3D Plane:

1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane in yellow both appear.
2. Define a 3D plane, and validate it. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes
enabled. The Lock In 2D icon is default set. The defined 3D plane has the
following representation:
Tools in the Production Module 817

3. If required, click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined plane.

Tip: You can also select the Start 3D Plane icon from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Polyline Drawing tool, you can swap from a navigation mode
(Examiner/Walkthrough/Station-Based) to another as often as required.

Note: In the Station-Based mode, the Lock in 2D icon remains unavailable


before defining a 3D plane.

Note: If a 3D plane has been selected as input of the Polyline Drawing tool, the
3D scene will be locked on that plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not
hidden previously).
818 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Polyline
The basic tool to draw a polyline is the action of picking which can be free or
constrained. The Polyline Drawing tool, split into three modes (Polyline,
Rectangle and Circle), behaves differently according to the input. In the
Polyline mode, if the input data is of 3D type, you can only draw segments as
the Change Mode to Arc icon is dimmed. This is true unless you lock in 2D in a
3D plane that you have to define. In that case, you can draw segments and/or
a combination of segments and circular arcs. In the Rectangle and Circle
modes, the input data can only be of 2D type, or of 3D type but locked in 2D in
a 3D plane the user has to define.

Before RealWorks 9.0:

When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the
first node will exactly start at the middle of a segment (or arc), as illustrated
below.

In RealWorks 9.0:

When you start drawing a polyline, if the cursor is over another polyline, the
start node will exactly on the existing polyline at the cursor position, as
illustrated below. The behavior is the same with the end of the polyline.
Tools in the Production Module 819

Draw a Chain of Segments and/or Arcs


If you are in 3D, the Drawing tool toolbar opens as shown below and the
Picking Parameters toolbar (in the 3D constraint mode) appears. The Change
Mode to Arc, Draw Circle and Draw Rectangle icons are unavailable.

In 3D:

If you are in 2D, the Drawing toolbar looks as shown here below and the
Picking Parameters toolbar in the 2D constraint mode (H/V or Angle/Distance)
appears. The Change Mode to Arc, Draw Circle and Draw Rectangle icons are
available.

In 2D:

To Draw a Chain of Segments and/or Arcs:

1. Pick a point to start the first node of a polyline.


2. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. A segment links
these two points.
3. Click on the Change Mode pull-down arrow.
4. Choose Change Mode to Arc (C) from the drop-down list.
5. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. The newly picked
point is linked to the previous picked point by an arc.
6. Click on the Change Mode pull-down arrow.
7. Choose Change Mode to Line (l) from the drop-down list
8. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. The newly picked
point is linked to the previous picked point by a segment.

Note: The steps from 3 to 7 are only available in 2D and the pickings can be
done anywhere in the planar view, on cloud point/geometry or not.
820 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In 3D, the pickings should be done on the displayed object(s) and can be
constrained on a cloud point using the Ctrl key with the left-click. This means
that you cannot pick anywhere except on the point.

1 - Line drawing mode 2 - Arc drawing mode

Tip: You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and
conversely as often as you wish just by pressing respectively the L and C keys
on your keyboard, by clicking on the Change Mode button in the Drawing
toolbar or by selecting its related command from the pop-up menu.

9. Continue in picking in order to define the other nodes of the polyline.


10. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.
11. Select End Line to terminate the polyline. The start node is not linked to
the last selected node.
12. Select Close Line to end and close the polyline. The start node is linked to
the last selected node.
Tools in the Production Module 821

A - The first selected node B - End Line: The start node is C - Close Line: The start node
not linked to the last selected is linked to the last selected
node node

Note: Pressing Esc while you are picking points will end and validate (but not
create) the polyline in progress.

Note: Each time you validate a polyline by double-clicking or by using the End
Line and Close Line commands; you can continue to draw other polylines.
These polylines will not be connected.

Tip: You can double-click to end drawing. In this case, the drawn polyline is
always an open one.
822 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Rectangle
To be able to draw a rectangle when the input is of 3D data type, first click the
Lock in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D or define a 3D plane by using the 3D
Plane tool. Otherwise, the Draw Rectangle icon remains grayed-out. When the
scene is locked in 2D, there is a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden
previously) and the picking mode switches from 3D constraint to 2D constraint.
When you click again the Lock in 2D icon, the scene is free from the 2D lock
and from the 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D data type; you do
not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is (by definition) locked in a 2D
plane.

In 3D:

In 2D:

To Draw a Rectangle:

1. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points from the drop down list.
3. Pick a point. A node appears. This sets up the first corner of a
rectangle.
4. Move your cursor to setup the opposite corner. The node disappears and
a rectangle in dotted appears. Its shape changes as long as you move the
cursor.
5. Pick a point. A rectangle is then drawn.

Or

6. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow.


7. Choose Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points from the drop down list.
8. Pick a point. A node appears. This sets up the first end of a rectangle’
side.
Tools in the Production Module 823

9. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears and a
segment in dotted appears. Its shape changes as long as you move the
cursor.
10. Pick a point. The segment in dotted becomes continuous and another
node appears.
11. Move your cursor to setup the opposite end. The node disappears. Three
other sides in dotted and perpendicular to the first side appear. Their
length changes as long as you move the cursor.
12. Pick a point. A rectangle is then drawn.

Note: You can switch from the 2-point drawing mode to the 3-point drawing
mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on the Draw
Rectangle icon.

Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D, Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points and
Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points from the pop-up menu.
824 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Circle
To be able to draw a circle when the input is of 3D data type, first click the Lock
in 2D icon to lock the 3D View in 2D or define a 3D plane by using the 3D
Plane tool. Otherwise, the Draw Circle icon remains grayed out. When the
scene is locked in 2D, there is a 2D grid superimposed (if has not been hidden
previously) and the picking switches from the 3D constraint mode to the 2D
constraint mode. When you click again the Lock in 2D icon, the scene is free
from the 2D lock and from the 2D constraint picking mode. If the input is of 2D
data type; you do not need to lock the scene in 2D because it is by definition
locked in a 2D plane.

In 3D:

In 2D:

To Draw a Circle:

1. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow.


2. Choose Draw Circle by Defining the Center and the Radius from the
drop-down list.
3. Pick a point. It will be the center of a circle to come.
4. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point. These two points
will form the radius of a circle.

Or

5. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow.


6. Choose Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter .
7. Pick a point to start the first point of a circle’s diameter.
8. Navigate through the 3D scene and pick another point to set the second
point of the diameter.
Tools in the Production Module 825

Note: You can switch from the center-and-radius drawing mode to the
diameter drawing mode and conversely as often as you wish just by clicking on
the Draw Circle button.

Tip: You can also select Lock in 2D, Draw Circle by Defining the Center and
the Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter from the pop-up menu.

Select a Polyline
When the input contains already created polylines (or after drawing and
creating some), you can set one of them as selected by picking. Note that this
is only available in 3D (or 3D locked in 2D).

To Select a Polyline:

1. Click the Select Polyline . The cursor becomes as


2. Pick a polyline. A polyline (in green) appears over the picked polyline.

 If a 2D polyline has been picked, the scene is locked in a 2D plane that


contains the picked polyline (the Lock in 2D in the Drawing Polyline toolbar
is default set and dimmed) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden
previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint
mode.
 If a 3D polyline has been picked, the scene remains unlocked and the
Picking Parameters toolbar remains in the 3D constraint mode.

Note:
 Press Esc to leave the picking mode.
 If required, hide all objects displayed in the 3D View; this can help you in
picking a polyline.
 If you are in 3D locked in 2D, after choosing Select Polyline and before
picking a polyline, the 3D scene is free from the 2D lock and after picking
a polyline the 3D scene comes back to the 2D lock state.

Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.

Edit a Polyline
Before creating a polyline, you can delete the whole of it or modify it by
deleting, moving and inserting nodes or by continuing it. When you place the
cursor over a segment of a polyline, you may see the following symbols:
(Nodes), (Middle Nodes) and (Middle Nodes to Insert). When you place
the cursor over an arc of a polyline; only (Nodes) are available.
826 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete a Node
To Delete a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node.

1 - The selected node on the 2 - The selected node is 3 - The selected node is
polyline removed from the polyline moved

Note:
 Deleting the Start (or End) node of a chain of segments will remove the
First (or Last) segment from that chain. Deleting a Conjunction node will
delete the segment on both side of that node.
 Deleting a node at the end of a lonely segment won't delete that segment.
 You cannot delete a node of a lonely arc.
Tools in the Production Module 827

Move a Node
To Move a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears upon the node.
2. Drag the node to a position. The green square turns to yellow. If the node
belongs to a segment; that segment becomes dotted. If it belongs to an
arc, the arc shape does not change.
3. Drop the node to that position. Note that in the case of drawing in the 3D
View, the new position should be on displayed objects.

Note:
 Moving a node at the end of a segment (or arc) will only move that node.
 Moving a node at the middle of a segment will move the whole segment.
 Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the end and middle
nodes or on an arc except on the end nodes will transform that point to a
node.

Insert a Node
To Insert a Node:

1. Place the cursor anywhere on a segment (except at the end/middle nodes)


or on an arc (except at the end nodes). A hollow square appears upon the
segment at the cursor position.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Middle Node. A
new Middle Node is inserted not at the picking position but at the middle of
the segment (or arc).

1 - Two opposite ends 2 - A node is inserted between the two ends


828 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Continue a Polyline
To Continue a Polyline:

1. Place the cursor over the end (or start) node of a polyline or anywhere
over the last segment of a polyline.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Continue. A dotted line
appears between the cursor and the selected node if end (or start) node
has been chosen or between the cursor and the last node if the last
segment has been chosen.
3. Left-click anywhere in the 3D View to continue the polyline.

1 - Selected node on the polyline 2 - A segment is added after the selected vertex

Note: You cannot continue in drawing a closed polyline.

Delete a Polyline
In 3D (or 2D), after drawing a polyline, the Create, Delete Polyline and Delete
All icons become enabled. Note that the Delete Polyline icon is not present on
the toolbar but can only be reached from the pop-up menu.

In 3D:

In 2D:
Tools in the Production Module 829

Delete a Single Polyline


If there is a lonely polyline that has been drawn, this polyline will be deleted. If
there are several polylines, the last polyline will be deleted.

To Delete a Single Polyline:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View.


2. Select Delete Polyline from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can also delete a polyline while drawing it (or after validating it).

Tip: To delete a polyline that is already created, please use the Undo button. It
is not necessary to close the Polyline Drawing tool for that.

Delete all Polylines


To Delete all Polylines:

 Click the Delete All icon.

Note: You can also delete a polyline that is set as selected (using the Select
Polyline command).
830 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move a Polyline
After drawing a polyline (or setting an already created one as selected), you
can use the displacement mode to Pan or Rotate the polyline within the
displayed scene. The displacement mode which comes first is the one chosen
during the last use of that tool.

In 3D:

In 2D:

Tip: You can choose the Selection Mode from the pop-up menu.

Note: Moving an already created polyline (which is set as selected) will not
displace it but only the selection (the green polyline which appears over the
created polyline).
Tools in the Production Module 831

Pan a Polyline
After choosing Pan, a Manipulator in a plane parallel to the screen view
appears. If there is a polyline selected, (or when there are several polylines
drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s
center. You can move the selected (or last drawn) polyline along a direction at
once or anywhere in the Manipulator’s plane.

To Pan a Polyline:

1. Click the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode becomes
enabled.
2. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Choose Pan from drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It is
composed of two Axis-Handles and one Plane-Handle.
4. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the
Manipulator is - is unparalleled to the screen view.
5. Pick an Axis-Handle to select it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can move the selected polyline is highlighted in yellow. Those
(two in all) for which you cannot move the selected polyline are in mauve.
Move the selected polyline along that direction.

6. Or pick on the Plane-Handle. The two Axis-Handles remain with their own
color and the two directions along which you can move the selected
polyline are highlighted in yellow. The forbidden direction - normal to the
plane - is in mauve. Move the selected polyline in that plane.
7. If you are in 2D, you can only move the selected polyline along a direction.
You may only see one forbidden direction in mauve. If you move the
selected polyline in a plane, you may not see any forbidden direction.
832 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: You can easily switch between Rotate and Pan, and inversely, by just
picking one of the Handles. The cursor changes to when you hover it over a
Handle.
Tools in the Production Module 833

Rotate a Polyline
After choosing Rotate, a Manipulator of ring shape (in deep blue) with two
extended diagonals (in light blue and mauve) appears in a plane parallel to the
screen view. If there is a polyline selected (or when there are several polylines
drawn), the Manipulator has as origin the selected (or last drawn) polyline’s
center. You can rotate the selected (or last drawn) polyline around an axis
perpendicular to the ring’s plane.

To Rotate a Polyline:

1. Click the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode becomes
enabled.
2. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
3. Choose Rotate from the drop-down list. A Manipulator appears. It has a
Ring Handle with two extended and perpendicular diagonals.
4. If you are in 3D, rotate lightly so that the plane - inside which the two
extended diagonals are - is unparalleled to the screen view. You may see
the direction - around which you can rotate the selected polyline - in
dashes.
5. Pick the Ring Handle; it turns to yellow. The direction around which you
can rotate the selected polyline tilts to deep blue. Rotate the selected
polyline around that direction.

6. If you are in 2D, do the same procedures than step 4. You may not see
any forbidden direction.

Tip: You can also right-click to display the pop-up menu and select first
Change Move Mode and then Rotation.
834 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: You can easily switch between Pan and Rotate, and inversely, by just
picking one of the Handles. The cursor changes to when you hover it over a
Handle.

Auto-Duplicate a Polyline
In the Station-Based mode, you can duplicate a polyline in two directions
(Horizontal or Vertical). The polyline needs to be a 2D polyline or a 3D
coplanar polyline (all nodes in the same plane).

Tip: You need to have matched images within your station(s).


Tools in the Production Module 835

Duplicate a Polyline Horizontally


To Duplicate a Polyline Horizontally:

1. Draw a 3D coplanar polyline or select one.


2. If not done, switch to the Station-Based mode.

3. If required, filter the images:

c) Click the Filter Images by Camera Type button.

If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:

If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
836 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

d) Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number


of images of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are
displayed in overlap in the background, only if the Display Images
option has been chosen.

Note: Only one time of images can be selected at once.

4. Click the Auto-Duplicate Horizontally (Image-Based) icon to duplicate


the selected (or drawn) polyline horizontally.

Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the
Selection Mode and duplicate it horizontally.
Tools in the Production Module 837

Duplicate a Polyline Vertically


To Duplicate a Polyline Vertically:

1. Draw a 3D coplanar polyline, or select one.


2. If not done, switch to the Station-Based mode.

3. If required, filter the images:

e) Click the Filter Images by Camera Type button.

If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:

If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:
838 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

f) Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number


of images of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are
displayed in overlap in the background. only if the Display Images
option has been chosen.

Note: Only one time of images can be selected at once.

4. Click the Auto-Duplicate Vertically (Image-Based) icon to duplicate the


selected (or drawn) polyline vertically.

Tip: You can also select a part of an already duplicated polyline using the
Selection Mode and duplicate it vertically.
Tools in the Production Module 839

Duplicate Manually a Polyline


You can manually duplicate a polyline in any navigation mode (Examiner,
Walkthrough or Station-Based). The duplication direction is the one given by
the manipulator which appears when using the Selection Mode.

To Manually Duplicate a Polyline:

1. Select a drawn polyline using the Selection Mode *. The Change Move
Mode becomes enabled. The selected polyline color swaps from green to
yellow and a manipulator (with two handles (Green and Red)) appears
over it.
2. Select Copy Selection and Create from the pop-up menu. You cannot see
the duplicated polyline because it is upon the original polyline.
3. If required, click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
4. Choose between Pan and Rotate.
5. Move the duplicated polyline in consequence. The duplicated polyline
becomes selected (yellow) and the original polyline unselected (green).

Note:
 You can also use the following short-cut key Ctrl + D.
 (*) If your polyline has been already created in the RealWorks database,
first set it using the Select Polyline command.
840 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Polyline
Once you are satisfied with the drawn polyline(s), you can create it (or them) in
the database. The newly created object will be put in the current active folder
under the Models Tree.

To Create a Polyline:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close Tool.

Note: If you draw several unconnected polylines, they will be created into the
same polyline.

Tip:
 You can also select Create from the pop-menu or press Enter.
 You can also select Close Tool from the pop-menu or press Esc.

If the polyline is made of one chain, closed, planar and with no auto-
intersections, the property contains the area.

Create a Catenary Curve


The Catenary Drawing tool enables you to create a model of a power line (or
several in a row) from scan data.
Tools in the Production Module 841

Open the Tool


This tool, which requires no selection as input, is based on what is displayed in
the 3D View.

To Open the Open:

1. Display a point cloud in the 3D View.


2. In the Line Work group, click the Catenary Drawing icon.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Catenary Drawing feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.
842 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Points


This step consists in picking three points, no matter the order of the points.
Two of the points need to be the locations where the power line ends, typically,
where it reaches the poles.

To Pick Three Points:

1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The cursor becomes as
follows . A yellow cross appears at the picked position.
2. Pick a point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as follows
. A yellow cross appears at the picked position.
3. Pick another point on the displayed point cloud. The cursor becomes as
follows .

4. Pick the last point on the displayed point cloud. A power line is extracted
from the point cloud and the Create icon becomes enabled.

Note: Pressing Esc. while you are picking points, cancels the points.

Note: An error message appears in the case no power line can be computed
from the picked points, for instance if the points are not on a hanging catenary
shape. You are then prompted to pick new points.
Tools in the Production Module 843

Create a Power Line


To Create a Power Line:

 Click Create . A planar Polyline, named Object, is created in the


database.

Tip: You can change the width of the created polyline in Preferences / Viewer.

EasyProfile
The idea behind this new feature is to allow you to easily extract profiles along
curbs, pavements, rail lines, cuttings, natural features etc. Profiles are
determined by tracking a pre-determined section. A section can be of segment
and circle arc based shape. This tool requires a point cloud selection to be able
to be activated.
844 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


A section can be of segment and/or circle arc shape. A section shape is
defined based on a 2D-curve (profile). If the project you load contains at least
one 2D-curve (profile), you can then select it for defining a section shape. In
that case, both the Profile Matcher and Cutting Plane buttons in Step 1 of the
EasyProfile™ dialog are available. This means that you can position the
existing 2D-curve (profile) within a 3D scene or create a new one. If any 2D-
curve (profile) is available, only the Cutting Plane button is available. You
should then define one. Note that a 2D-curve (profile) - mainly composed of
several segments and curve parts, connected or not - can be one imported
from AutoCAD or can be previously generated within RealWorks.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object with cloud property from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select EasyProfile . The EasyProfile dialog
opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of three parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the EasyProfile procedure.

1 - Start Profile Matcher 2 - Start Cutting Plane 3 - The 2D-curve (profile) in


selection

Caution: You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.

Note: In the Ribbon, the EasyProfile feature can be selected in the Line Work
group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 845

Select an Existing Profile


To Select an Existing Profile:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Select an existing 2D-curve (profile) from the drop-down list.

1 - 2D-curve (profile) in white 2 - Section size (in red) 3 - Preview the tracking result
846 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set the Section Size


After defining a section shape, you need to define its size. Profile tracking will
start from the defined section shape with the specified step size value (that we
call Element) and will consist of building and propagating in both directions a
series of consecutive constrained Elements (all based on the first Element and
all ball-jointed at a pivot point). The tracking will stop of its own when the fitting
error between the current (last) Element and its points is too large or the
number of points in the immediate neighborhood is too small.

To Set the Section Size:

1. Enter a value* in the Step Size field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
3. Click Start.

Points inside each Element (shown in yellow) can be hidden by un-checking


the Display Used Points option. Those outside the Elements can be also
hidden by un-checking the Display Remaining Points option. Once the tracking
ends, profiles are then computed from the sequence of built Elements and the
start button becomes dimmed.

1 - First Elements (in red) with profile (in white) 2 - Propagation of consecutive Elements

Note: The Delete Elements and Pick to Continue buttons are not
available before clicking Start.
Tools in the Production Module 847

Caution: You cannot enter a value equal to zero or negative in the Step Size
field.

Modify Built Elements


If the last Elements are not correctly fitted, you may decide to delete them. You
do this by picking an Element in the 3D View. Those that are after the picked
Element are deleted. You can decide to jump to a position by picking a point
on the selected point cloud. Once a point has been picked, the tracking
propagation will start by its own from that point onwards. The side on which the
new sequence is appended to the previous sequence is chosen automatically.
848 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete Sections
To Delete Sections:

1. Click Delete Elements . The mouse cursor becomes as shown below.


2. Pick an Element in the 3D View window.

1 - The picked Element 2 - The picked Element and those follow are
deleted

Note:
 You can undo the deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the
pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z.
 You cannot delete the first Element; the one which contains the selected
2D-curve and is used for tracking.
Tools in the Production Module 849

Continue Tracking
To Continue Tracking:

1. Click Pick to Continue . The mouse cursor becomes as shown below.


2. If required, change the Step Size value.
3. Pick one point on the working cloud.

1 - The picked point 2 - The old sequence is 3 - Propagation of another


appended to the new sequence of Elements from the
sequence picked point

Note: You can undo continuing tracking by selecting Undo Continue from the
pop-up menu or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z.
850 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Profiles
Once you are satisfied with the tracking result, you can save it in the database.
A new folder is created and rooted under the current project. This folder
contains all computed profiles and a cloud. A profile is always named Prof-xxx
where xxx is its order. The cloud - always named EasyProf-Cloud - contains
points inside the fitted Elements used for tracking profiles.

To Create Profiles:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Profile Matcher
The idea behind this tool is to allow the user to match or position a profile (2D
curve, cross-section, polyline, etc.) at a specific point and in a given direction in
a 3D scene. We mean by “matching a profile” not just to move it from its
current position to a new one in a 3D scene but also to create this profile in the
RealWorks database. This tool is useful when you import a profile from a CAD
application, and you wish to position it within a 3D scene in RealWorks, or
when you use the EasyProfile tool or when you wish to duplicate a profile's
pattern in different locations in a 3D scene.
Tools in the Production Module 851

Open the Tool


You need to have at least one profile and a point cloud or mesh selected in
your current project to be able to activate the tool. You can activate it from the
EasyProfile tool or by selecting its related command from the menu bar.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select both a point cloud/mesh and a profile from the Project Tree.
2. In the Line Work group, click the Profile Matcher icon. The Profile
Matcher dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the matching process. The
3D View splits into two horizontal viewers. The top viewer (a 3D viewer)
displays in 3D the selected point cloud or mesh and the selected profile as well
as a 3D-plane. The selected profile is in the 3D-plane. This means that both
have the same position and orientation in the 3D scene. The lower viewer (a
3D-locked viewer) displays in 2D (locked in the XY* plane of the active
coordinate frame) the selected profile and a set of points with a 2D-grid in
superimposition. This set results from slicing the selected point cloud.

1 - The 3D View 3 - The 3D-locked view 5 - The selected point cloud


2 - A 3D plane 4 - The selected point cloud slicing
6 - The profile
852 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note:
 The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the distance constrain mode
below the 3D View.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Profile Matcher feature can be selected in the Line
Work group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 853

Define a Cutting Plane


In this step, we are going to define and use a 3D-plane to change the selected
profile’s position and orientation. The method for defining a 3D-plane (mostly
the same as in the Cutting Plane tool) is based on picking which can be free or
constrained.

1 - Set From Frame 6 - Plane Parallel to Screen View


2 - Fit 7 - Pick First Point
3 - Pick Axis from Object 8 - Display and Hide options
4 - Plane Perpendicular to Screen 9 - Restore the profile's initial position
5 - Pick Three Points on Plane

To Define a Cutting Plane:

1. Do one of the following:

 Select a frame’s axis (1).


 Fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).
 Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).
 Pick an object’s axis (1).
 Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1).
 Pick three points (1) (2).
 Set the plane parallel to the screen view.
 Define a position and set a direction:

a) Enter a direction in the Normal field.


b) Or click Pick Point. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.
c) Pick on point (free or constrained) in the 3D View.
854 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

d) Enter a position in the Point field.

2. If required and if a point cloud has been selected, un-check Display Cloud.
3. If required and if a mesh has been selected, un-check Display Mesh.
4. If required, un-check Display Plane.
5. If required, click Restore.

The Restore button remains unavailable as long as any 3D-plane has been
validated. After validating a 3D-plane, a profile of the same shape as the
selected one (the one required to activate the tool) is created. This profile is in
the validated 3D-plane. Any transformation has been applied to the selected
profile; it remains unchanged in position and direction. Clicking Restore will
undo the new 3D-plane as well as the new profile.

1 - The initial 3D plane with the selected profile 2 - The new 3D plane with new profile
inside

Note: For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
For (2), see the Picking Parameters.
Tools in the Production Module 855

Define a Profile
You can arrange the newly defined profile in the 3D-plane by rotating, panning,
scaling up and down or reversing it. The Thickness field is not unavailable
(grayed out) if a mesh has been selected in Step 1. The Thickness value
(cannot be equal to zero) is used for slicing the selected point cloud from each
side of the 3D plane.

1 - Flip profile on the plane 3 - Reset the displacement made in plane


2 - Interactive mode (in plane)

Set a Thickness
To Set a Thickness:

1. Enter a value in the Thickness field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Move the Profile


To Move the Profile:

1. Click Interactive Mode (in Plane) . The Profile Matcher information


window appears at the top right corner of the 3D-locked viewer. This
window displays the profile's current scale factor.
2. Do one of the following:

 Rotate the profile in the 3D plane.


 Pan the profile in the 3D plane.
 Scale the profile in the XY plane.
 Scale the profile up and down using the mouse wheel.

3. If required, click Reset.

Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Start
Interactive Mode or Quit Interactive Mode from the pop-up menu.
856 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate the Profile


To Rotate the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the left button pressed.


2. Rotate the profile in the 3D plane.

1 - The mouse shape in Rotate 2 - Before rotating the profile 3 - After rotating the profile
mode

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the m or M key to
activate or deactivate the Interactive Mode.
Tools in the Production Module 857

Pan the Profile


To Pan the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the middle button pressed.


2. Move the mouse in any direction to pan the profile.

1 - The mouse in Pan mode 2 - The Profile before panning 3 - The Profile after panning

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the <Arrow> keys to
pan the profile Up, Down, Right and Left.
858 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Scale the Profile


To Scale the Profile:

1. In the 3D-locked viewer, hold the left and middle buttons pressed.
2. Move the mouse forward to scale down the profile.
3. Move the mouse backward to scale up the profile.

1 - The profile before scaling down 4 - The scale factor before scaling down
2 - The profile after scaling down 5 - The scale factor after scaling down
3 - The mouse shape in Scale mode

Tip: You can also click in the 3D-locked viewer and use the + and – keys to
scale the profile Up and Down.
Tools in the Production Module 859

Reverse the Profile


To Reverse the Profile:

 Click Flip Polyline on Plane .

1 - Before reversing the profile 2 - After reversing the profile

Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D-locked viewer and select Flip Polyline on
Plane from the pop-up menu.
860 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Profile


When you are satisfied with the newly defined profile's position, orientation and
scale in the 3D scene, you can create it as a persistent object in the
RealWorks database. The object is of polyline type and has the same shape as
the selected one (the one required to activate the tool). You can create as
many profiles as you need without leaving the tool.

To Create the Profile:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Create Feature Sets


This tool allows you to collect a set of surveying points/chains from a scanned
point cloud in a way that simulates regular surveying methods. The use of this
tool consists of two parts: one is for defining (or importing) the feature code;
another is for collecting surveying points/chains and attaching them to the
selected feature code.

Open the Tool


If the loaded project contains no Feature Code Library, a default library named
LIB_1 will be created. You can rename or delete it.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Feature Set . The Feature Set
Creation dialog opens as well as the Picking Parameters toolbar.

The Feature Set Creation dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace
window and is composed of three parts. The first part is for collecting points.
The second part is to define feature code. The third and last part allows you to
save the results, close the tool and obtain access to the online help.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Feature Set feature can be selected in the Features
group, on the Drawing tab.
Tools in the Production Module 861

Feature Code Libraries


You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating
one or by importing one that originates from surveying applications. If the new
library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears and it will be
deleted. A new library is always named LIB plus X corresponding to its order of
creation.

Add a Feature Code Library


You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating
one. If the new library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears
and it will be deleted. A new library is always named
FEATURE_CODE_LIBRARY plus X corresponding to its order of creation.

To Add a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library . The Feature Code Library Editing
dialog opens.
2. Click New. A new feature code library is added.
3. Click OK.

Import a Feature Code Library


You can import a Feature Code Library that originates from surveying
applications.

To Import a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing dialog opens.
2. Click Import. The Import Feature Code Library dialog box opens.
3. Navigate through your hard disk to locate the library to be imported and
select it.
4. Click Open.
862 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rename a Feature Code Library


To Rename a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Rename. The feature code library name becomes editable.
3. Enter a new name and press Enter.
4. Click OK.

Delete a Feature Code Library


If the loaded project contains a Feature Code Library that you don't want
anymore; you can delete it. If the Feature Code Library you delete is the last in
your project, a warning message appears and a default Feature Code Library
is created.

To Delete a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Drop down the Library list and select a feature code library.
3. Click Delete. The selected feature code library is deleted.
4. Click OK.

Export a Feature Code Library


A library once filled with Feature Codes can be exported to a TXT format file so
that it can be used for other RealWorks projects.

To Export a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Export. The Export Feature Code Library opens.
3. Enter a new name in the File Name field or keep the default one.
4. Specify a location on your hard disk in which to store the library in the
Look In field.
5. Click Save.
Tools in the Production Module 863

Feature Codes
A Feature Code is a system for codifying Feature Points. A Feature Code
should reflect the Feature Points you intend to collect.

Define a Feature Code


To Define a Feature Code:

1. Click Edit Feature Code Library. The Feature Code Library Editing dialog
opens.

1 - Already defined feature codes 2 - Field for defining feature codes

2. Select a Feature Code Library from the list.


3. Or use the default one (no selection is required).
4. Click in the Feature Code panel below the PC Feature Code.
5. Define a new Feature Code.
6. Press Enter on your keyboard.
7. Click Apply.

Tip: Instead of defining Feature Codes, you can import into your project a
library which already contains a set of Feature Codes.

Delete a Feature Code


Deleting a library will similarly delete the Feature Codes (if available) that are
inside.
864 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Feature Points
A Feature Point is composed of attributes like its name (Prefix + Index), its 3D
coordinates, its Feature Code and optionally, a Description. The user can
either pick or define a Feature Point.

1 - The Prefix of a Feature 2 - The coordinates of a 3 - The order of a Feature


Point Feature Point Point

Pick a Feature Point


A Feature Point can be collected either by free (or constrained) picking a point.
In that case, the mouse cursor’s shape changes to a pencil.

To Pick a Feature Point:

1. Pick a Feature Point on the displayed scene in the 3D View. Its 3D


coordinates are displayed in the Point field.
2. If required, enter a name in the Prefix field.
3. Click on the Feature Code Library pull down arrow.
4. Select a library from the Feature Code Library list.
5. Click on the Feature Code pull down arrow.
6. Select a code from the Feature Code list.
7. Continue in collecting other Feature Points.

Note: An empty point will be not taken into account.

Edit a Feature Point


You can edit a Feature Point previously defined. Just pick on it in the 3D View.
Its features are displayed in the Prefix, Index and Point fields. You can then
modify them as you please.
Tools in the Production Module 865

Modify Feature Points


You can delete the last collected Feature Point by undoing the operation or by
removing it from your selection using the Delete Point command. You can
insert or add a Feature Point to your collection once the selection is completed.

Delete a Feature Point


To Delete a Feature Point:

1. Pick on an already picked point in the 3D View.


2. Right-click in order to display the pop-up menu.
3. Select Delete Point from the pop-up menu.

Note: Instead of selecting Delete Point from the pop-up menu, you can also
use the Del key on your keyboard.

Insert a Feature Point


You can insert a Feature Point between two Feature Points only if they are
linked by a Continuous (or Dash-Line) Segment.

To Insert a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a position between two Feature Points.


2. Click to insert a Feature Point at this position.

1 - The cursor' shape when placing it between 2 - The last collected feature point has a red
two connected feature points label
3 - The inserted feature point
866 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Add a Feature Point


To Add a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a point on the displayed object. An empty point is
not taken into account.
2. Click to add a Feature Point at this position.

1 - The last collected Feature Point has a red 2 - A Feature Point has been added at this
label position
Tools in the Production Module 867

Move a Feature Point


To Move a Feature Point:

1. Place the cursor over a Feature Point. A green square appears.


2. Drag the Feature Point from its current position. The green square
becomes red and remains over the selected Feature Point’s position.
3. And drop the Feature Point to a new position. A yellow square appears
under the cursor while moving it.

1 - The selected Feature Point current position 2 - The cursor' shape while dragging and
dropping the selected Feature Point
3 - The selected Feature Point new position
868 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a Display Mode


A Feature Point when collected may have two statuses: isolated points simply
called points or connected points called chains. If points are connected, you
can close the chain by checking the Closed Feature Set option.

1 - Close a set of feature points 2 - Field for selecting display 3 - The number of feature
mode points

To Set a Display Mode:

1. Click on the Set Display Mode pull down arrow.


2. Do one of the following:

 Select Points Only to set collected points as isolated points.


 Select Continuous Segment to connect collected points with plain line
segments.
 Select Dash-Line Segment to connect collected points with dotted line
segments.

Create a Feature Set


A Feature Set is created in the database for each collection of Feature Points
saved in the database. The user can create as many Feature Sets as required
without leaving the tool. A Feature Set has OBJECTX as name and is rooted in
the Models Tree. You can export a Feature Set to an ASCII format file.

To Create a Feature Set:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Note: You can also right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up
menu and select Close.
Tools in the Production Module 869

Edit a Feature Code Library


To Edit a Feature Code Library:

1. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Edit Library . The Feature Code


Library Editing dialog opens.
2. Do one of the following:

 Edit a library (on page 869).


 Edit a feature code (on page 871).

3. Click Apply (or OK). The Feature Code Library Editing dialog closes.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Edit Library feature can be selected from the Features
group, on the Drawing tab.

Edit a Library
You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating
one or by importing one that originates from surveying applications. If the new
library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears and it will be
deleted. A new library is always named LIB plus X corresponding to its order of
creation.

Add a Feature Code Library


You can add a new Feature Code Library in your current project by creating
one. If the new library is empty of feature codes, a warning message appears
and it will be deleted. A new library is always named
FEATURE_CODE_LIBRARY plus X corresponding to its order of creation.

To Add a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library . The Feature Code Library Editing
dialog opens.
2. Click New. A new feature code library is added.
3. Click OK.
870 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Import a Feature Code Library


You can import a Feature Code Library that originates from surveying
applications.

To Import a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing dialog opens.
2. Click Import. The Import Feature Code Library dialog box opens.
3. Navigate through your hard disk to locate the library to be imported and
select it.
4. Click Open.

Rename a Feature Code Library


To Rename a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Rename. The feature code library name becomes editable.
3. Enter a new name and press Enter.
4. Click OK.

Delete a Feature Code Library


If the loaded project contains a Feature Code Library that you don't want
anymore; you can delete it. If the Feature Code Library you delete is the last in
your project, a warning message appears and a default Feature Code Library
is created.

To Delete a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Drop down the Library list and select a feature code library.
3. Click Delete. The selected feature code library is deleted.
4. Click OK.
Tools in the Production Module 871

Export a Feature Code Library


A library once filled with Feature Codes can be exported to a TXT format file so
that it can be used for other RealWorks projects.

To Export a Feature Code Library:

1. Click the Edit Feature Code Library icon. The Feature Code Library
Editing box opens.
2. Click Export. The Export Feature Code Library opens.
3. Enter a new name in the File Name field or keep the default one.
4. Specify a location on your hard disk in which to store the library in the
Look In field.
5. Click Save.

Edit a Feature Code


A Feature Code is a system for codifying Feature Points. A Feature Code
should reflect the Feature Points you intend to collect.
872 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Feature Code


To Define a Feature Code:

1. Click Edit Feature Code Library. The Feature Code Library Editing dialog
opens.

1 - Already defined feature codes 2 - Field for defining feature codes

2. Select a Feature Code Library from the list.


3. Or use the default one (no selection is required).
4. Click in the Feature Code panel below the PC Feature Code.
5. Define a new Feature Code.
6. Press Enter on your keyboard.
7. Click Apply.

Tip: Instead of defining Feature Codes, you can import into your project a
library which already contains a set of Feature Codes.

Delete a Feature Code


Deleting a library will similarly delete the Feature Codes (if available) that are
inside.

Cutting Plane
The Cutting Plane tool enables to cut a selected entity (point cloud or mesh)
with a plane whose position and orientation need to be defined by the user.
The result of this cut is a sectioned point cloud or a polyline. This tool can be
used alone as a main tool or inside a main tool as a sub-tool. In the latter case,
it is mainly used as a visual quality checking tool and no results can be
created.
Tools in the Production Module 873

Open the Tool


To open the tool, you should first select either a point cloud or a mesh. If a
point cloud is selected, you can clean it by removing for example parasite
points or reduce it by sampling or by fencing an area. These can be done
thanks to the two following sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation). If a mesh
is selected, these two sub-tools are unavailable.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object (point cloud or mesh) from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Cutting Plane . The Cutting Plane
dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. The first part (Define Cutting Plane) contains tools for defining a
plane. The second part (Define Slice) allows you to set a thickness for the
plane defined in the previous step and to choose between Single Slice and
Multi Slice. The third part (Control) is to preview the result(s). The last step is to
save the result(s).

1 - A plane 3 - The selection required to open the tool


2 - The slider 4 - The bounding box

A planar view with a 2D grid that you can customize opens below the 3D View.
A plane perpendicular to the screen and a slider appear in the 3D View. This
plane runs across a point that corresponds to the centre of the selection
(required to open the tool). This point sets the altitude (Offset) of that plane. In
this case, it is 0 mm*. The bounding box that highlights the selection delineates
the size of that plane.
874 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3. From now, you should define a plane. First, you should set its orientation.
Then you can define its position.

Note: (*) The current unit of measurement is in Millimeter. You can change it in
the Preferences dialog.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Cutting Plane feature can be selected in the Slice
Tools group, on the Surfaces tab.

Define the Orientation of a Plane


There are four methods for precisely defining the orientation of a plane. The
first method is to select an axis (from the active frame) so that the initial plane
becomes perpendicular to it. The second method is by picking an object’s local
frame. The third method is to specify the coordinates of its normal vector. The
fourth method is to edit parameters.

There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a plane. The
first method is to pick two points. The initial plane will pass through the line
defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane. The second
method is to pick three points. The initial plane will pass through the plane
drawn by these three points. The third method is to define a plane. The initial
plane will be parallel to the defined plane.

1 - Select From Frame 3 - Pick Axis From Object 5 - Pick Three Points on Plane
2 - Fit 4 - Plane Perpendicular to 6 - Edit Parameters
Screen

Set Coordinates
To Set Coordinates:

 Enter the coordinates of a plane’s normal vector in the Normal field.


Tools in the Production Module 875

Select a Frame Axis


This method consists of selecting an axis from the active frame as Normal
direction. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to
the selected axis. Its position in the 3D scene will be kept and its Offset
(altitude) will be reset.

To Select a Frame Axis:

1. Click on the Set from Frame pull down arrow.


2. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z
Coordinate System).
3. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).

Pick an Object Local Frame


This method consists of picking an object's local frame. The initial plane will be
moved so that its Normal will be parallel to the picked local frame. Its position
in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be set by the picked point.

To Pick an Object Local Frame:

1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial cutting plane
disappears from the 3D View.
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click an object.

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
876 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Points


This method consists of picking three points. The initial plane will be moved so
that it will pass through the three picked points. Its position in the 3D scene and
its Offset (altitude) will be the barycentre of the three picked points.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click the Pick 3 Points on Plane icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed
object.

1 - Picked points 2 - The cutting plane passes through the picked


points

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.

Pick Two Points


This method consists of picking two points. The initial plane will be moved so
that it will pass through the two picked points and perpendicular to the screen.

To Pick Two Points:

1. Click the Plane Perpendicular to Screen icon.


2. Pick two points. No need to pick on the displayed object.

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
Tools in the Production Module 877

Fit With a Geometry


To Fit With a Geometry:

1. Click on the Fit pull-down arrow.


2. Choose one of the following:

 Select Fit Plane . The Fitting toolbar appears as well as an information


window at the top right corner of the 3D View.
 Select Find Best Cross Plane . The Fitting toolbar appears as well as
an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View.

Fit a Plane

1 - In (i) 4 - Plane
2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)

To Fit a Plane:

1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.
2. Click the Plane icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied
to the entire point cloud.
878 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Finding the Best Cross Plane

1 - In (i) 4 - Plane Normal


2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)

To Find the Best Cross Plane:

1. Fence a set of points with which you want to fit a plane.


2. Click the Plane Normal icon. Kept points give the projection plane’s normal
direction.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane
can be applied to the entire point cloud.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

 Chose Normal + Point to define a normal and a position.

a) Enter a direction in the Normal field.


b) Enter a point position in the Point field.

 Chose Point to Point to define two points. Points(To) - Point (From)


defines a normal and Point (From) gives a position.

a) Enter a point position in the Point (To) field.


b) Enter a point position in the Point (From) field.

3. Click OK. The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 879

Define the Position of a Plane


There are three methods for defining a plane's position. The first method is to
define this position by one point. You can either pick this point in the displayed
scene or key in its coordinates. We call this method By Offset. The second
method is to define this position by two points. This can be used, for example,
to find the center plane of two parallel walls of a building. We call this method
By Interpolation. You can either pick the points in the displayed cloud or give
their exact coordinates. Then you can use the Ratio field to define the position
of the cutting plane precisely between these two points. Ration 0 will put the
position coincident with the first point, and Ratio 1 with the second point. The
third method is to use the slider at the left side of the 3D View to move the
plane. This can be used to visually define the position of a plane and is often
used for visual checking of registration quality.

By Offset
To Define a Position By Offset:

1. Check the By Offset option.


2. Enter a point position in the Point field.
3. Or click Pick Point . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D
constraint mode.
4. Pick one point in the 3D scene.

 The cutting plane passes through that point.


 The Offset value is set to 0.00*.

Note:
 (*) In the current unit of measurement. You can change it in Preferences.
 Moving the slider Up (or Down) will increase (or decrease) the Offset
value.
880 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

By Interpolation
To Define a Position By Interpolation:

1. Check the By Interpolation option.


2. Enter a point position in the Point 1 field.
3. Or click the Pick First Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown below.
4. Pick a point in the 3D scene.

 The initial plane will pass through Point 1.


 The Ratio value is equal to 0.

5. Enter another point position in the Point 2 field.


6. Or click the Pick Second Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown below.
7. Pick another point in the 3D scene.

 The initial plane will pass through Point 2.


 The Ratio value is equal to 1.

8. Define the exact position of the plane by entering a value between 0 and 1
in the Ratio field.
Tools in the Production Module 881

Define a Slice
After defining a plane, you now need to decide whether to perform a Single
Slice or Multiple Slice cutting. In the case of a Single Slice, the cutting will be
along the defined plane. You will then choose the thickness of the slice in order
to cut the point clouds. In the case of a Multiple Slice, you also need to define
the interval between two slices. The slices will be propagated from the position
of the defined plane in two directions with the given interval. The number of
slices indicated at the bottom of the dialog is calculated in such a way that
slices will span the whole range of the point cloud along the normal direction of
the defined plane.

Define a Single Slice


To Define a Single Slice:

1. Check the Single Slice option.


2. Enter a value in the Thickness field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Define a Multiple Slice


To Define a Multiple Slice:

1. Check the Multiple Slice option.


2. Enter a value in the Thickness field.
3. Enter a value in the Interval field.
4. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Note: The Thickness value cannot exceed the Interval value. It can only be the
same.
882 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview a Single Slice


If the Single Slice option has been chosen, the Preview button remains
inactive. The top window displays the selected object (point cloud or mesh)
with the defined plane. The planar view displays in real time the cutting result.
There is by default a 2D Grid superposed on the displayed sliced cloud; you
can choose to change the grid size or to hide it by using the corresponding
items from the pop-up menu. Note that the View Manager toolbar appears at
the bottom of the 3D View. You can use the icons to change the configuration
of the two sub-views.

1 - The 3D View 3 - The point cloud


2 - The Planar View 4 - A point cloud slice

Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting result will be a polyline.
Otherwise the result will be a cloud slice.
Tools in the Production Module 883

Preview a Multiple Slice


If the Multiple Slice option has been chosen, the Preview button switches from
inactive to active and the planar view becomes empty of contents (see [A]).
Clicking Preview will display the cutting results in the 3D View and will remove
the defined plane representation from it. The active slice, the one in pink in the
3D View, is shown in the planar view (see [B]). The Control tools (see Step 3 of
the Cutting Plane dialog) become active. In the planar view, there is by default
a 2D Grid superposed on the displayed sliced cloud; you can choose to
change the grid size or to hide it by using the corresponding items in the pop-
up menu. Note that the View Manager toolbar appears at the bottom of the 3D
View. You can use the icons in this toolbar to change the configuration of the
two sub-views.

[A]

1 - 3D view 3 - Point Cloud


2 - Planar view
884 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
[B]

1 - The 3D View 3 - A set of point cloud slices


2 - The Planar view 4 - The Active point cloud slice

Note: If the selected object is a mesh, the cutting results will be polylines.
Otherwise the results will be cloud slices.

Build Polylines
To Build a Polyline from a Single Slice:

1. Click 2D-EasyLine. The 2D-EasyLine dialog opens.


2. Build a polyline from the slice.
3. Click Apply. The 2D-EasyLine dialog closes.

To Build Polylines from a Multiple Slice:

4. To select a slice, do one of the following:

 Pick a slice in the 3D View.


 Use the Control tools as follows:

 Click Display Next Slice to view the one after the active slice.
Tools in the Production Module 885

1 - Display First Slice 3 - Display Next Slice


2 - Display Last Slice 4 - Display Previous Slice

 Click Display Previous Slice to view the one before the active slice.
 Click Display First Slice to view the first slice.
 Click Display Last Slice to view the last slice.
 Key in a number and press Enter.

5. Click on the 2D-EasyLine button. The 2D-EasyLine dialog opens.


6. Build a polyline from the slice.
7. Click Apply. The 2D-EasyLine dialog closes.

Note:
 Instead of clicking Display Next Slice or (Display Previous Slice), you can
also use the Up (or Down) key on your keyboard.
 You can multi-select cloud slices (or polylines) in the 3D View using the
Ctrl + A shortcut keys, open the 2D-EasyLine tool and build polylines
based on the selected cloud slices or polylines.

 The 2D-EasyLine tool is not available in RealWorks Viewer.


886 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save the Cutting Result(s)


If you are satisfied with the cutting result(s), you can create it (or them) in the
database. When selecting Single Slice, only an object will be created. When
selecting Multiple Slice, a folder* will be created in which each slice result
(including sliced cloud and the polyline if it exists) will be created as an object.
You can create as many cutting planes as you need without leaving the Cutting
Plane tool.

To Save the Cutting Result(s):

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 Leaving the Cutting Plane tool without saving the result(s) will make
appeared a warning message.
 (*) The folder default name is Cross-Cut-Interval -XX-Th YY. XX is the
Interval value and YY the Thickness value.

Note: All objects resulting from the use of the tool has the "Unclassified" layer.

Create a Terrain Contour Map


The purpose of the Contouring tool is to create iso-contours from 2.5 point
cloud(s) or mesh(es) along the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the active
coordinate frame. The output of this tool will be a set of contours, each of
which is represented by a polyline lying on the plane situated at the
corresponding elevation.
Tools in the Production Module 887

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select an object (point cloud or mesh) from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Contouring . The Contouring dialog
opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of several parts. The first part contains two sub-tools (Segmentation and
Sampling)*. If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite
points (or reduce its size by simplifying it). The way that point cloud is rendered
changes. Its Rendering swaps to White Color. If the input is a mesh, both sub-
tools are grayed-out and Its Rendering remains unchanged. The second part
enables to define an elevation range. The third part enables to set a tolerance
for contour decimation. The fourth part is to define principal contours and the
last part lets you display and save the contour creation results.

Note:
 You can leave the Contouring tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking
anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select Close.
 (*) The results issued from the use of both sub-tools cannot be saved. The
Create command is deactivated.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Contouring feature can be selected in the Slice Tools
group, on the Surfaces tab.
888 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define an Elevation Range


A default elevation range is setup so that the High Elevation and Low Elevation
correspond to the top and bottom of the bounding box that highlights the
selected object. This elevation range is represented by a graduated vertical
bar. A Cutting Plane perpendicular to the Z (or Elevation) Axis of the active
coordinate frame runs across the Low Elevation of the default Elevation Range
and its size (only width) is given by the bounding box size (only width).

1 - High Elevation 5 - Cutting Plane


2- Low Elevation 6 - Bottom of the bounding box
3 - Bounding box 7 - Elevation Range
4 - Bounding box's width 8 - Top of the bounding box
Tools in the Production Module 889

Set the Low and High Elevation Values


To Set the Low and High Elevation Values:

1. Enter a value in the From field and press Enter.

1 - Low Elevation 3 - Icons for resetting the initial value


2 - High Elevation

2. Enter a value in the Top field and press Enter.


3. If required, get back the initial Low (or High) Elevation value by clicking the
Reload Initial Low Elevation (or Reload Initial High Elevation) icon.
890 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick the Low and High Elevations


To Pick the Low and High Elevations:

1. Click the Pick Low Elevation icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears. The Cutting Plane and the graduated vertical bar are removed
from the 3D View.
2. Pick a point on displayed object in the 3D View. It’s up to the user to pick a
point (freely or with constraint).

1 - Pick Low Elevation 3 - Reload Initial Elevation


2 - Pick High Elevation

3. Repeat the two upper steps for the High Elevation.


4. If required, get back the initial Low (or High) Elevation value by clicking the
Reload Initial Low Elevation (or Reload Initial High Elevation) icon.

Define an Interval Value


To Define an Interval Value:

1. Enter a value in the Interval field and press Enter.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
Tools in the Production Module 891

Calculate the Contours


This step enables to set a value for the Tolerance parameter, preview the
contouring result and if required hide the input data.

1 - Contour decimation tolerance 3 - Preview the contouring results


2 - The Hide / Display option

Define the Tolerance Parameter


The Tolerance value is used to decimate contours. The polyline of each
contour will be decimated in such a way that the vertices of the original polyline
will be inside the defined tolerance range.

To Define the Tolerance Parameter:

1. Enter a value in the Tolerance field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
892 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview the Contours


After defining an elevation range and the decimation tolerance, you can use
the Preview button to visualize the contouring result. At this moment, the 3D
View will be split into two sub-windows: one for visualizing the data with the
contours superposed in 3D and another for displaying each contour in a planar
view.

To Preview Contours:

 Click Preview. The results are shown in two sub-windows.

1 - Top view 4 - Contours


2 - Graduated scale 5 - Active Contour
3 - Bottom view

In the top window, each contour is displayed with a color. A graduated scale at
the left side gives the altitude information for a given color. An information box
at the right top corner displays the active (selected) contour's properties: Order
and Elevation. In bottom view, there is by default a 2D Grid superposed (if not
hidden previously) on the displayed contour. You can choose to change the 2D
Grid's size or to hide it by using the corresponding items from the pop-up
menu. An information box at the right top corner displays in addition to the
properties listed above the Fitted Polyline's size. A View Manager toolbar
appears at the bottom of the 3D View. You can use the icons in this toolbar to
change the configuration of the 2D sub-views.
Tools in the Production Module 893

Hide/Display the Input Data


If the input data (required to open the Contouring tool) is a point cloud, you can
remove its representation from the 3D View by clearing the Display Cloud
option. If the input data is a mesh, this option will become Display Mesh. You
can clear the option to hide the mesh representation.
894 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Principal Contours


You can choose and assign some of the contours as principal contours. The
remained contours are then considered as intermediate contours.

To Define the Principal Contours:

1. Check the Define Principal Contours option. The First and Skip fields
become enabled as well as the Pick Principal Contour icon. A label
appears next to each contour.

1 - The Define Principal Contours option 3 - Define the number of contours to skip
2 - Define the first principal contour by entering 4 - Pick Principal Contour
a number

2. Enter a value in the First field and press Enter.


3. Or click the Pick Principal Contour icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears.
4. Go to the top view and pick a contour - using the constraint or not.

1 - Intermediate contours have no label 2 - Each principal contour is shown with a label

5. Enter a value in the Skip field and press Enter.


Tools in the Production Module 895

Display the Contours


The first contour is the active one. It is displayed in the bottom view and
appeared in pink in the top view.

1 - Display First Contour 4 - Display Next Contour


2 - Display Previous Contour 5 - Display Last Contour
3 - Contour in selection (Active)

If the active contour is other than the first contour, you can use the Up and
Down keys of your keyboard (or the Display Previous Contour and Display
Next Contour buttons in the Step 4 of the Contouring dialog) to display the next
and the previous contour in the bottom view. Be sure to first select the top view
to be able to use the Up and Down keys. It should have a yellow frame.
Clicking the Display First Contour and Display Last Contour buttons will set the
first and last contour as active (selected). You can key in a contour’s order in
Step 4 to select it. Do not forget to validate by pressing the Enter key.

Tip: You can visualize several contours in the bottom view. Please, select the
ones you need from the top view by combining the use of Ctrl key with left-
clicking; or multi-select all using the Ctrl + A shortcut keys.
896 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Contours


Once you are satisfied with the contouring results, you can use the Create
button to create them in the database. A folder named "Cross-Map" is created
and put under the current active folder, in which all contours are put. The
Interval parameter is appended to the folder name. Each contour is named by
combining a default name string "Cross-Map" with the elevation information
and of Fitted Polyline type.

You can create as many contours as required without leaving the Contouring
tool. If you decide to leave this tool without creating any contours, a message
appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the action you are going
to perform.

To Create the Contours:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Note: You can leave the Contouring tool by pressing Esc or by right-clicking
anywhere in any window and select Close from the pop-up menu.

Note: The created contours have the "Unclassified" layer.


Tools in the Production Module 897

Manipulate a Label
Each principal contour has a label which contains the length information in text.
You can move that label to any location in the 3D View. Note that you should
first create the contours in the database and leave the Contouring tool to be
able to manipulate the labels.

To Manipulate a Label:

1. Select a Principal Control from the 3D View by picking it.


2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Move Label . A white square
appears beside the selected principal contour's label.
3. Pick on the white square. It becomes yellow.
4. Drag and drop the square from its current position to a new one. The label
will move consequently.

1 - A Principal Contour 2 - Directions for moving the label

5. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select again Show Manipulators to leave


this tool.

Note: Instead of selecting Show Manipulators from the OfficeSurvey menu,


you can also click its corresponding icon in the Tools toolbar.
898 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Profile and Cross-Sections


This tool is of particular use in civil engineering applications such as tunnel,
bridge or road inspections. It is used for generating profiles and cross-sections
from a point cloud (or from a set of point clouds) or from a mesh. A profile is a
cut along a given polyline (also called Path). Cross sections are cuts performed
perpendicularly to a given path.

Open the Tool


If a point cloud has been selected, the step consists of working on it in order to
delimit an area for the profile and cross section calculation, or to render the
point cloud cleaner without parasite points or to simplify it. For these operations
you can use two sub-tools: Sampling and Segmentation. Each of them, when
used in such condition, prevents you from saving the result, the Create
command is deactivated. If a mesh has been selected, the two upper sub-tools
are unavailable.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Profile/Cross Section . The
Profile/Cross Section dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
The second part allows you to define the 2D cutting position. The third part is
to set section parameters. The fourth part is assigned for calculating and
displaying sections. The fifth and last part is to save the created sections in the
database, close the tool and give access to the online help. The selected point
cloud is displayed in white in the 3D View, and the others are hidden.

Tip: You can also select a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline
(or set of segments) as input of the Profile/Cross Section tool.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Profile/Cross Section feature can be selected in the
Slice Tools group, on the Surfaces tab.
Tools in the Production Module 899

Select a Method
There are two methods for computing a set of cross-sections: From Segments
and From Path. If the loaded project does not contain any set of segments, the
button From Segments stays dimmed. If there are some*, the button becomes
enabled. The button From Path is always enabled even if there is no fitted
polyline in the loaded project. Before selecting a method, the No Path Selected
and No Bounds texts are displayed and the number of cross-sections is equal
to 0.

To Select a Method:

 In the Profile/Cross-Section dialog, do one of the following:

 Click the From Segments button. The Cut Positions from Segments dialog
opens.
 Click the From Path button. The Cut Positions on Path dialog opens.

Tip:
 If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and fitted polyline, the No
Bounds text remains displayed. The fitted polyline name appears in the
Path line. The number of cross-sections is calculated based on the default
value of the Interval parameter.
 If the input is a couple of point cloud (or mesh) and set of segments, the
No Path Selected and No Bounds texts remain displayed. The number of
cross-sections is equal to the number of segments.

Note: (*) The user does not need to select them.

The "From Path" Mode


In this method, cross-sections are similar and regular along a given path.
"Similar" means that all cross-sections are identical in terms of thickness and
length. "Regular" means that all are equidistant i.e. the interval between two
consecutive cross-sections is the same in all cases. A path can either be one
that is in the project or one you draw. Paths are polylines.
900 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Path
If there is at least one path (polyline) in the loaded project. You can select it for
calculating the cross-sections. In that case, the selected point cloud (or mesh)
and the current path (polyline) - the one listed in the selection box - with its
projection (if existing) in the XY* plane are displayed in the 3D View.

To Select a Path:

1. In the Cut Positions on Path dialog, click the pull down arrow.
2. Select a path (polyline) from the drop down list.

1 - Combo box for selecting an existing path 3 - Draw and Create Path in Database
2 - Radio buttons for choosing between 4 - Field for setting the Starting value on the
Horizontal Path or Use 3D Path path

If the Use Horizontal Path option has been checked, cross-sections will be
computed from the path projection in the XY plane. If the Use 3D Path option
has been checked, cross-sections will be computed perpendicularly from the
path in 3D (not projected in the XY plane). The Starting on a path is like its
origin; its default-value is equal to zero but you can set it to a value that meets
your need.
Tools in the Production Module 901

1 - A path 2 - Horizontal path (path 3 - 3D path (path not projected


projected in the XY plane) in the XY plane)

3. Enter a value in the Starting field.


4. Select a path.
5. Or draw a path.

Note:
 The selected path (polyline) has to be regular (one chain with at least
three points).
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
902 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Path
If any path (polyline) exists in your project, the combo box is grayed out. You
have to create at least one in the database. In that case, only the selected
scene (point cloud or mesh) is shown in the 3D View. The scene is constrained
in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame and movements while picking
points are restricted to navigation movements. You can rotate the complete
scene around the Z* axis, zoom (in or out) along this same axis and pan in the
XY* plane.

To Draw a Path:

1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to a
pencil.
2. Pick at least two points (free or constrained).
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Or click Close Line. The start and end picked points are linked with a
segment in order to form a closed line.
5. Click Create. The drawn line is saved and created in the database as a
polyline.

Note:
 If the 2D Grid had been hidden in a previous case, it will also be hidden
when you activate the Polyline Drawing tool.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
Tools in the Production Module 903

Start and End Positions


You need to define a portion from the selected or created path (polyline) - more
exactly a portion from its projection on the XY* plane of the active coordinate
frame (if Use Horizontal Path has been checked) or the path in 3D (if Use 3D
Path has been checked) - for which you want to calculate cross sections. You
need to define the Start and End points along the path (polyline). If the Starting
value in Step 1 is equal to zero; the Start and End points are set to the
beginning and the end of the path (polyline). If this value is different from zero;
the Start and End positions on the path are shifted of that value.

1 - Set the Start/End position 3 - Reload the initial Start/End 4 - Pick the Start/End position
by inputting a value position 5 - An estimation of the
2 - Reverse the path direction number of sections
904 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Start and End Positions


To Define the Start and End Position:

1. Enter a distance value in the Start field and press Enter.


2. Enter a distance value in the End field and press Enter.

Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when
the Use Horizontal Path option has been chosen.

1 - The Start position on the horizontal 3 - The End position on the horizontal
(projected) path (projected) path
2 - The Start position modified on the horizontal 4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the
(projected) path horizontal (projected) path

Here below are two screen-captures showing the Start and End positions when
the Use 3D Path option has been chosen.
Tools in the Production Module 905

1 - The Start position on the 3D path 3 - The End position on the 3D path
2 - The Start position modified on the 3D path 4 - Pick to modify the Start position on the 3D
path

3. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
4. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).

Pick the Start and End Positions


To Pick the Start and End Positions:

1. Click the Pick Start Position On Path icon. The mouse cursor shape
changes to a pointer.
2. Pick a point along the path (polyline). The picked point becomes the Start
point.
3. Repeat the two above steps form the End position.
4. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
5. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).

Reverse the Start and End Positions


The Start and End positions gives a direction to the path. That’s why the Start
value must be positive and smaller than the End value. You can change the
path’s direction by reversing the Start and End positions.
906 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set the Interval Parameter


Cross-sections will be calculated between the Start and End positions along
the path (polyline). The distance between two consecutive cross-sections is
defined in the Interval field. The estimated number of cross-sections is given in
the dialog box. Each time you change the Start (or End) position or the Interval
parameter, this number is updated.

To Set the Interval Parameter:

1. Enter a new value in the Interval field and press Enter.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Note: The given number of cross-sections is an estimation. If a cross-section


contains no points, it will not be created in the database even if the Create
command is selected.

Define a Width
The Interval between two consecutive cross-sections is not enough to define
them along the path (polyline). You also need to define their width by bounding
them from each side. The left and right boundaries that delineate the width of
each cross-section can be equal or different one from each other. The Width of
a cross-section on a given position on the path (polyline) is the width of the
point cloud.

To Define a Width:

1. Check the Use Fixed Width option. The Left and Right fields become
editable.
2. Enter a new value in the Left field.
3. Enter a new value in the Right field.

Apply the Cutting Positions


Once you have finished in defining the cut positions (path, positions on path,
step length and cross section width) on the selected point cloud (or mesh), you
can use the Apply button. Note that after leaving the From Path method, the
name of the selected (or drawn) path (polyline) as well as the number of cross-
sections are displayed in text in the Profile/Cross-Section dialog. If the Use
Fixed Width option has been selected, the With Bounds text appears.
Tools in the Production Module 907

The "From Segments" Method


Cross-sections that result from this method are all different and irregular along
a given path. “Different” because they are not all identical in terms of thickness
and length. “Irregular” because all are not equidistant. Such cross-sections can
be obtained with a set of segments. Segments can come from a DXF
(AutoCAD®) file that you import into your project. A path can either be one that
is in the project or one you draw. Paths are polylines.

Select a Group of Segments


To Select a Group of Segments:

1. In the Cut Positions from Segments dialog, click on the pull-down button.
2. Select a group from the drop-down list.

1 - A combo box for selecting a group of 3 - The number of segments in the selected
segments group
2 - The selected segments (in yellow) 4 - The selected segments projected in the XY
plane (in red)

The number of segments in the selected group appears below the selection
list. Each segment (in yellow) and its projection (in red) in the XY* plane of the
active coordinate frame are shown in the 3D View. Note that the segments in
yellow are in 3D while those in red are in 2D.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.


908 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Path
As in the From Path method, a path (if available in your project) allows you to
generate a profile and to set the cross sectioning direction (Start and End
positions). Note that a path is not necessary for generating cross-sections; that
why this step (in the From Segments method) is optional. A path becomes
necessary if you wish to order all cross-sections and to have the position of
each of them along the profile (distance from the Start position to the current
(active) cross-section). If no path exists in your project, you can use the Draw
and Create Path in Database tool to draw one.

Tip: You can use a path that comes from the From Path method in the From
Segments method, and conversely.
Tools in the Production Module 909

Select a Path
To Select a Path:

1. Check the Define Path option. The Select Path field becomes active.
2. Click on the Select Path pull-down arrow.
3. Select a path (polyline). The path (polyline) representation appears in the
3D View.

1 - A box for selecting an existing path 4 - The path projected in the XY plane
2 - The Define Path option 5 - The Draw and Create Path in Database
3 - A path

The selected path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are
displayed in the 3D View window.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.


910 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Path
To Define a Path:

1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Draw and create a path.

The drawn path (in yellow) and its projection in the XY* plan (in red) are
displayed in the 3D View.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Use the Width of the Segment


You can constrain the point cloud’s sectioning with the segment’s width by
using the Use Segment Width option. In [A], this option is unused - each
selected segment and its projection have differing widths. In [B], this option is
used - each segment and its projection have identical widths.

Apply the Cutting Positions


Once you have finished in defining the cut positions on the selected point cloud
(or mesh), you can use the Apply button. After leaving the From Segments
method, the number of cross-sections is displayed in text in the Profile/Cross-
Section dialog box. If a path has been selected, its name is displayed. And if
the Use Segment’s Width option has been selected, With Bounds text appears.
Tools in the Production Module 911

Compute Cross-Sections
The Compute Sections panel remains dimmed if any selection of a set of
segments (or of a fitted polyline) has been performed after

Set a Thickness
The distance between two consecutive cross-sections defined in the previous
step is not a sufficient parameter for computing the whole cross-sections. You
must also define a value which will be used as a cutting thickness along the
profile.

To Set a Thickness:

1. Enter a new value in the Thickness field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a value.

Note: The Thickness field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of
segments) selected.

Set a Tolerance
Tolerance is a parameter used for approximating the model (profile) to the
reality (cloud). The smaller this parameter is, the closer the approximation will
be. Tolerance zero means that the corresponding profile or cross-sections
pass through all sectioned points.

To Set a Tolerance:

1. Enter a new value in the Tolerance field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a value.

Note: The Tolerance field is enabled only if there is a fitted polyline (or set of
segments) selected.
912 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview the Profile and the Cross-Sections


You have to preview the results before saving in the RealWorks database or
change the parameters and perform a new preview as many times as you
please.

To Preview the Profile and the Cross-Sections:

1. Click Preview. The 3D View splits into three sub-windows.

1 - The active cross-section (in fuchsia) 3 - The profile (in red)


2 - The Step length

The top left sub-window displays the active (or selected) cross-section as a
linear graph. The sub-window in the top right corner displays the profile as a
linear graph. The third sub-window displays all generated cross-sections with
the path and the profile. The active cross-section is in fuchsia. You can
organize these three sub-windows as you please using the commands of the
toolbar at the bottom of the user interface.

When selecting the From Path method, for a given cross-section, an


information box located at the top right corner of the third sub-window lists
information such as its order, the cloud size (number of points that it contains)
if a point cloud has been selected, the polyline size, its distance from the Start
position and its 3D position not on the path but on the path projected in the XY*
plane if Use Horizontal Path has been checked and on the 3D path if Use 3D
Path has been checked. The slope angle is obtained by intercepting the path
(horizontal or 3D) with the horizontal plane. For this reason, the Z coordinate
and the Slope angle value are equal to 0 when computing cross-sections from
a projected path.
Tools in the Production Module 913

1 - The selected path 3 - Horizontal path (path projected in the XY*


2 - 3D coordinates of the current cross-section plane)
position on the horizontal (or 3D) path 4 - 3D path (path modeled from the path in
selection)

When selecting the From Segments method - in (A) no path has been
selected, the active (selected) cross-section’s position is unknown while its
order is known. In (B) a path has been selected, the same cross-section’s
position is in text in the information box and its order differs from the one in (A).

1 - The active cross-section 3 - The active cross-section order


2 - The Start position 4 - The active cross-section position
914 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2. If a point cloud has been selected, un-check the Display Cloud option to
remove the point cloud representation from the 3D View, if required.
3. If a mesh has been selected, un-check the Display Mesh option to remove
the mesh representation from the 3D View, if required.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections)


To Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections):

1. Click inside a graph to select it.


2. From the File menu, select Print from the menu bar. The Print Setup
dialog opens.
3. Set the print parameters (if required).
4. Click OK. The Print Setup dialog closes.

Tip: You can also right-click inside a graph for which you want to perform a
print-out. The pop-up menu drops down. Then select Print.
Tools in the Production Module 915

Scale the Profile and the Cross-Sections


For a given linear graph, you can zoom it in/out, pan it or change its scale.
Note that Zooming In/Out will change the linear graph scale. Changing a linear
graph scale can be done by using the mouse wheel or by selecting the Scales
command from the pop-up menu.

To Manipulate the Profile and Cross-Sections:

1. Click inside a graph to select it.


2. Do one of the following:

 Drag and drop the graph (with the left button) to a new location to pan it.
 Use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out.
 Or use the left and middle buttons.

Note: The Zoom is centered on the current mouse location.

To Scale the Profile and Cross-Sections:

1. Click inside a graph to select it.


2. Right-click and select Scales from the pop-up menu. The Plot Scale dialog
opens with the Automatic Scaling option checked by default.
3. Un-check the Automatic Scaling option to choose the manual scaling. Both
the Horizontal Scale and the Vertical Scale fields become active.
4. Click on the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale) pull-down arrow.
5. Choose a scale for the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale) list.
6. Click OK. The Plot Scale dialog closes.
916 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display the Cross-Sections


To Display Cross-Sections:

1. Use the buttons illustrated below to navigate through the cross-sections.


2. Or pick a cross-section in the 3D View.
3. Or enter a cross-section order in the field and press Enter.

1 - Display First Section 3 - Field for entering a value


2 - Display Previous Section 4 - Display Next Section
5 - Display Last Section

 If the selected cross-section is empty (see [A]), the 2D-EasyLine button


remains grayed out.
 If the selected cross-section contains points and fitted polyline (see [B]),
the 2D-EasyLine button becomes enabled.

[A] [B]

Tip: Instead of clicking Display Next Section or (Display Previous Section), you
can also use the Up (or Down) key on your keyboard.

Note: The Display Sections panel becomes enabled only if a preview of cross-
sections has been performed.
Tools in the Production Module 917

Edit the Cross-Sections


You can select and edit a cross-section using the 2D-EasyLine tool. The
selected cross-section needs to have points inside and fit with a polyline.

Create the Profile and the Cross-Sections


When saving the result in the database, a group named Cross-Sec-Thick
"Thickness value"-Tol "Tolerance value" is created and rooted under the
Models Tree. This group contains the calculated cross sections and the
selected (or drawn) path.

These results are fitted polylines and can be exported via DXF/DGN formats to
AutoCAD® and MicroStation®.

To Save the Profile and Cross-Sections:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Note:
 Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 Instead of selecting Close, click inside a sub-view and press Esc.
 Leaving the Profile/Cross-Section tool without leaving the results will make
appeared a warning message.
918 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Manipulate the Label of a Section


Each Section has a label which contains the altitude information in text. You
can move its label to any location in the 3D View. Note that you should first
create the Sections in the database. You should select a Section from the List
window to be able to see its Label.

To Manipulate the Label of a Section:

1. Select a Section from the List window.


2. Display the selected Section in the 3D View by turning the bulb to On. A
white square appears beside the selected Section.
3. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Move Manipulators .
4. Pick on the white square. It becomes yellow.
5. Drag and drop the square from its current position to a new one. The label
will move consequently.

Note: Instead of selecting Show Manipulators from the OfficeSurvey menu,


you can also click its corresponding icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Move Labels feature can be selected in the Slice
Tools group, on the Surfaces (or Drawing) tab.
919

Tools in the Surfaces Module


The Surface group includes a set of tools that enables to create and edit a
surface-type object, in opposition to a point-cloud-type object by fitting.

The Slice Tools group includes a series of tools with the slicing capability.
From either a point cloud or a mesh, the user can create a terrain contour map,
a set profile and cross-sections alone an alignment, or performs a slice.

The Volume group includes only one tool. It enables to compute a volume from
a point cloud or a mesh.

Fitting
This tool is used for fitting a geometry to a set of points. The geometry can be
a plane, a sphere or a cylinder. Creating a plane (or a cylinder) can be useful
when you need to compare a surface to a geometric model in the Surface-to-
Model Inspection (see "Inspect a Surface and a Model" on page 995) tool.
920 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select and display one point cloud (or more*) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Surface group, click the Fitting icon. The Fitting toolbar appears
as well as an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View.

 The information window displays the total number of points in the selected
point cloud (Right Number) and the number of points after defining a
region for fitting (Left Number). Before fencing, the Right Number and the
Left Number are both equal.
 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.

Note: You can fit the whole selected point cloud without fencing as Fit
Geometry to Cloud is active. If no fence has been defined, a geometry also
appears when clicking Sphere, Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane or Horizontal
Plane. In this case, the geometry fits all points of the selected point cloud and
the two numbers of points in the information window remain unchanged.

Caution: (*) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Fitting feature can be selected in the Surface group,
on the Surfaces tab.
Tools in the Production Module 921

Fence a Set of Points


To Fence a Set of Points:

1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find a set of points for which you want to
fit with a geometry.
2. Fence this set of points by drawing a polygonal fence.
3. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View.
4. Select End Fence from the pop-up menu. The In and Out icons become
active.

5. Select In to keep points inside the fence.


6. Select Out to keep points outside the fence.

 The number of points in the selected point cloud will be diminished from
the amount of points used for fitting (in the information window and in the
3D View).

Tip:
 You can also select In (or Out) from the pop-up menu or use the related
short-cut key I (or O).
 Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, press the Space
Bar.

Note:
 Pressing Esc will undo a closed fence (validated) or a fence in progress
(still to be validated).
 After fencing, the Display Un-partitioned Points becomes enabled. Clicking
on it will reload all points of the selected point cloud.

Caution: Be careful with the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting
Segmentation option in the Preferences dialog. If you decide to keep the option
unchecked, all displayed clouds remain displayed with the selected cloud after
entering the tool. You are able to fence, not only the selected cloud but also
those that are not selected (but only displayed). This may be confusing but
keep in mind that the displayed clouds are not taken into account in the fencing
result.
922 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fit With a Geometry


To Fit With a Geometry:

1. Click on the Fit Geometry to Cloud pull down arrow.


2. Choose a geometry type from the drop-down list. If Cylinder (or Plane) has
been chosen, the Fitting toolbar looks as shown below.

3. Click Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane or Horizontal Plane.

 A Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane or Horizontal Plane appears so that it


fits all points inside the fence.
 If Vertical Cylinder has been chosen, the Cylinder has a direction of axis
parallel to the Z-Axis.
 If Horizontal Plane has been chosen, the Plane has a normal direction
parallel to the Z-Axis.

4. If Sphere has been chosen, the Fitting toolbar looks as shown below. The
Diameter field becomes enabled.

5. Click on the Diameter pull down arrow.


6. Choose between Auto, 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230
mm.
7. Or give a diameter value*.
8. Click Sphere.
Tools in the Production Module 923

 If Auto has been chosen, a Sphere appears so that it fits all points inside
the fence.
 If 76.20 mm, 100 mm, 139 mm, 200 mm and 230 mm (or a user-defined
value) has been chosen, a Sphere whose diameter is constrained by the
chosen (or defined) value appears.

Tip:
 You can fit points directly inside a drawn fence without using In (or Out).
 You can use the F short-cut key instead of clicking the Fit Geometry to
Cloud icon. The geometry type used for fitting will be the current one.

Note:
 After fitting, the Display Unpartitioned Points icon becomes unavailable.
 Pressing Esc will undo the geometry fitting as well as the drawn fence.
The fitted geometry disappears from the 3D View.
 The information window at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the
RMS Deviation value after fitting with a Cylinder, Vertical Cylinder, Plane,
Horizontal Plane or Sphere.
 (*) The value will not be kept anymore if no fitting has been performed.
924 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Fitted Geometry


If you are satisfied with the fitting result; you can save it as a persistent object
in the database. The Created Fitted Geometry icon enables to create a fitted
entity under the current group behind other objects. The Create In feature also
creates a fitted entity and puts it under the model group you have to choose
from the drop-down pop-up submenu.

To Create a Fitted Geometry:

1. Click Create Fitted Geometry.

 A Fitted Object is then created and rooted in the Models Tree under the
current project and shown in the 3D View.
 The selected Point Cloud recovers its total number of points (in the
information window and in the 3D View).

2. Click Close Tool.

 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option


(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View remain hidden except the one selected.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed.

Note:
 Before leaving the Fitting tool, be sure to create the newly fitted geometry
in the database; otherwise it will be lost.
 Pressing Esc will close the Fitting tool but will not cancel the created
geometry.
 The Create In feature can only be selected from the pop-up menu. It is
available only if there is at least one group of models under the selection
(required to open the Fitting tool). Otherwise, it won't appear in the pop-up
menu.

Tip: Instead of clicking on a button in the Fitting toolbar, you can also select its
corresponding command from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 925

Create Meshes
The purpose of the Mesh Creation tool is to create a triangulated mesh from a
point cloud which, in this case, must have no geometry. Such a mesh can be
used for further editing, texture mapping, and ortho-projection image creation
or as input for the Cutting Plane tool. You can also export it to other software in
DXF (or DGN) format.

This tool uses a 2D triangulation method that applies a projection of the 3D


points onto a 2D surface. There are several ways to define this projection
surface. Note that you can select several point clouds to use this tool. In this
case, the tool will create a mesh for each selected point cloud.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Mesh Creation . The Mesh Creation
dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts. The first one enables to edit a point cloud previously selected and
is composed of the Sampling and Segmentation tools. The selected point cloud
is called Working Cloud and its total number of points is displayed in this
dialog. The second part of this dialog allows you to select a projection mode.
The third and last parts enable previewing and building meshes.

Frequently, the selected cloud contains many points, you may need to
decimate them before doing the triangulation. You may also decide to generate
a mesh on just a part of the selected cloud. To do this, you can use the
Segmentation and the Sampling sub-tools.

Note: Sampling and Segmentation can be selected either from the pop-up
menu or from the dialog.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Mesh Creation feature can be selected in the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
926 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Projection Mode


A projection surface can be a 2D or 3D plane or a 3D cylinder. There are three
methods for determining a projection plane. The Plane-based Projection
method consists of defining a 3D plane as in the Cutting Plane tool. The
Screen-View-Based Projection method consists of using the current camera
position. In that case, the projection plane (in 2D) will be the screen plane. The
Station-Based Projection method consists of using the scanning position linked
to each station. In that case, the projection plane (in 2D) is the scanning grid
surface, which, depending on the scanner, will be a plane or a spherical or
cylindrical surface.

There is only one way to define a projection cylinder. There is another method
for computing meshes from the selected point cloud. This method (called No
Projection) is based to any projection surface. Satisfactory results may be
obtained where the selected point cloud is relatively free of spikes and peaks
on its surface.

To Select a Projection Mode:

1. Drop down the Select Projection Mode.


2. Select a projection mode from the list.
3. Do any of the following:

 Define a plane-based projection (on page 927),


 Define a cylinder-based projection (on page 928),
 Define a current view-based projection (see "Define a Current View-
Based Projection" on page 930),
 Define a scanning direction-based projection (on page 930),
 Select No projection (on page 930).
Tools in the Production Module 927

Define a Plane-Based Projection


After choosing the Plane-Based Projection projection, a projection plane
perpendicular to the Y Axis* of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D
View. You can change its direction as you’re used to do in the Cutting Plane
tool or by manual-editing. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the
selection (point cloud) delimits the height of the projection plane and you
cannot exceed it.

1 - Set From Frame 3 - Pick Axis From Object 5 - Pick Three Points on Plane
2 - Fit 4 - Plane Perpendicular to 6 - Edit Parameters
Screen

To Define a Plane-Based Projection:

1. Select a frame’s axis (1).


2. Or fit an extracted set of points with a plane (1).
3. Or find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points (1).
4. Or pick an object’s axis (1).
5. Or pick a plane perpendicular to the screen (1).
6. Or pick three points (1)(2).
7. Or edit the project plane’s parameters.

a) Click Edit Parameters. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.


b) Click on the pull down arrow and choose between Normal + Point
and Point + Point.
c) If Normal + Point has been chosen, enter a direction in the Normal
field and give a position in the Point field.
d) If Point + Point has been chosen, enter a position in the Point (From)
and Point (To) fields.
e) Click OK. The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Note:
 For more information related to (1), see Step 2 of the Cutting Plane tool.
When selecting (2), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears, it’s up to you
to do a free picking or a constrained picking.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
928 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Cylinder-Based Projection


After choosing the Cylinder-Based Projection method, a projection cylinder with
an axis parallel to the Y Axis* of the active coordinate frame appears in the 3D
View. You can change the projection cylinder’s direction according to the two
other axes (X* and Z*). If the selection (point cloud) that you performed in Step
1 contains an entity, you can pick on it so that its axis becomes the new axis of
the projection cylinder. You can also pick points on your selection to define a
projection cylinder or edit one manually. In all cases, the bounding box that
highlights the selection (point cloud) delimits the height of the projection
cylinder and you cannot exceed it.

1 - Set From Frame 3 - Draw Cylinder 5 - Edit Parameters


2 - Draw Circle 4 - Pick Axis From Object

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Select a Frame Axis


This method consists of selecting an axis from the active frame as Normal
direction. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to
the selected axis. Its position in the 3D scene will be kept and its Offset
(altitude) will be reset.

To Select a Frame Axis:

1. Click on the Set from Frame pull down arrow.


2. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z
Coordinate System).
3. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).
Tools in the Production Module 929

Pick an Axis From an Object


To Pick an Axis From an Object:

1. Click Pick Axis from Object . The initial projection disappears from the
3D View.
2. Click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click one point.

Draw a Circle
To Draw a Circle:

1. Click Draw Circle . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.


2. Pick two free points or two constrained points.

Note: Picking can be done anywhere - on the selection (point cloud or mesh)
or not. These two points determine the projection cylinder’s diameter and its
direction is perpendicular to the screen view.

Draw a Cylinder
To Draw a Cylinder:

1. Click Draw Cylinder . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.


2. Pick three free points or three constrained points.

Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first
points and anywhere the third point (on selection or not). The first and second
picked points give the projection cylinder’s direction and the second and third
picked points determine its diameter.
930 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click Edit Parameters . The Cylinder Editing dialog opens.


2. Choose between 2 Points + Radius and Point + Direction + Radius.
3. If 2 Points + Radius has been selected:

a) Enter a point’s position in the Point1 field.


b) Enter another point’s position in the Point2 field.
c) Enter a value in the Radius fields.

4. If Point + Direction + Radius has been selected:

a) Enter a point position the Point field.


b) Define a direction in the Direction field.
c) Enter a value in Radius field.

5. Click OK.

Define a Current View-Based Projection


The Screen View-Based Projection method uses the current viewing direction
to define a 2D projection.

Define a Scanning Direction-Based Projection


The Station-Based Projection method uses the scanning direction to define a
2D projection.

Select No Projection
By choosing the No Projection method, the user can compute a mesh on more
complex geometries. The point cloud, selected as input, will be spatially
sampled with a 2 mm resolution for reducing the point cloud density where it is
too high, i.e. close to the scanner. The resulting mesh will be slightly
smoothed: it will not exactly pass through the input points.

Note: When the input point cloud has less than 90% of non-zero normals, the
normals are discarded from the mesh computation. When it has more than
90% of non-zero normals, the normals are used in the mesh computation.
Tools in the Production Module 931

Preview a Mesh
Before previewing a mesh, the Number of Vertices and Number of Triangles in
the dialog are both equal to zero.

To Preview a Mesh:

1. Check the Display Edges option. This will display the edges of triangles for
easier verification of the result.
2. If needed, uncheck the Display Points option. The input representation is
removed from the 3D View.
3. If needed, check the Remove Discontinuities option. This will remove the
triangles around surface discontinuities (spikes, peaks etc.).
4. Click on the Preview Meshes button. The triangulation procedure will be
performed.

 On completion, the triangular mesh will be displayed in the 3D View.


 The Number of Vertices and Number of Triangles in the final mesh are
shown in the dialog.
 You can cancel the mesh and compute a new one. The Number of
Vertices and Number of Triangles will then be updated automatically.

Note:
 The Remove Discontinuities option is not available in the No Projection
method.
 The Display Edges, Display Points and Remove Discontinuities options
can be checked either before or after previewing the meshes.

Tip: Preview Meshes can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
932 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Mesh
By clicking on the Create button, the previewed mesh will be created in the
RealWorks database. If you select several point clouds, the corresponding
meshes will be created in association with each other. You cannot create a
mesh without performing a preview. RealWorks will forbid you to do so by
inhibiting the Create button.

To Create a Mesh:

 Click Create. The Mesh Creation dialog closes on its own.

 If the input is a Cloud, a Fitted Mesh named ObjectX is created based on


the Cloud in the Models tree.
 If the input is the Project Cloud, the result, a separate object containing the
created mesh and points of the Project Cloud, is named ObjectX.

Tip: Create and Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Edit Meshes
We have explained in the previous section how to compute a mesh from a
point cloud using the Mesh Creation tool. Here, we are going to describe a set
of tools which can be used in complement of the previous one in order to
improve the quality of the mesh computation. The Mesh Editing tool allows you
to edit a mesh: you can delete its vertices, edges or triangles, smooth or refine
it, remove noisy peaks, extract a part from it in order to create a new mesh or
to texture map or invert normal.
Tools in the Production Module 933

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a mesh from the Models Tree.


2. In the OfficeSurvey menu, select Mesh Editing .

 The Mesh Editing dialog opens. It displays two numbers: "Displayed


Triangles" and "Selected Triangles".
 "Displayed Triangles" is the number of triangles inside the selected mesh,
displayed in the 3D View.
 "Selected Triangles" is the number of triangles once a selection has been
performed on the selected mesh (displayed in red in the 3D View).
 Before any selection, only the Change Selection Mode, Select Areas and
Reverse Selection icons are available, the number of "Displayed
Triangles" matches the number of triangle inside the selected mesh and
the number of "Selected Triangles" is equal to zero.

1 - Change Selection Mode 4 - The number of triangles in the selected


2 - Select Areas mesh
3 - Reverse Selection 5 - The number of triangles in the selected
area(s)
6 - Show Edges

Note: If you click on the Reverse Selection icon without performing any
selection, the whole mesh displayed in the 3D View will be selected.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Mesh Editing feature can be selected in the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
934 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select an Element
You can select each element that composes a mesh. Please, use the Select
Elements icon to pick an element, no matter the element could be. Or use
the Select Vertices, Select Edges and Select Triangles icons to respectively
pick a vertex, an edge and a triangle.

Pick an Element
To Pick an Element:

1. Check the Show Edges option (if required).


2. Drop down the Change Selection Mode list.
3. Choose Select Elements .
4. Pick an element from the selected mesh. The picked element becomes
yellow (or red).
5. Click Reverse Selection . All non-selected elements are selected and
appear in red.

Note:
 The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed (for
either a vertex or an edge) and become enabled (for a triangle).
 To add a new element to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
 The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged (for either a
vertex or an edge) and is updated (for a triangle).

Tip: The Select Element icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 935

Pick a Vertex
To Pick a Vertex:

1. Check the Show Edges option (if required).


2. Drop down the Change Selection Mode list.
3. Choose Select Vertices . A vertex symbol appears next to the cursor.
4. Pick a vertex from the selected mesh. The picked vertex becomes yellow.
5. Click Reverse Selection . All non-selected items are selected and
appear in red.

Note:
 The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.
 To add a new vertex to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
 The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.

Pick an Edge
To Pick an Edge:

1. Check the Show Edges option (if required).


2. Drop down the Change Selection Mode list.
3. Choose Select Edges . An edge symbol appears next to cursor.
4. Pick an edge from the selected mesh. The picked edge becomes yellow.
5. Click Reverse Selection . All non-selected items are selected.

Note:
 The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons remain dimmed.
 To add a new edge to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then pick.
Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
 The number of "Selected Triangles" remains unchanged.
936 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick a Triangle
To Pick a Triangle:

1. Check the Show Edges option (if required).


2. Drop down the Change Selection Mode list.
3. Choose Select Triangles . A triangle symbol appears next to the cursor.
4. Pick a triangle from the selected mesh. The picked triangle becomes red.
5. Click Reverse Selection . All non-selected items are selected and
appear in red.

Note:
 The Keep Selected and Keep Unselected icons become enabled.
 To add a new triangle to the previous selection, first press Ctrl and then
pick. Otherwise, the previous selection will be cancelled.
 The number of "Selected Triangles" is updated according to the number of
triangles that has been selected.
Tools in the Production Module 937

Fence an Area
You can select by fencing an area on the selected mesh as with the
Segmentation of a Point Cloud.

To Fence an Area:

1. Click on the Select Areas icon.


2. Pick several points to draw a polygonal fence.
3. Double-click to close the polygonal fence. The Keep Selected and Keep
Unselected icons become enabled. The "Selected Triangles" number is
updated to match the number of triangles inside the polygonal fence.
4. Click Keep Selected . Triangles inside the fence are kept. The
"Displayed Triangles" number is updated to match the "Selected
Triangles" number which becomes then zero.
5. Or Click Keep Unselected . Triangles outside the fence are kept. The
"Displayed Triangles" number is updated to match the opposite "Selected
Triangles" number which becomes then zero.
6. Click Reversion Selection to reverse the selection.

Tip:
 You can press Space Bar to close the fence instead of double-clicking.
 You can click left + Ctrl to multi-select or click left + Shift to remove from
the selection.

Note: Picking can be done out of the displayed mesh. The Keep Selected (or
Keep Unselected) command is similar to the In (or Out) operation in the
Segmentation tool.

The Reload All command becomes active after choosing Keep Selected or
Keep Unselected. You can then reload all triangles of the selected mesh.
938 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit a Mesh
There are several tools for editing the selection previously displayed. You can
delete, refine, smooth, remove peaks, extract to new mesh, invert normal on
triangles or flip selected edges. Note that the Refine, Smooth, Remove Peaks
and Invert Triangle Normal features do not require a selection on the mesh
(see [A1]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the whole mesh.
After selecting a triangle or a set of triangles, vertices and edges, Delete and
Extract to New Mesh become active in addition to the four tools named above
(see [A2]). Each of them (when selected) will be applied to the selection done
in Step 1 (vertices, edges, triangles or an area of the mesh).

[A1] [A2]

1 - Refine 4 - Invert Triangle Normals


2 - Smooth 5 - Delete
3 - Remove Peaks 6 - Extract to New Mesh

The Show Models in List Window lists polylines in the project (see [A3]). After
selecting one, the Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon
becomes enabled (see [A4]).

[A3] [A4]

1 - Show Models in List Window 2 - Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using
Polyline(s)

After selecting a vertex (or an edge), Step 2 of the Mesh Editing dialog
becomes as below in [B1] (or [B2]).

[B1] [B2]
Tools in the Production Module 939

1 - Delete 2 - Flip Selected Edges

Smooth a Mesh
The Smooth feature enables to apply a median filtering to the vertices of the
selected triangles.

To Smooth a Mesh:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Smooth.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

Refine a Mesh
The Refine feature consists of swapping or splitting edges.

To Refine a Mesh:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Refine.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

Remove Peaks from a Mesh


The Remove Peaks feature enables to remove certain noisy peaks in the
displayed mesh.

To Remove Peaks From a Mesh:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Remove Peaks.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.
940 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Reverse Triangles
To Reverse Triangles:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Invert Triangle Normal.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

Note: The Invert Triangle Normal will be applied to the whole mesh in display
whatever the selection you made.

Delete an Element from a Mesh


To Delete an Item from a Mesh:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Delete.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

 Deleting a vertex will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that
vertex in common.
 Deleting an edge will delete all triangles of the displayed mesh having that
edge in common.
 Deleting a triangle will only delete that triangle.
 In all cases, the "Displayed Triangles" number in the Mesh Editing dialog
is then updated.

Tip: Instead of selecting Delete, you can use the related short-cut key Del.

Extract to a New Mesh


The Extract to New Mesh feature enables to create a new mesh from the
selection done in Step 1. By performing this operation, you can segment a
mesh into different sub-meshes. This feature can be applied to a single triangle
(or a set of triangles).

To Extract to a New Mesh:

1. In the Mesh Editing dialog, click Extract To New Mesh.


2. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

When you extract the selection to a new mesh, the "Display Triangles" number
in the Mesh Editing dialog is updated.

Tip: Instead of selecting the Extract to New Mesh icon, you can use the related
short-cut key P.
Tools in the Production Module 941

Enhance a Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s)


The Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) feature does not
require a selection; it will be applied to the mesh displayed in the 3D View. This
allows you to integrate a polyline into a mesh.

To Enhance a Mesh with Break Lines using Polyline(s):

1. Click the Show Models in List View icon. Polylines are listed in the List
window and none is displayed in the 3D View.
2. Select the appropriate polyline from the List window. The Enhance Mesh
With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) button becomes enabled.
3. Toggle the selected Polyline's On/Off icon On (if required). It is displayed
in the 3D View.
4. Click the Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon.

The new mesh contains new edges that correspond to the Polyline. All the
vertices of the previous mesh are preserved during this operation.

Note: Several polylines may be selected at the same time.

Tip: The Enhance Mesh With Break Lines Using Polyline(s) icon can also be
selected from the pop-up menu.
942 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Flip an Edge
When an edge is shared by two triangles, you can use the Flip Selected Edges
tool for swapping it so that it is still shared by these two triangles but from the
two other vertices.

To Flip an Edge:

1. Select an edge (or a set of edges) from the displayed mesh.


2. Click on the Flip Selected Edges icon.
3. Or select the command from the pop-up menu.

Map With a Texture


This step (in option) consists of using a matched image to texture map the
selection done on the displayed mesh. If any selection has been performed,
the texture mapping will be applied to the entire mesh. If a selection (or the
entire mesh) has already been textured, you can choose to overwrite or
remove the existing texture. Texture mapping can be done by recomputing
(splitting) the edges to fit the image boundaries.

Note: An unmatched image cannot be used for texture mapping. This is why
selecting one will not show it as a thumbnail in Step 3 and the Apply Texture
button is dimmed.

Note: Several matched images may be selected at the same time and applied
as textures.
Tools in the Production Module 943

Apply a New Texture


Within the Map Texture step, you now have the ability to texture a mesh using
the images that you previously used for coloring a TZF Scan in Trimble
RealColor. You do not need to switch to Registration, create matched images
from colored TZF scans and switch back to OfficeSurvey in order to use the
images for texturing.

To Apply a New Texture:

1. Select an area from the selected mesh or the whole mesh.


2. Click the Show Images In List View icon.

1. If there are some images in your project, all of them are listed in the
List window and none is displayed.
2. Jump to step 5.

Or

3. If there is no image in your project, a dialog opens. It first warns you


that no matched image has been found and then prompts you to
create some.
4. Click Yes. The dialog closes.

If there is a non-colored TZF Scan in your project, nothing occurs. Skip the
Map Texture step.
If there is a colored TZF Scan in your project, the Create Station Images from
TZF Scan Color process is then launched.
Once the process has completed, a set of six matched images is created, one
for each face of a cube centered on the station location. All matched images
are put under a folder named according to the station.

5. Jump to step 5.

Or

6. If there is no TZF Scan, a warning appears. Click OK. The dialog


closes.
7. Skip the Map Texture step.
944 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3. If required, switch to the Station-Based mode.


4. Filter the images:

If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:

If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble SX10
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:

Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number of images
of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are displayed in overlap
in the background., only if the Display Images option has been chosen.

5. Select the matched image behind the selected mesh in the 3D View
window. It is shown as a thumbnail in Step 3.
6. Click the Apply Texture button.

 If the Project Image Borders option is not checked, only the selected
triangles that lie entirely inside the image will be textured.
 If the Project Image Borders option is checked, the selected triangles that
lie entirely inside the image will be textured in the same way, but the
triangles that intersect the selected image boundaries will also be split. In
this way, the whole image is used for texturing the selected triangles. Note
that the shape of the mesh does not change during this operation.
Tools in the Production Module 945

Remove an Existing Texture


To Remove an Existing Texture:

1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture removal is
required.
2. Click on the Remove Existing Texture icon.

Overwrite an Existing Texture


To Overwrite an Existing Texture:

1. Select an area (or the entirety) of the mesh where a texture overwriting is
required.
2. Click the Show Images in List View icon. Matched images are listed in the
List window and none is displayed.
3. Select the appropriate image from the List window. It is shown as a
thumbnail in Step 3.
4. Toggle the selected image's On/Off icon On. It is displayed in an
independent window in the 3D View. The displayed mesh is aligned with
the camera's point of view.
5. Check the Overwrite Existing Texture option.
6. Click Apply Texture.
946 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply the Operation


Till now, all operations applied to the selected mesh(es) are just temporarily
stored. To make them permanent, you have to apply the operations. You can
then quit the tool.

To Apply the Operation:

1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: Leaving the Mesh Editing tool without applying all changes in the
database will make appear a message.
Tools in the Production Module 947

Create a Merged Mesh


You can merge several meshes into a new one. A mesh can be either a fitted
mesh (with points inside) or a pure mesh (no points inside).

To Create a Merged Mesh:

1. Select at least two meshes from the Project Tree.


2. From the Tools menu, select Merge Meshes .

A merged mesh, with the "Unclassified" layer and whose name is OBJECTX, is
created under the current project in the Models Tree. X is its order. This mesh
has no point cloud representation inside.

Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Merge Meshes feature from the
Surface group, on the Surfaces tab.

Manipulate a Mesh
The feature detailed hereafter lets you to manipulate a mesh (or a set of
meshes) by moving it from one position to another position along the three
directions of the active frame, and by rotating it centered on its center (one
defined by the user) in order to match it with a cloud.

A mesh can be only a pure mesh (obtained from converting a geometry or a


fitted mesh).

To Move a Mesh:

1. Select a mesh (or a set of meshes) from the Project Tree.


2. On the Surfaces tab, in the Surface group, select Move Mesh. The Move
Mesh toolbar displays.
3. Do one of the following:

 Pan a mesh.
 Rotate a mesh.
 Change the manipulator location.

4. Click Apply to validate the transformation.


5. Click Close to leave the tool.

Note: In the Ribbon, you can reach the Move Mesh feature from the Surface
group, on the Surfaces tab.
948 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan a Mesh
To Pan a Mesh:

1. Click the Pan Along Home Frame Axes icon.

A Manipulator, positioned at the center of the mesh, appears. It is made of


three secant Axis Handles (red, green and blue arrows respectively parallel to
the X, Y and Z axes of the active frame), and three secant Plane Handles (XY,
YY and ZX planes).

Note: If multiple meshes have been selected, the manipulator is at a position


that is equidistant from all of them.

2. If required, change the manipulator location.


3. Pick an Axis Handle. It turns to yellow as well as the moving direction. The
two other directions for which you cannot move are in mauve.
4. Drag to move the mesh along the yellow direction.

5. Pick a Plane Handle. It turns to yellow as well as the plane one which the
handle is lied on.
6. Drag to displace the mesh on the yellow plane.
Tools in the Production Module 949

7. Click the Apply icon.

Tip: You can use the following combination of keys: Shift + T.

Tip: You can select Pan Along Home Frame Axes from the pop-up menu.

Rotate a Mesh
To Rotate a Mesh:

1. Click the Rotate icon.


2. A Manipulator, positioned at the center of the mesh, appears. It is made of
three secant Ring Handles (red, green and blue arrows respectively
perpendicular to the X, Y and Z axes of the active frame).

Note: If multiple meshes have been selected, the manipulator is at a position


that is equidistant from all of them.

3. If required, change the manipulator location.


4. Pick e.g. the red Sphere Handle. It turns to yellow. The axis around which
the mesh can be rotated is dotted and is in red.
5. Move the mesh around that axis.
950 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. Click the Apply icon.

Tip: You can also use the following combination of keys: Shift + R.

Tip: You can select Rotate from the pop-up menu.

Change the Manipulator Location


To Change the Manipulator Location:

1. Click the Change Manipulator Location icon.


2. Pick a point anywhere

The manipulator moves to the picked position.

Tip: You can also use the following shortcut key: C.

Tip: You can select Change Manipulator Location from the pop-up menu
951

Calculate a Volume
The Volume Calculation tool enables to compute the volume between a point
cloud and a plane, between two point clouds, between a point cloud and a
mesh or between two meshes. The volume computation is based on a grid
method and the result is represented in the 3D View by a graph of vertical color
lines with scale. You can choose in the Preferences dialog the units to
represent the computed volumes.

Open the Tool


You need to select one or two surfaces from a project. You cannot exceed
three.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one or two surfaces from the Project Tree.


2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Volume Calculation . The Volume
Calculation dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools (Segmentation and Sampling).
The second part enables to define a plane. The third part lets you set its
resolution. The fourth part enables to preview the volume computation result,
display (or hide) the selected surface(s), check the computed volume(s) to
keep and edit a report. The fifth part is to edit the computed volume(s). The
sixth part is to save the volume computation result, and close the tool.

If one surface has been selected, this surface will be automatically displayed in
the 3D View with its own color. If two surfaces have selected, the first (by
selection order) will be set as Reference Surface and displayed in Red and the
second as Comparative surface and in Green.

Note:
 If the selected surface is a mesh, these two sub-tools (Segmentation and
Sampling) are unavailable.
 If the input contains a point cloud and a mesh; the mesh will be by default
Reference Surface and will not able to change to the Comparison Surface.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Volume Calculation feature can be selected in the
Volume group, on the Surfaces tab.
952 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Plane
A plane perpendicular to the Z-axis of the active coordinate frame appears.

To Define a Plane:

1. Define a direction for the Normal.


2. Set a Position for the plane.
3. Define the Offset.
Tools in the Production Module 953

Define the Normal Direction


It is up to the user to orientate the initial plane. There are several tools
available for this purpose.

1 - Set From Frame 4 - Plan Perpendicular to 7 - Plane Parallel to Screen


2 - Fit Screen View
3 - Pick Axis From Object 5 - Pick 3 points on Plane 8 - Field for defining a direction
6 - Edit Parameters

To Define the Normal Direction:

Do one of the following:

 Select one of the frame’s axes.


 Fit an extracted set of points with a plane.
 Find a perpendicular view plane from an extracted set of points.
 Pick one of the object’s axes.
 Pick a plane perpendicular to the screen.
 Pick three points (1).
 Set the plane parallel to the screen view.

Note: After selecting (1), the Picking Parameters toolbar appears. You can pick
free or constrained points.
954 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Frame Axis


This method consists of selecting an axis from the active frame as Normal
direction. The initial plane will be moved so that its Normal will be parallel to
the selected axis. Its position in the 3D scene will be kept and its Offset
(altitude) will be reset.

To Select a Frame Axis:

1. Click on the Set from Frame pull down arrow.


2. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z
Coordinate System).
3. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).

Fit With a Geometry


To Fit With a Geometry:

1. Click on the Fit pull-down arrow.


2. Choose one of the following:

 Select Fit Plane . The Fitting toolbar appears as well as an information


window at the top right corner of the 3D View.
 Select Find Best Cross Plane . The Fitting toolbar appears as well as
an information window at the top right corner of the 3D View.

Fit a Plane

1 - In (i) 4 - Plane
2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)

To Fit a Plane:

1. Fence a set of points for which you want to fit with a plane.
2. Click the Plane icon. Kept points are fitted with a plane.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; fitting a plane can be applied
to the entire point cloud.
Tools in the Production Module 955

Finding the Best Cross Plane

1 - In (i) 4 - Plane Normal


2 - Out (o) 5 - Create Fitted Geometry
3 - Display Un-partitioned Points 6 - Close Tool (Escape)

To Find the Best Cross Plane:

1. Fence a set of points with which you want to fit a plane.


2. Click the Plane Normal icon. Kept points give the projection plane’s normal
direction.

Note: It is not necessary to fence a set of points; finding the best cross plane
can be applied to the entire point cloud.

Pick an Object Local Frame


This method consists of picking an object's local frame. The initial plane will be
moved so that its Normal will be parallel to the picked local frame. Its position
in the 3D scene and its Offset (altitude) will be set by the picked point.

To Pick an Object Local Frame:

1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial cutting plane
disappears from the 3D View.
2. In the WorkSpace window, click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click an object.

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
956 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Points


This method consists of picking two points. The initial plane will be moved so
that it will pass through the two picked points and perpendicular to the screen.

To Pick Two Points:

1. Click the Plane Perpendicular to Screen icon.


2. Pick two points. No need to pick on the displayed object.

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.

Pick Three Points


This method consists of picking three points. The initial plane will be moved so
that it will pass through the three picked points. Its position in the 3D scene and
its Offset (altitude) will be the barycentre of the three picked points.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click the Pick 3 Points on Plane icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on the displayed
object.

1 - Picked points 2 - The cutting plane passes through the picked


points

Note: Pressing Esc while the picking is in progress will cancel the selected
point(s) and makes appeared the last defined plane.
Tools in the Production Module 957

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The 3D Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Click on the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

 Chose Normal + Point to define a normal and a position.

a) Enter a direction in the Normal field.


b) Enter a point position in the Point field.

 Chose Point to Point to define two points. Points(To) - Point (From)


defines a normal and Point (From) gives a position.

a) Enter a point position in the Point (To) field.


b) Enter a point position in the Point (From) field.

3. Click OK. The 3D Plane Editing dialog closes.

Plane Parallel to the Screen View


To Set a Plane Parallel to the Screen:

 Click Plane Parallel to Screen View .


958 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Position
Once the initial plane is well oriented, you have to define its position in the 3D
space.

To Define a Position:

1. Enter a 3D position in the Point field.


2. Or first click on the Pick Point icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode.
3. And then, pick a point in the 3D scene.

 The initial plane passes through that point.


 The Offset value is set to 0.00.

The initial plane in the 3D View is hidden and the Volume Calculation dialog
appears in grey. This means that the options and commands from this dialog
are unavailable. The dialog comes back to its initial state when you have
picked a point.

Note: The picking must be done on the selected surface (point cloud or mesh).
Tools in the Production Module 959

Define an Offset Value


Once the initial plane's position has been defined, you have to set its position
along its normal. By default, its current position corresponds to Offset 0.
Setting a positive value will move the plane Up along its normal while a
negative value will move it Down.

To Define an Offset Value:

1. Enter a value in the Offset field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

1 - A plane's Normal direction 2 - Positive offsets 3 - Negative offsets

Defining a Grid Resolution


This step consists of defining a grid resolution which is square - the same in
both of the defined plane directions (Length and Width).

To Define a Grid Resolution:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
960 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview a Volume
You can perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the
database. You can change the parameters as many times as you please and
perform a preview without leaving this tool. There are two display options (one
per surface). If one surface has been selected as input, only one display option
is available. See (A1). If two surfaces have been selected as input, the two
display options are all available. You can reverse this comparison order by
clicking on the Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces icon. The Reference
Surface becomes a surface to inspect and its color swaps to green. The
Comparison Surface becomes a Reference Surface and its color turns to red.
See (B1).

1 - Display/Hide the selected surface(s) 2 - Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces

To Preview the Computed Volume(s):

1. Click Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces if required.


2. Click on the Preview button.

If one surface (point cloud or mesh) has been selected, the volume
computation is done between this surface and the plane defined in Step 1. Two
volumes are computed if the plane cuts the selected surface in two. The
Positive (Cut) volume is the part (of the selected surface) above the plane
while the Negative (Fill) volume is the part below. The sum of both is the
volume computation result. A unique volume is computed if the plane does not
cut the selected surface.
Tools in the Production Module 961

1 - The projection plane 4 - The Color scale


2 - Part of the surface above the plane 5 - Positive part of the volume
3 - Part of the surface below the plane 6 - Negative part of the volume

If two surfaces (point cloud(s) or mesh(es)) have been selected, the volume
computation is done between both of them.

1 - The projection plane 4 - The color scale


2 - The Reference Surface in red 5 - Negative part of the volume
3 - The Comparison Surface in green 6 - Positive part of the volume

A volume is represented in the 3D View by a graph of vertical color lines. You


can estimate the height of each point (if a point cloud is selected) or of vertex
(if a mesh is selected) compared to the defined plane using the graduated
color scale on the left of the 3D View.

Note:
962 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 The Swap Reference/Comparison Surfaces icon is not present when a


single surface has been selected.
 After clicking Preview, if the projection resolution set in Step 1 is too small;
the following message #Volume size is very high; Computation may take a
long time. Do you want to continue?# appears. Close the message and set
a bigger projection resolution.

Check a Volume to Keep


Once a preview has been performed, the Preview button becomes disabled
and the Check Volume to Keep options become enabled. See (A2) and (B2).

1 - Edit and export the volume result(s) 2 - Check Volume to Keep options

To Check a Volume to Keep:

1. Clear the Positive (Cut) option. The positive representation of the volume
is hidden.
2. Or clear the Negative (Fill) option. The negative representation of the
volume is hidden.

Note: You cannot have the Positive (Cut) and Negative (Fill) options both
unchecked. You need to have at least one checked.
Tools in the Production Module 963

Save a Volume in a Report


Once you are satisfied with the previewed volume(s), you can create a report
and export to RTF format.

To Save a Volume in a Report:

1. Click Report. The Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.


2. Click Export. The Export Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field.
4. Specify a drive/folder where to store the file.
5. Click Save. The report is opened as an rtf file in the Microsoft Word
application.
6. Print the report as required.

Edit a Volume
The volume previously computed may have irregularities like holes or peaks,
you can then edit it by keeping (or removing) the part you want (or do not
want), completing holes, smoothing or filtering according to two given
elevations. The cursor is in the segmentation mode and only the Range Based
Filtering feature is available. This means that it is up to the user to filter the
computed volume or to fence an area for editing.

Range Based Filtering


964 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter From an Elevation Range


You can filter the computed volume according a range of elevation values.
Note that this filter cannot be applied to a part of the volume.

To Filter From an Elevation Range:

1. Click the Range Based Filtering icon. The Range Based Filtering dialog
opens.
2. Enter a value in the Minimum Value field.
3. Enter a value in the Maximum Value field.
4. Click OK.

Parts of the volume out of the defined range are not taken into account
Tools in the Production Module 965

Fence an Area
If you start by fencing an area on the volume, the Fill Holes and Smooth Cells
icons become enabled and the Range Based Filtering icon swaps from
enabled to disabled.

1 - Keep Cells 3 - Fill Holes


2 - Empty Cells 4 - Smooth Cells

To Fence an Area:

1. Fence an area on the volume.


2. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View.
3. Select End Fence from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the Keep Cells icon.
5. Or click the Empty Cells icon.

Tip:
 You can also right-click in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and
select the command you want to use.
 Instead of selecting Keep Cells (or Empty Cells), you can also use the
related short-cut key I (or O).
 Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can also
double-click.

Note:
 Once a fence has been drawn, the user can no longer manipulate the
volume.
 To start a new fence, please cancel the current one by selecting New
Fence from the pop-up menu or by pressing Esc.
966 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fill Holes
To Fill Holes:

1. Fence an area on the computed volume.


2. Click on the Fill Holes icon.

1 - A hole 2 - The hole is filled up

Tip: The Fill Holes icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill)) value is then updated.
Tools in the Production Module 967

Smooth Cells
To Smooth Cells:

1. Fence an area on the computed volume.


2. Click on the Smooth Cells icon.

1 - A set of peaks 2 - The set of peaks are smoothed down

Tip: The Smooth Cells icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: The Positive (Cut) (or Negative (Fill)) value is then updated.

Save a Volume in the Database


You can save the computed volume as a permanent object in the database,
perform a screen printouts or export to the DXF file format. For each saved
result, a volume object is created and is put under the Active Group in the
Models Tree.

To Save a Volume in the Database:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Note:
 Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 Leaving the Volume Calculation tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.
969

Inspect Data
Data loaded in RealWorks can be inspected using the dedicated tools. All are
gathered on the Inspection tab, in the Production module, and split into three
groups.

The Inspection Map group includes a set of tools that lets the user compare
two surfaces, enough close in the shape, together. The result can be analyzed
and exported.

The 3D Inspection group includes mainly two tools. The first one enables to
determine the from-point-point distances, from two different point clouds. The
result can be analyzed with the second too.

The Polyline Inspection group includes only one tool. It enables to inspect a
point cloud along a planar polyline.

The Polyline Inspection group includes only one tool. It enables to define
station positions on an alignment.
970 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The Floor group includes mainly two tools. It enables to define station positions
on an alignment.

Alignment Stationing
The Alignment Stationing feature lets the user define the stations along a given
polyline. The stations have known positions along that curve.
Tools in the Production Module 971

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a polyline, with only one chain, from the Project Tree.
2. In the Stationing group, click the Alignment Stationing icon. The Alignment
Stationing dialog displays.

 In the 3D View, the selected polyline displays with its own color. Its two
ends, each with a cross and a label, display in green.
 The Start and End indications show the direction along which stations will
be positioned.
 Stations are automatically positioned along the polyline, following the
values found in the Beginning Station, Interval Start Station and Interval
fields.
 Each station position, symbolized by a cross and a label, display in the
color of the selected polyline.
 The value displayed on the labels is the sum of the values found in the
Beginning Station, Interval Start Station and Interval fields except for the
first label which is the addition of Beginning Station and Interval Start
Station values.
 The Interval Start Station specifies the distance between the Start position
to the first station position (0 m is the default value).
 The Beginning Station specifies the start value in term of distance of the
first station (0 m is the default value).

1 - Interval Start Station 3 - Beginning Station + Interval Start Station +


2 - Beginning Station + Interval Start Station for Interval for the rest of the stations
the first station

Note: If you enter in the tool with a polyline for which an alignment stationing
has been already performed, the dialog which appears is filled up with the
parameters of the alignment.
972 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: You can specify the style used to format a station value, among No
Formating, 2 Digits: 10+00, and 3 Digits: 1+000, in the Preferences / Units (see
"Units Preferences" on page 127) dialog.

Note: You can leave the tool by pressing Esc.


Tools in the Production Module 973

Define the Settings


To Define the Settings of an Alignment:

1. Start by setting a direction for the alignment to be performed. Click the


Reverse Alignment button, the direction along the selected polyline is
reversed. The Start end becomes the End end, and vice versa.
2. Choose an option:

 Horizontal Step (2D): This is the step on the projected path (projection in a
horizontal plane).

 Distance Along Alignment (3D): This is the step on the 3D path.

3. Enter a distance value in the Beginning Station field. This value can
positive or negative.
974 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Enter a value in the Start Prefix field. This value can be any combination of
ASCII characters. It is used for naming the stations with the number
defined above.
Tools in the Production Module 975

Define the Position of the Stations


To Define the Position of the Stations:

1. Enter a distance value in the Interval Start Station field, and press Enter.
2. Or pick a position on the selected polyline.
3. Enter a distance value in the Interval field, and press Enter. The Interval
value is the distance between two consecutive stations.

 If the Interval Start Station value is larger than the Interval value, the
applied value for the Interval Start Station is recomputed to be between
the beginning of the polyline and the value of the first Interval.
 If the Interval value induces the creation of more than 1000 stations, a
question pops up and asks you to continue or not.
 If the Interval Start Station value is higher than the length of the selected
polyline, this value is not taken account.

4. Click the Apply button. The Alignment Stationing dialog closes.

A new object, named "Polyline - With Stations", is created. When displaying its
properties, you can see the number of stations defined in the polyline, the
Station Prefix used for the stations name, as well as the interval between two
stations, and the slicing method (Horizontal Step (2D) or Distance Along
Alignment (3D)).

If the selected polyline is composed a set of segments and arcs. The created
polyline doesn't contain arcs. All of them are discretized in segments.

Note: When you save a project with the newly created polyline in RealWorks
10.2, this changes the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in
10.1.
976 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: The exact position of a station on the polyline is not exported when
exporting the properties of a "Polyline - With Stations" object. Only the number
of stations, and the prefix of the stations, are exported.

Note: A "Polyline - With Stations" object can be used like a polyline.

Inspect Twin Surfaces


The Twin Surface Inspection tool enables to compare two surfaces together.
These surfaces should be similar as much as possible or not so different one
from the other. You can compare together two point clouds, a point cloud and a
mesh or two meshes. The surface inspection is based on a grid method and
the result is an Inspection Map. You can choose in the Preferences dialog the
units required to represent this map.
Tools in the Production Module 977

Open the Tool


You should select two surfaces from a project in order to be able to activate the
Twin Surface Inspection tool. The first selected surface will be a reference
surface (called Reference) and the second selected surface will be a surface to
inspect (called Comparison).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select two surfaces from the Project Tree.


2. In the Inspection Map group, click the Twin Surface Inspection icon. The
Twin Surface Inspection dialog opens

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of six parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
If point clouds have been selected, you can use these two sub-tools to
delineate an area for the inspection, to render them cleaner (i.e. reduce
parasite points) or to simplify them. The second part allows you to define a
projection surface. The third part allows you to set the projection surface’s
resolution. The fourth part allows you to preview the inspection result, display
(or hide) the selected point cloud(s)/mesh(es). The fifth part is to edit the
inspection result. The sixth part is to save the inspection result, close the tool
and give access to the online help.

Before opening the Twin Surface Inspection tool, each selected surface is
shown with its own color in the 3D View. After you open the tool, the reference
surface (the first selected) will appear in red and the second surface (the
second selected) in green. If the selection contains a point could and a mesh
as surfaces; the mesh will be by default a reference surface (in red) and will
not be able to be changed to a comparison surface (in green). The information
box (at the top right corner of the 3D View) lists the name of the reference
surface and of the comparison surface*.

Note: If the Project Cloud has been selected as input, it is by default the
Reference Surface. Its name does not appear in the information box.
978 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Projection Surface


A projection surface can be a 3D Plane, a 3D Cylinder or a 3D Tunnel.

To Define a Projection Surface:

1. In the Twin Surface Inspection dialog, click the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose among Plane-Based Projection, Cylinder-Based Projection (on
page 980) and Tunnel-Based Projection.

Note: The projection type which comes first is the one you have selected
during the last use of that tool.
Tools in the Production Module 979

Plane-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of plane shape, choose the Plane-Based
Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as
shown below:

A projection plane with a normal direction parallel to the Z axis* of the active
coordinate frame appears in the 3D View. A slider at the left side of the 3D
View allows you to move the projection plane from the top to the bottom and
vice versa. The way of defining a 3D plane is the same as in the Cutting Plane
tool.

1 - Slider 3 - A projection surface


2 - The Reference Surface 4 - The comparison Surface

Note: (*) In the X, Y and Z Coordinate System.


980 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cylinder-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of cylinder shape, choose the Cylinder-Based
Projection method. Step1 of the Twin Surface Inspection dialog becomes as
shown below:

A projection cylinder with an axis parallel to the Z axis* of the active coordinate
frame appears in the 3D View. You can change the projection cylinder axis
direction according to the two other axes (X* and Y*). If the selection (only
point cloud) that you performed in Step 1 contains an entity, you can pick on it
so that its axis becomes the new axis of the projection cylinder. You can also
pick points on your selection (point cloud or mesh) to define a projection
cylinder or edit one manually. In all cases, the bounding box that highlights the
selection (point cloud or mesh) delineates the height of the projection cylinder.
You cannot exceed it.

1 - Projection surface 3 - Comparison Surface (in green)


2 - Reference Surface (in red)

Note: (*) In the X, Y and Z Coordinate System.


Tools in the Production Module 981

Set From Frame


To Define a Projection Cylinder by Selecting a Frame Axis:

1. Click on the Set from Frame pull down arrow.


2. Choose among X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z Coordinate
System),
3. Or choose among North Axis, East Axis and Elevation Axis (in the North,
East and Elevation Coordinate System).

Draw a Circle
To Pick Two Points to Define a Projection Cylinder:

1. Click the Draw Circle icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D
constraint mode below the 3D View window.
2. Pick one free (or constrained) point. After picking this point, the Picking
Parameters toolbar switches to the Cartesian System constraint.
3. It's up to you to use this constraint or to pick a free point.

Note: Picking can be done anywhere on the selection (point cloud or mesh) or
not. These two points determine the projection cylinder's diameter and its
direction is perpendicular to the screen view.

Draw a Cylinder
To pick three points to define a projection cylinder:

1. Click the Draw Cylinder icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
the 3D constrain mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained).

Note: Picking should be on the selection (point cloud or mesh) for the two first
points and anywhere for the third point (on selection or not). The first and
second picked points give the projection cylinder's direction and the second
and third picked points determine its diameter.

Pick an Axis from an Object


To Pick an Axis from an Object:

1. Click the Pick Axis from Object icon. The initial projection disappears from
the 3D View.
2. Click on the Models tab.
3. Right-click on the selection to display the pop-up menu.
4. Select Display Geometry.
5. Click one point.
982 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Parameters
To Edit Manually a Cylinder:

1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The Cylinder Editing dialog opens.
2. Click the pull down arrow and do one of the following:

 Define a projection cylinder with two points and a radius.

a) Select 2 Points + Radius.


b) Enter a point’s position in the Point1 field.
c) Enter another point’s position in the Point2 field.
d) Enter a value in the Radius fields.

 Define a projection cylinder with one point, on direction and a radius.

a) Select Point + Direction + Radius.


b) Enter a point position the Point field.
c) Define a direction in the Direction field.
d) Enter a value in Radius field.

3. Click OK. The Cylinder Editing dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 983

Tunnel-Based Projection
If the two selected surfaces are of tunnel shape, choose the Tunnel-Based
Projection method. If your project contains a 3D Path and a 2D Shape
(respectively a 3D polyline and a 2D polyline), the name of each is displayed. If
there is more than one path or shape, you can drop-down the selection list for
each and select another 3D Path or 2D Shape. See [A]. If your project contains
no 3D Path and no 2D Shape; the dialog displays as shown in [B], and you are
not able to perform an inspection.

A projection tunnel of the 3D Path’s length and of the 2D Path’s shape appears
with the reference and comparison surfaces respectively in red and green.

You can inspect the Comparison Surface (in green) with the Reference
Surface (in red) along or perpendicular to the 3D Path by checking
Perpendicular or along the 3D Path and in the Z axis* direction (of the active
coordinate) by checking Vertical.

Note: (*) In the X, Y and Z Coordinate System.


984 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Start/End Position When no Alignment Stationing has been


Defined
If no alignment stationing has been defined on the selected 3D Path, the dialog
displays as illustrated:

 If required, drop-down the 3D Path (and/or 2D Shape) list and choose


which 3D Path (and/or 2D Shape) to be used for the inspection.
 By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.

 If required, you can define the Start (or End) position of the inspection, by
picking a point along the 3D Path.
 You can reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the beginning
(and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
Tools in the Production Module 985

Define the Start/End Position When an Alignment Stationing has been


Defined
If an alignment stationing has been defined on the selected 3D Path, the dialog
displays as illustrated below:

 If required, drop-down the 3D Path (and/or 2D Shape) list and choose


which 3D Path (and/or 2D Shape) to be used for the inspection.
 By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.
 The value in the Start field is the value of the Beginning Station (see the
Alignment Stationing (on page 970) tool).
 The value in the End field corresponds to the location at the end of the 3D
Path.

 Define the Start and End positions of the inspection, by picking a point
along the 3D Path.
 Or enter a distance value in the Start and End fields.
986 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.

Note: If the alignment stationing is done with the Distance Along Alignment
(3D) option, the distance will be along the 3D Path. If the alignment stationing
is done with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option, the distance will correspond
to the distances along the curve projected onto the horizontal plane.

Note: You cannot set the Start position after the End position. To swap the
path orientation, you need to go to the Alignment Stationing tool and do the
Reverse Alignment.

Note: There is no minimum distance between the Start position and the End
position for performing an inspection. When you enter the exact value of the
Start position into the End field, this value is not taken into account.

Determine a Resolution
The same resolution will apply to both directions and will differ according to the
projection surface you have defined in Step 2. If the projection surface is a 3D
plane, the resolution directions will be the width and length directions of that
plane. If the projection surface is a 3D cylinder, the resolution directions will be
the axis direction of this cylinder and the direction of its circumference when
you unfold it. If the projection surface is a 3D tunnel, the resolution directions
will be the 3D Path and 2D Shape directions.

Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection


To Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
Tools in the Production Module 987

Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection


To Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Along 3D Path field.


2. Enter a value in the Along 2D Shape field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Preview an Inspection
Once you have finished defining the projection surface and setting its
resolution, you can preview the result before saving it in the database. You can
change the parameters (projection surface and resolution) as many times as
you please and perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an
object selected for activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View.
To hide it, you have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you
should re-check the option. There are two display options (one for each
selected object).

To Preview an Inspection:

1. Un-check the Display Reference (Red) option, if needed.


2. Un-check the Display Comparative (Green) option, if needed.
3. Keep the Fill Holes option unchecked, if required.
4. Click the Preview.

 If the two surfaces are of the same type (Point Cloud (or Mesh) for both),
the Swap Surfaces icon is available. Click the Swap Surfaces icon.
The Reference Surface becomes a surface to inspect (Comparison) and
the Comparison Surface swaps for Reference.
 If the two surfaces are from different type (Point cloud for one and Mesh
for the other), the Swap Surfaces icon is then unavailable

5. Click again the Preview.


988 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The inspection result is a map. It is shown in a specific window, called Map


Preview. It is opened beside the 3D View. This map is a 2D image inside which
each pixel is colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of
elevation) between the two surfaces. A ColorBar located at the right side of the
inspection map is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to a
range of elevation values.

1 - The scale and the origin of the inspection 3 - The comparison surface (green)
map 4 - The inspection map
2 - The reference surface (red)
Tools in the Production Module 989

1- Zoom tools 5 - Switch to Sign-Based ColorBar


2 - Hide/Show ColorBar 6 - The scale and the origin of the inspection
3 - Edit ColorBar map
4 - Switch to Default Color 7 - An inspection map
8 - A ColorBar

In the Map Preview window, you can zoom the inspection map In or Out. You
can do this in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the
inspection map using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The
second way is to magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse
wheel (if present). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the
inspection map is larger than the Map Preview window can show, you can pan
it on left-click in four directions: Up, Down, Right and Left. In the 3D View, the
inspection map is shown in superposition with the two selected surfaces and
the projection surface. A frame (red and green) corresponding to the inspection
map’s origin appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview window.

Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.

Note: When a cylinder is vertical, i.e. when the angle between its axis and the
Z-axis of the current coordinate system is less than 45 degrees, the orientation
of the inspection map changes between RealWorks 10.1 and RealWorks 10.2.
When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, the cylinder is considered as
horizontal. In this case, the orientation of the map does not change between
10.1 and 10.2. Refer to the table below.

Horizontal Cylinder Vertical Cylinder


10.1 10.2 10.1 10.2
990 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: When you save a project for which the orientation of the inspection map
changed due to the verticality of the cylinder in RealWorks 10.2, this changes
the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in 10.1.
Tools in the Production Module 991

Avoid the Filling of Holes on an Inspection Map


When you create an inspection map using clouds, and when there is a hole
located inside the dataset, i.e., an area without data that is completely
surrounded by data, you have the choice of filling this hole (or not), whatever
the size of the hole.

When the Fill Holes option has been kept unchecked, all the holes on the
clouds are preserved on the inspection map.

When the Fill Holes option has been checked, all the holes on the clouds are
filled on the inspection map.
992 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Print an Inspection Map


To print an inspection map, click inside the Map Preview window and do one of
the following:

To Print an Inspection Map:

1. Click Print in the Main toolbar,


2. Or select Print from the File menu
3. Or select Print from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 993

Edit an Inspection Map


The inspection map computed previously may have irregularities like holes or
spades, you can then edit it in order to keep or to remove the part you want, to
complete the holes or to smooth the map. In edition mode, the mouse cursor
will change its shape and picking is always inside the inspection map. Before
you draw a polygonal fence, only the Draw Polygon To Edit tool can be used
(see [A]). After you draw and validate a polygonal fence, the other tools
become active (see [B]).

1 - Draw Polygon to Edit 3 - Empty Cells 5 - Smooth Cells


2 - Keep Cells 4 - Fill Holes

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Draw Polygon to Edit.


2. Fence an area on the inspection map.
3. Right-click in the 3D View window.
4. Select End Fence from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New
Fence from the pop-up menu.
 To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to
Edit, select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc.

Tip:
 Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either
double-click or press on the Space Bar.
 You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key I (or O).
994 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter an Area
To Filter an Area:

1. Click the Fill Holes, if the fenced area contains holes.


2. Or click Smooth Cells, if the fenced area contains spikes for example.

Note:
 You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key F (or S).
 An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.

Filter the Inspection Result


Do one of the following if you wish to filter the inspection map between a set of
intervals: edit the current ColorBar and change its interval values to those you
need to use for filtering; or create a new ColorBar and set the interval values
required for filtering. The elevation differences which are out of this range of
intervals will disappear from the inspection map.

To Filter the Inspection Result:

1. Click Edit ColorBar. The ColorBar dialog opens.


2. Click Edit. The ColorBar Editing dialog opens.

1 - Option for setting only 2 - Number of levels in the 3 - Field for defining intervals
positive values of intervals current ColorBar by setting values

3. Click in the interval value field and key in new values. The number of
levels is displayed below.
4. Select the Positive Values option (if required).
5. Click in an interval line. A pull down arrow appears
6. Click on the pull down arrow. A color palette appears.
7. Choose an existing color or click Other to define yours.
8. Click Save.
Tools in the Production Module 995

Check the Inspection


The map gives you a global vision of the inspection between both selected
surfaces. You can move your cursor over a point on the inspection map in
order to have the difference of elevations between these two surfaces at this
point. The difference of elevations appears in text beneath the Map Inspection
window.

Save the Inspection


In this last step, you can save the inspection result as a permanent object in
the database, perform a screen printout or go further in analyzing the result
thanks to the Inspection Map Analyzer tool. For each inspection map you save,
a geometric object is created and is put under the active group in the Models
Tree. The ColorBar(s) that is (or are) related to it will be saved too. As any
geometric object in RealWorks, you can display its representation in the 3D
View by double-clicking it in the Project Tree or by selecting the Open
Inspection Map command from the Display menu. A ColorBar has no
representation in the Project Tree.

Note:
 To leave the Twin Surface Inspection tool, you can press Esc or select
Close from the pop-up menu.
 Leaving the Twin Surface Inspection tool without saving the inspection
result will open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or
cancel the operation you attempt to execute.

Inspect a Surface and a Model


This tool allows you to compare a surface with a model of plane, cylinder or
tunnel shape. The surface and the model should be fairly similar in the sense
that the tool is designed to be used in "before and after" situations. You can
select a point cloud or a mesh for comparison. The surface inspection is based
on a grid method and the result is an Inspection Map. You can choose in the
Preferences dialog box the units required to represent this map.
996 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


You need to select a surface (point cloud or mesh) and a model from a project
in order to be able to open the Surface to Model Inspection tool. A model
(when of plane and cylinder shape) can now be created using e.g. the
Geometry Creator tool in the Modeling processing mode. A model of tunnel
shape is computed from a 2D Shape and a 3D Path within the Surface to
Model Inspection tool; both are polylines respectively in 2D and 3D. These
polylines can be created using e.g. the Polyline Drawing tool. You can also
import a model either from 3Dipsos (a Trimble software application) or by
loading a DXF/DWG format file. The selected model will be a reference surface
and the point cloud (or mesh) will be a surface to inspect.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one of these two sets (surface and model of plane/cylinder shape
or surface and 2D polyline and 3D polyline) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Inspection Map group, click the Surface to Model Inspection icon.
The Surface to Model Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of five parts. The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and Sampling.
The second part allows you to set a projection surface (3D plane, 3D cylinder
or 3D tunnel) resolution. The third part allows previewing the inspection result,
display (or hide) the selected point cloud/mesh or model. The fourth part is to
edit or to analyze the inspection result. The fifth part is to save the inspection
result, close the tool and give access to the online help.

Define a Projection
A projection model will be automatically set after opening the Surface to Model
Inspection tool. The surface to inspect (point cloud or mesh) remains with its
own color and the reference surface (model) is shown in yellow.
Tools in the Production Module 997

Plane-Based Projection
If the Model is a plane, the projection should be based on a 3D plane, with the
same direction (Normal) and whose dimensions (Width and Length) are
delineated by the highlighting box.

1 - Model of Plane shape 2 - Cloud


998 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cylinder-Based Projection
If the Model is a cylinder, the projection should be based on a 3D cylinder, with
the same size (Diameter and Length).

1 - Point cloud 2 - Model of Cylinder shape

Tunnel-Based Projection
If a 2D Shape and a 3D Path (respectively a 2D polyline and a 3D polyline)
have been selected, the projection is based on a 3D Tunnel of the 3D
polyline’s length and of the 2D polyline’s shape. The 2D Shape and 3D Path
names are displayed in Step 1. You can inspect the Comparison Surface (point
cloud or mesh) with the Reference Surface (model) along or perpendicular to
the 3D Path by checking Perpendicular or along the 3D path and in the Z axis
direction (of the active coordinate) by checking Vertical. You can also swap the
3D path and the 2D Shape.

Note: The step Define Projection is only available when selecting a 2D shape
and a 3D path.
Tools in the Production Module 999

Define the Start/End Position When no Alignment Stationing has been


Defined
If no alignment stationing has been defined on the selected 3D Path, the dialog
displays as shown as illustrated:

 By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.

 You can define the Start (or End) position of the inspection, by picking a
point along the 3D Path.
 If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.
1000 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Start/End Position When an Alignment Stationing has been


Defined
If an alignment stationing has been defined on the selected 3D Path, the dialog
displays as illustrated below:

 By default, the inspection performs from the beginning of the 3D Path to its
end.
 The value in the Start field is the value of the Beginning Station (see the
Alignment Stationing (on page 970) tool).
 The value in the End field corresponds to the position at the end of the 3D
Path.

 Define the Start and End positions of the inspection, by picking a point
along the 3D Path.
 Or enter a distance value in the Start and End fields.
Tools in the Production Module 1001

 If required, reset the Start position (and/or the End position) to the
beginning (and/or to the end) of the 3D Path.

Note: If the alignment stationing is done with the Distance Along Alignment
(3D) option, the distance will be along the 3D Path. If the alignment stationing
is done with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option, the distance will correspond
to the distances along the curve projected onto the horizontal plane.

Note: Along a given 3D Path, you cannot set the Start position after the End
position.

Note: There is no minimum distance between the Start position and the End
position for an inspection. When you enter the exact value of the Start position
into the End field, this value is not taken into account.
1002 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Determine a Resolution
A same resolution will be applied to both directions of the projection surface
except when a 2D Shape and a 3D Path have been selected - see [A] and [B].
These directions will differ according to the projection model set in Step 1. If
the projection model is a 3D Cylinder, the projection directions are equal to the
axis direction of the 3D Cylinder and to the direction along the 3D Cylinder’s
circumference. If the projection model is a 3D Plane, the projection directions
correspond to the width and length directions of the 3D Plane. If the projection
surface is a 3D Tunnel, the resolution directions will be the 3D Path and 2D
Shape directions.

Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection


To Determine a Resolution in the Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection


To Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-Based Projection:

1. Enter a value in the Along 3D Path field.


2. Enter a value in the Along 2D Shape field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
Tools in the Production Module 1003

Preview an Inspection
Once you have finished defining the projection surface resolution, you can
perform a preview to visualize the result before saving it in the RealWorks
database. You can change the parameter as many times as you please and
perform a preview without leaving this tool. By default, an object selected for
activating the tool is automatically displayed in the 3D View. To hide it, you
have to un-check the display option. And to display it again, you should re-
check the option. There are two display options (one for each object selected).
If the selected object is a point cloud, the display option will take the name of
Display Cloud. If the selected object is a mesh, the display option will take the
name of Display Mesh. The second display option’s name is always Display
Model.

To Preview the Inspection:

1. Un-check the Display Cloud (or Display Mesh) option, if needed.


2. Un-check the Display Model option, if needed.
3. Keep the Fill Holes option unchecked, if required.
4. Click Preview.

Note: You do not necessary need to validate the value you key in the
Resolution field. Clicking the Preview button will validate the value by its own.
1004 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The inspection is done by comparing the Model with the selected Surface. The
inspection result is a map shown in a specific window (called Map Preview)
which opens above the 3D View. This map is a 2D image inside which pixels
are colored according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation)
between the Surface and the Model. A ColorBar located at the right side of the
inspection map is a scale of elevation values and each color corresponds to an
elevation value.

In the Map Preview, you can zoom the inspection map In (or Out) in three
ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the inspection map by
using Image Zoom In and Image Zoom Out . The second way is to
magnify (or reduce) the inspection map using the mouse wheel (if present).
The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list. If the inspection map is
larger than the Map Preview window can display, you can pan it on left-click in
four directions: Up, Down, Right and Left. You can also hide/show the current
ColorBar or edit a new one.

In the 3D View, the inspection map is shown in superposition with the two
selected items (Surface and Model). A frame (of red and green colors)
corresponding to the origin of the inspection map (also called Orientation)
appears in both the 3D View and the Map Preview.
Tools in the Production Module 1005

Plane Shape

1 - The origin of an inspection map 3 - The selected point cloud


2 - An inspection map

1 - Zoom features 3 - The difference in elevations at the cursor


2 - Features related to the ColorBar position
3 - The origin of an inspection map 4 - An inspection map
5 - A ColorBar
1006 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
Tools in the Production Module 1007

Cylinder Shape

1 - The origin of an inspection map 3 - The selected point cloud


2 - An inspection map

1 - Zoom features 3 - The difference in elevations at the cursor


2 - Features related to the ColorBar position
3 - The origin of an inspection map 4 - An inspection map
5 - A ColorBar

Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
1008 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

When a cylinder is vertical, i.e. when the angle between its axis and the Z-axis
of the current coordinate system is less than 45 degrees, the orientation of the
inspection map changes between RealWorks 10.1 and RealWorks 10.2. When
the angle is greater than 45 degrees, the cylinder is considered as horizontal.
In this case, the orientation of the map does not change between 10.1 and
10.2. Refer to the table below.

Horizontal Cylinder Vertical Cylinder


10.1 10.2 10.1 10.2

Note: When you save a project for which the orientation of the inspection map
changed due to the verticality of the cylinder in RealWorks 10.2, this changes
the database. As a result, the project cannot be open in 10.1.
Tools in the Production Module 1009

Tunnel Shape

1 - The origin of an inspection map 3 - The selected point cloud


2 - An inspection map

1 - Zoom features 3 - The difference in elevations at the cursor


2 - Features related to the ColorBar position
3 - The origin of an inspection map 4 - An inspection map
5 - A ColorBar
1010 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: Please, refer to the ColorBars section for more information about how to
use the features.
Tools in the Production Module 1011

Avoid the Filling of Holes on an Inspection Map


When you create an inspection map using clouds, and when there is a hole
located inside the dataset, i.e., an area without data that is completely
surrounded by data, you have the choice of filling this hole (or not), whatever
the size of the hole.

When the Fill Holes option has been kept unchecked, all the holes on the
clouds are preserved on the inspection map.

When the Fill Holes option has been checked, all the holes on the clouds are
filled on the inspection map.
1012 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Print an Inspection Map


To print an inspection map, click inside the Map Preview window and do one of
the following:

To Print an Inspection Map:

1. Click Print in the Main toolbar,


2. Or select Print from the File menu
3. Or select Print from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1013

Edit an Inspection Map


The inspection map computed previously may have irregularities like holes or
spades, you can then edit it in order to keep or to remove the part you want, to
complete the holes or to smooth the map. In edition mode, the mouse cursor
will change its shape and picking is always inside the inspection map. Before
you draw a polygonal fence, only the Draw Polygon To Edit tool can be used
(see [A]). After you draw and validate a polygonal fence, the other tools
become active (see [B]).

1 - Draw Polygon to Edit 3 - Empty Cells 5 - Smooth Cells


2 - Keep Cells 4 - Fill Holes

Fence an Area
To Fence an Area:

1. Click the Draw Polygon to Edit.


2. Fence an area on the inspection map.
3. Right-click in the 3D View window.
4. Select End Fence from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 To cancel the current polygonal fence, you can press Esc or select New
Fence from the pop-up menu.
 To leave the Draw Polygon to Edit tool, click again the Draw Polygon to
Edit, select Close Polygon Tool from the pop-up menu or press Esc.

Tip:
 Instead of selecting End Fence from the pop-up menu, you can either
double-click or press on the Space Bar.
 You can also select Keep Cells (or Empty Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key I (or O).
1014 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter an Area
To Filter an Area:

1. Click the Fill Holes, if the fenced area contains holes.


2. Or click Smooth Cells, if the fenced area contains spikes for example.

Note:
 You can also select Fill Holes (or Smooth Cells) from the pop-up menu or
use their related short-cut key F (or S).
 An inspection map, once created, becomes un-editable.

Check the Inspection


The map gives you a global vision of the inspection between the selected
surface and the model. You can move your cursor over a point on the
inspection map in order to have the difference of elevations between both the
surface and the model at this point. The difference of elevations appears in text
beneath the Map Inspection.

Save the Inspection


In this last step, you can save the inspection result as a permanent object in
the database, perform a screen printout or go further in analyzing the result
thanks to the Inspection Map Analyzer tool. For each inspection map you save,
a geometric object is created and is put under the active group in the Models
Tree. The ColorBar(s) that is (or are) related to it will be saved too. As any
geometric object in RealWorks, you can display its representation in the 3D
View by double-clicking it in the Project Tree or by selecting the Open
Inspection Map command from the Display menu. A ColorBar has no
representation in the Project Tree.

Note:
 To leave the Surface to Model Inspection tool, you can press Esc or select
Close from the pop-up menu.
 Leaving the Surface to Model tool without saving the inspection result will
open an information box which prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the
operation you attempt to execute.
Tools in the Production Module 1015

Analyze an Inspection Map


The Inspection Map Analyzer tool allows you to extract five categories of
information (Points & Polylines, Sections & Shifts, Volumes & Surfaces, Iso-
curves and Colored Meshes) from an inspection map and each category
corresponds to a sub-tool.
1016 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


You can open the Inspection Map Analyzer tool either from the main menu
after selecting an existing inspection map from the Project Tree or inside the
Twin Surface Inspection (or Surface to Model Inspection) tool after inspecting.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree.


2. In the Inspection Map group, click the Inspection Map Analyzer icon. The
Inspection Map Analyzer dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. Depending on the
sub-tool you select, the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog changes appearance.
The selected inspection map is displayed in the Inspection Map Analyzer
Viewer [A] with two sliders (horizontal and vertical).

Vertical slider (in this example)

The Section Viewer [B] shows the extraction result(s) in 3D and optionally the
inspection map if the Display 3D Map option is checked. The Lock in 2D option
(when not dimmed and if checked) locks the extractions result(s) in 2D
(constrained in the XZ* plane of the active frame) with a 2D Grid in
superposition. You can hide and display again the 2D Grid. When the Lock in
2D option is checked, you can only pan the results(s) in the YZ* plane, zoom
(in or out) or rotate around the X* axis. Un-checking Lock in 2D will hide the 2D
Grid and will free the result(s) from the 3D locked constraint.
Tools in the Production Module 1017

The way the two viewers (Inspection Map Analyzer and Section) will be
represented depends on the sub-tool you select. You can rearrange the
viewers as you please using the View Manager tools

Note:
 Pressing Esc will close the Inspection Map Analyzer tool.
 Clicking Close in the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog (or selecting Close
from the pop-up menu in the viewers) will not close the current sub-tool
but will close the main tool.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
1018 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select "Points & Polylines"


Because the metric information is still stored in an inspection map, you can get
the 3D position of a point as in the Feature Set tool (surveying point) or as in
the Measure tool (measured point) or simply define an area of interest by
drawing a polyline.

To Select "Points & Polylines":

1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Points & Polylines. The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog appears as
shown.

1 - Pick Point 2 - Draw Polyline 3 - Close Polyline (or Open


Polyline)

The Inspection Map Analyzer and Section Viewers are both opened. In the
Section Viewer, the inspection map is by default hidden and the navigation is
locked in 2D. In the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer, the horizontal and
vertical sliders are shown and only one is active.

3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map in
the Section Viewer.
4. If required, uncheck the Lock in 2D option to free the navigation from 2D
lock in the Section Viewer.
5. In Step 1, choose between Pick on Reference Surface and Pick on
Comparative Surface.

Tip: You can use the Up/Down (or Right/Left) arrows of your keyboard to
vertically (or horizontally) move the slider with constant step. This step
corresponds to one pixel on the inspection map (not one pixel on the screen).
To do this, you should first click inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer to
select it.
Tools in the Production Module 1019

Pick Points
Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and
anywhere over the color area of the inspection map (except on black area).

To Pick a Point:

1. Pan (or zoom) the inspection map in or out (if required).


2. Click the Pick Point icon. The two sliders disappear from the Inspection
Map Analyzer Viewer.
3. Pick a point on the inspection map in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer.

The picked point is shown in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer [A] and in the
Section Viewer [B]. Its 3D position (XYZ coordinates) is displayed in text in the
Section viewer. Starting a new picking will cancel the current one.

Picked point in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer


1020 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Picked point in the Section Viewer

Tip:
 You can also select Quit Point Creation Mode from the pop-up menu or
press on the Esc key.
 You can remove the picked point labels from the 3D View by first selecting
Rendering, then Display 3D Labels from the 3D View menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1021

Draw Polylines
Picking should be done on the colored areas of the inspection map.

To Draw a Polyline:

1. Click the Draw Polyline icon. The two sliders disappear from the
Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer and the Close Polyline icon becomes
active*.
2. Pick a series of points on the inspection map in the Inspection Map
Analyzer Viewer.
3. Right-click and select Close Polyline from the pop-up menu. The start
point is connected to the end point. Close Polyline becomes Open
Polyline.
4. Right-click again and select Open Polyline from the pop-up menu. The
start point is disconnected to the end point. Open Polyline becomes Close
Polyline.
5. Double-click to end the polyline.

The drawn polyline appears in both of the two viewers (Inspection Map
Analyzer and Section).

Drawn polyline in the Inspection Map Analyzer Viewer


1022 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Drawn polyline in the Section Viewer

6. If required, right-click in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and select


New Polyline from the pop-up menu. The drawn polyline is cancelled. You
can then start a new polyline.

Note:
 You can neither draw a circle arc nor a series of discontinuous polylines.
 (*) The Close Polyline icon may define two creation modes. Not-clicked-on
Close Polyline icon sets the open polyline creation mode. Clicked-on
Close Polyline icon sets the close polyline creation mode.
 You cannot combine the Pick Point and Draw Polyline features together.

Tip:
 You can also select Draw Polyline, Close Polyline, Open Polyline and End
Polyline from the pop-up menu.
 Pressing once Esc will cancel the current polyline. Pressing twice Esc will
cancel the current polyline and leave the polyline tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1023

Save the Results


You can create the extracted result(s) in the database and start a new point
picking (or polyline drawing) without leaving the tool. An object of 3D Point (or
Polyline) type is created and rooted in the Models Tree. Before saving a point
(or polyline), add comments to it. After saving a point (or polyline), you can edit
its related comments. To do this, display the created object properties and go
to the Label line for edition.

To Save the Results:

1. For each picked point (or drawn polyline), you can add comments.
2. Click Create to save the result.

Note: Be sure to first save the picked point (or drawn polyline) before leaving
the Point Creation (or Draw Polyline) tool. Otherwise, it will be cancelled.
1024 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select "Sections & Shifts"


Because the metric information is still stored in an inspection map, you can
extract some profiles and some cross-sections from it as in the Profile/Cross-
Section tool or inspect along a given path as in the 2D-Polyline Inspection tool.

To Select "Sections & Shifts":

1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Choose Sections & Shifts from the drop-down list.

 The Inspection Map Analyzer viewer and the Section viewer both open.
The Section viewer is split in two sub-viewers. The top sub-viewer displays
a section, or a couple of sections, or a shift depending on the option(s)
(Comparison Section, Reference Section, or 1D Inspection) chosen in
Step 2. The bottom sub-viewer displays the difference plot between a
couple of sections.
 A section is a profile resulting from the slicing over a surface on an
inspection map. A slice over a reference surface, in red, is called
Reference Section. A slice over a comparison surface, in green, is called
Comparison Section.
 The shift between a couple of Reference Section and Comparison
Section, at a given position, is called 1D Inspection.

1 - Reference Section (Red) 3 - 1D Inspection


2 - Comparison Section (Green)

 In the Section viewer, the selected inspection map is by default hidden.


The navigation is locked in 2D.
Tools in the Production Module 1025

 In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the horizontal slider and the
vertical slider are shown and only one is active a time.

Define a Section Position


You need to define a direction and a position over the selected inspection map.
The direction is given by the displacement direction of a slider and the position
by its position. You have at all two sliders (Vertical and Horizontal) and only
one can be activated a time. The active slider is in blue.

1 - Set Horizontal Slider 3 - Set Slider Position


2 - Set Vertical Slider 4 - Set Slider Point Position

Caution: The Set Horizontal Slider is grayed out when the selected
inspection map is a Tunnel.

Choose a Slider
To Choose a Slider:

1. Click the Set Horizontal Slider icon to choose the horizontal direction.
2. Or click Set Vertical Slider icon to choose the vertical direction.
3. Or position the cursor over the end of a slider and click on it.

Note: To hide (or display) the active slider, select Hide Slider (or Display
Slider) from the pop-up menu in the Inspection Map Viewer.
1026 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a Slider to a Position by Drag and Drop


To Set a Slider Position by Drag & Drop:

1. In the Inspection Map viewer, position the cursor over one of the two ends
of a slider, as illustrated below.
2. If the Horizontal Slider has been chosen, drag and drop it from Up to
Down and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be
done in this direction and at this position.
3. If the Vertical Slider has been chosen, drag and drop it from Right to Left
and reversely until it meets the position required. The slicing will be done
in this direction and at this position.

Note: The Set Horizontal Slider icon is grayed out when the selected
inspection map is a Tunnel.

Tip: You can move the two sliders in four directions (Right, Left, Up and Down)
using the arrow keys of your keyboard. In that case, the displacement is done
with a constant interval. The interval value is the one you set in the Interval
field in Step 3.
Tools in the Production Module 1027

Set a Slider to a Position by Picking


To Set a Slider to a Position by Picking:

1. Choose a slider's direction.


2. Click the Set Slider Position icon. The two sliders disappear from the
Inspection Map Analyzer viewer. The cursor changes its default shape to a
pointer.
3. Pick a point on the displayed inspection map.

 If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder); the chosen slider moves to
the picked position in the chosen direction.
 If the inspection map is a Tunnel; the Vertical Slider moves horizontally to
the picked position.

Tip: You can also right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer
to display the pop-up menu and select Set Slider Position.

Tip: Instead of choosing Set Slider Position, you can also double-click in the
inspection map.
1028 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a Slider Position by Defining Values


To Set a Slider Position by Defining Values:

1. Click the Set Slider Point Position icon. The Slider Position Definition
dialog opens.
2. If the inspection map is a Plane (or a Cylinder); choose between
Horizontal Slider and Vertical Slider.
3. If the inspection map is a Tunnel; only the Vertical Slider option can be
chosen.
4. Do one of the following:

 Check the Point option, and enter the 3D coordinates of a point. Its related
position, along the 3D Path and on the inspection map, updates.

If the position of the point is out of the inspection map. A warning message
displays in red in the Slider Position Definition dialog, and the OK button is
grayed out.

 Check the Position On 3D Path option.

If an alignment stationing is available on the selected 3D Path, the Station


Prefix value displays next to the edit field.

If no alignment stationing is available on the selected 3D Path, no Start Prefix


value displays next to the edit field.

Enter a distance value. The 3D coordinates and the position on the map of the
related point, get updated. You cannot input a position that is out of the range
delimited the Start and End positions. These positions are those defined when
performing an inspection.

5. Click OK. The Slider Position Definition dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 1029

 If Horizontal Slider has been chosen, the horizontal slider becomes active
and it jumps vertically to the defined position.
 If Vertical Slider has been chosen, the vertical slider becomes active and it
jumps horizontally to the defined position.

Note: When the format 2 Digits: 10+00 or 3 Digit 1+000 is used for the
stationing, the sub units are not used.

Choose a Type of Object to Extract


You can now choose the type of object you want to extract from the selected
inspection map. By default, all types are selected.

To Choose a Type of Object to Extract:

1. Keep all options checked.


2. Or/and clear the Reference Section option. The section in red is hidden.
3. Or/and clear the Comparison Section option. The section in green is
hidden.
4. Or/and clear the 1D Inspection option. The shift is hidden.

1 - Reference Section 3 - Comparison Section


2 - Inspection map 4 - 1D Inspection
1030 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Navigate Through the Sections


You can slice the selected inspection map with a constant interval along a
defined direction and at a defined position. The result is a set of Reference
Sections; and/or Comparison Sections, and/or 1D Inspections. Only a couple
of sections (Reference and Comparison) can be active at a time, it's the couple
in fussing.

To Navigate Through the Sections:

1. In Step 3, check the Multi-Slices option.


2. If the selected map is a Cylinder, click on the Choose Type of Unit pull-
down arrow*.

a) Select the Use Length Unit option from the list. The unit of the
Interval changes according to the unit set in the Preferences / Units /
Unit System / Length.
b) Or select the Use Angular Unit option from the list. The unit of the
Interval changes according to the unit set in the Preferences / Units /
Unit System / Angle.
c) And jump to the step 5.

3. If the selected map is a Plane, jump to the step 5.

4. If the selected map is a Tunnel, jump to the step 5.


Tools in the Production Module 1031

5. Enter a value in the Interval field.


6. Click (or ) to set a value.

In the case of a Tunnel, and with the Multi-Slices option selected:

 If the Horizontal Interval option is unchecked, the slices are set with
regular interval along the 3D Path (red path).
 If the Horizontal Interval option is checked, the slices are set with regular
interval, not along the 3D Path, but along its projection on a horizontal
plane (blue path).

7. Click the Next (or Previous) button.

1 - Reference Section (in red) 4 - Constant step used for slicing


2 - Comparison Section (in green) 5 - The active sections
3 - Shift (also called 1D inspection)
1032 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous) button moves
the horizontal slider from Down to Up (or the vertical slider from Right to Left).
The displacement is performed with a constant step which corresponds to the
value in the Interval field. In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous) button
sets the next (or previous) section(s) (and/or shift) as active.

8. If needed, check the Reverse Directions option.

In the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer, the Next (or Previous) button moves
the horizontal slider from Up to Down (or the vertical slider from Left to Right).
In the Section viewer, the Next (or Previous) button sets the previous (or next)
section(s) (and/or shift) as active.

Tip: Instead of clicking Next (or Previous), you can use the Up and Down (or
the Left and Right) Arrows on your keyboard.

Caution: (*) Only if the Horizontal Slider has been set.

Note: The 2D Lock option is unchecked of its own in case the Multi-Slices has
been chosen.
Tools in the Production Module 1033

View the Difference Plot


The Plot viewer displays the difference plot between a couple of sections. You
can zoom it in/out, pan it, or change its scale or print it.

When you create a tunnel inspection map with a 3D Path with an alignment
stationing, you can see the position of the vertical slider in the Plot viewer.

In the case of an inspection map, resulting from a cylindrical projection, to


avoid having the axis of the difference plot inverted compared to the slicing
direction, we automatically compare the axis of the cylinder with the Z-Axis, as
illustrated below.

In case of a vertical cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-Axis
is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed vertically along the slicing
direction.
1034 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In case of a horizontal cylinder and if the angle between its vector and the Z-
Axis is less than 45°, the difference plot is displayed horizontally along the
slicing direction.

In other cases, you can invert the axes manually by selecting Swap Axes.

To Manipulate a plot:

1. Click inside a graph to select it.


2. Drag and drop the graph (with the left button) to a new location to pan it.
3. Or use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom in/out.
4. Or use the left and middle buttons.

Note: Zoom In or Zoom Out will change the linear graph scale.

Note: The Zoom is centered on the current mouse location.


Tools in the Production Module 1035

Print a Plot
To Print a Plot:

1. Right-click inside a graph.


2. Select Print from the pop-up menu. The Print Setup dialog opens.
3. Define the properties of your Printer.
4. Set the Size of the Paper.
5. Add title, reference, etc. in the Legend panel.
6. Choose an Orientation between Portrait and Landscape.
7. Choose a Scale between Auto Scale and Fixed Scale.
8. Click OK. The Print Setup dialog closes.

Scale a Plot
To Scale the Plot:

1. Right-click inside a graph.


2. Select Scales from the pop-up menu. The Plot Scale dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Choose Automatic Scaling to


 Or click on the Horizontal Scale (or Vertical Scale) pull-down arrow.
 Choose a scale from the drop-down list.

4. Click OK. The Plot Scale dialog closes.


1036 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Swap the Axes


To Swap the Axes:

1. Right-click inside a graph.


2. Select Swap Axes from the pop-up menu.

Export Sections
You are able to export a set of sections to the AutoCAD DXF (or DWG) format.

Note: For all of the exports described in the next topics, the Amplification
Factor value is by default set to 3.

Horizontal Slices from a Plane Inspection


To Export Horizontal Slices From a Plane Inspection:

 If the Set Horizontal Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Horizontal
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Vertical Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.

 If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Vertical Interval field
is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1037

a) Input a distance value in the Horizontal Interval field.


b) Set a number in Amplification Factor field.
c) If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
d) If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
e) Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit field.
f) Click Export. The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog
closes.

A unique Horizontal Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.

Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.

Vertical Slices from a Plane Inspection


To Export Vertical Slices From a Plane Inspection:

 If the Set Vertical Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
1038 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Horizontal Interval


field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.

a) Input a distance value in the Vertical Interval field.


b) Set a number in Amplification Factor field.
c) If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
d) If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
e) Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit field.
f) Click Export. The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog
closes.

A unique Vertical Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Sections will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Horizontal
Interval as constant step.

Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Vertical Slices.
Tools in the Production Module 1039

Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Inspection


To Export Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Inspection:

 If the Set Vertical Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Horizontal Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.

 If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Horizontal Interval


field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.
1040 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

a) Input a distance value in the Horizontal Interval field.


b) Set a number in Amplification Factor field.
c) If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
d) If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
e) Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit field.
f) Click Export. The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog
closes

A unique Horizontal Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Horizontal Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.

Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.

Vertical Slices from a Cylinder Inspection


To Export Vertical Slices from a Cylinder Inspection:

 If the Set Horizontal Slider has been chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose from a version of the DWG (or DXF) format from the File of
Type field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1041

 If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Horizontal Interval


field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.

a) Input a distance value in the Vertical Interval field.


b) Set a number in Amplification Factor field.
c) If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
d) If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
e) Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit field.
f) Click Export. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog
closes

A unique Vertical Slice will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Horizontal Slider, with the Vertical
Interval as constant step.

Note: Out of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you can only export a set of
Horizontal Slices.
1042 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Horizontal Slices from a Tunnel Inspection


Within the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you cannot export the Horizontal
Slices from a tunnel inspection, but you can do this out of the tool by selecting
the Export Inspection Map Horizontal Slices from the File / Advanced Exports
menu.

Vertical Slices from a Tunnel Inspection


To Export Vertical Slices from a Tunnel Inspection:

 The Set Vertical Slider is by default chosen, click Export. The Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices dialog opens.

1. Choose a format (DWG (or DXF) and a version from the File of Type
field.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field and click Save. The Vertical
Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 If the Multi-Slices option has not been checked, the Horizontal Interval
field is grayed-out, as illustrated below.

 If the Multi-Slices option has been checked, the Horizontal Interval


field is grayed-out with the Interval value, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1043

a) Input a distance value in the Vertical Interval field.


b) Set a number in Amplification Factor field.
c) If required, input a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
d) If required, input a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
e) Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit field.
f) Click Export. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog
closes

A unique Vertical Section will be then exported to the chosen format.

Or

A set of Vertical Slices will be then exported to the chosen format. All result
from slicing the map horizontally along the Vertical Slider, with the Horizontal
Interval as constant step.

Caution: Outside the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you are not allowed to
export vertical slices from a single Section.
1044 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Set of Sections and 1D Inspection


To Create a Set of Sections and 1D Inspection:

1. If only one type of object has been chosen in Step 2, click the Create
button.
2. If at least two types have been chosen in Step 2, click the Create All
button.

 If the object type is Reference Section (or Comparison Section), a polyline


named OBJECT is created under the current project, in the Models Tree.

 If the object type is 1D Inspection, a 1D Inspection named OBJECT is


created under the current project, in the Models Tree.

3. Click Close. The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 1045

Create a Multitude of Sets of Sections and 1D Inspection


To Create a Multitude of Sets of Sections and 1D Inspection:

1. If the Reference Section (or Comparison Section) option has been


checked in Step 2, click the Create All button.

 A set of polylines is created. All are put in a folder, named


Map_Section_Ref (or Map_Section_Comp), followed by the Interval value.

 Each polyline is named Map_Section_Ref (or Map_Section_Comp), with


an ordering at the beginning and a position (in term of distance or angle*)
at the end, as illustrated below. The ordering is given by the direction of
the slider chosen in Step 1.

Section at the position of the cursor in the inspection map

 If the inspection map is a Tunnel, and an Alignment Stationing (on page


970) applied to the selected 3D Path, and the stationing information is
added to each created polyline. This helps the user to visualize which
Vertical Slice is at which position along the alignment:

Polylines created with the Horizontal Distance (2D) option chosen in the
Alignment Stationing tool:

Polylines created with the Distance Along Alignment (3D) option chosen in the
Alignment Stationing tool:

2. If the 1D Inspection option has been checked in Step 2, click the Create
All button.
1046 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 A set of 1D Inspections is created. All are put in a folder, named


Map_Section_Insp followed by the Interval value

 Each 1D Inspection is named Map_Section_Insp, with a numbering at the


beginning and a position (in term of distance or angle*) at the end, as
illustrated below.

 If the inspection map is a Tunnel, and an Alignment Stationing (on page


970) applied to the selected 3D Path, and the stationing information is
added to each created 1D Inspection. This helps the user to visualize
which 1D Inspection is at which position along the alignment:

3. If the Reverse Directions option has been chosen in Step 3, the numbering
order is inverted and the position of the active section(s) (and/or 1D
Inspection) changes.
4. Click Close. The Inspection Map Analyzer dialog closes.

Caution: (*) For a cylindrical inspection map (Tunnel), the cross map data
lines are numbered with the following order: from 0° to +360°. All are put in a
folder, whose name is followed by the Interval value in degrees.
Tools in the Production Module 1047

Select "Volumes & Surfaces"


Because the metric information is still stored in the inspection map, you can
extract the volume and surface information (respectively in cubic meters and in
square meters) from it as in the Volume Calculation tool. You can do this by
fencing a specific area or a series of areas. You can also filter according to a
color defined by picking, from a range of colors by specifying values or using
surface (or altitude) values. In selection, the mouse pointer changes depending
on the mode you are using. In Volumes & Surfaces, only the Inspection Map
Analyzer viewer* is opened and the horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden**.

To Select Volumes & Surfaces:

1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Volumes & Surfaces. The Volumes & Surfaces dialog appears.

1 - Polygonal Selection 4 - Select By Using Surface Values


2 - Color Range Selection 5 - Altitude Filter
3 - Define Color Range 6 - Select Whole Inspection Map Area

3. Select the whole map by clicking Select Whole Inspection Map Area.
4. Or fence an area,
5. Or pick a color,
6. Or define a color range,
7. Or use surface values,
8. Or filter altitudes.

Note:
 You can right-click anywhere in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to
display the pop-up menu and select the command you wish to use.
 * Click Restore Down in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer to swap to
the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers' display.
 ** To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
 To be able to view the 2D lock (or the inspection map) when checking the
Lock 2D (or Display 3D Map) option in the dialog, please first restore the
default layout (Inspection and Section viewers).
1048 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Fence an Area
Fencing an area is always done by picking anywhere (colored and black areas)
on the inspection map. If no area has been fenced, the whole inspection map
will be selected by default.

To Fence an Area:

1. Click Polygonal Selection .


2. Pan or zoom the inspection map in or out (if required).
3. Draw a polygonal fence by picking and double-click to end.

1 - Polygonal fence 2 - Selected area 3 - Unselected area

Tip: Pressing Esc or selecting New Fence or Close Polygon Tool from the pop-
up menu will undo the polygonal fence in progress.

4. Click on the pull down arrow of the Polygonal Selection list.


5. Select Add by Polygonal Selection .
6. Fence another area. This newly fenced area is added to the previous one.
Tools in the Production Module 1049
1 - Fencing of addition shape 2 - The newly defined area is added to the old
one

Tip: Instead of selecting Add By Polygonal Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Ctrl. You should do this before ending the polygon.

7. Click on the pull down arrow of the Polygonal Selection list.


8. Select Subtract by Polygonal Selection .
9. Draw another polygonal fence. Areas in common are subtracted.

1 - Fencing of subtraction shape 2 - Areas in common are removed

Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract By Polygonal Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift. You should do this before ending the polygon.

10. Click on the pull down arrow of the Polygonal Selection list.
11. Select Intersect with Polygonal Selection .
12. Draw another polygonal fence. Areas in common are kept.
1050 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
1 - Fencing of intersection shape 2 - Areas in common are kept

Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect With Polygonal Selection, you can also use
its related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl.

Note: If there is no common area, all fenced areas will be cancelled.

Tip: To leave the polygon selection mode, you can select Close Polygon Tool
from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes & Sections dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1051

Pick a Color
To Pick a Color:

1. Picking should always be done inside the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer
and anywhere over the colored areas of the map.
2. Pan or zoom the inspection map in or out (if required).
3. Click Select Color Range .
4. Pick a pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to the
picked point color; the areas of this map sharing the same color than the
picked point are kept.

1 - Cursor shape when selecting Select Color 2 - Filtering color


Range 3 - Unfiltered colors are darken

5. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
6. Click Add Color Range Selection .
7. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The map is filtered according to
the newly picked color.

1 - Cursor shape when selecting Add Color 2 - New filtering color


Range Selection

Tip: Instead of selecting Add Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Ctrl. You should do this before picking another pixel.

8. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
9. Select Subtract Color Range Selection .
1052 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

10. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the
same color than the picked point are subtracted from the selection.

Cursor shape when selecting Subtract Color Range Selection

Tip: Instead of selecting Subtract Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift. You should do this before picking another pixel.

11. Click on the pull down arrow of the Color Range Selection list.
12. Select Intersect Color Range Selection .
13. Pick another pixel on the inspection map. The areas of the map having the
color in common are kept. Those not having the same color are unkept.

Cursor shape when selecting Color Range Selection

Tip: Instead of selecting Intersect Color Range Selection, you can also use its
related shortcut key Shift + Ctrl.

Note: If there is no pixel area, all picked pixels will be cancelled.

Tip: To leave the selection by color range mode, you can select Quit Selection
by Color Range from the pop-up menu, click on any icon in the Volumes &
Sections dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1053

Define a Color Range


To Define a Color Range:

1. Pan or zoom the inspection map in or out (if required).


2. Click Define Color Range. The Color Range Definition dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Filter according to one bound.

a) Choose between Keep Above and Keep Below.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

1 - Bound value 2 - The elevation differences above or below


the bound value are kept and the others are
darkened

 Filter between two bounds.

a) Select Keep Inside or Keep Outside.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 and Bound 2 fields.
1054 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The elevation difference inside or outside the bound values are kept and the others are darkened

4. Click OK.
Tools in the Production Module 1055

Use the Surface Values


The shift between two surfaces on an inspection map along a given direction
and at a defined position can be viewed in the Section viewer when selecting
1D Inspection in Sections & Shifts. This shift is a surface of its own. That’s
why; the purpose of this new feature in RealWorks is to allow the user to filter
an inspection map according to a surface value or between two values.

To Use the Surface Values:

1. Click Select by Using Surface Values. The By Surface Selection dialog


opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window in place of the
Inspection Map Analyzer dialog. In Select by Using Surface Values, only the
Inspection Map Analyzer viewer is opened and the horizontal and vertical
sliders appear again.

1 - Allows setting a section direction 2 - Allows filtering above/below a value or


inside/outside two values

2. Do one of the following:

 Check the Horizontal option. The horizontal slider becomes active.


 Check the Vertical option. The vertical slider becomes active.

3. Do any of the following:

 Select surfaces with values above a bounded value.


1056 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

a) Select the Above Bound option.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

 Select surfaces with values below a bounded value.

a) Select the Below Bound option.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

 Select surfaces with values between two bounded values.

a) Select the Inside Bounds option.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.
c) Enter a value in the Bound 2 field.

 Select surfaces with values outside two bounded values.

a) Select the Outside Bounds option.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.
c) Enter a value in the Bound 2 field.

4. Click Preview. Shifts between surfaces are extracted.

1 - Surfaces inside two bounds 3 - Surfaces out of bound tolerance are 4 -


2 - Section direction selected and darkened
Surfaces outside two bounds

5. Check the results in Step 2.


6. Click Apply.

Tip: You can also choose Select by Using Surface Values from the pop-up
menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1057

Filter the Altitudes


The new RealWorks feature allows you to filter an inspection map based on a
given altitude or between two defined altitudes. The inspection map needs to
be of Cylinder shape.

To Filter an Altitude:

1. Click Altitude Filter. The Altitude Filtering dialog opens.


2. Do one of the following:

 Filter according to one bound.

a) Choose between Keep Above and Keep Below.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 field.

 Filter between two bounds.

a) Select Keep Inside or Keep Outside.


b) Enter a value in the Bound 1 and Bound 2 fields.

3. Click OK. The Altitude Filtering dialog closes.

Report the Volume and Surface Information


The extraction results are listed in text in the Volumes & Surfaces dialog. You
can save these results in a report file in rft format. Note that you cannot save
the results as permanent objects in the RealWorks database as in the Volume
Calculation, Twin Surface Inspection and Surface to Model Inspection tools.

To Report the Volume and Surface Information:

1. Click Report. The Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.


2. Click Export. Another Volume Calculation Report dialog opens.
3. Enter a name for the report file in the File Name field.
4. Find a location where you want the report file to be stored.
5. Click Save.

Select "Iso-Curves"
You can extract and create Iso-Curves (of polyline type) from an inspection
map. Iso-Curves are computed from a position (called Reference) with a
certain spacing (called Interval).
1058 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract Iso-Curves
In Iso-Curves, the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers are opened.
The horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden in the Inspection Map Analyzer
viewer and the Section viewer is empty of contents*.

To Extract Iso-Curves:

1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Iso-Curves. The Iso-Curves dialog appears. The inspection map is
by default not displayed in the Section viewer.
3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.

1 - ColorBar 3 - Reference 5 - Number of estimated


2 - Interval 4 - Select Reference by Iso-Curves with the default
Picking Reference and Interval values

4. To define the Reference, do one of the following:

 Enter a value in the Reference field.


 Click (or ) to set a value.
 Click Select Reference by Picking and pick one point on the inspection
map.

5. To define the Interval, do one of the following:

 Enter a value in the Interval field.


 Click (or ) to set a value.

6. Click Preview.
Tools in the Production Module 1059

The first computed Iso-Curve will be the Reference Iso-Curve; this means that
it will have height the value set in the Reference field. The other Iso-Curves will
then be computed from the Reference Iso-Curve by propagation in two
directions (up and down) with the defined Interval. The active Iso-Curve (not
necessarily the Reference Iso-Curve but the first in the computation’s order) is
of fuchsia color in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in
the ColorBar in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer. For a given active Iso-
Curve, the information window at the top right corner of the Section viewer
shows in text its order, shift and size (of the polyline).

1 - Active iso-curve 2 - Information window

Note:
 Computing a huge quantity of Iso-Curves may take a very long time. In
that case, an information dialog appears and prompts you to continue or
abort the operation.
 * To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
 To be able to view the iso-curves in the Section viewer, hide the inspection
map in the 3D View by un-checking the Display 3D Map option.
1060 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Browse Iso-Curves
The active Iso-Curve is the first in the computation’s order. It is of fuchsia color
in the Section viewer and is colored according to its value in the ColorBar in
the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.

To Browse Iso-Curves:

1. Click Display Next Iso-Curve (or Display Previous Iso-Curve ) to set the
next (or previous) iso-curve as active.
2. Or click Display First Iso-Curve (or Display Last Iso-Curve ) to set the
first (or last) iso-curve as active.
3. Or key in an iso-curve’s number and press Enter.
4. Or pick an iso-curve in the Inspection Map Analyzer viewer.

Note:
 You can set several iso-curves as actives. To do this, multi-select the ones
you need in the Section viewer by combining the use of Ctrl with clicking.
 You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Iso-
Curve (or Display Previous Iso-Curve).
Tools in the Production Module 1061

Define Principal Iso-Curves


After previewing the result, you can choose and assign some of the Iso-Curves
as principals. The remained Iso-Curves are then considered as intermediate
Iso-Curves. Each principal Iso-Curve has a label which contains its height
information in text.

To Define Principal Iso-Curves:

1. Check the Define Principal Iso-Curves option.

1 - Defines the first principal 2 - Defines the number of Iso- 3 - Select First Principal Iso-
Iso-Curve by entering a Curves to skip Curve by Picking
number

2. To define the First value, do one of the following:

 Enter a number in the First field.


 Or click (or ) to set a number.
 Or click and pick an Iso-Curve in the Section viewer.

3. To define the Skip value, do one of the following:

 Enter a number in the Skip field.


 Or click (or ) to set a number.

1 - Principal Iso-Curves 2 - Intermediate Iso-Curves


1062 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Iso-Curves
Iso-Curves are created in the RealWorks database as 3D polylines in a set
(named Cross-MapData-IsoCurves XX where XX is the Interval value) under
the current (active) project. You can export them to the AutoCAD application.

To Create Iso-Curves:

1. Click Create All.


2. Click Close.

Note:
 Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 Leaving the Iso-Curves sub-tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.

Select "Colored Meshes"


You can extract and create a Colored Mesh not based on the point clouds,
meshes or model (prerequisites for doing the inspection) but directly from a
surface (Reference or Comparison) of an inspection map. A Colored Mesh is
built by using both the grid information and the color information found in the
inspection map. The grid information is used for computing vertices while the
color information is required for coloring.
Tools in the Production Module 1063

Extract Colored Meshes


In Colored Mesh, the Inspection Map Analyzer and Section viewers are
opened and the horizontal and vertical sliders are hidden*.

To Extract Colored Meshes:

1. In the Inspection Map Analyzer dialog, click on the pull down arrow.
2. Select Colored Mesh. The Colored Mesh dialog appears. The inspection
map is by default not displayed in the Section viewer.
3. If required, check the Display 3D Map option to view the inspection map.
4. Do one of the following:

 Check the Reference Surface option.


 Check the Comparison Surface option.

5. Click Preview. A colored mesh is then extracted.

1 - Colored mesh 2 - Inspection map

Note:
 After clicking Preview, the number of vertex and the number of triangles
related to the computed mesh are shown in the Colored Mesh dialog.
 * To make one of the two sliders appeared, select Display Slider from the
pop-up menu.
1064 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Colored Meshes


To Create Colored Meshes:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Note:
 Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 Leaving the Colored Mesh sub-tool without saving the result will make
appeared a warning message.
Tools in the Production Module 1065

Print Inspection Maps


To Print an Inspection Map:

1. Right-click inside the Inspection Map Analyzer view.


2. Select Print from the pop-up menu. The Print Setup dialog opens.
3. Choose a printer from the Printer panel.
4. Choose a size and a source from the Paper panel.
5. Define an orientation for the paper by checking either Portrait or
Landscape.
6. Fill in comments in the Legend panel.
7. Choose between Auto Scale and Fixed Scale.
8. If Fixed Scale has been chosen, click on the pull-down arrow and select a
scale from the list.
9. Click Preview. A preview of the inspection map appears.
10. In the preview mode, do one of the following:

 Click Print to print the inspection map.


 Click Zoom In to magnify the inspection map.
 Click Zoom Out to reduce the inspection map (after zooming in).
 Click Next Page (if there is more than one page).
 Click Prev Page (if the current page is other than the first page).
 Click Two Pages (if there is more than one page).
 Press Esc to leave the preview mode.

11. Click OK. The Print Setup dialog closes.

Tip:
 You can also click Print in the Main toolbar or select Print from the File
menu.
 You can also select a printer from the network (or set the current printer's
properties) by clicking on the Network (or Properties) button in the Print
Setup dialog.

Inspect the Flatness of a Floor


The Floor Inspection feature lets the user inspect quite quickly the flatness of a
floor. The result can be saved in the RealWorks database and exported into a
report and other files in order to be opened in other software solutions.
1066 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the Inspection Map group, click the Floor Inspection icon. The Floor
Inspection dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1067

Edit the Selected Point Cloud


Frequently, the selected cloud contains many points. Some are required for the
inspection like points on the ground and others are not. You need to isolate
and keep points on the ground. To do this, you can use the Segmentation tool
and/or the Ground Extraction (on page 345) feature in the Sampling (see
"Sample Point Clouds" on page 331) tool.
1068 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define an Inspection Area


You need to define an area which delimits the part of the ground to inspect.

To Define an Inspection Area:

1. Click the Define Area button. The 3D scene is locked in 2D, in Top view, in
the XY plane of the current frame.
2. Pick a point, anywhere.
3. Pick another point, opposite to the first one.

 The two points define a rectangular area which delimits the part of the
ground to inspect.
 Points inside the defined area are fitted with a plane, with red edges and
yellow background. This plane is called Reference Plane. It will be used as
a projection plane for inspecting the ground. Its height along the Z axis (of
the current frame) is displayed in the Elevation field.
 When you change the current area to a new one, the value in the
Elevation field changes too.
 When you hover the cursor over the plane, its manipulators appear, one
per edge and one per corner.

4. If required, drag and drop a manipulator to resize the plane.


Tools in the Production Module 1069

5. Click the Done button.

 A Grid, superimposed to the plane, appears.


 The Grid Origin and Grid Spacing fields become enabled.

Note: You cannot undo the defined area. If you wish to do it, you need to
define a new one.
1070 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define an Inspection Grid


The Grid, which appears over the area previously defined, has by default its
Origin set at its bottom left corner. The Spacing between two consecutive lines
(horizontal or vertical) is the last set one. The origin sets the position where the
grid starts.

1 - Origin of the grid 2 - Spacing of the grid

To Define an Inspection Grid:

1. Define the origin of the grid by performing one of the following:

1. In the Grid Origin field, enter the 3D coordinates of a position.


2. Press Enter.

If the position is within the defined area, the Origin moves to the position.
If the position is outside the defined area like in [P1], the position the closer to
the defined area is then considered [P2]. The Origin moves then to [P2]. The
3D coordinates of [P2] should be within the defined area.
Tools in the Production Module 1071

Or

3. Click . The 3D scene is locked in 2D, in Top view, in the XY plane


of the current frame.
4. Pick a point on the defined area. You are not allowed to pick a
position outside the defined plane.

2. In the Grid Spacing field, input a distance value.


1072 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Reference Plane


In this step, you need to define an altitude for the Reference Plane.

To Define a Reference Plane:

1. Input a distance value*in the Elevation field.


2. Press Enter.

Or

3. Click . The Reference Plane and the Grid disappear.


4. If required, bring the view to Front .
5. Pick a point on the displayed cloud.
6. If required, click . This resets the elevation to the average value.

Note: (*) The value you entered does not need to correspond to the height of a
point on the cloud. You can set a height higher than the cloud.
Tools in the Production Module 1073

Generate an Inspection
To Preview the Inspection Result:

1. If required, check the Fill Holes option.


2. If required, check the Out of Tolerance option and input a distance value in
the field below.
3. Click the Preview button. A plane-based Inspection Map is computed with
a resolution smaller than the Grid one, (1/10 of the Grid Spacing resolution
with a minimum of 1 mm beyond which you cannot go down).

 In the 3D View, the Inspection Map is by default displayed. Its Color Bar,
in red and blue, helps you to easily identify the regions, on the ground and
in the defined area, above zero (Red), and those that are below (Blue).
You may have some regions in black. There are no points inside such
regions.
 A set of horizontal and vertical lines is also displayed. These lines contain
the points found for each node of the Grid. Each of these points is the
deviation of the corresponding cell of the Inspection Map. If the Origin
point defined is inside the area of the Inspection Map, a node is at this
position.
 The snapshot below illustrates the Inspection Map, the Grid and the cloud
intentionally un-stacked

N - Node, intersection between a vertical line P - Point on the cloud with XYZ coordinates
and horizontal line, on the grid
ED - Elevation Difference
1074 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. If required, check either Display Cloud, or Display Inspection Map, or


Display Grid to hide each of them in the 3D View.
5. If required, change each of the parameters previously defined.
6. And generate a new preview.

 If the Fill Holes option has been checked, the regions in black on the
inspection map are filled with the information found in the neighborhoods.

 If the Out of Tolerance option has been checked, some regions in gray
appear on the inspection map. These regions are the points whose
deviation is in the defined Tolerance, as illustrated below.
Tools in the Production Module 1075
1076 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Generate a Report
To Generate a Report:

1. In the Generate Report panel, check the Above Reference (Red) option
and/or Below Reference (Blue) option.
2. Click the Export button. A dialog opens.
3. In the Look In field, locate a drive/folder to store the report.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field.
5. Click Save. Five files are created.

 "Given_Name"_Floor Flatness Inspection Report in RTF format.


 "Given_Name"_Map_With Annotated Deviation in JPEG format.

 All the points are displayed on the inspection map as follows: X


(cross), ID (name) and deviation value.
 Points in yellow and white color are those the user explicitly asks to
be exported, while those in dark gray are not.
Tools in the Production Module 1077

 "Given_Name"_Map in TIF format. The file contains an image of the


Inspection Map.
 "Given_Name"_Map in TXT format. This file contains the four corners for
the Tiff image: Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom Right. They
are useful to locate the Inspection Map in 3D.
 "Given_Name"_Points in TXT format. This file contains the points written
in the following format:

 The name of each point is based on a unique ID defined in the


Inspection Grid. When you export several times with the same grid,
you will always have the same ID and the same coordinates for each
point. The coordinates of the points are exported in the current frame,
and with the current units and decimal place that have been set in the
Preferences of RealWorks.

 If the Above Reference (Red) option has been checked, only points with
positive deviation are exported (in the report).
 If the Below Reference (Blue) has been checked, only points with negative
deviation are exported (in the report).
 If the Out of Tolerance option has been checked, points whose deviation
enters in the field of the defined option are not exported (in the report).

Save the Inspection Result


To Save the Inspection Result:

1. Click Create.

A folder, named Floor Inspection-Spacing "Value", is created and rooted under


the Models Tree.
At the same time, an Inspection Map and a Polyline, respectively named Map
and Grid, are created and stored under the folder. Both have "Unclassified" as
layer.

2. Click Close.
1078 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Floor Flatness/Floor Levelness


The FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) tool enables to measure the floor flatness
and levelness values FF and FL, at a specific area, directly from the 3D point
cloud of a scanned floor. The values should be compliant with the ASTM
E1155 standard.

Open the Tool


The input of the FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) tool should be a cleaned point
cloud (only floor) which needs to be enough dense (1 point / 10 mm is the
required minimum; 1 points / mm is recommended).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the Inspection Map group, click the FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) icon.
The FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1079

Define a Test Section


A test section is a rectangle created by picking THREE points, on the displayed
cloud. It must be in compliance with the ASTM E1155 standard in terms of
dimensions and surface, i.e., at least 2.44m for both sides and higher than
29.73m2 for the surface area

To Define a Test Section:

1. In Step 1, click the Define button. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the
Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Pick the first point on the displayed point cloud data.
3. Move the cursor to pick the second point. The segment, linking the first
picked point to the cursor, initially in red switches to green when its length
matches the length specified by the ASTM E1155 standard.

4. Pick the second point on the displayed point cloud data.


5. Move the cursor to pick the third point. The rectangle, initially in red
switches to green when its surface matches the surface specified by the
ASTM E1155 standard.
1080 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. Click the Validate button to validate.

Or

7. Pick the third point on the displayed point cloud data to validate.

If the drawn test section is not in compliance with the ASTM E1155 standard in
terms of dimensions and surface, an error message appears and prompts you
the resize the drawn section by using the edge and corner manipulators.

Tip: You can choose Define Test Section from the pop-up menu instead of
clicking Define.

Tip: You can press Enter or choose Validate from the pop-up menu instead of
clicking Validate.

Note: Press Esc. to cancel the test section in progress.


Tools in the Production Module 1081

Create and Edit Samples


A sample is a segment created by picking TWO points, inside the boundaries
of the test section previously defined. All must be uniformly distributed across
the test section and at 45° to the sides of the test section rectangle.

If the length of the sample is less than 11 ft, the picking (of the second point)
fails (with a beep) and an error message displays.
If the minimum distance between two samples is less than 4 ft., the picking (of
the second point) fails (with a beep) and an error message displays.
If the sample is in an area that does not contain sufficient point cloud data, an
error message displays and the newly drawn sample is discarded.
1082 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Samples
To Create Samples:

1. Click the Add Sample icon. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the
Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
2. Pick the first point on the displayed point cloud data.
3. Move the cursor to pick the second point. The segment, linking the first
picked point to the cursor, initially in ORANGE switches to GREEN when
its length matches the length specified by the ASTM E1155 standard.
4. Pick the second point on the displayed point cloud data. The scene is free
from the 2D lock.
5. Repeat the steps from 1 to 4 for creating a new sample. It is in RED if the
minimum distance which separates that sample to the first one is less than
4 ft. It turns to ORANGE first if the distance matches the ASTM E1155
standard specification, and then to GREEN if the length matches the
ASTM E1155 standard specification.

 A sample newly created is added to a list of samples with its FF and FL


values.
 Each new sample is automatically named (1, 2, 3, etc.).

 Below the list, the minimum and overall values of FF and FL are displayed
with the 90% Confidence interval.

 The Minimal Number of Readings according to the measured area and the
Total Number of Readings are also displayed. Readings are
measurements done a sample, spaced a constant step of 1ft.
Tools in the Production Module 1083

 A defined sample is visible in the 3D View with its full name (name + FF:
xx FL:xx).

Tip: You can also use the shortcut A or choose Add Sample from the pop-up
menu.

Delete Samples
To Delete Samples:

1. Select an already defined sample from the list.


2. Click the Delete Sample icon.

Tip: You can choose Delete Sample from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo the deletion of a sample.


1084 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Report
You are able to create a report in the RTF format. The Report button remains
grayed out as long as the number of defined readings does not reach the
minimum number of required readings, which is related to the size of the test
section.

To Create a Report:

1. Click the Report button. If the defined samples are not uniformly
distributed over the test section, a warning appears.
2. Click Yes. The FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) Report dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in
the Look In field.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added
automatically.
5. Click Save. The Enter Contract Specifications for Report dialog opens.

6. Input a value in the Specified Overall Value (SOV) field.


7. Input a value in the Minimum Local Value (MLV) field.
8. Input a value in the Specified Overall Value (SOV) field.
9. Input a value in the Minimum Local Value (MLV) field.
10. Click Create. The Enter Contract Specifications for Report dialog closes
and the report displays.

The report contains a snapshot of the test section with the samples displayed.
It also contains the tolerances (Specified Overall Value (SOV) and Minimum
Local Value (MLV) for both FF and FL) used and associated pass/fail result for
each sample and overall, the number of readings, the measured area.
It shows the FF and FL values, and the 90% Conf. Intervals for each sample,
for the overall and minimal.
Tools in the Production Module 1085

Close the Tool


The purpose of this tool is to create a report. No object creation is permitted.
Closing the tool will make all modifications lost.

Create a 3D Inspection Cloud


The main function of the 3D Inspection tool is to calculate the distance
between each point of the compared cloud to a reference surface. The result is
a colored cloud where colors stand for a distance (e.g. blue for the closest
points and red for furthest points, according to a predefined ColorBar).

Open the Tool


To open the Tool:

1. Select two items from the Project Tree.


2. In the 3D Inspection group, click the 3D Inspection icon. The 3D
Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The first item (by
order of selection) is called Reference and is displayed in red in the 3D View.
The second item (by order of selection) called Comparison is green. You can
display (or hide) each of them in the 3D View by checking (or un-checking) the
Display Reference (or Display Comparison).

You use the Segmentation (or Sampling) sub-tool for defining a region (or for
reducing the number of points) on each of the two selected items (keep
checked either Display Reference or Display Comparison) or on both of them
(keep both checked). Reload Points will reload points of the item for which the
display option has been checked.

The Min. Distance and the Max. Distance are both set as "Undefined" in Step
1.

Tip: The 3D Inspection tool can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1086 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud


To Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud:

1. Click Preview.

 The inspection is done by comparing the Reference with the Comparison.


The result is a 3D inspection cloud inside which points are colored
according to the difference (expressed in terms of elevation) between the
Reference and the Comparison. A ColorBar located at the right side of the
3D inspection cloud is a scale of elevation values and each color
corresponds to an elevation value.
 The Min. Distance and the Max. Distance become enabled and display in
text the values.
 The Preview becomes dimmed and Step 2 is enabled.

1 - The ColorBar 2 - The 3D inspection cloud

2. If required, click Swap Surfaces .

 The Reference becomes a surface to inspect (Comparison) and the


Comparison swaps for Reference.
 The Preview becomes enabled again.

Note: Reload Points will reload the Comparison.


Tools in the Production Module 1087

Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud


The Min. Distance and Max Distance values of the computed 3D inspection
cloud are by-default set as the From and To values in Step 2 in the 3D
Inspection dialog. The From and To values both define a filtering range. This
means that points (of the computed 3D inspection cloud) out of the defined
range will not be taken into account.

To Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud:

1. Enter a distance value in the From field and press Enter.


2. Enter a distance value in the To field and press Enter.

The 3D inspection cloud will be updated according to the defined range as well
as its related ColorBar.

The 3D inspection cloud before filtering

The 3D inspection cloud after filtering

Note:
 The unit of measurement for From (or To) is set to Meter, you do not need
to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in
Preferences.
1088 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 The From value should be less than the To value and reversely.

Tip: You can undo the filtering by selecting e.g. Undo from the Edit menu.
Doing that will reload the computed 3D inspection cloud as well as its related
ColorBar.

Create a 3D Inspection Cloud


To Create a 3D Inspection Cloud:

 Click Create. The 3D Inspection dialog closes.

An object of 3D Inspection Cloud type named Inspection is created and rooted


under the Models Tree. This object is by-default selected so that you can
launch directly the 3D Inspection Analyzer tool; and the two items required for
the comparison are both unselected.

You can select a folder from the Project Tree under which you want to put the
created 3D Inspection Cloud. You only need to do that before clicking Create.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: If required, select the Cloud Color rendering from the 3D View >
Rendering menu to be able to view the 3D inspection cloud with color
information.

Analyze a 3D Inspection Cloud


The 3D Inspection Analyzer tool enables to filter a 3D inspection cloud by
keeping points between two defined values or to extract connected cloud(s) as
individual component(s). This tool can only be used as a standalone tool after
selecting a computed 3D inspection cloud.
Tools in the Production Module 1089

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a 3D inspection cloud from the Project Tree.


2. In the3D Inspection group, click the 3D Inspection Analyzer icon.

The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace
window. The selected 3D inspection cloud is by-default displayed in the 3D
View. The number of points inside the 3D inspection cloud is displayed in Step
1 - Extract Cloud by Range in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.

3. Edit a ColorBar,
4. Or extract a cloud from the 3D inspection cloud,
5. Or auto-Split a 3D inspection cloud in a cluster of clouds.
6. Or hide (or display) the 3D inspection cloud by checking (or un-checking)
the Display Inspection Cloud option.

Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection Clouds


Extracting a cloud from a 3D inspection cloud consists in defining a range
(From and To values). Inspected points inside the defined range will be then
kept.

To Extract a Cloud From a 3D Inspection Cloud:

1. Do one of the following:

 Define the From value as follows:

 Drag and drop the From slider.


 Or key a value in the From filed and press Enter.
 Or use the Up (or Down ) button.

 Define the To value as follows:

 Drag and drop the To slider.


 Or key a value in the From filed and press Enter.
 Or use the Up (or Down ) button.
1090 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - The "To" slider and the "To" value in the 4 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud below the
ColorBar "To" value
2 - The "From" slider and the "From" value in 5 - Points of the 3D inspection cloud above the
the ColorBar "From" value
3 - The 3D inspection cloud

The 3D inspection cloud's Number of Points (see Step 1) as well as its aspect
and the color associated to it (see 3D View) will be then updated. Kept points
are those in the defined range; they remain with their own color. The unkept
points are those out of the defined range. All are colored in black when they
are above the From value, and in white when below the To value. The Reload
Points becomes enabled.

2. Click Extract. Unkept points are removed from the 3D View.


Tools in the Production Module 1091

3. If required, define a new range. The Extract button becomes again


enabled.
4. If required, click Reload Points . The 3D inspection cloud takes its initial
state (number of points and distances From and To) as well as the
ColorBar even if you have done several extractions.

Note:
 The unit of measurement for From (or To) is set to Meter, you do not need
to enter "m" after the value. You can change the unit of measurement in
Preferences.
 The From value cannot be greater than the To value, and reversely.
 The Extract button becomes dimmed.
 The Display Inspection Cloud option when checked (or unchecked)
enables to display (or hide) the cloud in display in the 3D View. This cloud
can be the initial 3D inspection cloud or an extracted cloud.
1092 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a Cluster of Clouds


This step is an option. You can split the selected 3D inspection cloud or a
cloud extracted from it. If the selected 3D inspection cloud is composed of
connected components, this step can help you in splitting these connected
components into individual components. Sometimes, you need to first remove
connected part(s) from the 3D inspection cloud by extracting (see Step 1). No
parameter is required.

To Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a Cluster of Clouds:

1. Click on the Split to Clusters button. A dialog displaying the number of


components found appears.
2. Click OK. The dialog closes.

 Each component is a Cloud and each has its own color and displayed in
the 3D View.
 The Split to Clusters button becomes dimmed.
 The 3D inspection cloud (filtered or not) is hidden. The Display Inspection
Cloud option is unchecked by its own.
Tools in the Production Module 1093

Tip: If required, apply the Cloud Color rendering to be able to view each spilt
component with its own color.

Note: You can split a 3D inspection cloud without extracting a cloud from it. To
do that, bypass the Step 1 in the 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog.

Create the Extracted Cloud(s)


To Create the Extracted Cloud(s):

1. Click the Create button. The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog remains open.

 If the 3D inspection cloud has not been split but only filtered, a lonely
cloud named as follows Insp3D-Cloud From value - To value is created.
 If the 3D inspection cloud has been split; each component is created as a
Cloud. Each has its own color and all are put under a folder called
Extracted Clouds.

2. If required, use the extracted cloud as input for a new extraction (or
splitting).
3. Click Close. The 3D Inspection Analyzer dialog closes.

Tip: Close can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

2D-Polyline Inspection
This tool enables to compare a model to a point cloud. A model can come from
an imported DXF (or DWG) file or results from cross-sectioning. An imported
model must be already georeferenced with the point cloud. In both cases, a
model is a 2D polyline which should be composed of at least three non-aligned
points.
1094 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


If your project you load has no 2D polyline, to activate the 2D-Polyline
Inspection tool you need to import or create at least one. Otherwise, an error
message will appear. If your project contains more than one 2D polyline, you
can launch the tool and select one for inspection. A 2D polyline should be
formed by at least three non-aligned points.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select one point cloud (or more) from the Project Tree.
2. From the Quick Access Toolbar, click the Open icon. The Open dialog
opens.
3. Select AutoCAD® files (*.dxf, *.dwg) from the File Of Type field.
4. Select the Add To Project option (if needed).
5. In the Look In field, navigate to the drive/folder where the .dxf file is
located.
6. Double-click on the file to select it. The DXF File Import dialog opens.
7. Select the DXF length unit and click OK.
8. In the Polyline Inspection group, click the 2D-Polyline Inspection icon. The
2D-Polyline Inspection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and is composed
of four parts: The first part contains two sub-tools: Segmentation and
Sampling. The second part allows you to select a model and to set a thickness.
The third part is to perform the inspection. The fourth and last part is to save
the inspection result in the RealWorks database, close the tool and obtain
access to the online help. The selected cloud is displayed in white in the 3D
View.
Tools in the Production Module 1095

Select a Model for Inspection


Inspecting in 2D means by plane. A virtual plane drawn by the non-aligned
points of the selected model cuts the selected point cloud. The thickness you
set corresponds to the thickness of this plane and it should be higher than 0.
The 2D inspection is done by comparing the selected model to the points that
are in this plane. All available models in your project are stored in the selection
list in the 2D-Polyline Inspection dialog, except those with less than three
points and you can select one of them by dropping down this list. If you select
a set of models before opening the 2D-Polyline Inspection tool, these models
will be unselected except one which is the first in the selection list.

To Select a Model for Inspection:

1. Click on the Select Model and Thickness pull down arrow.

1 - Field for selecting a model 2 - Field for setting a thickness

2. Select a model from the drop down list.

Set a Thickness
To Set a Thickness:

1. Enter a value in the Thickness field.


2. Press Enter on your keyboard.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
1096 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

View the 2D Inspection Result


The 2D inspection is automatically performed once a model is selected, even if
you have not set a thickness. RealWorks will set a thickness by default. The
inspection result can be viewed in the 3D View window and in a graph at the
bottom of the 2D-Polyline Inspection dialog (see A). The selected (active)
model and points resulting from the inspection are displayed in the 3D View.
Each distance, which separates a point from the model, is shown with a color
(see B). Two options are available: you can lock the result to 2D and display or
hide the selected point cloud. A color scale at the left side of the 3D View gives
an idea of distance for a given color.

[A]

1 - The inspection graph 4 - Sliders for filtering points based on a given


2 - The selected model distance
3 - The inspection between the model and the 5 - The color scale giving the distance
cloud at this position information

[B]

In this picture, the selected point cloud, the In this picture, only points resulting from the
selected model and the inspection result are inspection with the selected model are
displayed in the 3D View window. displayed
Tools in the Production Module 1097

Note: In the 2D locked position, you can display the 2D grid. To do this, you
can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and
select Show 2D Grid or select the 2D Grid/Show 2D Grid command from the
3D View menu bar.

Filter the 2D Inspection Result


Two sliders (one at each end of the inspection graph) allow you to filter points
according to a given distance. The Right end corresponds to the maximum
distance from the model while the Left end corresponds to the minimum
distance from the model. Filtering is done by moving one of the two sliders.

To Filter the 2D Inspection Result:

1. Place your cursor over a slider. It becomes red.


2. Drag the cursor from its current position (maximum or minimum distance).
3. Drop the cursor until it comes closed to the distance you attempt to reach.
The filtering will be done between this range of distances.

1 - The model's position 4 - The maximum distance from the model


2 - The filtering result 5 - The filtering range
3 - The minimum distance from the model

Note: In the 2D locked position or not, you can print the inspection result. To
do this, you can either right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-
up menu and select Print or select the Print command from the File menu bar.
1098 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save the 2D Inspection Result


The inspection results are summarized in the Step 3 of the 2D-Polyline
Inspection dialog. You may find four major information: the maximum distance
from the model, the minimum distance from the model, the positive area and
the negative area. If more than one 2D polyline are available in your project,
you can select a new one and set a new thickness; the inspection is
automatically updated. Once the inspection is done, you can the result in
RealWorks database.

To Save the 2D Inspection Result:

1. Click Save.
2. Click Close.

Note: Instead of clicking Close in the dialog, you can also right-click anywhere
in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and then select Close or press
twice Esc.
1099

Work with Images


The Ortho-Image group includes a set of tools dedicated to the production of
either a unique (or a series) of ortho-image(s) from a point cloud, by converting
imported images. The created images can be exported or use for creating
rectified images.

Note: You can also find the Ortho-Image group in the Registration module, but
without the Ortho-Projection, Multi Ortho-Projection and Image Rectification
features.

This group includes a set of tools that are related to matched images.

Note: You can also find the Matched Image group in the Registration module,
but without the Image Matching feature.
1100 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create Ortho-Images
Conventional and perspective photographs taken by any 2D camera show
distortions caused by the camera angle and the topography itself. These
phenomena can be noticed particularly on aerial photographs. Non-uninformed
scale on this kind of photographs prevents from direct measurement, like on a
map. These disadvantages can be cancelled by ortho-rectification. This means
that such photographs are computer-deformed.

The Ortho-Projection tool allows you to create ortho-images from the selected
point cloud or textured mesh. You can either export the ortho-images to CAD
software, such as AutoCAD® or MicroStation® for further processing or
drafting operations, or you can perform 2D measurements directly within
RealWorks. The basic principle behind this tool is to choose a Projection Plane
on which the ortho-image will be created, and choose the right information that
you want to store in this image, and then create it. All the metric information will
be stored in this image, i.e. measurements made on this photo will be
accurate.
Tools in the Production Module 1101

Open the Tool


If a point cloud has been selected, you can work it to delimit an area for the
Ortho-Projection calculations, to render it cleaner without parasite points or to
simplify it. Use the two following sub-tools (Sampling and Segmentation) for
doing these operations.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree.


2. In the Ortho-Image group, click the Ortho-Projection icon. The Ortho-
Projection dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the Workspace window and is composed
of four parts. Each part corresponds to one step in the ortho-projection
computation. The first step (called Define Projection Plane) is to define,
orientate and check a Projection Plane. The second part (called Define Zone of
Interest) is to draw a Zone of Interest on the previous Projection Plane. The
third part (called Define Image Resolution) is to specify parameters and
rendering to apply. The fourth part is to preview and create ortho-images.

Note: The two sub-tools (Segmentation and Sampling) are not available if the
input is a mesh.

Note: Within the Ortho-Projection tool, you don’t have to change the loading
state in order to load more or less points in RAM. Now the computation of
ortho-images is done with all points available on the disk. As a result, the time
to compute may be a bitter longer but the resolution is much more higher
1102 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Projection Plane


You can define a Projection Plane by three points on an objector by using the
current viewing/camera position. The Projection Planes that result from these
two methods are not similar in terms of size. In the first method, the three
picked points delineate the size of the Projection Plane. In the second method,
the bounding box that highlights the input (point cloud or mesh) delineates the
size of the Projection Plane.

A Projection Plane is characterized by a projection direction called View, two


orientations Right and Up (also called X*and Y* directions) which define an
orthogonal frame, a position which is its position in the 3D scene and two
dimensions that correspond to its length and width. The View direction is the
Normal of that Projection Plane. You can also define a Projection Plane by
getting the parameters of an existing ortho-image.

1 - Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points 3 - Define Projection Plane by Screen View
3 - Define Corners of Zone of Interest 4 - Define Projection Plane from Existing Ortho-
Image

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate Frame.


Tools in the Production Module 1103

Pick Three Points


You can pick three points to define a Projection Plane. The accuracy of such
Projection Plane's orientation will be influenced by the points you pick. It is
recommended to pick these points in such way that they are distributed across
the area on which you want to calculate the ortho-projection.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click the Define Projection Plane by Picking 3 Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on the displayed objects.

1 - Three picked points 2 - The defined projection plane (in yellow)

A number located beside the mouse's pointer guides you in picking points. This
number starts from One and ends by Three. When two points are picked, they
are linked by a red segment. When three points are reached, they are linked
two-by-two by a red segment and form in that way a triangle. A Projection
Plane is then computed. No need of defining its Normal; it will be automatically
calculated. You can cancel this plane whenever you want and start a new one.
To do it, start again the previous procedure.

Note:
 You can also select Cancel Picking from the pop-menu.
 You can Pan, Rotate, Zoom (in or out) and Zoom with constant ratio in the
3D View while defining a Projection Plane.
 In the picking mode, pressing Esc cancels the selection of points in
progress. Out of the picking mode, pressing Esc closes the Ortho-
Projection tool.
1104 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Use the Current Camera View


In certain applications, you may need to visually choose a projection plane.
The Define Projection Plane by Screen View tool allows this. You first need to
rotate the 3D scene to find the right viewing direction, and use the current
screen plane as the Projection Plane.

To Use the Current Camera View:

1. Turn the scene to find the right viewing direction.


2. Click the Define Projection Plane By Screen View icon.

Set the Corners


Another method for defining a Projection Plane consists of setting its corner
values. This operation has no influence upon the View direction and the Right
and Up orientations (X and Y directions).

To Set the Corners:

1. Click the Define Corners of Zone of Interest icon. The Vertical Rectangle
Corner Coordinates dialog opens.
2. Enter a point position in the Top Left Corner field.
3. Enter a point position in the Bottom Right Corner field.
4. Click OK.

Tip: You can also select the Set Projection Plane Corners icon from the pop-
up menu.

Note: You can measure the 3D coordinates of two opposite points in the 3D
View thanks to the Point Measurement feature in the Measure tool, and copy
and paste the coordinates in the Vertical Rectangle Corner Coordinates dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1105

Set (or Edit) the Parameters


Sometimes, you may need to edit manually the parameters of the current
Project Plane or use the parameters of an existing ortho-image to calculate
your own ortho-image. You can use the method below to recover the
Projection Plane from that of an existing ortho-image by getting its directions
(View, X* and Y*), its position in the 3D scene and its Resolution and Size. An
option allows you to preview that ortho-image in 3D View.

To Set (or Edit) the Parameters:

1. Click the Parameters button. The Set Parameters of Projection Plane


dialog opens.

1 - Existing ortho-image in the project or current 3 - Resolution and size of an existing ortho-
Projection Plane image or of the current Projection Plane
2 - Parameters of an existing ortho-image or of
the current Projection Plane

2. Click on the Select Source Plane pull-down arrow.


3. Select an existing ortho-image from the drop-down list
4. Modify the parameters (if necessary).
5. Check the Preview in 3D Window option (if required).
6. Click OK. The Set Parameters of Projection Plane dialog closes.

Note:
 You can use the Shift + C short-cut (or select Set Camera Parameters
from the pop-up menu) to set or edit parameters.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate Frame.
1106 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify a Projection Plane


After defining a Projection Plane, the other icons in the Step 1 panel become
active. The Step 1 looks as illustrated below:

1 - Define Horizontal by Picking 2 Points 4 - Buttons for selecting a canonical view


2 - Rotate 90° around Vertical Axis
3 - Define Projection Plane Position by Picking
Point
Tools in the Production Module 1107

Define the Horizontal


The Define Horizontal By Picking 2 Points feature enables to align the
horizontal orientation of a Projection Plane to the displayed data by picking two
points. It means that for a given Projection Plane, you keep unchanged its
Normal (View direction) and you adjust its Right and Up orientations (horizontal
and vertical).

To Set the Horizontal of a Projection Plane:

1. Click the Define Horizontal by Picking 2 Points icon. The Picking


Parameters toolbar appears.
2. Pick a free or constrained point on the selected object to start the first
point of the X direction.
3. Pick then the second point (free or constrained) to end this X direction.

1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The projection plane is aligned to the
defined horizontal
1108 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

After clicking Define Horizontal By Picking 2 Points, a 2D Grid appears upon


the 3D scene. You can hide it or change its size. The mouse cursor shape
changes. The arrow becomes a pointer. A number beside this pointer guides
you in selecting points. It starts from One that corresponds to the first point of
the X direction and ends by Two. Once the two points reached, a red segment
links them and the new Projection Plane will be then generated. No need of
defining a Normal direction. It keeps the former one. You can cancel it
whenever you want and start a new one. To do it, start again the previous
procedure.

Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc or selecting Cancel Picking (Esc) from
the pop-up menu cancels the selection of points in progress and closes Define
Horizontal by Picking 2 Points.
Tools in the Production Module 1109

Set a Position
You can also modify the position of a Projection Plane by picking a point on the
displayed scene (point cloud or mesh). This is important if you want to use the
elevation information for calculating the ortho-projection.

To Set a Position:

1. Click the Define Projection Plane Position by Picking Point icon. The
Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbar opens.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) anywhere on the selected object.

1 - A point picked on the displayed cloud 2 - The projection plane moves from its current
position to its new position

Note:
 Modifying a Projection Plane’s position will not modify its orientation.
 Press Esc (or select Cancel Picking (Esc) from the pop-up menu) to close
the Define Projection Plane Position by Picking Point tool.
1110 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Change the Dimensions


You can resize the previous Projection Plane. This operation has not an
influence upon the View direction and the Right and Up orientations (X* and Y*
directions). The resized Projection Plane keeps the same parameters than
before except the dimensions. You can do this either by dragging & dropping a
corner for example in the 3D View or by entering coordinates in a dialog.

To Change the Dimensions:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a Projection Plane. A green
square appears.

1 - The handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - The handle during the drag & drop operation

2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase or reduce the Projection


Plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.
3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase or reduce the Projection
Plane width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes
yellow.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate Frame.


Tools in the Production Module 1111

Check a Projection Plane


In the example of a house, in order to have a complete facade drawing, you
need to calculate ortho-images for both the front and side views. You can
rotate the Projection Plane or the scene to calculate a series of ortho-images in
different orientations. You can use a canonical view to control the projection
definition, rotate left the scene (Half Pi rotation) or rotate the scene around the
screen vertical axis. Six canonical views are available: Front View, Back View,
Left View, Right View, Top View and Bottom View. You can edit and validate
the current Projection Plane's parameters. This enables an accurate definition
and control of the Projection Plane's vectors and depth.

1 - Rotate 90° around Vertical Axis 2 - Buttons for selecting a canonical view

View from a Projection Plane' Side


The user can view the displayed scene from each of the Projection Plane' side.

To View from a Projection Plane' Side:

1. Click on the canonical view pull down arrow.


2. Choose among Front View, Back View, Left View, Right View, Top View
and Bottom View.

Note:
 You need to first define a Projection Plane. Otherwise, all views are
dimmed.
 You can swap from a view to another not by clicking on the button as are
used to do in the View Alignment toolbar but by clicking on the pull down
arrow. Because clicking on that button will always bring you to the Front
View of the Projection Plane which is the view required to compute an
ortho-image.
1112 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate 90° Around Vertical Axis


To Rotate the Projection Plane 90° Around the Vertical Axis:

1. Bring the Projection Plane in Front view.


2. Define the region on which you want to calculate the ortho-image and
save the result.
3. Click the Rotate 90° Around Vertical Axis icon to turn the active projection
plane to the side view.
4. Modify the region definition and calculate the second ortho-image and
save the result.

The projection plane remains fixed while the 3D scene rotates 90° around its vertical axis

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click Parameters. The Set Parameters of Projection Plane dialog opens.


2. Check the Preview in 3D View Window option (if required).
3. Enter new values in the View Direction field.
4. Enter new values in the X Direction field.
5. Enter new values in the Y Direction field.
6. Enter a new value in the Point Position field.
7. Click OK.

Tip: You can use the short-cut key Shift + C to edit the parameters (or select
Set Camera Parameters from the pop-up menu).
Tools in the Production Module 1113

Define a Zone of Interest


You need to define a region (called Zone of Interest) on the previous Projection
Plane from which the ortho-projection will be computed. For this, you have to
draw a rectangular frame. In that drawing mode, you are locked in the
Projection Plane's plane with a 2D-grid in superimposition and the Projection
Plane is hidden.

Before clicking on the Draw button, the Area in the Step 2 panel is "Area
Undefined". After clicking on the Draw button, the entire Projection Plane is set
as a Zone of Interest and its dimensions appears in the Area field. After
drawing a rectangular frame, the Area values are updated to match the drawn
frame' size.

At the same time, the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon becomes enabled.
1114 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Zone of Interest


To Define a Zone of Interest:

1. Click the Draw button. The cursor will take the shapes as shown below.
2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.
3. If required, rotate left both the displayed scene and the Projection Plane
(see Rotate Counterclockwise 90° (on page 1115)).
4. Click Validate.

1 - Shape of the cursor for the first point to pick 2 - The cursor shape of the second point to pick
3 - The Zone of Interest size

A 2D Grid appears upon the locked scene. You can hide it or change its size.
The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with a
number beside; this guides you in selecting points. This number starts from
One (first corner of a rectangular frame) and ends by Two (opposite corner).
You can cancel the rectangular frame whenever you want and start a new one.

Note:
 Select Cancel Rectangle (Esc) from the pop-up menu to undo the
selection of points in progress (once the first has been picked).
 Movements are constrained to the Projection Plane's plane and are
restricted to Pan and Zoom. Rotate is not allowed.
Tools in the Production Module 1115

Resize a Zone of Interest


To Resize a Zone of Interest:

1. Pick in the previous rectangular frame.


2. Move the cursor over a handle in green.
3. Drag-and-drop the handle to resize the rectangular frame.

Note: The Area values are updated to match the resized frame's dimensions.

Rotate Counterclockwise 90°


The Rotate Counterclockwise 90° feature rotates left both the displayed scene
and the Projection Plane.

To Rotate Left Both the Scene and the Projection Plane:

1. Set the Projection Plane to see its front view (by choosing Front View).
2. Click the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon. The displayed scene and the
Projection Plane are rotated left.
3. Click again the Rotate Counterclockwise 90° icon. The displayed scene
and the Projection Plane are rotated left again, and so on.

Both the Projection Plane and the 3D scene are rotated left
1116 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a Resolution
You can define an ortho-image’s resolution by giving the PPI (Pixels Per Inch),
specifying the number of pixels in the X* and Y* directions or giving the pixel
size. The pixel size is equal to 1 (if the unit of measurements is Inch) or to 25.4
(if the unit of measurement is millimeters) divided by the image resolution (in
PPI). The image size (in pixels) is obtained by dividing the interest zone size by
the pixel size.

To Set a Resolution:

1. Click Resolution. The Set Image Resolution of Ortho-Image dialog opens.


2. Do one of the following:

 Enter a value (in PPI) in the Image Resolution (PPI) field.


 Enter two values (in pixels) in the Image Size (WxH) field.
 Enter a value (in the current unit of measurement) in the Pixel Size field.

3. Click OK.

Tip: You can use the short-cut key R or select Set Image Resolution (R) from
the pop-up menu to open the Set Image Resolution of Ortho-Image dialog.

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate Frame.

Choose a Rendering Option


You can choose an option to render the computed ortho-images(s). If the
selection is a point cloud, there are at all five rendering options. Using Depth
(the elevation value is calculated for each point based on its distance to the
defined area. The calculated elevation value will be discretized in 8 bits to
create the ortho-projection images), Using Normal Shading (the normal of each
point will be used in shading calculation to create the ortho-projection images),
Using Grey Scaled Intensity (the (grey) intensity value of each point will be
used to create the ortho-projection images), Using Color Coded Intensity (the
(color) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection
images) and Using True Color (the color associated with each point will be
used to create the ortho-projection images). If the selection is a mesh, there is
only rendering option: Textured Meshes.

To Choose a Rendering Option:

1. Click on pull down arrow below the Resolution button.


2. Select a rendering option from the drop down list.
Tools in the Production Module 1117

Preview an Ortho-Image
You can now use the Preview button to calculate the ortho-image. When
completed, the calculated image will be shown in the 2D Image viewer. You
can change the current parameters and perform a new preview. You can do
this as many times as required until you have the right result.

To Preview an Ortho-Image:

 Click the Preview button. The computed image is shown in a 2D Image


viewer.

1 - Zoom In 3 - Zoom factor


2 - Zoom Out 4 - Measure tool

Before previewing the ortho-image, clicking Close leaves the Ortho-Projection


tool and the position of the ortho-image is lost. After previewing the ortho-
image, clicking Close opens a dialog which prompts you to abort or continue
the operation. In this 2D Image viewer, you can zoom-in (or zoom-out). You
can zoom in three ways. The first one is to magnify (or reduce) an area of the
ortho-image using Zoom In and Zoom Out. The second way is to magnify (or
reduce) the ortho-image using the mouse wheel (if existed). The third is to
select a zoom factor from the drop-down list.

If the ortho-image is bigger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan it
on left-click in any direction. You can also make a 2D-distance measurement.
Because the metric information is stored in the calculated ortho-image, the
measurement is accurate. You can create the measurement in the database by
using the corresponding command in the pop-up menu. Note that once it is
created, the measurement will be shown in the 3D View.
1118 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip:
 You can select Preview Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.
 The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in
the 3D View. You can change it in Preferences\Viewer. This change will
be then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.

Print an Ortho-Image
You can print the preview of an ortho-image.

To Print an Ortho-Image:

1. Right-click in the 2D Image view.


2. Select Print from the pop-up menu. The Print Setup dialog opens.
3. Define a Printer.
4. Choose a Paper' Size and Source.
5. Choose an Orientation between Portrait and Landscape.
6. Add some comments in the Legend panel.
7. Set an Appearance between As Is and Reverse Colors.
8. Click OK.

Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main
toolbar.

Split an Ortho-Image
When an ortho-image is too wide (or long), you can split it into a set of ortho-
images of smaller size. You can split an ortho-image along a direction (Width
(or Height)) or along two directions (Width + Height).

To Split an Ortho-Image:

1. Enter a number in the W (or H) field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number in the W (or H)
field.

Note: Each split ortho-image is named as follows: ImageX_Line Index_Colum


Iindex.
Tools in the Production Module 1119

Create an Ortho-Image
You can save the result in the database. An ortho-image whose name is
"Image" is created and put under the current active group of the Images Tree.
You can create several ortho-images without leaving the tool.

To Create an Ortho-Image:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Tip: You can also select Create Ortho-Image (or Close) from the pop-up menu.
You should first hide the 2D Image viewer.

Note: You do not need to first preview an ortho-image to create it in the


database.

Create Connected Ortho-Images


The Multi-Ortho-Projection tool allows you to create multi-ortho-projection
images from the selected point cloud(s) or mesh(es). You can either export the
ortho-projection images to CAD software, such as AutoCAD® or MicroStation®
for further processing or drafting operations, or you can perform 2D
measurements directly within RealWorks. The basic principle behind this tool is
to use a polyline to create multi-projection planes on which the ortho-projection
images will be created, and choose the right information that you want to use in
the ortho-projection, and then create the images either one-by-one or all at
once. All the metric information will be stored in this image, i.e. measurements
made on this photo will be accurate.
1120 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Project Tree.


2. In the Ortho-Image group, click the Multi-Ortho-Projection icon. The Multi-
Ortho-Projection dialog opens.

If a point cloud has been selected, you can work on it to delimit an area for the
multi-ortho-projection computation, to render it cleaner without parasite points
or to simplify it (see the Sampling and Segmentation tools). If a mesh has been
selected, the two upper sub-tools are unavailable. The results of applying
these sub-tools will not save into the database; they are used only for
calculation purposes.

Note: Within the Multi-Ortho-Projection tool, you are no longer allowed to


change the loading state in order to load more or less points in RAM. Now the
computation of connected-ortho-images is done with all points available on the
disk. As a result, the time to compute may be a bitter longer but the resolution
is much more higher

Note: The Head Always Up option is kept after opening the tool, i.e., if the
option has been enabled, it will remain enabled.

Define a Polyline
A polyline can be either a line of continuous segments which can be closed (or
not). It can also be composed of one or several non-continuous segments but it
cannot be formed by arcs.
Tools in the Production Module 1121

Select a Polyline
If there is a polyline within the project, it is displayed in the Define Polyline field.
The "Number of Segments" is not then equal to zero. The selected point cloud
(or mesh) and the Projection Planes obtained by extruding each segment of
this selected polyline along the Z* direction are displayed in the 3D View.

1 - Field for selecting an existing Polyline 2 - Number of segments in the selected (or
drawn) Polyline

To Select a Polyline:

1. Click on the Define Polyline pull down arrow.


2. Select a polyline from the drop down list.

Note:
 A polyline which is composed of arcs will not appear in the selection list.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
1122 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Polyline
If no polyline is available. The Define Polyline combo box is grayed out and the
"Number of Segments" is equal to zero. You have to create at least one in the
database. The selected point cloud (or mesh) is shown with a 2D Grid in
superimpose (if not hidden previously) in the 3D View. The scene is
constrained in the XY* plane of the active coordinate frame, brought to the Top
view and movements while picking points are restricted to Rotate (around the
Z* axis), Zoom (along the Z* axis), and Pan (in the XY* plane).

Create New 2D Polyline

To Draw a Polyline:

1. Click the Create New 2D Polyline icon. The Drawing and Picking
Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear in the 3D View. The
mouse cursor shape changes to a pencil.
2. Draw a polyline by picking several points.
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Click Create. The drawn Polyline appears in the Define Polyline field and
its "Number of Segments" is updated.

Tip: You can select each of the Drawing features from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
 In the Drawing toolbar, the Change Mode to Arc, Draw Circle by Defining
the Center and Radius and Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter icons are
enabled and let the user draw such kind of polyline but any will be into
account.
Tools in the Production Module 1123

Define a Zone of Interest


After defining a polyline, a series of Projection Planes runs along that polyline.
For a given Projection Plane, its width corresponds to the length of a segment
and its height to the height of the bounding box that highlights the input (point
cloud or mesh) along the Z axis of the active coordinate frame.

1 - A Polyline 3 - The height of the active Projection Plane


2 - The active Projection Plane (in red) 4 - The width of the active Projection Plane

You can modify all the Projection Plane heights at once by changing the
Maximal Altitude (or Minimal Altitude) value or each Projection Plane height
individually. The Maximal (or Minimal) Altitude default value will be the Maximal
(or Minimal) Altitude value of the active Projection Plane. The maximal value
must be higher than the minimal value.

1 - Top Align all Planes 3 - Start Editing Table 5 - The Display / Hide option
2 - Bottom Align all Planes 4 - Inverse Normal of All
Planes
1124 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

To Define a Zone of Interest:

1. Top align all Projection Planes.


2. Or bottom align all Projection Planes.
3. Or Edit all Projection Planes.
4. Or invert the Normal of all Projection Planes.

Note:
 Instead of clicking a button in the Multi-Ortho-Projection dialog, you can
also select its equivalent from the pop-up menu.
 You undo the change you have done and redo it again by selecting Undo
and Redo.
 You can also select a Projection Plane in the 3D View by picking it.
Enlarge (or reduce) the selected Projection Plane's height by dragging and
dropping the two horizontal edges.

Top Align all Planes


To Top Align all Planes:

1. Click the Top Align all Planes icon. The Maximal Altitude dialog opens.
2. Enter a new value in the Maximal Altitude field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.
4. Click OK. All Projection Planes are aligned to the top.

Note: (*) The value will be incremented (or decremented) of 5 millimeters. If


the unit of measurement in use is too big, the user won't see the increment (or
decrement).
Tools in the Production Module 1125

Bottom Align all Planes


To Bottom Align all Planes:

1. Click the Bottom Align all Planes icon. The Minimum Altitude dialog opens.
2. Enter a new value in the Minimum Altitude field.
3. Or use the Up and Down buttons* to select a value.
4. Click OK. All Projection Planes are aligned to the bottom.

Note: The value will be incremented (or decremented) of 5 millimeters. If the


unit of measurement in use is too big, the user won't see the increment (or
decrement).
1126 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Planes
To Edit Planes:

1. Click the Start Editing Table icon. The Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters
dialog opens.

 Each area in the Area column corresponds to a unique Projection Plane.


 The length of an area in the Length column is the gap between its
Minimum Altitude and its Maximum Altitude along the Z direction.

2. Select an area* from the dialog by picking a line.


3. Click on a value in either the Minimal Altitude or Maximum Altitude. The
value becomes editable.
4. Enter a new value and press Enter. The Projection Plane which
corresponds to the selected area has its Minimal Altitude (or Maximum
Altitude) changed as well as its height.
5. Click on the Close button at the top right corner of the dialog box.

1 - The Auto-hide button 3 - Only the Maximum Altitude of the selected


2 - The Close button Projection Plane is modified

The Auto Hide feature allows displaying more information using less screen
space by hiding (or showing) the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog.
When you press the Auto Hide button, the Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters
dialog will hide away. Move the mouse pointer over the Multi-Ortho-Image Area
Parameters title bar, it will slide out and will become visible. If you want the
Multi-Ortho-Image Area Parameters dialog to stay visible after it has be slid
out, just press the Auto Hide button.

Tip: (*) You may see the Projection Plane corresponding to the selected area
appears in Step 4 - Preview Single Image as well as its Size, Minimum Altitude
and Maximum Value.
Tools in the Production Module 1127

Hide/Display the Input


You can also display/hide the input: point cloud or mesh.

To Hide/Display the Input:

1. Un-check to hide the input from the 3D View.


2. And check to display it again.

Define the Image Parameters


You should define the parameters used for generating the ortho-images.

To Define the Image Parameters:

1. Define a Resolution.
2. Choose a Density to apply.
3. Define the Depth parameter.

Set a Resolution
The user should define a Resolution to apply to the active Projection Plane. A
Resolution is by default square.

To Set a Resolution:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Use the and Down to select a value.

Set a Density
The Density expressed in terms of PPI (Pixels Per Inch) is automatically
computed according the current value of the Resolution.
1128 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose a Rendering Option


You can choose an option to render the computed ortho-images(s). If the
selection is a point cloud, there are at all five rendering options. Using Depth
(the elevation value is calculated for each point based on its distance to the
defined area. The calculated elevation value will be discretized in 8 bits to
create the ortho-projection images), Using Normal Shading (the normal of each
point will be used in shading calculation to create the ortho-projection images),
Using Grey Scaled Intensity (the (grey) intensity value of each point will be
used to create the ortho-projection images), Using Color Coded Intensity (the
(color) intensity value of each point will be used to create the ortho-projection
images) and Using True Color (the color associated with each point will be
used to create the ortho-projection images). If the selection is a mesh, there is
only rendering option: Textured Meshes.

To Choose a Rendering Option:

1. Click on pull down arrow below the Resolution button.


2. Select a rendering option from the drop down list.

Define the Depth Parameter


You also should select the Define Depth option in order to define the distances
Front and Back all rectangular areas.

To Define the Depth Parameter:

1. Check the Define Depth option. The Front and Back fields become
editable.

1 - Distance Front and Back all Projection 2 - Reload Front Depth


Planes 3 - Reload Back Depth

2. Enter a value in the Front field. The Reload Front Depth icon becomes
enabled.
3. Enter a value in the Back field. The Reload Back Depth icon becomes
enabled.
4. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Front Depth.
5. If required, load the initial value by pressing Reload Back Depth.
Tools in the Production Module 1129

Preview a Single Ortho-Image


To Preview a Single Ortho-Image:

1. Select a Projection Plane.


2. Click Preview. The computed ortho-image is shown in a 2D Image view
and the Preview button becomes inactive.

1 - Image Zoom In 4 - An ortho-image computed from the active


2 - Image Zoom Out Projection Plane
3 - Measurement tool 5 - The Active Projection Plane

In this view, you can zoom or make a 2D distance measurement. You can
zoom according three ways. The first way is to magnify (or reduce) an area of
the ortho-projection image using Zoom In and Zoom Out. The second way is to
magnify (or reduce) the whole ortho-projection image using the mouse's wheel
(if existed). The last way is to select a rate from the drop-down list.

3. Select another Projection Plane (if required).


4. Click again Preview.

Note: You cannot go down under 10% when zooming out.


1130 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: The color of the background on an Ortho-Image is the same as the one in
the 3D View. You can change it in Preferences\Viewer. This change will be
then applied whatever the Rendering option you choose.

Select a Projection Plane


An active Projection Plane is the one which appears in the Preview Single
Image field and is shown in red in the 3D View.

1 - Display First Ortho-image 4 - Display Next Ortho-image


2 - Display Previous Ortho-image 5 - Display Last Ortho-image
3 - Field for entering a Projection Plane order

To Select a Projection Plane:

 Click Display Previous (or Next) Ortho-image to set the previous (or next)
Projection Plane as active.
 Click Display First (or Last) Ortho-image to set the first (or last) Projection
Plane as active.
 Key in a Projection Plane's order in the Preview Single Image field to
select it. Do not need to validate by pressing the Enter key.

Tip:
 Use the Home (or End) button of your keyboard instead of Display First (or
Last) Ortho-image.
 Use the Up (or Down) arrow of the keyboard instead of Display Previous
(or Next) Ortho-image.

Note:
 The active (current) Projection Plane's parameters like its Size, Maximum
Altitude and Minimum Altitude are displayed in Step 4 of the Multi-Ortho-
Projection dialog.
 The Display Previous Ortho-image, Display Next Ortho-image, Display
First Ortho-image and Display Last Ortho-image buttons are dimmed if
there is only one segment in the defined polyline.
Tools in the Production Module 1131

View from a Projection Plane' Side


The user can view the displayed scene from each of the active Projection
Plane' side.

To View from a Projection Plane' Side:

1. Select a Projection Plane.


2. Click on the canonical view pull down arrow.
3. Choose among Front View, Back View, Left View, Right View, Top View
and Bottom View.

Print an Ortho-Image
You can print the preview of an ortho-image.

To Print an Ortho-Image:

1. Right-click in the 2D Image view.


2. Select Print from the pop-up menu. The Print Setup dialog opens.
3. Define a Printer.
4. Choose a Paper' Size and Source.
5. Choose an Orientation between Portrait and Landscape.
6. Add some comments in the Legend panel.
7. Set an Appearance between As Is and Reverse Colors.
8. Click OK.

Tip: You can also select Print from the menu bar or clicking its icon in the Main
toolbar.

Create Ortho-Images
You can create an ortho-image at a time or all at once in the database. Each
ortho-image is named as follows: Cross-Object-Polyline's name-Segment's
order. You can export each of them as a TIFF format file or via the DXF format
to AutoCAD®. Note that you can create several series of ortho-images without
quitting the tool.
1132 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Single Ortho-Image


A single ortho-image is created and put under the current active group of the
Images Tree.

To Create a Single Ortho-Image:

1. First preview a single ortho-image.


2. Click Create.
3. Click Close.

Create all Ortho-Images


A set of ortho-images is created and put in a folder under the current active
group of the Images Tree. This folder is named as follows: Multi-Ortho-
Polyline's name

To Create all Ortho-Images:

1. Click Create All.


2. Click Close.

Create Rectified Images


This tool allows the creation of images rectified from perspective distortion by
projecting station images onto a given 3D plane.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

 In the Ortho-Image group, click the Image Rectification icon. The Image
Rectification dialog opens.

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The navigation
mode swaps automatically to the Station-Based mode.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Image Rectification feature can be selected in the
Ortho-Image group, on the Imaging tab.

Note: No selection is required for using the Image Rectification tool.


Tools in the Production Module 1133

Choose a Station
You need to select a station with at least an image inside.

To Choose a Station:

1. Click on the pull-down arrow.

2. Choose a station with images from the drop-down list.


3. Or use the Go to First Station, Go to Previous Station, Go to Next Station
or Go to Last Station) in the 3D View.
4. Or click inside the station number's field and select a station from the
drop-down list.

Note: In case no selection has been performed before entering the tool, the
entire project will be taken into account. The first station of the project is by
default chosen.
1134 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Filter the Images


To Filter the Images:

1. Click the Filter Images by Camera Type button.

If the current project has no images; the Select Image Type dialog is empty
and looks as illustrated below:

If the current project has some images which come from an instrument other
than the Trimble SX10, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated
below:

If the current project has some images which come from the Trimble S1X0
instrument, the Select Image Type dialog appears as illustrated below:

2. Select a type by checking the corresponding check box. The number of


images of the chosen type is displayed. The selected images are
displayed in overlap in the background, only if the Display Images
option has been chosen.

Note: Only one time of images can be selected at once.


Tools in the Production Module 1135

Define a Projection Plane


There are two methods for defining a projection plane, by picking points or by
using the parameters of an already created rectified-image.

Define a 3D Plane in the Station-Based Mode


There are several methods available in the Station-Based mode for defining a
3D plane.

You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.

To Pick Points:

 Define a 3D plane by using one of the following methods:

 Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Points (on page 1136),
 Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal
Direction) and One 3D Point (on page 1138),
 Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and
Steepest Slope Directions) and One 3D Points (on page 1140).

Note: You can define a projection plane even if the selected station does not
contain any image.
1136 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Points
To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking two Screen Points (Horizontal Direction)
and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1137

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1138 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Point
To Define a Horizontal Plane by Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1139

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1140 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and One 3D Points
This feature enables to define a plane with any orientation.

To Define a Plane by Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[A]

3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.

[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1141

[D]

5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1142 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D plane in the Examiner WalkThrough


In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode, only two are available.

You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.

To Pick Three 3D Points:

1. Click the Define Plane by Picking Three 3D Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) in the 3D View.

To Pick Two 3D Points:

1. Click the Define Vertical Plane by Picking Two 3D Points icon. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick two points (free or constrained) in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1143

Load Existing Rectified Image Parameters


If there are some rectified images in your project, the From button in Step 2 is
active. You can select a rectified image and use its parameters for computing a
new one.

To Load Existing Rectified Image Parameters:

1. Click on the From button. The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog
opens. All rectified images inside the project are listed.

2. Select a rectified image from the Project Tree. The OK button becomes
active.
3. Click OK. The Copy From Existing Rectified Image dialog closes.

The rectified image parameters appear in the Step 3 and Step 4 of the Image
Rectification dialog. Its projection plane is shown in the 3D View window.
1144 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify a Projection Plane's Size


You can resize the previous projection plane. The resized projection plane
keeps the same parameters as before except the dimensions. You can do this
by dragging & dropping a corner in the 3D View window.

To Modify a Projection Plane's Size:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a projection plane. A green
square appears.
2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the projection
plane size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.

1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation

3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the projection


plane width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes
yellow.
Tools in the Production Module 1145

1 - Handle before the drag & drop operation 2 - Handle during the drag & drop operation

Modify the Position of the Projection Plane


To Modify the Position of the Projection Plane:

1. Click the Define Plane Position by Picking One 3D Point icon. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed point cloud in the 3D
View.
1146 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Zone of Interest


The objective of this step is to define a region (called Zone of Interest) on the
previous projection plane onto which the station images will be projected. For
this, you have to draw a rectangular frame. In the drawing mode, the 3D scene
is locked. Before drawing a zone of interest, the entire projection plane is set
as zone of interest and its size is shown in text in Step 3 of the Image
Rectification dialog.

Note:
 The size of the zone of interest is in the current unit of measurement (the
one set in Preferences).
 If no projection plane has been defined in Step 1, the grayed-out Area
Undefined message appears in the dialog and the Draw button remains
dimmed.
Tools in the Production Module 1147

Draw a Zone of Interest


To Draw a Zone of Interest:

1. Click Draw. The cursor will take the shapes as shown below and the
projection plane is hidden.
2. Draw a rectangular frame by picking two points.

1 - Cursor shape of the first 2 - Cursor shape of the second 3 - Size of the interest zone
point to be picked point to be picked
1148 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer to indicate
that you are in the picking mode. A number beside this pointer guides you
step-by-step in the point's selection. It starts from One that corresponds to the
first point of the X* direction and ends by Two. Once the two points are
reached, the interest zone is generated. You can cancel it whenever you want
and start a new one.

Note:
 Pressing Esc cancels the selection of points in progress and leaves the
drawing mode.
 (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.
Tools in the Production Module 1149

Modify a Zone of Interest


To Modify a Zone of Interest:

1. Move the cursor over a handle in green.

2. Drag-and-drop the handle to resize the rectangular frame.


1150 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set an Image Resolution


You can define the rectified image's resolution by giving the PPI (Pixels Per
Inch), specifying the number of pixels in the X and Y directions or giving the
pixel size. The pixel size is equal to 1 (if the unit of measurements is Inch) or to
25.4 (if the unit of measurement is millimeters) divided by the image resolution
(in PPI). The image size (in pixels) is obtained by dividing the interest zone
size by the pixel size.

To Set an Image Resolution:

1. Enter a value in the Pixel Size field. The image size (WxH) is updated
according the new value.
2. Or click Advanced. The Set Image Resolution dialog opens.
3. Do one of the following:

 Enter a value (in PPI) in the Image Resolution (PPI) field.


 Enter two values (in pixels) in the Image Size (WxH) field.
 Enter a value (in the current unit of measurement) in the Pixel Size field.

4. Click OK. The Set Image Resolution dialog closes.

Tip: You can use the combination of keys Shift + R (or select Set Image
Resolution from the pop-up menu) to open the Set Image Resolution dialog.
Tools in the Production Module 1151

Preview a Rectified Image


You need to have at least one image inside the selected station to be able to
preview the rectified image. Otherwise, the Preview button remains dimmed
even if a projection plane and a zone of interest have been defined.

To Preview a Rectified Image:

 Click the Preview button. The computed image is shown in a 2D Image


viewer called Image Preview of Image Rectification Tool.

In this 2D Image viewer, you can zoom-in (or zoom-out) by doing one of the
following:

 Magnify or reduce an area on the rectified image with the Image Zoom In
and Image Zoom Out buttons,
 Use the mouse wheel,
 Choose a zoom factor from the drop-down list.

If the rectified image is larger than the 2D Image viewer can show, you can pan
it on left-click in any direction.

Tip: You can select Preview Rectified Image from the pop-up menu.

Note: If you close the Image Rectification tool before previewing the result, the
position of the rectified image will be lost. If you close the tool after previewing
the result, a dialog opens and prompts you to save the result or not.
1152 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Perform a 2D-Distance Measurement


You can perform a 2D-distance measurement on the rectified image. As the
metric information is stored in the calculated rectified-image, the measurement
is accurate.

To Perform a 2D-Distance Measurement:

1. Click Measurement.
2. Pick two points on the rectified image. The measurement distance is
shown in text in the 2D Image viewer.
3. Select Create Measurement from the pop-up menu.
4. Select Close Tool from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also use the Esc key instead of selecting Close Tool from the
pop-up menu.

Note: Pressing Esc without saving the measured distance will cancel that
distance.

Print a Rectified Image


To Print a Rectified Image:

1. Right-click on the rectified-image.


2. Select Print from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can also select Print from the File menu (or click on the Print button in
the Main toolbar).

Split a Rectified Image


For rectified images of large size, you can split them into rectified images of
small size. Splitting can be done along a rectified image's width, along its
height or in both directions.

To Split a Rectified Image:

1. Enter a number in W (or H) field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number in the W (or H)
field.
Tools in the Production Module 1153

Create a Rectified Image


You can now create the rectified image in the database. It will be put under the
current active group of the Images Tree. It has the "Ortho-Image” as type. You
can create several rectified images without quitting the tool.

To Create a Rectified Image:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

Tip: You can also right-click in the 3D View and select Create Rectified Image
from the pop-up menu.

Note: Once the zone of interest has been defined (3D rectangle), defining a
new plane will merely modify the position and orientation of the zone of
interest. In particular, the size of the rectangle is kept. This can prove useful
when producing a series of rectified images of a facade (to keep the height and
vertical position of the rectangle).

Note: You do not need to first preview a rectified image to create it in the
database.

Convert to an Ortho-Image
The Convert to Ortho-Image feature lets you inspect a power plant by
comparing its blueprint and the point cloud obtained by its scanning.
1154 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Import Images
An image of the BMP, or JPEG, or TIF format can be imported into RealWorks.
The only prerequisite is to have a project already loaded in RealWorks.
Otherwise, the import feature remains grayed-out.

To Import Images:

1. From the File menu, select Import Image. The Import Image In dialog
opens.
2. In the Look In field, navigate to the drive / folder where the images are
stored.
3. Select an image to import.
4. Click Import. The Import Image In dialog closes.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Import Image feature can be selected from the
Import/Export group, in the Home tab.

Create Ortho-Images
To Create Ortho-Images:

1. Select an imported image from the Images Tree.


2. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Convert to Ortho-Image.

Or

3. Right-click and select Convert to Ortho-Image.

a) With the Convert to Ortho-Image dialog open, input the 3D


coordinates of the Top Left Corner, Top Right Corner and Bottom
Left Corner.
b) Click OK. The Convert to Ortho-Image dialog closes. An Ortho-
Image, named ImageX where X is its order, is created and rooted
under the Images Tree.
c) If required, display the created Ortho-Image by turning the bulb to
On.
d) If necessary, adjust the position and orientation of the created Ortho-
Image so that it matches the point cloud, by using the Move Ortho-
Image (see "Move an Ortho-Image" on page 1155) tool.

Note: The three corners should form a square area. Otherwise, the OK button
remains grayed-out.
Tools in the Production Module 1155

Move an Ortho-Image
The Move Ortho-Image feature has a set of tools that enable to modify the
position and orientation of an Ortho-Image created previously with the Convert
to Ortho-Image (see "Convert to an Ortho-Image" on page 1153) or Ortho-
.Projection (see "Create Ortho-Images" on page 1100) tool.

Modify an Ortho-Image
To Modify an Ortho-Image:

1. Select an Ortho-Image from the Images Tree.


2. Display the selected Ortho-Image in the 3D View, by turning the bulb from
to or by dragging and dropping it in the 3D View.
3. From the OfficeSurvey menu, select Move Ortho-Imager . The Move
Ortho-Image toolbar opens.
4. Do one of the following:

 Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image (on page 1156),


 Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image by Picking a Height (see
"Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image by Picking" on page 1157),
 Pan in the Plane of the Ortho-Image (on page 1158),
 Rotate in the Plane of the Ortho-Image (on page 1160),
 Move in the Ortho-Image Plane by Picking a Direction (see "Move in
the Ortho-Image Plane by Picking" on page 1161)

5. Validate the transformation. The Move Ortho-Image toolbar closes.

Tip: All the features can be accessed from the pop-up menu.

Note: You are not able to undo a transformation, once applied.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Move Ortho-Image feature can be selected from the
Ortho-Image group, in the Imaging tab.
1156 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image


To Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image:

1. If necessary, bring the view to Front , and the projection mode to


Parallel .
2. Click the Move Perpendicular to Ortho-Image icon. A manipulator
perpendicular to the plane of the Ortho-Image appears.
3. Click on the manipulator and move the Ortho-Image along the direction
given by the manipulator.

Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1157

Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image by Picking


To Move Perpendicular to the Ortho-Image by Picking:

1. If necessary, bring the view to Front , and the projection mode to


Parallel .
2. Click the Move Perpendicular to Ortho-Image by Picking icon. The
cursor becomes as illustrated below.

3. Pick a position. The Ortho-Image moves along the direction of its normal,
at the position set by the picked point.
1158 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pan in the Plane of the Ortho-Image


To Pan in the Plane of the Ortho-Image:

1. If necessary, bring the view to Top .


2. Click the Pan In Ortho-Image Plane icon. A manipulator appears over
the Ortho-Image.
3. To pan the Ortho-Image in a direction, click on an Arrow Handle and move
the Ortho-Image along the direction given by the arrow.

4. To pan the Ortho-Image in any direction, click on the Plane Handle and
move the Ortho-Image in its plane.
Tools in the Production Module 1159

Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
1160 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rotate in the Plane of the Ortho-Image


To Rotate in the Plane of the Ortho-Image:

1. If necessary, bring the view to Top .


2. Click the Rotate In Ortho-Image Plane icon. A manipulator appears
over the Ortho-Image.
3. Drag the manipulator and rotate the Ortho-Image in its plane and around
its normal, clockwise or counterclockwise.

Tip: You can change the position of the manipulator by clicking the Change
Manipulator Location icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1161

Move in the Ortho-Image Plane by Picking


To Move in the Ortho-Image Plane:

1. If necessary, bring the view to Top .


2. Click the Move In Ortho-Image Plane by Picking icon.
3. Pick a point, on the displayed point cloud or the displayed Ortho-Image.

4. Pick another point, on the displayed point cloud or the displayed Ortho-
Image.
1162 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The Ortho-Image is moved in its plane along the direction defined by the two
picked points.
Tools in the Production Module 1163

Image Matching
The Image Matching tool allows you to match an imported image to a
displayed 3D scene, or in other words, to find the camera position from which
the image is shot. The basic principle behind this tool is to select at least four
pairs of markers (points or segments or a combination thereof); each of them
should be selected on the same physical objects. For example, you can select
a point from the 3D scene, and another one in the 2D image, both correspond
to the corner of a room. We call these two points a pair of markers. Then
RealWorks will use these selected markers to calculate a best registration (or a
best camera position) so that when you view from this camera position and
along its axis, the image and the 3D scene will superposed. Once the image is
matched to the 3D scene, you can use it to color the scanned points, to texture
the meshed model, or just to enhance understanding of the scene.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or mesh) from the Models Tree.


2. Select an image (or more) from the Images Tree.
3. In the Matched Image group, click the Image Matching icon. The
Image Matching dialog opens as well as the Picking Parameters (in 3D
constraint mode) toolbar.

This dialog opened as the third tab of the WorkSpace window is separated into
four parts. The first part enables to select an image that will be used as
reference for matching. The second part contains tools to select and edit
markers. The third part enables to preview the matching, view stored and
matched images and match under constraint. The last part enables to validate
the matching and color points. The selected image is shown as a thumbnail in
the left top corner of the 3D View. If more than one image are selected, the first
in the selection list is the one that is shown in the 3D View.

Note: The Image Matching icon is not present in the Tools toolbar.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Image Matching feature can be selected in the
Matched Image group, on the Imaging tab.
1164 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select an Image
You should select an image from the Select Image combo box for matching.
Only unmatched and already matched images are listed in that combo box.

To Select an Image:

1. Click on the Select Image pull-down arrow.


2. Select an image from the drop-down list.

1 - Field for selecting an image 2 - Hide/Show Image 3 - Maximize/Minimize Image

Tip: Inside the Image Matching tool, you can go back to the Models Tree tab to
display or hide objects for marker selection purposes.

Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail


To Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail:

1. Click on the Hide/Show Image icon to hide the thumbnail.


2. And click again on the Hide/Show Image icon to display the thumbnail.

Tip:
 The Hide/Show Image icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key V.

Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail


To Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail:

1. Click on the Maximize/Minimize Image icon to make full the thumbnail.


2. And click again on the Maximize/Minimize Image icon to restore the
thumbnail size.

Tip:
 The Maximize/Minimize Image icon can also be selected from the pop-up
menu.
 You can also click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key M.
Tools in the Production Module 1165

Extend (or Stretch) a Thumbnail


You can drag and drop a vertical (or horizontal) edge of the thumbnail image to
extend it in width (or length).

Move a Thumbnail

Place your cursor over the symbol and drag and drop the thumbnail image
to a location within the 3D View.

Select Markers
For a given image, if a matching has been already performed, you can view the
stored matching. If any matching has been performed and when no information
about the shooting position are available, you can start matching by selecting
at least four pairs of markers. Before selecting, each pair is set as "Undef" in
the Pairs column of the marker list and "?" in the Defined In column.

1 - Check box 2 - List of markers

To Select Markers:

1. Pick a pair of makers.


2. Or Load a set of maker pairs.

Note:
 Press twice the Esc button to close the Image Matching tool.
 In the marker list table, each selected marker pair will be shown. You can
see in the second column whether the pair is completely defined, or if it is
just partially defined.
1166 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Markers
You should pick at least four pairs of markers. Each pair may be either a 3D
Point/2D Point pair or a 3D Line/2D Line pair. The order of these pairs has no
influence on the final calculation. So you can pick them whenever you find a
corresponding marker pair (no matter its type) in both 3D View and 2D View
(for image). Movements are restricted in the 3D View to Pan, Zoom and Rotate
while picking markers.

1 - Add Point Marker 2 - Add Line Marker

To Pick Markers:

1. Pick a pair of points.


2. Or pick a pair of lines.
3. Or pick a combination of point pairs and line pairs.

Note:
 Pressing Back (or once on Esc) while the picking is in progress cancels
the selected markers.
 A pair of points is always put at the first position in the marker list when
you select a combination of points and lines.
Tools in the Production Module 1167

Pick a Pair of Points


To Pick a Pair of Points:

1. Select an image that will be used as a reference image for matching.


2. Navigate in the 3D scene so that the displayed scene aligns approximately
with the chosen image.
3. Click the Add Point Marker icon. You are now in the picking mode.
4. Pick a point marker on the reference image.

 This point is shown by a red square with One as order.


 In the marker list, "Undef" becomes "Point#1" in the Pairs column and "?"
swaps to "[2D]/ " in the Define In column.

5. Pick a point marker on the 3D scene.

 This point is shown by a yellow P with One as order.


 In the marker list, "[2D]/ " in the Define In column becomes "[2D]/[3D]".
 A check mark beside this pair means that it is taken into account for the
matching.

6. Repeat the steps from 4 to 5 for the three other pairs of point markers.

1 - 2D Point marker 2 - 3D Point marker

Note:
 Point markers can be selected by pair (one from a view and one from the
other view) as described above or continuously (four from a view and four
the other view).
1168 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 When you select a pair from the list, its related point marker P on the
object becomes green (the number label remains in yellow) and the red
square in the reference image becomes pink (the number remains
unchanged).
Tools in the Production Module 1169

Pick a Pair of Lines


To Pick a Pair of Lines:

1. Select an image from the selection list that will be used as a reference
image for matching.
2. Click on the Add Line Marker icon. You are now in the picking mode.
3. Pick in the 3D scene to set at least four line markers (if any point has been
set).
4. Pick in the reference image to set at least four line markers (if any point
has been set).

1 - 2D Line marker 2 - 3D Line marker

The mouse cursor shape changes. The arrow becomes a pointer with two
numbers beside. The first number is a line order and the second to the picked
point order. A point once picked on the selected object is shown by a yellow L
with a number besides indicating a line marker order. Two points from the
same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which is named Line # X.
X is the line marker rank. A point once picked on the reference image is shown
by a pink square marker with a number besides indicating a line marker order
and a line is drawn through this point to the current mouse cursor position. Two
points from the same rank once picked are linked by a color segment which
named Line # X. X is the matching line rank. When a pair of line markers from
the same rank (one in the reference image and one in the cloud) is defined,
this pair is named Line # X and is put in a list. X is the pair rank. A check mark
besides a pair of line markers means that this pair is taken into account for
matching. Un-select a check mark if you don't want to take into account a pair.
When you select a pair from the list, its related line markers are lengthened.
1170 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Load Markers
You can import an image that has been already matched, load and use its
parameters for matching new images. Usually, such parameters are stored in a
TXT (or ASCII) format file.

To Load Markers:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.


2. Select Load Marker Pairs From File. The Open dialog box opens.
3. Select a file type (*.txt or *.asc) from the drop-down list in the File of Type
field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file to loaded is in the Look In field.
5. Select the file. Its name appears in the File Name field.
6. Click Open.

Tip: You can also use the short-cut key L instead of selecting Load Marker
Pairs From File from the pop-up menu.

Modify Markers
Once four pairs of markers (Points or Lines) are set, you can delete those that
are not correctly set for matching, re-order a part (or the whole) of them, modify
their location in each view or reset them all. Four tools, available for editing the
marker features, are described hereafter.

1 - Move Marker 3 - Reset all Markers


2 - Delete Marker 4 - Re-order Markers
Tools in the Production Module 1171

Move a Point (or Line)


To Move a Point (or Line):

1. Click on the Move Markers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown
in the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D image or the 3D View.
The marker will be highlighted in pink in the 2D image and in green in the
3D View.
3. Drag and drop the marker to a new position. Its corresponding marker in
the other view will not be moved too.

1 - The cursor shape in the displacement mode 2 - The marker is in green when highlighted in
the 3D View
1172 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete a Point (or Line)


To Delete a Point (or Line):

1. Click the Delete Makers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown in
the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker either in the image or in the 3D scene.
The marker will be highlighted.
3. Click on the marker to delete it. Its corresponding marker in the other view
will is also deleted.

The cursor shape in the deletion mode

When you place the mouse cursor upon a point (P), its color tilts from red to
pink in the reference image and from yellow to green in the point cloud (or
mesh). This means that the point (P) is selected and can be deleted. Deleting a
point (P) will remove it from both the reference image and the point cloud (or
mesh). A point (P) once deleted is replaced by one which is just after it and the
pairs list is automatically updated. Once all markers deleted, you go back
automatically to the selection mode. When you delete a line (L), you delete by
the same way the line (L) in the other view.

Tip: You select a pair of markers from the marker list table and press the Del
key to delete it.
Tools in the Production Module 1173

Reset all Points (or Lines)


To Reset all Points (or Lines):

1. Click the Reset All Markers icon. A question box opens.


2. Click Yes to delete the current set of point/line markers.
3. Click No to abort the operation.

Tip: The Reset All Markers icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Reorder Points (or Lines)


To Reorder Points (or Lines):

1. Click the Reorder Markers icon. The cursor shape changes as shown
in the illustration below.
2. Move the cursor over any marker in either the 2D Image or the 3D View.
3. Pick the marker. Its order* is reversed with that of the first marker. The
order of its corresponding marker in the other view does not change.

Cursor shape in the reordering mode

Note: (*) Only if it is not the first in the selection order.


1174 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save Markers
You can save the selected marker pairs into a text file and reload it later on to
continue your image matching work.

To Save Markers:

1. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.


2. Select the Save Marker Pairs To File command. The Save As (or Open)
dialog box opens.
3. Select a file type (*.txt or *.asc) from the drop-down list in the File of Type
field.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the file to save is in the Look
In field.
5. Enter a file name in the File Name field. The selected extension will be
added automatically.
6. Click Save.

Tip: You can also use the short-cut key S instead of selecting Save Marker
Pairs To File from the pop-up menu.

Match an Image
With an unmatched image, once four pairs of markers have been selected, the
Preview button becomes enabled. You can proceed to a preview. With an
already matched image, you can view the stored matching.
Tools in the Production Module 1175

Preview an Image Matching


You can now preview the matching. The image will be projected into the 3D
View. It is displayed in the background and blended with the 3D scene. You
can use the slider to change the blending parameter in order to check the
coincidence of the image with the 3D data. The markers set on the displayed
scene appear on the reference image, this enables the user to visually
compare them with those set on the reference image.

To Preview an Image Matching:

1. In Step 3 of the Image Matching dialog, click Preview.

1 - Slider 2 - Image in background 3 - Point Cloud

2. If required, extend the thumbnail image and compare the markers.


1176 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Gap between markers set on the reference image and on the displayed scene

3. If required, click Hide. The image in background will be removed from the
3D View.

Tip:
 Instead of using the slider, you can click anywhere in the 3D View and use
the Up and Down keys of your keyboard.
 You can click anywhere in the 3D View and use the short-cut key A to set
the blending parameter to 0 (slider in Low position) or to 1 (slider in Top
position).

Note: You can hide the image by right-clicking anywhere in the 3D View and
selecting Projected Image.

Improve an Image Matching


Where necessary, you can improve the matching by adding more markers, de-
selecting some from the calculation (by using the check box in the marker list),
or modifying the position of certain markers, and then re-perform the preview.
Tools in the Production Module 1177

Adjust an Image Matching


You can also manually adjust the 3D scene over the projected image by small
movements. To do this, you can use either the free or the constrained
movements. Free movements consist of using basic navigation tools (Zoom,
Pan and Rotate) for moving the 3D scene while constrained movements
require the use of constraint tools.

To Adjust an Image Matching:

1. Constrain to a pair of markers.


2. Or constrain to two pairs of markers.

Note: Because you need to adjust the 3D scene to cover the projected image
by small movements in all directions, the Head Always Up option in
Preferences if checked is then disabled.

Constrain to a Pair a Markers


You can select either a 3D Point/2D Point pair or a 3D Line/2D Line pair as
constraint.

To Constrain to a Pair of Markers:

1. Select a pair of markers from the marker list which you consider offer the
best coincidence
2. The first Constrained to Marker Pair icon becomes active. Click on it.
3. Go to the 3D View, and move the scene. You can see that the movement
is constrained in such a way that the selected marker pair will always be
coincident.

Tip: To unset a pair of markers as constraint, click again on the Constrained to


Marker Pair icon.
1178 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers


If the first constraint is a 3D Point/2D Point pair, you can add a new constraint
which should be necessary a 3D Point/2D Point pair. You may see in the third
column (called Constraint) of the marker list table if a pair is selected as
constraint (or not). The first constrained pair is shown as follows
. The second constrained pair is shown as
follows .

To Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers:

1. Select another pair of markers from marker list. The second Constrained
to Marker Pair icon becomes enabled.
2. Click on the Constrained to Marker Pair icon.
3. Go to the 3D View, and move the scene. You can see that the movement
is constrained in such a way that both the selected pairs will always be
coincident.

Tip: To unset a pair of markers as constraint, click again on the Constrained to


Marker Pair icon.

Project an Image Matching


If the selected image is already matched, the Project button in Step 3 of the
Image Matching dialog becomes enabled. Clicking on it allows you to view the
matching.
Tools in the Production Module 1179

Color Points
You can now use the Coloring button to color the displayed cloud(s) with the
currently matched image. It is important to note that this coloring operation has
no Undo. After the coloring, the color attributes of the points can be changed
again if you use this function with another image.

1 - Colored points 2 - Uncolored points remain in white

Note: The Coloring operation may take a long time for huge datasets.

Apply the Matching


If you are satisfied with the matching result, you can use the Apply button to
save it to the database. It is important to note that this operation has no Undo.
The selected image becomes matched.

To Apply the Matching:

1. Click Apply.
2. Click Close.
1180 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Go to a Shooting Position
This feature allows you to align your viewing frustum from the shooting position
of an image as registered to the 3D data. It is not accessible if the selected
image has no 3D data correspondence.

To Go to a Shooting Position:

1. Select an image from the Images Tree.


2. Display (or open) the image if required.
3. From the 3D View menu, select View Alignment. A submenu drops down.
4. Select Go to Shooting Position .

The first screen capture shows an image The second image shows the view alignment
thumbnail with a displayed cloud after the Go to Shooting Position command is
executed

Tip: You can right-click on an image and select Go to Shooting Position from
the drop-down menu.

Note: The Go to Shooting Position feature is only available in Examiner (or


Walkthrough) mode.

Note: In Ribbon, you can click the Go to Shooting Position icon in the Matched
Image group, on the Imaging tab.
1181

Model Shapes
The Model tab provides a fast and intuitive 3D modeling capability. Tools in this
tab are gathered in two categories, called Creation and Edition.

Tools are split into two categories: Main Tool and Sub-Tool. Main tools enable
to model diverse shapes to represent the as-built environment using simple
CAD compliant geometrics. They can be reached from the Modeling menu, in
the Menu and Toolbars user interface or from the Creation group, on the Model
tab, in the Ribbon user interface.

Tools that enable to modify the objects created previously, can be found in the
Modeling menu in the Menu and Toolbars user interface, or in the Edition
group, on the Model tab, in the Ribbon user interface.

Note: The user can also find the Creation and Edition groups from the Model
tab on the Plant tab.

Cloud-Based Modeler
The Cloud-Based Modeler tool allows you to model geometries of the following
shapes: Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, etc. Modeling can only be cloud-based. In
this case, a selection as input data (Project Cloud or pure point cloud) is
required and the modeling is done by fitting points.
1182 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


An object having the point cloud and geometry representations cannot be
selected as entry for the Cloud-Based Modeler tool; you need to first delete the
geometry representation from that object. The selection can be multiple.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud* (or more*) from the Project Tree.


2. From the Modeling menu, select Cloud-Based Modeler . The Cloud-
Based Modeler dialog opens.

 This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The
Segmentation tool is open default and its toolbar appears. The input point
cloud is called Cloud Data. The information box at the top right corner of
the 3D View displays the RMS Deviate and Number of Points information
(both are initially "Undefined") for the Cloud-Based Modeler tool and the
Number of Points information for the Segmentation tool. The RMS (Root
Mean Square) Deviate corresponds to the standard deviation between
points used for fitting and the fitted geometry.
 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option
(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.

Note: (*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it
automatically tilts to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.

Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Cloud-Based Modeler feature can be reached from
the Creation group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1183

Select a New Cloud Data


The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not
necessary the one selected before starting the tool) for another one. You
cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud
Data; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.

1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1184 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data


Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them
before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of
it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling (see "Sample
Point Clouds" on page 331) sub-tools.

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud


To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1185

Delete the Displayed Cloud


To Delete the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data).

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).

Choose a Geometry Type


There are ten geometry types and one construction method (Extrusion). When
the Cloud-Based Modeler dialog appears, the type which comes first is the one
you have selected during the previous use of that tool. To change the
geometry type, click an icon in the Cloud-Based Modeler dialog. Extrusion is a
tool for creating a three-dimensional geometry of free shape from 2D profiles.

1 - Plane 5 - Box 8 - Segment


2 - Sphere 6 - Rectangular Torus 9 - Circular Arc
3 - Cylinder 7 - 3D Point 10 - Circular Torus
4 - Regular Cone  - Extrusion

Tip: You can also select a geometry type from the pop-up menu.
1186 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Use Constraints
This optional step is for applying constraints to objects under construction.
Check the Use Constraint option to make this step appear. Constraints can be
assumed as limits imposed on objects and they vary according to the geometry
type selected in Step 1. You cannot apply two constraints of the same type.
The applied constraint you find in the constraint list - see hereafter - is always
the last applied one.
Tools in the Production Module 1187

Plane
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying a constraint. A constraint
(once applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box
checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix
a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining
constraint types (see the table).

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. For


those you do not want anymore, you can de-select them by un-checking their
check box. To remove all created constraints, click on the Clear button. After
applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in the table.

[A]

1 - Make Parallel 3 - Pass Through Point


2 - Make Perpendicular 4 - Constraint list

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Plane:

1. Constrain a plane parallel/perpendicular to an entity.


2. Or constrain a plane passing through a point.
1188 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3. Un-checking a defined constraint in the constraint list will free the related
constraint type for use.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Tools in the Production Module 1189

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass Through a Point


To Pass Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1190 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Sphere
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. A constraint
(when applied) is put in the constraint list and each is selected by default (box
checked). You can apply one constraint of the same type at once. You can mix
a constraint type with another; but you have some restrictions in combining
constraint types (see the table).

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. For


those you do not want anymore, you can de-select them by un-checking their
check box. To remove all created constraints, click on the Clear button. After
applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Lock Radius 3 - Lock Center on Line


2 - Lock Center 4 - Constraint list

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Sphere:

1. Lock a sphere center.


2. Or lock a sphere radius.
Tools in the Production Module 1191

3. Or lock a sphere center on a line.


4. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:

1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.

Lock a Center
To Lock a Center:

1. Click the Lock Center icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.

Lock a Center on a Line


To Lock a Center on a Line:

1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1192 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cylinder
Six types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others. If you mix incompatible constraints together; a
warning message appears. After applying constraints, the constraint list looks
as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Parallel 4 - Make Secant to Cylinder


2 - Make Perpendicular 5 - Fit to Axis
3 - Pass Axis Through Point 6 - Lock Radius

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint


Tools in the Production Module 1193

To Apply Constraints to a Cylinder:

1. Make a cylinder parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.


2. Or lock a cylinder radius.
3. Or pass a cylinder axis through a point.
4. Or fit a cylinder axis.
5. Or constraint secant to a cylinder.
6. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
7. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


1194 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass an Axis Through a Point


To Pass an Axis Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
Tools in the Production Module 1195

Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:

1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.

Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.


2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1196 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Secant to a Cylinder


To Make Secant to a Cylinder:

1. Click the Make Secant to Cylinder icon. The 3D Secant dialog as well
as its information box appears.
2. Pick a cylinder.
3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the
picked cylinder.
4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.
5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.
6. Click OK.

Entity used as constraint

Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four sub-
constraint types according to the option(s) checked.

 If only Use Same Radius has been checked, you have the two following
constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Radius.
 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:
Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction.
 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make
Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1197

 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on,
you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and
Make Perpendicular to Direction.
 If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or
270°, you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to
Axis, Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction.
 If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or 270°,
you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis,
Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
 If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis Secant to
Axis constraint type.
1198 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Regular Cone
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Parallel 2 - Make Perpendicular 3 - Fit to Axis

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Apply Constraints to a Regular Cone:

1. Make a cone parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.


2. Or fit a cone axis.
3. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
4. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
Tools in the Production Module 1199

 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


1200 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.


2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1201

Circular Torus
Five types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to know on how a constraint
is compatible with the other(s).

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Perpendicular to Direction 4 - Align to Join Two Existing Secant Cylinders


2 - Make Parallel to Plane of Same Radius
3 - Lock Center Line Radius 5 - Lock Pipe Radius

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Apply Constraints to a Circular Torus:

1. Make a circular torus parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction.


2. Or fit a circular torus axis.
3. Or lock a circular torus's center line radius.
1202 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Or lock a circular torus's pipe radius.


5. Align and join a circular torus to two secant cylinders of the same radius.
6. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
7. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Note: Press Esc to leave the picking mode.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Perpendicular to a Direction


To Make Perpendicular to a Direction:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular to a Direction icon. The 3D Direction


toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.

Make Parallel to a Plane


To Make Parallel to a Plane:

1. Click the Make Parallel to a Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Lock a Center Line Radius


To Lock a Center Line Radius:

1. Click the Lock Center Line Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens
as well as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.


Tools in the Production Module 1203

Lock a Pipe Radius


To Lock a Pipe Radius:

1. Click the Lock Pipe Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well
as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.


1204 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius


To Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick an existing cylinder.
3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders
are not secant or do not have the same diameter.

Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.
Tools in the Production Module 1205

3D Point
Two types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. These two
constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table below to check how a
constraint is compatible with the others.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Lock on Plane 2 - Lock to Line or Axis

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a 3D Point:

1. Lock a 3D point on a plane.


2. Or lock a 3D point on a line/axis.
3. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
4. Or Click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.
1206 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:

1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Lock to Line (or Axis)


To Lock on a Line (or Axis):

1. Click the Lock to Line (or Axis) icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens with
the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1207

Circular Arc
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. Lock on Plane,
Make Parallel to Plane and Make Perpendicular to Direction (already evoked)
will detail here. All constraints cannot be mixed together; refer to the table
below to check how a constraint is compatible with the others.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Lock on Plane 2 - Make Parallel to Plane 3 - Make Perpendicular to


Direction

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Apply Constraints to a Circular Arc:

1. Lock a circular arc on a plane (see the 3D Plane tool).


2. Or make a circular arc parallel to a plane (see the 3D Plane tool).
3. Or make a circular arc perpendicular to a direction (see the 3D Direction
tool).
4. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
1208 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:

1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Make Parallel to a Plane


To Make Parallel to a Plane:

1. Click the Make Parallel to a Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Make Perpendicular to a Direction


To Make Perpendicular to a Direction:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular to a Direction icon. The 3D Direction


toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1209

Segment
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list (with two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together; refer to the table (click to see) to know on how a
constraint is compatible with the other.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Make Parallel 2 - Make Perpendicular 3 - Pass Axis Through Point

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Segment:

1. Make a segment parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see


the 3D Picking tool/3D Plane tool/3D Direction tool).
2. Or pass a segment though a point (see the 3D Point tool).
3. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
4. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
1210 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Tools in the Production Module 1211

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass an Axis Through a Point


To Pass an Axis Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1212 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extrusion
This step is not in option as for the other geometry types. The Use Constraint
option is checked by default and cannot be unchecked. The Drawing and
Picking Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbars appear and the cursor is
in the drawing mode. Two types of constraint are available. The constraint list
(with two columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints.

1 - Make Parallel to Direction 3 - Launch 2D Drawing Tool


2 - Make Perpendicular to Plane 4 - Constraint list

Define a Polyline
In the Drawing toolbar, not only the Change Mode icon is available but also the
Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons. This differs from the Drawing toolbar in
the Polyline Drawing tool.

To Define a Polyline:

 If required, click the Start 2D Drawing Tool icon.

Note:
 After defining a polyline, all drawing modes (Line, Arc, Rectangle and
Circle) are dimmed in the Drawing toolbar.
 The Walkthrough navigation mode is forbidden. If you are in the
Walkthrough mode, the navigation mode will swap of its own from that
mode to Examiner after starting drawing.
Tools in the Production Module 1213

Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to the Screen


View
To Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to the Screen View:

3. Choose a drawing mode among Line, Arc, Rectangle and Circle.


4. Draw a polyline. The scene is locked on a plane parallel to the screen view
with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking
Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
5. Validate the polyline. The scene is free from the 2D lock.

The Lock 2D Curve and Make Parallel to Direction constraints appear in the
constraint list. The primitive to extrude will have an axis direction perpendicular
to the screen view.

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box


1214 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined Plane


To Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined Plane:

1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar appears.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D
plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode.
3. Choose a drawing mode among Line, Arc, Rectangle and Circle.
4. Draw and validate a polyline. The scene is free from the 2D lock.

By default, the defined polyline is a 2D polyline in the defined 3D plane which


is brought parallel to the screen view. The Lock 2D Curve and Make Parallel to
Direction constraints appear in the constraint list. The primitive to extrude will
have an axis direction perpendicular to the screen view.

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box

Note:
 (*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane tool on how to define a 3D plane.
 The Find Best Extrusion View is only present when using the 3D
Plane tool in the Cloud-Based Modeler tool. It enables to find the best
cutting direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1215

Select a Polyline
If there is a polyline within the project (or after drawing and creating one), you
can set it as selected. Only a 2D polyline and 3D coplanar polyline (all nodes
are in the same plane) can be selected.

To Select a Polyline:

1. Click the Select Polyline icon. The cursor becomes as


2. Pick a polyline. A polyline (in green) appears over the picked polyline. The
scene is locked on the polyline's plane with a 2D grid superimposed (if not
hidden previously) and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D
constraint mode.
3. Validate the polyline. It becomes red and the scene is free from the 2D
lock.

Tip: You can also check Select Polyline from the pop-up menu.
1216 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Parallel to a Direction


If you wish the primitive to extrude has an axis direction parallel to a defined
direction, follow the steps below:

To Make Parallel to a Direction:

1. Click the Make Parallel to Direction icon. The 3D Direction toolbar


opens.
2. Define and validate a direction. The Make Parallel to Direction constraint is
put in the constraint list.
3. Draw* or select a polyline (if existing).
4. Validate the defined polyline.

1 - Defined direction 2 - First Picked point in the polyline drawing


mode

Note:
 (*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene
locked to a view perpendicular to the defined direction.
 After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in
the constraint list under the Make Parallel to Direction constraint.

Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
Tools in the Production Module 1217

Make Perpendicular to a Plane


If you wish the primitive to extrude has an axis direction parallel to the normal
direction of a defined plane, follow the steps below:

To Make Perpendicular to a Plane:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular to Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar


opens.
2. Define and validate a plane. The Make Perpendicular to Plane constraint
is put under the constraint list.
3. Draw* or select a polyline (if existing).
4. Validate the defined polyline.

1 - A defined plane 2 - The first picked point in the polyline drawing


mode

Note:
 (*) Picking a first point in the polyline drawing mode will bring the 3D scene
locked to a view parallel to the defined plane with a 2D Grid (if not
previously hidden).
 After validating the defined polyline, the Lock 2D Curve constraint is put in
the constraint list under the Make Perpendicular to Plane constraint.

Tip: You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
the Del to clear it.
1218 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rectangular Torus
Only one constraint type is available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying a constraint. After applying a
constraint, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Apply Constraints to a Rectangular Torus:

1. Align to join to two existing secant boxes of same section.


2. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
3. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: The user should fit (or extract) a Rectangular Torus with constraint.
Otherwise, the Fit and Extract buttons remain dimmed.
Tools in the Production Module 1219

Align to Join Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section


To Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
1220 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
 Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
 Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.

4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.

Tip:
 If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
 If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.
Tools in the Production Module 1221

Box
Three types of constraint are available (see [A]). The constraint list with (two
columns Type and With) is empty before applying constraints. All constraints
cannot be mixed together, refer to the table below to check how a constraint is
compatible with the others.

If you mix incompatible constraints together; a warning message appears. After


applying constraints, the constraint list looks as shown in [B].

[A]

1 - Define Z* 2 - Define X* 3 - Make Secant to Box (With


Same Section)

[B]

1 - Constraint type 2 - Check box 3 - Entity used as constraint

To Use a Constraint to Calculate a Box:

1. Define the vector X direction,


2. Or define the normal Z direction,
3. Or make secant to a box (with same section).
4. Un-check a defined constraint in the constraint list to free it.
5. Or click Clear to remove all constraints from the list.

Tip:
1222 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 You can also select an applied constraint from the constraint list and use
Del to clear it.
 All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: A main axis direction property is added to a Box. It is initialized to the


largest direction of the Box upon construction. It is possible to change the Box
main axis in the Geometry Modifier tool.

1 - The largest side of a Box 2 - Main axis

Define the Vector X Direction


To Define the Vector X Direction:

1. Click the Define X icon. The 3D Direction toolbar opens with the Pick an
Entity With Direction set by-default.
2. Define a direction using available tools.

The Vector X (also called Direction of the Weight in the Property window) of
the box is parallel* to the defined direction.

Note: (*) But not necessary in the same direction.


Tools in the Production Module 1223

Define the Normal Z Direction


To Define the Normal Z Direction:

1. Click the Define Z icon. The 3D Direction toolbar opens with the Pick an
Entity With Direction set by-default.
2. Define a direction using available tools.

The Normal Z (also called Direction of the Height in the Property window) of
the box is parallel** to the defined direction.

Note: (*) But not necessary in the same direction.

Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section)


To Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section):

1. Click the Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section) icon.


2. Pick a box.
1224 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Calculate a Geometry
This step can come after choosing a geometry type or after constraints have
been applied. You have two ways for computing a geometry: Fit and Extract.
Fit consists of adjusting the displayed/fenced point cloud with geometry.
Extract consist in picking a point on the point cloud where the geometry should
lie. The resulting geometry will be fitted to a subset of the point cloud in the
neighborhood around the picked point. This is a faster way of defining a
geometry; no fence is necessary.

If no sampling/segmentation has been done; the displayed cloud (current cloud


data) will be used for fitting or for extraction. In (A), the number of points in the
fitted geometry is equal to the number of points in the current cloud data. If a
sampling/segmentation has been done, the number of points in the geometry is
equal to the number of points after segmenting/sampling if Fit has been chosen
(B) and different if Extract has been chosen (C). After fitting or extracting a
geometry, its properties are shown in the Cloud-Based Modeler information
box.

To Fit a Geometry on Points:

 Click Fit. A primitive of the type selected in Step 1 appears.

To Extract a Geometry from a Picked Point:

1. Click Extract.
2. Pick a point. A primitive of the type selected in Step 1 appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1225

After fitting a geometry on points or extracting a geometry from a picked point,


you can change the geometry shape by opening the Geometry Modifier tool.
Note that modifications on the geometry will create it as persistent object in the
database. If you swap from a geometry type to another, the fitted/extracted
geometry will be lost; and no warning message will appear. If constraints have
been applied; clicking on the Clear button will also cancel the fitted or extracted
geometry.

Tip: If a sampling/segmentation has been started; you can directly fit and
create a geometry in the database without doing this in two steps. Choose for
that the Fit and Create command from the pop-up menu or use its related
short-cut key Space bar.

Note:
 Fit and Extract are dimmed if Extrusion has been selected in Step 1 and
remains in this state as long as a polyline has not been drawn and
validated.
 The Extract function will work well when the picked point is in a clear area
on the model, i.e., where the model is only present in a large enough
neighborhood around the point. When it is difficult to find a clear area, then
it is better to first fence then fit

Create a Geometry
If you are satisfied with the fitted/extracted geometry, you can create it as a
persistent object in the RealWorks database by using the Create button in the
dialog. You can create as many geometries as required without leaving the
tool. When you need to leave the tool, just click on Close.

Tip: Create and Close can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Geometry Creator
The Geometry Creator tool is for creating a geometry. Ten types are available.
You can create a geometry by editing known parameters, picking points or
picking entities within displayed objects. All construction methods inside the
tool are pure; they are in opposition to those based on point cloud fitting. A
created geometry can be used as an entry for the other tools of RealWorks like
e.g. the Surface to Model Inspection tool where models of tunnel are required
for comparison.
1226 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


No selection is required to open the Geometry Creator tool. Inside each
creation mode, picking a point (free or constrained) does not need to be on
displayed objects. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the 3D constraint
mode. When you swap a creation mode for another, a message appears and
prompts you to save or not the current geometry (default or drawn one) except
for Plane, Circular Torus, Extrusion and 3D Point.

To Open the Tool:

 In the Modeling menu, select Geometry Creator . The Geometry


Creator dialog opens.

1 - Cylinder 4 - Rectangular Torus 7 - Circular Torus


2 - Sphere 5 - Extrusion 8 - Box
3 - Plane 6 - Regular Cone 9 - Segment
10 - 3D Point

This dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window. The Plane type is
set by default and the 3D Plane tool information box appears at the top right
corner of the 3D View.

Note:
 You can press the Esc key to leave the Geometry Creator tool.
 You can use the Geometry Modifier tool, the Intersect tool and the
Duplicator tool within the Geometry Creator tool in order to modify the
geometry you are defining.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Geometry Creator feature can be reached from the
Creation group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1227

Define a Plane
To Define a Plane:

1. Click the Plane icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes
as shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode and in [B] in
Station-Based mode.

[A] [B]

2. Do one of the following:

 Define a 3D plane (in all navigation modes (Examiner, Walkthrough and


Station-Based)).
 Define a 3D plane in the Station-Based mode.
 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A plane whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current Sub-
Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the plane parameters like its Center and Direction of Axis.

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters


1228 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Plane (in all Navigation Modes (Examiner, Walkthrough and Station-Based))
There are three methods available in all navigation modes for interactively
defining a plane's orientation and position: Pick two Screen Points, Pick Three
Points and Pick Two Points. For the first method, the plane will pass through
the line defined by these two points and will be perpendicular to the screen
plane. For the second method, the plane will pass through these three points.
The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is
defined by two vectors. Selecting this method will orientate the plane so that
the second vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the active
coordinate frame.

There are two methods for precisely defining the orientation of a plane: Axis
and Pick Entity with Direction. For the first method, the plane becomes
perpendicular to an axis of the active frame. For the second method, the
plane's orientation will be aligned to the axis of the picked entity.

Pick an Entity With Direction


To Pick an Entity With a Direction:

1. Click Pick Entity with Direction .


2. Pick an entity with direction.

Make Perpendicular to Axis


To Make Perpendicular to an Axis:

1. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z


Coordinate System).
2. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).

Pick Two Screen Points


To Pick Two Screen Points:

1. Click Pick two Screen Points .


2. Pick two points on displayed objects or not.
Tools in the Production Module 1229

Pick Three Points


To Pick Three Points:

1. Click Pick three Points . The Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick three points (free or constrained) on displayed objects or not.

Pick Two Points


To Pick Two Points:

1. Click Pick Two Points (in the X, Y and Z Coordinate System).


2. Or click in the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).
3. Pick two points. No need to pick on displayed objects.

Define a 3D Plane in the Station-Based Mode


There are several methods available in the Station-Based mode for defining a
3D plane.

You can swap from the Station-Based mode to the Examiner (or Walkthrough)
mode and vice versa; Switching to the Examiner mode is typically useful for
checking a plane that has been defined in the Station-Based mode.

To Pick Points:

 Define a 3D plane by using one of the following methods:

 Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Points (on page 1136),
 Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal
Direction) and One 3D Point (on page 1138),
 Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and
Steepest Slope Directions) and One 3D Points (on page 1140).

Note: You can define a projection plane even if the selected station does not
contain any image.
1230 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Points
To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking two Screen Points (Horizontal Direction)
and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1231

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1232 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Point
To Define a Horizontal Plane by Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
Tools in the Production Module 1233

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1234 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and One 3D Points
This feature enables to define a plane with any orientation.

To Define a Plane by Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[A]

3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1235

4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.

[C]

[D]

5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.
1236 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a direction in the Normal field.


2. Enter a point’s position in the Position field.
Tools in the Production Module 1237

Define a Sphere
To Define a Sphere:

1. Click the Sphere icon. Pick Two Points * is set by default. The
Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor
is in the picking mode.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick two points*.


 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A Sphere whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the sphere parameters like its Center, Diameter, Direction of
Axis and Distance Between Extremities.

1 - Auto-computed parameters 2 - Editable parameters 3 - Un-editable parameters

Note:
 The Direction of Axis is assumed to be aligned with the Z-Axis of the
active coordinate frame.
 (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D
Sphere at the middle of the 3D View. This 3D Sphere has the default
parameters as parameters (the ones in the dialog after choosing Sphere
as Geometry Type). If you decide to choose another Geometry Type, a
dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1238 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Points


To Pick Two Points:

1. If required, click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a sphere.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a sphere.

Edit Parameters
The value by default for the Radius is one meter. The 3D coordinates in the
Center field are the 3D position of the middle of the 3D View.

To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter another 3D coordinates in the Center field.


2. Enter a new value in the Radius field.
Tools in the Production Module 1239

Define a Cylinder
To Create a Cylinder:

1. Click the Cylinder icon. Pick Three Points * is selected by default.


The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The
cursor is in the picking mode.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick three points*.


 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A Cylinder whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the cylinder parameters like its Center, Pipe Diameter,
Length, Direction of Axis, Direction of Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2.

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters

Note:
 The Direction of Bound 1 and the Direction of Bound 2 are aligned with the
Direction of Axis.
 (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical
Cylinder at the middle of the 3D View. This Cylinder has as parameters
the defaults (the ones in the dialog after choosing Cylinder as Geometry
Type). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and
prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).
1240 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Points


To Pick Three Points:

1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar opens in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a cylinder.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a cylinder.
4. Pick a third point. This point will define the pipe radius.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click on the pull down arrow.


2. Choose between "Two Points and Radius" and "Point, Direction and
Length".

 If "Two Points and Radius" has been chosen:

a) Enter a point’s coordinates in the First Point field.


b) Enter another point’s coordinates in the Last Point field.
c) Enter a distance value in the Radius field.

 If "Point, Direction and Length" has been chosen:

a) Enter a direction in the Direction field.


b) Give a point’s position in the Position field.
c) Give a distance value in the Radius field.
Tools in the Production Module 1241

Define a Regular Cone


To Define a Regular Cone:

1. Click the Regular Cone icon. Pick Three Points * is set by default.
The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The
cursor is in the picking mode.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick three points*.


 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A Regular Cone whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current Sub-Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property
window open, you can edit manually the regular cone parameters like its
Center, Diameter at Base, Diameter at Top, Distance Between Extremities and
Direction of Axis.

1 - Auto-computed parameters 2 - Editable parameters 3 - Un-editable parameters

Note:
 The Center and Direction of Axis (automatically computed based-on the
other parameters) can be modified.
 (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a vertical
Regular Cone at the middle of the 3D View. This Regular Cone has as
parameters the default parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after
choosing Regular Cone as Geometry Type). If you choose another
geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current
geometry (or not).
1242 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Points


To Pick Three Points:

1. If required, click the Pick Three Points icon.


2. Pick a point. This point will be the base extremity of a regular cone.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the top extremity of a regular cone.
4. Pick a third point. This point will define the top radius.

The drawn regular cone parameters are displayed in the dialog.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a 3D position in the First Point field.


2. Enter another 3D position in the Last Point field.
3. Give a radius for the first point in the Top Radius field.
4. Give a radius for the last point in the Base Radius field.
Tools in the Production Module 1243

Define a Circular Torus


To Define a Circular Torus:

1. Click the Circular Torus icon.


2. Do one of the following:

 Pick two points (1).


 Align to join an existing cylinder (2).
 Align to join to two secant cylinders of same radius (3).
 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A Circular Torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window
open, you can edit manually the Circular Torus parameters like its Center, Pipe
Diameter, Center Line Diameter, Direction of Axis and Bend Angle.

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters

Note:
 (1) With no constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is of closed
shape (the Bend Angle equal to 360 degrees).
 (2) With one constraint applied, the created Circular Torus is an open
regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal to 90 degrees.
 (3) With two constraints applied, the created Circular Torus is an open
regular torus, its Bend Angle is equal or less than 90 degrees.
1244 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Circular
Torus at the middle of the 3D View. This Circular Torus has as parameters the
defaults parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog after choosing Circular
Torus as Geometry Type). If you choose another geometry type, a dialog
appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick Two Points


To Pick Two Points:

1. Click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the center of a Circular Torus.
3. Pick another point. This point will define the Pipe Radius + Center Line
Radius distance.

Align to Joint to an Existing Cylinder


To Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder:

1. Click the Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder icon.


2. Pick an existing cylinder.
Tools in the Production Module 1245

Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius


To Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick an existing cylinder.
3. Pick another existing cylinder. The result is null if the two picked cylinders
are not secant or do not have the same diameter.

Note: A warning appears if the two picked cylinder axes are parallel.
1246 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Give a direction in the Normal field.


2. Enter a 3D position in the Center field.
3. Enter a distance in the Center Line Radius field.
4. Enter a distance in the Pipe Radius field.
Tools in the Production Module 1247

Define a Box
To Create a Box:

1. Click the Box icon. Step 2 of the Geometry Creator dialog becomes as
shown in [A] in the Examiner (or Walkthrough) modes and in [B] in the
Station-Based mode.

[A] [B]

2. In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode, do one of the following:

 Pick an entity with direction,


 Project a box on a plane,
 Pick the bottom left corner of a box,
 Pick four 3D points,
 Edit parameters.

3. In the Station-Based mode, in addition to the five construction methods


above, do one of the following:

 Define a horizontal face by picking one 3D point, then four screen points
(two horizontal directions and depth),
 Define a vertical face by picking one 3D point, the four screen points
(horizontal direction, vertical direction and depth).

4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.

A 3D Box whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the box parameters like its Center, Width, Depth, Height, etc.
1248 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - Editable parameters (in black) 2 - Un-editable parameters (in gray)

Note: In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Box at
the middle of the 3D View. Its parameters are displayed in the dialog. If you
choose another geometry type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the
current geometry (or not).

Note: A main axis direction property is added to a Box. It is initialized to the


largest direction of the Box upon construction. It is possible to change the Box
main axis in the Geometry Modifier tool.

1 - The largest side of a Box 2 - Main axis


Tools in the Production Module 1249

Pick an Entity With a Direction


To Pick an Entity With a Direction:

1. Click the Pick Entity With Direction icon. The cursor becomes as
shown in [A].
2. Pick an entity. A 3D Box appears [B].

[A]

[B]

 It has the picked entity's Direction of Axis as Normal Z direction (also


called Direction of Height in the Property window),
 Its center is the same as the picked entity's.
1250 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Project a Box onto a Plane


To Project a Box in a Plane:

1. Click the Stick to Plane icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The
bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.

[A]

[B]

The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also
called the Normal Z* of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same
direction. In the example below, both are opposite.

[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1251

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Pick the Bottom Left Corner of a Box


To Pick the Bottom Left Corner of a Box:

1. Click the Pick Bottom Left Corner of Box icon. The cursor becomes as
shown and the Picking Parameters toolbar in the 3D constraint mode
opens.
2. Pick a point. A 3D Box appears. Its bottom left corner is the point you
picked.

Note: Picking should be on displayed objects.


1252 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Four Screen Points


To Pick Four Screen Points:

1. Click the Pick Four Screen Points icon. The cursor becomes as shown
in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar in 3D constraint mode opens.
2. Pick the first screen point*. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Move your mouse. A segment in orange links the first screen point to the
cursor.

[A] [B]

4. Pick the second screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in
[C].
5. Move your mouse. Two other segments in orange link the first and second
screen points previously picked to the cursor. The two picked points and
the cursor draw a triangular plane.
6. Pick the third screen point*. The cursor then takes the shape shown in [D]
and the triangular plane changes to a rectangular plane.

[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1253

7. Move again your mouse (from Up to Down or vice versa). A 3D Box (with
an orange frame) appears.
8. Pick the fourth screen point* to complete the 3D Box.

Note: Picking should be on displayed points.


1254 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Horizontal Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Points (Two
Horizontal Directions and Depth)
To Define a Horizontal Face by Picking One 3D Point, then Four Screen Points
(Two Horizontal Directions and Depth):

1. Click the Define Horizontal Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four
Screen Points (Two Horizontal Directions and Depth) icon. The cursor
becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a 3D Point. Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor takes
then the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.

[A]

[B]
Tools in the Production Module 1255

4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment
in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment can be
vertical or horizontal.
5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.
6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A
horizontal plane (with an orange frame) appears.
7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.

[C]

[D

8. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [E]. A 3D
Box (with an orange frame) appears.
9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D Box.

[E]
1256 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tools in the Production Module 1257

Define a Vertical Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Points (Horizontal
Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth)
To Define a Vertical Face by Picking one 3D Point, then Four Screen Points
(Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth):

1. Click the Define Vertical Face By Picking One 3D Point, Then Four Screen
Points (Horizontal Direction, Vertical Direction and Depth) . The cursor
becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a point. Picking should be on displayed points. The cursor then takes
the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick the first screen point. Picking doesn't need to be on displayed points.

[A]

[B]

4. Move your mouse. The cursor then becomes as shown in [C]. A segment
in orange links the first screen point to the cursor. This segment should not
be vertical but horizontal.
5. Pick the second screen point, not necessary on displayed points.
1258 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. Move your mouse again. The cursor then becomes as shown in [D]. A
vertical plane (with an orange frame) appears.
7. Pick the third screen point, not necessarily on displayed points.

[C]

[D]

8. Move again your mouse. The cursor becomes then as shown in [E]. A 3D
Box (with an orange frame) appears.
9. Pick the fourth screen point to complete the 3D box.

[E]
Tools in the Production Module 1259

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Enter a point position in the Center field.


2. Enter a direction in the Normal Z field.
3. Enter a direction in the Vector X field.
4. Enter a distance value in the Depth (X) field.
5. Enter a distance value in the Width (Y) field.
6. Enter a distance value in the Height (Z) field.

Note: After updating a parameter, remember to press Enter. The current 3D


Box (the one in display in the 3D View) will change its shape according to the
updated parameter.
1260 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Rectangular Torus


To Create a Rectangular Torus:

1. Click the Rectangular Torus icon.


2. Do one of the following:

 Align to join to two existing secant boxes of same section,


 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A rectangular torus whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the
current Sub-Project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property
window open, you can edit manually the rectangular torus parameters like its
Center, Width, Height, etc.

1 - Editable parameters (in black) 2 - Un-editable parameters (in gray)

Note: If no constraints have been applied; the created rectangular torus is of


open shape (the Bend Angle is less than 360 degrees). If no constraint has
been applied, the created rectangular torus is of closed shape (the Bend angle
is equal to 360 degrees).
Tools in the Production Module 1261

Align to Join Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section


To Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
1262 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
 Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
 Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.

4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.

Tip:
 If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
 If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.

Edit the Parameters


To Edit Parameters:

1. Give a direction in the Normal field.


2. Enter a 3D position in the Center field.
3. Enter a distance in the Center Line Radius field.
4. Enter a distance in the Width field.
5. Enter a distance in the Height field.

Note: The Normal's direction is called Direction of Axis in the Property window.
Tools in the Production Module 1263

Define an Extruded Entity


An Extrusion is a tool for creating a three-dimensional geometry of free shape
from 2D profiles.

To Create an Extruded Entity:

1. Click the Extrusion icon. The Drawing and Picking Parameters (in 3D
constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Draw or select a polyline.
3. Enter a distance value in the Length field.
4. Click Create.
5. Click Close.

An Extrusion whose name is OBJECTX is created and put in the Models Tree.
X is its order. With the Property window open, you can edit manually the
segment parameters like its Center, Length, Direction of Axis, Direction of
Bound 1 and Direction of Bound 2.

1 - Editable parameters 2 - Un-editable parameters


1264 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create an Extrusion With Holes


An Extrusion with holes is mainly a three-dimensional geometry of Plane shape
with holes within.

To Create an Extrusion With Holes:

1. In OfficeSurvey, use the Polyline Drawing tool to draw a series of circles.


2. Finalize the drawing with a plane surrounded the circles.

3. In Modeling, select Geometry Creator tool from the menu.


4. Choose Extrusion as Geometry Type from Step 1.
5. Choose Select a Polyline from the Drawing toolbar.
6. Pick any polyline from the 3D View. All are selected.
7. Enter a value in the Length field.
8. Click Create.
9. Click Close.
Tools in the Production Module 1265
1266 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Point
To Define a 3D Point:

1. Click the 3D Point icon. A 3D Point appears at the middle of the 3D


View. Its 3D coordinates are displayed in the Position field (in the dialog)
and in the information panel (in the 3D View).
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a point*
 Pick three secant planes*.
 Pick a plane and a segment*.
 Pick an entity with center*.
 Project a 3D Point on a plane*.
 Pick two axial entities*.

A 3D Point in yellow appears in the 3D View. Its parameter (Center) is updated


in the dialog in the Position field.

 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A 3D Point whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can only edit manually the 3D Point's Center.

Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from
the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a 3D Point
at the middle of the 3D View. If you choose another geometry type, a dialog
appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick a Point
To Pick a Point:

1. Click the Pick Point icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the
initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).
Tools in the Production Module 1267

Pick Three Planes


If three planes are not parallel two-by-two (with no coplanar normals), then
they will intersect (cross over) somewhere at a point.

To Pick Three Planes:

1. Click the Pick Three Planes icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the
3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears
upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].
1268 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked
planes) appears. [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1269

Pick a Plane and a Segment


In this creation mode, you need to have a plane and a segment - both
intersected at a point.

To Pick a Plane and a Segment:

1. Click the Pick Plane and Segment icon. The initial 3D Point disappears
from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].
1270 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick an Entity with Center


To Pick an Entity With Center:

1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following

shape . The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View.


2. Pick an object of any type having a center (except point cloud, mesh, etc.).
Tools in the Production Module 1271

Project a 3D Point on a Plane


To Project a 3D Point on a Plane:

1. Click the Project 3D Point on Plane icon. The initial 3D point


disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick a 3D Point. A yellow label with the following text “Point to Project on
Plane” appears over the picked point [B].

3. Pick a plane. A 3D point appears on that plane [C].


1272 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Axial Entities


To Pick Two Axial Entities:

1. Click the Pick Two Axial Entities .


2. Pick an axial geometry in the 3D View.
3. Pick another axial geometry in the 3D View.

Note: A warning message appears if no intersection is found.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

 Enter a 3D Point position in the Position field.


Tools in the Production Module 1273

Define a Segment
To Define a Segment:

1. Click the Segment icon.


2. Do one of the following:

 Pick two points*,


 Pick two planes*,
 Pick an axial geometry*,

A Segment in yellow appears in the 3D View. Its parameters (Direction of Axis


and Center) are updated in the dialog in the Direction, Point and Length fields
(if "Point, Direction and Length" has been chosen) and in the First Point and
Last Point fields (if "Two Points" has been chosen).

 Edit parameters.

3. Click Create.
4. Click Close.

A Segment whose name is OBJECTX is created and put under the current
project in the Models Tree. X is its order. With the Property window open, you
can edit manually the segment parameters like its Center, Direction of Axis and
Length.

Note: (*) In the picking mode, pressing Esc (or selecting Cancel Picking from
the pop-up menu) first leaves that mode and then makes appeared a Segment
at the middle of the 3D View. This Segment has as parameters the default
parameters (the ones displayed in the dialog). If you choose another geometry
type, a dialog appears and prompts you to create the current geometry (or not).

Pick Two Points


To Pick Two Points:

1. Click the Pick Two Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode and the cursor is in the picking mode.
2. Pick a point. This point will be the first extremity of a Segment.
3. Pick another point. This point will be the second extremity of a Segment.

Note: Pickings can be done on objects displayed in the 3D View (or not).
1274 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Planes


If two planes are not parallel, then they will intersect (cross over) each other
somewhere at a line.

To Pick Two Planes:

1. Click the Pick Two Planes icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar opens
in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick another plane.


Tools in the Production Module 1275

Pick an Axial Geometry


To Pick an Axial Geometry:

1. Click the Pick Axial Geometry icon.


2. Pick an axial geometry in the 3D View.

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click on the pull down arrow.


2. Choose between "Two Points" and "Point, Direction and Length".

 If "Two Points" has been chosen:

a) Enter a 3D position in the First Point field.


b) Enter another 3D position in the Last Point field.

 If "Point, Direction and Length" has been chosen:

a) Enter a direction in the Direction field.


b) Enter a 3D position in the Point field.
c) Enter a distance value in the Length field.
1276 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Sub-Tools
There are no direct entries for sub-tools. All of them can only be open within a
main tool to perform basic operations such as editing or transforming an
existing shape or a shape to create. There is no creation anymore
Tools in the Production Module 1277

3D Picking
The 3D Picking is a tool for picking entities with direction. It only appears when
you apply constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make Parallel (or
Make Perpendicular) constraint, the 3D Picking tool opens as a tab of the
Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar with the Pick Entity with
Direction mode set by-default (see [A]). When the Make Parallel to Plane or
Lock on Plane constraint has been applied to object manipulation; Pick Entity
with Direction appears in the 3D Plane tool opens as shown in [B]*. When the
Make Perpendicular to Direction constraint has been applied to object
manipulation; the 3D Direction tool opens as shown in [C]*.

The 3D Picking tool information at the top right corner of the 3D View is empty
of information. The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar contains
three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar appears; the By Picking Entity tab
comes first. All these constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier,
Cloud-Based Modeler, etc.

[A]

[B]

[C]

1 - Pick Entity With Direction 2 - Cancel

Note:
 To leave the Pick Entity with Direction mode, press Esc or select Cancel
Picking from the pop-up menu.
 (*) In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) navigation mode.
1278 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick an Entity with Direction


To Pick an Entity with Direction:

1. Select an entity from the Project Tree (or in the 3D View). The Make
Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) becomes active.
2. Click Pick Entity with Direction if required.
3. Click a point on a displayed entity.

 If Make Parallel has been chosen, the selected entity will be parallel to the
picked entity.
 If Make Perpendicular has been chosen, the selected entity will be
perpendicular to the picked entity.

4. Click Cancel. The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar closes.

1 - The selected entity 3 - The selected entity is parallel to the picked


2 - The picked entity entity

Note: When picking a plane as constraint, the entity in selection will be parallel
(or perpendicular) not to the plane’s normal direction but to the plane itself.

Tip: You can also select Pick Entity with Direction and Cancel from the pop-up
menu. For Cancel, you can press Esc.
Tools in the Production Module 1279

3D Direction
The 3D Direction allows you to define 3D primitives of linear shape (only
direction). This tool appears when applying constraints to object manipulation.
When using the Make Perpendicular or Make Parallel constraint, the 3D
Direction tool opens as a tab of the Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel)
toolbar with the X-axis* mode set by-default (see [A]). The Make Perpendicular
(or Make Parallel) toolbar contains three tabs detailed below. When this toolbar
appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first.

To use the 3D Direction tool, you need to click on the To Direction tab. A 3D
direction in yellow and dotted appears. To use the tool fully, you need to have
objects selected and displayed. When the Make Perpendicular to Direction
constraint has been applied to object manipulation; the 3D Direction tool opens
as shown in [B]. The 3D Direction tool information box at the top right corner of
the 3D View displays the current 3D direction (default or drawn) parameters.
These constraints can be found in tools like Geometry Modifier, Cloud-Based
Modeler, etc.

[A]

[B]

1 - X*, Y and Z* Axis 4 - Pick Two Screen Points 7 - Cancel


2 - Pick Two Points 5 - Edit Parameters 8 - Pick Entity With Direction
3 - Pick Two Planes 6 - Validate

Tip: All direction definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or
using available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).

Note: (*) In the X, Y and Z Coordinate System.


1280 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Direction Using Precise Methods


There are four methods for precisely defining the orientation of a 3D segment.
The first method is to select an axis (from the active coordinate frame) so that
the initial 3D direction becomes parallel to it. The second method is by picking
points on displayed objects. In general, the 3D direction’s orientation will be
aligned to these two picked points. The third method is to edit parameters. The
fourth method is to pick an entity with direction.

To Define a 3D Direction Perpendicular to an Axis:

1. Choose among X axis , Y axis and Z axis (in the X, Y and Z


Coordinate System).
2. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking Two Points:

1. Click Pick Two Points . The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D


constraint mode and the cursor becomes as shown in [A] and the initial 3D
direction disappears from the 3D View.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on the displayed entity. The cursor
becomes as shown in [B].
3. Pick another point (free or constrained). A direction in the form of yellow
dotted line appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1281

To Define a 3D Direction by Editing Parameters:

1. Click Edit Parameters . The Direction Editing dialog opens.


2. Enter a direction in the Direction field.
3. Click OK. The Direction Editing dialog closes.

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking an Entity with Direction:

1. Click Pick Entity with Direction .


2. Pick an entity with a direction in the 3D View.
1282 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Direction Using Visual Methods


There are two methods for visually defining a 3D segment’s orientation. The
first method is to pick two points. A 3D segment will pass through the line
defined by these two points. The second method is to pick two secant planes.

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking Two Points:

1. Click Pick Two Screen Points .


2. Pick two points. No need to pick on the displayed object.

To Define a 3D Direction by Picking two Planes:

1. Click Pick Two Planes . The cursor becomes as shown in (A).


2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background appears upon the
picked plane and the cursor becomes as shown in (B).
3. Pick another plane. An axis (yellow dotted line) appears.

1 - The selected geometry 2 - The first picked plane


Tools in the Production Module 1283

Validate a 3D Direction
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D direction, you can validate it by
clicking Validate. Note that any persistent object will be created in the
database. Be sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Direction
tool; there is no warning message prompting you to save the result or not.

Note: To leave the 3D Direction tool, you can click Cancel in the Make
Perpendicular, Make Parallel or 3D Direction toolbar, select Cancel from the
pop-up menu or press Esc.

3D Point
The 3D Point allows you to define a 3D primitive of Point shape. This tool can
only be used as a sub tool inside main tools like Geometry Modifier, Cloud-
Based Modeler, etc. The 3D Point tool opens with the Pick Point mode set by-
default and the cursor in the picking mode. The 3D Point information box at the
top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D Point’s parameters -
Position. Press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu to leave the Pick Point mode. A 3D Point appears and the other modes
become enabled. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects selected and
displayed.

1 - Pick Point 4 - Pick Entity with Center 6 - Edit Parameters


2 - Pick Three Planes 5 - Project 3D Point on Plane 7 - Validate
3 - Pick Plane and Segment 8 - Cancel

Tip: All point definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using
available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).

Pick a Point
To Pick a Point:

1. Click the Pick Point icon. The cursor takes the following shape , the
initial 3D Point is hidden and the Picking Parameters toolbar opens in the
3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed objects (or not).
1284 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Three Planes


If three planes are not parallel two-by-two (with no coplanar normals), then
they will intersect (cross over) somewhere at a point.

To Pick Three Planes:

1. Click the Pick Three Planes icon. The initial 3D Point is hidden in the
3D View and the cursor becomes as shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor becomes as shown in [B].

3. Pick another plane. Another red frame with a yellow background appears
upon the picked plane. The cursor becomes as shown [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1285

4. Pick again another plane. A 3D Point (the intersection of the three picked
planes) appears. [D]
1286 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick a Plane and a Segment


In this creation mode, you need to have a plane and a segment - both
intersected at a point.

To Pick a Plane and a Segment:

1. Click the Pick Plane and Segment icon. The initial 3D Point disappears
from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
appears. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

3. Pick a segment. The plane and the segment intersect at a 3D Point [C].
Tools in the Production Module 1287

Pick an Entity with Center


To Pick an Entity With Center:

1. Click the Pick Entity with Center icon. The cursor takes the following

shape . The initial 3D Point disappears from the 3D View.


2. Pick an object of any type having a center (except point cloud, mesh, etc.).
1288 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Project a 3D Point on a Plane


To Project a 3D Point on a Plane:

1. Click the Project 3D Point on Plane icon. The initial 3D point


disappears from the 3D View and the cursor takes the shape shown in [A].

2. Pick a 3D Point. A yellow label with the following text “Point to Project on
Plane” appears over the picked point [B].

3. Pick a plane. A 3D point appears on that plane [C].


Tools in the Production Module 1289

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click Edit Parameters . The initial 3D point is hidden and the Position
Editing dialog opens.
2. Enter a point’s position in that dialog.
3. Press OK.

Validate a 3D Point
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D Point, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first
validate the result before leaving tool because there is no warning message
prompting you to validate the result (or not).
1290 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3D Axis
The 3D Axis allows you to define primitives of Segment shape (with Direction
and Position). This tool appears when you apply constraints such as Lock
Center on Line or Fit to Axis in object manipulation. These constraints can be
found in tools like e.g. Geometry Modifier and Cloud-Based Modeler. This tool
also appears when evoking the 3D Axis tool inside the Duplicator tool.

In the first case, the 3D Axis tool opens with the Pick Axial Entity mode set by-
default - the other modes are dimmed - and the cursor in the picking mode. In
the second case, the Pick Axial Entity mode is not set by-default. The 3D Axis
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the current 3D
axis parameters - Direction and Position. If the Pick Axial Entity has been set
by default; press on the Esc key (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu to leave this mode. A 3D axis (red dotted line) appears and the other
modes become available. To use the tool fully, you need to have objects
selected and displayed.

Tip: All axis definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or by
using available short-cut keys (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).

Pick an Axial Entity


To Pick an Axial Entity:

1. Click the Pick Axial Entity icon. The cursor becomes as follows and
the initial 3D axis disappears from the 3D View.
2. Pick an object with a direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1291

Pick Two Points


To Pick Two Points:

1. Click Pick Two Points . The initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor
takes the shape shown in [A].
2. Pick a point. After picking, it takes the shape shown in [B].
3. Pick another point.

[A] [B]

Note: Picking can be free or constrained and the Picking Parameters toolbar
opens in 3D constraint mode. In this creation mode, you can have objects of
any type.
1292 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Planes

After clicking Pick Two Planes , the initial 3D axis is hidden and the cursor
takes the shape shown in [A]. This means that you are in the picking mode.
After picking a plane, it takes the shape shown in [B]; this means that you need
to pick a second plane. In this creation mode, you need to have secant planes.

[A] [B]

To Pick Two Planes:

1. Pick a plane. A red frame with a yellow background upon the picked plane
means that it is selected.
2. Pick another plane. An axis (the intersection of the two picked planes) in
red and dotted appears.

1 - The first picked plane 3 - The cursor before picking the second plane
2 - The cursor before picking the first plane
Tools in the Production Module 1293

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Click Edit Parameters . The Axis Editing dialog opens and the initial 3D
axis disappears from the 3D View.
2. Click on the pull-down arrow in the Axis Editing dialog.
3. Do one of the following:

 Choose Axis: Direction + Position.

a) Give an orientation in the Direction field.


b) Enter a point position in the Position field.

 Choose Axis: 2 Points.

a) Enter a point position in the Position 1 field.


b) Enter another point position in the Position 2 field.

4. Click OK. The Axis Editing dialog closes.

Validate an 3D Axis
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D axis, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. No persistent object will be created in the database. Be sure to first
validate the result before leaving the 3D Axis tool because there is no warning
message prompting you to validate the result (or not).
1294 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3D Radius
The 3D Radius dialog only appears when you apply a constraint like e.g. Lock
Radius, Lock Center Line Radius or Lock Pipe Radius respectively to a sphere
or a cylinder and to a regular torus. The 3D Radius dialog opens with the Pick
Radial Entity mode set by-default. The information box, at the top right corner
of the 3D View, displays the radius value of the current entity. To leave the
Pick Radial Entity mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking) from the pop-up
menu.

To Constrain the Radius of an Entity:

1. First, select an entity with a radius from the Project Tree.


2. From the Geometry Modifier toolbar, select Lock Radius . The 3D
Radius dialog opens.

3. Do one of the following:

 Edit Parameters (on page 1295),


 Pick a Radial Entity (on page 1295),
 Pick Two Points of a Diameter (on page 1295),
 Pick Two Points of a Radius (on page 1296),
 Pick an Axis and a Point (on page 1297).

Tip: All commands in the 3D Radius tool dialog can be selected from the pop-
up menu. The user should first leave the picking mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1295

Edit Parameters
To Edit Parameters:

1. Choose between Radius and Diameter.


2. Enter a distance value in the corresponding field.
3. Click OK. The 3D Radius dialog closes.

The radius (or diameter) of the selected entity changes to fit the input value.

Pick a Radial Entity


To Pick a Radial Entity:

1. Click the Pick Radial Entity icon.


2. Pick an entity with a regular radius. The 3D Radius dialog closes.

 If the Radius option has been checked, the radius of the selected entity
changes to fit the radius of the picked entity.
 If the Diameter option has been checked, the diameter of the selected
entity changes to fit the diameter of the picked entity.

Pick Two Points of a Diameter


Pick Two Points of a Diameter:

1. Click the Pick Two Points on Diameter icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears.
2. Pick two points anywhere. If the Diameter option is unchecked, it is
automatically checked. The distance between the two picked, is displayed
in the dialog box and in the 3D View. It is also displayed as a segment in
red and dotted.
3. Click OK. The 3D Radius dialog closes.

The Diameter of the selected entity changes to fit the distance between the two
picked points.
1296 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Two Points of a Radius


To Pick Two points of a Radius:

1. Click the Pick Two Points on Radius icon.


2. Pick two points on the displayed objects, or not. If the Radius option is
unchecked; it is automatically checked. The distance between the two
picked is displayed in the dialog, and in the 3D View. It is also displayed
as a segment in red and dotted.
3. Click OK. The 3D Radius dialog closes.

The Radius of the selected entity changes to fit the distance between the two
picked points.
Tools in the Production Module 1297

Pick an Axis and a Point


To Pick an Axis and a Point:

1. Click the Pick Axis and Point icon. The cursor is as shown in [A].
2. Pick a segment. A line (in dot and yellow) appears upon the picked
segment and the cursor becomes as shown in [B].
3. Pick a point.

If the Radius option has been checked; a line (in dot and red) from the picked
point and perpendicular to the picked segment appears [C]. The distance of
that line is displayed in the dialog box. This distance will be used as
constrained radius.

If the Diameter option has been checked; the picked point will be the center of
a line (in dot and red and perpendicular to the picked segment) appears [D].
The distance of that line is displayed in the dialog box. This distance will be
used as constrained diameter.
1298 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Click OK. The 3D Radius dialog closes.

The radius (or diameter) of the selected entity changes to fit the radius (or
diameter) defined by the picked segment and point.

Note: You need to have a segment and a point, already created in the
database.
Tools in the Production Module 1299

3D Secant
The 3D Secant dialog appears when you use the Make Secant to Cylinder
constraint in tools like Geometry Modifier or Cloud-Based Modeler. The Pick
Cylinder to be Secant With mode is set by default. To leave this mode, press
Esc or select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu.

The 3D Secant information box, at the top right corner of the 3D View, contains
the information related to the secant cylinder and the secant angle if the Use
Same Radius and Use Given Angle options are unchecked, the secant
cylinder, the radius value and the secant angle if the Use Same Radius option
is checked and the secant cylinder and the secant value if the Use Given Angle
option is checked.

All are undefined before applying the constraint except the secant angle which
has the value in the Use Given Angle field or is equal to 90 degrees if
Perpendicular is pressed-on.

Note: When you use the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint inside the
Geometry Modifier tool; you need to have a cylinder first selected. This
condition is unnecessary in the Cloud-Based Modeler tool.
1300 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Secant to a Cylinder


To Make Secant to a Cylinder:

1. If required, click the Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With icon.


2. Keep the Use Same Radius and Use Given Angle options unchecked.
3. Pick a cylinder in the 3D View. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the
picked cylinder axis.
4. Click OK. The Make Secant dialog closes.

Make Secant to a Cylinder With a Radius Constraint


To Make Secant to a Cylinder With a Radius Constraint:

1. If required, click the Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With icon.


2. Check the Use Same Radius option.
3. Pick a cylinder. The selected cylinder and the picked cylinder have secant
axes and same radius.
4. Click OK. The Make Secant dialog closes.

Make Secant to a Cylinder With an Angle Constraint


To be Secant to a Cylinder With an Angle Constraint:

1. If required, click the Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With icon.


2. Do one of the following:

 Check the Use Given Angle option and enter a value different from 90° or
270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked cylinder axis with
the given angle.
 Check the Use Given Angle option and enter a value equal to 90° or 270°.
The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked
cylinder axis.
 Check the Use Given Angle option and click the Perpendicular icon.
The selected cylinder axis is secant and perpendicular to the picked
cylinder axis.

3. Click OK. The Make Secant dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 1301

Make Secant to a Cylinder With the Angle and Radius Constraints


To be Secant to a Cylinder With the Angle and Radius Constraint:

1. If required, click the Pick a Cylinder to be Secant With icon.


2. Do one of the following:

 Check the Use Given Angle and Use Same Radius options with an angle
other than 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant to the picked
cylinder axis with the given angle and both entities have the same radius.
 Check the Use Given Angle and Use Same Radius options with an angle
equal to 90° or 270°. The selected cylinder axis is secant and
perpendicular to the picked cylinder axis both entities have the same
radius.

3. Click OK. The Make Secant dialog closes.

3D Plane
The 3D Plane allows you to define a 3D primitive of planar shape. In the
Modeling processing mode and whatever the navigation mode you use
(Examiner, WalkThrough or Station-Based), this tool appears when you apply
constraints to object manipulation. When using the Make Perpendicular (or
Make Parallel) constraint, the 3D Plane tool opens as a tab of the Make
Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar with the X-Axis* mode set by-default
(see [A1] and [A2] respectively in the Examiner/Walkthrough and Station-Base
mode).

The Make Perpendicular (or Make Parallel) toolbar contains three tabs. When
it appears; the By Picking Entity tab comes first. To use the 3D Plane tool, you
need to click on the To a Plane tab (or click on the (or ) button). A 3D plane
perpendicular to the screen appears and the 3D Plane information box at the
top right corner of the 3D View displays the current (default or drawn) 3D plane
parameters - Normal and Position.

To use the tool fully, you need to have an object selected and displayed.

[A1]

[A2]
1302 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Plane in the Examiner (or WalkThrough)


There are three methods for precisely defining the orientation of a 3D plane.
The first method is to select an axis (from the active coordinate frame) so that
the initial 3D plane becomes perpendicular to it.

To Select an Axis:

1. Choose among X Axis , Y Axis and Z Axis (in the X, Y and Z


Coordinate System).
2. Or choose among North Axis , East Axis and Elevation Axis (in
the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).

The second method is to edit parameters.

To Edit Parameters:

1. Click the Edit Parameters icon. The Plane Editing dialog opens.
2. Enter a direction in the Normal field.
3. Enter a point position in the Point field.
4. Click OK. The Plane Editing dialog closes.

The third method is to pick an entity with a direction so that the initial 3D plane
normal becomes parallel to the picked entity direction.

To Pick an Entity With Direction:

1. Click the Pick Entity with Direction icon.


2. Pick an entity with a direction in the 3D View.

There are three methods for visually defining the orientation of a 3D plane. The
first method is to pick two points. The initial 3D plane will pass through the line
defined by these two points and perpendicular to the screen plane.

To Pick Two Screen Points:

3. Click the Pick Two Screen Points icon.


4. Pick two points. No need to pick on displayed objects.

The second method is to pick three points. The initial 3D plane will pass
through the plane drawn by these three points.

To Pick Three Points:

1. Click the Pick 3 Points icon. The Picking Parameters toolbar appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1303

2. Pick three points (free or constrained). Picking is always on displayed


objects.

1 - First picked point 2 - Second picked point 3 - Third picked point

The third method is to pick two points which define a vector. As a plane is
defined by two vectors. Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane
so that the second vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the
active coordinate frame.

To Pick Two Points:

1. Click the Pick Two Points icon (in the X, Y and Z Coordinate System).
2. Or click the icon in the North, East and Elevation Coordinate System).
3. Pick two points. No need to pick on displayed objects.

Tip: All plane definition modes can be selected from the pop-up menu or using
available short-cut key (Space Bar for Validate and Esc for Cancel).
1304 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Plane in the Station-Based Mode


There are ten methods available in the Station-Based mode for defining a 3D
plane. Three are specific to that mode: two are based on two screen points and
a 3D point and one on three screen points and a 3D point. The other methods
are already described in the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1305

Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Points
To Define a Vertical Plane by Picking two Screen Points (Horizontal Direction)
and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point anywhere in the 3D View (on the displayed point cloud
or not). The cursor becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point anywhere in the 3D View (only on the displayed point
cloud). A vertical plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
1306 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Tools in the Production Module 1307

Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Two Screen Points (Horizontal


Direction) and One 3D Point
To Define a Horizontal Plane by Picking Two Screen Points and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another point on the screen. These two points will define the
orientation of the first axis of the horizontal plane's frame. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
4. Pick the last point in 3D (on a cloud point, a measured point or a
geometry). This point defines the height of the vertical plane. A horizontal
plane appears with the third picked point as center.

[C]
1308 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

[D]

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Tools in the Production Module 1309

Define a Plane By Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and One 3D Points
This feature enables to define a plane with any orientation.

To Define a Plane by Picking Three Screen Points (Horizontal and Steepest


Slope Directions) and one 3D Point:

1. Click on the button. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].


2. Pick a point anywhere on the screen. The cursor becomes as shown in
[B].

[A]

[A]

3. Pick another point on the screen so that the two points represent a
horizontal segment in the 3D space. These two points define the
orientation of a horizontal segment drawn on the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [C].
4. Pick another on the screen so that the previous point and this new one
represent the steepest slope direction of the final plane. The cursor
becomes as shown in [D] and the Picking Parameters toolbar appears in
3D constraint mode.
1310 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

[C]

[D]

5. Pick the last point in the 3D View (only on the displayed point cloud). The
three first picked points - which are not collinear (not lying on the same
line) - draw a 3D plane; the fourth picked point is its center.

Tip: can be selected from the pop-up menu.


Tools in the Production Module 1311

Modify the Size of a Plane


You can resize the previous 3D plane. The resized 3D plane keeps the same
parameters as before except the dimensions. You can do this by dragging &
dropping a corner in the 3D View.

To Modify the Size of a 3D Plane:

1. Place the mouse cursor upon any handle of a 3D plane. A green square
appears.
2. If a corner handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane
size. During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.
3. If a middle handle is selected, drag it to increase (or reduce) the 3D plane
width (or length). During this operation, the green square becomes yellow.

Validate a Plane
Once you are satisfied with the defined 3D plane, you can validate it by clicking
Validate. Note that any persistent object will be created in the database. Be
sure to first validate the result before leaving the 3D Plane tool; there is no
warning message prompting you to save the result or not.

Note: To leave the 3D Plane, you can click Cancel in the Make Perpendicular,
Make Parallel or 3D Plane toolbar, select Cancel from the pop-up menu or
press Esc.

Modify a Geometry
Rotating or panning an object can be free (called Standard Navigation) or
constrained. Constraints can be imposed (Screen Rotation, Vertical Pan,
Horizontal Pan, etc.) or defined by the user. That’s the reason of the Geometry
Modifier tool which enables to define theses constraints by using manipulators
in order to have a fine control in rotating or panning objects.

No selection is required to open the Geometry Modifier tool. Once inside the
tool, you need to do a selection - only geometries except polylines and
meshes, measures, etc. - in one of these three windows (3D View, List and
Property) and display the selection to be able to use a manipulator. Selection
can only be single.
1312 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


The Geometry Modifier tool has several aspects. This depends on the
selection you done, not necessary before entering in the tool but also inside
the tool itself. Inside the Geometry Modifier tool, all manipulations are split into
three groups: using manipulators for displacement or for changing shape,
using picked geometries and using constraints. Constraints vary according the
entity type selected before (or after) opening the tool.

To Open the Tool:

 From the Modeling menu, select Geometry Modifier . The Geometry


Modifier toolbar appears.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Geometry Modifier feature can be found from the
Edition group, on the Model tab.

Change a Shape
Modifying the shape of a geometry means changing its dimensions with
manipulators which change according to the geometry type.

Note:
 You cannot modify the shape of a geometry of Plane (or 3D Point).
 You can select a geometry before or after choosing the Modify Shape
command.

Tip: You can select Modify Shape from the pop-up menu or use its related
shortcut key Shift + E.
Tools in the Production Module 1313

Sphere
To Modify the Shape of a Sphere:

1. Select and display a sphere.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected sphere is displayed with a
manipulator (with one ring and two handles).
3. Pick on the ring to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase (or reduce) the sphere's diameter.

5. Pick on the top handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


6. Drag to shorten the selected sphere’s axis by the top. It is like bounding
the selected sphere with a plane. The result is a hemisphere.

7. Pick on the bottom handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


8. Drag to shorten the selected sphere’s axis by the bottom. It is like
bounding the initial sphere with a plane. The result is a sliced sphere.
1314 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tools in the Production Module 1315

Cylinder
To Modify a Cylinder Shape:

1. Select and display a cylinder.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected cylinder is displayed with a
manipulator (with two rings and two handles).
3. Pick on a ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the cylinder’s diameter.

5. Pick on a handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


6. Drag to shorten/lengthen the selected cylinder’s axis.
1316 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cone
To Modify a Cone Shape:

1. Select and display a cone.


2. Click the Modify Shape . The selected cone is displayed with a
manipulator (with two rings and two handles).
3. Pick e.g. the top ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the cone’s top diameter.

5. Pick e.g. the top handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


6. Drag to shorten the selected cone’s axis by the top.

7. Do the same for the top handle (or ring) manipulator.


Tools in the Production Module 1317

Circular Torus
To Modify a Circular Torus Shape:

1. Select and display a circular torus.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected circular torus is displayed
with a manipulator (with two rings and one handle).
3. Pick the director radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus director radius.

5. Pick the generator radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
6. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus generator radius.

7. Pick on the handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


8. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus angle.
1318 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Segment
To Modify a Segment Shape:

1. Select and display a segment.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected segment is displayed with a
manipulator (with two handles).
3. Pick one of the two handles to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected segment’s length.
Tools in the Production Module 1319

Extrusion
To Modify an Extrusion Shape:

1. Select and display an extruded entity.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The extruded entity in selection is
displayed with a manipulator (with two handles).
3. Pick one of the two handles to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the extruded entity’s length.
1320 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Box
To Modify a Box Shape:

1. Select and display a Box.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected Box is displayed with a
manipulator which has six Face Handles appears, one on each face, and
eight Corner Handles.
3. To increase or decrease the size of the Box in one direction:

 Pick a Face Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop the Face Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
Box.

4. To increase or decrease the size of the Box, uniformly in all directions.

 Pick a Corner Handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


 Drag and drop the Corner Handle away from (or toward) the center of the
Box.
Tools in the Production Module 1321

Caution: Modifying the size of a Box will not change anymore the direction of
the main axis.
1322 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rectangular Torus
To Modify a Rectangular Torus Shape:

1. Select and display a rectangular torus.


2. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected rectangular torus is
displayed with manipulators (with one ring and two handles).
3. Pick the Center Line Radius ring manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag to increase or reduce the selected rectangular torus Center Line
Radius.

5. Pick on a handle manipulator to select it. It turns to yellow.


6. Drag to increase or reduce the selected circular torus angle.

Extend an Entity by Snapping


You can extend a geometry to snap one of its faces to a VISIBLE face of
another geometry. Not all geometries can be extended but only those that are
given hereafter: Cylinder, Cube or Rectangular Cuboid, and Extrusion. For the
target face, nearly all geometries can be used for snapping purposes, except
meshes. If the selected face does not allow a standard bounding of the
geometry (perpendicular axes for instance), it will be refused.
Tools in the Production Module 1323

To Extend an Entity by Snapping:

1. First display two entities, e.g. a cylinder and a cube.


2. Select the cylinder.
3. Click the Modify Shape icon. The selected cylinder is displayed with a
manipulator (two rings and two handles).

4. Pick a handle to select it. It turns to yellow.


5. While dragging the handle, move the mouse over a visible face of the
cube. A 3D feedback will highlight the face and the geometry name
will be displayed.

Note: If you don't want to snap on any face, press the CTRL key while
dragging the handle.
1324 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Modify a Position
"To Pan" a geometry means moving and positioning it at a desired location
within the scene. "To Rotate" a geometry means turning it around an axis or
around a point.

Note: You can select a geometry before or after choosing one of the above
displacement mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1325

Pan Along the Home Frame Axes


This feature lets the user displace a selected entity along the three axes of the
Home Frame.

To Pan Along the Home Frame Axes:

1. Select and display a geometry.


2. Click the Pan Along Home Frame Axes icon. A manipulator (with three-
axis handles and three-plane handles) appears. This manipulator has the
same color as the Home Frame. It has as Origin the center of the selection
if several entities are selected. Otherwise, its Origin is the center of the
selected geometry, if a unique geometry is selected.

1 - An axis handle 3 - Home frame


2 - A plane handle

3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the selection is highlighted in yellow and those for
which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Move the selection along that direction.
1326 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two)
along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Move the selection in that plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan along Home Frame Axes from the pop-up menu
or use the Shift + T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.

Note: The manipulator will not appear if there is no selection.


Tools in the Production Module 1327

Pan Along its Own Axes


This feature lets the user displace a selected entity along is own axes.

To Pan Along its Own Axes:

1. Select and display a geometry.


2. Click the Pan Along Own Axes icon. A manipulator (with three-axis
handles and three-plane handles) appears. This manipulator does not
have the same color as the Home Frame. It has as Origin the center of the
selection if several entities are selected. Otherwise, its Origin is the center
of the selected geometry, if a unique geometry is selected.

1 - An axis handle 3 - Home frame


2 - A plane handle

3. Select an axis handle by picking it; it turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the selected geometry is highlighted in yellow and
those for which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Move the selected geometry along that direction.
1328 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5. Select a plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions (two)
along which you can pan the selection are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Move the selection in that plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan along Own Axes from the pop-up menu or use
the Ctrl + T short-cut key to choose this manipulation mode.

Note: The manipulator will not appear if there is no geometry selected.


Tools in the Production Module 1329

Rotate a Geometry
This feature lets the user turn a selected entity around its center.

To Rotate a Geometry:

1. Select and display a geometry.


2. Click the Rotate icon. A manipulator (with three ring handles (red, light
blue and green)) appears. This manipulator has as origin the center of the
selection if several entities are selected. Otherwise, it has as origin the
center of the selected geometry, if only a unique geometry has been
selected.

A ring handle (X3)

The Rotation Manipulator Parameters toolbar opens.

Tip: You can also select Rotate from the pop-up menu (or use the Shift + R
short-cut key).
1330 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Use the Manipulator


To Use the Manipulator:

1. Select a ring handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. An axis passing


through the center of that ring handle and perpendicular to it, appears.
This axis has the color of the selected ring handle.
2. Drag the ring handle to rotate the selected geometry around the axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1331

Enter Manually an Angle


To Enter Manually an Angle:

1. Input an angle in the Red field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Red ring handle and perpendicular to it.

2. Or / and enter an angle in the Green field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Green ring handle and perpendicular to it.

Or
1332 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The selected geometry rotates according to the two input values.

3. Or / and enter an angle in the Blue field and click Validate .

The selected geometry rotates according to the input value, around an axis
passing through the center of the Blue ring handle and perpendicular to it.

Or

The selected geometry rotates according to the three input values.

Tip: Instead of clicking Validate, you can also press Enter.

Caution:
 A value, once input in a field, will be not reset (to zero) once the
transformation is applied. You have to manually reset this value to zero.
 Any transformation can be applied if all of the fields are set to zero. The
Validate icon becomes dimmed.

Note: A value can be either negative or positive.


Tools in the Production Module 1333

Change the Location of the Manipulator


This feature lets the user change, not the position of a selected entity, but the
position of its manipulator. This can be helpful in the case the manipulator is
not visible anymore in the 3D View.

To Change the Location of the Manipulator:

1. Select and display a geometry.


2. Choose among Pan Along Home Frame Axes, Pan Along Own Axes and
Rotate.
3. Click the Change Manipulator Location icon. The cursor takes the

following shape .
4. Pick a position anywhere. The picking can be on a displayed object or not.
The manipulator will move to the picked position.

Tip: You can also select Change Manipulator Location from the pop-up menu
(or use the C short-cut key).

Caution: There is no Undo for such kind of operation.

Switch from one Manipulation Mode to Another


You can easily switch between the different manipulation modes, i.e. from
Modify Shape to Pan Along Home Frame Axes, and from Pan Along Home
Frame Axes to Pan Along Own Axes, and so on, by just picking one of the
Handles.

Note: The cursor changes from to when you hover it over a Handle.

Move an Entity by Picking an Entity


You can pan (or rotate) an entity along (or around) the axis (or center) of
another entity.
1334 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Pan

The Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Pan feature lets you move an
entity along a direction which is given by the axis of another entity.

To Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Pan:

1. Click the Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Pan icon. The cursor
takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the axis picking
mode.
2. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select another object. A position manipulator (in blue) (in the picked
object’s axis and having as origin its center) appears [C2].

4. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
5. Select another object. A position manipulator (in blue) (in the picked
object’s axis and having as origin its center) appears [C2].

6. Select the position manipulator. It turns to yellow. The direction along


which you can pan the second object is in yellow and those (two) for which
you cannot are in mauve.
Tools in the Production Module 1335

7. Drag the position manipulator to pan the second object along the first
object’s axis [C3].

Tip:
 You can also select Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Pan from the pop-
up menu.
 With this tool, you can pan an object along its own axis or along another
object’s axis. Only objects having an axis can be picked for panning
purposes.

Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1336 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate


To Pick a Point From Other Geometry, Then Rotate:

1. Click the Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate icon. The
cursor takes the shape shown in [C1]. This means that you are in the point
picking mode.
2. Place the cursor over an object [C1].

3. Pick the object. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
4. Select another object by picking it. A manipulator appears [C2]. This
manipulator has three rings (red, light blue and green) and has as origin
the center of the picked object.

5. Select a ring handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. An axis passing the
center of that ring handle and perpendicular to it appears. This axis has
the color of the selected ring handle.
6. Drag the ring handle to rotate the second object around the axis of the
second object (C3).
Tools in the Production Module 1337

Tip: You can also select the Pick a Point from Other Geometry, then Rotate
from the pop-up menu.

Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1338 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Rotate


The Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Rotate feature lets you rotate an
entity around a direction which is given by the axis of a picked entity.

To Pick an Axis From Other Geometry, then Rotate:

1. Click the Pick an Axis from Other Geometry, then Rotate icon.
2. Pick an entity other than the selected one. A manipulator, perpendicular to
the axis of the picked entity and having as origin its center, appears.

3. Select the ring handle (in deep blue) by picking it. It turns to yellow.
4. Drag the ring handle to rotate the selected entity around the axis of the
picked one.
Tools in the Production Module 1339

Tip: You can also select the Pick Axis from Other Geometry and Rotate icon
from the pop-up menu.

Note: With this manipulation mode, you can rotate an entity around its own
axis, or around the axis of another entity. Only an object with an axis can be
picked.

Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).

Pick a Plane, and then Pan

After selecting Pick Plane and Pan , the cursor takes the shape shown in
(A). This means that you are in the plane picking mode. After picking a point, it
returns to its default shape (Arrow); this means that you are in the selection
mode. With this tool, you can pan an object in a plane or along a plane’s axis.

[A]

Tip: You can also select Pick Plane and Pan from the pop-up menu.

Note: To leave the picking mode, press Esc (or select Cancel Picking from the
pop-up menu).
1340 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick and Pan a Plane


1. Place the cursor over a plane (B1).

2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select the same plane by picking it. A manipulator appears (B2). This
manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and a plane handle and
has as origin the center of the picked plane.

4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for
which you cannot are in mauve.
5. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (B3).
Tools in the Production Module 1341

6. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
7. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions
(B4).
1342 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick a Plane and Select Another Object


1. Place the cursor over a plane (C1).

2. Pick the plane. The cursor takes its default state (Arrow); this means that
you leave the picking mode and you are in the selection mode.
3. Select another object (plane or others) by picking it. A manipulator
appears (C2). This manipulator has two axis handles (red and green) and
a plane handle and has as origin the center of the picked object.

4. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which
you cannot are in mauve.
5. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow
(C3).
Tools in the Production Module 1343

6. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
7. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions
C4).
1344 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick and Select a Plane


1. Place the cursor over the selected plane (D1).

2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (D2). This manipulator has two axis
handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center
of the picked plane.

3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the plane is highlighted in yellow and those (two) for
which you cannot are in mauve.
4. Drag the axis handle to pan the plane along the direction in yellow (D3).
Tools in the Production Module 1345

5. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Drag the plane handle to pan the plane along any of the two directions
(D4).
1346 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Picking a plane and selecting another object.


1. Place the cursor over a plane (E1).

2. Pick the plane. A manipulator appears (E2). This manipulator has two axis
handles (red and green) and a plane handle and has as origin the center
of the picked object.

3. Select an axis handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The direction along
which you can pan the object is highlighted in yellow and those for which
you cannot are in mauve.
4. Drag the axis handle to pan the object along the plane direction in yellow
(E3).
Tools in the Production Module 1347

5. Select the plane handle by picking it. It turns to yellow. The directions
(two) along which you can pan the object are highlighted in yellow and the
one for which you cannot is in mauve.
6. Drag the plane handle to pan the object along any of the plane directions
(E4).

Move a Geometry Along a User Defined Vector


You can move a geometry along a vector that you have to define by your own.

1 - Move Geometry Using 2-Point Defined 2 - Align Geometry (Z Axis) Along 2-Point
Vector Defined Vector

Note: You need select a geometry before choosing one of the above
commands. Otherwise, they are dimmed. Each of the commands can be
selected from the pop-up menu.
1348 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move a Geometry Using a 2-Point Defined Vector

After choosing the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector icon, the
cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking
mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you
need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape
(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can
pan a geometry by picking two points.

[A] [B]

1 - The first and second picked points 2 - The selected object is translated from the
first picked point to the second picked point

Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc
key) to leave the Move Geometry using 2-Point Defined Vector tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1349

Align a Geometry (Z-Axis) Along a 2-Point-Defined Axis

After choosing the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis icon,
the cursor takes the shape shown in [A] and the Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in 3D constraint mode. This means that you are in the point picking
mode. After picking a point, it becomes as shown in [B]. This means that you
need to pick to another point. After picking, it returns to its default shape
(Arrow); this means that you are in the selection mode. With this tool, you can
align an object’s Z-axis along two picked points.

[A] [B]

Note: You can select Cancel Picking from the pop-up menu (or use the Esc
key) to leave the Align Geometry (Z-Axis) along 2-Point-Defined Axis tool.
1350 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply Constraints
Plane
After selecting a plane (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry Modifier
tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are seven types of constraints.

1 - Make Vertical 4 - Make Perpendicular


2 - Make Horizontal 5 - Pass Through Point
3 - Make Parallel 6 - Pass Through Axis

To Make a Plane Parallel/Perpendicular to an Entity/Plane/Direction:

 See the 3D Picking/3D Plane/3D Direction.

To Pass a Plane Through a Point:

 See the 3D Point.

To Pass a Plane Through an Axis:

1. Click Pass through Axis. The 3D Axis toolbar and its information box
appear.
2. Do one of the following to define an axis:

 Pick an axial entity,


 Pick two points (free or constrained),
 Pick two planes,
 Enter axis parameters.

3. Validate the defined axis.

To Make a Plane Horizontal:

1. Select a plane.
2. Click Make Horizontal. Its Direction of Normal becomes parallel to the Z
Axis (or Elevation Axis)) but not necessary in the same direction.

To Make a Plane Vertical:


Tools in the Production Module 1351

1. Select a plane.
2. Click Make Vertical. As the selected plane is defined by two vectors.
Applying this constraint will orientate the selected plane so that one of the
vectors is parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) of the active coordinate
frame.

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.

Make Horizontal
To Make Horizontal:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Horizontal icon. The selected geometry is moved so
that its Direction of Axis is perpendicular to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
1352 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Tools in the Production Module 1353

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass Through a Point


To Pass Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.

Pass Through an Axis


To Pass Through an Axis:

1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Axis toolbar as well as its
information box appear.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
1354 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Sphere
After selecting a sphere-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool),
the Geometry Modifier tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four
constraint types.

1 - Lock Radius 3 - Lock Center on a Line


2 - Lock Center 4 - Pass Through a Point

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:

1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.

Lock a Center
To Lock a Center:

1. Click the Lock Center icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
Tools in the Production Module 1355

Lock a Center on a Line


To Lock a Center on a Line:

1. Click on the Lock Center on Line icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.
2. Define and validate a 3D axis.

Pass Through a Point


To Pass Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar and its
information box at the top right corner of the 3D View.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.

Cylinder
After selecting a cylinder-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool),
the Geometry Modifier tool toolbar becomes as shown below. There are six
constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical 5 - Lock Radius


2 - Make Parallel 6 - Fit to an Axis
3 - Make Perpendicular 7 - Make Secant to a Cylinder
4 - Pass Axis Through a Point

To Apply a Constraint to a Cylinder:

1. Make a cylinder parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the


3D Picking/3D Plane/3D Direction).
2. Or lock a cylinder radius (see the 3D Radius).
3. Or pass a cylinder axis through a point (see the 3D Point).
4. Or fit a cylinder axis (see the 3D Axis).
5. Or make a cylinder secant to a cylinder (see the 3D Secant)
6. Or make a cylinder vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then parallel to
the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis) but not necessary in the same direction.

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.


1356 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Tools in the Production Module 1357

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass an Axis Through a Point


To Pass an Axis Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1358 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Lock a Radius
To Lock a Radius:

1. Click the Lock Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well as it
information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.

Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.


2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1359

Make Secant to a Cylinder


To Make Secant to a Cylinder:

1. Click the Make Secant to Cylinder icon. The 3D Secant dialog as well
as its information box appears.
2. Pick a cylinder.
3. If required, check Use Same Radius to set the same radius than the
picked cylinder.
4. If required, check Use Given Angle and give a secant angle.
5. If required, click Perpendicular to have a 90° secant angle.
6. Click OK.

Entity used as constraint

Note that the Make Secant to Cylinder constraint type generates four sub-
constraint types according to the option(s) checked.

 If only Use Same Radius has been checked, you have the two following
constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Radius.
 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
different to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types:
Make Axis Secant to Axis and Lock Angle with Direction.
 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and the given angle value is
equal to 90° and 270°, you have the two following constraint types: Make
Axis Secant to Axis and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
1360 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 If only Use Given Angle has been checked and Perpendicular pressed-on,
you have the two following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis and
Make Perpendicular to Direction.
 If the two options have been checked with an angle other than 90° or
270°, you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to
Axis, Lock Radius and Lock Angle with Direction.
 If the two options have been checked with an angle equal to 90° or 270°,
you have the three following constraint types: Make Axis Secant to Axis,
Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular to Direction.
 If the two options are kept unchecked, you have the Make Axis Secant to
Axis constraint type.

Regular Cone
After selecting a cone-shaped geometry (before or after opening the tool), the
Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are three
constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical 3 - Make Perpendicular


2 - Make Parallel 4 - Fit to an Axis

To Apply a Constraint to a Cone:

1. Make a cone parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see the 3D


Picking/3D Plane/3D Direction).
2. Or fit a cone axis (see the 3D Axis).
3. Or make a regular cone vertical. It Direction of Axis becomes then parallel
and in the same direction than the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis).

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.
Tools in the Production Module 1361

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


1362 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.


2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1363

Circular Torus
After selecting a circular torus-shaped geometry (before or after opening the
tool), the Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are
seven constraint types.

1 - Make Parallel 5 - Make Perpendicular


2 - Lock Center Line Radius 6 - Fit to Axis
3 - Lock Pipe Radius 7 - Align to two Existing Secant Cylinders of
4 - Align to Join to Existing Cylinder Same Radius

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


1364 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Fix to an Axis
To Fix to an Axis:

1. Click on the Fix to Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens.


2. Define and validate a 3D axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1365

Lock a Pipe Radius


To Lock a Pipe Radius:

1. Click the Lock Pipe Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens as well
as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.

Lock a Center Line Radius


To Lock a Center Line Radius:

1. Click the Lock Center Line Radius icon. The 3D Radius toolbar opens
as well as it information box.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick a radial entity,


 Pick two points,
 Pick an axis and a point,
 Edit parameters.

3. Validate the radius.


1366 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder


To Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder:

1. Click the Align to Join to Existing Cylinder icon.


2. Pick an existing cylinder.
Tools in the Production Module 1367

Align to Join to Two Secant cylinders of Same Radius


To Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Secant Cylinders of Same Radius icon.
2. Pick two existing cylinders. The result is null if the two picked cylinders are
not secant or do not have the same diameter.
1368 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3D Point
After selecting a 3D point (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.

1 - Lock on Plane 2 - Lock to Line or Axis

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:

1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.

Lock to Line (or Axis)


To Lock on a Line (or Axis):

1. Click the Lock to Line (or Axis) icon. The 3D Axis toolbar opens with
the Pick Axis Entity mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D direction.
Tools in the Production Module 1369

Segment
After selecting a segment (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are four constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical 4 - Make Perpendicular


2 - Lock on Plane 5 - Pass Axis Through Point
3 - Make Parallel

To Apply a Constraint to a Segment:

1. Make a segment parallel/perpendicular to an entity/plane/direction (see


the 3D Picking/3D Plane/3D Direction).
2. Or lock a segment on a plane (see the 3D Plane).
3. Or pass a segment though a point (see the 3D Point).
4. Or make a segment vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then parallel to
the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis)).

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.

Lock on a Plane
To Lock on a Plane:

1. Click the Lock on Plane icon. The 3D Plane toolbar opens with the Pick
Entity with Direction mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane.
1370 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Make Parallel
To Make Parallel:

1. Click the Make Parallel icon. The Make Parallel toolbar opens with
three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction) inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).


Tools in the Production Module 1371

Make Perpendicular
To Make Perpendicular:

1. Click the Make Perpendicular icon. The Make Perpendicular toolbar


opens with three tabs (By Picking Entity, To Plane and To Direction)
inside.

Each tab corresponds to a tool (respectively 3D Picking, 3D Plane and 3D


Direction). The By Picking Entity tab opens first, its information box takes place
at the top right corner of the 3D View and the Pick Entity with Direction mode is
set by default.

2. Do one of the following.

 Define a plane,
 Define a direction,
 Pick an entity with direction.

3. Validate the defined plane (or direction).

Pass an Axis Through a Point


To Pass an Axis Through a Point:

1. Click the Pass Axis Through Point icon. The 3D Point toolbar opens
with the Pick Point mode is set by default.
2. Define and validate a 3D point.
1372 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extrusion
After selecting an extrusion (before or after opening the tool), the Geometry
Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below. There are two constraint types.

1 - Make Vertical 2 - Make Perpendicular to Plane


2 - Make Parallel to Direction

To Apply Constraint to an Extruded Entity:

1. Make an extruded entity parallel to a direction (see the 3D Direction).


2. Or make an extruded entity perpendicular to a plane (see the 3D Plane).
3. Or make an extruded entity vertical. Its Direction of Axis becomes then
parallel to the Z Axis (or Elevation Axis)).

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Make Vertical
To Make Vertical:

1. Select a geometry.
2. Click the Make Vertical icon. The selected geometry is moved so that
its Direction of Axis is parallel to the Z-Axis of the Home frame.

Make Secant to an Extrusion


To Make Secant to an Extrusion:

1. Select an Extrusion.
2. Click on the Make Secant to an Extrusion icon.
3. Pick another Extrusion.
Tools in the Production Module 1373

Rectangular Torus
To Apply Constraints to a Rectangular Torus:

1. Select a rectangular torus. The Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as


shown below. There are three constraint types (detailed below).

Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Direction

2. Align to join two existing secant boxes of same section.


3. Click Close. The Geometry Modifier toolbar closes by its own.

Tip:
 The Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Direction
constraint can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
 Selecting a rectangular-torus-shaped geometry can be done before (or
after) opening the Geometry Modifier tool.
1374 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align to Join Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section


To Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section:

1. Click the Align to Join to Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section
icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a first box. The cursor takes the shape shown in [B].

[A]

[B]

3. Pick another box. If the two boxes are secant and have the same section,
a rectangular torus appears.
Tools in the Production Module 1375

 Its Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Axis) is parallel to the two
boxes' Direction of Normal (also called Direction of Width).
 Its Bend Angle is equal to the angle drawn by the two boxes' Direction of
Height.
 Its Outer Diameter is equal to the two boxes' Depth.

4. If the two picked boxes are not secant; the "This constraint cannot be
activated because the two boxes are not secant" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.
5. If the two picked boxes do not have the same section, the "There is too
much indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical,
one of them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message
appears. Click OK. The warning message closes and the Align to Join to
Two Existing Secant Boxes of Same Section constraint is left.

Tip:
 If required, make the two boxes secant using the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint in the Geometry Modifier tool.
 If required, modify manually the two boxes' parameters (like Center,
Width, Height, Depth, Directions, etc.) in the Property window to make
sure that both are secant and have the same section.
1376 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Box
To Apply Constraints to a Box:

1. Select a box. The Geometry Modifier toolbar becomes as shown below.


There are three constraint types (detailed below).

1 - Make Parallel 3 - Change Main Axis


2 - Stick to Plane 4 - Make Secant to Box (With Same Section)

2. Make parallel to a direction.


3. Or project a Box onto a Plane.
4. Or make secant to a Box of same section.
5. Or change the main axis.
6. Click Close. The Geometry Modifier toolbar closes on its own.

Tip: All constraints can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: Selecting a box-shaped geometry can be done before (or after) opening
the Geometry Modifier tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1377

Making Parallel to a Direction


To Make Parallel to a Direction:

1. Click Make Parallel . The Make Parallel toolbar opens with the By
Picking Entity tab selected by-default. In that tab, the Pick an Entity With
Direction is set by-default.
2. Do one of the following:

 Pick an entity using the Pick an Entity With Direction tool in the By Picking
Entity tab.
 Define a plane using available tools in the To a Plane tab*.
 Define a direction using available tools in the To a Direction tab*.

The Normal Z (also called the Direction of the Height in the Property window)
of the box is parallel** to the Direction of Axis of the picked entity (or to the
Direction of Normal of the defined plane or to the defined direction).

Note:
 (*) First click on the corresponding tab.
 (**) But not necessary in the same direction.
1378 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Project a Box onto a Plane


To Project a Box in a Plane:

1. Click the Stick to Plane icon. The cursor becomes as shown in [A].
2. Pick a plane. The selected box is projected on the picked plane [B]. The
bottom side (of the box) lies on the plane.

[A]

[B]

The Direction of Normal (of the plane) [C] and the Direction of the Height (also
called the Normal Z* of the box) [D] are parallel but not necessarily in the same
direction. In the example below, both are opposite.

[C] [D]
Tools in the Production Module 1379

Note: (*) In the X, Y, Z Coordinate System.

Making Secant to a Box (With Same Section)


To Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section):

1. Click Make Secant to a Box (With Same Section) .


2. Pick a box having the same section as the selected one.
3. If the picked box does not have the same section, the "There is too much
indetermination to activate this constraint: two boxes are identical, one of
them is a cube or they have no common face" warning message appears.
Click OK. The warning message closes and the Make Secant to a Box
(With Same Section) constraint is left.

Change the Direction of the Main Axis


You can change the main axis' direction of a Box so that it becomes parallel to:

 The X-Axis of its (local) frame,


 The Y-Axis of its (local) frame,
 The Z-Axis of its (local) frame.
1380 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Plane Bounding
The Plane Bounding tool is dedicated to plane modifications. We mean by this
you can modify an existing plane bounds, define new ones, create holes, etc.
This tool is based on polyline drawing and editing like the Polyline Drawing
tool. It requires a selection as input data (mainly a plane from the database
(already created)) when used alone as a main tool or is based on local objects
(not yet created in the database) when used as a sub-tool in e.g. the Cloud-
Based Modeler tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1381

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a plane from the Project Tree.


2. In the Modeling menu, select Plane Bounding . The Plane Bounding
and Picking Parameters (in the 2D constraint picking mode) toolbars are
displayed.

1 - Selection Mode 3 - Draw Rectangle 5 - Select Polyline


2 - Change Mode 4 - Draw Circle 6 - Close Tool

In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode, the 3D scene is locked in 2D in the


selected plane and is brought to the Top view with a 2D grid superimposed (if
displayed previously). The Selection Mode and Change Mode are respectively
set in the deactivate and line state. The cursor is as shown below and the
selected plane is displayed with its bounds (a polyline of the same shape in
dotted line and is of blue color).

1 - 2D Grid 3 - The bounding polyline


2 - The selected plane 4 - The cursor
1382 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

In Station-Based mode, the 3D scene is viewed from the first station viewpoint
(the first in the Project Tree) with overlapped images in the background (if
existed).

3. Do one of the following:

 Modify the selected plane bounds,


 Select an existing polyline for bounding,
 Draw a new polyline for bounding.

Tip: You can also click on the Plane Bounding icon in the Tools toolbar.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Plane Bounding feature can be found from the Edition
group, on the Model tab.

Modify the Selected Plane Bounds


The selected plane is displayed with its bounds: a polyline of the selected
plane’s shape in dotted line and of blue color. Editing the selected plane
bounds is similar to editing a bounding polyline.

To Modify the Selected Plane Bounds:

1. Edit a bounding polyline.


2. Delete a bounding polyline.
3. Move a bounding polyline.
4. Apply the bounds.
5. Validate the bounds.
Tools in the Production Module 1383

Select an Existing Polyline for Bounding


If you have a closed polyline in your project; you can use it for bounding
purposes. The polyline doesn't need to be selected first but it needs to be
displayed in the 3D View.

To Select a Polyline for Bounding:

1. Click Select Polyline . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.
The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden. The Picking Parameters toolbar is
hidden.
2. In the 3D View, pick a polyline.

 If the polyline is unclosed; an error message appears. Click OK to close


the error message.
 If the polyline is closed; an editable polyline (in green) superimposes to it.
The 3D scene is locked again in 2D. The 2D Grid is displayed. The Picking
Parameters toolbar (in 2D constraint mode) is displayed.

3. Do one of the following:

 Edit a bounding polyline.


 Move a bounding polyline.
 Delete a bounding polyline.
 Apply the bounds.

4. Validate the bounds.

Note:
 Press Esc to leave the Select Polyline mode.
 Selecting another polyline will cancel the current one.

Tip: You can also choose Select Polyline the pop-up menu.
1384 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a New Polyline for Bounding


A bounding polyline can be composed of only segments or a combination of
segments and circular arcs. It needs to be of closed shape and all of its nodes
have to be on the selected plane. You can only define one bounding polyline;
this differs from the Polyline Drawing tool where you can draw a set of
polylines.

To Draw a New Polyline for Bounding:

1. Do one of the following:

 Draw a polygonal polyline.


 Draw a rectangular polyline.
 Draw a circular polyline.

2. Edit a bounding polyline, if required.


3. Move a bounding polyline, if required.
4. Delete a bounding polyline, if required.
5. Apply the bounds.
6. Validate the bounds.
Tools in the Production Module 1385

Draw a Polygonal Polyline


To Draw a Polygonal Polyline:

1. Pick a point to start the first node of a polyline.


2. Pick another point. A segment links these two points.
3. Click on the Change Mode pull-down arrow.
4. Choose Change Mode to Arc .
5. Pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked
point by an arc.
6. Click on the Change Mode pull-down arrow.
7. Choose Change Mode to Line .
8. Pick another point. The newly picked point is linked to the previous picked
point by a segment.
9. Continue picking in order to define the other nodes of the polyline.
10. Right-click anywhere in the 3D View to display the pop-up menu.
11. Select Close Line to end and close the polyline. The start node is linked to
the last selected node.

Note:
 Double-click to end drawing. The polyline is closed.
 Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.

Tip:
 You can switch from the line drawing mode to the arc drawing mode and
conversely as often as you wish by pressing respectively the L and C keys
on your keyboard.
1386 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Out of the picking mode, press Esc to quit the Plane Bounding tool. Or
select Close Tool from the pop- up menu.

Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. If at least
three points (for segments) (or two (for an arc)) have been picked, then the
polygonal polyline will be closed and validated.
Tools in the Production Module 1387

Draw a Rectangular Polyline


To Draw a Rectangular Polyline:

1. Click on the Draw Rectangle pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points and Draw
Rectangle by Defining 3 Points .

 If Draw Rectangle by Defining 2 Points has been chosen:

a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous one, defines a diagonal of a rectangle.

 If Draw Rectangle by Defining 3 Points has been chosen:

a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous point, defines the first side of a rectangle.
c) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous point, defines the second side of the rectangle and is
perpendicular the first one.

Note: Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.


1388 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing
occurs. The rectangular polyline in progress is then cancelled.
Tools in the Production Module 1389

Draw a Circular Polyline


To Draw a Circular Polyline:

1. Click on the Draw Circle pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter and Draw
Circle by Defining the Middle Point and the Radius .

 If Draw Circle by Defining the Diameter has been chosen:

a) Pick a point.
b) Pick another point. The segment, linking the new point to the
previous one, defines a diameter of a circle.

 If Draw Circle by Defining the Middle Point and the Radius has been
chosen:

a) Pick a point. This point defines the center of a circle.


b) Pick another point. These two points form the radius of the
circle.

Note: Picking can be free or constrained on displayed objects or not.

Note: What happens if you press Esc while you are picking points. Nothing
occurs. The circular polyline in progress is then cancelled.
1390 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit a Bounding Polyline


You can edit the bounding polyline of a selected plane after opening the Plane
Bounding tool, one selected using the Select Polyline command or one defined
using the drawing tools (Draw Rectangle, Draw Circle, etc.).

Editing means to change the bounding polyline shape by moving, deleting,


inserting a node, deleting the whole bounding polyline, etc. When you place
the cursor over a segment of a polyline, you may see the following symbols:
for nodes, for middle nodes and for middle nodes to be inserted. When
the cursor is over an arc of a polyline; only for nodes are available.
Tools in the Production Module 1391

Delete a Node
To Delete a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears over the node.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Delete Node.

 If the node is shared by two segments, the two segments will be deleted
and replaced by a segment.

 If the node is shared by two arcs; the two arcs will be deleted and replaced
by a segment.

Tip: You can press Del on your keyboard instead of selecting Delete Node
from the pop-up menu.

Note: Nothing occurs if you delete a node that is along a segment.


1392 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move a Node
To Move a Node:

1. Place the cursor over a node. A solid square appears on the node.
2. Drag and drop the node to a new location. The green square turns to
yellow during this operation.

 If the node at the end of two segments, the node will be moved and the
two segments will be extended.

 If the node at the middle of a segment, the whole segment will be moved.

Tip: Picking a point anywhere on a segment except on the End and Middle
nodes (or on an arc except on the End node) will transform that point to a
node.
Tools in the Production Module 1393

Insert a Middle Node


To Insert a Middle Node:

1. Place the cursor anywhere on a segment (except at the End and Middle
nodes) or on an arc (except at the end nodes). A hollow square appears
on the segment at the cursor position.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Middle Node. A
new Middle node is inserted not at the picking position but at the middle of
the segment (or arc).

Delete a Bounding Polyline


You can delete a bounding polyline when the drawing is in progress or after
selecting one (using Select Polyline). You cannot delete the bounding polyline
of the selected plane.

To Delete the Current Bounding Polyline:

 Select Delete Polyline from the pop-up menu.

To Delete All Bounding Polylines:

1. Click Select Polyline . The 3D scene becomes free from the 2D lock.
The 2D Grid (if displayed) is hidden.
2. In the 3D View, pick a polyline.
3. Click Delete All Temporary .
1394 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Activate/Deactivate the Selection Mode


You need to activate the Selection Mode to be able to move a bounding
polyline. The Selection Mode is applied to the last drawn (or selected)
bounding polyline if one has been drawn (or selected) or to the selected
plane’s bounding polyline if any has been drawn (or selected). A manipulator
appears over the bounding polyline.

To Activate/ Deactivate the Selection Mode:

1. Click Selection Mode to active this mode.


2. Click again Selection Mode to deactivate this mode.

Tip: The Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1395

Move a Bounding Polyline


You can use Pan and Rotate for moving a bounding polyline within the
selected plane.

Change Move Mode

To Move a Bounding Polyline:

1. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Pan and Rotate.

 If Pan has been chosen, a distance manipulator is displayed. It has as


origin the current bounding polyline’s center.
 If Rotate has been chosen, a rotation manipulator is displayed. It has as
origin the current bounding polyline’s center.

3. Move the bounding polyline within the selected plane.

Tip: You can also select Pan (or Rotate) from the pop-up menu. Just first
select Change Move Mode.

Note: After choosing Selection Mode, the Change Move Mode icon becomes
enabled. The moving mode which comes first is the last used one.

Tip: You can easily switch between Pan and Rotate, and vice versa, by just

picking one of the Handles. Note that the cursor changes to when you
hover it over a Handle.
1396 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Apply the Bounds


In Set as External Curve, the bounding polyline previously defined is used as
contouring bounds for the selected plane. Only one bounding polyline can be
set as an external curve at once. In Create Hole, the bounding polyline is used
as excavating bounds for the selected plane. This feature can be applied to
several bounding polylines at once.

1 - Create Hole 2 - Set as External Curve

To Apply Bounds:

1. Define a bounding polyline as previously described.


2. Choose between Set as External Curve and Create Hole.
Tools in the Production Module 1397
1 - The defined bounding 2 - External curve set 3 - Hole created
polyline

Tip: The Set as External Curve and Create Hole icons can also be selected
from the pop-up menu.

Validate the Bounds


After applying bounds, the Set as External Curve, Create Hole and Delete All
Temporary icons are grayed out and the Validate Plane Modification becomes
enabled as well as the Change Mode, Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons.

Validate Plane Modification

You can start drawing a new bounding polyline if required. Validating a


modification will not create a new entity in database. You can see the number
of created holes in the Property window (if opened).

Tip:
 You can also select Validate Plane Modification and Close Tool from the
pop-up menu.
 For Close Tool, you can use its related short-cut key (Esc).

Intersect
Intersecting an entity with another entity is similar to bound the first with the
second. Mainly entities of the following shapes (circular torus, cone, cylinder,
extruded geometry, plane and sphere) can be intersected. The first entity will
be modified after the intersection and the second entity remains unchanged.
Intersecting a series of entities together is similar to bound together. All will be
modified after intersecting. The Intersect tool can be used alone or inside main
tools like the Cloud-Based Modeler tool.
1398 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


No selection is required to open the tool. Once inside the tool, a selection must
be carried out. In [A], the Intersect tool opens as a toolbar when there is no
input. In [B], the tool opens with an input.

[A]

[B]

To Open the Tool:

1. Select an entity from the Project Tree if required.


2. In the Modeling menu, select Intersect . The Intersect toolbar appears.

Tip: All commands can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Intersect feature can be found from the Edition group,
on the Model tab.

Extend to One Other Geometry


To Extend to One Other Geometry:

1. Click on the "Extend to One Other Geometry" icon.


2. Pick an entity in the 3D View.

 Some constraints may be observed when intersecting entities together.


They are detailed hereafter.
 A warning appears if no intersection has been found.

3. If required, click on the "Switch to Other Side" icon*.

Note: (*) For some entities, you are able to switch to the other side of the
intersection. For others, this cannot be done as the icon remains grayed out.
Tools in the Production Module 1399

Cylinder
A Cylinder can only be intersected with:

 A Circular Torus of same radius, when it joins the Cylinder,


 A Cone of same radius,
 A Cylinder with secant and same radius.
 A Plane.
 A Sphere, when its center is on the Cylinder axis.

Cylinder With Cylinder


When intersecting two Cylinders together; both Cylinders need to have secant
axes and same radius. If these prerequisites are not observed; open the
Geometry Modifier tool and apply the Lock Radius and Make Perpendicular (or
Make Secant to Cylinder) constraints.
1400 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cylinder With Sphere


When intersecting a Cylinder with a Sphere (or vice versa); the Sphere’s center
needs to be on the cylinder’s axis. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the
Geometry Modifier tool and apply the constraint below:

 Lock Center on Line to the Sphere when intersecting it with the Cylinder,
 Pass Axis through Point to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the
Sphere.

Cylinder With Circular Torus


When intersecting a Cylinder with a Circular Torus (or vice versa); the Cylinder
needs to have the same radius as the Circular Torus. If this prerequisite is not
observed; open the Geometry Modifier tool and apply the Align to Join to
Existing Cylinder constraint to the Torus.
Tools in the Production Module 1401

Cylinder With Cone


When intersecting a Cylinder with a Cone (or vice versa); both need to have
the same axis. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier
tool and apply the constraint below:

 Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cylinder when intersecting it with the
Cone,
 Make Parallel and Fit to Axis to the Cone when intersecting it with the
Cylinder.

Sphere
A Sphere can only be intersected with:

 A Cylinder, when the Sphere center is on its axis,


 A Plane parallel to the Sphere existing bound (if any).

Plane
A Plane can only be intersected with:

 A Circular Torus, when the Plane contains its axis.


 A Cone with a collinear axis,
 A Cylinder,
 An Extrusion with a collinear axis,
 A Plane,
 A Sphere, the Plane is parallel to its existing bound (if any).
1402 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Plane With Circular Torus


When intersecting a Plane with a Circular Torus (or vice versa); the Plane
needs to contain the Circular Torus axes. If this prerequisite is not observed;
open the Geometry Modifier tool and apply the constraint Pass Through Axis to
the Plane.

Plane With Extruded Entity


When intersecting a Plane with an Extrusion (or vice versa); both need to have
collinear axes. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier
tool and apply the constraint below:

 Make Parallel to Direction to the Extrusion when intersecting it with the


Plane,
 Make Perpendicular to the Plane when intersecting it with the Extrusion.
Tools in the Production Module 1403

Plane With Sphere


When intersecting a Plane with a Sphere ((or vice versa); the Plane needs to
be parallel to the Sphere existing bound. If this prerequisite is not observed;
open the Geometry Modifier tool and apply the constraint below:

 Pass Through Point to the Plane when intersecting it with the Sphere,
 Lock Center or Pass Through Point to the Sphere when intersecting it with
the Plane.

Cone
A Cone can only be intersected with:

 A Cone with same axis,


 A Cylinder with same axis,
 A Plane with collinear axis.
1404 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Cone With Cone


When intersecting two Cones together; both need to have the same axis. If this
prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier tool and apply the Fit
to Axis constraint.

Cone With Plane


When intersecting a Cone with a Plane (or vice versa); both need to have
collinear axes. If this prerequisite is not observed; open the Geometry Modifier
tool and apply the Make Perpendicular constraint to either the Cone or the
Plane.
Tools in the Production Module 1405

Circular Torus
A Circular Torus can only be intersected with:

 A Cylinder of same radius when the Circular Torus joins it.


 A Plane containing its axis.

Box
The intersection of a Box is always done along the Box main axis. A Box can
only be intersected with:

 A Rectangular Torus of same section,


 A Plane not passing through the Box center. The intersection can bevel
the Box edges.
 A secant Box.

Tip: If required, use first the Change Main Axis constraint in the Geometry
Modifier tool to change a Box main axis' direction.

Rectangular Torus
A Rectangular Torus can only be intersected with:

 A Box of same section when the Rectangular Torus joins it,


 A Plane containing its axis.

Extrusion
An Extrusion can only be intersected with a Plane.

3D Point
A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entity.

Line
A Line cannot be intersected with any entity.
1406 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extend Between Two Other Geometries


To Extend Between Two Other Geometries:

1. Click on the "Extend to One Other Geometry" icon.


2. Pick the first entity used to extend the selection in the 3D View.
3. Pick the second entity used to extend the selection in the 3D View.

 Some constraints may be observed when intersecting entities together.


They are detailed hereafter.
 A warning appears if no intersection has been found.

4. If required, click on the Switch to Other Side icon*.

Caution: You cannot switch to the other side of an intersection when you
extend an entity between two other ones.

Cylinder
A Cylinder can only be intersected with two entities of type:

 A Circular Torus of same radius, when they join the Cylinder,


 A Cone of same axis,
 A Cylinder with secant and same radius,
 A Plane.

Sphere
A Sphere can only be intersected with two Planes parallel to the Sphere
existing bound (if any).

Plane
A Plane can only be intersected with two Planes.

Cone
A Cone can only be interested with two entities of type:

 Cone(s) with same axis,


 Cylinder(s) with same axis,
 Plane(s) with collinear axis.
Tools in the Production Module 1407

Circular Torus
A Circular Torus can only be intersected with two Cylinders of same radius,
when the Circular Torus joins them.

Box
A Box can only be intersected with two entities of type:

 Rectangular Torus of same section, when they join the Box.


 Plane.
Rectangular Torus
A Rectangular Torus can only be intersected with two Boxes of same section,
when the Rectangular Torus joins them.

Extrusion
An Extrusion can only be intersected with two Planes.

3D Point
A 3D Point cannot be intersected with any entities.

Line
A Line cannot be intersected with any entities.
1408 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Connect to a Series of Entities


Use the "Connect to Geometry Sequence" feature to intersect a series of
entities together. This is very useful for connecting a series of pipes together.

To Connect to a Series of Entities:

1. Display entities to intersect in the 3D View.


2. Click the Connect to Geometry Sequence icon. The cursor becomes
as shown below.

3. Pick an entity. The cursor becomes as shown below.

4. Pick another entity and so on.


Tools in the Production Module 1409

Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes


You can also use the "Connect Geometry Sequence" feature to intersect a
plane with a series of planes.

To Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes:

1. Display a series of planes in the 3D View.

2. Click the Connect Geometry Sequence icon.


3. Pick anywhere in the 3D View except on the displayed planes.
4. Press the Ctrl key. The cursor shape becomes as shown below.

5. Pick a plane to bound. It becomes selected.


1410 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. Pick a series of planes which is going to be used as bounds.

Caution: Planes used as bounds need to be picked in order in any direction


(clockwise or anti-clockwise).

Connect Cylinders
The Link Cylinders feature enables to connect two cylinders together even if
they are not secant or don’t have the same diameter, by creating entity(ies) in
between.

To Connect Two Cylinders:

1. Click on the Connect a secant or non-secant cylinder sequence


icon.
2. Pick the first cylinder in the 3D View.
3. Pick the second cylinder in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1411

For two cylinders, secant in axes and having the same diameter, a connected
cylinder is created in between:

For two cylinders, not secant in axes and having the same diameter, a
connected cylinder is created in between:

For two cylinders, not secant in axes and not having the same diameter, two
connected cylinders and one regular cone are created in between:
1412 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

For two cylinders, with aligned axes but not having the same diameter, a
regular cone is created in between:
Tools in the Production Module 1413

Switch to Other Side


The intersection of an entity with another entity is similar to bound the first with
the second, in a given direction. The Switch to Other Side feature changes this
bounding direction to the opposite as illustrated below.
1414 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Duplicate
The Duplicate tool enables to duplicate a geometry along (or around) a path
defined by the user. A path can be a line, a circle or a combination of both
(called Polyline). This tool requires a selection as input. If the input is an object
from the database (already created), the tool can be used as a main tool.
When the object is being created, the tool is a sub-tool inside a main tool like
e.g. the Geometry Creator tool.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a geometry from the Project Tree.


2. In the Modeling menu, select Duplicate . The Duplicator dialog opens
as the third tab of the WorkSpace window.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Duplicator feature can be found from the Edition
group, on the Model tab.

Choose a Method
There are three duplication methods: Along a Line, Around an Axis and Along
a Polyline. Inside each method, you need to define a path along (or around)
which the duplication will be carried out. The method which comes first is the
one set during the last use of that tool.

To Choose a Method:

1. In the Choose Method panel, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose among Along a Line (see "Define a Line" on page 1415), Around
an Axis (see "Define a Circle" on page 1419) and Along a Polyline (see
"Define a Polyline" on page 1423) from the drop-down list.

Tip: All duplication methods can be selected from the pop-up menu. First
select Choose Type of Path.
Tools in the Production Module 1415

Define a Line
Before defining a path, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes the appearance
shown below in [A]. After defining a path, the Select Global Frame for
Manipulator icon becomes enabled; it enables to switch from a one-handle
manipulator to a three-handle manipulator (see [B]).

[A] [B]

1 - Draw Line by Defining Two Points 3 - Select Global Frame for Manipulator
2 - 3D Direction

To Define a Line:

1. Define a line by picking two points.


2. Or define a 3D direction.

Tip: The Select Global Frame for Manipulator can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1416 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Line by Defining Two Points


The Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon (set by-default) enables to define a
path of segment shape by picking two points. The first point is always at the
center of the selected item. The second point with the first point defines a path
used for duplication.

To Define Two Points:

1. Click on the Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon. The Picking
Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
2. Pick a point (free or constrained) on displayed items. A Red Line linking
the first picked point to the cursor appears. This Red Line has a label in
red showing the distance from the first picked point to the cursor’s current
position.
3. Pick another point (free or constrained), always on displayed items.

1 - The selected item 2 - The second picked point


Tools in the Production Module 1417

1 - Manipulator 4 - Duplicated items

The distance between the two picked points sets the Step value (see Step 3 of
the Duplicator dialog). The selected item is duplicated according to the
parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a
Manipulator and an End label at its center.

Tip: The Draw Line by Defining Two Points icon can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1418 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Direction
The 3D Direction icon enables to define a 3D direction.

To Define a 3D Direction:

1. Click on the 3D Direction Tool icon. The 3D Direction toolbar appears


as well as its information box and a yellow dotted direction.
2. Define a 3D direction and validate it.

1 - The selected item 2 - The defined direction

3 - The one-handle manipulator 4 - The duplicated items


Tools in the Production Module 1419

A Red Line starting from the selected item and running parallel to the defined
3D direction appears. The selected item is duplicated according to the
parameters set in Step 3 along the defined path. The last duplicated item has a
Manipulator and an End label at its center.

Tip: The 3D Direction can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Define a Circle
After choosing Around an Axis, you need to indicate the displacement mode for
duplication by checking either the All Parallel option or the All Rotated option.
Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog becomes as shown below.

1 - Draw Circle by Defining its Center 2 - 3D Axis

To Define a Circle:

1. Draw a circle by defining its center.


2. Or define a 3D axis.

This Red Circle may have two shapes (dotted and/or continuous arc) with an
arrow as duplication direction. The initial item is duplicated around that Red
Circle according to the parameters in Step 3.

If All Parallel has been checked, all newly duplicated items have the same
direction as the first one.

If All Rotated has been checked, each newly duplicated item has its own
direction. The initial (selected) item still remains selected and the last
duplicated item has an End label at its center.
1420 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Circle by Defining its Center


The Draw Circle by Defining its Center icon (set by-default) enables to define a
circular path by its circle. This circular path has as Normal the direction
perpendicular to screen view.

To Draw a Circle by Defining its Center:

1. If required, bring the scene to the Top view.


2. Click Draw Circle by Defining its Center . The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in the 3D constraint mode. The cursor takes the shape
shown below. A Red Circle in the screen plane appears. It has as Origin
the cursor current position and passes through the initial item's center.
3. Pick a point (free or constrained) anywhere - not necessary on displayed
items.

The selected item


Tools in the Production Module 1421

1 - The two handle manipulator 2 - Duplicated items

Tip: The Draw Circle by Defining its Center can also be selected from the pop-
up menu.
1422 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Axis
The 3D Axis icon enables to define an axis which will be used the Normal
direction of a circular path.

To Define a 3D Axis:

1. Click on the 3D Axis icon. The 3D Axis toolbar appears as well as the
3D Axis information box.
2. Define a 3D axis. A Red and Dotted Segment appears.
3. Validate the 3D axis. The Red and Dotted Segment disappears. A Red
Circle appears with a Red and Green Manipulator along and in the middle
of the defined axis.

1 - The selected item 3 - Duplicated items


2 - The defined direction 4 - Manipulator

Tip: The 3D Axis icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1423

Define a Polyline
Before selecting (or defining) a polyline, Step 2 of the Duplicator dialog takes
the appearance shown in [A]. After selecting (or defining) a polyline, Pick on
the Wanted Position of the Start of the Path and Reload the Start to its Initial
Value become active (see [B]).

[A] [B]

1 - Select Polyline 3 - Pick on the Wanted Position of the Start of


2 - Create Polyline to Define Path the Path
4 - Reload the Start to its Initial Value

To Define a Polyline:

1. Select an existing polyline.


2. Or create a new polyline.
3. Enter a value distance value in the Start field.
4. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the Start of the Path .
5. Go the 3D View and pick a point on the selected/drawn polyline. The Start
position changes on the path.
6. If required, get back the Start position by clicking Reload the Start
Position.

The initial (selected) item is duplicated according to the parameters set in Step
3 along the defined path (in red). Starting a new polyline selection (or a new
polyline drawing) will undo the duplication. Duplicated items except the initial
(selected) one are removed from the 3D View.
1424 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Selecting a Polyline
The Select Polyline icon enables to select a path of segment (or a combination
of segment and circular arc) shape - mainly polyline - if present in your project.

To Select a Polyline:

1. Click Select Polyline . The cursor takes the shape as shown below.
2. Pick a polyline to select it.

1 - The selected item 2 - An existing polyline 3 - The duplicated items

A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s
center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a
label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.

Tip: The Select Polyline icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1425

Creating a Polyline
The Create Polyline to Define Path icon enables to draw and create a polyline.

To Create a Polyline:

1. Click Create Polyline to Define Path . The Drawing and Picking


Parameters (in 3D constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Draw a polyline by picking points (free or constrained).
3. Validate the polyline.

1 - The selected item 4 - The drawn polyline


2 - The first picked point 5 - The duplicated items
3 - The first second point

A red path of the same shape as the polyline starting from the initial item’s
center appears. The Start and End positions on the path are indicated with a
label. It’s up to you to change the Start position.

Tip: The Create Polyline to Define Path icon can also be selected from the
pop-up menu.
1426 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Resize a Path
You can use the Manipulator to resize the path previously defined. If the path is
a Red Circle, the Manipulator has two Axis Handles (Red and Green) and on
Plane Handle. You can enlarge (or reduce) the Red Circle's diameter by
displacing its center in a direction using an Axis Handle or in an arbitrary
position using the Plane Handle. For both, the displacement is done on the
Red Circle's plane.

If the path is a Red Line, the Manipulator has only one Axis Handle (Green).
You can extend (or shorten) the Red Line along the defined direction by using
the Handle Axis. But you can also use the Select Global Frame for Manipulator
which has three Axis Handles (Green, Red and Blue) and three Plane Handles.
In that case, you extend (or shorten) the Red Line not along the defined path
but along the direction indicates by the Axis Handle or on the plane defined by
a pair of Axis Handle. If the path is a Red Polyline, there is no Manipulator.

Note: If you start defining a new path; this cancels the current duplication.
Duplicated items except the selected item are removed from the 3D View.

Define Parameters
There are three sets of parameters available for duplicating items: Step &
Quantity, Step & Length and Length & Quantity. The Step parameter
corresponds to the distance (or angle) between two successive items. The
Length corresponds to the distance (or angle) from the Start position to the
End position.

To Define Parameters:

1. In the Define Parameters panel, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Choose among Step & Quantity (see "Define the "Step & Quantity"
Parameters" on page 1427), Step & Length (see "Define the "Step &
Length" Parameters" on page 1428) and Length & Quantity (see "Define
the "Length & Quantity" Parameters" on page 1429).
Tools in the Production Module 1427

Define the "Step & Quantity" Parameters


After choosing Step & Quantity, Step 3 of the Duplicator dialog changes its
appearance according to the duplication method set in Step 1.

Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) Around an Axis

To Define the Step & Quantity Parameters:

1. Enter a number in the Quantity field.


2. Or use (or ) to set a value in the Quantity field.
3. If Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) has been selected, enter a distance
value in the Step field.
4. If Around an Axis has been selected, enter an angular value in the Step
field.
5. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the Next Element .
6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.

Note: The Length value is automatically updated according to the value set in
the Quantity (or Step) field.
1428 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the "Step & Length" Parameters


After choosing Step & Length, Step 4 of the Duplicator dialog changes its
appearance according to the duplication method selected in Step 1.

Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) Around an Axis

To Define the Step & Length Parameters:

1. If Along a Line / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis) has been selected,
enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field.
2. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the Next Element .
3. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.
4. If Along a Line / Along a Polyline (or Around an Axis) has been selected,
enter a distance (or angular) value in the Step field.
5. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the End of the Path .
6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point on the path.
7. If required, click Reload the Path Length to its Initial Value .

Note: The Quantity value is automatically updated according to the value set in
the Step (or Length) field.
Tools in the Production Module 1429

Define the "Length & Quantity" Parameters


After choosing Length & Quantity, Step 3 of the Duplicator dialog changes its
appearance according to the duplication type selected in Step 1.

Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) Around an Axis

To Define the Length & Quantity Parameters:

1. Enter a number in the Quantity field.


2. Or use (or ) to set a value in the Quantity field.
3. If Along a Line (or Along a Polyline) has been selected, enter a distance
value in the Length field.
4. If Around an Axis has been selected, enter an angular value in the Length
field.
5. Or click Pick on the Wanted Position of the End of the Path .
6. Go to the 3D View and pick a point* on the path.
7. If required, click Reload the Path Length to Its Initial Value .

Note:
 The Step value is automatically updated according to the value set in the
Quantity (or Length) field.
 (*) To leave the picking mode, select Cancel Picking from the pop-up
menu or use Esc. Outside the picking mode, use Esc to leave the
Duplicator tool.

Reverse the Path Direction


You can use Invert Path Direction to reverse the duplication direction. If Along
a Line has been selected, the End position will be moved at the opposite end
along the path. If Around an Axis has been selected, the End position remains
in the same position but the duplication direction changes. If Along a Polyline
has been selected, the Start and End positions are inverted.

Tip: Invert Path Direction can also be selected from the pop-up menu.
1430 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Duplicate Items
After defining a path and setting parameters, you can create the duplicated
items as persistent objects in the database. All are gathered in a folder named
Duplication which is put under the active group. Each duplicated item has the
name set in the Name Prefix field with an order.

If a name has been entered in the Name Prefix field, each duplicated item has
the name set in the field with an order. If no name has been entered in the
field, each duplicated item is named as follows: Copy of
"Selected_Entity_Name" with an order between parentheses.

Note: You can duplicate as many items as required without leaving the
Duplicator tool.
1431

Tools in the Plant Module


The Plant tab, which includes all the modeling functions, also provides
powerful tools for various tasks specifically related to the power, process, plant
and related environments. All are gathered in three groups, called Piping,
SteelWorks and Access.

All the features related to the piping can be found in the Modeling and Plant
menus, in the Menus and Toolbars user interface, or in the Piping group, on
the Model tab, in the Ribbon user interface.

Tools in the Plant menu, when used in combination the Modeling tools, bring
you the benefits of streamlined workflow to the world of engineering. All are
gathered in the Plant menu, in the Menu and Toolbars, and in the SteelWorks
group, in the Ribbon.

Tools for creating ladders, ladder cages, railing and starts are gathered in the
Plant menu, in the Menu and Toolbars, and in the Access group, on the Model
tab, in the Ribbon.
1432 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

EasyPipe
The EasyPipe is very easy to use because you only need a few clicks to
execute the following tasks: extract a pipe path from more than one million
points and model the extraction with geometric entitie(s) if needed. The
procedure given hereafter guides you step-by-step through the use of this tool.
For each command, you can use its short-cut key (if available); this allows you
to accelerate your work.

Open the Tool


Only an object having the point cloud representation can be selected as entry
for the EasyPipe tool.

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point Cloud* (or more**) from the Project Tree.


2. In the Plant menu, select EasyPipe . The EasyPipe dialog opens as the
third tab of the WorkSpace window. We will call the input Point Cloud a
Cloud Data.

 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option


(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.

Note: (*) If the selected Point Cloud is On before starting the tool, it
automatically tilts to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.

Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.

Note: In the Ribbon, the EasyPipe feature can be found in the Piping group, on
the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1433

Select a New Cloud Data


The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not
necessary the one selected before starting the tool) for another one. You
cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud
Data; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.

1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1434 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data


Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them
before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of
it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling (see "Sample
Point Clouds" on page 331) sub-tools.

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud


To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1435

Delete the Displayed Cloud


To Delete the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data).

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1436 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking


To Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking:

1. In Step 1, click the Extract Cylinder button. The cursor takes the
appearance of a cross.
2. Pick a point on the displayed set of points. The cross becomes a ruler.
3. Move the cursor to any location. A circle appears. Its center is at the
position of the picked point.
4. Pick another point (not necessary on the set of points).

A first cylinder is extracted from points inside the circle. The Start button in
Step 2 becomes enabled. The Number of Elements is equal to One.

Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View displays the
first extracted cylinder parameters like its Diameter, the Number of Points
(used for fitting) and the Standard Deviation.
Tools in the Production Module 1437

Tip: You can cancel the current cylinder and extract a new one by using the
Start button again.

Caution: The first extracted cylinder will not be saved if you close the tool by
pressing Esc. (or by selecting Close).
1438 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking


If you already have a cylinder in line with a set of points for which you want to
extract a set of cylinders; you can set it as the first cylinder in the tracking
process.

To Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking:

1. First select a cylinder from the Project Tree.


2. Display the cylinder in the 3D View.
3. In Step 1, click the Pick a Cylinder button. The cursor becomes as
shown below [A].
4. In the 3D View, pick a cylinder. The picked cylinder becomes the first
cylinder. The Start button in Step 2 becomes enabled. The Number of
Elements is equal to One [B].

[A]

[B]
Tools in the Production Module 1439

Note: An information box at the top right corner of the 3D View window
displays the information related to the picked cylinder like its Diameter, Number
of Points and Standard Deviation.

Tip: You can also select a point cloud and a cylinder as input of the tool. The
selected cylinder will be automatically considered as the first cylinder, without
picking.
1440 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Start Tracking Cylinders


The cylinder tracking will consist of building and propagating in both directions
a series of consecutive constrained cylinders (all based on the first cylinder
and all ball-jointed at a pivot point). The tracking will stop on its own when the
fitting error between the current (last) cylinder and its points is too large or
when the number of points in the immediate neighborhood is insufficient to
continue tracking.

To Start Tracking Cylinders:

 In Step 2, click the Start button.

Note:
 The Start button takes the name of Pick to Continue.
 The Delete Elements, Smooth and Model buttons become enabled. The
Number of Elements will be updated according to the fitted cylinders.
Tools in the Production Module 1441

Continue in Tracking Cylinders


You can continue in extracting cylinders along a line of points. You have to do
this from the first (or from the last) extracted cylinder.

To Continue in Tracking Cylinders:

1. Click the Pick to Continue button. If the fitting is too important; the
extraction stops on its own and a dialog opens and prompts to continue or
to abort.
2. Click Yes to continue.
3. Click No to abort.
1442 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete the Extracted Cylinders


You can delete an alone (or a set of) extracted cylinder(s) which is not correctly
fitted.

To Delete the Extracted Cylinders:

1. Click the Delete Elements button. The mouse cursor becomes as shown
below [A].
2. In the 3D View, pick an extracted cylinder. The picked cylinder and those
that follow after are deleted [B].

[A]

[B]

Tip: You can undo a deletion by selecting Undo Delete Elements from the pop-
up menu (or by using the following short-cut Ctrl + Z).

Note: You cannot delete the first cylinder; the one used for tracking. The
cursor will stay in the picking mode until a valid cylinder will be selected.
Tools in the Production Module 1443

Smooth the Extracted Cylinders


The stack of the extracted cylinders may be not aligned. You can then use the
Smooth command. It allows you to align all cylinder axes together. This is an
interactive procedure. You can try as often as you want until you reach the
result you need; but applying too many the Smooth command consecutively
may result in removing valid elbows or deviating cylinders from the initial fitting.

Note: The Number of Elements will be updated once the extracted cylinders
have been smoothed.
1444 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Model the Extracted Cylinders


The last step consists of merging the extracted cylinders, for which the axes
can be aligned, into a long pipe. The extracted cylinders for which the axes
cannot be aligned are replaced with an elbow.

To Model the Extracted Cylinders:

 In Step 3, click on the Model button.


Tools in the Production Module 1445

Create the Extracted Cylinders


Once you are satisfied with the tracking result, you can save it in the
RealWorks database. A new folder named "Branch (X)" is created and rooted
under the current project. This folder contains all computed cylinders named
"ObjectY". X and Y are respectively the folder and cylinder order.

To Create the Extracted Cylinders:

1. Click Create. You can still extract another pipe from remaining points. The
EasyPipe dialog remains open.
2. Click Close. The EasyPipe dialog closes

Note: If the extracted cylinders have not been modeled; a list of cylinders will
be created in RealWorks. If the modeling has been applied, a mix of cylinders
and circular torus will be created.

Tip: You can also select Close from the pop-up menu.

Export Pipe Center Lines


A Center Line is an imaginary line running through the center of a Pipe.

To Export Pipe Center Lines:

1. Select a lone (or a set of) fitted Pipe(s) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Plant menu, select Export Pipe Center Lines . The Save As
dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive / folder where you want to store the file.
4. Keep the default name which is the project name.
5. Or input a new name in the File Name field.
6. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
7. Choose among Solids AutoCAD Files (*.dwg), Solids AutoCAD (*.dxf) and
MicroStation Files (*.dgn).
8. Click Save.

Note: A unique format file will be exported regardless of the number of Pipes
selected as input.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Pipe Center Lines feature can be found in the
Piping group, on the Model tab.
1446 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export as a DWG Format File


AutoCAD's native file format, DWG, and to a lesser extent, its interchange file
format, DXF, have become de facto standards for CAD data interoperability.
From 1982 to 2007, Autodesk created versions of AutoCAD which wrote no
less than 18 major variants of the DXF and DWG file formats. Here below are
the numerous versions of AutoCAD.

Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01

To Export as a DWG Format File:

1. In the Export as DWG File dialog, customize the option(s) below.

 Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
 Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.

2. Click Export. The Export as DWG File dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 1447

Export as a DXF Format File


AutoCAD's native file format, DWG, and to a lesser extent, its interchange file
format, DXF, have become de facto standards for CAD data interoperability.
From 1982 to 2007, Autodesk created versions of AutoCAD which wrote no
less than 18 major variants of the DXF and DWG file formats. Here below are
the numerous versions of AutoCAD.

Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01

To Export a DXF Format File:

1. In the Export as DXF File dialog, customize the option(s) below.

 Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
 Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.

2. Click Export. The Export as DXF File dialog closes.


1448 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export as a DGN Format File


DGN for DesiGN is a file format of Bentley MicroStation®. Exporting to this
format means exporting a selection from RealWorks to the MicroStation®
format. You can only export one project at a time. MicroStation® includes the
notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering
information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic
version of traditional layers. In addition to the layers, this format includes the
notion of working units which are the real-world units that you work with in
drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. The working units are set as
Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters)
and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as
centimeters or millimeters). The Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units.

To Export as DGN Format File:

1. In the Export as DGN File dialog, customize the option(s) below.

 Layer: This option allows you to define a number of layers. One is set by
default and the option is dimmed.
 Export Of: This option allows you to choose which the type of object(s) you
want to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries
and Selected Clouds. Selected Geometries is set by default and the option
is dimmed.
 Export Frame: A project may have several coordinate frames. This option
allows you to select which coordinate frame from the drop-down list you
want to apply to the exported data.
 Master Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Master
unit.
 Sub Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Sub unit.
 Positional Unit: This option allows you to enter a value for the Positional
unit.

2. Click Export. The Export as DGN File dialog closes.


Tools in the Production Module 1449

Change a Pipe Diameter


You are able to change the diameter of one (or more) selected cylinder(s)
and/or circular torus.

To Change a Pipe Diameter:

1. Select a set of cylinders and/or circular torus from the Models Tree.
2. In the Modeling menu, select Change Pipe Diameter . The Change
Pipe Diameter dialog opens.
3. In the New Diameter Value field, input a new value.
4. Click Apply. The Change Pipe Diameter dialog closed. The new value is
then applied to all selected cylinders and/or circular torus

Note: For a circular torus, the pipe diameter cannot be larger than the center
line diameter. If you input a value that leads to such a case, an error message
is then displayed.

1 - Center line diameter 2 - Pipe diameter

Note: In the Ribbon, the Change Pipe Diameter feature can be found in the
Piping group, on the Model tab.
1450 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Manage SteelWorks Catalogs


A SteelWorks Catalog provides parametric definition of all components in the
required size ranges, ratings and types. You can use it to create beams with
constraints.

Import SteelWorks Catalogs


You can import a lone (or a set of) steelworks catalog(s) before starting the
SteelWorks Creation tool (or within that tool).

To Import a SteelWorks Catalog:

1. In the Plant menu, select Import SteelWorks Catalog(s) . The Import


Catalog dialog opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the SteelWorks catalog file is located in
the Look In field.
3. Click on the SteelWorks catalog file to select it. Its name appears in the
File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Import Catalog dialog closes.

Note: Importing a catalog file that is already imported will open a warning
message.

Some catalog files may have been installed in X:\Program


Files\Trimble\RealWorks 11.0\Tables\SteelWorks after installing RealWorks.
These catalog files are samples. If the user decides to not install these tables,
he needs to first choose the "Custom" option when installing RealWorks and
then uncheck the "RealWorks Plant Tables" option in the Select Features
window.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Import SteelWorks Catalog(s) feature can be reached
from the SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1451

Remove SteelWorks Catalog List


You can delete all steelworks catalogs inside (or out of) the SteelWorks
Creation tool. The Remove SteelWorks Catalog List command will remain
dimmed until a catalog file is first imported.

To Remove the SteelWorks Catalog List:

 In the Plant menu, select Remove SteelWorks Catalog List .

Note: In the Ribbon, the Remove SteelWorks Catalog List feature can be
reached from the SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
1452 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

SteelWorks Creator
This feature allows you to model structural steelworks. Standard and specific
catalogs can be used within it.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select one point cloud* (or more**) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Plant menu, select SteelWorks Creator . The SteelWorks Creator
and the Drawing open, as the third tab of the WorkSpace window for the
first and as a toolbar the second. We will call the input point cloud a Cloud
Data.

 If the Keep Displayed Objects Visible When Starting Segmentation option


(in the Preferences dialog) is not checked, all objects displayed in the 3D
View are hidden except the one selected. All of the displayed objects have
their bulb icon turned to Off.
 If the option is checked, all objects displayed in the 3D View remain
displayed. All displayed objects have their bulb icon remained On, except
the one selected.

Note:
 The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode.
 (*) If the selected point cloud is On before starting the tool, it automatically
swaps to Off. We advise you to maintain it Off.

Caution: (**) You can select several point clouds as input of the tool but one of
them should not be the Project Cloud.

Note: In the Ribbon, the SteelWorks Creator feature can be reached from the
SteelWorks group, on the Model tab.
Tools in the Production Module 1453

Select a New Cloud Data


The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not
necessary the one selected before starting the tool) for another one. You
cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud
Data; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.

1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
1454 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data


Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them
before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of
it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling (see "Sample
Point Clouds" on page 331) sub-tools.

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud


To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1455

Delete the Displayed Cloud


To Delete the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data).

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).

Choose a Section Type

There are five types of Sections you can create: H Section, I Section,
U Section, L Section and T Section.

To Choose a Section Type:

 In Step 1, choose a Section Type by clicking on its related icon.

Tip: For each type of Section, you can select its related shortcut. Please, refer
to the Shortcut Keys (see "Shortcut Keys in RealWorks" on page 101)
section for more information.
1456 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Catalog File


If there is a catalog file in your project; it is by default selected and its name*
appears in the Catalog Files field. Note that a catalog file has SPEC as
extension. "None" in the Catalog Files field means one of two things. First,
there is no catalog file has been imported into your project. Second, it is
because you don't want to create a beam based on a catalog.

To Select a Catalog File:

1. In Step 2, click on the Catalog Files pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a catalog file from the drop-down list.

Tip:
 You can import a catalog file within the SteelWorks Creator tool. You may
not see it once imported. In that case, select it by dropping down the
Catalog Files list.
 You can delete the whole catalog files within the SteelWorks Creator tool.

Note: (*) The name you see in the Catalog Files field is not necessarily the
name of the imported catalog file. This name is the one you find in #SPEC
NAME# in the catalog file.

Select a Table
The available tables* are: HEA, HEB (for H Section), IPE, INP (for I Section),
UNP (for U Section), LEA (for L Section), TEA (for T Section). If there is no
catalog file that has been imported into your project; you may see "No Table" in
the Table field.

To Select a Table:

1. In Step 2, click on the Table pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a table from the drop-down list.

Note: (*) The number of Tables as well as their name or the kind of Tables
may differ from one catalog to another. The Tables given above are based on
the standard DIN catalog. In a catalog like the AFNOR catalog, new tables can
be added (UAP, UPF, HEM tables only).
Tools in the Production Module 1457

Select a Reference
If there is no catalog file that has been imported into RealWorks; you may see
"None" in the Selected Reference field.

To Select a Reference:

1. In Step 3, first check the Catalog Constraint option.


2. Then click on the Selected Reference pull-down arrow.
3. Choose a Reference from the drop-down list.

Tip: You can select a Reference from the drop-down list without checking the
Catalogue Constraint option. It will be automatically checked.

2D Sections
The Change Mode, Draw Rectangle and Draw Circle icons are not present in
the Drawing toolbar. Drawings are constrained to the shape chosen in Step 1.

Note: The Walkthrough navigation mode is forbidden. If you are in the


Walkthrough mode, the navigation mode will swap of its own from that mode to
Examiner after starting drawing.

Note: There is no way to close the Drawing toolbar except of first drawing and
validating a 2D section.
1458 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a 3D Plane
To Define a 3D Plane:

1. Click the Start 3D Plane Tool icon. The 3D Plane toolbar and a 3D
plane both appear.
2. Define and validate a 3D plane*. The scene is locked on the defined 3D
plane (which is hidden) with a 2D grid superimposed (if not hidden
previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar appears in the 2D constraint
mode. The Show/Hide Plane icon becomes active and Lock in 2D
is default-set.
3. Click the Show/Hide Plane icon to display the defined 3D plane (if
required).

Note: (*) Please, refer to the 3D Plane tool on how to define a 3D plane.

Tip:
 You can also select Start 3D Plane Tool (or Show/Hide Plane) from the
pop-up menu.
 The Find Best Extrusion View is only present when using the 3D Plane
tool in the SteelWorks Creator tool. It enables to find the best cutting
direction.

Use the Current View as 3D Plane


To Use the Current View as 3D Plane:

1. Navigate through the 3D scene to find the best view on which you want to
draw a 2D section.
2. Pick a first point. The scene is locked on the current view plane with a 2D
grid superimposed (if not hidden previously) and the Picking Parameters
toolbar in the 2D constraint mode.
Tools in the Production Module 1459

Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:

1. Pick a first point to select the anchor point of the 2D section.


2. Move the mouse to change the size of the 2D section. The Selected
Reference field is automatically updated. If the Catalog Constraint option
has been checked; the 2D section size is constrained to the values stored
in the selected table. If the option hasn't been checked, there is no
constraint to the 2D section size drawing.
3. Click the second point to complete the 2D section.
4. Validate the 2D section by clicking .
5. If required, click New SteelWorks to cancel the current 2D section.

Tip: The New SteelWorks icon can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Change the 2D Section Position and Orientation


You can change the 2D section position and orientation so that it fits exactly
the working cloud.

To Change the 2D Section Position and Position:

1. Click on the Selection Mode icon. The Change Move Mode button
becomes enabled with Pan as default mode.
2. A manipulator (with two secant handles and a plan) appears.
3. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the 2D section is highlighted in yellow and the one along which
you cannot displace it is in mauve.
4. Move the 2D section along that direction.
5. Click on the plane. It turns to yellow.
6. Move the 2D Section in any direction in that plane.
7. Click on the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow.
8. Choose Rotate from the drop-down list. The Manipulator changes of
shape.
9. Click on the Manipulator. It turns to yellow.
10. Turn left or right the Manipulator.
1460 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Length
You need to define a Length only if you don't want to create a beam based on
a catalog. Otherwise, defining a Length has no effect.

To Define a Length:

1. Enter a distance value in the Length field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button.

Tip: The extrusion's Length can also be modified by using the Geometry
Modifier tool.

Create Beams
An extruded entity will be created in the RealWorks database. Each extruded
entity has as name "ObjectX - Reference - Catalog" where X is its order. X
always starts at One. Reference will be replaced by the Selected Reference’s
value and Catalog by the Catalog’s name. If the Catalog Constraint option has
not been checked; the extruded entity has as name "ObjectX - SteelWorks".

To Create Beams:

1. Click Create in the SteelWorks Creator dialog.


2. Or click Create in the Drawing toolbar.
3. Or press Enter.

Tip: Create can also be selected from the pop-up menu.

Create a Ladder
The Ladder is a tool that lets the user to build a ladder based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.
Tools in the Production Module 1461

Open the Tool


To Open the Ladders Tool:

1. Select a set of points from the Project Tree.


2. From the Plant menu, select Ladder.

Or

3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Ladder icon.

 The Ladder dialog opens as well as the Drawing toolbar.

Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this will close both the Drawing
toolbar and the Ladder tool.
1462 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a New Cloud Data


The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not
necessary the one selected before starting the tool) for another one. You
cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud
Data; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.

1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
Tools in the Production Module 1463

Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data


Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them
before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of
it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling (see "Sample
Point Clouds" on page 331) sub-tools.

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud


To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1464 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete the Displayed Cloud


To Delete the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data).

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).

Select a Ladder Model


To Select a Ladder Model:

 If there are several models in your project, you can choose one by doing
the following

1. Click the Ladder Model pull-down arrow.


2. And choose model from the drop-down list.

There is a persistency in the chosen model, i.e., it will be kept until you change
it to a new one.

 If there is only the STD MODEL, you can:

 Use the default STD Model. It comes with a set of predefined parameters;
you can view them by clicking the Edit button.
 Or customize a model by modifying each of the parameters, the Apply
button, initially grayed-out, becomes enabled, as well as the Save As
button. The name of the chosen model changes to "Custom".
Tools in the Production Module 1465

Edit the Ladder Parameters


The illustration below shows in detail the parameters of a ladder.

1 - Ladder, Width 4 - Rung, Interval


2 - Rung, Depth 5 - Rail, Depth
3 - Rung, Thickness 6 - Rail, Width

To Edit Ladder Parameters:

1. Click the Edit button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


1466 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2. Define the Width (1) of the ladder.


3. Click the Rail Section pull-down arrow.
4. Choose a shape for the Rail between Circular and Rectangular.
5. Define the parameters of the Rail by setting its:

 Depth (2),
 Thickness (3),
 and Interval (4),

6. Click the Rung Section pull-down arrow.


7. Choose a shape for the Rung between Circular and Rectangular.
8. Define the parameters of the Rung by setting its:

 Depth (5),
 And Width (6).

9. Click the Apply button. The Edit Parameters dialog closes.

Note: You are not allowed to input either a negative or null value in each of the
parameter fields.

Tip: You can use the Tab key to navigate through the parameter fields.

Create a New Ladder Model


To Create a New Ladder Model:

1. Click the Edit button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


2. Define the parameters of the ladder to create.
3. Click the Save As button. The Save As dialog opens.
4. Enter a name in the New Mode Name field.
5. Click the Create button. The Edit Parameters dialog closes.

Note: The model created is not stored in the current project but in the Windows
registry, so that when performing an update of RealWorks, the model will be
not lost.
Tools in the Production Module 1467

Lock the Ladder Top View in 2D


To Lock the Ladder Top View in 2D:

1. Rotate the ladder so that you can view it from its top, as illustrated below.
2. Lock the view in 2D by clicking the Lock In 2D icon in the Drawing
toolbar.

Or

3. Use the UCS Creation (see "Create an UCS" on page 248) tool to create a
new frame. Its Z axis must be aligned with one of the rails, as illustrated
below.
1468 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Select the created frame and display its top view by selecting Object Top
.
5. If required, lock the view in 2D by clicking the Lock In 2D icon.
Tools in the Production Module 1469

Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:

1. Pick a point, ideally at the center of one of the Rungs. A 2D Section and a
manipulator appear. The 3D scene is locked in 2D, with the 2D Grid in
superimposition (if not previously hidden).

2. If required, adjust the position of the 2D Section so that it matches the


position of the ladder, by clicking the Change Move Mode pull-down arrow
and choose among Pan and Rotate.

 If Pan has been chosen, move the 2D section in the 2D locked plane.

 If Rotate has been chosen, rotate the 2D section in the 2D locked


plane.

3. If required, click the New 2D Section icon to delete the current 2D section.
4. Once satisfied, click the Validate Polyline icon.
1470 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: If the Drawing toolbar is not open, click the Polyline Drawing icon.

Note: There is no way to close the Drawing toolbar except of first drawing and
validating a 2D section.

Note: When you press the Esc. key after defining a 2D section, this will delete
the 2D section.
Tools in the Production Module 1471

Define the Ladder Length and Start Height


Define the Ladder Length:

1. Enter a value in the Length field.


2. Enter a value in the Start Height field.

Or

3. Adjust the Length of the ladder by using the manipulator (1).


4. Adjust the Start Height of the ladder by using the manipulator (2).
1472 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: A negative or null value cannot be considered for the Length and Start
Height parameters.

Create a Ladder
To Create a Ladder:

1. Click the Create button.


2. Click Close. The Ladder dialog closes.

 A group , named Ladder - Model's name, is created and rooted under


the Project Tree.
 Under the group, the items below are also created:

 A cloud, which is not displayed in the 3D View window.


 Two boxes (or cylinders), named Rail 1 and Rail 2, which are
displayed in the 3D View window.
 And a set of boxes (or cylinders), each named Rung XX where XX is
its order, which are displayed in the 3D View window.
Tools in the Production Module 1473

After clicking Create, you are brought back to Step 1. You can start drawing
another 2D Section and create a new ladder without having to leave the tool.
At the same time, the created ladder is by default selected and set as a Model
Group. You can change its layer or set it as a Non Model Group. To be able to
do that, you need to first leave the 2D Section drawing mode, and select
Change Classification Layer or Set as Non Model Group from the pop-up
menu.

Note: The cloud displayed in the 3D View after clicking Create is not the cloud
created within the ladder but the one selected as input of the tool. By this way,
you can continue on fitting other ladders.
1474 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Ladder Cage


This tool is dedicated to the creation of ladder cages, which may have several
shapes: Circular, Horseshoe, etc.

Open the Tool


To Open the Ladder Cages Tool:

1. Select a ladder group (created previously with the Ladder tool) from
the Project Tree.
2. From the Plant menu, select Ladder Cage .

Or

3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Ladder Cage icon.

 The Ladder Cage dialog opens.


 All the items of the selected ladder, except the cloud, are hidden in the 3D
View window.
 A preview of a ladder cage with a 3D plane is displayed in the 3D View.
The ladder cage is obtained by fitting the displayed cloud. In order to have
a good fitting in models and in direction, we advise you to clean properly
the cloud that represents the ladder cage with the Segmentation (and/or
Sampling) tool by removing undesirable points (and/or to reduce the cloud
in size).

Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this opens a dialog prompting
you to create the ladder cage or not before closing the tool.

Note: When you use the Segmentation (or Sampling) tool, a dialog opens
asking you to keep (or not) the preview of the ladder cage.
Tools in the Production Module 1475

Define the Hoops


To Define the Hoops:

1. Input a distance in the From field .


2. Or pick a point on the displayed point cloud.
3. Input a distance in the To field .
4. Or pick a point on the displayed point cloud.
5. Input a distance in the Interval field .
6. If required, add some extra hoops.
1476 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tools in the Production Module 1477

Add Additional Hoops


To Add Additional Hoops:

1. Click the Pick to Add Hoop(s) icon.


2. Pick a point on the displayed cloud in the 3D View.

Edit the Active Hoop


The active hoop is the one that is highlighted in the 3D View, and whose
number is displayed in the dialog. The default active hoop is the first one.

Set a Hoop as Active


To Set a Hoop as Active:

1. Input a number in the Edit Hoops field.


2. Or choose Select New Active Hoop from the pop-up menu and pick a
hoop in the 3D View.
3. Or click the Display Next Hoop button to set the next hoop as active.
4. Or click the Display Last Hoop button to set the last hoop as active.
5. Or click the Display Previous Hoop button to set the previous as active.
6. Or click the Display First Hoop button to set the first hoop as active.

Note: The shape of the chosen the hoop is displayed in the Shape field.

Delete the Active Hoop


To Delete a Hoop:

 Click the Delete button. The active hoop is then deleted.

Warning: In case you delete the active hoop which is not the first one, the next
active hoop is not the one that comes after the one that has been deleted but
the first one.

Note: The number of hoops in Step 1 is updated consequently.

Note: You can undo the deletion by selecting .

Caution: You cannot delete several hoops at once. The Delete icon is grayed
out in that case.
1478 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose the Shape of the Active Hoop


To Choose the Shape of the Active Hoop:

1. Click on the Shape pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a shape among Circular, Horseshoe, U Shape or User-Defined
(see "Define the Shape of the Active Hoop" on page 1479).

Change the Radius and Dimension Parameters


To Change the Radius and Dimension Parameters

1. Input a distance in the Radius field .


2. Input a distance in the Dimension field .

Note: The values in the Radius and Dimension fields are persistence. They
remain unchanged until you change them. To preserve the shape of the
chosen hoop, the value in the Dimension field should be higher than the value
in the Radius field. If you input a value that is lower, the value won't be taken
into account.
Tools in the Production Module 1479

Define the Shape of the Active Hoop


To Define the Shape of the Active Hoop:

1. Click on the Shape pull-down arrow.


2. Choose the User-Defined option. The New Shape toolbar opens.

3. Pick an extrusion.

a) Click the Pick Extrusion icon.


b) Pick an entity.

Or

4. Draw a polyline:

a) Click the Polyline Drawing icon. The Drawing toolbar opens. The
3D View is locked in 2D, with the 2D Grid (if not previously hidden).
b) Draw a polyline and validate by choosing Close Tool, from the
toolbar or from the pop-up menu. A dialog opens and prompts you to
either create the drawn polyline or not.

5. Click the Create icon.


6. Click Close.

Note: You are not able to change the intrinsic parameters of a user-defined
hoop. The Radius field in Step 2 is dimmed. Only the Dimension field is
enabled.

When you change the value in the Dimension field, its shape does not
lengthen or shorten as for the predefined shapes. You will only see the hoop(s)
moving as well as the 3D plane.
1480 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit Several Hoops


You can select all hoops at once by using the Ctrl + A key combination, or
select Select All from the pop-up menu, or select separately several hoops by
picking them in the 3D View while keeping the Ctrl key pressed. No number will
be displayed then in Step 2, as illustrated.

You can apply any transformation you applied to a unique hoop, like changing
its shape, radius, etc. except deleting several of them or deleting them all. To
deselect all the selected hoops, do the following:

 Enter a number to set a single hoop as active.


 Click the Display Last Hoop (or Display First Hoop) icon.
 Pick a hoop in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1481

Define the Vertical Straps


To Define the Vertical Straps:

1. Leave the Inner Strap option unchecked to set all the straps out of the
hoops .
2. Or check the Inner Strap option to set all the straps inside of the hoops .

3. Define the number of straps by selecting a number among 3, 5 and 7.


4. Or define your own number of straps by checking the User-Defined
Configuration (see "Configure the Number of Straps" on page 1482)
option.
5. Define the Width .
6. Define the Thickness .
1482 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Configure the Number of Straps


To Configure the Number of Straps:

1. Click the User-Defined Configuration icon. The Edit Strap


Configuration dialog opens.
2. Input a number in the Strap Number field.

 The first strap is always at the center ,


 The second strap is at the left of the first one ,
 The third strap is at the right of the first one, oppositely to the second one
,
 And so one.

3. And input an angle in the Angle Between Straps field .


4. Click Apply. The Edit Strap Configuration dialog closes.

Create Ladder Cages


To Create Ladder Cages:

1. Click the Create button.


2. Click Close. The Ladders dialog closes.

 A group , named Ladder Cage Group, is created and rooted under the
Project Tree.
 Under the group, the items below are also created:

 A set of Hoops, named Hoopx,


 And a set of Straps, each named Strapx.
Tools in the Production Module 1483

Create Railings
The Railing is a tool that lets the user to build a railing based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.

Open the Tool


To Open the Railings Tool:

1. Select a set of points from the Project Tree.


2. From the Plant menu, select Railing .

Or

3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Railing icon.

 The Railing dialog opens as well as the Drawing toolbar.


1484 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a New Cloud Data


The Set New Cloud Data is for swapping the default Cloud Data (not
necessary the one selected before starting the tool) for another one. You
cannot choose and set a subset of the default Cloud Data as the new Cloud
Data; you need to choose a different point cloud.

To Select a New Cloud Data:

1. Select another point cloud from the Project Tree, and display it in the 3D
View.
2. If required, hide the default Cloud Data by clicking the Hide Cloud icon.
3. Click the Set New Cloud Data icon. The cursor becomes as shown
below and the information box related to the Segmentation tool disappears
from the 3D View.
4. Pick a point on the selected point cloud. It becomes the new Cloud Data.
The Segmentation information box appears again with the new cloud data
number of points.

1 - The initial Cloud Data 3 - The cursor in the Set New Cloud Data mode
2 - The newly selected Point Cloud 4 - The new Cloud Data
Tools in the Production Module 1485

Note: (*) The Hide Cloud icon becomes Display Cloud after clicking on it.

Define a Set of Points on the Cloud Data


Frequently, the Cloud Data contains many points; you need to decimate them
before doing the fitting. You may also decide to fit a geometry just on a part of
it. To do these, you can use the Segmentation and the Sampling (see "Sample
Point Clouds" on page 331) sub-tools.

After segmenting/sampling the Cloud Data, the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in
Cloud Data and Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icons (respectively
for keeping/deleting points in/from the current Cloud Data (after decimation)
and the Reload Points icon become active.

Keep Only the Displayed Cloud


To Keep Only the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Keep Only Displayed Cloud in Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View inside are kept.

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are kept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
1486 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete the Displayed Cloud


To Delete the Displayed Cloud:

1. Draw a fence on the Cloud Data.


2. Use the In (or Out )* icon to keep points inside (or outside) the fence.
3. Or sample the Cloud Data.
4. Click the Delete Displayed Cloud from Cloud Data icon. Points
displayed in the 3D View are unkept (removed from the Cloud Data).

Note:
 The Reload Points icon is only for reloading points of the current Cloud
Data after sampling or segmenting.
 (*) You can skip the step of keeping In (or Out). In that case, points inside
the fence are unkept.

Tip: Outside the segmentation mode, you can select the Segmentation tool
from the pop-up menu or use its related short-cut key (S).
Tools in the Production Module 1487

Select a Path
If there is at least one path (polyline) in the loaded project. You can select it for
creating railings. In that case, the selected point cloud and the current path
(polyline), the one listed in the selection box, with its projection (if existing) in
the XY plane are displayed in the 3D View.

To Select a Path:

1. In the Railing Creator dialog, click the pull down arrow.


2. Select a path (polyline) from the drop down list.
3. Or a draw a path (on page 1488) by using the Polyline Drawing tool.

 If the Horizontal Path option has been checked, the railings will be
computed from the projection of the path on the XY plane.
 If the 3D Path option has been checked, the railings will be computed
perpendicularly from the path in 3D (not projected in the XY plane).
 The Vertical Offset  is the distance which separates the selected (or
drawn) path (polyline in green ) and the polyline along which the railings
will be generated (polyline in red ). This value is by default equal to zero.

4. Enter a value in the Vertical Offset field.

Note: The selected path (polyline) has to be regular (one chain with at least
three points).
1488 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a Path
If any path (polyline) exists in your project, the combo box is grayed out. You
have to create at least one in the database. In that case, only the selected
scene (point cloud or mesh) is shown in the 3D View. The scene is constrained
in the XY plane of the active coordinate frame and movements while picking
points are restricted to the navigation movements. You can rotate the complete
scene around the Z axis, zoom (in or out) along this same axis and pan in the
XY plane.

To Draw a Path:

1. Click the Draw and Create Path in Database icon. The Drawing toolbar
appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a 2D grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters toolbar
appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to a
pencil.
2. Pick at least two points (free or constrained).
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Or click Close Line. The start and end picked points are linked with a
segment in order to form a closed line.
5. Click Create. The drawn line is saved and created in the database as a
polyline.

Note: If the 2D Grid has been hidden in a previous case, it will also be hidden
when you activate the Polyline Drawing tool.

Select a Model
To Select a Model:

1. Click on the Model pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a model from the drop-down list.
3. Or if there is no model, edit the parameters (on page 1489).
Tools in the Production Module 1489

Edit the Parameters


To Edit the Parameters:

1. Click the Parameters button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


2. Perform the steps below:

a) Choose a configuration (on page 1490).


b) Edit the heights (see "Edit the Profiles" on page 1492).
c) Edit the heights (on page 1494).
d) Define the loop end (on page 1495).

3. Click Apply. The Edit Parameters dialog closes.


1490 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Choose a Configuration
To Choose a Configuration:

1. Click on the Configuration pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a configuration from the drop-down list.

 Top Rail Only.

 2 Rails (Top + Middle Rail).

 2 Rails and Toeboard.


Tools in the Production Module 1491

 3 Rails (Top + Middle + Lower).

 3 Rails and Toeboard.


1492 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit the Profiles


To Edit the Profiles:

1. Click on the Posts  pull-down arrow.


2. Choose between Rect. and Circ.

 If Circ. has been chosen, define the diameter of the circle.


 If Rect. has been chosen, define the length of the sides.

3. Click on the Top Rail  pull-down arrow.


4. Choose between Rect. and Circ.

 If Circ. has been chosen, define the diameter of the circle.


 If Rect. has been chosen, define the length of the sides.

5. Click on the Sub-Rail(s) pull-down arrow.


6. Choose between Rect. and Circ.

 If Circ. has been chosen, define the diameter of the circle.


 If Rect. has been chosen, define the length of the sides, and choose
where to place them:

 Rec. Axial .
 Rec. Left .
 Rec. Right .
Tools in the Production Module 1493

7. Click on the Toeboard  pull-down arrow.


8. Choose among Rec. Axial, Rec. Left and Rec. Right.
9. Define the length of the sides

Note: The procedure explained in this section is about the 3 Rails and
Toeboard configuration. Please, enter the parameters corresponding to the
chosen configuration.
1494 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit the Heights


To Edit the Profiles:

1. Input a distance value in the Total Height  field.


2. Input a distance value in the Spacing 1  field.
3. Input a distance value in the Spacing 2  field.
4. Input a distance value in the Toeboard Clearance  field.

Note: The procedure explained in this section is about the 3 Rails and
Toeboard configuration. Please, enter the parameters corresponding to the
chosen configuration.
Tools in the Production Module 1495

Define the Loop End


To Edit the Profiles:

1. Input a distance value in the Loop End (Dimension)  field.

2. Click on the End Type pull-down arrow.


3. Choose a type from the drop-down list.

 Straight.

 Vertical.
1496 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Straight Loop (to Sub-Rail 1).

 Straight Loop (to Sub-Rail 2).


Tools in the Production Module 1497

Define the Posts Along the Path


To Define the Posts Along the Path:

1. Define the Start and End positions (on page 1497).


2. Or pick the Start and End positions (on page 1497).
3. Input a distance value in the Interval  field.
4. Input a distance value in the Corner Post Offset  field.

The Corner Post Offset is the distance from either side of a corner.

5. If required, add extra posts (on page 1498).


6. Or remove undesirable posts (on page 1498).

Define the Start and End Positions


To Define the Start and End Positions:

1. Enter a distance value in the Start field, and press Enter.


2. Enter a distance value in the End field, and press Enter.
3. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
4. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).

Pick the Start and End Positions


To Pick the Start and End Positions:

1. Click the Pick Start Position On Path icon. The mouse cursor shape
changes to a pointer.
2. Pick a point along the path (polyline). The picked point becomes the Start
point.
3. Repeat the two above steps form the End position.
4. Click the Reload Initial Start Position On Path icon (if required).
5. Click the Reload Initial End Position On Path icon (if required).
1498 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Add Extra Posts


To Add Extra Posts:

1. Click the Pick to Add Post(s) icon.


2. In the 3D View, pick a position along the path. A new post is added along
the path, at the picked position.

Remove Undesirable Posts


To Remove Undesirable Posts:

3. Click the Delete icon.


4. In the 3D View, pick a post. The picked post is removed from the path.

Create a New Railing Model


To Create a New Railing Model:

1. Click the Parameters button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


2. Define the parameters of the railing to create.
3. Click the Save As button. The Save Model Parameters dialog opens.
4. Enter a name in the New Mode Name field.
5. Click the Create button. The Model Parameters dialog closes.

Create the Railings


To Create the Railings:

1. Click the Create button.


2. Click Close. The Railing Creator dialog closes.

 A group , named Railing Group - Model's name, is created and rooted


under the Project Tree.
 Under the group, the items below are also created:

 A cloud,
 A set of Cylinders, each is named Post.
Tools in the Production Module 1499

Create Stairs
The Stairs is a tool that lets the user to build stairs based on a predefined
model or on a model defined by the user.

Open the Tool


To Open the Stairs Tool:

1. Select a set of points from the Project Tree.


2. From the Plant menu, select Stairs .

Or

3. In the Access group, on the Model tab, click the Stairs icon.

 The Stairs dialog opens.

Note: From here, when you press the Esc. key, this will close the Stairs tool.
1500 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Stair Model


To Select a Stair Model:

 f there are several models in your project, you can choose one by doing
the following

1. Click the Stair Model pull-down arrow.


2. And choose model from the drop-down list.

There is a persistency in the chosen model, i.e., it will be kept until you change
it to a new one.

 If there is only the STD MODEL, you can:

 Use the default STD Model. It comes with a set of predefined parameters;
you can view them by clicking the Edit button.
 Or customize a model by modifying each of the parameters, the Apply
button, initially grayed-out, becomes enabled, as well as the Save As
button. The name of the chosen model changes to "Custom".
Tools in the Production Module 1501

Edit the Stair Parameters


The illustrations below show in detail the parameters of a stair.

1 - Rise (Depth) 3 - Thickness


2 - Rise (Height) 4 - Nosing
1502 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

5 - Stringer, Width 7 - Axis Offset (+/-)


6 - Stinger, Depth 8 - Overall Width

To Edit Stair Parameters:

1. Click the Edit button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


2. Define the Run (Width) (1) of the stairs.
3. Define the Run (Height) (2) of the stairs.
4. Define the Thickness (3) of the stair tread.
5. Define the Nosing (4) of the stair tread.
6. Define the Width (5) of the stringer.
7. Define the Depth (6) of the stringer.
8. Define the Axis Offset (+/-) (7) along the Z-Axis of the stringer.
9. If required, check the Force Overall Width.
10. And input a value in the Overall Width field.
11. Click the Apply button. The Edit Parameters dialog closes.

Note: You are not allowed to input either a negative or null value in each of the
parameter fields, except for the Axis Offset.

Tip: You can use the Tab key to navigate through the parameter fields.
Tools in the Production Module 1503

Create a New Stair Model


To Create a New Stair Model:

1. Click the Edit button. The Edit Parameters dialog opens.


2. Define the parameters of the stairs to create.
3. Click the Save As button. The Save As dialog opens.
4. Enter a name in the New Mode Name field.
5. Click the Create button. The Edit Parameters dialog closes.

Note: The model created is not stored in the current project but in the Windows
registry, so that when performing an update of RealWorks, the model will be
not lost.

Define the Landings


To Define the Landings:

1. Bring the view to Front .


2. Click the Pick Bottom Landing Position icon.
3. In the 3D View, pick a point on the displayed cloud.

The position picked by the user is labelled Bottom, and its height along the Z
axis (of the current frame) is displayed in the Bottom field.

4. Click the Pick Top Landing Position icon.


5. In the 3D View, pick a point on the displayed cloud.

The position picked by the user is labelled Top, and its height along the Z axis
(of the current frame) is displayed in the Top field.

Note: The Top value needs to be higher than the Bottom value. If you pick a
point whose height is below the height of the bottom point, this point won't be
considered.

Tip: The Bottom and Top fields are editable after picking the bottom and top
landing positions.
1504 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Draw a 2D Section
To Draw a 2D Section:

1. Click the Draw Frame to Positions New Stairs icon. The Drawing
toolbar appears. The scene is locked in a 2D plane in the Top view with a
2D grid superimposed (if not hidden previously). The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in the 2D constraint mode. The mouse cursor changes to
a pencil.
2. Pick two (or three) points (free or constrained) to define a rectangular
frame.
3. If required, resize the rectangular frame in length and in width by dragging
and dropping a middle node.
4. Click Validate. The Drawing toolbar closes.

A stair built based on the parameters of the selected mode appears. A


manipulator located at the bottom of the stair let you move it in two directions.

Note: When you press the Esc. key after defining a 2D section, this will delete
the 2D section.

Note: You are able to edit the defined frame in length and width. When you try
to edit a node in order to change the shape of the frame, it won't change.

Create Stairs
To Create the Stairs:

1. Click the Create button.


2. Click Close. The Stairs dialog closes.

 A group , named Stairs - Model's name, is created and rooted under


the Project Tree.
 Under the group, the items below are also created:

 A cloud, which is not displayed in the 3D View window.


 A set of Boxes, each is named Stair Tread, and all are displayed in
the 3D View window.
 Two Boxes, each is named Stringer, and both are displayed in the 3D
View window.
Tools in the Production Module 1505

Note: You can create as many stairs as needed without having to leave the
tool.

Note: The cloud displayed in the 3D View after clicking Create is not the cloud
created within the stairs but the one selected as input of the tool. By this way,
you can continue on fitting other stairs.
1506 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tools in the Storage Tank Module


Traditional methods for calibrating storage tanks employ complex, labor-
intensive techniques to achieve the required standardized results. The Storage
Tank module in RealWorks, is a set of tools, when used in combination with a
Trimble 3D Scanning system, enables to achieve the same standardized
results with optimal accuracy, and less efforts.

The Storage Tank module is present in all RealWorks products except in the
Viewer, Base and Plant, as illustrated below. Note that the Horizontal Tank
Calibration, Tank Setup, Vertical Tank Inspection, Tank Secondary
Containment and Table Location tools are available only in the Advanced Tank
version.

The set of tools can be reached from the Storage Tank menu in the Menu and
Toolbars, and are split into three groups (Tank Object, Tank Inspection and
Tank Calibration), on the Storage Tank tab, in the Ribbon.

Calibrate a Vertical Tank


The Vertical Tank Calibration tool is a feature which enables to accurately
determine the capacity (or partial capacities) of a vertical storage tank and
expresses this capacity as a volume at given linear increments or height of
liquid.
Tools in the Production Module 1507

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Vertical Tank Calibration .

1 - Point cloud 3 - Top plane


2 - Bottom plane 4 - Bounding box
5 - Cross section center line

 The Vertical Tank Calibration dialog opens as the third tab of the
WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.
 If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points
(or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mesh, only a
point cloud is displayed.
 By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Vertical Tank Calibration feature can be reached from
the Tank Calibration group.
1508 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Dipping Plate


A Dipping Plate, also known by the name of Datum Plate is a level plate which
defines the separation between the Sump part and the Body part in a vertical
tank. Its Height can be picked in the 3D View or a value that the user has to
enter, if known by the user. A Dipping Plate can also be defined by fitting a set
of points.

1 - Dipping plate 3 - Thickness of the tank


2 - Sump 4 - Body

Caution: The Dipping Plate must be below the maximum level height of the
Body. If you enter a value (or pick a height) that does not meet this
requirement, an error dialog opens.

Input the Height Value of a Dipping Plate


To Input the Height Value of a Dipping Plate:

1. Enter a height value in the Dipping Plate Height field.


2. Press Enter.
Tools in the Production Module 1509

Pick the Height of a Dipping Plate


To Pick the Height of a Dipping Plate:

1. In the Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, click the Segmentation icon.


The Segmentation toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.

4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Close the Segmentation toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial
planes and the cross section center line appear.
9. Click the Pick Dipping Plate icon. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear again.
1510 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

10. In the 3D View, pick a point on the Dipping Plate. The two initial planes
and the cross section center line reappear again and the Bottom Plane is
then set to that point.

11. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration).
Tools in the Production Module 1511

Determine the Height of a Dipping Plate by Fitting


To Determine the Height of a Dipping Plate by Fitting:

1. In the Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, click the Fit Dipping Plate icon.
The Fitting toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross section
center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.

4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Click the Horizontal Plane icon. The fenced points are fitted with a blue
horizontal plane.
1512 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

9. Close the Fitting toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes
and the cross section center line appear again. The Bottom Plane is then
set to the position of the fitted plane.
10. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration tool).

Define the Parameters of the Body


A Body is the part of a vertical tank above its Dipping Plate, from which
Sections will be computed. Its Maximum Height from the Dipping Plate can be
either picked in the 3D View or entered by the user if known.

Input a Value
To Input a Value:

 Enter a height value in the Maximum Level Height field.

Pick a Height
To Pick a Height:

1. Click on the Pick Maximum Level icon.


2. If required, bring the view to Front .
3. Pick a point on the set of points in the 3D View.

Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections


An Interval is the distance between two consecutive Sections. It needs to be at
least of 5 mm.

To Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections:

1. Enter a distance value in the Interval field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to set a value.

Note: If the input value is lower than 5 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1513

Define the Parameters of the Sump


A Sump is the part of a tank below its Dipping Plate, from which a Volume will
be computed. The computation is based on a 2D grid projection. The projection
plane by default is a plane passing through the Dipping Plate. The Resolution
is square, the same in both of the default projection plane directions (Length
and Width). It needs to be at least of 10 mm.

To Define the Parameters of Parameters of the Sump:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Note: If the input value is lower than 10 millimeters, an error dialog opens.

Define the Thickness for Outside Scans


You are able to compute the inner Volume and Sections of a tank even if the
tank has been scanned, not from the inside, but from the outside. You have to
enter a value that corresponds to the thickness of its wall.

To Define the Thickness for Outside Scans:

1. Enter a value in the Thickness field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.
1514 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Preview the Results


You can now generate and visualize the Sections and the Volume of the Sump
obtained from the set of points (before creating them in the database).

To Preview Results:

1. Click the Preview button.

 In the Vertical Tank Calibration dialog, the Display Sump and Display
Sections options become enabled. By default, the two Geometry options
are checked.
 In the 3D View, the Sump's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical
color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted
(with points) Polylines. The information box, in the upper right corner,
displays in text the values of the Sump Volume, Body Volume and Full
Volume.

2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D
View.
3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume
and Sections in the 3D View.
4. Visually check the Sump Volume data to ensure that the entire area has
been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in
the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate
this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.
Tools in the Production Module 1515
1 - A set of point cloud slides 3 - A set of Sections
2 - The Volume of the Sump

Create the Results


Once you are satisfied with the results, you can save them in the database.

To Create the Results:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the
Models Tree. All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A
Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value"
where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping
Plate "Height value".

If the Dipping Plate has been defined by fitting a set of points with a plane, a
Fitted Plane object named "Dipping Plate" is created and put under the Tank-
Interval folder.

Tip: You can leave the Vertical Tank Calibration tool by pressing Esc or by
selecting Close from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can create as many sets of Sections and Volume as required
without having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving
the results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel
the process.
1516 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export the Results


The results can also be exported into a TXT format file. There are two columns
of information inside the file. The first column contains all Section Heights
(above the Dipping Plate). The second column lists the Area information at
each Section level. The first line displays the Sump value.

To Export the Results:

1. Click Export. The Save As dialog opens.


2. Enter a name in the File Name field.
3. Find a location in your disk in the Look In field.
4. Click Save. The Save As dialog closes.

Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the
installation of RealWorks, two files are installed in X:\Program
Files\Trimble\RealWorks 11.0\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample
template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above
mentioned TXT file) generated by the Vertical Tank Calibration tool. Formulas
allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity tables. The
Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and processing the
cross section data.

Warning: You must export the results before closing the Vertical Tank
Calibration tool, otherwise they will be lost.
Tools in the Production Module 1517

Calibrate a Horizontal Tank


The Horizontal Tank Calibration tool is a feature which enables to accurately
determine the capacity (or partial capacities) of a horizontal storage tank and
expresses this capacity as a volume at given linear increments or height of
liquid.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or a fitted mesh) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Horizontal Tank Calibration .

 The Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog opens as the third tab of the
WorkSpace window. It is composed of several parts.
 If the input is a point cloud, you can clean it by removing parasite points
(or reduce its size by simplifying it). If the input is a fitted mesh, only a
point cloud is displayed.
 By default, two planes and a cross-section center line are displayed.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Horizontal Tank Calibration feature can be reached
from the Tank Calibration group.
1518 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Dipping Plate


A Dipping Plate, also known by the name of Datum Plate is a level plate which
defines the separation between the Sump part and the Body part in a
horizontal tank. Its Height can be picked in the 3D View or a value that the user
has to enter, if known by the user.

Input the Height Value of a Dipping Plate


To Input the Height Value of a Dipping Plate:

1. Enter a height value in the Dipping Plate Height field.


2. Press Enter.

Pick the Height of a Dipping Plate


To Pick the Height of a Dipping Plate:

1. In the Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog, click the Segmentation icon.


The Segmentation toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.
4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Close the Segmentation toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial
planes and the cross section center line appear.
9. Click the Pick Dipping Plate icon. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear again.
10. In the 3D View, pick a point on the Dipping Plate. The two initial planes
and the cross section center line reappear again and the Bottom Plane is
then set to that point.
11. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration tool).
Tools in the Production Module 1519

Determine the Height of a Dipping Plate by Fitting


To Determine the Height of a Dipping Plate by Fitting:

1. In the Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog, click the Fit Dipping Plate
icon. The Fitting toolbar opens. The two initial planes and the cross
section center line disappear.
2. Switch to the Station-Based mode. By this way, the tank is then
visualized from its interior. This will help you to locate easily the Dipping
Plate. Please note this is only available in case the scan data has been
acquired from the interior of the tank.
3. Navigate within the set of points to visually locate where the Dipping Plate
is.
4. Isolate the Dipping Plate from the whole set of points by fencing.
5. If required, switch back to the Examiner mode.
6. Bring the view to Front, by selecting from the 3D View / Standard
Views menu.
7. If required, remove unwanted points from the Dipping Plate, by fencing.
8. Click the Horizontal Plane icon. The fenced points are fitted with a blue
vertical plane.
9. Close the Fitting toolbar by clicking Close Tool . The two initial planes
and the cross section center line appear again. The Bottom Plane is then
set to the position of the fitted plane.
10. If required, reload the initial points that make up the tank by clicking the
Reload Points icon (within the Vertical Tank Calibration tool).

Define the Body Parameters


A Body is the part of a horizontal tank above its Dipping Plate, from which
some Sections will be computed. Its Maximum Height from the Dipping Plate
can be either picked in the 3D View or entered by the user if known.

Input a Value
To Input a Value:

 Enter a height value in the Maximum Level Height field.


1520 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick a Height
To Pick a Height:

1. Click on the Pick Maximum Level icon.


2. If required, bring the view to Front .
3. Pick a point on the set of points in the 3D View.

Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections


An Interval is the distance between two consecutive Sections. It needs to be at
least of 5 mm.

To Define the Interval Between Two Consecutive Sections:

1. Enter a distance value in the Interval field.


2. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to set a value.

Note: If the input value is lower than 5 millimeters, an error dialog opens.

Define the Parameters of the Sump


A Sump is the part of a tank below its Dipping Plate, from which a Volume will
be computed. The computation is based on a 2D grid projection. The projection
plane by default is a plane passing through the Dipping Plate. The Resolution
is square, the same in both of the default projection plane directions (Length
and Width). It needs to be at least of 10 mm.

To Define the Parameters of Parameters of the Sump:

1. Enter a value in the Resolution field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Note: If the input value is lower than 10 millimeters, an error dialog opens.
Tools in the Production Module 1521

Define the Thickness for Outside Scans


You are able to compute the inner Volume and Sections of a tank even if the
tank has been scanned, not from the inside, but from the outside. You have to
enter a value that corresponds to the thickness of its wall.

To Define the Thickness for Outside Scans:

1. Enter a value in the Thickness field.


2. Or use the Up and Down buttons to select a value.

Preview the Results


You can now generate and visualize the Sections and the Volume of the Sump
obtained from the set of points (before creating them in the database).

To Preview Results:

1. Click the Preview button.

 In the Horizontal Tank Calibration dialog, the Display Sump and Display
Sections options become enabled. By default, the two Geometry options
are checked.
 In the 3D View, the Sump's Volume is represented by a graph of vertical
color lines and the Sections are represented by a set of closed and fitted
(with points) polylines. The information box, in the upper right corner,
displays in text the values of the Sump Volume, Body Volume and Full
Volume.

2. If required, check the Cloud options to display the point cloud in the 3D
View.
3. If required, uncheck the Geometry options to hide the computed Volume
and Sections in the 3D View.
4. Visually check the Sump Volume data to ensure that the entire area has
been taken into account for the volume calculation. If you detect "holes" in
the Sump Volume display, choose a different resolution setting. Reiterate
this step until you achieve a satisfactory result.
1522 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Results


Once you are satisfied with the results, you can save them in the database.

To Create the Results:

1. Click Create.
2. Click Close.

A group named Tank-Interval "Interval value" is created and rooted under the
Models Tree. All computed Sections and Volume are put under that group. A
Section is a Fitted Polyline and is named Section-TankX-Alt "Altitude Value"
where X is its order in three digits, or more. A Volume is named: Sump-Dipping
Plate "Height value".

If the Dipping Plate has been defined by fitting a set of points with a plane, a
Fitted Plane object named "Dipping Plate" is created and put under the Tank-
Interval folder.

Tip: You can leave the Horizontal Tank Calibration tool by pressing Esc or by
selecting Close from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can create as many sets of sections and volume as required without
having to leave the tool. If you decide to leave this tool without saving the
results, a message appears and prompts you to confirm, undo or cancel the
process.
Tools in the Production Module 1523

Export the Results


The results can also be exported into a TXT format file. There are two columns
of information inside the file. The first column contains all Section Heights
(above the Dipping Plate). The second column lists the Area information at
each Section level. The first line displays the Sump value.

To Export the Results:

1. Click Export. The Save As dialog opens.


2. Enter a name in the File Name field.
3. Find a location in your disk in the Look In field.
4. Click Save. The Save As dialog closes.

Note: If the Storage Tank Application option has been chosen during the
installation of RealWorks, two files are installed in X:\Program
Files\Trimble\RealWorks 11.0\Tables\Tank. The Excel sheet is a sample
template that allows the importing of cross section data (from the above
mentioned TXT file) generated by the Horizontal Tank Calibration tool.
Formulas allow the user to apply compensations and to then create capacity
tables. The Word format file contains detailed instructions for importing and
processing the cross section data.

Warning: You must export the results before closing the Horizontal Tank
Calibration tool, otherwise they will be lost.
1524 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Calibration of a Tank


The Tank Calibration Check feature lets you first check, and then if required, to
modify the Sections previously extracted from either the Vertical Tank
Calibration tool or the Horizontal Tank Calibration tool.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

 In the Horizontal (or Vertical) Tank Calibration dialog, click the Check
button. The Tank Calibration Check dialog opens in place of the Horizontal
(or Vertical) Tank Calibration dialog. The first Section with fitted points is
displayed in the 3D View with a 2D Grid superimposed (if not previously
hidden).

Note: You can hide the 2D Grid or change its size by selecting its related
command from the pop-up menu or from 3D View menu bar.

Note: You need to first generate a preview of Sections and Volume from the
set of points; otherwise the Check button remains dimmed.

Filter all Sections


This step is optional, though recommended if you expect, or visually detect,
significant differences from one section to the next. It allows you to filter by
comparing sections from one to the next. The filtering setting called Tolerance
corresponds to a degree of change from one section to the next at a
percentage rate ranging from 0% to 10%. The sections for which the difference
(in percent) is higher than the defined rate are considered as potentially
defective, and can then be edited.

To Filter all Sections:

1. Check the Filter Sections options. The Tolerance slider and its field
become enabled.
2. Move the Filter Sections slider from Left to Right to set a value.
3. Or enter a rate in the field.

Note: The Step 1 is dimmed in case of a horizontal tank.


Tools in the Production Module 1525

Select a Section to Edit


If the Step 1 has been skipped, all sections extracted from the Horizontal Tank
Calibration tool (or Vertical Tank Calibration tool) are listed in Step 2. If the
Step 1 has been executed, only the extracted sections that are considered as
out of tolerance are listed here. By default, the first section from the list is the
selected one and is displayed with its associated points in the 3D View.

1 - A list of Sections 2 - The order of the Sections in that list

If the selected (active) section is other than the first section, you can use the
Up and Down keys of your keyboard (or Display Previous Contour and
Display Next Contour buttons in the dialog) to display the next and the
previous section in the 3D View. The Display First Contour or Display Last
Contour buttons will set the first section or last section as active (selected).
You can also key in a number in Step 2 to select it.

Tip: You can hide the slice of points that is associated with the selected
section by un-checking the Display Cloud option.
1526 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit a Section
This step is dedicated to the editing of defective sections. Only one section can
be edited at a time; the selected one. As a section is a fitted polyline which is
composed of a set of segments, you can use the Polyline Drawing tool to
modify it manually by moving vertices. You can also delete a part and connect
extremities with a segment.

1 - Polyline Drawing 3 - Delete and Connect Extremities


2 - Standard Selection Mode 4 - Reload Initial Section

Tip: All features can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Modify Manually a Section


To Modify Manually a Section:

1. Click the Polyline Drawing icon. The Drawing and Picking Parameters
(in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear.
2. Place the cursor over the Section. A solid square appears if you are on
a node, if you are on a middle node and if you are on a middle node
to insert.
3. Drag the node to a position. The selected node turns to yellow.
4. Drop the node to that position.
5. Click Validate.

Note: If required, reload the initial Section by clicking .

Tip: The Polyline Drawing icon can also be selected from the pop-up
menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1527

Select Items from a Section


A section is a fitted polyline which is composed of segments.

To Select Items from a Section:

1. Click the Standard Selection Mode icon.


2. Draw a polygonal fence.
3. Double-click to end and validate the polygonal fence.

Note: To undo the previously drawn fence and start a new one, select the
Standard Selection Mode icon again.

Tip: The Standard Selection Mode icon can also be selected from the pop-
up menu.
1528 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete and Connect Extremities


To Delete and Connect Extremities:

1. Perform a selection as described previously.


2. Click the Delete and Connect Extremities icon. Segments inside the
previous selection are deleted and the extremities are connected together
with a Segment.
3. If required, reload the initial Section by clicking .

Tip: The Reload Initial Section and Delete and Connection Extremities
icons can be selected from the pop-up menu.

Apply the Modifications


If some modifications have been applied to the selected section, click Apply.
The Tank Calibration Check dialog will save the changes and then close.
Otherwise, click Close. This will close the Tank Calibration Check dialog too.
Tools in the Production Module 1529

Tank Setup
The purpose of this tool is to allow the user to create an object of Tank type in
the database. This creation must first go through an initial phase that
corresponds to the classification (of the tank). A classification is a feature that
enables to automatically (or manually) identify each part of a tank, whatever
the shape it has. A tank is composed of the following parts:

 Bottom.
 Shell.
 Roof.
 Deadwood (all the data inside the tank like pipes, ladders, etc.).
 Remaining (point clouds not classified in the previous categories).
1530 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


The input of the Tank Creation can be either a point cloud or an object of Tank
type (that has been created with that tool).

To Open the Tool:

1. Select a point cloud (or a Tank object ) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Tank Setup . The Tank Creation
dialog opens.

 The Use Constrained View, when selected, applies a constraint to the


selected point cloud. This constraint locks the rotation around the Z-Axis
and around the center of the box that bounds the selected point cloud. In
addition, only the closest half part of the selected point cloud is visible.
 If a point cloud has been selected as input, the number of points in the
Remaining part is equal to the number of points of the point cloud, and the
others are equal to zero.

The Segmentation tool is a sub-tool. It enables to prepare the selected point


cloud, by reducing its size and/or removing undesirable points.
The Reload Points enables to reload the initial state of the selected point
cloud.

 If a Tank object has been selected as input, the number of points of each
part (of the tank) is displayed.
Tools in the Production Module 1531

The Segmentation tool removes the existing classification.


The Reload Points reloads the classification as it was when entering the tool.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Tank Setup feature can be reached from the Tank
Object group.

Define the Parameters


In this step, the user has to choose the parameters to use in relation to the
type of tank he has as input

To Define the Parameters:

1. Drop-down the first list and choose among Vertical Cylinder and Horizontal
Cylinder.
2. Drop-down the second list and choose among Inner Scans and Outer
Scans.

 If Vertical Cylinder and Inside Scans have been chosen, the Bottom
parameter is enabled, and you can drop-down the list to choose among
Planar Bottom (Flat/Sloped), Cone Up Bottom and Cone Down Bottom.
 If Vertical Cylinder and Outside Scans have been chosen, the Bottom
parameter is grayed-out.
 If Horizontal Cylinder has been chosen, the Bottom parameter is grayed-
out.
1532 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Classify Automatically a Tank


To Classify Automatically a Tank:

 Click the Classify button. An automatic algorithm is launched to detect


each part of the tank and fill the corresponding point clouds.

 The Cloud Rendering option switches to the Cloud Color .


 Each part of the tank is displayed with a color, Red for Remaining, Blue for
Shell, etc.

 The number of points of each part is displayed in Step 3, as illustrated


below.
Tools in the Production Module 1533

Classify Manually a Tank


Instead of using the automatic classification method, you can go straight away
to the manual method. The input cloud is in its entirety the Remaining part of
the tank.

Classify Manually a Tank:

1. Click the Edit button. The Tank Classification toolbar opens.


2. Choose among Polygonal Selection, Rectangular Selection, and Circular
Selection.
3. Fence a region on the set of points.
4. Click on the pull-down arrow and choose among:

 Remaining, Roof, Shell, Deadwood and Bottom, if Vertical Cylinder and


Inside Scans have been chosen in Step 1.

 Remaining, Roof and Shell, if Vertical Cylinder and Outside Scans have
been chosen in Step 1.
 Remaining, Shell and Deadwood, if Horizontal Cylinder and Inside Scans
have been chosen in Step 1.
 Remaining and Shell, if Horizontal Cylinder and Outside Scans have been
chosen in Step 1.

5. Click the Assign to Desired Tank Part icon.

 The set of points inside the defined fence is colored with the color
corresponding to the part of the tank you have chosen.
 The number of points inside the defined fence appears, in Step 3 of the
Tank Creation dialog, below the chosen part.
 The number of points in the Remaining part is reduced by the amount of
points inside the defined fence.
1534 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

6. If necessary, fence another region on the set of points and add it to the
previous.

Note: To end a fence, you can double-click (or press on the Space Bar).

Tip: You can select Assign to Desired Tank Part from the pop-up menu or use
the P shortcut key.

Check and Refine the Classification


This step lets you visually check the quality of the classification by focusing on
a particular part of the tank (by hiding the others), and if required, refine the
part by subtracting and/or adding points into.
Tools in the Production Module 1535

Create a Tank Object


Once each part of the tank has been clearly identified and classified, you can
create the tank object in the database by clicking Create. Below is a tank
object with all its parts in the Project Tree. Each of the created parts cannot be
deleted or displaced from its location in the tank object. You can only copy
each of them.

All the parameters that compose the tank object can be viewed when
displaying its properties.

Note: You cannot create a tank object without Shell. The Create button
remains grayed-out until a Shell has been defined.

Note: The Tank Creation dialog remains open after a tank object is created.
You need to close it manually to leave the Tank Creation tool.

Perform a Tank-Specific Measurement


The Measure Tank feature lets the user to measure a distance on a tank shell
surface perpendicular to its main direction.
1536 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a Tank Object from the Project Tree.


2. From the Storage Tank menu, select Measure Tank . The Tank
Measurement toolbar opens.

The selected tank object is composed of several items: Remaining, Roof,


Shell, etc. Only the Shell part is kept and displayed in the 3D View. The rest of
them is hidden.
Tools in the Production Module 1537

Measure a Distance on the Shell


To Measure a Distance on the Shell:

1. If required, click the Tank Shell Measurement icon.


2. In the 3D View, pick two points on the tank shell.

A measurement is performed using the shortest distance between the two


picked points. The first point enables to define a plane, and the second point is
projected on it.
The measured value is displayed in the information box, in the 3D View.
1538 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3. If required, cancel the current measurement and start a new one by doing
one of the following:

 Press Esc.
 Select Tank Shell Measurement from the pop-up menu.
 Pick two new points.
Tools in the Production Module 1539

Reverse a Distance Measurement


To Reverse a Distance Measurement:

1. First perform a distance measurement on a shell.


2. Then, click the Reverse Tank Shell Measurement icon.

A complementary measurement is performed.


The value in the information box in the 3D View is updated.
1540 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create the Measured Value


You cannot create anything within the selected Tank Object. The Create icon is
grayed out and remained in this state until you deselect the Tank Object.

For each measurement, a Polyline Measurement named ObjectX is created


and rooted under the Models Tree. You can make as many measurement as
required without having to close the tool. You can export the created
measurements to the CVS format file.

Tip: Instead of clicking Create, you can press Enter, or select Create from the
pop-up menu.
Tools in the Production Module 1541

Inspect a Vertical Tank


The Vertical Tank Inspection tool enables to analyze the verticality and
roundness of a tank.

The verticality analysis tells whether the tank is vertical or not up to a


tolerance. The tank may be vertical and not perfectly round. The algorithm
compares the shell point cloud to a reference shape extruded vertically. To
define the reference shape, pick a position at the lower part of the tank shell
(refer to Define a Reference for the Verticality on page 1543). The software
will then derive a reference shape fitted on the points at this elevation.

The roundness analysis tells whether the tank is circular up to a tolerance. The
tank may be round and not perfectly cylindrical, i.e., it may have a different
diameter at different heights. For each elevation, the roundness analysis
compares the shell point cloud to a circular shape as illustrated below.

Caution: Due to some changes in the verticality and roundness inspection


methods in version 10.4, the format of the tank object created in the database
has changed. After saving the project in version 10.4, you will be not able to
reopen your project in previous versions of RealWorks.
1542 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a Tank object from the Project Tree.


2. In the Storage Tank menu, select Vertical Tank Inspection . The Vertical
Tank Inspection dialog opens.

 The Use Constraint View, when selected, applies a constraint to the


selected point cloud. This constraint locks the rotation around the Z-Axis
and around the center of the box that bounds the selected point cloud. In
addition, only the closest half part of the selected point cloud is visible.
 If the tank object has never been inspected before, only its Shell and
Bottom are kept and displayed in the 3D View. Its Remaining, Roof and
Deadwood parts are hidden. You can start defining a reference for the
verticality by picking a point (refer the Define a Reference for the
Vertically (see "Define a Reference for the Verticality" on page 1543)
topic).
 If the tank object has already been inspected, its Shell and Bottom and the
Grid are displayed. You can either redefine the verticality by picking a
point (refer to the Define a Reference for the Vertically (see "Define a
Reference for the Verticality" on page 1543) topic) or edit the existing
the Grid (refer to the Define (or Edit) a Grid (on page 1545) topic).

Caution: You need to have a vertical Tank object with Shell. Otherwise the
Vertical Tank Inspection tool cannot be launched.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Vertical Tank Inspection feature can be reached from
the Tank Inspection group.
Tools in the Production Module 1543

Define a Reference for the Verticality


The reference shape for verticality is obtained by picking a position (1) in the
lower part of the tank shell. A fitted shape on the shell points close to this
elevation will define the reference shape for measuring verticality. Make sure
you pick an elevation at which the shell shape has no issues. If needed, you
can modify which points should be in Shell and which points should be in
Remaining in the Tank Setup tool.

To Define a Reference for the Verticality:

1. Pick a point on the displayed cloud.


2. Or enter a value in the Elevation field.

 A horizontal plane displays in the 3D View at the defined elevation.


1544 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide
Tools in the Production Module 1545

Define (or Edit) a Grid


This step, when it is chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Grid Definition. It
enables to pick positions in order to define Courses and Stations, (refer to the
illustration below).

This step also enables to define a set of measurement rules. Both the grid and
the measurement rules will be used to compute the inspection between the
point cloud and the fitted cylinder.

1 - Horizontal weld seams 4 - Roof


2 - Station(s) 5 - Shell
3 - Course

To Define (or Edit) a Grid:

 Click the Define/Edit button. The Tank Grid Definition dialog opens, in
place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.

In the 3D View, the cylinder, fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection, is
hidden.
1546 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define Stations
In a tank, a Station is a vertical line which may correspond (or not) to a vertical
weld seam.

Define the Initial Station


To Define the Initial Station:

1. Click the Pick Initial Inspection Station icon. The cursor takes the following

shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a point, over a vertical weld seam (or not). The 3D
coordinates of the picked point are displayed in the Initial Station field.

Or

3. Enter the 3D coordinates of a point in the Initial Station field.


4. Press Enter to validate.

Note: You can cancel the initial Inspection Station by selecting Undo.
Tools in the Production Module 1547

Define the Rest of the Stations


To Define the Rest of the Stations:

1. Enter a distance value in the Step Distance field.


2. Press Enter to validate.

A set of vertical (and blue) lines appears all around the tank. The longer one is
the initial line (initial Inspection Station).
The number of lines, which is always a multiple of 2, is obtained by subdividing
the circumference of the tank by the Step Distance value.
The value, you entered in the Step Distance field, is automatically adjusted to a
value to fit the subdivision and the multiple-of-two constraint.

Or

3. Enter a number in the Number of Stations field.


4. Press Enter to validate.

If the input number is not a multiple of 2; it will be changed by a value, greater


and multiple of 2.
The Step Distance value will change to take into account this new number.

Note: You can cancel the whole Stations except the initial one by selecting
Undo.

Caution: The minimum of Stations, you entered, should be at least 4. If you


enter a number lower than 4, an error message appears.
1548 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: The numbering will start from the initial station, at 0 or at 1, depending
on the convention chosen in step 2. The order for the rest of the stations will be
given by the chosen direction. See the Set the Orientation and Numbering
Conventions (on page 1563) topic.

Note: A warning message appears and prompts you to continue or abort when
the number of stations exceeds 250.

Define Courses
In a tank, a Course is a circumferential ring bounded by two consecutive
horizontal weld seams.
Tools in the Production Module 1549

Pick Welds
To Pick Welds:

1. Click the Pick Welds button. The cursor takes the following shape .
The Pick Welds button takes the name of Done.
2. In the 3D View, pick a point on the top horizontal weld seam of a Course.

A horizontal line in orange which symbolizes a horizontal weld seam is


displayed as illustrated below.
Its position along the tank, which is displayed in the information box in the 3D
View, defines its order in regards to the others.
1550 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

3. In the 3D View, pick on the bottom horizontal weld seam of the Course to
define.

4. Click the Done button.

Note: You can cancel the addition of lines by selecting Undo.

Tip: You can leave the picking mode by pressing Esc.

Note: You can add a series of lines without having to leave the tool.
Tools in the Production Module 1551

Remove Welds
To Remove Welds:

1. Click the Remove Weld button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a horizontal weld seam.

The picked weld is removed.

Note: You can cancel the removal of lines by selecting Undo.

Tip: You can leave the picking mode by pressing Esc.

Note: You can only remove one weld at a time.


1552 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Edit a Grid
This step enables to edit the grid previously defined, by moving either the
Station lines or the Course lines (welds).
Tools in the Production Module 1553

Shift a Station
To Shift a Station:

1. Click the Shift Stations button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a Station. Its color turns to pink.

3. Pick a new position in a space delimited by the next Station and the
previous Station. The selected Station is shifted horizontally to the picked
position.

4. Click the Done button.

Note: You can cancel the shift of the Station by selecting Undo.
1554 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tip: You can leave the picking mode by pressing Esc.

Caution: You are not allowed to shift a Station to a position which may modify
its order in regards with the rest of the Stations.
Tools in the Production Module 1555

Shift a Weld
To Shift a Weld:

1. Click the Shift Welds button. The cursor takes the following shape .
2. In the 3D View, pick a weld. Its color turns to pink.

3. Pick a new position. The selected weld is moved to that position.

4. Click Done.

Note: You can cancel the shift by selecting Undo.

Tip: You can leave the picking mode by pressing Esc.


1556 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Shell Measurement Rules


This step enables to define a series of horizontal measurement rules, spaced
at a regular distance inside a Course, and/or above the top weld, and/or below
the bottom weld.

1 - Weld 4 - Height above the bottom weld


2 - Course 5 - Height below the top weld
3 - Regular Interval

Note: If a measurement rule is out of a tank, it won't be taken into account in


the computation of the result.

Caution: Be aware that all of the parameters input in this step are persistent.
You have to reset them manually.

Note: You can display (or hide) the measurement rules by checking (or un-
checking) the Display Rules option.
Tools in the Production Module 1557

Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Regular Distance Between Two


Welds
To Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Regular Distance Between Two
Welds:

1. Enter an integer value in the Regular Intervals field.


2. Press Enter to validate.

A set of measurement rules spaced at regular distance

Note: The Regular Intervals value should be at least 2.


1558 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Above the Bottom
Weld of a Course
To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Above the Bottom
Weld of a Course:

1. In Step 4, enter a distance value in the Above field.


2. Press Enter. The input value is then displayed with the current unit of
measurement and with a semi-colon.

A measurement rule above the bottom weld of a Course

3. If required, enter a new value after the semi-colon.


4. Press Enter again to validate.

A series of measurement rules above the bottom weld of a course

Note: A value entered in the Above is always positive.


Tools in the Production Module 1559

Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rule(s) Below the Top
Weld of a Course
To Define a Unique (or a Series of) Measurement Rules Below the Top Weld
of a Course:

1. In Step 4, enter a distance value in the Below field.


2. Press Enter. The input value is then displayed with the current unit of
measurement and with a semi-colon.

A measurement rule below the top weld of a Course

3. If required, enter a new value after the semi-colon.


4. Press Enter again to validate.

A series of measurement rules below the top weld of a course


1560 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: A value entered in the Below is always positive. If you input a negative
value, the value will not be taken into account.
Tools in the Production Module 1561

Define the Bottom Measurement Rules


This step allows you to define a measurement rule that will be used to inspect
the bottom part (Bottom) of the tank. This rule enables to obtain measurements
along the centerlines of the tank, at positions regularly spaced at two distinct
intervals (Outer Zone and Inner Zone). These centerlines are equally spaced
around the circumference of the tank. This spacing corresponds to the distance
which separates two consecutive Stations.

The Outer Zone is the interval from the Shell to a given position, generally the
position where the bottom starts to be settled. The Inner Zone is the interval
from this position to the center of the tank.

Half of the tank viewed from the Top:

1 - Outer Zone 5 - Center of the tank


2 - Outer Zone step 6 - Station positions
3 - Inner Zone 7 - Centerline
4 - Inner Zone step - Measurement points

Tank viewed from the Front.

1 - Outer Zone 4 - Inner Zone step


2 - Outer Zone step 5 - Center of the tank
3 - Inner Zone 6 - Station positions
7 - Breaking point
1562 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

To Define the Bottom Measurement Rules:

1. Input a distance value in the Outer Zone Width field.


2. Input a distance value in the Outer Zone Step field.

You can put a distance equal to zero in the Outer Zone Width field.
In that case, whatever the value in the Outer Zone Step, it is not going to be
taken into account.

3. Input a distance value in the Inner Zone Step field.

Note: If a measurement rule is out of a tank, it won't be taken into account in


the computation of the result.

Caution: Be aware that all of the parameters input in this step are persistent.
You have to reset them manually.

Note: You can display (or hide) the measurement rules by checking (or un-
checking) the Display Rules option.

Caution: This step is grayed out if you enter the Vertical Tank Inspection tool
with no Bottom in your Tank object.

Apply the Grid and Compute the Inspection


The Apply button computes the distances between the fitted cylinder and the
point cloud at the positions defined by intersecting the whole vertical lines
(Station lines) with the measurement rule lines. If no point has been found in a
large area around an intersection position, an error message will be displayed
and the computation will not be done.

After applying the grid, Step 4 in the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog becomes
enabled.

Caution: The user needs to first define a measurement rule, i.e. with Stations
and Courses, to be able to inspect the verticality and roundness of the tank.
Otherwise, after clicking Apply, the Verticality and Roundness buttons remain
grayed out.
Tools in the Production Module 1563

Set the Orientation and Numbering Conventions


To Set the Orientation and Numbering Conventions:

1. Click on the first pull-down arrow and choose Clockwise and


Counterclockwise. This sets a direction around which the Stations to be
created will be incremented.
2. Click on the second pull-down arrow and choose an option:

 The Numbers from 0 option enables to start the numbering of the Stations
at 0.
 The Numbers from 1 option enables to start the numbering of the Stations
at 1.
 The Angles option enables to display the numbering of the Stations, as
angular values (always in degrees).

Note: The conventions related to the Orientation and the Numbering of the
Stations, defined here, will be visible when checking the vertically and the
roundness of the tank, in the report and in the created results.
1564 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Verticality of a Tank


This step, when chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Vertically Check. It
enables to inspect the verticality of a tank, by comparing its point cloud with the
fitted model, along the Station lines and at the positions defined by intersecting
these Station lines with the horizontal measurement rules defined Step 4 of the
Tank Grid Definition sub-tool. Note that a Station line has the naming illustrated
below.

1 - Vertical Reference_Station N 3 - Vertical Reference Station N + 2


2 - Vertical Reference_Station N + 1

To Check the Verticality of a Tank:

 Click on the Verticality button. The Tank Verticality Check dialog opens, in
place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.

Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the
selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1565

Filter Sections
The slicing of the selected point cloud along the Station lines, are called
Sections. All are selected after entering into the Tank Verticality Check sub-
tool. The number of selected Stations is displayed in Step 1. The
measurements, made at the points by intersecting the Station lines with the
measurement rule lines, are called Measurement Points.

By default, the first Section (in order) is the one selected (in Step 2) and
displayed in the 3D View. The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But
when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which
some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.

To Filter the Sections:

1. Check the Apply Filter option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.

 The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.
 Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in blue.
 In Step 1, the number of selected Selections is updated according to the
defined Tolerance.
 In Step 2, the number of Vertical Measurements is also updated.

1 - A measurement point out of the defined 2 - A measurement point in the defined tolerance
tolerance
1566 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.
You have to reset it manually.
Tools in the Production Module 1567

Analyze the Verticality from one Station Line


If the Step 1 has been skipped, all Sections are listed in Step 2. If the Step 1
has been executed, only the Sections that are not in the defined Tolerance are
listed here. By default, the first Section from the list is the selected one and is
displayed in the 3D View.

1 - Point cloud 3 - A section


2 - Model (fitted cylinder) 4 - A measurement point

To Analyze the Verticality from One Station Line:

1. Click Display Next Section (or Display Previous Section ) to display the
next (or previous) section in the 3D View.
2. Or click Display Last Section (or Display First Section ) to display the
last (or first) section in the 3D View.
3. Or key a number and press Enter.
4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.
5. If required, check the Display Reference option.
6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section.

Tip:
 You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section
(or Display Previous Section).
1568 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 You can use the Home (or End) key instead of Display First Section (or
Display Last Section)
Tools in the Production Module 1569

Check the Roundness of a Tank


This step, when it is chosen, launches a sub-tool called Tank Roundness
Check. It enables to inspect the roundness of a tank, by comparing its point
cloud with the fitted model at the positions defined by intersecting the Station
lines with the horizontal measurement rules defined Step 4 of the Tank Grid
Definition sub-tool. Note that a horizontal measurement line has the naming
illustrated below.

1 - Course N 6 - A measurement rule line at a position above


2 - Bottom weld of Course N the bottom weld (called Weld 1 + 2/Regular
3 - Top weld of Course N Interval value)
4 - Course N+1 7 - A measurement rule line below the top weld
5 - A measurement rule line at a position above (called Weld 2 + Height Below)
the bottom weld (called Weld 1 + 1/Regular 8 - A measurement rule line above the bottom
Interval value) weld (called Weld 1 + Height above)

To Check the Roundness of a Tank:

 Click on the Roundness button. The Tank Roundness Check dialog


opens, in place of the Vertical Tank Inspection dialog.
1570 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Both the cylinder (fitted in Step 2 of the Vertical Tank Inspection) and the
selected point cloud are hidden in the 3D View.
The view is brought to Top, locked in 2D with the 2D Grid displayed.
Tools in the Production Module 1571

Filter all Sections


The slicing of the selected point cloud along the measurement rule lines, are
called Sections. All are selected after entering into the Tank Roundness Check
sub-tool. The number of selected Stations is displayed in Step 1. The
measurements, made at the points by intersecting the Station lines with the
measurement rule lines, are called Measurement Points.

By default, the higher Section (in elevation) is the one selected (in Step 2) and
displayed in the 3D View. The Apply Filter option is by default not chosen. But
when you choose it, it enables to filter by only keeping the Sections for which
some measurement points are not in the Tolerance the user has to define.

To Filter the Sections:

1. Check the Apply Filter option. The Tolerance field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a distance value in the Tolerance field.

 The measurement points that are out of the defined Tolerance are in red.
 Those that are in the defined Tolerance are in yellow.
 In Step 1, the number of selected Selections is updated according to the
defined Tolerance.
 In Step 2, the number of welds is also updated.
1572 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - A measurement point out of the defined 2 - A measurement point in the defined


Tolerance Tolerance

Caution: Be aware that the value put in the Tolerance parameter is persistent.
You have to reset it manually.
Tools in the Production Module 1573

Analyze the Roundness from One Measurement Rule Line


If the Step 1 has been skipped, all Sections are listed in Step 2. If the Step 1
has been executed, only the Sections that are not in the defined Tolerance are
listed here. By default, the first Section from the list is the selected one and is
displayed in the 3D View.

1 - Point cloud 3 - A section


2 - Model (fitted cylinder) 4 - A measurement point

To Analyze the Roundness from One Measurement Rule Line:

1. Click Display Next Section (or Display Previous Section ) to display the
next (or previous) section in the 3D View.
2. Or click Display Last Section (or Display First Section ) to display the
last (or first) section in the 3D View.
3. Or key a number and press Enter.
4. If required, check the Display Cloud option.
5. If required, check the Display Reference option.
6. Zoom in or zoom out the displayed Section.

Tip:
 You can use the Up (or Down) Arrow key instead of Display Next Section
(or Display Previous Section).
 You can use the Home (or End) key instead of Display First Section (or
Display Last Section)
1574 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Report
To Create a Report:

1. Click the Create Report button. The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog
opens.
2. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the report file to be stored in
the Look In field.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension RTF is added
automatically.
4. Click Save. A new Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog opens.
5. Do one of the following:

 Define the content of the report (see Report Content (on page 1575)).
 If the Verticality Inspection (or Roundness Inspection) option has been
checked, define the Criteria for Verticality and Roundness (see
"Criteria for Verticality" on page 1578).
 If the Bottom Settlement Inspection option has been checked, choose a
Bottom Reference (on page 1576).
 If the Shell Settlement Inspection option has been checked, define the
Criteria for Shell Settlement (on page 1579).
 For any type of content, define the Conventions that will be used in the
plots.

6. If required, check the Display Point Cloud in Plots option to enable to the
display of points in the plots.
7. If required, check the Display Difference Values in Roundness Plots option
to display the values of the deviation in radius between the measurement
points and the circular reference in the report.
8. Click Create. The Vertical Tank Inspection Report dialog closes and the
report opens of its own.

The unit of measurement that will be used in the report is the unit of
measurement for Length.
Tools in the Production Module 1575

Report Content

 If the Verticality Inspection option has been checked, the Verticality Report
part will be included in the report.
 If the Roundness Inspection option has been checked, the Roundness
Report part will be included in the report.
 If the Verticality Inspection option and the Roundness Inspection option
has been checked, the Verticality and Roundness table in the first page
will be displayed.
 If the Bottom Settlement Inspection option has been checked, the Bottom
Settlement Report part will be included in the report. In the first page the
Bottom Settlement table will be added.
 If the Shell Settlement Inspection has been checked, the Shell Settlement
Report part will be included in the report. In the first page, the Shell
settlement table will be added.
1576 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Bottom Reference

 If the Bottom model option has been chosen, the plots in the Bottom
Settlement report will display the fitted bottom as reference line. This
“fitted” reference line will be used to compute the elevation from reference
in the tables.

 If the Horizontal (Average Elevation) option has been chosen, a line


showing the average of the elevations for all the points of the Bottom will
be displayed. This horizontal average reference line will be used to
compute the elevation from reference in the tables.
Tools in the Production Module 1577

 If the Horizontal (Automatic, Above) option has been chosen, a Reference


Line is set.

The elevation of this reference line is the elevation of the highest measured
point for all the profiles plus 25% of the distance between the highest and the
lowest elevations for all the profiles.
1578 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Criteria for Verticality

 The Tolerance is a threshold on the deviations from the verticality


reference shape. If a measured deviation is greater than this value, it will
be highlighted in the report. You might want to use the estimated tank
shell height shown above for defining the tolerance.
Tools in the Production Module 1579

Criteria for Roundness

 The Top Tolerance threshold applies on the upper part of the tank, i.e.,
above the ‘Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld’.
 The Bottom Tolerance threshold applies on the lower part of the tank, i.e.,
below the ‘Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld’.
 The Height above Shell-to-Bottom Weld field enables you to use two
different tolerances.
 The estimated tank diameter is given as an aid for defining the tolerances.

Criteria for Shell Settlement


The Young’s Modulus and the Yield Strength are used to compute the
exceeds/does not exceed value based on API 653 with the formula:

Where:

 L is the arc length between two measurement points.


 Y is the Yield Strength (in lbf/in²).
 E is the Young's modulus (in lbf/in²).
 H Is the tank height.

Conventions
 The Unit field enables to choose a unit system to be used in the report.
1580 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Save the Inspection Results


After clicking Create, two folders, named Grid and Measurements, are created
in the Tank object folder. The Grid folder contains a frame used in the
inspection, and a series of polylines which correspond to the Stations and the
Welds (defined in Step 1 and Step 2 of the Tank Grid Definition sub-tool). The
Measurements folder contains a set of fitted polylines which correspond to the
inspection using the given measurement rules (see Step 4 and Step 5 of the
Tank Grid Definition sub-tool).

In case there is no point behind a Station, the Vertical Measurement resulting


from the inspection, is a pure polyline instead of a fitted polyline.

When you edit an already inspected tank object and save the results, a dialog
appears and warns you that the new inspection will delete the existing one. If
you wish to keep the old inspection, please make a copy of the tank object
before entering the tool. This way, you will create a new inspection.
Tools in the Production Module 1581

Tank Secondary Containment


The Tank Secondary Containment feature lets you to measure the capacity of
a tank Secondary Containment and to know the position of the Spill Point. A
Secondary Containment is an impermeable barrier that prevents leaks from the
primary storage tank system from reaching outside the containment area. A
Spill Point is the lowest point on the watershed line.

Open the Tool


To Open the Tool:

1. Select a Tank object and a Cloud object from the Project Tree.
2. On the Storage Tank tab, click the Tank Secondary Containment icon
in the Tank Calibration group. The Tank Secondary Containment dialog
opens.

The input cloud should correspond to the ground surface where the secondary
containment has to be extracted. Thus, before computation, it is recommended
to remove other objects (e.g. pipes, cars, tanks, etc.) using the automatic
Ground Extraction (on page 345) feature and/or the manual Segmentation.

It is assumed that the selected tank is inside the secondary containment.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Tank Secondary Containment feature can be reached
from the Tank Calibration group.
1582 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define an Area
To Define an Area:

1. In Step 1, click the Select Area button. The Drawing toolbar appears. The
3D View is locked in 2D, with a 2D Grid in superimpose (if not hidden
previously). The view is brought to Top View.
2. Draw a fence around the containment area. It should be not too far from
the top of the dike, around one meter. The secondary containment is
assumed to be entirely inside the fence.
3. Validate the fence by clicking . The Drawing toolbar closes.

Tip: You can press Enter instead of clicking Validate.

Note: After defining an area, the Compute button in Step 2 becomes enabled.

Compute the Containment Volume


In Step 2, you can see the name of the selected tank and choose between the
different display options that are available: "Display Point Cloud", Display
Tank" and "Display Volume". Before computing the results, the "Display
Volume" option is always grayed-out and checked. After computing the results,
this option becomes enabled and remains checked.

To Compute the Containment Volume

 Click the Compute button. The volume as well as the watershed line and
the spillover point are computed and displayed in the 3D View.
Tools in the Production Module 1583

Generate a Report
To Generate a Report:

1. Click the Generate Report button. The Tank Secondary Containment


Report dialog opens.
2. In Look In field, locate a drive/folder to store the file.
3. In the File Name field, enter a name in
4. Click Save. A new Tank Secondary Containment Report dialog opens.
5. Define the options below:

 Containment Pass/Fail Criterion (on page 1583),


 Rainfall (on page 1584).
 Units (on page 1584)

6. Click the Create button. The Tank Secondary Containment Report dialog
closes.

Here is an example for which the contents of the selected tank combined with
the rainfall rate do not exceed the capability of the secondary containment.

Here is an example for which the contents of the selected tank combined with
the rainfall rate exceed the capability of the secondary containment.

Containment Pass/Fail Criterion


 Tank Volume: Pre-filled with the volume of the displayed cylinder. The
value can be edited.
 Ratio: The Ratio expresses the filling rate of the selected tank, 100% for
the entire tank and 50% for the half.
1584 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Rainfall
An important factor that the user has to take into consideration in determining
the necessary secondary containment capacity is the local precipitation
condition, Rainfall.

 Amount: Average precipitation in mm per year. This field can be editable,


and 0% can be input.
 Estimated Surface Area: Surface used to compute the rain volume, it
cannot be edited.
 Estimated Volume: Rain volume computed thanks to rainfall height and
surface.

Units
 Volume: The unit that is used in the report for quantifying a volume.

Create
To Create:

 Click the Create button. The computed result is then created in the
database in a new folder named "Secondary Containment".
Tools in the Production Module 1585

Locate Tables
The Storage Tank Application is an option when installed, also installs a set of
tables. The Locate Table option is a direct entry that brings you to the folder
where the tables are.

Note: The Locate Table option can be reached from the Tank Calibration
group, in the Ribbon, and from the Storage Tank menu, in the Menu and
Toolbars.
1586 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Send an Entity to SketchUp


You can export two families of entities toward Trimble SketchUp: Geometry
and Ortho-image. A geometry of the following types, created within RealWorks,
can be sent toward SketchUp Pro: 3D point, segment, polyline, composite
curve, ellipse, circular arc, plane, plane with holes, extrusion, cylinder, circular
torus, rectangular torus, box, pyramid, full sphere, regular cone and eccentric
cone. An ortho-image, created thanks to the Ortho-Projection (see "Create
Ortho-Images" on page 1100) tool or as a part of a Key Plan (see the Generate
Key Plans (on page 588) topics); can be sent toward SketchUp Pro. When you
select a group (or a project), all entities in the group (or in the project) will be
exported toward SketchUp.

To Send an Entity to SketchUp:

1. First, open SketchUp by clicking .


2. Select an entity from the Models Tree (or from the 3D View, only for a
geometry).
3. In the Modeling menu, select Send to SketchUp .

Or

4. Select Send to SketchUp from the pop-up menu.

 If the selection is a group (or a project), and if there is a mesh (or


unsupported geometries) in the group (or the project), an error message is
then displayed. It warns you that the mesh cannot be exported toward
SketchUp.
 If there is an image in your selection which is not an Ortho-Image, an error
message is then displayed. It warns you that the image cannot be
exported toward SketchUp.
 If a Key Plan has been selected, all ortho-images that are inside except
the Preview, are exported.
 A Preview, alone, can be exported to SketchUp.
 A geometry is exported in the common layer:
Tools in the Production Module 1587

 An ortho-image is exported in a specific layer.

Caution: The Send to SketchUp feature remains grayed-out for two reasons.
First is when no session of SketchUp has been open (from RealWorks).
Second is when you select an entity for which the feature is not enabled.

Note: An error message appears when you try to export an entity to SketchUp
while its Welcome to SketchUp dialog is still open.

Note: This feature requires the installation of SketchUp Pro on your computer.
If you have SketchUp Make instead, a message appears and warns that this
feature is not compatible with SketchUp Make.

Tip: You can cancel the export in progress by pressing Esc.

One good practice is to generate a Top view, a Front view and a side view,
export them to SketchUp, and then use them as background. In SketchUp, set
the 'View>Face Type' to X-Ray to be able to view the ortho-images behind the
model.
1588 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: In the Ribbon, the Send to SketchUp feature can be found in the
SketchUp group, on the Model tab.
CHAPTER 13

Producing Media Files

The Media tab is present in all RealWorks products. Tools from the tab can be
used in Production, and in Registration. When you are in Registration, only the
Screen Capture (High Resolution) and the Capture Screen features are
available. In the Viewer, only the Screen Capture feature is available.

The set of tools is gathered in one group (Media), and put on the Media tab, in
the Ribbon.
1591

Create a Video
The aim is to provide a tool that can generate videos from survey data. The
video files are saved in the AVI (for Audio Video Interleave, a video format from
Microsoft) format with customizable resolution and compression level.

Open the Tool


No selection is required to enter the Video Creator tool. Video creations are
based on objects not necessary selected but displayed in the 3D View. A
selection can be done within the tool and the selected objects can be of all
kinds (point cloud, mesh, geometry, etc.).

To Open the Tool:

1. Display objects in the 3D View.


2. In the Media group, click the Video Creator icon. The Video Creator dialog
opens.

The Video Creator dialog opens as the third tab of the WorkSpace window and
is composed of three parts. The first part (Define Navigation Path) contains
methods for creating a video. The second part (Define Video Parameters)
allows you to set parameters and preview the result. The last step is to save
the result.

The 3D View spits into two 3D viewers. The top 3D viewer (Main View)
displays the global scene. The bottom 3D viewer (called Preview) displays the
view from the current keyframe. A keyframe is like a camera in a given
position. The Perspective projection mode is set by default; you cannot swap to
Parallel.
1592 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Navigation Path Mode


There are three modes for creating a video: Quick Mode, Step-by-Step Mode
and Path Mode. After opening the Video Creator tool, the mode that comes
first is always Quick Mode. The Quick Mode uses a predetermined path (a
circle). The Step-by-Step Mode allows you to define your own path by
navigating through the scene. The Path Mode uses an existing polyline (or a
drawn one) to describe the video path.

To Select a Navigation Path Mode:

1. In Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click on the pull-down arrow.


2. Select a mode among Quick Mode, Step-by-Step Mode and Path Mode.
Producing Media Files 1593

Quick Mode
In the Examiner mode, the top 3D viewer (called Main View) displays the
global scene with a red circular path and four keyframes. All the keyframes are
directed towards the center of the circular path. The bottom 3D viewer (called
Preview) displays the view of the current keyframe (in yellow). The circular
path has as diameter the diagonal of the bounding box that highlights the
selection. A 3D manipulator (three handles corresponding to three secant
directions, each with a color (red, green and blue)) is located at the center of
circular path. The View Inwards/Outwards button in Step 1 is enabled.

1 - A circular path 3 - The manipulator


2 - A keyframe

In the Station-Based navigation mode, the top 3D viewer displays the global
scene with only one keyframe. This keyframe is set at the first station position
of the Project Tree. The bottom 3D Viewer shows the viewpoint from that
keyframe. The View Inwards/Outwards button is dimmed.
1594 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

View Inwards/Outwards
You can reverse the keyframe direction so that all keyframes diverge from the
center instead of converging on it.

To View Inwards/Outwards:

 In the Video Creator dialog, click the View Inwards/Outwards icon.


 Or right-click in any 3D viewer and select View Inwards/Outwards from the
pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the inversion by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1595

Move the Circular Path Along a Direction


To Move the Circular Path Along a Direction:

1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the circular path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and
those along which you cannot displace the circular path (with keyframes)
are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) along that
direction.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
1596 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move the Circular Path in a Plane


To Move the Circular Path in a Plane:

1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace
the circular path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and
those you cannot displace along are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the circular path (with keyframes) in that plane.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1597

Resize the Circular Path


To Resize the Circular Path:

1. Click the circular path (with keyframes).


2. Drag and drop to enlarge or reduce the circular path (with keyframes) size.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the resizing by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
1598 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Step-by-Step Mode
In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) mode, the top 3D viewer (called Main View)
displays the global scene with an initial keyframe. The bottom 3D viewer
(taking the name of Video Editing and Preview) displays the view from that
keyframe. In both 3D viewers, the Head Always Up option and the Perspective
project mode are default-set. The initial keyframe is at a position that
corresponds to the current keyframe (of the previous creation mode) position
with a shift. As the Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate
with permanent constraints (Horizontal Pan, Horizontal Rotation, etc.) or
temporary constraints (Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan
constrained along a vertical axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom
(in or out), pan and rotate.

Keyframe
Producing Media Files 1599

In the Station-Based navigation mode, the top 3D viewer remains unchanged.


The bottom 3D viewer shows the view from the first station position with
image(s) overlapped (if present). The initial keyframe is at the first station's
position. The same navigation rules are applied in both 3D viewers except that
you cannot pan in the bottom 3D viewer.
1600 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Add a Keyframe
To Add a Keyframe:

1. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point
of view.
2. In the Video Creator dialog, click the Add New Keyframe icon. A
keyframe is added in the top 3D viewer (in the first station position when
you are in the Station-Based mode).
3. Repeat the steps from 1 to 2 to add another keyframe.

In the Examiner navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D


viewer. A red curve path links this new keyframe to the previous keyframe.

In the Walkthrough navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D


viewer at the same position as the previous keyframe but with a different
direction if you tilt or look at a direction. A red curve path links this new
keyframe to the previous keyframe if you pan or walk through the scene.
Producing Media Files 1601

In the Station-Based navigation mode, a new keyframe is added in the top 3D


viewer at the same position as the previous keyframe but with a different
orientation if you rotate (or zoom) or at the second station position if you jump
to the second station. There is no red curve path linking this new keyframe to
the initial keyframe.
1602 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

4. Repeat the steps from 1 to 2 to add other keyframes.

Tip:
 You can also click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Add New
Keyframe from the pop-up menu.
 In the Examiner (or Walkthrough) navigation mode, use the View
Alignment tools like Center On Point to help you rotating around a point.

Note:
 Adding a new keyframe at the same position than an existing keyframe will
make rotate the camera of 360°.
 You can undo (or redo) the addition of a keyframe by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
 You can switch from the Examiner navigation mode to the Walkthrough
navigation mode and vice versa when adding new keyframes. You cannot
switch to the Station-Based navigation mode if there are already
keyframes. You need to delete all of them to be able to switch to this
navigation mode.

Load Keyframes from a File


A keyframe file is a data file with *.dat as extension.

To Load Keyframes from a File:

1. Right-click in any 3D viewer to display the pop-up menu.


2. Select Load Keyframes From File from the drop-down menu. The Load
Keyframes From dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the file of keyframes is located.
4. Click on the file to select it.
5. Click Open.
Producing Media Files 1603

Saving Keyframes to a File


The Save Keyframes to File command is only available after adding
keyframes. A keyframe file is a data file with *.dat as extension.

To Save Keyframes to a File:

1. Right-click in any 3D viewer to display the pop-up menu.


2. Select Save Keyframes to File from the drop-down menu. The Save
Keyframes as dialog opens.
3. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the keyframes file.
4. Enter a name in the File Name field. The extension is added automatically.
5. Click Save.

Edit Keyframes
After adding a keyframe, the Clear All Keyframes and Delete Current Keyframe
icons as well as the Save Keyframes to File command become enabled.
1604 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Delete a Keyframe
To Delete a Keyframe:

1. In Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear Current Keyframe
icon. The current keyframe is removed from the sequence.
2. Or browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find
the one you want to delete and click Clear Current Keyframe.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the deletion of a keyframe by clicking on the
Undo Operation (or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.

Delete all Keyframes


To Delete all Keyframes:

1. In Step 1 of the Video Creator dialog, click the Clear all Keyframes
icon.
2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom) and select Clear all Keyframes
from the pop-up menu.

Note: You can undo the deletion of all keyframes.


Producing Media Files 1605

Change a Keyframe Position and Orientation


To Change a Keyframe Position and Orientation:

1. Browse the sequence of keyframes using the navigation buttons to find the
one for which you want to change its position or orientation.
2. In the bottom 3D viewer, navigate through the scene to find the right point
of view.

If you are in the Examiner mode, the current keyframe position changes as well
as the path's shape.

If you are in the Walkthrough mode, the current keyframe orientation changes
while the path's shape remains unchanged.
1606 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

If you are in the Station-Based mode, the current keyframe position changes.
All are at the same position.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the operation by clicking on the Undo Operation
(or Redo Operation) button in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1607

Path Mode
The top 3D viewer displays the global scene with a path (if there is a polyline in
your project) and keyframes (one at each node of the polyline). The initial
keyframe is at the starting node's position. The bottom 3D viewer - taking the
name of Preview - displays the view from the current keyframe (in yellow). If
your project has no polyline; the top 3D viewer still displays the global scene
but without path. The bottom 3D viewer keeps the view from the current
keyframe (of the previous creation mode). In both 3D viewers, the Head
Always Up option and the Perspective project mode are default-set. As the
Heap Always Up option is default-set; you cannot navigate with permanent
constraints (Horizontal Pan, Horizontal Rotation, etc.) or temporary constraints
(Rotate constrained around a vertical axis, Pan constrained along a vertical
axis, etc.) in the 3D viewers. You can only zoom (in or out), pan and rotate.

1 - A defined path 3 - The manipulator


2 - A keyframe

Note: The navigation mode is restricted Examiner (or Walkthrough).


1608 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select a Path
The loaded project contains one (or several) polyline(s). You can select one as
a path for generating a video. The selected polyline needs to be regular
(composed of one or several continuous segments with (or without) arcs).

To Select a Path:

1. Click on the Choose Path pull down arrow.


2. Select a polyline from the drop down list.

 If the polyline is a set of continuous segments, a keyframe appears at


each node.
 If the polyline is a set of arcs, a keyframe appears at each node (start,
middles and end).

Note: If the selected polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning
message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.
Producing Media Files 1609

Draw and Create a Path


When there is no polyline, you have to create at least one in the database. The
top 3D viewer displays the global scene locked in 2D with a 2D Grid
superimposed (if not hidden previously). Movements while picking points are
restricted to Rotate around the Z-Axis, Zoom (In or Out) along this same axis
and Pan in the XY plane. The drawn polyline needs to be regular (composed of
one or several continuous segments with or without arcs).

To Draw and Create a Path:

1. Click Draw and Create Path in Database . The Drawing and Picking
Parameters (in 2D constraint mode) toolbars appear. The mouse cursor
shape changes to a pencil.
2. Draw a polyline by picking several points
3. Click End Line. The last picked point ends the line.
4. Click Create to save the drawn polyline in the database.

 If the polyline is a set of continuous segments, a keyframe appears at


each node.
 If the polyline is a set of arcs, a keyframe appears at each node (start,
mids and end).

Tip: You can also select Create from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 If the drawn polyline is composed of no continuous segments, an error
dialog appears.
 If the drawn polyline contains more than twenty-two nodes, a warning
message appears and prompts you to select the polyline or not.
 If the drawn polyline is a circle, five keyframes are generated. The first and
fifth keys are in the same position. That's why only four keyframes are
visible.
1610 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Set a Direction
There is a polyline in your project or after drawing one, the Direction field and
the Reverse Path Direction and Smooth Curve icons all become activated.
Otherwise all are dimmed.

1 - Reverse Path Direction 3 - Keyframe directions


2 - Smooth Curve

Note: Straight is the default direction.


Producing Media Files 1611

Change Keyframe Direction


To Change Keyframe Direction:

1. Click on the Direction pull-down arrow.


2. Choose an item from the drop-down list.

 If the polyline is a set of segments, Straight sets the start [A] and end [E]
keyframes aligned respectively with the first [AB] and last [DE] segments
and the other keyframes [C e.g.] parallel to the line passing through the
previous and next keyframes.

 If the polyline is a set of arcs, Straight sets each keyframe tangent to its
node.
 Left rotates all keyframes to the right of the Straight direction.
 Right rotates all keyframes to the left the Straight direction.
 Top rotates all keyframes so that they point upward.
 Bottom rotates all keyframes so that they point downward.

Note: The white dotted line in the picture above is not present in the top 3D
viewer but just here for illustrating the explanation.
1612 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Reverse the Path Direction


To Reverse the Path Direction:

1. In the Video Creator dialog, click the Reverse Path Direction icon.
2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom).
3. Select Reverse Path Direction from the pop-up menu.

 Straight sets the opposite direction.


 Left becomes Right.
 Right becomes Left.
 Top becomes Bottom.
 Bottom becomes Top.

Tip: You can combine the Reverse Path Direction feature with the Smooth
Curve feature.

Smooth the Path


To Smooth a Path:

1. In the Video Creator dialog, click the Smooth Curve icon.


2. Or right-click in a 3D viewer (top or bottom).
3. Select Smooth Curve from the pop-up menu.

Tip: You can combine the Smooth Curve feature with the Reverse Path
Direction feature.

Move the Path Along a Direction


To Move the Path Along a Direction:

1. Click on a handle; it turns to yellow. The direction along which you can
displace the path (with keyframes) is highlighted in yellow and those along
which you cannot displace the path (with keyframes) are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) along that direction.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.
Producing Media Files 1613

Move the Path in a Plane


To Move the Path in a Plane:

1. Click on a plane. It turns to yellow. The plane in which you can displace
the path (with keyframes) appears in highlighted in yellow and those you
cannot displace along are in mauve.
2. Drag and drop to move the path (with keyframes) in that plane.

Note: You can undo (or redo) the displacement by clicking on the Undo
Operation (or Redo Operation) in the Main toolbar.

Browse Keyframes
A sequence of keyframes defines which movement the spectator will see,
whereas the position of the keyframes on the video defines the timing of the
movement. An active keyframe - the one in yellow in the top 3D viewer - sets
the starting point of that movement. If more than one keyframe is available and
if the active keyframe is other than the first one, you can browse through the
sequence as described below:

1 - Go to First Element 4 - Go to Next Element


2 - Go to Previous Element 5 - Go to Last Element
3 - Field for entering a keyframe order

To Browse Keyframes:

 Click Go to Previous Element (or Go to Next Element) to set the previous


(or next) keyframe as active.
 Click Go to First Element (or Go to Last Element) to set the first (or last)
keyframe as active.
 Key in a keyframe order in the path in the Go to Keyframe field to select it.
You do not need to validate by pressing the Enter key.

Tip:
 Use the Home (or End) button of your keyboard instead of Got to First
Element (or Go to Last Element).
 Use the Up (or Down) arrow of the keyboard instead of Go to Previous
Element (or Go to Next Element).
1614 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define Video Parameters


To Define Video Parameters:

1. Enter a value in the Duration field.

1 - Video speed 3 - Duration


2 - Launch the Video preview

2. Click on the pull-down arrow below the Duration field.


3. Choose a value among x1, x2, x4 and x10 from the drop-down list.

Set a Duration
A Duration in second expresses the time the camera will take to run through
the navigation path from the beginning to the end.

To Set a Duration:

 Enter a value in the Duration field.


Producing Media Files 1615

Define a Speed
To Define a Speed:

1. Click on the Speed pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a factor among x1, x2, x4 and x10 from the drop-down list.

Choose a Processing Mode


There are two quality modes: Quick Processing and High Quality. Anti-Aliasing
is a technic of smoothing images. It consists of adjusting pixel positions and/or
setting pixel intensities so that there is a more gradual transition between the
color of a line and the background color. The side effect of the Anti-Aliasing is
the Flickering.
1616 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

High Quality Option (Recommended)


The High Quality option enables you to create videos of significantly higher
image quality. The produced video shows more point cloud details and less
visual artifacts - flickering and aliasing are highly reduced. This is especially
visible when the point clouds consist of several scans acquired from different
stations.

This option is the recommended option because it enables you to create


videos of the best quality but requires more graphics card memory and more
computation time.

Snapshot with Anti-Aliasing applied and Flickering filter enabled


Producing Media Files 1617

Quick Processing Mode


You can use the Quick Processing option for generating a video more quickly,
e.g., for producing a first draft version.

Snapshot without Anti-Aliasing nor Flickering filter.

Preview a Video
To Preview a Video:

1. Click Play. The video is launched and the Play button becomes dimmed.
2. Press Esc to stop the video preview.

 In the Main View window, a keyframe runs along the defined path from the
first keyframe position to the last keyframe position.
 In the Preview window, a preview of the video to create displays in the 4/3
format.
1618 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Video
To Create a Video:

1. Click Create. The Save Video File dialog opens.


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want to store the video.
3. Enter a name in the File Name field.
4. Click on the File of Type pull-down arrow.
5. Select a type from the drop-down list.
6. Click on the Resolution pull-down arrow.

7. Do one of the following:

 Use a predetermined resolution.

 Choose among Publisher (320x240), Web small (240x188), Web


large (320x240), DVD (720x576), HD 720p (1280x720) and HD 1080p
(1920x1080).
Producing Media Files 1619

 Customize your own resolution.

a) Select Custom. The two Pixels fields become editable with 320 x
240 as default values.
b) Set your own resolution.

8. Click on the Codec pull-down arrow.


9. Choose "Uncompressed" to not compress the video. In that case, the
About and Options buttons remain dimmed.
10. Or choose a codec from the drop-down list. Both the About and Options
buttons become active.
11. If required, click on the About button. A codec, for which the information is
missing when clicking on the About button, will not open any dialog.
Otherwise, an information box appears.
12. Click on the Options button and configure your own options.
13. Click Save. The Save Video File dialog closes. RealWorks will then
encode the video. When encoding is complete, a box with the following
information - End of operation notified, Elapsed time for the encoding and
location of the video in your hard drive - appears.

Note:
 A warning message appears when the resolution values are invalid. You
can only set a value between 100 and 2000.
 Pressing Esc stops the video encoding. A message which prompts you to
cancel the operation (or not) appears.
 In the Main View window, the keyframe, which runs along the defined path
from the first keyframe position to the last keyframe position when
previewing the video, does not run anymore. In the Preview window, a
preview of the video to create displays in the 4/3 format, in the chosen
resolution. The two bands, one on each side of the preview video, take the
color of the main window color.

Tip: The codecs from the drop-down list are those installed in your computer
system. For practical purposes, we recommend you to install the (free) codec
to ensure that your videos reach a wide audience.

Caution: All Microsoft codecs (Microsoft RLE, Microsoft YUV and Microsoft
Video 1) are removed from the RealWorks 8.1 release.
1620 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Capture the Screen in High Quality Mode


This command enables you to create a snapshot of the 3D View in both high
resolution and high quality. The aliasing effect related to point clouds is highly
reduced. Note that since the created image is larger than the screen, you may
want to increase the point size to get a visually similar result. The result is a
high resolution image in the BMP format.

To Capture the Screen in High Quality Mode:

1. In the Media group, click the Capture Screen (High Resolution) icon.
The Save dialog opens.
2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the
.BMP extension to this file.
3. Specify the location where you want to store this file by navigating through
the drive/folder.
4. Click Save.
Producing Media Files 1621

Capture the Screen in Quick Processing


Mode
This command enables you to create a snapshot of the 3D View with the
quality of the current view. The result is a standard resolution image in the
BMP format, for which the anti-aliasing has NOT been applied

To Capture the Screen in Quick Processing Mode:

1. In the Media group, click the Capture Screen icon. The Save File
dialog opens.
2. Type a name for the image file. RealWorks assigns automatically the
.BMP extension to this file.
3. Specify the location you want to store this file by navigating through the
drive/folder.
4. Click Save. The Save File dialog closes.
CHAPTER 14

Exporting Data

All the RealWorks family of products contain the export features described in
this chapter except for the Viewer. All export commands are gathered in the
Import/Export group, on the Home tab, in the Ribbon.

Caution: For all export features, a dialog opens and prompts you to input a
File Name. Please, note that you cannot leave the File Name field empty. You
have to enter a name. Otherwise, you cannot export.
1625

Export a Selection as a File


The Export Selection feature is dedicated to the export of a selection from
RealWorks toward a file for which the format can come from a third party
software, a competitor, etc.

The table below lists all of the available formats.

To Export a Selection as a File:

1. Select the data to be exported from the Project Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Selection feature from the list The Export Selection
dialog opens.
4. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
5. Select a type of file from the drop-down list.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. A new dialog opens.

Note: There are two types of E57 exports: Export to non-Gridded E57 Format
and Export to Gridded E57 Format.
1626 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Google Earth (KMZ) Format


A KML (Keyhole Marked Language) file is a XML-based-language file from
Google Earth (originally called Earth Viewer and created by Keyhole Inc.).
Google Earth is a virtual globe program which maps the earth by
superimposing images obtained from satellite imagery and aerial photography,
etc. A KML file contains geo-referenced information (about points, lines and
text) to display in Google Earth. A KMZ file is simply a zip compressed KML file
with images. KMZ is the default Google Earth format. In RealWorks, meshes
(textured with images or not) and geometries (plane, cylinder, sphere, etc.) can
be exported to Google Earth.

To Export to a KMZ Format File:

 In the Export as KMZ File dialog, do one of the following:

In a basic Geodetic System, a location (or a point) on the Earth has as


coordinates its longitude and latitude, both expressed in angles. A latitude is
measured from the equator and a longitude from a meridian (the Greenwich
meridian is used as reference). There are around a hundred Geodetic Systems
in use around the world differing from country to country. A unified Geodetic
System (called WGS84, dating from 1984) is in use in Google Earth. In the
WGS84 coordinate system, the distance of one degree in longitude changes
according to the latitude. This drawback disappears in the Universal
Transverse Mercator (UTM) system which is a grid-based method of specifying
locations on the surface of the Earth. The surface of the Earth is divided
between 80° S latitude and 84° N latitude into 60 zones, each 6° of longitude in
width and centered over a meridian of longitude. Zones are numbered from 1
to 60.

 Define your own conversion Parameters.


 Convert UTM coordinates to WGS84 latitude and longitude.

Note:
 You can also select a project with meshes (or geometries) inside.
 A geometry is converted in a mesh when exporting.
Exporting Data 1627

User Defined
If the selected mesh (or geometry) has been geo-referenced in a coordinate
system different from the UTM coordinate system (for example the Lambert or
the Trimble GX™ scanner), the Export as KMZ File dialog opens with the
"User Defined" option set as default. Exporting to the Google Earth format
involves defining a "Reference Point" on the selected mesh/geometry (mainly a
point on the ground) and giving its related latitude and longitude coordinates in
the WGS84 coordinate system.

To Define your Own Conversion Parameters:

1. Check the User Defined option.

2. Enter reference point coordinates in the Define Reference Point.


3. Or click on the Pick Reference Point icon. The Picking Parameters
toolbar appears in 3D constraint mode and the cursor shape changes to a
pointer.
4. Pick a point on displayed items in the 3D View (for example the ground).
Its coordinates in the current unit of measurement appear in the Define
Reference Point field.
5. Enter an angle value in Latitude field.
6. Click on the Latitude pull-down arrow.
1628 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

7. Choose between North and South from the drop-down list.


8. Enter an angle value in the Longitude field.
9. Click on the Longitude pull-down arrow.
10. Choose between East and West from the drop list.
11. If required, add a description.
12. Click Export. The Export as KML File dialog closes.

Note: If the selected mesh (or geometry) hasn't been geo-referenced in any
coordinate system, the user will have to orientate the scene by himself in
Google Earth.

Tip: You can use the Add Placemark tool in Google Earth to get the
longitude and latitude coordinates of the Reference Point.
Exporting Data 1629

UTM to WGS84 Latitude and Longitude


If the selected mesh (or geometry) is geo-referenced in the UTM coordinate
system, the Export as KMZ File dialog opens with the "UTM to WGS84
Latitude/Longitude" option set by default. Exporting to the Google Earth format
means converting the mesh (or geometry) coordinates expressed in the UTM
coordinates to the WGS84 coordinates (latitude, longitude and height).

To Convert UTM Coordinates to WGS84 Latitude and Longitude:

1. Check the UTM to WGS84 Latitude/Longitude option.

2. Click on the UTM Latitude Hemisphere pull-down arrow.


3. Choose between North and South from the drop-down list.
4. Enter a number in the UTM Zone Number field.
5. If required, add a description.
6. Click Export. The Export as KML File dialog closes.
1630 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

BSF Format
You can export a project, a station (or a scan) or an object with point cloud
inside from RealWorks to a BSF format file at once*. This station can be one
created from a Trimble FX Controller file or not.

To Export to a BSF Format File:

1. In the Export to BSF dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the data from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit among Meter, International Foot or U.S. Survey Foot.
5. Click Export. The Export to BSF dialog closes.

Note:
 A file of BSF format has *.bsf as extension.
 A warning message appears if no cloud (or an empty cloud) has been
selected.
 (*) You can select several objects as input but only the first (of the
selection) is exported.

PDMS Macro Format


You can export any entities created within RealWorks into a PDMS macro file
like Box, Circular Torus, Cone, Cylinder, Eccentric Cone, Ellipsoid (with or
without one or two bounds), Point, Pyramid, Rectangular Torus, Sphere (with
or without one or two bounds), Plane and Extrusion.

To Export to a PDMS Macro Format File:

1. In the PDMS Export dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the exported data from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit* from the drop-down list.
5. Click Export. The PDMS Export dialog closes.

Note:
 A file of PDMS Macro format carries the pdmsmac file extension.
 (*) Only the Millimeter unit is available.
Exporting Data 1631

E57 Format
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.

To Export to an E57 Format File:

1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Check an option among Export Intensity and Export RGB Color.
4. Click Export. The Export Options dialog closes.

Note:
 Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has
sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message appears and warns
the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.
 A file of E57 format carries the e57 file extension.

Caution: Data are exported to the E57 format as an irregular grid point sets, in
the Cartesian coordinates (XYZ). Data are exported in Meters.

LAS Format
The LAS file format is a public file format for the interchange of 3-dimensional
point cloud data between data users. It is binary-based. The two LAS format
versions (1.2 and 1.4) support natively the classification of point clouds. Both
standards contain a slight difference in terms of number of layers. The user
has to choose the LAS format version to export to.

LAS 1.2
The LAS 1.2 format version supports 9 predefined layers, and 0 customizable
layers.
1632 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

LAS 1.4
The LAS 1.4 version supports 17 predefined layers, and 191 customizable
layers.
Exporting Data 1633

Export as a LAS Format File


To Export as a LAS Format File:

1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Choose to export (or not) the color information by checking (or un-
checking) the Export RGB Color option.

Note: The Exported Intensity options is always checked and dimmed. This
means that the intensity information is always exported.

4. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.


5. Choose a unit of measurement among Meters, U.S. Survey Feet and
International Feet from the list.
6. Click Export. The Export Options dialog closes.

Note:
 Only an object with a point cloud inside can be exported. If an object has
sub-objects with no points inside, a warning message is displayed and
warns the user that this (or these) sub-object(s) are not exported.
 A file of LAS format has *.las as extension.
 Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.

Warning: An error dialog opens if no cloud (or an empty cloud) is in the


selection.

Caution: The LAS file format has coordinate size limitations. When you export
a georeferenced scene using the LAS format, be aware that its size may have
an impact on the precision of the exported data. For a scene with a size
smaller than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the millimeter. For a scene
with a size larger than 2000 Km, you will have a precision to the centimeter.
For a scene with a size larger than 20000 km, you will have a precision to the
decimeter.

Warning: The dialog below appears if points to be exported are too far from
the origin of the coordinates frame that will be applied. Precision of the data
may be reduced if you choose Yes.
1634 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: An error message appears in case some layers are out of the LAS
classification range. Some information may be lost because unsupported
layers will be converted to "1 Unclassified", while compatible layers will be kept
intact.

LAZ format
The LAZ format is a compressed version of the LAS format. Exporting to the
LAZ format is similar to the LAS one. Refer to the LAS format topic for more
information. The LAZ format also supports natively the classification of point
clouds. RealWorks does only export in the LAZ 1.2 version. The same
behavior (warning to the user and reclassification to "Unclassified") should be
observed.
Exporting Data 1635

AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk Revit MEP)


Before being able to be used in an AutoCAD drawing, points are first exported
into a LAS format file which is an ASCII based format file. This file, which is a
temporary file, is then converted as a PCG format file. This conversion step is
called Indexing. Once completed, the PCG format file is attached to the
drawing. This is similar to attaching an external reference (e.g. an image file) to
the drawing.

To Export to a PCG Format File:

1. In the Export as PCG File dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down
arrow.
2. Select a frame to apply to the data to export.
3. Check an option among the options below:

 Export Intensity.
 Export RGB Color.

4. Click Export. The File Indexing dialog opens.


5. Click Close.

Note:
 You should have AutoDesk Revit MEP (Vers. 2013) installed on your
computer.
 Data and bounding box limits are exported in meter.
1636 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format


Alias/Wavefront is a provider of 2D/3D graphics technology for the film, video,
games, interactive media, industrial design, automotive industry and
visualization markets. Their .OBJ ASCII file format is widely accepted for
exchanging graphical data between drafting applications. OBJ files contain
solids which are made up of 3 or 4 sided faces. Only meshes can be exported
to this format.

To Export to an Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format File:

1. In the Export as OBJ File dialog, click on the Export Frame pull-down
arrow.
2. Select a coordinates frame to apply from drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit system to apply in the Unit field.
5. Click Export.

Note:
 A file of Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) format carries the obj file extension.
 Only a mesh can be exported. Trying to export anything else makes an
error dialog appeared.
Exporting Data 1637

MicroStation (DGN) Format


DGN for DesiGN is a file format of Bentley MicroStation®. Exporting to this
format means exporting a selection from RealWorks to the MicroStation®
format. You can only export one project at a time. MicroStation® includes the
notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering
information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic
version of traditional layers. In addition to the layers, this format includes the
notion of working units which are the real-world units that you work with in
drawing or creating your models in a DGN file. The working units are set as
Master Units (the largest units in common use in a design, such as meters)
and fractional Sub Units (the smallest convenient unit to use, such as
centimeters or millimeters). The Sub Units cannot be larger than Master Units.

To Export to a DGN Format File:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Selection feature from the list. The Export dialog
opens.
4. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
5. Select MicroStation Files (*.DGN) as file type.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Export as DGN File dialog opens.

 Layer: This option allows you to define a number of layers.


 Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of objects you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries and
Selected Clouds.
 Export Frame: A project may have several coordinate frames. This option
allows you to select which coordinate frame from the drop-down list you
want to apply to the exported data.
 Master Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Master
unit.
 Sub Unit: This option allows you to select a unit system to the Sub unit.
 Positional Unit: This option allows you to enter a value for the Positional
unit.

9. Select the kind of objects to be exported in the Export of field.


10. Select the coordinates frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.
11. Select the unit system to be applied for the master unit in the Master Unit
field.
12. Select the unit system to be applied for the sub unit in the Sub Unit field.
13. Enter a value for the positional unit in the Positional Unit field
14. Click Export.
1638 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.

Pointools Format
POD (Point Database) files are Bentley's native point cloud format. No specific
dialog appears when you export a selection to this format. A selection can be a
cloud, a scan, a station or a project. Points, color, intensity and normal (if
available) information (from the selection) are then exported.

Note: The POD file format for Pointools does support the point cloud
classification.

PTS Format
Only an object of cloud type can be exported to the PTS format. If you try to
export anything else, like e.g. a pure geometry, an error dialog appears. If the
object has the two types, only the cloud property will be exported.

To Export to a PTS Format File:

1. In the Export Options dialog, if there are several frames available in your
project, click on the Export Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Choose a frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Choose to export (or not) the color information by checking (or un-
checking) the Export RGB Color option.

Note: The Exported Intensity options is always checked and dimmed. This
means that the intensity information is always exported.

4. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.


5. Choose a unit of measurement from the list.
6. Click Export. The Export Options dialog closes.
Exporting Data 1639

AutoCAD (DXF) Format


DXF for Drawing eXchange Format is an ASCII file format of an AutoCAD®
drawing file. Exporting to the DXF format means to export a selection from
RealWorks to the AutoCAD® application. AutoCAD® includes the notion of
layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information
about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of
traditional layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved during the export; each
group or lone object has its own layer. You can only export one project at a
time; in this case every type of object (geometries and clouds) in the project
can be exported, except frames, measurements, feature code sets and
registration entities.

To Export to a DXF Format File:

1. In the Export as DXF File dialog, choose an option among those listed
below.

 Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of objects you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
 Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Cloud Rendering: This option lets you select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud. You have choice among all available,
except "White Color" and "Layer".
 Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
 Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.

2. Click Export. The Export as DXF File dialog closes.

Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.

Note: Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field. Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will
gray out both the Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export
Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane options.
1640 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

ASCII Format
ASCII is the acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Exporting to this file format involves exporting a selection from RealWorks to
the ASCII format. You can only export one project at a time; in this case only
point clouds are exported. In such conditions, an ASCII file format is composed
of a header (mainly comments) and a set of lines. Each line is composed of
one point with coordinates (X, Y and Z), and where present, attributes like
intensity, normal or color.

To Export to an ASCII Format File:

1. In the Export as ASCII File dialog, choose an option among those listed
below.

 Export Frame allows you to select which frame will be applied to the
exported data.
 Unit allows you to select the unit system that will be applied to the
exported data.
 Separator allows you to specify a separator to set between each value
(Semicolon, Comma, Tabulation and Space).
 Decimal Char allows you to specify the decimal char (Point or Comma).
 Coordinate System allows you to choose between Cartesian system (X, Y
and Z) and Global system (also called Geodetic Northing, Easting, and
Elevation system).
 Decimal Places allows you to define the decimal places.
 Export Intensity allows you to export data with intensity attributes.
 Export Normal allows you to export data with normal attributes.
 Export RGB color allows you to export data with RGB color attributes.

2. Click Export. The Export as ASCII File dialog closes.

Note: You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.

Caution: A warning appears in the case there is no cloud or the clouds are
empty in the selection.

Note: When the selection is the whole project, no matter the name you enter in
the Export Selection dialog, an ASC format file is created for each station of
the project. Each ASC file is named based on the station name. When the
selection is a station/scan, a unique ASC format file is created and it has the
name you entered in the Export Selection dialog.
Exporting Data 1641

LandXML Format
Several companies, including Autodesk, teamed up to create a method for
exchanging project information across different software packages and
LandXML is the result. LandXML is a generic, text-based file format used to
save project data. It is similar to a DXF™ file, which is a generic file format for
vector-based drawing information.

To Export to a LandXML Format File:

1. Select a Mesh (or a Polyline)* from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Select the Export Selection feature from the list. The Export Selection
dialog opens.
4. Click on the File of Type pull-down arrow.
5. Select LandXML Files (*.xml) as file type.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Export Selection dialog closes.

 Each Mesh is exported as a surface,


 Each break-line (a 3D Polyline or a 2D Polyline with a Normal direction
different from the Z-axis) is exported as a surface,
 All Contours (Polylines with a Normal direction parallel to the Z-axis) are
exported as a surface.

Note: (*) Selecting anything else will generate the following warning message
"Name of the selected item has not been exported".
1642 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Autodesk FilmBoX (BX) Format


The FBX file format is a proprietary format, owned by Autodesk. It is used to
provide interoperability between applications when creating digital contents.
The entities you can export (from RealWorks) to a FBX format file are of two
types: Geometry and Mesh.

When you export a geometry, the geometry itself will not be exported but only
its mesh version. This mesh version of the geometry comes from a conversion
with two parameters you have to set. The geometries you can export are listed
here: Box, Cylinder, Ellipsoid, Extrusion, Plane, Plane with hole(s), Pyramid,
Rectangular torus (open or closed), Sphere. When you export a mesh,
whatever the type of the mesh (a merged mesh, a textured mesh or a colored
mesh), it will be exported as a mesh but without the color information.

In the FBX format, the position and the orientation of an object are expressed
in a right-hand coordinate system with the Y-Axis directed to the Up.
RealWorks has also a right-hand coordinate system, but with the Z-Axis
directed to the Up instead. When exporting, a conversion will be performed so
that the views (Front, Up, Left) are identical in RealWorks and in the FBX
format.

To Export as an Autodesk FilmBox Format File:

1. In the Export as FBX (Autodesk FilmBox) File dialog, click on the Export
Frame pull-down arrow.
2. Select a coordinates frame to apply from the drop-down list.
3. Click on the Unit pull-down arrow.
4. Select a unit system to apply in the Unit field.

 If a mesh has been selected as input, jump to step 5.


 If a geometry has been selected as input, define the Length and Angle
parameters in the Convert to Mesh Parameters panel. Both of them
enable to control the accuracy of a conversion.

The Angle parameter expresses the maximum length when discretized an arc.
The Length parameter lets the user define the maximum length of an edge in a
triangle.
Exporting Data 1643

1 - An entity of geometry type 3 - Angle parameter


2 - A triangular polygon 4 - Length parameter

a) Input a distance value in the Length field.

And/or

b) Input a distance value in the Angle field.

5. Click Export. The Export as FBX (Autodesk FilmBox) File dialog closes.

Note: An object of Cloud, Point, Segment and Polyline type cannot be


exported to the FBX format. A warning dialog opens in case you try to export
this kind of entity. At the same time, an empty FBX format file is created.

Caution: When a group of objects has been selected as input, the hierarchy of
the objects in the group is preserved in the FBX format.

Caution: Do not put the parameters Length and Angle too small. Otherwise,
the conversion of the mesh will take a lot of memory and time.
1644 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

TDX Format
The idea behind the TDX format is to enable the exchange of data between
Trimble Business Center and Trimble RealWorks. The requirements for being
able to export to the TDX format is to have a selection from the Project Tree,
and to be in the Registration configuration. The selection (input) can be
everything from the Project Tree, but the result (output) is the entire project.

To Export to the TDX Format:

1. In the TDX Export dialog, choose an option:

 Standard: This option creates both a TDX format and a TDF folder which
contains all scan files of the project.
 Linked to Current Project: This option creates only a TDX format file. No
TDF

2. Click Export. The Export as DXF File dialog closes.

Note: Scan data (scans, stations, and leveling information) except images is
not exported from RealWorks.

AutoDesk RCP format


RCP files are the project files for Recap from AutoDesk. To be able to export to
the AutoDesk Recap file format, you need to have Recap Pro, already installed
on your computer as well as a valid license.

Note: If the Recap license has expired or is not valid for any reason, the export
will be available in RealWorks but will fail with an error message.

Inputs of the Export


Any selection of cloud type can be exported. In Production, the selection can
be a project, a group, or a set of clouds. In Registration, a selection can be a
set of scans.
Exporting Data 1645

Outputs of the Export


If there is no frame other than the one by default, i.e. the Home frame, only
point clouds from the selection are exported, with the information of Intensity
and/or Color (if present), in Meter.

If there are some frames in the project, the Export Options dialog displays and
the user is able to choose one to apply:

Once the export is complete, a file with the RCP extension and a folder, named
following to the file name with the "Support" extension, are created. For each
selected object (scan or cloud), a scan, with the RCS extension is created.

Caution: ReCap has a hard limit of one point per cubic millimeter. As a result,
the number of points in the Recap point cloud may be less than the number of
points of the exported point cloud.
1646 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Solids for AutoCAD


AutoCAD's native file format, DWG, and to a lesser extent, its interchange file
format, DXF, have become de facto standards for CAD data interoperability.
From 1982 to 2007, Autodesk created versions of AutoCAD which wrote no
less than 18 major variants of the DXF and DWG file formats. Here below are
the numerous versions of AutoCAD.

Product Version
AutoCAD® 2010 v.u.24
AutoCAD® 2009 v.u.23.1.01
AutoCAD® 2008 v.u.22.1.01
AutoCAD® 2007 v.u.21.1.01
AutoCAD® 2006 v.u.20.1.01
AutoCAD® 2005 v.u 19.1.01
AutoCAD® 2004 v.u 18.1.01
AutoCAD® 2002 v.u 16.1.01
AutoCAD® 2000 v.u 15.0.02
AutoCAD® Release 14 v.u 14.1.04
AutoCAD® Release 13 v.u 13.1.01

In RealWorks, the user can export the primitives listed in the table below.

Primitive Special Case Export DXF1 Export DWG


Box Polygon Mesh 3D Solid
Composite Curve3 Polyline (LW) Polyline4
Circle Arc Full Arc Circle
Arc Arc Arc
Circular Torus Polygon Mesh 3D Solid

Cloud N Points N Points

Cloud 2D N Points N Points

Cone Polygon Mesh 3D Solid

Cylinder No Bounds Circle with Thickness 3D Solid


With Bounds Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh
Eccentric Cone Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh

Ellipse Arc Polyline Ellipse

Ellipsoid Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh

Extrusion6 Closed Polyface Mesh 3D Solid


Open & Bound (DWG) Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh
Inspection 1D N Lines N Lines
(LW)Polyline4 (LW)Polyline4
Inspection 2D Image & TIF image Image & TIF image
Exporting Data 1647
Mesh Polyface Mesh (Max: Polyface Mesh (Max:
32767 vertices) 32767 faces)
Ortho-Image Image & TIF image Image & TIF image

Plane(6) No Holes Polyface Mesh Region


With Holes Polyface Mesh N Regions
Point Point Point

Polyline (LW)Polyline4 (LW)Polyline4

Pyramid Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh

Rectangular Torus Polygon Mesh 3D Solid

Segment Line Line

Sphere No Bounds Polygon Mesh 3D Solid


With Bounds Polygon Mesh Polyface Mesh
Volume N (LW)Polyline4 N (LW)Polyline4

Note:
 1 Export in DXF version R14.
 2 Possibility to export in DWG version R12, R13, R14, R15 (2000/2002),
R18 (2004/2005), R21 (2007) and R24 (2010).
 3 DWG export case: ellipse arcs are exported as segments from start to
end point.
 4 LWPolyline by default, Polyline when exporting coplanar polyline as 3D
Polyline checked.
 5 DWG export case: Less powerful than DXF export. Use the last R24
version for best result.
 6 DWG export case: Full ellipses well managed, ellipse arcs are exported
as segments.
1648 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

AutoCAD (DWG) Format


DWG - for DraWinG - is a binary file format used by AutoDesk's AutoCAD
software. It can contain 2D or 3D objects. Exporting to the DWG format means
to export a selection from RealWorks to the AutoCAD application. AutoCAD
includes the notion of layers which can be used as a tool for organizing and
gathering information about a drawing. These layers can be considered as an
electronic version of traditional layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved
during the export; each group or lone object has its own layer. You can only
export one project at a time; in this case every type of object (geometries and
clouds) in the project can be exported, except frames, measurements, feature
code sets and registration entities.

To Export to Solids for AutoCAD (DWG) Format:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Select the Export Selection feature from the list. The Export Selection
'Name of Data to be exported' dialog opens.
4. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
5. Select Solids for AutoCAD Files (*.dwg) as file type.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Export as DWG File dialog opens.

 Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD.
 Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
 Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Cloud Rendering: This option allows you to select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud.
 Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
 Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.

9. Select the kind of object to be exported in the Export Of field.


10. Select the coordinate frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.
11. Select the unit system to be applied in the Unit field.
12. Select a rendering for point clouds.
Exporting Data 1649

13. Check the Export Coplanar Polylines As 3D DXF Polylines option, if


required.
14. Check the Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane option, if required.
15. Click Export. The Export as DWG File dialog closes.

Note:
 You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
 Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field.
 Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export Coplanar
Polylines in XY Plane options.
1650 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

AutoCAD (DXF) Format


DXF - for Drawing eXchange Format - is an ASCII file format of an AutoCAD®
drawing file. Exporting to the DXF format means to export a selection from
RealWorks to the AutoCAD application. AutoCAD includes the notion of layers
which can be used as a tool for organizing and gathering information about a
drawing. These layers can be considered as an electronic version of traditional
layers. The selection hierarchy is preserved during the export; each group or
lone object has its own layer. You can only export one project at a time; in this
case every type of object (geometries and clouds) in the project can be
exported, except frames, measurements, feature code sets and registration
entities.

To Export to Solids for AutoCAD (DXF) Format:

1. Select data to be exported from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Select the Export Selection feature from the list. The Export Selection
'Name of Data to be exported' dialog opens.
4. Click on the File of Type pull down arrow.
5. Select Solids for AutoCAD Files (*.dxf) as file type.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Export as DWG File dialog opens.

 Version: This option allows you to choose from the various versions of
AutoCAD
 Export Of: This option allows you to choose which kind of object you want
to export: Selected Clouds and Geometries, Selected Geometries or
Selected Clouds.
 Export Frame: A project may contain several coordinate frames. This
option allows you to select which coordinate frame you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option allows you to select the unit system you want to apply to
the exported data.
 Cloud Rendering: This option allows you to select a rendering that will be
applied to the exported point cloud.
 Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines: Coplanar polylines will be
exported as 3D DXF polylines. That is to say that all circle arcs will be
discretized in segments.
 Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane: All nodes of the polyline(s) are
exported in the XY plane.

9. Select the kind of object to be exported in the Export of field.


10. Select the coordinate frame to be applied in the Export Frame field.
11. Select the unit system to be applied in the Unit field.
12. Select a rendering for point clouds.
Exporting Data 1651

13. Check the Export Coplanar Polylines As 3D DXF Polylines option, if


required.
14. Check the Export Coplanar Polylines in XY Plane option, if required.
15. Click Export. The Export as DXF File dialog closes.

Note:
 You can also select and export a scan/station of a project in the Models
(or Scans) Tree.
 Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out the
Cloud Rendering field.
 Selecting Selected Geometries in the Export Of field will gray out both the
Export Coplanar Polylines as 3D DXF Polylines and Export Coplanar
Polylines in XY Plane options.
1652 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export with Advanced Features


The Advanced Exports features are dedicated to the export of an object (or set
of objects) created within RealWorks.

Export Object Properties


You can export an item (or a set of items) properties as a report in the RTF file
format. These properties are those found in the Property window. Any selection
(or multi-selection) from the Project Tree except the WorkSpace node (also
from the Project Tree) swaps the Export Object Properties command to
enabled.

To Export Object Properties:

1. Select a project (or group, station or other item) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Object Properties feature from the list. The Export
dialog opens.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. In the Options panel, choose one of the following:

 Selection: The selected item properties are exported. If there are sub-
items under the selected item; all the sub-items properties are exported
too. If there is no sub-item under the selected item, only its own properties
are exported.
 Projection of Selection: The properties of all items and sub-items that
belong the project the selection is from are exported.
 All Project Trees: The properties of all items and sub-items that belong to
the Scans, Targets, Models and Images sub-trees are exported.

7. Check the Show File option to automatically open the report after
exporting.
8. Click Save. The Export dialog closes.
Exporting Data 1653

Export Images
You can export a single image (or a set of images) to the JPEG format (with
JPG as extension).

To Export an Image:

1. Select an image (or a set of images) from the Images Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Image feature from the list. The Export Image dialog
opens.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. Click Save.

 If only one image has been selected, the Export Image dialog closes.
 If a set of images has been selected, the Export Image dialog displays the
next image to save and so on.

Tip: You can right-click on an image in the Images Tree and select Export
Image from the pop-up menu.
1654 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export Ortho-Images
Tiff (or Tif) is the acronym for Tagged Image File Format. It is one of the most
popular and flexible current public domain raster file format. Exporting an
ortho-image involves saving it in a Tiff (or Tif) format. With the Tiff image, is
created a file of the same name and with the TXT extension. This file contains
the four corners for the Tiff image: Top Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom
Right. These corners are useful for locating an ortho-image in 3D.

To Export an Ortho-Image:

1. Select an ortho-image from the Images Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Ortho-Image feature from the list. The Export Ortho-
Image dialog opens. The Tag Image Format Files (*.TIF) type is default-
set in the File of Type field.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the ortho-image in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. Click Save.

Note:
 You can export an ortho-image as a 3D Tiff. To do this, select first the
Export Selection feature, then AutoCAD Files (*.dxf) as file’s type.
 If a set of ortho-images has been selected, the export is done one by one
from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each ortho-
image.

Tip: You can right-click on an ortho-image from the Images Tree and select
Export Ortho-Image from the pop-up menu.
Exporting Data 1655

Export Measurements
You can export a measurement (or a set of measurements) as a report in the
Excel format (*.CSV files). Only measurements from an active project (selected
project) are exported. For a Point to Point Distance Measurement, its type,
name, length, delta X, delta Y, delta Z, extremity 1 and extremity 2 values
exported. For an Angular Measurement, its type, name and the angle value are
exported. For a 3D Point Measurement, its type, name and X,Y,Z values. For
an Orientation Measurement, its type, name and the center, azimuth angle and
tilt angle values are exported.

To Export a Measurement:

1. Select a measurement from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Measurements feature from the list The Export
Measurements dialog opens.
4. The Excel Files (*.CSV) type is default-set in the File of Type field.
5. Type a name in the File Name field.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Click Save. The Export Measurements dialog opens.

 Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to
the exported data.
 Separator*: A separator can be a Semicolon, Comma or Tabulation.
 Decimal Char: A decimal symbol can be either a Point or a Comma.
 Options**: There are five types of measurement to export: Point to Point
Distance Measurement, Angle Measurement, 3D point Measurement,
Orientation Measurement and Polyline Measurement. Only one type can
be selected at a time.

8. Select a frame to apply from the Export Frame field.


9. Select a separator to use from the Separator field.
10. Select a decimal char to apply from the Decimal Char field.
11. Check an option.
12. Click Export.

Note:
 (*) The required Separator when exporting to the CSV format is a Comma.
If the user selects a Semicolon (or Tabulation) Separator instead, a
warning message appears and advices the user that the measurement(s)
will be exported as a TXT format report.
1656 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 (**) When you select a type of measurement from the Models Tree, only
the option (from the Options panel) of the same type is enabled and the
other options are dimmed. When you select a set of measurements that
covers all types, the four options are enabled. You need to choose an
option; otherwise the Export button remains dimmed.
 You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char.
Exporting Data 1657

Export Feature Sets


Generally, a Feature Point is composed of three items: Point Number, Point
Coordinates and Point Feature Code. Name and description are optional.
Exporting a Feature Set from RealWorks involves exporting such set of
information in an ASCII file format.

To Export a Feature Set:

1. Select a feature sets from the Models Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Feature Sets feature from the list. The Feature Set
ASCII Export dialog opens. The ASCII Files (*.ASC) type is default-set in
the File of Type field.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field. The ASC extension is added
automatically.
6. Click Save. The ASCII Feature Set Export dialog opens.

 Export Frame: This option enables to select a frame that will be applied to
the exported data.
 Unit: This option enables to select the unit system that will be applied to
the exported data.
 Separator: A separator can be Semicolon, Comma and Tabulation.
 Decimal Char: A decimal char can be either a Point or a Comma.
 Feature Set Export Options: Options in that panel enables to express a
Feature Set in either the Cartesian coordinate system or the Global
coordinates system. If required, the user can add a description.

7. Select a coordinate frame to apply from the Export Frame field.


8. Select a unit system to use from the Unit field.
9. Select a separator to use from the Separator field.
10. Select a decimal char to apply from the Decimal Char field.
11. Check an option.
12. Click Export.

Note:
 You can only export one Feature Set at a time. If you select a set of
Feature Sets, only the last (from the selection list) is exported.
 The Dash-Line Segments (or Continuous Segments) that have been
chosen to link each Feature Point in the Feature Set tool are not exported.
 You cannot combine a Comma Separator with a Comma Decimal Char.

Warning: A warning message appears if the selection (as input) is not a


feature set and the export is aborted.
1658 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export TZF Images


With the Export TZF Images feature, you are able to export each TZF Scan as
a Jpg image file. Each pixel that composed a TZF Scan is exported.

To Export TZF Images:

1. Select a project (or a set of stations or a station)* or a TZF Scan.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export TZF Images feature from the list. The Select New File
Folder dialog opens.
4. Navigate to the drive/folder where you want the image files to be stored in
the In field.
5. Select the folder** and click Ok. The Export TZF Images dialog opens.
6. Choose a layer to export between Luminance Only and Color Only.
7. Or choose Both Luminance and Color (all layers).
8. Click OK. The Export TZF Images dialog closes.

 For each TZF Scan, a Jpg image file is created.


 If a luminance layer is found and the Luminance Only (or Both Luminance
and Color) option has been checked, the file is created with the name
TZF_FileName_Intensity.
 If a color layer is found and the Color Only (or Both Luminance and Color)
option, the file is created with then name TZF_File_Name_Color.

Note:
 (*) A warning dialog opens if there is no TZF Scan within your selection.
 (*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Exporting Data 1659

Note: (**) In the case where the Jpg image files are not writable to the folder
(lack of space or lack of permissions), an Error message is then shown.
1660 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Convert to BSF Format File


This tool provides the user with the ability to convert a station* (or set of
stations* or a project) created from files of TZS (or TZF) format downloaded in
RealWorks to LaserGen file(s) (*.BSF). If the stations have been registered
within RealWorks, the registration parameters will be taken into account when
converting.

To Convert to BSF Format File:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project) from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Convert to BSF feature from the list.

 If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the BSF
Conversion Using Registered Stations dialog opens.
 If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you
want to process all stations or not. Click Yes. The BSF Conversion Using
Registered Stations dialog opens.

Note:
 The stations can be empty.
 (*) If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the
Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.
Exporting Data 1661

Filter Data
The procedures hereafter are in option. When the user decides to not apply the
filter (or the sampling); the whole scan data will be taken.

Spatial Sampling
The Spatial Sampling method allows you to obtain a point cloud with a
homogeneous spatial density that you have to define.

To Sample Spatially:

1. In the Filtering (Optional) panel, check the Spatial Sampling option. The
Resolution field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a value in the Resolution field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.

Filter by Range
The By Range allows you to define a distance (from the center of the FX
instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into account. This filter is only
applied to the scan data.

To Filter by Range:

1. Check the Filter by Range option. The Max Distance field becomes
editable.
2. Enter a value in the Max Distance field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.

Filter by Zone
The By Zone option allows filtering by defining a bounding box. The Min Point
and Max Point are the two extremities of a bounding box diagonal.

To Filter by Zone:

1. Check the By Zone option. The Min Point and Max Point fields become
editable.
2. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Min Point field.
3. Enter a 3D coordinates in the Max Point field.
1662 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define the Output Intensity of Points


You can define the Output Intensity of points for each TZS (or TZF) format file.
This means that all points will be scaled up (or down) to the Intensity defined
by the user.

To Define the Output Intensity of Points:

1. Click on the Output Intensity Max pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a value from 256 to 8192.

Define the Output Files

The Output Files panel lets the user choose between two methods for
converting TZS (or TZF) format files to BSF format files: By Volume or By
Stations. If required, the user can generate a preview and define a location
where the conversion will be placed.
Exporting Data 1663

By Volume
This feature allows you to split a single (or a set of) registered station(s) along
the X, Y and Z axes of the current coordinate system into a set of cloud data.
Each corresponds to a BSF format file and as name: Cloud_Xn_Yn'_Zn''. All
will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel). If the
cloud data is empty; no BSF format file will be created.

To Convert the TZS (or TZF) Format Files into a Set of Cubes:

1. In the Output Files panel, check the By Volume option (if required).
2. In the Volume Properties panel, click on the pull-down arrow.
3. Choose between Number of Cubes and Cube Size.

 If the Number of Cubes option has been selected:

a) Enter a number value in the Number in X field.


b) Or you can use the Up (or Down ) button to select a
number value.
c) Repeat the steps for the Number in Y and Number in Z fields.

 If the Cube Size option has been selected:

a) Enter a length value in the Length in X field.


b) Or you can use the Up (or Down ) button to select a
length value.
c) Repeat the steps for the Length in Y and Length in Z fields.

4. Enter a number value in the Minimum of Points in Cube for File Creation
field.
5. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to select a number value.
6. Click Convert.

 The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF) format file to the last.
For each TZS (or TZF) format file, there are two stages.
 You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc, only when the
first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.
1664 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 The Trimble Scan Files to BSF Conversion Using Registered Stations


dialog closes on its own (before the end of the conversion).

Note: If the Coordinate System in Preferences is "North, East, Elevation"; you


will have N, E and El in place of X, Y and Z.
Exporting Data 1665

By Station
Each TZS (or TZF) format file will be converted into a unique BSF format file
(one per file). Each BSF format file will have as name its related TZS (or TZF)
file. All will be put under the Scan Folder (defined in the Output Files panel).

To convert a TZS Format File to a BSF Format File:

1. Check the By Station option. The Volume Properties panel becomes


dimmed.
2. Click Convert.

 The conversion is done from the first TZS (or TZF) format file to the last.
For each TZS (or TZF) format file, there are two stages.
 You can abort the conversion operation by pressing Esc, only when the
first stage is in progress. In this case, the following dialog appears.

 The Trimble Scan Files to BSF Conversion Using Registered Stations


dialog closes of its own (before the end of the conversion).
1666 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Folder
The Default Folder is the folder where the TZS (or TZF) files are located. The
Scan Folder is the folder where BSF files (once converted) will be put. By
default, it has the same name as the project created within RealWorks.

To Define the Output Files Folder:

1. In the Output Files panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save
In Folder dialog opens.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the BSF format files in the Save In field.
3. Select and open the folder by double-clicking.
4. Click Save. The Save In Folder dialog closes.

Scan Folder Name


The Scan Folder is the folder where the BSF format file will be put under. By
default, its name is ProjectX where X is its order.

To Define the Scan Folder Name:

1. Keep the default name which is the project name.


2. Or enter a new name in the Scan Folder Name field.

Preview BSF Format File


You can generate a preview of the whole TZS (or TZF) format files. This
preview is a sample* and will have the same name as the Scan Folder and will
be put under a folder named Preview.

To Generate a Preview BSF Format File:

 In the Output Files panel, check the Generate a Preview BSF File option.

Note: (*) The Sampling parameter is set by default to 100 mm.


Exporting Data 1667

Convert to BSF
Two folders (CAD and Scans) are created and rooted under the Default Folder
(the one defined in the Output Files panel) as well as a file named
Scan_Centers (with BWS as extension). This file is a list of all TZS (or TZF) file
centers. The preview and the BSF (respectively in Preview and Scan Folder)
are all put under the Scans folder.

Note: You cannot convert a station (or a set of stations or a project) that is not
a Trimble Scan File with TZS (or TZF) extension. If you attempt to so, the
dialog below appears.
1668 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Convert to Gridded E57/PTX/PTS Format File


PTX, PTS and Gridded E57 are extensions for laser scanning files. Both are
ASCII based.

To Convert to E57/PTX/PTS Format File:

1. Select a station (or a set of stations or a project)* (with TZF Scans within)
from the Project Tree.
2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Convert to E57/PTX/PTS feature from the list.

 If a station (or a set of stations) has been selected as input, the Convert to
E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.
 If a project has been selected as input, a dialog opens and asks you if you
want to process all stations of the selected project.
 Click Yes. The Convert to E57/PTX/PTS dialog opens.

4. If required, apply a Sampling by Step to the data to export.


5. If required, specify a Folder where to store the file(s).
6. Choose an option between E57, PTX and PTS.
7. Click Convert.

Note: (*) The stations can be empty.


Exporting Data 1669

Note:
 If the TZF format file(s) has (have) not been yet processed, the Processing
TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to proceed to do so.
 All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

Note: RealWorks internally computes the final number of point a full resolution
extraction takes, and then, checks the local disk place. If there is a risk for the
operation to fail due to a lack of disk space, an information box pops up,
displays an estimated amount of needed space and the actual space left on
the selected disk. If there is no risk, nothing happens.

Sampling by Step
In the Sampling by Step method, one point will be taken into account at each
defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D Image Data.

To Sample by Step:

1. In the Filtering (Optional) field, check the Sampling by Step option. The
Step (in Pixels) field becomes enabled.
2. Enter a value in the Step (In Pixels) field.
3. Or use the Up (or Down ) button to choose a value.
1670 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Folder
The Default Folder is the folder where the TZF format files are.

To Define the Output Files Folder:

1. In the Output panel, click on the Default Folder button. The Save In
Folder dialog opens.
2. Locate a drive/folder to store the PTS (or PTX) format files in the Save In
field.
3. Select the folder and click Save. The Save In Folder dialog closes.

Gridded E57
The E57 format is a file format specified by the ASTM (American Society for
Testing and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (Point Clouds, images
and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as laser scanners. Such
format enables data interoperability among 3D imaging hardware and software
systems and is not dependent on proprietary formats for storing and
exchanging data.

To Convert to E57 Format:

 In the Output Files panel, check the E57 option.

Note: An E57 format file is created for each TZF scan. The E57 format file is
named according to the name of the TZF format file.

Note: Each TZF Scan is exported to the E57 format as a regular grid point
sets.
Exporting Data 1671

PTS
A PTS format file contains a set of lines information. The Number of Points in
the file is at the first line followed by as many lines as there are points. Each
line corresponds to a Point with the X,Y,Z coordinates, intensity information
(from -2047 to +2048).

To Convert to PTS Format:

 In the Output Files panel, check the PTS option.

Note:
 The PTS option applies the station registrations to point coordinates and
then writes them.
 The unit of measurement is in Meter.
 A PTS format file is created for each TZF scan. The PTS format file is
named according to the name of the TZF format file.

PTX
A PTX format file also contains a set of lines information. The Number of
Columns and the Number of Points per Column in the file are respectively at
the first and the second line followed by a series of sets of lines. The Number
of Lines in a set corresponds to the Number of Points. The first set - which
comes after the two first lines of the file - defines the first column, the next set
the second column, and so on. Each line corresponds to a Point with the
following information: x,y,z,i (from 0.0 to 1.0). If there is no scanning data
(because of sky e.g.), the Point on the column still exists but contains zero.

To Convert to PTX Format:

 In the Output Files panel, check the PTX option.

Note:
 The PTX option writes the station registration information in the file header
and keep point coordinates unchanged.
 The unit of measurement is set to Meter.

A PTX format file is created for each TZF scan. The PTX format file is named
according to the name of the TZF format file. If the TZF Scan is colored, the
colors information are also exported into the PTX format file.
1672 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export Inspection Maps and Slices


Each inspection map is a plane which has two directions (Vertical and
Horizontal) whatever the shape (Plane, Tunnel or Cylinder) it has. The two
directions are illustrated by the Red and Green axes. You can export an
inspection map to the Tiff format or all of the slices done on the comparison
surfaces to the DXF (or DWG) format. Slices can be vertical (parallel to the
Green axis) or horizontal (parallel to the Red axis). Tiff is the acronym for
Tagged Image File Format. It is one of the most popular and flexible current
public domain raster file formats. The DXF file format is an ASCII file format
which describes CAD data defined by AutoDesk. This file format facilitates the
exchange of CAD data between two different programs. The DWG file format is
the binary file format from AutoCAD and AutoCAD LT.

Export an Inspection Map


Exporting an inspection map from RealWorks involves saving it in the Tiff
format. A TXT format file is also created. This file will contain four corners (Top
Left, Top Right, Bottom Left and Bottom Right). These corners are useful for
situating an inspection map in 3D.

To Export an Inspection Map:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Inspection Map feature from the list. The Export
Inspection Map dialog opens.
4. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
5. Enter a name in the File Name field.
6. Click Save.

Tip: You can select an inspection map from the Project Tree (or from the 3D
View) and select Export Inspection Map from the pop-up menu.

Note:
 You cannot export an inspection map that is not already created in the
database.
 If a set of inspection maps has been selected, the export is done one by
one, from the first to the last. The user only needs to click Save for each
inspection map.
Exporting Data 1673

Export Horizontal Slices


The Horizontal Slices are obtained by slicing an inspection map along the Red
axis (of its own frame) in case of a Plane (or a Tunnel) and along the Green
axis in case of a Tunnel. The slicing is done with a constant interval. These
slices are the same than those obtained when multi-slicing in the Sections &
Shifts in the Inspection Map Analyzer tool. A single slice is a pair of Red
Section and Green section. A Red Section results from the slicing over the
Reference Surface. A Green Section is one from the Comparison Surface.
When you export the slices to DXF (or DWG), the order is preserved. Each
slice has its own layer (also called Level). For a given slice, the difference of
elevations between the Red Section and the Green Section is displayed with a
value (in green), in the current unit of measurement. This difference can be
displayed along the slice with a constant interval (value in gray) that the user
has to define.

To Export the Horizontal Slices:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Inspection Map Horizontal Slices feature from the list.
The Export Horizontal Slices of Selection dialog opens.
4. Click on the Type of File pull down arrow.
5. Choose from a version of DWG (or DXF) format.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Horizontal Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 Horizontal Interval: This interval is a constant step used for displaying the
difference in elevations between the Red Section and the Green Section.
This constant step is a distance value.
 Vertical Interval: This interval is a constant step used for slicing
horizontally the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in
Section & Shifts (in Inspection Map Analyzer tool) when multi-slicing. This
constant step is a distance value when the inspection map is a Plane (or
Tunnel). It is an angle when the inspection map is a Cylinder.
 Amplification Factor: This factor is used for magnifying the differences in
elevations when they are too small for viewing.
 Reference Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Reference Surface.
 Comparison Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Comparison Surface.
 Layer Numbering Offset: This option enables to shift the naming of the
exported slices.
 Unit: This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.
1674 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

9. In the Horizontal Interval field, enter a distance value (or angular value) if
the inspection map is a Plane/Tunnel (or Cylinder).
10. In the Vertical Interval field, enter a distance value.
11. Give a value in the Amplification Factor field.
12. Enter a name in the Reference Surface Title field.
13. Enter a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
14. Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit drop-down list.
15. Click Export. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

Note:
 The unit of measurement for a distance value is by-default set to Meter;
you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
 The unit of measurement for an angular value is by-default set to Degree;
you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).

Caution: In Sections & Shifts of the Inspection Map Analyzer tool, you cannot
slice an inspection map of tunnel shape horizontally while in the Export
Inspection Map Vertical Slices feature you can.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Export Inspection Map Horizontal Slices feature can
be reached from the Export list, on the Home tab.
Exporting Data 1675

From a Plane Inspection


If the selected inspection map is a Plane; a Horizontal Slice has the shape
shown below:
1676 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - The difference of elevations 2 - The Horizontal Interval 3 - The Vertical Interval


between the Reference parameter parameter (=between two
Surface and the Comparison consecutive slices)
Surface at constant interval
Exporting Data 1677

From a Cylinder Inspection


If the inspection map is a Cylinder; a Horizontal Slice has the shape shown
below:

1 - The Vertical Interval 2 - The Horizontal Interval 3 - The difference of elevations


parameter (between two parameter between the Reference and
consecutive slices) Comparison surfaces at
constant interval
1678 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From a Tunnel Inspection


If the inspection map is a Tunnel; a Horizontal Slice has the shape shown
below:
Exporting Data 1679

1 - The Horizontal Interval 2 - The Vertical Interval 3 - The difference of elevations


parameter parameter (=between two between the Reference and
consecutive slices) Comparison surfaces at
constant interval

If an Alignment Stationing (on page 970) has been applied to the selected 3D
Path, the stationing information in the drawing helps the user to visualize which
Horizontal Slice is at which position along the alignment
1680 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: You can specify the style used to format a station value in the
Preferences / Units (see "Units Preferences" on page 127).
Exporting Data 1681

Export Vertical Slices


The Vertical Slices are obtained by slicing an inspection map along the Green
axis (of its own frame) in case of a Plane (or a Tunnel) and along the Red axis
in case of a Cylinder. The slicing is done with a constant interval. These slices
are the same than those obtained when multi-slicing in Sections & Shifts in the
Inspection Map Analyzer tool. A slice is a pair of Red Section and Green
Section. A Red Section results from slicing over the Reference Surface. The
Green Section is the one from the Comparison Surface. When you export the
slices to DXF (or DWG), the order is preserved. Each slice has its own layer
(also called Level). For a given slice, the difference of elevations between the
red and green sections is displayed with a value (in green) in the current unit of
measurement. This difference can be displayed along the slice with a constant
interval (value in gray) that the user has to define.

To Export Vertical Slices:

1. Select an inspection map from the Project Tree.


2. In the Import/Export group, click on the Export pull-down arrow.
3. Choose the Export Inspection Map Vertical Slices feature from the list. The
Export Vertical Slices of Selection dialog opens.
4. Click on the Type of File pull down arrow.
5. Choose between DWG and DXF format.
6. Locate a drive/folder to store the file in the Look In field.
7. Enter a name in the File Name field.
8. Click Save. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog opens.

 Horizontal Interval: This interval is a constant step used for displaying the
difference in elevations between red and green sections. This constant
step is a distance value when the inspection map is a Plane (or Tunnel). It
is an angle when the inspection map is a Cylinder.
 Vertical Interval: This interval is a constant step used for vertically slicing
the inspection map. It is the same as the Interval used in Section & Shifts
when multi-slicing. The constant step is distance value.
 Amplification Factor: This factor is used for magnifying the differences in
elevations when they are too small for viewing.
 Reference Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Reference Surface.
 Comparison Surface Title: This option enables to define a name for the
Comparison Surface.
 Layer Numbering Offset: This option enables to shift the naming of the
exported slices.
 Unit: This option enables to choose a unit of measurement.

9. In the Horizontal Interval field, enter a value (distance or angle).


10. In the Vertical Interval field, enter a distance value.
11. Give a value in the Amplification Factor field.
1682 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

12. Enter a name in the Reference Surface Title field.


13. Enter a name in the Comparison Surface Title field.
14. Choose a unit of measurement from the Unit drop-down list.
15. Click Export. The Vertical Slices Export Parameters dialog closes.

Note:
 The unit of measurement for a distance value is set by default to Meter;
you do not have to enter “m” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
 The unit of measurement for an angular value is set by default to Degree;
you do not have to enter “°” and you can change it when necessary (refer
to the Preferences options for more details).
Exporting Data 1683

From a Plane Inspection


If the selected inspection map is a Plane; a Vertical Slice has the shape shown
below:

1 - The difference of elevations 2 - The Vertical Interval 3 - The Horizontal Interval


between the Reference and parameter parameter (=between two
Comparison surfaces at consecutive slices)
constant interval
1684 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

From a Cylinder Inspection


If the selected inspection map is a Cylinder; a Vertical Slice has the shape
shown below:

1 - The difference of elevations 2 - The Vertical Interval 3 - The Horizontal Interval


between the Reference and parameter parameter (= between two
Comparison surfaces at consecutive slices)
constant interval
Exporting Data 1685

From a Tunnel Inspection


If the selected inspection map is a Tunnel; a Vertical Slice looks as illustrated
below.
1686 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1 - The Vertical Interval 2 - The Horizontal Interval 3 - The difference of elevations


parameter parameter (=between two between the Reference and
consecutive slices) Comparison surfaces at
constant interval

If an Alignment Stationing (on page 970) has been applied to the selected 3D
Path, the stationing information can be found in two locations:

 In the title of each drawing. This helps the user to visualize which Vertical
Slice is at which position along the alignment:

 And in the title of each layer:


Exporting Data 1687

Note: You can specify the style used to format a station value in the
Preferences / Units (see "Units Preferences" on page 127).
1688 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Introduction
The Import Scans and Register feature is a batch processing tool. It enables to
execute a sequence of three action types in a Wizard manner, i.e. Input
Preparation (selection of gridded scan data files in TZF format and non-TZF
format, conversion of non-TZF format files to TZF format files, etc.), Data
Extraction (creation of sampled scans, station panoramic images, etc.) and
Scan Registration (with the Plane-Based or Target-Based method).

Launch the Import Scans and Register Feature


The Import Scans and Register feature is available indifferently in the
Registration module or in the Production module. It is accessible from the
Home tab, in the Import/Export group. and can be launched within an existing
project or with no project. In the first case, if the project is not saved yet,
Trimble RealWorks will prompt to save it first. If there are some scans in the
project, they will be selected and sent to the Import Scans and Register
feature, keeping the group hierarchy they are in. More scan files may be added
afterward. In the second case, Trimble RealWorks will prompt to create a new
project with PROJECT1 as default name. A RWP format file, a RWI folder and
a PROJECTNAME_Batch_Output folder are created under the location
specified by the user. The latter folder is used for storing various batch output
files: RMX, log and station panorama.

Caution: Do not process more than one time over a given dataset under the
same project. If done anyway, the Import Scans and Register feature will
duplicate extracted objects.

Note: Trimble RealWorks disables once the Import Scans and Register feature
is started.

Select Scan Data Files


The Import Scans and Register feature does only support the gridded scans
data with the following formats:

 TZF: Trimble scan file format


 TZS: Historical Trimble scan file format.
Exporting Data 1689

 PTX: ASCII based for scan file format.


 FLS: Scan file format from Faro Scene. It is a result of the import of
raw scan files provided by a Faro laser scanner.
 ZFS: Scan file format from Z+F instrument. aside with ZFPRJ for
project file and ZFI for images.
 E57: File format specified by the ASTM (American Society for Testing
and Materials), an international standards organization. It is compact
and vendor-neutral. It was developed for storing data (point clouds,
images and metadata) produced by 3D imaging systems such as
laser scanners.
 RSP: Project file format from Riegl. This file is text file using an XML
structure, and does not contain scan data but only links to the scan
data files which are stored in the RDB folder.

 Select Files: Enables to select a scan data file (or set of scan data
files) to be added to the list of files to be imported. The selected file
(or set of files) can be of (or a mix of) any supported file formats.
 Select Folder: Enables to select a folder (or a set of folders) to be
added to the list of files to be imported. All files from the set of
supported formats found under the selected folder(s) / sub folder(s)
will be added to a default group. The disk hierarchy will be not kept.
 New Group: Enables to create a new group.

If there is no existing project in Trimble RealWorks, all selected files will be


added in a one-level group whose name is Default Folder. The user will be
able to rename this default group either by pressing F2 or double-clicking the
name. If there is an existing project in Trimble RealWorks, all TZF Scans files
rooted directly under the project node will be selected and put under a group
named Scans Tree. Those that are under a first level group in Trimble
RealWorks, will be selected and put under a first level group in the Import
Scans and Register dialog with the same name. Those that are under a
second level group will not be selected and processed.
1690 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Caution: If there are some TZF format files out of the project RWI folder.
These files will be not selected and processed. When saving an existing
Trimble RealWorks project file as a new project, please choose to copy the
TZF Scan files into the new project. It is also possible to retrieve locally the
TZF Scan files using the Get TZF Scans Files button of Trimble RealWorks.

To remove a scan data file or a folder from the list of files to be imported, press
the Red Cross at its right side. To remove all files, click the Remove All button.
Once scan data files are added, the total number of files to be processed
displays in brackets in the dialog.

Note: A Riegl's RSP format file is a project file that points to a set of scan data
files. The number of files displayed in the dialog does not reflect the RSP
format file itself but the number of scan data files.

All selected TZF format files will be copied to the project RWI folder. TZF
format files, that need processing (Extended-Range, Color, Re-projection,
etc.), will be processed into new TZF files to the RWI folder. When processing
the TZF format files, the Import Scans and Register feature will always re-
compress the TZF format files. All non-TZF format files will be converted to the
TZF format. For those requiring additional inputs (i.e. the FLS format and the
ZFS format), the corresponding import parameters dialog pops up.
Exporting Data 1691

FLS Extraction Options

 GNSS: Adds the GPS information to the scan data.


 Tilt and Compass: Imports the Leveling information. The inclination of
scans will be used during the process of the registration of
overlapping scans. Imports the Orientation information, if the scan
data was recorded with an instrument equipped with a built-in
Compass.
 Color: Adds the Color information to the scan data (if they were
recorded with color).
 Equalize Luminance: Equalize point cloud luminance. This enhances
the visual perception of the luminance but might slightly affect the
target auto-extraction performances.

Z+F Extraction Options

 Filter by Intensity: This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels that


are below the Min. value and above the Max. value in terms of
Intensity. These two values are defined in percentage by the user.
The default values depend on the type of the scanner.
 Filter by Range: This filter, when it is chosen, discards pixels which
are not in the defined range. The filter is not active when the Min. and
the Max. values are equal to zero.
1692 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

 Filter Edge Points: This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels,


which are on edges of objects and therefore not valid. On edges you
have mixed range values, these range values are often between the
foreground and the background (but also possible in front or behind
objects).
 Filter Bottom: This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels from the
bottom of the instrument (Nadir) up to a user given angle.
 Remove Isolated Points: This filter, when it is chosen, removes pixels
which have no valid neighbor.
 Remove Bad Lines: This filter, when it is chosen, deletes the first scan
lines of recording, marked by the scanner as “bad” due to laser warm-
up procedure at the early beginning of the scan (first few scan-lines).
 Remove Scan Outer Boundary: This filter masks pixels at the outer
borders of the scan. The first and last line and the first and the last
pixel of each line are filtered.
 Remove Points at Range Discontinuities: This filter detects jumps in
range and filter out pixels.
 Remove Lines at Tilt Discontinuities: This filter, when it is chosen,
removes lines which show too big tilt changes.

Note: The Import Scans and Register feature cannot import directly surveyed
data produced by a data collector such as Total Stations (or Field Stations,
etc.), i.e. Topo Points. However, it is possible to use an existing project
containing Topo Points.

Set Point Cloud Extraction Options


There are three extraction methods available and only one extraction will be
performed at a time.
Exporting Data 1693

 Sampling by Step: With this sampling method, one point will be taken
into account at each defined Step vertically and horizontally in the 2D
image data.
 Spatial Sampling: With this sampling method, the user will obtain a
point cloud with a homogeneous spatial density that the user has to
define.
 Extract Preview: This option, when enabled, will create a scan by first
getting points, not based on a TZF Scan but from its preview, and by
computing the normals on them. A scan is always named Preview.
The number of points for each is less than two million points.
 Filter by Range: This filter will let the user define a distance (from the
center of the instrument) beyond which no point will be taken into
account. This filter is only applied to the scan data.

Note: The default unit of measurement is the unit of measurement set in the
Preferences / Units in Trimble RealWorks.

Note: A RWCX format file will be created for each extracted point cloud and,
this file will be put under the RWI folder.

Set Scan Data Registration Options


The user can register the data by using two available features, the Auto-
Register Using Planes feature which enables to automatically register the data
by extracting planes in the scans and matching them without using targets and
the Target-Based Registration feature which registers the stations by extracting
targets and automatically matching them together.

The Auto-Register Using Planes feature does not require any input parameter:
1694 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

The Target-Based Registration feature allows the user to select between Black
and White Flat Target and Spherical Target as type to use. To select Black and
White Flat Target, click the Black and White Flat Target button. To select
Spherical Target, first enter a value in the Diameter field and then click the
Spherical Target button.

Note: The default unit of measurement is the unit of measurement set in the
Preferences / Units in Trimble RealWorks.

Note: A Black and White Flat Target can appear only once as it has no size
while a Spherical Target can have several sizes, thus appearing several times
in the target list. The target extraction will be launched sequentially for the two
types (if the types have been defined) and for every diameter (if multiple sizes
have been defined).

To remove a type of target to use, select it from the target list and press the
Remove button at its right.

A Reference Station is a station whose position and orientation remain


unchanged through the registration process. The Import Scans and Register
feature will use the first leveled station as the Reference Station. If no station is
leveled, an arbitrary station is used.

All registration operations are performed on groups, each group having its own
Reference Stations. Groups are not registered together.
Exporting Data 1695

Execute the Batch Process


To execute the batch process once you have introduced all the necessary
values, press the Start button. The Import Scans and Register feature starts
executing a sequence of actions. The progress of each action can be
visualized thanks to a progress bar, 100% Green meaning "Succeeded" and
100% Red meaning "Failed". The Batch Monitor window, that appears,
displays for each selected TZF format file, the below progress bars:

 Importation (of the TZF format file),


 Copy of the imported TZF format file to the RWI folder.
 Extraction of the station panoramic image (from the TZF format file),
 Creation of a sampled scan (from the TZF format file),
 Addition of the created sampled scan in the RWI folder

And for all the selected TZF format files, the below progress bars:

 Registration.
 Extraction of RMX format files.
 Update of TZF format files.
 Job status.

There are three groups: In Progress, Completed and Failed. When the batch
process starts, all steps initially are stacked in the “In Progress” group.

Once a step is completed and succeeded, it is moved down under the


“Completed” group.
1696 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

If the step is completed and failed, it is moved down to the “Failed” group

Before starting the batch processing, the user can go back and modify any
parameters. Once the batch processing is launched, the Start button becomes
disabled. When the batch processing ends, the Finish button becomes
enabled. A folder whose name is Project Name_Batch Output opens and
contains the items listed below:

 Batch Log is a report in the HTML format. It contains the list of all
actions that have been performed.
 Registration Report is a report in the RTF format file.
 RMX Folder which contains a set of RMX format files, one per TZF
format file. A RMX format file is an ASCII-based file which contains
the registration parameters (vector of translation, axis of rotation and
angle of rotation).
 Set of JPG station panoramic images with the luminance information
and / or with the color information (if available).

When the batch processing is ended, press the Close button. Trimble
RealWorks switches back to "Enabled" in the Registration mode showing all
scans

Once launched, the batch processing cannot be paused but can be cancelled.
All completed operations will be reflected in the project file as the RWP file is
saved on the go after every successful operation.

Note: An empty registration report means that a registration has been


attempted but gave no result (no matching).
1697

CHAPTER 15

Collaborating and Sharing Data

You can share your data for collaboration purposes in a customizable and
professional format. You can publish your project, and view it easily in Internet
Explorer. The published project will be viewed in a 2.5D view. You have the
ability to take measurements, add annotations, and/or extract data from the
published project.

The Publish feature is available with the following types of license: Advanced,
Advanced Modeler, Advanced Plant and Advanced Tank, as illustrated below.

The Publish feature can be found in two places on the Home tab, when
dropping-down the Export list in the Import/Export group or in the Sharing
group. The Publish feature can also be found in the Sharing group, on the
Media tab.
1698 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Publish a Project
The input of the feature is a single project with at least one TZF format file
within. Otherwise, the feature is grayed out. If the TZF format file has not yet
been processed, the Processing TZF Scans dialog opens and prompts you to
proceed to do so. The output of the feature, both a published project and an
embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer, can then be distributed via a
media like a USB flash drive or DVD-Rom. To be able to view a published
project with the embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer, the user needs to
have a 64-bit OS (Seven or 8), Internet Explorer 8 (64 bits) or later and .Net
Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable 2010 X86.

Note: All leveled TZF Scans will be automatically re-projected during the Post-
Processing step.

To Publish a Project:

1. Select a project from the Project Tree.


2. From the File menu, select Publish . The Publish 'Project_Name' dialog
opens*.
3. Define the layout of a publication.
4. Add media in a publication.
5. Add links in a publication.
6. Reduce data size.
7. Enable data extraction.
8. Click Publish to start publishing.

Tip: You can abort the publication in progress by clicking Cancel.

Note: (*) If the selected project contains some TZF Scans for which the links to
the TZF format file are broken, a warning dialog with all missing TZF files
appears. Click OK to close it. The Publish 'Project_Name' dialog opens then.

Note: A RealWorks temporary project file is created during the publishing


process. This project file is named according to the current project name
followed by the word "Publisher". It will disappear once the publishing process
terminated.

Note: In the Ribbon, the Publish feature can be reached from the Export list,
on the Home tab.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1699

Define the Layout of a Publication


The default name in the Title field is the name of the published project. It's up
to you to give a name other than this default one. The default (or defined) Title
is the one which appears at the top left corner of the published page. A Logo is
an image file that may have the following formats: bmp, jpg, png and gif. It also
appears at the top left corner of the published page.

The Output folder is the folder where all the published files are located. The
default path to the Output folder is C:\Users\User_Name\Documents. The
default Background Color is yellow. The default Font Color is dark grey.

To Define the Layout of a Publication:

1. Click on the Page Configuration tab.


2. Do one of the following:

 Define a Title,
 Attach a Logo file,
 Define an Output Folder,
 Set a Background Color,
 Set a Font Color.

Title
To Edit a Title:

 Input a new name in the Title field.


1700 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Logo
To Add a Logo:

1. Click Open . The Open dialog opens.


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Logo file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Open dialog closes. The path to the Logo file is displayed
in the Logo line.

Tip: You can manually enter the path of a Logo file.

Output Folder
To Define an Output Folder:

1. Click Open . The Browse For Folder dialog opens.


2. Locate a drive/folder to store the published files.
3. If required, create a new folder by clicking Make New Folder.
4. Click Ok. The Browse For Folder dialog closes. The path to the defined
folder is displayed in the Output line.

Tip: You can manually enter the path of the Output folder.

Note: The defined Output folder will not be taken into account if you do not
publish your project (by clicking on the Publish button).
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1701

Background Color
There are nine Standard Colors: White, Gray, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Orange, and Purple.

To Set a Background Color:

1. Click on the Background pull-down arrow.


2. Choose color from the Standard Colors panel.

Or

3. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Colors panel expands.


4. Define a color.

Font Color
There are nine Standard Colors: White, Gray, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Orange, and Purple.

To Set a Font Color:

1. Click on the Font Color pull-down arrow.


2. Choose a color from the Standard Colors panel.

Or

3. Click Advanced. The Advanced Colors panel expands.


4. Define a color.
1702 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Include Media in a Publication


A Media item can be either an image or a video. An image file may have the
following formats: jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and bmp. A video file can be of the
following formats: WebM, Avi, MP4 and flv.

WebM is a new open standard for compressing Video content. It is based on


both the VP8 and Vorbis, respectively for the Video and for the Audio. Avi
(Audio Video Interleave) is a multimedia container format from Microsoft. MP4,
an abbreviated term for MPEG-4 Part 14 or MPEG-4 AVC, is also a multimedia
container format. FLV known as Flash Video, is a video file format used to
deliver video over the Internet using Adobe Flash Player.

Note: There is no restriction to the number of Media item you can add.

Add a Media File


To Add a Media File:

1. Click Open . The Open dialog opens.


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Media file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field (in the
Open dialog).
4. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

 The selected Media's name is displayed in the Title field.


 Its Path appears in the File Path field.

Note: First click on the Media tab.

Tip:
 You can manually enter the path of a Media to include when publishing.
 You can also manually edit a Media's name in the Title field.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1703

Add Another Media File


To Add Another Media File:

1. Click Add . Another Media line is added to the previous one.

becomes as illustrated below.

2. Click Open. The Open dialog opens.


3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Media file is located.
4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
5. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Note:
 First click on the Media tab, if not done.
 You cannot add another Media file unless the first Media has been added.

Remove a Media File


To Remove a Media File:

 From the Media tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.

Note: You cannot remove a Media file if there is only one.


1704 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Add Links in a Publication


What is a Link? A Link can be either a Path or URL pointing to a document, a
Web page, etc.

Add a Link
To Add a Link:

1. Click Open . The Open dialog opens.


2. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Link file is located.
3. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
4. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Note: First click on the Links tab.

Tip:
 You can manually enter the path of a Link to include when publishing.
 You can also manually edit a Link's name in the Title field.

Caution: If you add an application (.exe); it could be not worked if all


dependencies (of the application) are not present.

Note: When a Link points to a document, the document is copied into the final
published project.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1705

Add Another Link


To Add Another Media File:

1. Click Add . Another Link line is added to the previous one.

becomes as illustrated below.

2. Click Open. The Open dialog opens.


3. Navigate to the drive/folder where the Link file is located.
4. Click on the file to select it. Its name appears in the File Name field.
5. Click Open. The Open dialog closes.

Note:
 First click on the Links tab, if not done.
 You cannot add another Links unless the first Link has been added.

Remove a Link
To Remove a Media File:

 From the Links tab, click Subtract to remove the related line.

Note: You cannot remove a Link if there is only one.


1706 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Reduce the Size of the Data


You can publish with, or without reducing the size of the data. With the Full File
Size option, no compression is applied. With the Large File Size, or Medium
File Size, or Small File Size option, a Spatial Sampling (with a Step of 6 mm) is
applied, reducing by this way the number of points. With the Medium File Size,
or Small File Size option, each TZF Scan of the project is resized. The length
and the width are divided by two each time. The File Size is the size of the
project in the Data folder, once the sampling and the reduction of size are
applied. The Estimated Time is the time required to process the whole project.

To Reduce the Size of the Data:

 Drag to the slider up or down to choose a reduction level.

The information about the "File Size" and the "Estimated Time" are not
available if for each TZF Scan (of the project), the link to the TZF format file is
broken.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1707

Enable Data Extraction


The Enable Extract option is by default unchecked. It activates removal of the
Extract Points feature from the Trimble Scan Explorer Web Viewer. This
means that the user cannot extract any points from the published data.

Caution: You will be warned that your data will be published with extraction
capabilities if the Enable Extract option is checked.

Note: If the Enable Extract option is kept unchecked, a TZF format file, once

published in the Data/RWI folder, is locked. Its icon is grayed-out if you try
to load it in RealWorks.

View the Published Data


Once you start publishing your project (by clicking Publish), two progress bars
appear, one for all the TZF format files and one for a TZF format file. Once the
publication is completed, you may see the following texts: "Publish Succeeded"
and "Nb. of files processed in minutes and seconds".

A main folder, named according to the name given in the Title field, is created
under the default (or defined) Output Folder. The day and time information are
added to the main folder (respectively in the Day-Month-Year and Hour-
Minute-Second format). Two sub-folders (Bin and Data) and an Html format file
(named Index) are created under the main folder.

Note: The publication may be a success even if the links (from the TZF Scans
to the TZF format files) are broken. You will see then the text "0 files
Processed".

Bin Folder
The Bin Folder is the folder used to embed Trimble Scan Explorer application
files.
1708 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Data Folder
The Data folder is the folder where a published project is stored. By default, a
published project shares the same name as the original project (project to
publish) or the name defined by the user in Title field. A published project in the
Data folder is a replica of the project that has been published (from
RealWorks). This means that there is a RWP file and a RWI folder within (the
Data folder). Each TZF format file from the project to publish is replicated in the
published project in the RWI folder in the Data folder but with a size other than
the original ones (due to the size reduction).

Caution: Only TZF Scans and images (RWV) are published.

Note: All the Point Clouds of a published project are not accessible. Only TZF
Scans and images are accessible. An error message appears if you try to open
a published project. The message warns you that scan point file(s) is (or are)
missing, points cannot be loaded and the project cannot be open.
Collaborating and Sharing Data 1709

View a Published Project


To view a published project within the embedded version of Trimble Scan
Explorer, just double-click on the Index file. Below is a sample of what the user
should have.

1 - Logo 4 - Link(s)
2 - Title 5 - Video(s)
3 - Embedded version of Trimble Scan Explorer 6 - Image(s)

Note: Scan Explorer is displayed as a webpage which requires running a script


or ActiveX control. Please, allow the control to run by clicking the Allow
Blocked Content button. If you do have permission, you could turn off the
prompt for Internet Explorer by following Tools, Internet Options, Security (tab),
Custom Level (button) and disable the Automatic prompting for ActiveX
controls option.
1710 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Note: Windows may consider Trimble as an untrusted publisher and prevent


Scan Explorer from running on your computer by opening the Application Run -
Security Warning dialog. Please, do not take the warning into account and run
Scan Explorer by clicking the Run button in the dialog.

Tip: A Media once included is displayed as a thumbnail. Click on an embedded


Media to enlarge it.

Note: You need to have .Net Framework 4 and Visual C++ Redistributable
2010 X86 installed on your computer.
1711

License Agreements

AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU


AND TRIMBLE INC. and applies to the computer software provided as a stand-
alone computer software product, or provided with the Trimble product
purchased by you (whether built into hardware circuitry as firmware, embedded
in flash memory or a PCMCIA card, or stored on magnetic or other media), and
includes any accompanying written materials, such as a user's guide or
product manual, as well as any "online" or electronic documentation
("Software"). This Agreement will also apply to any Software error corrections,
updates and upgrades subsequently furnished by Trimble, unless such are
accompanied by different license terms and conditions which will govern their
use. BY CLICKING "YES" OR "I ACCEPT" IN THE ACCEPTANCE BOX, OR
BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE,
YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY
RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND ANY ACCOMPANYING TRIMBLE
PRODUCT TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM FOR A
REFUND. This Software is protected by copyright laws and international
copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The
Software is licensed, not sold.

1 SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE


1.1 License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
Agreement and your pre-payment of the applicable license fee(s), Trimble
grants you a non-exclusive, right to use one copy of the Software in machine-
readable form on any computer hardware and operating system for which it
was intended, but solely for your internal business needs in connection with
your use of Trimble products. You may authorize the personnel associated with
your business to use the Software, but only one person at one time, on one
computer at one time. You may also store or install a copy of the Software on a
storage device, such as a network server, used only to install or run the
Software on your other computers over an internal network; but in such case
you must acquire and dedicate a seat license for each separate computer on
which the Software is installed or run from the storage device. A seat license
for the Software may not be shared or used concurrently on different
computers/devices. Use of the Software is limited to the total number of
installation copies and seat licenses purchased by you.
1712 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

1.2 Other Rights and Limitations. (1) You may not copy, modify, make
derivative works of, rent, lease, sell, distribute or transfer the Software, in
whole or in part, except as otherwise expressly authorized under this
Agreement, and you agree to use all commercially reasonable efforts to
prevent its unauthorized use and disclosure. (2) The Software contains
valuable trade secrets proprietary to Trimble and its suppliers. To the extent
permitted by relevant law, you shall not, nor allow any third party to copy,
decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the Software, or
attempt to do so, provided, however, that to the extent any applicable
mandatory laws give you the right to perform any of the aforementioned
activities without Trimble's consent in order to gain certain information about
the Software for purposes specified in the respective statutes (e.g.,
interoperability), you hereby agree that, before exercising any such rights, you
shall first request such information from Trimble in writing detailing the purpose
for which you need the information. Only if and after Trimble, at its sole
discretion, partly or completely denies your request, may you exercise such
statutory rights. (3) The Software is licensed as a single product. You may not
separate its component parts for use on more than one computer except as
specifically authorized in this Agreement. (4) You may not rent, lease or lend
the Software unless you are a reseller of Trimble products under separate
written agreement with Trimble and authorized by Trimble to do so. (5) You
may permanently transfer all of your rights under this Agreement, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the Software (including all component parts,
the media and printed materials, any upgrades, and this Agreement) and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this Agreement. If the Software portion is an
upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the Software. (6) You
may not use the Software for performance, benchmark or comparison testing
or analysis, or disclose to any third party or release any results thereof (all of
which information shall be considered Trimble confidential information) without
Trimble's prior written consent. (7) You may not directly or indirectly export or
re-export, or knowingly permit the export or re-export of the Software (or
portions thereof) to any country, or to any person or entity subject to export
restrictions of the United States, the countries of the European Union or other
countries in contravention of such laws and without first obtaining appropriate
license. (8) You agree to cooperate with Trimble to track the number of server
computers, computers and other devices with access to the Software at your
site(s) to ensure compliance with the license grant and installation restrictions
in this Agreement. In the event the compliance check reveals that the number
of installations at your site exceeds the actual number of licenses obtained by
you, you agree to promptly reimburse Trimble three (3) times the then current
applicable list price for the extra licenses that are required to be compliant, but
that were not obtained, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable penalty.
1.3 Termination. You may terminate this Agreement by ceasing all use
of the Software and destroying or returning all copies. Without prejudice as to
any other rights, Trimble may terminate this Agreement without notice if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In such event, you
must cease its use destroy all copies of the Software and of its component
parts.
License Agreements 1713

1.4 Copyright. All title and copyrights in and to the Software (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music,
and text incorporated into the Software), the accompanying printed materials,
and any copies of the Software are owned by Trimble and its suppliers. You
shall not remove, cover or alter any of Trimble's patent, copyright or trademark
notices placed upon, embedded in or displayed by the Software or on its
packaging and related materials. You may, however, either (1) make one copy
of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes, or (2) install the
Software on a single computer provided you keep the original solely for backup
or archival purposes. You may not copy the accompanying printed materials.
1.5 U.S. Government Restricted Rights. The Software is provided with
"RESTRICTED RIGHTS." Use, duplication, or disclosure by the United States
Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement, and as
provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (1995), DFARS 252.227-
7013(c)(1)(ii) (OCT 1988), FAR 12.212(a) (1995), FAR 52.227-19, or FAR
52.227-14(ALT III), as applicable.

2 LIMITED WARRANTY.
2.1 Limited Warranty. Trimble warrants that the Software will perform
substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials (i.e.,
applicable user's guide or product manual) for a period of one (1) year from the
date of purchase. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, you may
have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. The above
limited warranty does not apply to error corrections, updates or upgrades of the
Software after expiration of the limited warranty period, which are provided "AS
IS" and without warranty unless otherwise specified in writing by Trimble.
Because the Software is inherently complex and may not be completely free of
nonconformities, defects or errors, you are advised to verify your work. Trimble
does not warrant that the Software will operate error free or uninterrupted, will
meet your needs or expectations, or that all nonconformities can or will be
corrected.
2.2 Customer Remedies. Trimble's and its suppliers' entire liability, and
your sole remedy, with respect to the Software shall be either, at Trimble's
option, (a) repair or replacement of the Software, or (b) return of the license fee
paid for any Software that does not meet Trimble's limited warranty. The
foregoing limited warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from (1)
accident, misuse, abuse, or misapplication; (2) alteration or modification of the
Software without Trimble's authorization; (3) interaction with software or
hardware not supplied or supported by Trimble; (4) your improper, inadequate
or unauthorized installation, maintenance or storage; or (f) if you violate the
terms of this Agreement. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is
longer.
1714 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

2.3 NO OTHER WARRANTIES. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT


PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, TRIMBLE AND ITS SUPPLIERS
DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, TERMS, AND CONDITIONS, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW OR OTHERWISE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TERMS, AND
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE
SOFTWARE, ITS SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND THE PROVISION OF OR
FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TERMS AND CONDITIONS
ON THE SOFTWARE ARE LIMITED TO ONE (1) YEAR. Y0U MAY HAVE
OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE/JURISDICTION TO
STATE/JURISDICTION.
2.4 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND
REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER
PECUNIARY LOSS), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE
SUPPORT SERVICES, EVEN IF TRIMBLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING ANY
FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
PROVIDED IN THIS AGREEMENT.IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE'S TOTAL
LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR THE
SOFTWARE, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EXCEED
THE ACTUAL AMOUNT PAID TO TRIMBLE FOR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE
ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
2.5 PLEASE NOTE: THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY
PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO SOFTWARE PRODUCTS PURCHASED
IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS (SUCH AS COUNTRIES OF THE EUROPEAN
ECONOMIC COMMUNITY) IN WHICH PRODUCT WARRANTIES ARE
OBTAINED FROM THE LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR. IN SUCH CASE, PLEASE
CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR APPLICABLE WARRANTY
INFORMATION.

3 GENERAL.
License Agreements 1715

3.1 This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of


California and applicable United States Federal law without reference to
"conflict of laws" principles or provisions. The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods will not apply to this Agreement.
Jurisdiction and venue of any dispute or court action arising from or related to
this Agreement or the Software shall lie exclusively in or be transferred to the
courts the County of Santa Clara, California, and/or the United States District
Court for the Northern District of California. You hereby consent and agree not
to contest, such jurisdiction, venue and governing law.
3.2 Section 3.1 notwithstanding, if you acquired this product in Canada,
this Agreement is governed by the laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada. In
such case each of the parties to this Agreement irrevocably attorns to the
jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of Ontario and further agrees to
commence any litigation that may arise under this Agreement in the courts
located in the Judicial District of York, Province of Ontario. If you acquired this
product in the European Union, this Agreement is governed by the laws of The
Netherlands, excluding its rules governing conflicts of laws and excluding the
United Nations Convention on the International Sale of Goods. In such case
each of the parties to this Agreement irrevocably attorns to the jurisdiction of
the courts of The Netherlands and further agrees to commence any litigation
that may arise under this Agreement in the courts of The Hague, The
Netherlands.
3.3 Trimble reserves all rights not expressly granted by this Agreement.
3.4 Official Language. The official language of this Agreement is
English. For purposes of interpretation, or in the event of a conflict between
English and versions of this Agreement in any other language, the English
language version shall be controlling.

TRIMBLE INC.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Valid as of April 6th, 2006.
1717

Legal Notices

Copyright and Trademarks

© 2018, Trimble Inc. All rights reserved.


The Globe & Triangle logo and Trimble are trademarks of Trimble Inc.

Release Notice

This is the help for the 11.0 version of Trimble RealWorks.


Index
Add a Feature Code Library • 863, 871
2 Add a Feature Point • 868
2D Grid • 93 Add a Keyframe • 1602
2D Mouse • 468 Add a Lighting Direction • 449
2D Sections • 1459 Add a Link • 1706
2D-EasyLine • 802 Add a Media File • 1704
2D-Polyline Inspection • 1095 Add Additional Hoops • 1479
Add Another Link • 1707
3 Add Another Media File • 1705
3D Axis • 1292 Add Extra Posts • 1499, 1500
3D Direction • 1281 Add Links in a Publication • 1706
3D Mouse • 468, 469 Add Some Regions to the Floor • 353,
3D Picking • 1279 354
3D Plane • 1303 Add Some Regions to the Ground •
3D Point • 1207, 1285, 1370, 1407, 348, 349
1409 Adjust an Image Matching • 1179
3D Radius • 1296 Adjust the Intensity Contrast and
3D Secant • 1301 Brightness • 432
3D View • 91, 98 Adjust the Stations • 662
3D View Window • 515 Advanced Options • 419
Alias/WaveFront (OBJ) Format • 1638
A Align a Geometry (Z-Axis) Along a 2-
Activate or Deactivate a Layer • 547, Point-Defined Axis • 1351
548 Align Data to a View • 504
Activate/Deactivate the Selection Align to a Global View • 504
Mode • 1396 Align to a Local View • 507
Active Group • 218 Align to Join to an Existing Cylinder •
Adaptive Point Size • 450 1368
Add a Command to the Quick Access Align to Join to two Secant Cylinders
Toolbar • 119 of Same Radius • 1206, 1247
Add a Description to a Limit Box • Align to Join to Two Secant cylinders
306, 465 of Same Radius • 1369
1720 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Align to Join Two Existing Secant Apply the Matching • 1181


Boxes of Same Section • 1221, Apply the Modifications • 1530
1263, 1376 Apply the Network Adjustment • 754
Align to Joint to an Existing Cylinder Apply the Operation • 948
• 1246 Apply the Result • 709
Align With a 2D Mouse • 505 Apply the Transformation • 640, 643
Align With a 3D Mouse • 506 ASCII Files • 161
Alignment Stationing • 972, 987, ASCII Format • 1642
1002, 1047, 1048, 1681, 1688 Assign a Classification Layer to the
Ambient Shading • 439 Fenced Cloud • 328, 359, 362
Analyze a 3D Inspection Cloud • 1090 Assign Known Coordinates to a
Analyze an Inspection Map • 1017 Picked Point • 715
Analyze the Roundness from One Assign Known Coordinates to a Target
Measurement Rule Line • 1575 • 712
Analyze the Verticality from one AutoCAD (DWG) Format • 1650
Station Line • 1569 AutoCAD (DXF) Format • 1641, 1652
Angular Measurements • 576 AutoCAD Files • 173
Apply a Limit Box • 306, 466 AutoCAD PCG format (AutoDesk
Apply a New Texture • 945 Revit MEP) • 1637
Apply a Sampling by Step • 314 Auto-Classify Indoor Point Clouds •
Apply a Sampling by Step Filter • 309 360
Apply a Smooth Rendering to Meshes Auto-Classify Outdoor Point Clouds •
• 445, 448 357
Apply a Spatial Sampling • 315 Autodesk FilmBoX (BX) Format •
Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep 1644
Details) • 315 Autodesk FilmBox Files • 188
Apply a Spatial Sampling (Keep AutoDesk RCP format • 1646
Details) Filter • 310 Auto-Duplicate a Polyline • 836
Apply a Spatial Sampling Filter • 310 Auto-Extract Targets • 647
Apply Constraints • 1352 Auto-Match All • 674
Apply Filters • 815 Auto-Match Station • 674
Apply the Adjustment • 675 Automatic Axis Definition • 642
Apply the Adjustment and Group the Auto-Pair the Targets • 659
Stations • 676 Auto-Register Using Planes • 597
Apply the Bounds • 1398 Auto-Split a 3D Inspection Cloud in a
Apply the Cutting Positions • 908, 912 Cluster of Clouds • 1094
Apply the Georeferencing • 719 Avoid the Filling of Holes on an
Apply the Grid and Compute the Inspection Map • 993, 1013
Inspection • 1564
Index 1721

Change a Pipe Diameter • 1451


B Change a Shape • 1314
Background Color • 1703 Change a Size • 94
Basic Tools • 557 Change Keyframe Direction • 1613
Bin Folder • 1709 Change the 2D Section Position and
Blend the Intensity and Color Orientation • 1461
Information • 433 Change the Center Point of a Limit
Bottom Align all Planes • 1127 Box • 296, 455, 785
Bottom Reference • 1576, 1578 Change the Color of a Geometry • 367
Box • 1223, 1322, 1378, 1407, 1409 Change the Color of a Layer • 547,
Browse Iso-Curves • 1062 548
Browse Keyframes • 1615 Change the Color of a Point Cloud •
Browse Through the Stations • 495 364
BSF Format • 1632 Change the Color of a Station • 792,
Build a Frame from a Geometry • 263 796
Build a Frame with Constraints • 259 Change the Dimensions • 1112
Build a Frame without Constraints • Change the Direction of the Main Axis
252 • 1381
Build Polylines • 886 Change the Display Configuration of
By Interpolation • 882 Sub-Views • 92
By Offset • 881 Change the LAS ID Number • 547,
By Station • 1667 548
By Volume • 1665 Change the Location of the
Manipulator • 1335
C Change the Manipulator Center
Calculate a Geometry • 1226 Location • 622
Calculate a Volume • 953 Change the Manipulator Location •
Calculate the Contours • 893 952
Calibrate a Horizontal Tank • 1519 Change the Radius and Dimension
Calibrate a Vertical Tank • 1508 Parameters • 1480
Cancel the Extraction • 311 Change the Size of Displayed Points •
Capture the Screen in High Quality 444
Mode • 1622 Check a Projection Plane • 1113
Capture the Screen in Quick Check a Volume to Keep • 964
Processing Mode • 1623 Check and Refine the Classification •
Center on Point • 510 1536
Change a Color of an Object • 369 Check for a License Checkout Support
Change a Keyframe Position and • 63
Orientation • 1607 Check for the Warranty Expiration
Change a Name • 236 Date • 67
1722 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Check the Adjustment • 666 Choose the Point Cloud Visibility •


Check the Average Error • 718 439
Check the Calibration of a Tank • Choose the Shape of the Active Hoop
1526 • 1480
Check the Current Loaded Points • Circular Arc • 1209
308 Circular Torus • 1203, 1319, 1365,
Check the Graphics Card in Use • 41 1407, 1409
Check the Inspection • 997, 1016 Classification Layers • 89
Check the Open Source Libraries and Classify Automatically a Tank • 1534
Licenses in Use • 47 Classify Manually a Tank • 1535
Check the Quality of the Registration • Clear a Selection • 517
614, 622 Close all Projects • 206
Check the Registration Error • 623 Close an Inspection Map • 411
Check the Results • 730, 733, 753 Close Projects • 206
Check the Roundness of a Tank • 1571 Close the Selected Project • 206
Check the Version Number of the Close the Tool • 311, 644, 1087
OpenGL Library • 46 Close Trimble RealWorks • 132
Check the Verticality of a Tank • 1566 Cloud Renderings • 104
Check Visually the Registration Result Cloud-Based Modeler • 1183
• 622 Cloud-Based Registration • 108, 606
Check-out a Multi-User License • 65 Collaborating and Sharing Data • 1699
Choose a Class • 358, 361 Color Geometries Based on the
Choose a Configuration • 1491, 1492 Classification Information • 445,
Choose a Geometry Type • 1187 446
Choose a Method • 1416 Color Point Clouds Based on by the
Choose a Processing Mode • 1617 Elevation Information • 426, 429,
Choose a Reference Station • 628 432
Choose a Rendering Option • 1118, Color Point Clouds Based on the
1130 Classification Information • 362,
Choose a Sampling Method • 335 426, 428
Choose a Section Type • 1457 Color Points • 1181
Choose a Slider • 1027 Color Points by Height • 277
Choose a Station • 1135 Color Points Using Station Images •
Choose a Target Type • 648, 650 318
Choose a Type of Object to Extract • Color TZF Scans • 270
1031 ColorBar • 412
Choose the Advance Mode • 287 Colored Scans • 143
Choose the Automatic Mode • 284 Compute Cross-Sections • 913
Choose the Point Cloud Shading • 438
Index 1723

Compute the Containment Volume • Create 3D Points • 772


1584 Create a 3D Inspection Cloud • 1087,
Cone • 1318, 1405, 1408 1090
Cone With Cone • 1406 Create a 3D Point From a Target • 773
Cone With Plane • 1406 Create a 3D Points • 687
Configure a Computer to Allow Create a Catenary Curve • 842
License Checkout • 64 Create a Feature Set • 870
Configure the Number of Straps • Create a Fitted Geometry • 926
1483, 1484 Create a Geometry • 1227
Connect a Plane to a Series of Planes • Create a Known Point • 732, 752
1411 Create a Ladder • 1462, 1474
Connect Cylinders • 1412 Create a Ladder Cage • 1476
Connect to a Mobile Device • 192 Create a Merged Mesh • 949
Connect to a Series of Entities • 1410 Create a Mesh • 934
Constrain the Picking on a Line • 520 Create a Multitude of Sets of Sections
Constrain the Picking on a Plane • 520 and 1D Inspection • 1047
Constrain the Picking on a Point • 521 Create a New ColorBar • 421
Constrain to a Pair a Markers • 1179 Create a New Group Node • 235
Constrain to Two Pairs of Markers • Create a New Ladder Model • 1468
1180 Create a New Layer • 545, 546
Contact Trimble • 70 Create a New Railing Model • 1500
Containment Pass/Fail Criterion • Create a New Stair Model • 1505
1585 Create a Point Cloud from Selecte
Continue a Polyline • 830 Stations • 769
Continue in Tracking Cylinders • 1443 Create a Point Cloud from Topo
Continue Tracking • 851 Points • 771
Conventions • 1581 Create a Polyline • 842
Convert a Geometry to a Mesh • 366 Create a Power Line • 845
Convert to an Ortho-Image • 1155, Create a Profile and Cross-Sections •
1157 900
Convert to BSF • 1669 Create a Rectified Image • 1155
Convert to BSF Format File • 1662 Create a Registration Report (Scan-
Convert to Gridded E57/PTX/PTS Based) • 645
Format File • 1670 Create a Registration Report (Target-
Convert to the TZF Format • 145 Based) • 675, 725
Convert to TZF Files • 283 Create a Report • 1086, 1576
Copy and Paste an Item • 232 Create a Set of Sections and 1D
Copy Original TZF Scan Files into Inspection • 1046
Project • 274 Create a Single Ortho-Image • 1134
Create • 1586 Create a Tank Object • 1537
1724 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Create a Terrain Contour Map • 888 Create the Results • 332, 1517, 1524
Create a Topo Point • 769 Create Thumbnails • 271
Create a Video • 1593, 1620 Create/Edit Targets • 684
Create all Ortho-Images • 1134 Created TZF Scans • 291
Create an Extrusion With Holes • 1266 Creating 3D Points From Matched
Create an Ortho-Image • 1121 Targets • 774
Create an UCS • 250, 1469 Creating a Polyline • 1427
Create and Edit Samples • 1083 Criteria for Roundness • 1581
Create Beams • 1462 Criteria for Shell Settlement • 1576,
Create Colored Meshes • 1066 1581
Create Connected Ortho-Images • Criteria for Verticality • 1576, 1580
1121 Customize a Series of Colors • 374
Create Feature Sets • 862 Customize a Size • 94
Create Iso-Curves • 1064 Customize the Quick Access Toolbar •
Create Ladder Cages • 1484 117
Create Meshes • 927 Customize the Settings for a Mouse •
Create Ortho-Images • 110, 1102, 468
1133, 1156, 1157, 1588 Customize the User Interface • 112
Create Points • 768 Cut and Paste an Item • 230
Create Profiles • 852 Cutting Plane • 874
Create Railings • 1485 Cylinder • 1194, 1317, 1357, 1401,
Create Rectified Images • 1134 1408
Create Sampled Scans • 312, 648, 651 Cylinder Shape • 1009
Create Samples • 1084 Cylinder With Circular Torus • 1402
Create Scans from TZF Scans • 310 Cylinder With Cone • 1403
Create Stairs • 1501, 1506 Cylinder With Cylinder • 1401
Create Station Images from TZF Scan Cylinder With Sphere • 1402
Color • 273 Cylinder-Based Projection • 980, 982,
Create the Built Frame • 268 1000
Create the Contours • 898
Create the Extracted Cloud(s) • 1095
D
Create the Extracted Cylinders • 1447 Data Folder • 1710
Create the Fitted Geometry • 697, 701, Define (or Edit) a Grid • 1544, 1547
703, 708, 738, 742, 744, 749 Define a 3D Axis • 1424
Create the Measured Value • 1542 Define a 3D Direction • 1420
Create the Profile • 862 Define a 3D Direction Using Precise
Create the Profile and the Cross- Methods • 1282
Sections • 919 Define a 3D Direction Using Visual
Create the Railings • 1500 Methods • 1284
Index 1725

Define a 3D Plane • 818, 1460 Define a Plane (in all Navigation


Define a 3D Plane in the Examiner (or Modes (Examiner, Walkthrough and
WalkThrough) • 1304 Station-Based)) • 1230
Define a 3D plane in the Examiner Define a Plane By Picking Three
WalkThrough • 1144 Screen Points (Horizontal and
Define a 3D Plane in the Station- Steepest Slope Directions) and One
Based Mode • 1137, 1231, 1306 3D Points • 1137, 1142, 1231, 1236,
Define a 3D Point • 1268 1311
Define a Box • 1249 Define a Plane-Based Projection • 928,
Define a Circle • 1416, 1421 929
Define a Circular Torus • 1245 Define a Polyline • 1122, 1214, 1416,
Define a Color Range • 1055 1425
Define a Current View-Based Define a Position • 960
Projection • 928, 932 Define a Profile • 857
Define a Cutting Plane • 855 Define a Projection • 998
Define a Cylinder • 1241 Define a Projection Plane • 1104, 1137
Define a Cylinder-Based Projection • Define a Projection Surface • 980
928, 930 Define a Rectangular Torus • 1262
Define a Feature Code • 865, 874 Define a Reference for the Verticality
Define a Horizontal Face By Picking • 1543, 1544, 1545
One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Define a Reference Plane • 1074
Points (Two Horizontal Directions Define a Regular Cone • 1243
and Depth) • 1256 Define a Scanning Direction-Based
Define a Horizontal Plane By Picking Projection • 928, 932
Two Screen Points (Horizontal Define a Section Position • 1027
Direction) and One 3D Point • 1137, Define a Segment • 1275
1140, 1231, 1234, 1309 Define a Set of Points on the Cloud
Define a Length • 1462 Data • 1186, 1436, 1456, 1465, 1487
Define a Limit Box • 782 Define a Setting for Cloud Renderings
Define a Limit Box by Defining a • 431
Horizontal Slice • 782, 783 Define a Single Slice • 883
Define a Limit Box by Defining a Define a Slice • 883
Slice Perpendicular to the Screen • Define a Speed • 1617
782, 784 Define a Sphere • 1239
Define a Line • 1416, 1417 Define a Test Section • 1081
Define a Multiple Slice • 883 Define a Unique (or a Series of)
Define a Path • 910 Measurement Rule(s) Above the
Define a Plane • 954, 1229 Bottom Weld of a Course • 1560
1726 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Define a Unique (or a Series of) Define the Center Point of a Limit Box
Measurement Rule(s) Below the • 295, 454
Top Weld of a Course • 1561 Define the Color of a Level • 420
Define a Vertical Face By Picking Define the Depth Parameter • 1130
One 3D Point, Then Four Screen Define the Dipping Plate • 1510, 1520
Points (Horizontal Direction, Define the Hoops • 1477
Vertical Direction and Depth) • Define the Horizontal • 1109
1259 Define the Horizontal Axis by Picking
Define a Vertical Plane by Picking Two Points • 641
Two Screen Points (Horizontal Define the Image Parameters • 1129
Direction) and One 3D Points • Define the Initial Station • 1548
1137, 1138, 1231, 1232, 1307 Define the Instrument Height • 731,
Define a Width • 908 734
Define a Zone of Interest • 1115, Define the Interval Between Two
1125, 1148 Consecutive Sections • 1514, 1522
Define an Area • 1584 Define the Intervals • 420
Define an Elevation Range • 890 Define the Ladder Length and Start
Define an Extruded Entity • 1265 Height • 1473
Define an Inspection Area • 1070 Define the Landings • 1505
Define an Inspection Grid • 1072 Define the Layout of a Publication •
Define an Interval Value • 892 1701
Define an Offset Value • 961 Define the Loop End • 1491, 1497
Define Automatically the Vertical Define the Moving Step • 794
Axis • 638 Define the Normal Direction • 955
Define Backsight Points • 730, 733, Define the Normal Z Direction • 1225
750 Define the Orientation of a Plane • 876
Define Courses • 1550 Define the Output Files • 1664
Define Measurement Rules Spaced at Define the Output Intensity of Points •
Regular Distance Between Two 1664
Welds • 1559 Define the Parameters • 1533
Define Parameters • 1428 Define the Parameters of the Body •
Define Principal Iso-Curves • 1063 1514
Define Regular Intervals • 414 Define the Parameters of the Sump •
Define Stations • 1548 1515, 1522
Define the • 1428, 1429, 1430, 1431 Define the Position of a Plane • 881
Define the Body Parameters • 1521 Define the Position of the Stations •
Define the Bottom Measurement 977
Rules • 1563 Define the Posts Along the Path •
1499
Index 1727

Define the Principal Contours • 896 Delete a Point (or Line) • 1174
Define the Properties of an Instrument Delete a Polyline • 830
Station • 730, 733 Delete a Single Polyline • 831
Define the Rendering by Elevation Delete a Target • 687
Interval • 434 Delete all Keyframes • 1606
Define the Rendering by Elevation Delete all Picked Points • 617
Origin • 435 Delete all Polylines • 831
Define the Rest of the Stations • 1549 Delete an Element from a Mesh • 942
Define the Settings • 975 Delete an Existing ColorBar • 418
Define the Shape of the Active Hoop • Delete an Existing Layer • 545, 547
1480, 1481 Delete an Item • 234
Define the Shell Measurement Rules • Delete and Connect Extremities • 1530
1558 Delete Items • 812, 813
Define the Start and End Positions • Delete Items and Prevent from Hole
906, 1499 Creation • 814
Define the Start/End Position When an Delete Samples • 1085
Alignment Stationing has been Delete Sections • 850
Defined • 987, 1002 Delete the Active Hoop • 1479
Define the Start/End Position When no Delete the Displayed Cloud • 1187,
Alignment Stationing has been 1437, 1457, 1466, 1488
Defined • 986, 1001 Delete the Extracted Cylinders • 1444
Define the Thickness for Outside Delete the Last Picked Point/Pair of
Scans • 1515, 1523 Points • 617
Define the Tolerance Parameter • 893 Delimit a Region on a Set of Points •
Define the Vector X Direction • 1224 323
Define the Vertical Axis by Picking Detach a Multi-User License • 63
Two Points • 639 Detect Edges • 343
Define the Vertical Straps • 1483 Determine a Resolution • 988, 1004
Define the Width of All Polylines • Determine a Resolution in the
126 Plane/Cylinder-Based Projection •
Define Video Parameters • 1616 988, 1004
Defining a Grid Resolution • 961 Determine a Resolution in the Tunnel-
Delete a Bounding Polyline • 1395 Based Projection • 989, 1004
Delete a Feature Code • 865, 874 Determine the Height of a Dipping
Delete a Feature Code Library • 864, Plate by Fitting • 1513, 1521
872 Discontinuity-Based Sampling • 342
Delete a Feature Point • 867 Displace a Model Group • 225
Delete a Geometry • 365 Display • 97
Delete a Keyframe • 1606 Display (or Hide) a Sub-View in Full •
Delete a Node • 828, 1393 93
1728 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Display (or Hide) all Station Marker Display the Discontinuity of Points •
Labels • 398, 495 444
Display (or Hide) all Stations • 396, Display the Network Visuals of a
495 Station • 402
Display (or Hide) Specific Station Display the Network Visuals of all
Makers • 398 Stations • 405
Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals Display/Hide Images • 497
of a Station • 401 Dock a Window • 115
Display (or Hide) the Network Visuals DotProduct Files • 187
of all Stations • 404 Download Trimble RealWorks • 48
Display a Geometry • 390 Download Trimble Update Network
Display a Point Cloud • 388 License Utility • 49
Display a Toolbar • 116 Drag and Drop an Item • 229
Display a TZF Scan • 407 Draw a 2D Section • 1461, 1471, 1506
Display a Window • 113 Draw a Chain of Segments and/or
Display all Clouds of a Layer • 551 Arcs • 821
Display all Geometries of a Layer • Draw a Circle • 826, 931, 983
552 Draw a Circle by Defining its Center •
Display all Station Marker Labels • 1422
398 Draw a Circular Fence • 325
Display all Station Markers • 397 Draw a Circular Polyline • 1391
Display an Image • 393 Draw a Cylinder • 931, 983
Display an Inspection Map • 412 Draw a Fence (Lasso Only) • 324
Display and Hide a Limit Box • 303, Draw a Fence (Polygon and Lasso) •
462, 793 325
Display and Hide a Station • 792, 797 Draw a Fence (Polygon Only) • 324
Display and Hide Clouds/Geometries Draw a Line by Defining Two Points •
Outside the Limit Box • 304, 463, 1418
792 Draw a New Polyline for Bounding •
Display and Hide the Alignment 1386
Stationing from a Curve • 424 Draw a Path • 904, 912, 1489, 1490
Display Edges of Models • 447 Draw a Polygonal Polyline • 1387
Display or Hide all Objects by Layer • Draw a Polyline • 817, 820, 1124
551 Draw a Polyline in a Plane Parallel to
Display Points in HD • 540 the Screen View • 1215
Display Specific Station Maker(s) • Draw a Polyline in a User-Defined
399 Plane • 1216
Display the Contours • 897 Draw a Rectangle • 824
Display the Cross-Sections • 918 Draw a Rectangular Fence • 325
Index 1729

Draw a Rectangular Polyline • 1389 Edit Polylines • 808


Draw a Zone of Interest • 1116, 1149 Edit Several Hoops • 1482
Draw and Create a Path • 1611 Edit the Active Hoop • 1479
Draw Polylines • 1023 Edit the Cross-Sections • 919
Duplicate • 224, 1416 Edit the Heights • 1491, 1496
Duplicate a Model Group • 224 Edit the Ladder Parameters • 1467
Duplicate a Polyline Horizontally • Edit the Parameters • 1264, 1490,
837 1491
Duplicate a Polyline Vertically • 839 Edit the Profiles • 1491, 1494
Duplicate Items • 1432 Edit the Properties of a Limit Box •
Duplicate Manually a Polyline • 841 295, 784
Edit the Properties of the Limit Box •
E 454
E57 Files • 182 Edit the Selected Point Cloud • 1069
E57 Format • 1633 Edit the Stair Parameters • 1503
EasyPipe • 1434 Edit the Target Height • 687
EasyProfile • 845 Edit the Targets • 661
Edit a Bounding Polyline • 1392 Editing Data • 227
Edit a ColorBar • 413 Enable Data Extraction • 1709
Edit a Feature Code • 871, 873 Enable the Advanced View Mode •
Edit a Feature Code Library • 871 549
Edit a Feature Point • 866 Enforce the Use of the High
Edit a Grid • 1554 Performance Graphics Card • 42
Edit a Layer • 545, 547 Enhance a Mesh With Break Lines
Edit a Library • 871 Using Polyline(s) • 943
Edit a Mesh • 940 Enhanced Ambient Shading • 439
Edit a Polyline • 827 Enter a Trimble Oil, Gas and
Edit a Section • 1528 Chemical License File • 59
Edit a Volume • 965 Enter Manually an Angle • 1333
Edit an Existing ColorBar • 422 Equalize Image Color • 377
Edit an Inspection Map • 995, 1015 Equalize Point Cloud Color • 317
Edit Keyframes • 1605 Equalize Point Cloud Luminance •
Edit Manually the Image Distances • 316
499 Examiner • 472
Edit Meshes • 934 Execute the Batch Process • 1697
Edit Parameters • 880, 932, 959, 984, Expand and Shrink the Project Tree •
1114, 1238, 1240, 1242, 1244, 381
1248, 1261, 1274, 1277, 1291, Explore in the 3D View • 385
1295, 1296, 1297 Explore in the Images Tree • 386
Edit Planes • 1128 Exploring Data • 379
1730 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Export a Feature Code Library • 864, Extend to One Other Geometry • 1400
873 Extract all Points from TZF Scan(s) •
Export a Selection as a File • 1627 280
Export an Event Log File • 69 Extract an Initial Cylinder by Picking •
Export an Existing ColorBar • 418 1438
Export an Inspection Map • 1674 Extract and Classify Point Cloud
Export as a DGN Format File • 1450 Regions • 359, 362
Export as a DWG Format File • 1448 Extract Black and White Flat Targets •
Export as a DXF Format File • 1449 698, 739, 751
Export as a LAS Format File • 1635 Extract Clouds From 3D Inspection
Export Feature Sets • 1659 Clouds • 1091
Export Horizontal Slices • 1675 Extract Colored Meshes • 1065
Export Images • 1655 Extract Iso-Curves • 1060
Export Inspection Maps and Slices • Extract Point Targets • 702, 743
1674 Extract Point Targets (Corners) • 703,
Export Limit Boxes • 307, 466 744
Export Measurements • 1657 Extract Points from a Specific Area •
Export Object Properties • 1654 309
Export Ortho-Images • 1656 Extract Spherical Targets • 694, 735,
Export Pipe Center Lines • 1447 751
Export Sections • 1038 Extract Targets • 693
Export Station Registration Parameters Extract to a New Mesh • 942
to RMX Files • 778 Extrusion • 1214, 1321, 1374, 1407,
Export Station Registration Parameters 1409
to TZF Files • 777
Export the Quick Access Toolbar •
F
120 Face of Curb Point and Gutter Point
Export the Registration Report to a Pickings • 527
RTF File • 675 Feature Code Libraries • 863
Export the Results • 1518, 1525 Feature Codes • 865
Export TZF Images • 1660 Feature Points • 866
Export Vertical Slices • 1683 Fence a Set of Points • 923
Export with Advanced Features • 1654 Fence an Area • 696, 700, 706, 737,
Exporting Data • 1625 741, 747, 939, 967, 995, 1015, 1050
Extend (or Stretch) a Thumbnail • FF/FL Analysis (ASTM E1155) • 111
1167 Fill Holes • 968
Extend an Entity by Snapping • 1324 Fill Line Breaks • 816
Extend Between Two Other Filter a 3D Inspection Cloud • 1089
Geometries • 1408 Filter all Sections • 1526, 1573
Index 1731

Filter an Area • 996, 1016 From a Cylinder • 265


Filter by Range • 316, 1663 From a Cylinder Inspection • 1679,
Filter by Zone • 316, 1663 1686
Filter Data • 107, 322, 330, 452, 1663 From a Plane Inspection • 1677, 1685
Filter From an Elevation Range • 966 From a Tunnel Inspection • 1680,
Filter Sections • 1567 1687
Filter the 2D Inspection Result • 1099 From an Extrusion • 267
Filter the Altitudes • 1059 From Station View • 668
Filter the Images • 498, 1136 From Target View • 672
Filter the Inspection Result • 996 From the Property Window • 370
Filter the Scan Data • 315 From the Tab • 372
Find Items in the Project • 383
Finding the Best Cross Plane • 880,
G
957 General Preferences • 128
Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Generate a Key Plan from the Current
Scan Items] • 686 View • 594
Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud [From Generate a key Plan from TZF Scans •
Unfitted Items] • 688 593
Fit a Plane • 879, 956 Generate a Report • 1078, 1585
Fit an Axis • 255 Generate an Inspection • 1075
Fit With a Geometry • 879, 924, 956 Generate Key Plans • 590, 1588
Fitting • 108, 126, 921 Generate Preview Scans • 606
Fix to an Axis • 1197, 1202, 1360, Geometry • 365, 390
1364, 1366 Geometry Creator • 1227
Flip an Edge • 944 Geometry Modifier • 108, 225
Flip the Vertical Axis of a Project • Geometry Renderings • 103
238 Georeferencing • 709
Floor Extraction (Indoor) • 352 Get all Points • 217
Floor Flatness/Floor Levelness • 111, Get Familiar with the Working
1080 Environment • 75
FLS and IQscan Import Results • 167 Get the Remaining Points • 217
FLS Extraction Options • 1693 Getting Started with RealWorks • 71
Focus on Targets • 682 Go to a Shooting Position • 1182
Folder • 1668, 1672 Google Earth (KMZ) Format • 1628
Font Color • 1703 Gray-Scale Intensity With Color
Force Leved • 759 Rendering • 105
Force Unleved • 767 Gridded Data • 183
From a Box • 264 Gridded E57 • 1672
From a Cone (or Eccentric Cone) • Ground Extraction • 347, 1069, 1583
266 Groups and Objects • 219
1732 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Horizontal Slices from a Tunnel


H Inspection • 1044
HASP License Files • 60
I
HD Display Mode Inside a Tool • 541
HD Display Mode Outside a Tool • Identify a Station • 792, 797
542 Image • 392
HD Display Preferences • 125 Image Matching • 1165
Head Always Up • 106 Image Rectification • 109
Hide (or Show) a Thumbnail • 1166 Images • 151
Hide (or Show) the 2D Grid • 93 Images Tab • 221
Hide a Geometry • 391 Images Tree • 214, 242, 513
Hide a Point Cloud • 389 Import a ColorBar • 417
Hide a Toolbar • 116 Import a Feature Code Library • 863,
Hide a TZF Scan • 407 872
Hide a Window • 114 Import a Project File • 191
Hide all Clouds of a Layer • 552 Import an Image into a Project • 197
Hide all Geometries of a Layer • 552 Import as a Topographic Station • 170,
Hide all Items • 391 171
Hide all Station Marker Labels • 398 Import FLS Files • 194
Hide all Station Markers • 397 Import Images • 1156
Hide an Image • 394 Import in an Existing Station • 171
Hide an Inspection Map • 412 Import Limit Boxes • 307, 467
Hide Others • 553 Import Station Registration Parameters
Hide Specific Station Marker(s) • 400 from TZF Files • 776
Hide the Background • 441 Import SteelWorks Catalogs • 1452
Hide the Network Visuals of a station Import the Quick Access Toolbar •
• 403 120
Hide the Network Visuals of all Improve an Image Matching • 1178
Stations • 405 Improvement Program Preferences •
Hide/Display the Input • 1129 130
Hide/Display the Input Data • 895 In the List Window • 219
Hide/Show a ColorBar • 413 In the WorkSpace Window • 219
High Quality Option (Recommended) Include Media in a Publication • 1704
• 1618 Input a Value • 1514, 1521
Horizontal Slices from a Cylinder Input the Height of a Target • 750, 751
Inspection • 1041 Input the Height Value of a Dipping
Horizontal Slices from a Plane Plate • 1510, 1520
Inspection • 1038 Inputs of the Export • 1646
Insert a Feature Point • 867
Index 1733

Insert a Middle Node • 1395 Lasso Selection • 515, 517


Insert a Node • 829 Launch the Import Scans and Register
Inspect a Surface and a Model • 921, Feature • 1690
997 Launch the Limit Box Mode • 453
Inspect a Vertical Tank • 1543 LAZ format • 1636
Inspect Data • 971 Legal Notices • 1719
Inspect the Flatness of a Floor • 1067 License Agreements • 1713
Inspect Twin Surfaces • 978 License Files • 57
Inspect Visually • 792 Licensed Features • 50
Inspection Map • 410 Limit Box Extraction • 106, 293
Install Trimble RealWorks • 51 Limit Box List • 90
Installing Trimble RealWorks • 37 Limit Box Mode • 107
Instrument Leveling • 758 Line • 1407, 1409
Intensity-Based Sampling • 338 List • 83
Intersect • 1399 List Panel • 514
Introduction • 1690 Load Data • 537
Isolate an Area of Interest • 797 Load Existing Rectified Image
IXF Files • 175 Parameters • 1145
Load Keyframes from a File • 1604
J Load Markers • 1172
JobXML, JOB and RAW Files • 153 Locate a HASP License File • 61
Locate an Item in the Project • 382
K Locate Tables • 53, 1587
Keep / Not Keep Displayed Objects Lock a Center • 1193, 1356
Visible When Starting Segmentation Lock a Center Line Radius • 1204,
• 126 1367
Keep Only the Displayed Cloud • Lock a Center on a Line • 1193, 1357
1186, 1436, 1456, 1465, 1487 Lock a Pipe Radius • 1205, 1367
Keep Points Inside/Outside the Fence Lock a Radius • 1193, 1197, 1356,
• 326 1360
Keep Positive Values Only • 416 Lock an Axis • 260
Keep the Floor • 353, 357 Lock on a Plane • 1208, 1210, 1370,
Keep the Ground • 348, 351 1371
Lock on Primitive • 521
L Lock the Ladder Top View in 2D •
LandXML Format • 1643 1469
LAS 1.2 • 1633 Lock the Origin • 259
LAS 1.4 • 1634 Lock the Origin and an Axis • 261
LAS and LAZ Files • 181 Lock to Line (or Axis) • 1208, 1370
LAS Format • 1633 Lock Windows from Undocking • 115
1734 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Logo • 1702 Managing Limit Boxes • 305, 465, 781


Managing the Loading and HD
M Rendering of Points • 535
Magnifier • 109 Manipulate a Label • 899
Magnifier Mode - Clip and Zoom to Manipulate a Limit Box • 296, 455,
Explore an Area of Interest • 109, 785
502 Manipulate a Mesh • 949
Main • 97 Manipulate the Label of a Section •
Make Horizontal • 1353 920
Make Parallel • 1190, 1195, 1201, Map With a Texture • 944
1212, 1354, 1358, 1363, 1365, 1372 Match a Target With • 720
Make Parallel to a Direction • 1218 Match an Image • 1176
Make Parallel to a Plane • 1204, 1210 Match Targets • 721
Make Perpendicular • 1191, 1196, Match With a Known Point • 750, 751
1202, 1213, 1355, 1359, 1364, Matched Station Tab • 669
1366, 1373 Matched Target Tab • 673
Make Perpendicular to a Direction • Matched Targets • 670
1204, 1210 Maximize (or Minimize) a Thumbnail
Make Perpendicular to a Plane • 1219 • 1166
Make Perpendicular to Axis • 1230 Measure a 3D Point • 583
Make Secant to a Box (With Same Measure a Between-Geometry Angle •
Section) • 1225 582
Make Secant to a Cylinder • 1198, Measure a Distance • 561, 562
1302, 1361 Measure a Distance Along a Vertical
Make Secant to a Cylinder With a Axis • 566
Radius Constraint • 1302 Measure a Distance in a Horizontal
Make Secant to a Cylinder With an Plane • 564
Angle Constraint • 1302 Measure a Distance on Screen • 563
Make Secant to a Cylinder With the Measure a Distance on the Shell •
Angle and Radius Constraints • 1539
1303 Measure a Distance to a Fitted Plane •
Make Secant to an Extrusion • 1374 570
Make Vertical • 1353, 1358, 1362, Measure a Fitted Cylinder Diameter •
1371, 1374 572
Making Parallel to a Direction • 1379 Measure a Geometry Slope Angle •
Making Secant to a Box (With Same 581
Section) • 1381 Measure a Horizontal Angle • 578
Manage Layers • 545 Measure a Multi-Point Distance • 575
Manage SteelWorks Catalogs • 1452
Index 1735

Measure a Point-to-Geometry Modify from the Selection List


Distance • 574 Window • 556
Measure a Slope Angle • 580 Modify Manually a Section • 1528
Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance Modify Markers • 1172
(Downward) • 569 Modify Target • 719
Measure a Vertical Clearance Distance Modify the Instrument Height • 731,
(Upward) • 568 734, 761
Measure an Angle • 577 Modify the Layer of an Object • 554
Measure an Orientation • 584 Modify the Path for Input TZF Scan
Measure an Orientation Using Three Files • 275
Points • 586 Modify the Position of a Target • 699,
Measure Distances • 559 700, 701, 707, 740, 741, 742, 748,
Measure Targets • 730, 733, 734 750, 751
Menu Bar • 79, 96 Modify the Position of the Projection
Menus and Toolbars Layout • 76 Plane • 1147
Merge Coplanar Polylines • 111, 374 Modify the Properties of a Target •
Merge Several Point Clouds into One • 697, 701, 703, 708, 738, 742, 744,
363 749
Merge Several Projects in One • 239 Modify the Selected Plane Bounds •
MicroStation (DGN) Format • 1639 1384
Minimize and Restore the Ribbon • 80 Modify the Size of a Plane • 1313
Model Automatically Polylines • 805 Modify the Target Position • 692
Model Groups • 223 Modify, Repair and Remove Trimble
Model Manually Polylines • 807 RealWorks • 55
Model Shapes • 1183 Move a Bounding Polyline • 1397
Model the Extracted Cylinders • 1446 Move a Feature Point • 869
Models Tab • 221 Move a Geometry Along a User
Models Tree • 211, 240, 513 Defined Vector • 1349
Modify a Geometry • 1313 Move a Geometry Using a 2-Point
Modify a Position • 1326 Defined Vector • 1350
Modify a Projection Plane • 1108 Move a Node • 829, 1394
Modify a Projection Plane's Size • Move a Point (or Line) • 1173
1146 Move a Polyline • 832
Modify a Zone of Interest • 1151 Move a Thumbnail • 1167
Modify an Ortho-Image • 1157 Move a Toolbar • 117
Modify Built Elements • 849 Move an Entity by Picking an Entity •
Modify Feature Points • 867 1335
Modify from the Models Tree • 554 Move an Ortho-Image • 1156, 1157
Modify from the Property Window • Move in the Ortho-Image Plane by
555 Picking • 1157, 1163
1736 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Move Mesh • 111 Note - Scale Factor • 158


Move Perpendicular to the Ortho- Note - Scale Factor - Ellipsoid Model
Image • 1157, 1158 • 158
Move Perpendicular to the Ortho- Note - Scale Factor - Geoid/Datum
Image by Picking • 1157, 1159 Model • 159
Move the Camera in a Direction • 491 Note - Switch from Ground to Grid •
Move the Circular Path Along a 160
Direction • 1597
Move the Circular Path in a Plane •
O
1598 Oil, Gas & Chemical License Files •
Move the Path Along a Direction • 57
1614 One or more Images, and no Scans •
Move the Path in a Plane • 1615 289
Move the Profile • 857 Open a FLS Format File • 165
Move the Quick Access Toolbar • 118 Open a Project File • 189
Multiple Scans • 141 Open an Image • 395
Multi-Select • 810 Open an Inspection Map • 411
Open an IQscan Format File • 166
N
Open AutoCAD • 201, 202
Name-Based Network Adjustment • Open the Tool • 251, 283, 294, 322,
755, 756 334, 358, 360, 560, 598, 607, 627,
Navigate Data • 468 635, 648, 655, 678, 710, 728, 781,
Navigate Through the Sections • 795, 802, 817, 843, 846, 853, 862, 875,
1032 889, 900, 922, 927, 935, 953, 973,
Navigate Under Permanent 979, 998, 1018, 1068, 1080, 1087,
Constraints • 486 1091, 1096, 1103, 1122, 1134,
Navigate Under Temporary 1165, 1184, 1228, 1314, 1383,1400,
Constraints • 482 1416, 1434, 1454, 1463, 1476,
Navigate Without Constraints • 472 1485, 1501, 1509, 1519, 1526,
Navigation Constraint Tools • 95 1532, 1538, 1544, 1583, 1593
Navigation Preferences • 127 Open Trimble Scan Explorer • 198
Network Adjustment • 755 Open Trimble SketchUp • 199
No Filtering • 440 Open your First Project • 74
No Images, and no Scans • 289 Options • 605
No Images, and Some Scans • 289 Organization of Data • 207
No Shading • 438 Orientation • 635
Non-Gridded Data • 185 Orientation Measurements • 583
Normal Shading • 438, 442 Ortho-Projection • 110
Not Participate in TSIP • 131 Outline • 443
Index 1737

Output Folder • 1702 Perform a 2D-Distance Measurement •


Outputs of the Export • 1647 1154
Overwrite an Existing Texture • 947 Perform a Tank-Specific Measurement
• 1537
P Performing Basic Operations • 133
Pan a Limit Box • 299, 458, 788 Pick a Color • 1053
Pan a Mesh • 950 Pick a Feature Point • 866
Pan a Polyline • 833 Pick a Height • 1514, 1522
Pan Along a Direction • 300, 459, 789 Pick a Pair of Lines • 1171
Pan Along a Horizontal Axis Pick a Pair of Points • 1169
Constraint • 487 Pick a Plane and a Segment • 1271,
Pan Along a Vertical Axis Constraint • 1288
488 Pick a Plane and Select Another
Pan Along its Own Axes • 1329 Object • 1344
Pan Along the Home Frame Axes • Pick a Plane, and then Pan • 1341
1327 Pick a Point • 1268, 1285
Pan Along the Horizontal Direction Pick a Point from Other Geometry,
Constraint • 484 then Rotate • 1338
Pan Along the Vertical Direction Pick a Radial Entity • 1296, 1297
Constraint • 484 Pick a Triangle • 938
Pan in a Direction • 478 Pick a Vertex • 937
Pan in a Plane • 301, 460, 790 Pick an Axial Entity • 1292
Pan in the Plane of the Ortho-Image • Pick an Axial Geometry • 1277
1157, 1160 Pick an Axis and a Point • 1296, 1299
Pan the Moving Cloud • 619 Pick an Axis from an Object • 983
Pan the Profile • 859 Pick an Axis From an Object • 931
Pan With a 2D Mouse • 478 Pick an Axis from Other Geometry,
Pan With a 3D Mouse • 479 then Pan • 1336
Pan With a Gesture on a Touchscreen Pick an Axis from Other Geometry,
• 479 then Rotate • 1340
Partial Deselect • 811 Pick an Edge • 937
Partial Reselection Mode • 812 Pick an Element • 936
Participate in TSIP • 130 Pick an Entity With a Direction • 1251
Pass an Axis Through a Point • 1196, Pick an Entity with Center • 1272,
1213, 1359, 1373 1289
Pass Through a Point • 1191, 1355, Pick an Entity with Direction • 1280
1357 Pick an Entity With Direction • 1230
Pass Through an Axis • 1355 Pick an Object Local Frame • 877, 957
Path Mode • 1609 Pick and Pan a Plane • 1342
PDMS Macro Format • 1632 Pick and Select a Plane • 1346
1738 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Pick Data • 515, 518 Pick Welds • 1551


Pick Face of Curb Points • 529 Picking a plane and selecting another
Pick Four Screen Points • 1254 object. • 1348
Pick Gutter Points • 531 Picking Parameters • 105
Pick in the 2D Constraint Mode • 521 Plane • 1189, 1352, 1403, 1408
Pick in the 3D Constraint Mode • 519 Plane Bounding • 1382
Pick in the Standard Mode • 518 Plane Parallel to the Screen View •
Pick Markers • 1168 959
Pick One Point • 695, 699, 702, 704, Plane Shape • 1007
736, 740, 743, 745 Plane With Circular Torus • 1404
Pick Points • 253, 1021 Plane With Extruded Entity • 1404
Pick the Bottom Left Corner of a Box Plane With Sphere • 1405
• 1253 Plane-Based Projection • 981, 999
Pick the First Pair of Points • 614 Point Cloud • 321, 387
Pick the Height of a Dipping Plate • Point Measurement • 583
1511, 1520 Pointools Format • 1640
Pick the Highest Cloud Point • 523 Points • 149
Pick the Local Frame of an Object • Polygonal Selection • 515, 516
256 Polyline Drawing • 111
Pick the Low and High Elevations • Post-Process TZF Scans • 270
892 Preview a 3D Inspection Cloud • 1088
Pick the Lowest Cloud Point • 525 Preview a Mesh • 933
Pick the Origin • 643 Preview a Multiple Slice • 885
Pick the Second Pair of Points • 615 Preview a Rectified Image • 1153
Pick the Start and End Positions • 907, Preview a Single Ortho-Image • 1131
1499 Preview a Single Slice • 884
Pick the Third Pair of Points • 616 Preview a Video • 1619
Pick Three Planes • 1269, 1286 Preview a Volume • 962
Pick Three Points • 258, 844, 878, Preview an Image Matching • 1177
958, 1105, 1231, 1242, 1244 Preview an Inspection • 989, 1005
Pick Two Axial Entities • 1274 Preview an Ortho-Image • 1119
Pick Two Planes • 1276, 1294 Preview BSF Format File • 1668
Pick Two Points • 878, 958, 1231, Preview the Contours • 894
1240, 1246, 1275, 1293 Preview the Profile and the Cross-
Pick Two Points of a Diameter • 1296, Sections • 914
1297 Preview the Results • 1516, 1523
Pick Two Points of a Radius • 1296, Print a Plot • 1037
1298 Print a Profile (or Cross-Sections) •
Pick Two Screen Points • 1230 916
Index 1739

Print a Rectified Image • 1154 Rectangular Selection • 515, 516


Print an Inspection Map • 994, 1014 Rectangular Torus • 1220, 1324, 1375,
Print an Ortho-Image • 1120, 1133 1407, 1409
Print Inspection Maps • 1067 Redo an Operation • 205
Print Preference • 130 Reduce the Size of the Data • 1708
Process Data • 538 Reference Station • 600
Producing Media Files • 1591 Refine a Measurement • 588
Profile Matcher • 852 Refine a Mesh • 941
Project • 237 Refine Automatically the Registration
Project a 3D Point on a Plane • 1273, • 612, 617
1290 Refine Interactively the Registration •
Project a Box onto a Plane • 1252, 612, 618
1380 Refine Registration Using Scans • 626
Project an Image Matching • 1180 Refine the Registration • 631
Project Cloud • 215 Re-Fit a Geometry to Point Cloud
Project Cloud Layer • 216 [From Fitted Items] • 690
Project Layers • 244 Re-Fit a Target • 750, 751
Project Tree • 209 Refuse to Convert to the TZF Format •
Projects With TZF Scan Files Inside 144
the RWI Folder • 249 Register Clouds Automatically
Projects With TZF Scan Files Outside (Guess) • 612
the RWI Folder • 248 Register Clouds by Picking Points •
Property • 85 612, 613
PTS • 1673 Register Stations • 601
PTS Files • 187 Register Stations With Imported RMX
PTS Format • 1640 Files • 779
PTX • 1673 Register the Stations • 653
PTX Files • 186 Register Trimble RealWorks Oil, Gas
Publish a Project • 1700 & Chemical License File • 58
Registered Stations • 670
Q Registration Details • 667
Quality Assurance Group • 780 Registration Report • 603
Quick Mode • 1595 Registration Visual Check • 606, 781
Quick Processing Mode • 1619 Regular Cone • 1200, 1362
Remove a Known Point • 766
R Remove a Limit Box • 306, 466
Rainfall • 1585, 1586 Remove a Link • 1707
Random Sampling • 337 Remove a Media File • 1705
RealWorks Files • 136 Remove an Existing Texture • 947
Record Limit Boxes • 305, 464 Remove Peaks from a Mesh • 941
1740 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Remove Points • 282 Reverse Triangles • 942


Remove Points from TZF Scans • 279 Ribbon • 79
Remove SteelWorks Catalog List • Ribbon Layout • 76, 77
1453 RIEGL Scan Project Files • 176
Remove the Floor • 353, 356 Roadmark Edge Pickings • 532
Remove the Ground • 348, 350 Rotate 90° Around Vertical Axis •
Remove Undesirable Posts • 1499, 1114
1500 Rotate a Geometry • 1331
Remove Welds • 1553 Rotate a Limit Box • 302, 461, 791
Rename a Feature Code Library • 864, Rotate a Mesh • 951
872 Rotate a Polyline • 835
Rename a Layer • 547, 548 Rotate Around a Horizontal Axis
Rename a Limit Box • 306, 465 Constraint • 488
Rename a Target • 724 Rotate Around a Vertical Axis
Render Data • 425 Constraint • 489
Render Geometries • 445 Rotate Around an Axis • 262
Render Point Clouds • 426 Rotate Around the Center of the
Render Point Clouds With Gray-Scale Screen • 472
Intensity With Color • 436, 439 Rotate Around the Horizontal
Reorder Points (or Lines) • 1175 Direction Constraint • 483
Report Content • 1576, 1577 Rotate Around the Position of a
Report the Volume and Surface Picked Point • 475
Information • 1059 Rotate Around the Vertical Direction
Re-Project TZF Scans • 278 Constraint • 483
Resection • 729, 733 Rotate Counterclockwise 90° • 642,
Reset all Points (or Lines) • 1175 1116, 1117
Resize a Limit Box • 297, 456, 786 Rotate in the Plane of the Ortho-Image
Resize a Path • 1428 • 1157, 1162
Resize a Zone of Interest • 1117 Rotate the Moving Cloud • 620
Resize the Circular Path • 1599 Rotate the Profile • 858
Restore the Commands to the Default Rotate With a 2D Mouse • 473, 476,
Values • 121 496
Reverse a Distance Measurement • Rotate With a 3D Mouse • 474, 477,
1541 496
Reverse the Path Direction • 1431, Rotate With a Gesture • 475
1614 Rotate With Constraint Around an
Reverse the Profile • 861 Axis Perpendicular to the Screen •
Reverse the Start and End Positions • 485, 490
907 Rotate With Gesture • 478
Index 1741

Rotate With Gestures • 496 Segment • 1211, 1320, 1371


Rotate Within a Station • 496 Segment Point Clouds • 321
Segmentation • 107
S Select • 1020, 1026, 1049, 1059, 1064
Sample Point Clouds • 333, 610, 1069, Select a Catalog File • 1458
1186, 1436, 1456, 1465, 1487 Select a Frame Axis • 877, 930, 956
Sample the Scan Data • 314 Select a Group of Segments • 909
Sampling by Step • 1671 Select a Known Point from a List •
Save a Measurement • 589 732, 752
Save a Project • 203 Select a Ladder Model • 1466
Save a Project As • 203 Select a Method • 901
Save a Volume in a Report • 965 Select a Model • 1490
Save a Volume in the Database • 969 Select a Model for Inspection • 1097
Save in RTF Format • 605 Select a Navigation Path Mode • 1594
Save Markers • 1176 Select a New Cloud Data • 1185,
Save Projects • 203 1435, 1455, 1464, 1486
Save the 2D Inspection Result • 1100 Select a Path • 902, 911, 1489, 1610
Save the Adjustment Result • 675 Select a Polyline • 827, 1123, 1217
Save the Cutting Result(s) • 888 Select a Projection Mode • 928
Save the Inspection • 997, 1016 Select a Projection Plane • 1132
Save the Inspection Result • 1079 Select a Reference • 1459
Save the Inspection Results • 1582 Select a Reference Frame • 252
Save the Merged Project • 246 Select a Reference Station • 648, 652,
Save the Registration Result • 612, 657
624 Select a Section to Edit • 1527
Save the Results • 1025 Select a Stair Model • 1502
Saving Keyframes to a File • 1605 Select a Station • 680, 729
Saving Results • 816 Select a Station for Georeferencing •
Scale a Plot • 1037 711
Scale the Profile • 860 Select a Subset of Stations for the
Scale the Profile and the Cross- Refinement • 629
Sections • 917 Select a Table • 1458
Scan • 293 Select a Type of Setup • 729
Scan Folder Name • 1668 Select a TZF Scan • 681
Scan-Based Registration Group • 597 Select an Element • 936
Scan-Based Sampling • 340 Select an Existing Polyline for
Scans • 148 Bounding • 1385
Scans Tab • 220 Select an Existing Profile • 847
Scans Tree • 210, 239, 513 Select an Image • 1166
See the Inside • 442
1742 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Select an Initial Cylinder for Tracking Set a Slider to a Position by Drag and
• 1440 Drop • 1028
Select Data • 87, 513 Set a Slider to a Position by Picking •
Select Items • 809 1029
Select Items from a Section • 1529 Set a Thickness • 857, 913, 1097
Select Markers • 1167 Set a Tolerance • 913
Select No Projection • 928, 932 Set a TZF Scan as a Main Scan • 408
Select Points to Remove • 281 Set an Image Resolution • 1152
Select Scan Data Files • 1690 Set as Home UCS • 268
Select Stations for Matching Targets • Set Coordinates • 876
722 Set From Frame • 983
Select Targets for Matching from Set Over a Known Point • 731, 763
Different Stations • 721 Set Point Cloud Extraction Options •
Select the Center Point of a Limit Box 1694
• 296, 455 Set Scan Data Registration Options •
Select the Contents of a Specific Layer 1695
• 550 Set the Cloud Inside the Limit Box as
Select Two Clouds • 608 a Working Cloud • 330, 452
Selecting a Polyline • 1426 Set the Corners • 1106
Selecting and Picking Data • 511 Set the Head Always Up Option • 470
Selection List • 87 Set the Horizontal Orientation of a
Send an Entity to SketchUp • 593, Scene • 640
1588 Set the Interval Parameter • 908
Send to AutoCAD • 202 Set the Low and High Elevation
Set (or Edit) the Parameters • 1107 Values • 891
Set a Density • 1129 Set the Orientation and Numbering
Set a Direction • 1612 Conventions • 1550, 1565
Set a Display Mode • 870 Set the Parallel Mode • 501
Set a Duration • 1616 Set the Perspective Mode • 500
Set a Group as a Model Group • 223 Set the Preferences • 123
Set a Hoop as Active • 1479 Set the Section Size • 848
Set a Model Group as a Non Model Set the Unit of Measurement for
Group • 223 Length • 122, 129
Set a Navigation Mode • 471 Set the Vertical Orientation of a Scene
Set a Position • 1111 • 637
Set a Projection Mode • 500 Shift a Project • 238
Set a Resolution • 1118, 1129 Shift a Station • 1555
Set a Slider Position by Defining Shift a Weld • 1557
Values • 1030
Index 1743

Shortcut Keys in RealWorks • 103, Swap a Local License for a Network


1457 License and Vice Versa • 60
Show the Quick Access Toolbar Swap the Axes • 1038
Below/Above the Ribbon • 120 Switch from Menus and Toolbars to
SIMA ASCII Files • 172 Ribbon, and Vice Versa • 77
Simplify the Modeled Polyline • 815 Switch from one Manipulation Mode
Smooth a Mesh • 941 to Another • 1335
Smooth Cells • 969 Switch from one Mode of
Smooth the Extracted Cylinders • Manipulation to Another • 303, 462,
1445 792
Smooth the Path • 1614 Switch to an Existing ColorBar • 417
Solids for AutoCAD • 1648 Switch to Other Side • 1415
Some Images, and Some Scans • 290 Switch to the Cut/Fill ColorBar • 423
Spatial Sampling • 336, 1663 Switch to the Default ColorBar • 424
Specify Coordinates • 252 System Requirements • 39
Sphere • 1192, 1315, 1356, 1403, 1408
Split a Rectified Image • 1154
T
Split an Ortho-Image • 1120 Take the Axis of an Axial Geometry
Standard Selection Mode • 810 as Axis • 257
Standard Views • 104 Tank Creation • 109
Start and End Positions • 905 Tank Secondary Containment • 1583
Start Page • 78, 81 Tank Setup • 109, 1531
Start Tracking Cylinders • 1442 Target Analyzer • 677
Start Trimble RealWorks • 73 Target-Based Registration • 654, 720,
Station • 396 755
Station Maker List • 88 Target-Based Registration Group •
Station Markers and Station Marker 647
Labels • 104 Targets Tab • 222
Station Setup • 727, 729, 730 Targets Tree • 213, 241, 514
Station-Based • 494 TDX Files • 188
Stations • 147 TDX Format • 1646
SteelWorks Creator • 109, 1454 The • 901, 909
Step-by-Step Mode • 1600 The License File is Close to the
Storage Tank Application • 53 Expiration Date • 67
Store the Area as a Limit Box • 798 The License File is Expired • 68
Sub-Tools • 1278 Three Sub-View Configuration • 92
Supported Data Formats • 135 Tilt (or Rotate) • 490
Survey Workflow Group • 727 Title • 1701
Surveying Network ASCII Files • 169 Toolbar/Ribbon • 109
Toolbars • 79, 96, 116
1744 Trimble RealWorks ® 11.0 User's Guide

Tools and Commands • 95 Unmatched Station Tab • 671


Tools in the Modeling Module • 102 Unmatched Target Tab • 674
Tools in the OfficeSurvey Module • Unmatched Targets • 670, 671
101 Unregistered Stations • 671
Tools in the Plant Module • 1433 Update a Multi-User License • 66
Tools in the Production Module • 799 Update the Network • 708
Tools in the Registration Module • Update Trimble RealWorks • 54
100, 595 Upgrade a Single-User License • 62
Tools in the Storage Tank Module • Use a Multi-User License • 63
1508 Use a Single-User License • 62
Tools in the Surfaces Module • 921 Use Constraints • 1188
Tools Preferences • 125 Use the Cartesian Coordinates System
Top Align all Planes • 1126 • 522
Topography-Based Sampling • 345 Use the Current Camera View • 1106
Touchscreen • 468, 469 Use the Current View as 3D Plane •
Transformations Group • 775 1460
Trimble 3D Scanning Files • 135 Use the Manipulator • 1332
Trimble RealWorks • 39 Use the Polar Coordinates System •
Trimble RealWorks Plant Tables • 52 522
Trimble Scan Explorer • 40 Use the Surface Values • 1057
Trimble Scan Explorer - Web Viewer Use the Width of the Segment • 912
• 40 User Defined • 1629
Trimble Survey Project Files • 146 User Interface • 76
Trimble TX5 and Other FLS Files • UTM to WGS84 Latitude and
164 Longitude • 1631
Tunnel Shape • 1011
Tunnel-Based Projection • 985, 1000
V
Two Sub-View Configuration • 92 Validate a 3D Direction • 1285
TZF Files • 139 Validate a 3D Point • 1291
TZF Scan • 269, 406 Validate a Plane • 1313
TZS Files • 144 Validate an 3D Axis • 1295
Validate the Bounds • 1399
U
Vertical Slices from a Cylinder
Undo an Operation • 204 Inspection • 1042
Undock a Window • 114 Vertical Slices from a Plane Inspection
Units • 1585, 1586 • 1039
Units Preferences • 122, 129, 974, Vertical Slices from a Tunnel
1682, 1689 Inspection • 1044
Un-match a Target • 723 Vertical Toolbar • 80
Index 1745

View a Limit Box From Different Working with Classification Layers •


Sides • 792, 794 209, 543
View a Limit Box from one of its WorkSpace • 82
Sides • 305, 464 WorkSpace Window • 87, 513
View a Published Project • 1711
View Alignment • 99
Z
View from a Projection Plane' Side • Z+F Extraction Options • 1693
1113, 1133 Z+F Import Filters • 179
View Inwards/Outwards • 1596 Z+F Scan Files • 178
View Manager • 92, 105 Zoom Extents • 509
View Only This • 392 Zoom In / Zoom Out • 479, 508
View the 2D Inspection Result • 1098 Zoom on Data • 508
View the Difference Plot • 1035 Zoom on Selection • 510
View the Published Data • 1709 Zoom With a 2D Mouse • 480, 497,
View the Registration Report • 633 509
Viewer Preferences • 124 Zoom With a 3D Mouse • 480, 497,
Visualize a TZF Scan Preview • 408 509
Visualize Data • 387 Zoom With Gestures • 481, 510
Visualize the Extracted Targets Within Zoom Within a Station • 496
a TZF Scan Preview • 409
W
Walk Through a Scene (or Objects) •
493
Walkthrough • 490
Welcome • 13
What's New in Trimble RealWorks •
17
When all Selected Stations are
Registered • 663
When all Stations are not Registered •
665
When Some of the Selected Stations
are Registered • 664
Windows • 80, 102, 112
With Wizard • 162
Without Wizard • 163
Work with Images • 1101
Work with Line Tools • 801
Working Frame • 103

You might also like